B-64603en-1 - 01 (v3) - Vol2 - 0if Connection Manual (Function)

FANUC Series 0+-MODEL F
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)

(Volume 2 of 3)
B-64603EN-1/01
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law”. The export of from Japan subject to an export license by the
government of Japan. Other models in this manual may also be subject to export controls.
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of
the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be
controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government.
Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice.
The products in this manual are manufactured under strict quality control. However, when
using any of the products in a facility in which a serious accident or loss is predicted due to
a failure of the product, install a safety device.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.
B-64603EN-1/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units.
It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines
equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this section assume this configuration). Note that some
precautions are related only to specific functions, and thus may not be applicable to certain CNC units.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual
supplied by the machine tool builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program to
control the operation of the machine, the operator must become fully familiar with the contents of this
manual and relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
CONTENTS
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE.........................................................................s-1

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............................................................................................s-2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING .......................................................s-3
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING ................................................................s-5
WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS..........................................................................................s-7
WARNINGS RELATED TO EDIT SCREENS FOR TOUCH PANEL ...................................................s-7
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT ...............................................s-8
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE .........................................................................s-9
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine.
Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly
before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a
danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the
approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the
approved procedure is not observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and
Caution.
• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64603EN-1/01
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNING
1 Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the
machine. Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating
correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate
override, or machine lock function or by operating the machine with neither a tool
nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the correct operation of the machine
may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to
the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
2 Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or
machine itself, or injury to the user.
3 Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation.
Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate.
The appropriate feedrate varies with the intended operation. Refer to the manual
provided with the machine to determine the maximum allowable feedrate.
If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave unexpectedly,
possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
4 When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and
amount of compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine
machine itself, or injury to the user.
5 The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory-set. Usually, there is not need
to change them. When, however, there is not alternative other than to change a
parameter, ensure that you fully understand the function of the parameter before
making any change.
Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself,
or injury to the user.
CAUTION
1 Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on the
MDI unit until the position display or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit.
Some of the keys on the MDI unit are dedicated to maintenance or other special
operations. Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in other than its
normal state. Starting the machine in this state may cause it to behave
unexpectedly.
2 The OPERATOR’S MANUAL and programming manual supplied with a CNC
unit provide an overall description of the machine's functions, including any
optional functions. Note that the optional functions will vary from one machine
model to another. Therefore, some functions described in the manuals may not
actually be available for a particular model. Check the specification of the
machine if in doubt.
3 Some functions may have been implemented at the request of the machine-tool
builder. When using such functions, refer to the manual supplied by the
machine-tool builder for details of their use and any related cautions.
s-2 -
CAUTION
4 The liquid-crystal display is manufactured with very precise fabrication
technology. Some pixels may not be turned on or may remain on. This
phenomenon is a common attribute of LCDs and is not a defect.
NOTE
1 Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in non-volatile memory in
the CNC unit. Usually, they are retained even if the power is turned off.
Such data may be deleted inadvertently, however, or it may prove necessary to
delete all data from non-volatile memory as part of error recovery.
To guard against the occurrence of the above, and assure quick restoration of
deleted data, backup all vital data, and keep the backup copy in a safe place.
2 The number of times to write machining programs to the non-volatile memory is
limited.
You must use "High-speed program management" when registration and the
deletion of the machining programs are frequently repeated in such case that the
machining programs are automatically downloaded from a personal computer at
each machining.
In "High-speed program management", the program is not saved to the
non-volatile memory at registration, modification, or deletion of programs.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING

This section covers the major safety precautions related to programming. Before attempting to perform
programming, read the supplied OPERATOR’S MANUAL carefully such that you are fully familiar with
their contents.
WARNING
1 Coordinate system setting
If a coordinate system is established incorrectly, the machine may behave
unexpectedly as a result of the program issuing an otherwise valid move
command. Such an unexpected operation may damage the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
2 Positioning by nonlinear interpolation
When performing positioning by nonlinear interpolation (positioning by nonlinear
movement between the start and end points), the tool path must be carefully
confirmed before performing programming. Positioning involves rapid traverse. If
the tool collides with the workpiece, it may damage the tool, the machine itself,
the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
3 Function involving a rotation axis
When programming polar coordinate interpolation or normal-direction
(perpendicular) control, pay careful attention to the speed of the rotation axis.
Incorrect programming may result in the rotation axis speed becoming
excessively high, such that centrifugal force causes the chuck to lose its grip on
the workpiece if the latter is not mounted securely. Such mishap is likely to
damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
s-3
WARNING
4 Inch/metric conversion
Switching between inch and metric inputs does not convert the measurement
units of data such as the workpiece origin offset, parameter, and current
position. Before starting the machine, therefore, determine which measurement
units are being used. Attempting to perform an operation with invalid data
specified may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury
to the user.
5 Constant surface speed control
When an axis subject to constant surface speed control approaches the origin of
the workpiece coordinate system, the spindle speed may become excessively
high. Therefore, it is necessary to specify a maximum allowable speed.
Specifying the maximum allowable speed incorrectly may damage the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
6 Stroke check
After switching on the power, perform a manual reference position return as
required. Stroke check is not possible before manual reference position return is
performed. Note that when stroke check is disabled, an alarm is not issued even
if a stroke limit is exceeded, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
7 Interference check for each path (T series)
An interference check for each path is performed based on the tool data
specified during automatic operation. If the tool specification does not match the
tool actually being used, the interference check cannot be made correctly,
possibly damaging the tool or the machine itself, or causing injury to the user.
After switching on the power, or after selecting a tool post manually, always start
automatic operation and specify the tool number of the tool to be used.
8 Same address command in same block
The G code or M code including the same address cannot be commanded on
the same block. If you use the same address, it may result in the machine
machine itself, or injury to the user. Command on separate block.（About
address P, refer to the appendix “List of functions include address P in the
program command”）
CAUTION
1 Absolute/incremental mode
If a program created with absolute values is run in incremental mode, or vice
versa, the machine may behave unexpectedly.
2 Plane selection
If an incorrect plane is specified for circular interpolation, helical interpolation, or
a canned cycle, the machine may behave unexpectedly. Refer to the
descriptions of the respective functions for details.
3 Torque limit skip
Before attempting a torque limit skip, apply the torque limit. If a torque limit skip
is specified without the torque limit actually being applied, a move command will
be executed without performing a skip.
s-4 -
CAUTION
4 Programmable mirror image
Note that programmed operations vary considerably when a programmable
mirror image is enabled.
5 Compensation function
If a command based on the machine coordinate system or a reference position
return command is issued in compensation function mode, compensation is
temporarily canceled, resulting in the unexpected behavior of the machine.
Before issuing any of the above commands, therefore, always cancel
compensation function mode.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING

This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of machine tools. Before attempting to
operate your machine, read the supplied OPERATOR’S MANUAL carefully, such that you are fully
familiar with their contents.
WARNING
1 Manual operation
When operating the machine manually, determine the current position of the tool
and workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and feedrate have
been specified correctly. Incorrect operation of the machine may damage the
tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.
2 Manual reference position return
After switching on the power, perform manual reference position return as
required.
If the machine is operated without first performing manual reference position
return, it may behave unexpectedly. Stroke check is not possible before manual
reference position return is performed.
An unexpected operation of the machine may damage the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
3 Manual numeric command
When issuing a manual numeric command, determine the current position of the
tool and workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and command
have been specified correctly, and that the entered values are valid.
Attempting to operate the machine with an invalid command specified may
damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the
operator.
4 Manual handle feed
In manual handle feed, rotating the handle with a large scale factor, such as 100,
applied causes the tool and table to move rapidly. Careless handling may
damage the tool and/or machine, or cause injury to the user.
5 Disabled override
If override is disabled (according to the specification in a macro variable) during
threading, rigid tapping, or other tapping, the speed cannot be predicted,
possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury
to the operator.
s-5
WARNING
6 Origin/preset operation
Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation when the machine is
operating under the control of a program. Otherwise, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the tool, or causing
injury to the user.
7 Workpiece coordinate system shift
Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may shift the workpiece
coordinate system. Before attempting to operate the machine under the control
of a program, confirm the coordinate system carefully.
If the machine is operated under the control of a program without making
allowances for any shift in the workpiece coordinate system, the machine may
behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.
8 Software operator's panel and menu switches
Using the software operator's panel and menu switches, in combination with the
MDI unit, it is possible to specify operations not supported by the machine
operator's panel, such as mode change, override value change, and jog feed
commands.
Note, however, that if the MDI unit keys are operated inadvertently, the machine
may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
9 RESET key
Pressing the RESET key stops the currently running program. As a result, the
servo axes are stopped. However, the RESET key may fail to function for
reasons such as an MDI unit problem. So, when the motors must be stopped,
use the emergency stop button instead of the RESET key to ensure security.
CAUTION
1 Manual intervention
If manual intervention is performed during programmed operation of the
machine, the tool path may vary when the machine is restarted. Before restarting
the machine after manual intervention, therefore, confirm the settings of the
manual absolute switches, parameters, and absolute/incremental command
mode.
2 Feed hold, override, and single block
The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block functions can be disabled
using custom macro system variable #3004. Be careful when operating the
machine in this case.
3 Dry run
Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation of the machine. During a dry
run, the machine operates at dry run speed, which differs from the
corresponding programmed feedrate. Note that the dry run speed may
sometimes be higher than the programmed feed rate.
s-6 -
CAUTION
4 Cutter and tool nose radius compensation in MDI mode
Pay careful attention to a tool path specified by a command in MDI mode,
because cutter or tool nose radius compensation is not applied. When a
command is entered from the MDI to interrupt in automatic operation in cutter or
tool nose radius compensation mode, pay particular attention to the tool path
when automatic operation is subsequently resumed. Refer to the descriptions of
the corresponding functions for details.
5 Program editing
If the machine is stopped, after which the machining program is edited
(modification, insertion, or deletion), the machine may behave unexpectedly if
machining is resumed under the control of that program. Basically, do not
modify, insert, or delete commands from a machining program while it is in use.
WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS

WARNING
1 When machining a workpiece for the first time after modifying a parameter, close
the machine cover. Never use the automatic operation function immediately after
such a modification. Instead, confirm normal machine operation by using
functions such as the single block function, feedrate override function, and
machine lock function, or by operating the machine without mounting a tool and
workpiece. If the machine is used before confirming that it operates normally, the
machine may move unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or workpiece,
and presenting a risk of injury.
2 The CNC and PMC parameters are set to their optimal values, so that those
parameters usually need not be modified. When a parameter must be modified
for some reason, ensure that you fully understand the function of that parameter
before attempting to modify it. If a parameter is set incorrectly, the machine may
move unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or workpiece, and
presenting a risk of injury.
WARNINGS RELATED TO EDIT SCREENS FOR TOUCH PANEL

WARNING
FANUC’s touch panel is an analog resistive film type. When two or more points
are pressed at the same time, there is a possibility that it behaves as if the
center of these points was pressed, and this wrong output or malfunction may
cause an accident. Do not create a virtual machine operator’s panel screens on
which two or more points are pressed at the same time for touch panel
operation.
On the virtual machine operator panel screen, never support safety-related

operations that may lose human life or may cause serious damage, or real-time
operations such as emergency stop, program start, program stop, axis
movements, etc. If there is a failure in the CNC, peripheral units, or cable,
wrong outputs or malfunctions may cause an accident. In addition, real-time
operation is not guaranteed on the touch panel screen.
s-7
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT

WARNING
Be careful enough for the following warnings when you develop two or more
applications or use networks.
If you neglect them, there is a danger of the user being injured or there is a danger
of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged.
1 Be careful enough if you write an identical NC data, an identical PMC data or a

series of related data set by two or more above applications including network
functions. Because they are executed based on each individual cycles (in other
words, asynchronous cycles), there is a possibility that the data will be written in
an unexpected order.
Therefore, do NOT write above data in the following cases.
- Applications and network functions
- Two or more applications
- Two or more network functions
Data, applications and network functions of interest are listed in below. However,
all may not be listed completely because new features will be added in the
future.
2 Be careful enough that you must prevent PMC signals in the same byte from
being written by the following two or more applications including network
functions. While an application reads and writes one byte of PMC signals, other
applications may write the same byte.
3 Be careful enough if you process a PMC signal set that is related to a NC
function by using the following two or more applications including network
functions. Because they are executed based on each individual cycles (in other
words, asynchronous cycles), there is a possibility that the NC may receive the
PMC signal set in an unexpected order.
s-8 -
WARNING
4 Generally, when multi-byte data are read or written at once among the following
two or more applications including network functions, the coherency of the read
multi-byte data (in other words, reading all latest data at once) is not guaranteed.
To ensure the coherency of the multi-byte data, prepare flags to notify the
completion of reading or writing process that is separated from the entity of the
data and make the handshaking process to access the data by using the flags.
Data List Table

Category Data
Parameter, Tool compensation value and related data,
Work zero offset value and related data,
Workpiece coordinate system shift value and related data,
Macro variable, P-CODE variable, Program and related data,
General data for NC
Tool management function data, Tool life management data,
Error compensation related data ,
Overtravel check (Interference check) related data ,
Software operator’s panel related data
PMC data PMC signal, PMC parameter
Other data Parameters for Data Server, Parameters for network setting
List Table of Applications and Network Functions

Category Functions
PMC Ladder, Macro Executor, C Language Executor, FANUC PICTURE,
Applications
FOCAS2
FL-net, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, Modbus/TCP, PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet,
Network functions
CC-Link
5 CNC has functions that read or write PMC signals in other than the G/F address.
Be careful enough if the above mentioned applications and network read or write
PMC signals used by these functions. When reading or writing the same PMC
signal, applications or CNC functions may work in an unexpected manner.
As for the CNC functions of interest, refer to the connection manual (Function)
(B-64603EN-1) "Appendix B. List of Functions Using PMC Signals Other Than
G/F Address".
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

WARNING
1 Memory backup battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine
(CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this
work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only those personnel
who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this
work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous
electric shock hazard.
s-9
NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory, because it must
retain data such as programs, offsets, and parameters even while external
power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the
machine operator's panel or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a
week. Otherwise, the contents of the CNC's memory will be lost.
Refer to the Section “Method of replacing battery” in the OPERATOR’S
MANUAL (Common to T/M series) for details of the battery replacement
procedure.
WARNING
2 Absolute pulse coder battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine
(CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this
work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only those personnel
who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this
work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous
NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the
machine operator's panel or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a
week. Otherwise, the absolute position data held by the pulse coder will be lost.
Refer to the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series Maintenance Manual for details
of the battery replacement procedure.
WARNING
3 Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the
cause of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the
high-voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered high-voltage circuit presents an extremely dangerous
s-10 -
WARNING
4 When using the controller unit, display unit, MDI unit, or machine operator's
panel, prevent these units from directly exposing to chips or coolants. Even if
direct exposure to coolants is prevented, coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at
a high activation level, oil-free synthetic-type coolants, or water-soluble coolants
at a high alkali level particularly have large effects on the control unit and
peripheral units, possibly causing the following failures.
• Coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at a high activation level
Some coolants containing sulfur or chlorine are at an extremely high activity
level. If such a coolant adheres to the CNC or peripheral units, it reacts
chemically with a material, such as resin, of equipment, possibly leading to
corrosion or deterioration. If it gets in the CNC or peripheral units, it corrodes
metals, such as copper and silver, used as component materials, possibly
leading to a defective component.
• Synthetic-type coolants having a high permeability
Some synthetic-type coolants whose lubricating component is, for example,
PAG (polyalkylene glycol) have an extremely high permeability. If such a
coolant is used even in equipment having a high closeness, it can readily flow
into the CNC or peripheral units through, for example, gaskets. It is likely that,
if the coolant gets in the CNC or a peripheral unit, it may deteriorate the
insulation and damage the components.
• Water-soluble coolants at a high alkali level
Some coolants whose pH is increased using alkanolamine are so strong
alkali that its standard dilution will lead to pH10 or higher. If such a coolant
spatters over the surface of the CNC or peripheral unit, it reacts chemically
with a material, such as resin, possibly leading to corrosion or deterioration.
s-11
B-64603EN-1/01 PREFACE
PREFACE
Organization of this manual
This manual describes all the NC functions required to enable machine tool builders to design their CNC
machine tools. The following items are explained for each function.
1. Overview
Describes feature of the function. Refer to Operator’s Manual as requied.
2. Signal
Describes names, functions, output conditions and addresses of the signals required to realize a
function.
3. Parameter
Describes parameters related with a function.
4. Alarms and message
Lists the alarms and messages related with a function in a table.
5. Reference item
List the related items of the related manuals in a table.
A list of addresses of all signals and a list of signals are described in the appendix of this manual. Refer to
it as required.
Applicable models
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :
Model name Abbreviation

FANUC Series 0i-TF 0i-TF
Series 0i-F Series 0i
FANUC Series 0i-MF 0i-MF
NOTE
1 For an explanatory purpose, the following descriptions may be used according to
the CNC model :
- 0i-TF : Lathe system (T series)
- 0i-MF : Machining center system (M series)
2 Some functions described in this manual may not be applied to some products.
For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS (B-64602EN).
Description of symbols
The following symbols are used in this manual. These symbols are described below.
- M
Indicates a description that is valid only for the machine center system (M series).
In a general description of the method of machining, a machining center system operation is identified by
a phase such as "for milling machining".
- T
Indicates a description that is valid only for the lathe system (T series).
In a general description of the method of machining, a lathe system operation is identified by a phrase
such as "for lathe cutting".
p-1
PREFACE B-64603EN-1/01
-
Indicates the end of a description of a system control type.
When a system control type mark mentioned above is not followed by this mark, the description of the
system control type is assumed to continue until the next item or paragraph begins. In this case, the next
item or paragraph provides a description common to the control types.
Description of signals
[Example of controlling one path using one PMC]
G0000~ X000~
CNC PMC Machine tool

F0000~ Y000~
[Example of controlling three path using one PMC]
CNC G0000~ X000~
Path 1 F0000~ Y000~

PMC Machine tool
G1000~
Path 2 F1000~
[Example of controlling multipath CNC using PMC system]
CNC Signal PMC

I/F
1st
machine Path 1
G0000~ G0000~
group for X000~
machining F0000~ F0000~ I/O device
1st
PMC for 1st
G1000~ G1000~ Y000~ machine
Path 2
for
machining F1000~ F1000~
2nd X000~
G2000~ G0000~
machine Path 1 2nd I/O device
group for loader F2000~ F0000~ PMC Y000~ for 2nd
machine
3rd X000~
G3000~ G0000~
machine Path 2 3rd I/O device
group for loader F3000~ F0000~ PMC Y000~ for 3rd
machine
p-2
NOTE
Each PMC of a multipath PMC system has an independent signal area. The F,
G, X, and Y signal addresses of each PMC begin with 0. On the other hand, the
F and G signal addresses from the viewpoint of the CNC are fixed for each path
number. Note that the F and G signal addresses used in programming of each
ladder are different from those from the viewpoint of the CNC.
- Expression of signals
Address Symbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn000 OP SA STL SPL RWD
In an item where both lathe system (T series) and machining center system (M series) are described, some
signals are covered with shade ( ) in the signal address figure as shown below. This means either
lathe system or machining center system does not have this signal. Upper part is for lathe system and
lower part is for machining center system.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
T series
Gn053 *CDZ ROVLP UINT TMRON M series
[Example 1]
The figure above indicates *CDZ is provided only for the lathe system (T series) while the other
signals for both the lathe system (T series) and machining system (M series).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
T series
Gn040 OFN9 OFN8 OFN7 OFN6 M series
[Example 2]
Signals OFN6 to OFN9 are for machining center system (M series) only.
NOTE
1 The following notational conventions are used in the signal description of each
function.
Example) Axis moving signals MV1 to MV8 <Fn102>
↑ ↑ ↑
Signal name Symbol name Signal address
2 For multipath control, one of the following superscripts is attached to the top right
of a symbol depending on the signal type.
- Path type (for path 1 on PMC side) : #1
- Path type (for path 2 on PMC side) : #2
- Path type (for loader path on PMC side) : #3
- Path type (on CNC side) : #P
- Controlled axis type (on CNC side) : #SV
- Spindle type (on CNC side) : #SP
- PMC axis control group type : #PX
Refer to Appendix “List of Addresses“ for details
3 For the signals, a single data number is assigned to 8 bits. Each bit has a
different meaning.
p-3
NOTE
4 The letter "n" in each address representation indicates the address position used
in each path on the CNC side, as shown below.
1st path : n=0 (No. 0 to 999)
2nd path : n=1 (No. 1000 to 1999)
5 For a signal of controlled axis type, when the number of axes exceeds eight for
each path, set parameter No.3021 to address this situation.
Description of parameters
Parameters are classified by data type as follows:
Data type Valid data range Remarks
Bit
Bit machine group
Bit path 0 or 1
Bit axis
Bit spindle
Byte
Byte machine group
-128 to 127 Some parameters handle these types of
Byte path 0 to 255 data as unsigned data.
Byte axis
Byte spindle
Word
Word machine group
-32768 to 32767 Some parameters handle these types of
Word path 0 to 65535 data as unsigned data.
Word axis
Word spindle
2-word
2-word machine group
Some parameters handle these types of
2-word path 0 to ±999999999
data as unsigned data.
2-word axis
2-word spindle
Real
Real machine group
See the Standard Parameter
Real path Setting Tables.
Real axis
Real spindle
NOTE
1 Each of the parameters of the bit, bit machine group, bit path, bit axis, and bit
spindle types consists of 8 bits for one data number (parameters with eight
different meanings).
2 For machine group types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of
machine groups are present, so that independent data can be set for each
machine group.
3 For path types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of paths are
present, so that independent data can be set for each path.
4 For axis types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of control
axes are present, so that independent data can be set for each control axis.
5 For spindle types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of
spindles are present, so that independent data can be set for each spindle axis.
6 The valid data range for each data type indicates a general range. The range
varies according to the parameters. For the valid data range of a specific
parameter, see the explanation of the parameter.
p-4
- Standard parameter setting tables

This section defines the standard minimum data units and valid data ranges of the CNC parameters of the
real type, real machine group type, real path type, real axis type, and real spindle type. The data type and
unit of data of each parameter conform to the specifications of each function.
(A) Length and angle parameters (type 1)

Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unit Valid data range
IS-A 0.01 -999999.99 to +999999.99
mm
IS-B 0.001 -999999.999 to +999999.999
deg.
IS-C 0.0001 -99999.9999 to +99999.9999
IS-A 0.001 -99999.999 to +99999.999
inch IS-B 0.0001 -99999.9999 to +99999.9999
IS-C 0.00001 -9999.99999 to +9999.99999
(B) Length and angle parameters (type 2)

IS-A 0.01 0.00 to +999999.99
mm
IS-B 0.001 0.000 to +999999.999
deg.
IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
IS-A 0.001 0.000 to +99999.999
inch IS-B 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
IS-C 0.00001 0.00000 to +9999.99999
(C) Velocity and angular velocity parameters

IS-A 0.01 0.0 to +999000.00
mm/min
IS-B 0.001 0.0 to +999000.000
degree/min
IS-C 0.0001 0.0 to +99999.9999
IS-A 0.001 0.0 to +96000.000
inch/min IS-B 0.0001 0.0 to +9600.0000
IS-C 0.00001 0.0 to +4000.00000
If bit 7 (IESP) of parameter No. 1013 is set to 1, the valid data ranges for IS-C are extended as follows:
mm/min IS-C 0.001 0.000 to +999000.000
degree/min
inch/min IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +9600.0000
(D) Acceleration and angular acceleration parameters

2 IS-A 0.01 0.00 to +999999.99
mm/sec
IS-B 0.001 0.000 to +999999.999
deg./sec2
IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
IS-A 0.001 0.000 to +99999.999
inch/sec2 IS-B 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
IS-C 0.00001 0.00000 to +9999.99999
p-5
If bit 7 (IESP) of parameter No. 1013 is set to 1, the valid data ranges for IS-C are extended as follows:
mm/min IS-C
0.001 0.000 to +999999.999
degree/min
inch/min IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
CAUTION
1 Values are rounded up or down to the nearest multiples of the minimum data
unit.
2 A valid data range means data input limits, and may differ from values
representing actual performance.
3 For information on the ranges of commands to the CNC, refer to Appendix D,
"Range of Command Value" of the Operator’s Manual (B-64604EN).
- Parameters of the bit type, bit machine group type, bit path type, bit axis type,
and bit spindle type
Data No. Data (Data #0 to #7 are bit positions.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC
- Parameters other than the bit-type parameters above

Data No. Data
1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis
NOTE
1 The bits left blank in “description of parameters” and parameter numbers that
appear on the display but are not found in the parameter list are reserved for
future expansion. They must always be 0.
2 A parameter usable with only one system, namely, the lathe system (T series) or
the machining center system (M series), is indicated using two rows as shown
below. When a row is blank, the parameter is not usable with the corresponding
series.
[Example 1]
Parameter HTG is a parameter common to the machining center system (M
series) and the lathe system (T series), but parameters RTV and ROC are
parameters valid only for the lathe system (T series).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RTV HTG ROC T series
1403
HTG M series
[Example 2]
The following parameter is provided only for the M series.
T series
1411 M series
Cutting feedrate
3 When "to" is inserted between two parameter numbers, there are parameters
with successive numbers between the two starting and ending parameter
numbers, but those intermediate parameter numbers are omitted for
convenience.
p-6
NOTE
4 The lower-case letter "x" or "s" following the name of a bit-type parameter
indicates the following:
-” x” : Bit axis type parameters
-” s” : Bit spindle type parameters
Related manuals of Series 0i- MODEL F

The following table lists the manuals related to Series 0i-F. This manual is indicated by an asterisk(*).
Table 1 Related manuals

Manual name Specification number
DESCRIPTIONS B-64602EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-64603EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-64603EN-1 *
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) B-64604EN
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) B-64604EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) B-64604EN-2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-64605EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B-64610EN
Programming
Macro Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63943EN-2
Macro Compiler PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-66263EN
C Language Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63943EN-3
PMC
PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-64513EN
Network
PROFIBUS-DP Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-63993EN
Industrial Ethernet CONNECTION MANUAL B-64013EN
Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64014EN
DeviceNet Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64043EN
CC-Link Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64463EN
Operation guidance function
MANUAL GUIDE i B-63874EN
(Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) OPERATOR’S MANUAL
MANUAL GUIDE i (For Machining Center System) OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63874EN-2
MANUAL GUIDE i (Set-up Guidance Functions) OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63874EN-1
MANUAL GUIDE 0i OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64434EN
TURN MATE i OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64254EN
Dual Check Safety
Dual Check Safety CONNECTION MANUAL B-64483EN-2
p-7
Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR αi/βi series

The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR αi/βi series
Table 2 Related manuals

Manual name Specification number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65262EN
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series / FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βi series /
FANUC LINEAR MOTOR LiS series /
B-65270EN
FANUC SYNCHRONOUS BUILT-IN SERVO MOTOR DiS series
PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65272EN
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi/βi series, BUILT-IN SPINDLE MOTOR Bi series
B-65280EN
PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65282EN
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series / FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series /
B-65285EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series MAINTENANCE MANUAL
This manual mainly assumes that the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series of servo motor is used. For
servo motor and spindle information, refer to the manuals for the servo motor and spindle that are actually
connected.
Notes on various kinds of data

CAUTION
1 Machining programs, parameters, offset data, etc. are stored in the CNC unit
internal non-volatile memory. In general, these contents are not lost by the
switching ON/OFF of the power. However, it is possible that a state can occur
where precious data stored in the non-volatile memory has to be deleted,
because of deletions from a maloperation, or by a failure restoration. In order to
restore rapidly when this kind of mishap occurs, it is recommended that you
create a copy of the various kinds of data beforehand.
2 The number of times to write machining programs to the non-volatile memory is
limited.
You must use "High-speed program management" when registration and the
deletion of the machining programs are frequently repeated in such case that the
machining programs are automatically downloaded from a personal computer at
each machining.
In "High-speed program management", the program is not saved to the
non-volatile memory at registration, modification, or deletion of programs.
Please make the application software by using FOCAS2/ C Language Library to
save the changed programs to the non-volatile memory when "High-speed
program management" is used.
p-8
B-64603EN-1/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Volume 1 of 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-1
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS............................................................... s-2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING ............................ s-3
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING...................................... s-5
WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS............................................................ s-7
WARNINGS RELATED TO EDIT SCREENS FOR TOUCH PANEL ....................... s-7
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT..................... s-8
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE ............................................... s-9
PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1
1 AXIS CONTROL...................................................................................... 1
1.1 CONTROLLED AXIS ..................................................................................... 1
1.2 SETTING EACH AXIS ................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 Name of Axes ...........................................................................................................3
1.2.2 Increment System .....................................................................................................7
1.2.3 Specifying the Rotation Axis .................................................................................10
1.2.4 Controlled Axes Detach .........................................................................................13
1.2.5 Outputting the Movement State of an Axis............................................................16
1.2.6 Mirror Image ..........................................................................................................17
1.2.7 Follow-up ...............................................................................................................20
1.2.8 Servo off/Mechanical Handle Feed ........................................................................22
1.2.9 Position Switch.......................................................................................................24
1.2.10 High-Speed Position Switch...................................................................................26
1.3 ERROR COMPENSATION.......................................................................... 31
1.3.1 Stored Pitch Error Compensation...........................................................................31
1.3.2 Backlash Compensation .........................................................................................39
1.3.3 Smooth Backlash ....................................................................................................41
1.3.4 Straightness Compensation ....................................................................................44
1.3.5 Simple Straightness Compensation ........................................................................48
1.3.6 Straightness Compensation at 128 Points...............................................................50
1.3.7 Interpolated Straightness Compensation ................................................................52
1.3.8 Interpolated Straightness Compensation 3072 Points ............................................56
1.3.9 Inclinaiton Compensation.......................................................................................58
1.3.10 Bi-directional Pitch Error Compensation ...............................................................61
1.3.11 Extended Bi-directional Pitch Error Compensation ...............................................67
1.3.12 Interpolation Type Pitch Error Compensation .......................................................69
1.3.13 About Differences among Pitch Error Compensation, Straightness Compensation,
and Inclinaiton Compensation (for Reference Purposes) .......................................71
1.3.14 Axis Name Display of Pitch Error Compensation..................................................72
1.3.14.1 Setting of axis name display ........................................................................... 73
1.3.14.2 Parameter ........................................................................................................ 74
1.3.15 Stored Pitch Error Compensation Total Value Input function ...............................75
1.4 SETTINGS RELATED TO SERVO-CONTROLLED AXES.......................... 83
1.4.1 Parameters Related to Servo...................................................................................83
1.4.2 Absolute Position Detection ...................................................................................88
c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64603EN-1/01
1.4.3 FSSB Setting ........................................................................................................102

1.4.3.1 FSSB setting screen ...................................................................................... 109
1.4.3.2 FSSB automatic setting procedure................................................................ 117
1.4.4 Temporary Absolute Coordinate Setting..............................................................141
1.5 SETTINGS RELATED WITH COORDINATE SYSTEMS .......................... 145
1.5.1 Machine Coordinate System.................................................................................145
1.5.2 Workpiece Coordinate System/Addition of Workpiece Coordinate System Pair 148
1.5.2.1 Workpiece coordinate system ....................................................................... 148
1.5.2.2 Workpiece coordinate system preset............................................................. 151
1.5.2.3 Adding workpiece coordinate systems (G54.1 or G54)................................ 153
1.5.2.4 Automatic coordinate system setting ............................................................ 154
1.5.2.5 Workpiece coordinate system shift (T series)............................................... 154
1.5.2.6 Direct input of coordinate system shift (T series)......................................... 159
1.5.2.7 Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signals ................................. 161
1.5.3 Local Coordinate System .....................................................................................166
1.5.4 Rotary Axis Roll-Over .........................................................................................168
1.6 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL........................................................... 171
1.6.1 Example of Usage ................................................................................................171
1.6.2 Procedure to Start-Up ...........................................................................................174
1.6.3 Setting of Synchronous Axes ...............................................................................175
1.6.4 Reference Position Establishment ........................................................................177
1.6.4.1 Procedure of reference position establishment ............................................. 177
1.6.4.2 Setting of grid position ................................................................................. 178
1.6.4.3 Reference position establishment.................................................................. 180
1.6.4.4 Balance adjustment ....................................................................................... 180
1.6.4.5 Maintenance.................................................................................................. 182
1.6.4.6 Reference point setting with mechanical stopper.......................................... 182
1.6.4.7 Distance coded linear scale interface and linear scale with distance-coded
reference marks (serial)................................................................................. 182
1.6.5 Synchronization Establishment ............................................................................183
1.6.6 Synchronization Error Check ...............................................................................185
1.6.6.1 Synchronization error check ......................................................................... 185
1.6.6.2 Methods of alarm recovery by synchronization error check......................... 185
1.6.7 Axis Synchronous Control Torque Difference Alarm..........................................186
1.6.8 Synchronization Error Compensation ..................................................................188
1.6.9 Combination with other functions ........................................................................190
1.6.10 Automatic Slave Axis Parameter Setting .............................................................196
1.6.11 Signal....................................................................................................................197
1.6.12 Parameter..............................................................................................................200
1.6.13 Diagnosis Data .....................................................................................................214
1.6.14 Alarm and Message ..............................................................................................214
1.6.15 Caution .................................................................................................................215
1.7 TANDEM CONTROL ................................................................................. 217
1.8 ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL...................................................................... 229
1.9 ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX (M SERIES) ................................................... 242
1.9.1 Electronic Gear Box (M Series) ...........................................................................242
1.9.2 Electronic Gear Box Automatic Phase Synchronization ......................................261
1.9.2.1 Arbitrary Gear Ratio for Master Axis in Electronic Gear Box Automatic
Phase Synchronization .................................................................................. 268
1.9.3 Skip Function for EGB Axis (M Series) ..............................................................273
1.9.4 U-axis Control (M Series) ....................................................................................277
1.9.5 Signal-based Servo EGB Synchronous Control ...................................................286
1.9.6 Electronic Gear Box (FSSB type) ........................................................................294
1.10 DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK TURNING MODE / COMPENSATION
CLAMP ...................................................................................................... 302
c-2
1.11 FUNCTION OF DECELERATION STOP IN CASE OF POWER

FAILURE ................................................................................................... 303
1.12 FLEXIBLE SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL ............................................ 305
1.12.1 Flexible Synchronization Control ........................................................................305
1.12.2 Automatic Phase Synchronization for flexible synchronization Control .............316
1.12.3 Synchronization Positional Difference Detection Diagnosis Display and Signal
Output in Flexible Synchronization .....................................................................325
1.12.4 Inter-path Flexible Synchronization Control........................................................327
1.12.5 Skip Function for Flexible Synchronization Control ...........................................336
1.12.6 Hob Command by Flexible Synchronization Control ..........................................341
1.13 AXIS IMMEDIATE STOP FUNCTION ....................................................... 354
1.14 FLEXIBLE PATH AXIS ASSIGNMENT...................................................... 357
1.14.1 Outputting States of Individual Axes ...................................................................375
1.14.2 Direct Assignment Mode of Flexible Path Axis Assignment...............................377
1.14.3 Axis Assignment Reset.........................................................................................384
1.15 HIGH PRECISION OSCILLATION FUNCTION ......................................... 386
1.16 PERIPHERAL AXIS CONTROL ................................................................ 403
2 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION ................................................. 443
2.1 EMERGENCY STOP................................................................................. 443
2.2 CNC READY SIGNALS ............................................................................. 445
2.3 OVERTRAVEL CHECK ............................................................................. 446
2.3.1 Overtravel Signals ................................................................................................446
2.3.2 Stored Stroke Check 1..........................................................................................448
2.3.3 Stored Stroke Check 1 Area Expansion ...............................................................455
2.3.4 Stored Stroke Check 2, 3......................................................................................458
2.3.5 Checking the Stored Stroke during the Time from Power–on to the Reference
Position Establishment .........................................................................................465
2.3.6 Stroke Limit External Setting...............................................................................467
2.3.7 Stroke Limit Area Changing Function .................................................................468
2.3.8 Stored stroke limit range switching function by signal ........................................469
2.3.9 Chuck and Tail Stock Barrier (T Series) ..............................................................476
2.4 ALARM SIGNALS...................................................................................... 488
2.5 START LOCK / INTERLOCK..................................................................... 488
2.6 MODE SELECTION................................................................................... 495
2.7 STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL....................................................................... 502
2.8 VRDY OFF ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL ...................................................... 504
2.9 UNEXPECTED DISTURBANCE TORQUE DETECTION FUNCTION ...... 505
2.10 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION FUNCTION ................................ 515
2.11 MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT (M SERIES) .................... 521
2.12 MALFUNCTION PREVENT FUNCTIONS ................................................. 524
2.13 OPERATOR ERROR PREVENT FUNCTIONS ......................................... 526
3 MANUAL OPERATION ....................................................................... 538
3.1 JOG FEED/INCREMENTAL FEED............................................................ 538
3.2 MANUAL HANDLE FEED.......................................................................... 546
3.2.1 Jog and Handle Simultaneous Mode ....................................................................556
3.3 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPT............................................................... 561
3.3.1 Manual Interruption of 3-dimensional Coordinate System Conversion...............567
3.4 MANUAL LINEAR/CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION..................................... 569
c-3
3.5 HANDLE-SYNCHRONOUS FEED ............................................................ 586

3.6 RIGID TAPPING BY MANUAL HANDLE ................................................... 593
3.7 3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED (M SERIES) ........................................ 596
3.7.1 Tool Axis Direction Handle Feed/Tool Axis Direction JOG Feed/Tool Axis
Direction Incremental Feed ..................................................................................598
3.7.1.1 Tool axis direction handle feed..................................................................... 598
3.7.1.2 Tool axis direction JOG feed/tool axis direction incremental feed............... 599
3.7.2 Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction Handle Feed/Tool Axis Right-Angle
Direction JOG Feed/Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction Incremental Feed ...........599
3.7.2.1 Tool axis right-angle direction handle feed .................................................. 601
3.7.2.2 Tool axis right-angle direction JOG feed/tool axis right-angle direction
incremental feed............................................................................................ 602
3.7.3 Tool Tip Center Rotation Handle Feed/Tool Tip Center Rotation JOG Feed/
Tool Tip Center Rotation Incremental Feed.........................................................602
3.7.3.1 Tool tip center rotation handle feed .............................................................. 603
3.7.3.2 Tool tip center rotation JOG feed/tool tip center rotation incremental feed . 604
3.7.3.3 Selection of the tool length offset value........................................................ 604
3.7.4 Table Vertical Direction Handle Feed/Table Vertical Direction JOG Feed/
Table Vertical Direction Incremental Feed ..........................................................605
3.7.4.1 Table vertical direction handle feed.............................................................. 605
3.7.4.2 Table vertical direction JOG feed/table vertical direction incremental feed. 606
3.7.5 Table Horizontal Direction Handle Feed/Table Horizontal Direction JOG
Feed/Table Horizontal Direction Incremental Feed .............................................606
3.7.5.1 Table horizontal direction handle feed.......................................................... 608
3.7.5.2 Table horizontal direction JOG feed/table horizontal direction incremental feed
...................................................................................................................... 609
3.8 MANUAL NUMERIC COMMAND .............................................................. 628
3.9 I/O Link βi MANUAL HANDLE INTERFACE.............................................. 634
4 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT ..................................... 640

4.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN........................................... 640
4.2 REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITHOUT DOG ............................... 662
4.3 AUTOMATIC REFERENCE POSITION RETURN AND RETURN FROM
THE REFERENCE POSITION .................................................................. 670
4.4 2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN / 3RD, 4TH REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN.................................................................................. 677
4.5 IN-POSITION CHECK DISABLE REFERENCE POSITION RETURN ...... 680
4.6 REFERENCE POINT SETTING WITH MECHANICAL STOPPER............ 681
4.7 REFERENCE POINT SETTING WITH MECHANICAL STOPPER BY
GRID METHOD ......................................................................................... 687
4.8 DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE ................................... 692
4.9 LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED REFERENCE MARKS
(SERIAL) ................................................................................................... 705
4.10 EXTENDED FUNCTION OF THE DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE
INTERFACE .............................................................................................. 713
4.10.1 Reference Position Established by the G00 Command ........................................713
4.10.2 Reference Position Establishment by Jog Feed....................................................717
4.11 REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT FUNCTION ......................... 720
4.12 CORRESPONDENCE OF ROTARY SCALE WITHOUT ROTARY DATA. 721
4.12.1 Setting Method by Rotary Axis Type and Movable Range .................................722
4.12.2 In the Case of a Rotary Axis B Type whose Movable Range is under One
Rotation ................................................................................................................723
c-4
4.12.3 In the Case of a Rotary Axis B Type whose Movable Range is over One
Rotation ................................................................................................................729
4.12.4 In the Case of a Rotary Axis A Type ...................................................................731
4.12.5 Method of Using Heidenhain Rotary Scale RCN223, 723 and 220.....................733
4.12.6 In Case of a Linear Axis.......................................................................................737
4.13 MANUAL 2ND/3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN
FUNCTION ................................................................................................ 741
5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION ................................................................. 746
5.1 CYCLE START/FEED HOLD..................................................................... 746
5.2 RESET AND REWIND............................................................................... 750
5.3 TESTING A PROGRAM ............................................................................ 754
5.3.1 Machine Lock.......................................................................................................754
5.3.2 Dry Run ................................................................................................................758
5.3.3 Single Block .........................................................................................................760
5.3.4 High-speed Program Check Function ..................................................................763
5.3.5 Manual Handle Retrace ........................................................................................775
5.3.6 Auxiliary Function Output Block Reverse Movement for Manual Handle
Retrace..................................................................................................................796
5.3.7 Manual Handle Retrace Function for Multi-path .................................................798
5.3.8 Extension of the Manual Handle Retrace Function..............................................801
5.4 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF ................................................................. 806
5.5 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP/ADDITION OF OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP ......... 807
5.6 PROGRAM RESTART .............................................................................. 810
5.6.1 Auxiliary Function Output in Program Restart Function .....................................819
5.6.2 Approach for Each Arbitrary Axis in Program Restart ........................................822
5.7 QUICK PROGRAM RESTART .................................................................. 824
5.7.1 Suppress Motion of Quick Program Restart.........................................................838
5.7.2 Quick program restart for multi path system........................................................841
5.7.3 Improvement of Quick program restart for non-machining program...................846
5.8 TOOL RETRACT AND RECOVER............................................................ 848
5.8.1 Update of Tool Compensation value for Tool Retract and Recover ....................854
5.9 MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN................................................ 858
5.10 RETRACE (M SERIES) ............................................................................. 862
5.11 ACTIVE BLOCK CANCEL FUNCTION...................................................... 872
5.12 EXACT STOP / EXACT STOP MODE / TAPPING MODE / CUTTING
MODE........................................................................................................ 878
5.13 RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING ....................................................... 879
5.14 DNC OPERATION..................................................................................... 886
5.15 DIRECT OPERATION BY PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION ............ 889
5.16 DIRECT OPERATION BY C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ............................ 890
5.17 RETRACTION FOR 3-DIMENSIONAL RIGID TAPPING .......................... 891
5.17.1 Alarm and Message ..............................................................................................895
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION ............................................................ 896

6.1 POSITIONING ........................................................................................... 896
6.2 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING ........................................................ 898
6.3 LINEAR INTERPOLATION ........................................................................ 901
6.4 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION................................................................... 902
6.5 THREADING.............................................................................................. 906
c-5
6.5.1 Threading .............................................................................................................906

6.5.2 Threading Cycle Retract.......................................................................................911
6.5.2.1 Threading cycle retract (canned cycle) ......................................................... 912
6.5.2.2 Threading cycle retract (multiple repetitive canned cycle) ........................... 915
6.5.3 Variable Lead Threading......................................................................................919
6.5.4 Continuous Threading ..........................................................................................919
6.5.5 Circular Threading ...............................................................................................920
6.5.6 Arbitrary Speed Threading ...................................................................................921
6.5.6.1 Arbitrary speed threading ............................................................................. 921
6.5.6.2 Re-machining thread..................................................................................... 933
6.5.7 Rapid Traverse Overlap in Threading Cycle........................................................954
6.6 HELICAL INTERPOLATION ...................................................................... 958
6.7 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION ................................................ 959
6.8 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ............................................................. 962
6.8.1 Cylindrical Interpolation ......................................................................................962
6.8.2 Cylindrical Interpolation by Plane Distance Command .......................................962
6.8.3 Cylindrical Interpolation Cutting Point Compensation ........................................962
6.9 POLYGON TURNING................................................................................ 967
6.9.1 Polygon Turning...................................................................................................967
6.9.2 Polygon Turning with Two Spindles....................................................................975
6.9.3 Concurrent Use of Polygon Turning and Polygon Turning with Two Spindles ..993
6.10 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (M SERIES)........................................ 995
6.11 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G28, G30, G53) ............................................ 999
6.12 NANO SMOOTHING ............................................................................... 1000
6.13 SMART TOLERANCE CONTROL........................................................... 1007
6.13.1 Change Tolerance in Smart Tolerance Control Mode........................................1013
6.14 GENERAL PURPOSE RETRACT ........................................................... 1017
Volume 2 of 3
7 FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION

CONTROL ......................................................................................... 1023
7.1 FEEDRATE CONTROL ........................................................................... 1023
7.1.1 Rapid Traverse Rate ...........................................................................................1024
7.1.2 Cutting Feedrate Clamp......................................................................................1026
7.1.3 Feed per Minute..................................................................................................1026
7.1.4 Feed per Revolution/Manual Feed per Revolution ............................................1031
7.1.5 One-digit F Code Feed (M Series) .....................................................................1034
7.1.6 Inverse Time Feed (M Series) ............................................................................1037
7.1.7 Override..............................................................................................................1038
7.1.7.1 Rapid traverse override ............................................................................... 1038
7.1.7.2 Feedrate override ........................................................................................ 1042
7.1.7.3 Second feedrate override ............................................................................ 1045
7.1.7.4 Override cancel ........................................................................................... 1050
7.1.8 Automatic Corner Override................................................................................1052
7.1.8.1 Inner corner automatic override (G62) ....................................................... 1052
7.1.8.2 Internal circular cutting feedrate change..................................................... 1054
7.1.9 Dwell/Auxiliary Function Time Override Function...........................................1056
7.1.10 External Deceleration .........................................................................................1061
7.1.11 Positioning by Optimum Accelerations..............................................................1067
7.1.12 AI Advanced Preview Control (M Series) / AI Contour Control I / AI Contour
Control II ............................................................................................................1072
7.1.13 Speed Command Extension in Least Input Increments C ..................................1101
c-6
7.2 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL...................................... 1104

7.2.1 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration ................................................................1104
7.2.1.1 Automatic acceleration/deceleration........................................................... 1104
7.2.1.2 Rapid traverse block overlap ...................................................................... 1108
7.2.1.3 Programmable rapid traverse overlap ......................................................... 1109
7.2.2 Rapid Traverse Bell-shaped Acceleration/Deceleration.....................................1114
7.2.3 Linear Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation ...................1116
7.2.4 Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation..........1118
7.2.5 Optimum Torque Acceleration/Deceleration .....................................................1121
7.2.6 Corner Control....................................................................................................1135
7.2.6.1 In-position check signal .............................................................................. 1135
7.2.6.2 In-position check......................................................................................... 1136
7.2.6.3 In-position check disable signal.................................................................. 1137
7.2.6.4 In-position check independently of feed/rapid traverse .............................. 1139
7.2.7 Feed Forward in Rapid Traverse ........................................................................1141
7.2.8 Optimum Acceleration/Deceleration for Rigid Tapping ....................................1142
7.2.9 Rapid Traverse Acceleration/deceleration before Interpolation.........................1156
7.3 JERK CONTROL (M SERIES)................................................................. 1161
7.3.1 Speed Control with Change of Acceleration on Each Axis (M Series)..............1161
7.3.2 Look-Ahead Smooth Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration before
Interpolation (M Series) .....................................................................................1164
8 MULTI-PATH CONTROL .................................................................. 1167

8.1 MULTI-PATH CONTROL......................................................................... 1167
8.1.1 CNC Data Display, Setup, and Input/Output .....................................................1173
8.1.2 Multi-path Functions ..........................................................................................1174
8.1.3 Cautions on Multi-path Control .........................................................................1176
8.2 WAITING M CODES................................................................................ 1185
8.3 WAITING M CODES OF HIGH-SPEED TYPE ........................................ 1190
8.4 INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH PATH (T SERIES)...................... 1197
8.5 BALANCE CUTTING (T SERIES) ........................................................... 1207
8.6 SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE CONTROL............................................ 1210
8.6.1 Synchronous Control..........................................................................................1211
8.6.2 Composite Control .............................................................................................1216
8.6.3 Hypothetical Cs Axis Control ............................................................................1250
8.7 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL ................................................................. 1255
8.8 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL A (WITH SPEED CONTROL) .................. 1271
8.9 SYNCHRONOUS, COMPOSITE, AND SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL
BY PROGRAM COMMAND .................................................................... 1272
8.10 COMBINATION OF SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL AND AI CONTOUR
CONTROL ............................................................................................... 1275
8.11 PATH SPINDLE CONTROL .................................................................... 1281
8.12 MEMORY COMMON TO PATHS ............................................................ 1290
8.13 PATH SINGLE BLOCK CHECK FUNCTION ........................................... 1293
8.14 PATH SELECTION/DISPLAY OF OPTIONAL PATH NAMES................. 1294
8.15 WAITING FUNCTION BY SPECIFYING START POINT......................... 1296
9 FUNCTION FOR LOADER CONTROL............................................. 1306
9.1 FUNCTION FOR LOADER CONTROL ................................................... 1306
10 AUXILIARY FUNCTION .................................................................... 1318
10.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION ........................... 1318
c-7
10.2 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK................................................................ 1331

10.3 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK.................................. 1332
10.4 HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE ....................................................... 1335
10.5 M CODE GROUPING FUNCTION .......................................................... 1338
10.6 M-CODE PROTECT FUNCTION............................................................. 1341
10.7 AUXILIARY FUNCTION OUTPUT IN MOVING AXIS.............................. 1345
11 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION........................................................... 1356
11.1 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT) ................................ 1356
11.2 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT .................................................................... 1357
11.3 SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUT.................................................................. 1368
11.4 SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL ................................................. 1372
11.5 SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL.................................................................. 1377
11.6 SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC ........................................ 1404
11.7 EXTENDED SPINDLE NAME.................................................................. 1410
11.8 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL ........................................... 1410
11.9 ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT (T SERIES).................................. 1422
11.10 SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES) ..................................................... 1424
11.11 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL....................................................................... 1456
11.11.1 Cs Contour Control ............................................................................................1456
11.11.2 Cs Contour Control Torque Limit Skip..............................................................1477
11.11.3 Arbitrary Reference Position Setting Function ..................................................1480
11.11.4 Cs Contour Control Axis Coordinate Establishment..........................................1482
11.11.5 Cs Contour Control Manual High-Speed Reference Position Return ................1489
11.12 MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL ................................................................... 1491
11.13 RIGID TAPPING ...................................................................................... 1517
11.13.1 Connection Among Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Position Coder......................1518
11.13.2 Rigid Tapping Specification...............................................................................1522
11.13.3 Commands for Feed per Minute and Feed per Revolution ................................1523
11.13.4 Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation ....................................................1524
11.13.5 Override..............................................................................................................1525
11.13.6 Reference Position Return..................................................................................1527
11.13.7 FS10/11 Format Command ................................................................................1527
11.13.8 Multi-Spindle Control ........................................................................................1529
11.13.9 3-dimensional Rigid Tapping .............................................................................1529
11.13.10 Rigid Tapping with Spindle of Another Path .....................................................1530
11.13.11 Diagnosis Data ...................................................................................................1536
11.13.12 Command Format...............................................................................................1539
11.13.13 Position Control Loop Gain Parameter Switching .............................................1542
11.13.14 Signal..................................................................................................................1543
11.13.14.1 Signals for the rigid tapping function ......................................................... 1543
11.13.14.2 Signals related to S code output.................................................................. 1544
11.13.14.3 Signals related to gear switching ................................................................ 1545
11.13.14.4 Signals related to the addition of multi-spindle control .............................. 1546
11.13.14.5 Notes on interface with the PMC................................................................ 1549
11.13.15 Timing Charts for Rigid Tapping Specification .................................................1552
11.13.15.1 When M29 is specified before G84/G74 .................................................... 1553
11.13.15.2 M29 and G84/G74 are specified in the same block .................................... 1557
11.13.15.3 Specifying G84/G74 for rigid tapping by parameters................................. 1561
11.13.15.4 When M29 is specified before G84/G88 .................................................... 1565
11.13.15.5 M29 and G84/G88 are specified in the same block .................................... 1567
11.13.15.6 Specifying G84/G88 for rigid tapping by parameters................................. 1569
c-8
11.13.15.7 Timing of the M code for unclamping ........................................................ 1571
11.13.15.8 Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode .......................................................... 1571
11.13.16 FSSB High-speed Rigid Tapping .......................................................................1573
11.13.17 Parameter............................................................................................................1576
11.13.18 Notes...................................................................................................................1594
11.14 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL.................................................. 1598
11.14.1 Arbitrary Spindle Position Phase Synchronization Function .............................1617
11.15 SPINDLE ORIENTATION ........................................................................ 1623
11.16 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING ............................................................ 1629
11.17 SPINDLE COMMAND SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL.............................. 1632
11.18 SPINDLE COMMAND SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL INDEPENDENT
PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION FUNCTION....................................... 1644
11.19 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION (T SERIES) ................. 1648
11.20 SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO MOTOR ......................................... 1659
11.20.1 Spindle Control with Servo Motor .....................................................................1660
11.20.2 Spindle Indexing Function .................................................................................1680
11.20.3 Speed-up of Spindle Indexing Function .............................................................1684
11.20.4 Rigid Tapping with Servo Motor .......................................................................1687
11.20.5 Threading, Feed per Revolution, and Constant Surface Speed Control.............1693
11.20.6 Spindle Output Control with PMC.....................................................................1696
11.20.7 Speed Arrival Signals and Speed Zero Signals ..................................................1697
11.20.8 Spindle Control with Servo Motor (Speed Control)...........................................1698
11.20.9 Spindle Synchronous Control for Spindle Control with Servo Motor ...............1700
11.20.10 Speed-up of Spindle Stop Motion for Spindle Control with Servo Motor.........1711
11.20.11 Alarm and Message ............................................................................................1714
11.21 SPINDLE REVOLUTION NUMBER HISTORY FUNCTION .................... 1715
11.22 SERVO/SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL .................................... 1717
11.22.1 Servo/Spindle Synchronous Control ..................................................................1717
11.22.2 Servo/Spindle Synchronous Control (FSSB Type) ............................................1728
11.22.3 PHASE SYNCHRONIZATION FOR SERVO/SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS
CONTROL .........................................................................................................1733
11.23 HIGH-PRECISION SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL ................................... 1739
11.24 SIMPLE SPINDLE ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX........................................ 1743
11.25 SPINDLE SPEED COMMAND CLAMP ................................................... 1748
11.26 SETTING OF FEEDBACK PULSES FOR SPINDLE FEEDBACK PULSES
................................................................................................................. 1751
11.27 RESOLUTION OF SPINDLE SPEED COMMAND .................................. 1753
12 TOOL FUNCTIONS ........................................................................... 1763
12.1 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF LATHE SYSTEM ............................................... 1763
12.1.1 Tool Offset .........................................................................................................1764
12.1.2 Tool Geometry Offset and Tool Wear Offset.....................................................1764
12.1.3 Offset ..................................................................................................................1765
12.1.4 Extended Tool Selection Function .....................................................................1775
12.1.5 Automatic Alteration of Tool Position Compensation (T Function)..................1780
12.2 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM ...................... 1784
12.2.1 Tool Compensation Memory..............................................................................1785
12.3 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION......................................................... 1789
12.3.1 Tool Management Function ...............................................................................1789
12.3.2 Tool Management Extension Function ..............................................................1818
12.3.2.1 Customization of tool management data display ........................................ 1818
12.3.2.2 Setting of spindle position/standby position display................................... 1818
c-9
12.3.2.3 Input of customize data with the decimal point .......................................... 1818
12.3.2.4 Protection of various tool information items with the KEY signal............. 1818
12.3.2.5 Selection of a tool life count period ............................................................ 1818
12.3.2.6 Each tool data screen .................................................................................. 1819
12.3.2.7 Total life time display for tools of the same type........................................ 1819
12.3.3 Tool Management Function Oversize Tools Support.........................................1826
12.4 TOOL COMPENSATION......................................................................... 1835
12.4.1 Cutter Compensation (M Series) and Tool Nose Radius Compensation
(T Series) ............................................................................................................1835
12.4.2 Tool Length Compensation (M Series) ..............................................................1842
12.4.3 Tool Length Compensation Shift Types (M Series)...........................................1846
12.4.4 Second Geometry Tool Offset (T Series) ...........................................................1851
12.5 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT.................................................................... 1856
Volume 3 of 3
13 PROGRAM COMMAND .................................................................... 1875

13.1 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING / POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING ........................................................ 1875
13.2 G CODE SYSTEM................................................................................... 1877
13.2.1 G Code List in the Lathe System........................................................................1877
13.2.2 G Code List in the Machining Center System....................................................1880
13.3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION ............................................................... 1885
13.4 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE
PROGRAMS............................................................................................ 1887
13.5 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION ................................................................ 1888
13.6 CUSTOM MACRO................................................................................... 1894
13.6.1 Custom Macro ....................................................................................................1894
13.6.2 Indirect Axis Address Command .......................................................................1919
13.6.3 Interruption Type Custom Macro.......................................................................1921
13.6.4 Embedded Macro ...............................................................................................1924
13.7 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING........................................................... 1937
13.7.1 Canned Cycle for Drilling ..................................................................................1937
13.8 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) / MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED
CYCLE (T SERIES) ................................................................................. 1954
13.9 IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) (M SERIES) ............ 1970
13.10 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)................... 1971
13.11 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET (T SERIES) .......................... 1976
13.12 INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M SERIES)................................................... 1978
13.13 SCALING ................................................................................................. 1988
13.14 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION...................................................... 1997
13.15 3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION ................................... 1998
13.16 TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING (M SERIES) .............................. 2005
13.16.1 Tilted Working Plane Indexing ..........................................................................2005
13.16.1.1 Tilted working plane indexing based on Eulerian angle............................. 2007
13.16.1.2 General specifications of the tilted working plane indexing....................... 2008
13.16.1.3 Tilted working plane indexing based on roll-pitch-yaw ............................. 2011
13.16.1.4 Tilted working plane indexing based on three points ................................. 2012
13.16.1.5 Tilted working plane indexing based on two vectors ................................. 2014
13.16.1.6 Tilted working plane indexing based on projection angles......................... 2015
13.16.1.7 Tilted working plane indexing by tool axis direction ................................. 2017
c-10
13.16.2 Multiple Command of Tilted Working Plane Indexing......................................2026
13.16.2.1 Absolute multiple command ....................................................................... 2026
13.16.2.2 Incremental multiple command................................................................... 2028
13.16.3 Tool Axis Direction Control...............................................................................2030
13.16.3.1 Tool axis direction control .......................................................................... 2030
13.16.3.2 Tool center point retention type tool axis direction control........................ 2038
13.16.4 Tilted Working Plane Indexing in Tool Length Compensation .........................2042
13.16.5 Restrictions of Tilted Working Plane Indexing..................................................2061
13.17 MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER ............................................. 2066
13.18 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING
(M SERIES) ............................................................................................. 2067
13.19 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING ........................................... 2068
13.20 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T SERIES) ......... 2070
13.21 PATTERN DATA INPUT.......................................................................... 2072
13.22 G CODE PREVENTING BUFFERING..................................................... 2087
14 DISPLAY/SET/EDIT .......................................................................... 2091
14.1 DISPLAY/SET.......................................................................................... 2091
14.1.1 Run Hour and Parts Count Display ....................................................................2091
14.1.2 Software Operator's Panel ..................................................................................2096
14.1.3 8-Level Data Protection Function ......................................................................2112
14.1.4 Touch Panel Control...........................................................................................2118
14.1.5 External Touch Panel Interface ..........................................................................2123
14.1.6 Parameter Check Sum Function .........................................................................2128
14.1.7 Touch Panel Check Signal .................................................................................2139
14.1.8 Changing the Display Language by PMC Signals .............................................2141
14.1.9 CNC Screen Dual Display..................................................................................2144
14.1.10 Speed Display Function of a Milling Tool with Servo Motor............................2148
14.1.11 Screen Switching by Mode.................................................................................2150
14.1.12 Screen Switching at Path Switching...................................................................2153
14.1.13 Screen Erasure Function and Automatic Screen Erasure Function ....................2153
14.1.14 Screen Hard Copy Function ...............................................................................2155
14.1.15 Actual Speed Display Axis Selection Signals ....................................................2159
14.1.16 Custom Macro Variable Name Expansion 31 Characters ..................................2160
14.1.17 Switching the Axis Name of an Axis Type Alarm.............................................2164
14.1.18 Periodic Maintenance Screen .............................................................................2164
14.1.19 Selection of display axis on the Current Position Screen...................................2166
14.1.20 Power Consumption Monitor .............................................................................2168
14.1.21 Energy Saving Level Selecting Function ...........................................................2183
14.1.22 Simultaneous Displaying Axis Number Expansion Function ............................2192
14.1.23 Warning Function Against Modification of Setting...........................................2200
14.1.23.1 Overview..................................................................................................... 2200
14.1.23.2 MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING screen ...................................... 2201
14.1.23.3 Registration and protection parameters, C Language Executor programs,
or ladder programs. ..................................................................................... 2204
14.1.23.4 Change of password.................................................................................... 2205
14.1.23.5 Notification of the modification of setting.................................................. 2206
14.1.23.6 Unregistration and canceling protection of parameters, C Language
Executor programs, or ladder programs...................................................... 2206
14.1.23.7 Selection of parameters............................................................................... 2207
14.1.23.8 Parameters................................................................................................... 2212
14.1.23.9 Signals......................................................................................................... 2212
14.1.23.10 Alarm and Message..................................................................................... 2213
14.1.24 Title Display Function in Initial Screen .............................................................2214
c-11
14.2 EDIT ........................................................................................................ 2217

14.2.1 Memory Protection Keys....................................................................................2217
14.2.2 Memory Protection Signal for CNC Parameter..................................................2218
14.2.3 MDI Key Setting ................................................................................................2219
14.2.4 Compact-Type MDI Key Input Function ...........................................................2220
14.3 MULTI PATH DISPLAY AND EDIT.......................................................... 2221
14.3.1 Multi Path Display..............................................................................................2221
14.3.2 Simultaneous Multi Path Program Editing.........................................................2226
14.4 HIGH-SPEED PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ............................................ 2229
15 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA ............................................................... 2235
15.1 RS232C INTERFACE.............................................................................. 2235
15.2 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL ....................................................... 2245
15.3 NC DATA OUTPUT FUNCTION.............................................................. 2251
16 MEASUREMENT............................................................................... 2254
16.1 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) ...................................... 2254
16.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) /
AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) .............................................. 2255
16.3 SKIP FUNCTION ..................................................................................... 2264
16.3.1 Skip Function .....................................................................................................2264
16.3.2 Multiple Axis Command Skip Function.............................................................2272
16.3.3 High-speed Skip Signal ......................................................................................2272
16.3.4 Continuous High-Speed Skip Function ..............................................................2276
16.3.5 Multi-step Skip ...................................................................................................2279
16.3.6 Torque Limit Skip Function ...............................................................................2287
16.4 COMPENSATION VALUE INPUT ........................................................... 2294
16.4.1 Direct Input of Tool Offset Value Measured (T Series).....................................2294
16.4.2 Direct Input of Offset Value Measured B (T Series)..........................................2295
16.4.3 Chattering Prevention of "Direct Input of Offset Value Measured B"
(T Series) ............................................................................................................2313
17 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION............................................................. 2316

17.1 PMC AXIS CONTROL ............................................................................. 2316
17.1.1 PMC Axis Control..............................................................................................2316
17.1.2 PMC Axis Status Display Function....................................................................2410
17.2 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT........................................................................ 2415
17.3 EXTENDED EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT...................... 2428
17.4 EXTENSION OF MAXIMUM SHIFT VALUE FOR EXTERNAL
MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT .............................................................. 2431
17.5 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH....................................... 2433
17.6 EXTERNAL KEY INPUT .......................................................................... 2437
17.7 ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL ................................................................... 2443
17.8 PMC WINDOW PARAMETER WRITE .................................................... 2450
17.8.1 Parameter Write..................................................................................................2450
17.8.2 Parameter (No. 2092, Bit 0 of No. 8162) Write .................................................2455
17.8.3 Parameter (No. 1620) Write ...............................................................................2456
17.8.4 Parameter (No. 1825, No. 1826) Write ..............................................................2457
17.9 DATA TRANSFER BETWEEN PMC AND DCSPMC .............................. 2458
18 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION .............................................. 2461
c-12
18.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD....... 2461

18.2 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION ...................... 2462
18.2.1 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function.........................................................2462
18.2.1.1 Operation on the FOCAS2/Ethernet setting screen .................................... 2463
18.2.1.2 Example of setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.................................... 2465
18.2.2 Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function..........................................................2465
18.2.2.1 Operation on the FTP file transfer setting screen ....................................... 2466
18.2.2.2 Related parameters...................................................................................... 2468
18.2.2.3 Example of setting the FTP file transfer function....................................... 2469
18.2.3 Setting Up the DNS/DHCP Function .................................................................2471
18.2.3.1 Setting up DNS ........................................................................................... 2471
18.2.3.2 Setting up DHCP ........................................................................................ 2472
18.2.4 Setting of the CNC Screen Display Function.....................................................2474
18.2.4.1 Operation on the Setting screen .................................................................. 2475
18.2.5 Setting of the Machine Remote Diagnosis package ...........................................2476
18.2.5.1 Related NC parameters ............................................................................... 2476
18.2.5.2 Operation on the Setting screen .................................................................. 2478
18.2.5.3 Controlling Machine Remote Diagnosis function from PMC .................... 2481
18.2.5.4 Operating Machine Remote Diagnosis screen ............................................ 2485
18.2.6 Setting of the Unsolicited Messaging Function..................................................2488
18.2.6.1 Overview..................................................................................................... 2488
18.2.6.2 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function .................................................. 2490
18.2.6.3 Mode selection ............................................................................................ 2493
18.2.6.4 Setting on the CNC screen.......................................................................... 2495
18.2.6.5 Setting on the personal computer................................................................ 2499
18.2.6.6 Execution methods...................................................................................... 2499
18.2.7 Setting of the CNC Screen Web Server Function ..............................................2506
18.2.7.1 Overview..................................................................................................... 2506
18.2.7.2 Setting of the WEB SERVER function ...................................................... 2508
18.2.7.3 Operation of the CNC screen Web server function .................................... 2509
18.2.7.4 Related signals ............................................................................................ 2512
18.2.8 CNC STATUS NOTIFICATION FUNCTION .................................................2514
18.2.8.1 Overview..................................................................................................... 2514
18.2.8.2 Contents of E-mail ...................................................................................... 2514
18.2.8.3 Cooperation with CNC screen Web server function................................... 2516
18.2.8.4 Setting of CNC Status Notification function .............................................. 2517
18.2.8.5 Related NC parameter................................................................................. 2520
18.2.9 Setting of the Modbus/TCP Server Function .....................................................2521
18.2.9.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 2521
18.2.9.2 SETTING.................................................................................................... 2527
18.2.9.3 MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................... 2530
18.2.9.4 RELATED NC PARAMETER................................................................... 2531
18.3 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES ....... 2532
18.4 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET ........................................ 2532
18.5 MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION . 2534
18.6 LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION .............. 2538
19 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ................................................................... 2544
19.1 SERVO WARNING INTERFACE............................................................. 2544
19.2 SPINDLE WARNING INTERFACE.......................................................... 2547
19.3 FAN MOTOR ABNORMALITY MONITORING FUNCTION AND
COMMUNICATION RETRY MONITORING FUNCTION......................... 2548
c-13
19.3.1 Fan Motor Abnormality Monitoring Function ...................................................2548

19.3.2 Communication Retry Monitoring Function ......................................................2549
19.4 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS........................................................................... 2554
19.4.1 Outline ................................................................................................................2554
19.4.2 Investigation procedure of cause of alarm occurrence .......................................2558
19.4.3 Trouble diagnosis guidance screen.....................................................................2558
19.4.4 Trouble diagnosis monitor screen ......................................................................2560
19.4.5 Trouble diagnosis graphic screen .......................................................................2571
19.4.6 Trouble forecast level setting screen ..................................................................2575
19.4.7 Parameter............................................................................................................2578
19.4.8 Signal..................................................................................................................2579
19.4.9 Restrictions.........................................................................................................2579
19.5 MACHINE ALARM DIAGNOSIS .............................................................. 2580
19.5.1 Outline ................................................................................................................2580
19.5.2 Additional alarm and operator message .............................................................2581
19.5.3 Diagnosis Number ..............................................................................................2581
19.5.4 Environment for Making Trouble Diagnosis Message.......................................2582
19.5.5 Guidance Table for Machine Alarm Diagnosis..................................................2582
19.5.5.1 Install .......................................................................................................... 2582
19.5.5.2 Uninstall...................................................................................................... 2583
19.5.5.3 Making a file to input trouble diagnosis messages ..................................... 2583
19.5.5.4 Structure of the file to input trouble diagnosis messages............................ 2584
19.5.6 Making Trouble Diagnosis Messages ................................................................2586
19.5.6.1 Input Guidance Data ................................................................................... 2586
19.5.6.2 Checking input data .................................................................................... 2589
19.5.6.3 Making a memory card format file ............................................................. 2590
19.5.6.4 Jump from CNC guidance table to MTB’s guidance table ......................... 2591
19.5.7 Making Messages for Multi-languages ..............................................................2592
19.5.7.1 Making sheets for multi-languages ............................................................. 2592
19.5.7.2 Inputting data in the sheet for multi-languages........................................... 2593
19.5.8 Notice .................................................................................................................2594
19.5.9 Translating Data Used with the Former Series (Series 0i /0i Mate-B/C,
Series 16i /18i /21i-B) ........................................................................................2594
20 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION............................................................. 2596

20.1 MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION ........................................ 2596
20.1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................2596
20.1.2 Monitoring by CNC Software ............................................................................2597
20.1.3 Monitoring by Ladder Program..........................................................................2598
20.1.4 Saving the Machine State ...................................................................................2598
20.1.4.1 Restriction of saving ................................................................................... 2599
20.1.5 Setting.................................................................................................................2601
20.1.5.1 PMC signal ................................................................................................. 2601
20.1.5.2 Multi-Sensor Unit ....................................................................................... 2602
20.1.5.3 Delay time for operation history saving...................................................... 2602
20.1.5.4 Machine state history saving response signal (MSUSAS).......................... 2603
20.1.6 Display the CNC Information ............................................................................2606
20.1.7 Machine state monitoring screen........................................................................2607
20.1.7.1 Monitoring of PMC signals ........................................................................ 2608
20.1.7.2 With Multi-Sensor Unit .............................................................................. 2609
20.1.8 Machine state history screen ..............................................................................2613
20.1.8.1 Machine State History List Screen.............................................................. 2614
20.1.8.2 Machine State History CNC Data Screen ................................................... 2620
20.1.8.3 Machine State History Operation History Screen....................................... 2621
20.1.8.4 Output CNC Information ............................................................................ 2622
c-14
20.1.9 Caution ...............................................................................................................2626
20.2 SERVO/SPINDLE WAVEFORM DATA OUTPUT FUNCTION ................ 2627
20.2.1 Outline ................................................................................................................2627
20.2.2 Waveform Data ..................................................................................................2627
20.2.3 Sampling.............................................................................................................2628
20.2.4 Detect Trouble....................................................................................................2629
20.2.5 Sequence when Trouble Occurs .........................................................................2629
20.2.6 Data Output ........................................................................................................2631
20.2.7 Output File Format .............................................................................................2634
20.2.8 Restriction ..........................................................................................................2634
APPENDIX
A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC......................................... 2643
A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES ............................................................................ 2643
A.2 LIST OF SIGNALS................................................................................... 2685
A.2.1 List of Signals (In Order of Functions) ..............................................................2685
A.2.2 List of Signals (In Order of Symbols) ................................................................2717
A.2.3 List of Signals (In Order of Addresses)..............................................................2745
B LIST OF FUNCTIONS USING PMC SIGNALS OTHER THAN G/F

ADDRESS ......................................................................................... 2772
B.1 LIST OF FUNCTIONS USING PMC SIGNALS OTHER THAN G/F
ADDRESS ............................................................................................... 2772
C LIST OF FUNCTIONS INCLUDE ADDRESS P IN THE PROGRAM
COMMAND........................................................................................ 2773
C.1 LIST OF FUNCTIONS INCLUDE ADDRESS P IN THE ARGUMENT
OF G CODE ............................................................................................ 2773
C.2 LIST OF FUNCTIONS INCLUDE ADDRESS P IN THE ARGUMENT
OF M AND S CODE ................................................................................ 2776
D FANUC RECOMMENDATION SETTING PARAMETER .................. 2778
D.1 AUTOMATIC STEEING OF FANUC RECOMMENDATION SETTING
PARAMETER .......................................................................................... 2778
D.2 FANUC RECOMMENDATION SETTING PARAMETER (FIXED TYPE). 2780
D.3 FANUC RECOMMENDATION SETTING PARAMETER (INITIALIZED
TYPE) ...................................................................................................... 2785
E LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 2789
c-15
7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B-64603EN-1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
7 FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Chapter 7, “FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL”, consists
of the following sections and subsections:
7.1 FEEDRATE CONTROL ................................................................................................................1023

7.1.1 Rapid Traverse Rate............................................................................................................1024
7.1.2 Cutting Feedrate Clamp ......................................................................................................1026
7.1.3 Feed per Minute ..................................................................................................................1026
7.1.4 Feed per Revolution/Manual Feed per Revolution.............................................................1031
7.1.5 One-digit F Code Feed (M Series)......................................................................................1034
7.1.6 Inverse Time Feed (M Series).............................................................................................1037
7.1.7 Override ..............................................................................................................................1038
7.1.8 Automatic Corner Override ................................................................................................1052
7.1.9 Dwell/Auxiliary Function Time Override Function ...........................................................1056
7.1.10 External Deceleration .........................................................................................................1061
7.1.11 Positioning by Optimum Accelerations ..............................................................................1067
7.1.12 AI Advanced Preview Control (M Series) / AI Contour Control I / AI Contour
Control II ............................................................................................................................1072
7.1.13 Speed Command Extension in Least Input Increments C...................................................1101
7.2 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL .......................................................................1104
7.2.1 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration.................................................................................1104
7.2.2 Rapid Traverse Bell-shaped Acceleration/Deceleration .....................................................1114
7.2.3 Linear Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation....................................1116
7.2.4 Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation ..........................1118
7.2.5 Optimum Torque Acceleration/Deceleration......................................................................1121
7.2.6 Corner Control ....................................................................................................................1135
7.2.7 Feed Forward in Rapid Traverse ........................................................................................1141
7.2.8 Optimum Acceleration/Deceleration for Rigid Tapping ....................................................1142
7.2.9 Rapid Traverse Acceleration/deceleration before Interpolation .........................................1156
7.3 JERK CONTROL (M SERIES)......................................................................................................1161
7.3.1 Speed Control with Change of Acceleration on Each Axis (M Series) ..............................1161
7.3.2 Look-Ahead Smooth Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration before Interpolation
(M Series) ...........................................................................................................................1164
7.1 FEEDRATE CONTROL

The feed functions control the feedrate of the tool. The following two feed functions are available:
1. Rapid traverse
When the positioning command (G00) is specified, the tool moves at a rapid traverse rate set in the
CNC (parameter No. 1420).
2. Cutting feed
The tool moves at a programmed cutting feedrate.
Override can be applied to a rapid traverse rate or cutting feedrate using the override signal.
- 1023 -
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND
DECELERATION CONTROL B-64603EN-1/01
7.1.1 Rapid Traverse Rate

Overview
The positioning command (G00) positions the tool by rapid traverse.
G00 IP_ ;
G00 : G code (group 01) for positioning (rapid traverse)
IP_ : Dimension word for the end point
In rapid traverse, the next block is executed after the specified rate becomes 0 and the servo motor
reaches a certain range set by the parameter No. 1826 (in-position check).
A rapid traverse rate is set for each axis by parameter No. 1420, so no rapid traverse rate need be
programmed.
The following overrides can be applied to a rapid traverse rate with the rapid traverse override signals
ROV1, ROV2<Gn014.0, 1>: F0, 25, 50, 100%
F0: Allows a fixed feedrate to be set for each axis by parameter No. 1421.
The 1% step rapid traverse override selection signal HROV<Gn096.7> or 0.1% step rapid traverse
override selection signal FHROV<Gn353.7> enables a rapid traverse override to be applied in steps of
1% or 0.1% over a range of 0% to 100%.
Signal
Rapid traversing signal RPDO<Fn002.1>
[Function] This signal indicates that a move command is executed at rapid traverse.
[Output cond.] 1 indicates that an axis starts moving after rapid traverse has been selected in automatic
operation mode or manual operation mode.
0 indicates that an axis starts moving after a feedrate other than rapid traverse has been
selected in automatic operation mode or manual operation mode.
NOTE
1 The rapid traverse in automatic operation includes all rapid
traverses in canned cycle positioning, automatic reference point
return, etc., as well as the move command G00. The manual rapid
traverse also includes the rapid traverse in reference position
return.
2 Once rapid traverse has been selected and movement is started,
this signal remains 1, including during a stop, until another feedrate
has been selected and movement is started.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn002 RPDO
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 RDR RF0 LRP
[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path
- 1024 -
#1 LRP Positioning (G00)

0: Positioning is performed with non-linear type positioning so that the tool moves
along each axis independently at rapid traverse.
1: Positioning is performed with linear interpolation so that the tool moves in a straight
line.
When using 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion, set this parameter to 1.
#4 RF0 When cutting feedrate override is 0% during rapid traverse,

0: The machine tool does not stop moving.
1: The machine tool stops moving.
#6 RDR Dry run for rapid traverse command

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override is 100% for each axis.
1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis

Set the rate of manual rapid traverse when the rapid traverse override is 100% for each
axis.
NOTE
1 If 0 is set, the rate set in parameter No. 1420 (rapid traverse rate for
each axis) is assumed.
2 When manual rapid traverse is selected (bit 0 (RPD) of parameter
No. 1401 is set to 1), manual feed is performed at the feedrate set in
this parameter, regardless of the setting of bit 4 (JRV) of parameter
No. 1402.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Rapid traverse
- 1025 -
7.1.2 Cutting Feedrate Clamp

Overview
An upper limit can be set on the cutting feedrate along each axis (parameter No. 1430). If an actual
cutting feedrate (with an override applied) exceeds a specified upper limit, it is clamped to the upper
limit.
Parameter
1430 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis

Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis.
Alarm and message

Number Message Description
PS5009 PARAMETER ZERO (DRY RUN) The dry run rate parameter No. 1410 or the parameter (No.
1430) for the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis is 0.
PS5011 PARAMETER ZERO (CUT MAX) The setting of the parameter (No. 1430) for the maximum
cutting feedrate is 0.
Warning
WARNING
CNC calculation may involve a feedrate error of ±2% with respect to a specified value.
However, this is not true for acceleration/deceleration. To be more specific, this error is
calculated with respect to a measurement on the time the tool takes to move 500 mm or
more in the steady state.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Cutting feed
7.1.3 Feed per Minute

Overview
- Feed per minute
After specifying G94 (G98 for G code system A in lathe system) (in the feed per minute mode), the
amount of feed of the tool per minute is specified by setting a number after F. G94 (G98 for G code
system A in lathe system) is a modal code. Once a G94 (G98 for G code system A in lathe system) is
specified, it is valid until another G code belonging to the group 05, such as G95 (G99 for G code system
A in lathe system) (feed per revolution) is specified. At power-on, the feed per minute mode (feed per
revolution mode for lathe system and bit 4(FPM) of parameter No.3402 is set to 0) is set.
An override from 0% to 254% (in 1% steps) can be applied to feed per minute with the feedrate override
signals *FV0 to *FV7 <Gn012>.
- 1026 -
[Machining center system] Feed amount per minute

(mm/min or inch/min)
Tool
Workpiece
Table
Fig. 7.1.3 (a) Feed per minute
CAUTION
No override can be used for any commands such as for threading.
Format
M
Feed per minute
G94; G code for feed per minute (Group 05)
F_; Feed rate (mm/min or inch/min)
T
G code system A
Feed per minute
G code system B/C

Feed per minute
Note
- Feedrate (F) at the switching of feed mode
If a modal code in group 05 is switched with a feed selection command, the feedrate (F) is inherited as
modal information, which means that cutting may be performed at an unintended feedrate. If switching a
modal code in group 05, be sure to specify a feedrate (F).
If bit 4 (MFC) of parameter No. 13450 is set to 1, the feedrate (F) is cleared if a modal code in group 05
is switched. This causes alarm PS0011, "FEED ZERO (COMMAND)", to be issued. By inheriting the
feedrate (F) as modal information, it is possible to prevent cutting from being performed at an unintended
feedrate.
Example)
Execute the program below by setting bit 4 (MFC) of parameter No. 13450 to 1.
At the block for switching from G94 to G95 (N06), alarm PS0011 is issued.
O0001 ;
N01 G90 G00 X0.0 Y0.0 ;
N02 M03 S100 ;
N03 G91 G01 ;
- 1027 -
N04 G94 X10.0 F100.0 ;

N05 Y10.0 ;
N06 G95 X10.0 ; ⇒ Alarm PS0011 is issued.
N07 Y10.0;
M
Feed selection commands are the following G codes in group 05.
G93 (inverse time feed) /G94 (feed per minute) / G95 (feed per revolution)
T
Feed selection commands are the following G codes in group 05.
G code system A
G93 (inverse time feed) /G98 (feed per minute) /G99 (feed per revolution)
G code system B/C

G93 (inverse time feed) /G94 (feed per minute) /G95（ (feed per revolution)
- Increment system of F command

The increment system of an F command in the feed per minute mode is as follows:
M
Table 7.1.3 (a) Increment system of F command (for the machining center system)
Decimal point Metric input Inch input
With decimal point Depend on the increment system of the reference axis (IS-A, B, C, D, E)
With no decimal point 1 mm/min 0.01 inch/mm
T
Table 7.1.3 (b) Increment system of F command (for the lathe system)
Bit 2 (FM3) of parameter
Decimal point Metric input Inch input
No.1404
Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
With decimal point -
(IS-A, B, C, D, E)
0 1 mm/min 0.01 inch/min
With no decimal point
1 0.001 mm/min 0.00001 inch/min
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13450 MFC

#4 MFC When the cutting is executed without specifying a feedrate (F) after the modal G code of
group 05 was changed by G93(inverse time feed) / G94(feed per minute) / G95(feed per
revolution) command,
0: The feedrate (F) is inherited as a modal.
1: Alarm PS0011, “FEED ZERO (COMMAND)” is issued.
- 1028 -
NOTE
1 In G93 mode, if the axis command and the feedrate (F) command
are not in the same block, alarm PS1202, "NO F COMMAND AT
G93" is issued regardless of the setting of this parameter.
2 If this parameter bit is set to 1, and if the G code of group 05 is
cleared due to a reset, by setting bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No.
3402 to 1 and bit 5 (C05) of parameter No. 3406 to 0, so that the
modal G code is switched, the feedrate (F) will be cleared even if
bit 7 (CFH) of parameter No. 3409 is set to 1.
3 If this parameter bit is 1, and bit 7 (FC0) of parameter No. 1404 is
set to 1, alarm PS0011 is not issued and the block is executed with
a feedrate of 0 even if the feed selection command is used to
switch the modal code of group 05 and the axis command is
executed in cutting feed mode without specifying a feedrate (F). In
G93 mode, alarm PS1202 is issued regardless of the setting of the
parameter bit FC0.
4 If this parameter bit is 1, alarm PS0011 or PS1202 is not used even
if the feed selection command is used to switch the modal code of
group 05 and the axis command is executed in cutting feed mode
without specifying a feedrate (F), provided that the travel distance
is 0.
5 If this parameter bit is 1, alarms PS0011 and PS1202 are issued if
the feed selection command is used to switch the modal code of
group 05 and the axis command is executed in cutting feed mode
without specifying a feedrate (F), even if cutting feedrate
(parameter No. 1411) during automatic operation is set. (This is
true of the M series.)
6 This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(fixed type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
recommendation setting parameter" in this manual.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
FC0 FM3
1404
FC0

#2 FM3 The increment system of an F command without a decimal point in feed per minute is:
0: 1 mm/min (0.01 inch/min for inch input)
1: 0.001 mm/min (0.00001 inch/min for inch input)
#7 FC0 Specifies the behavior of the machine tool when a block (G01, G02, G03, etc.) containing
a feedrate command (F command) that is 0 is issued during automatic operation, as
follows:
0: An alarm PS0011, “FEED ZERO (COMMAND)” occurs.
1: An alarm PS0011 does not occur, and the block is executed.
- 1029 -
NOTE
1 In inverse time feed (G93) mode, the alarm PS1202, "NO F
COMMAND AT G93" is issued irrespective of the setting of this
parameter.
2 This parameter is set from 1 to 0, if a bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No.
3402 is 1, reset the CNC. Or if CLR is 0, turn off and on the CNC.
1411
Cutting feedrate
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
A cutting feedrate can be specified with this parameter for a machine which does not have
to change the cutting feedrate frequently during machining. This eliminates the need to
specify a cutting feedrate (F code) in the NC program.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CLR FPM
3402
CLR

#4 FPM At power-on time or in the cleared state:

0: G99 or G95 mode (feed per revolution) is set.
1: G98 or G94 mode (feed per minute) is set.
#6 CLR key on the MDI unit, external reset signal ERS<Gn008.7>, reset and rewind signal
RRW<Gn008.6>, and emergency stop signal
0: Cause reset state.
1: Cause clear state.
For the reset and clear states, refer to Appendix in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3406 C05

[Data type] Bit
#5 C05 If bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 1, set a group of G codes to be placed in the
cleared state when the CNC is reset by the key of the MDI unit, the external reset
signal ERS<Gn008.7>, the reset and rewind signal RRW<Gn008.6>, or the emergency
stop signal.
The table below indicates the correspondence between bits and G code groups
- 1030 -
The setting of a bit has the following meaning:
0: Places the G code group in the cleared state.
1: Does not place G code group in the cleared state.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3409 CFH

[Data type] Bit
#7 CFH When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is 1, the key on the MDI unit, the
external reset signal ERS<Gn008.7>, the reset and rewind signal RRW<Gn008.6>, or
emergency stop will,
0: Clear F codes, H codes (for the M series), D codes (for the M series), and T codes
(for the T series).
1: Not clear F codes, H codes (for the M series), D codes (for the M series), and T
codes (for the T series).
Alarm and message

PS0011 FEED ZERO ( COMMAND ) The cutting feedrate instructed by an F code has been set to 0.
This alarm is also generated if the F code instructed for the S
code is set extremely small in a rigid tapping instruction as the
tool cannot cut at the programmed lead.
PS1202 NO F COMMAND AT G93 The F code in inverse time feed mode (G93) is not regarded as
being modal. It must be specified for each block.
Reference item
7.1.4 Feed per Revolution/Manual Feed per Revolution

Overview
- Feed per revolution
After specifying G95 (G99 for lathe system) (in the feed per revolution mode), the amount of feed of the
tool per spindle revolution is to be directly specified by setting a number after F. G95 (G99 for lathe
system) is a modal code. Once a G95 is specified, it is valid until G94 (G98 for lathe system) (feed per
minute) is specified.
An override of between 0 and 254% (in steps of 1%) can be applied to feed per revolution, using the
feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7 <Gn012>.
[Lathe system]
F Feed amount per spindle revolution
(mm/rev or inch/rev)
Fig. 7.1.4 (a) Feed per revolution
- 1031 -
T
- Manual feed per revolution
Jog feedrate can be specified by feed per revolution. An override from 0% to 655.34% (in 0.01% steps)
can be applied to manual feed per revolution with the feedrate override signals *JV0 to *JV15
<Gn010,Gn011>.
NOTE
1 Manual per revolution feed is not available at the setting of without the position
coder (setting bit 0 (NPC) of parameter No.1402 to 1 or bit 1 (FPR) of parameter
No.3729 to 1).
2 When multi spindle control is enabled and the multiple position coders are used,
the target feedback pulses from the position coder for manual per revolution feed
is selected with a position coder select signal (PC2SLC<Gn028.7>,
PC3SLC<Gn026.0>, PC4SLC <Gn026.1>). And in addition, when multi path
control is enabled, an arbitrary position coder can be selected by combining a
path spindle feedback selection signals (SLPCA<Gn064.2>, SLPCB<Gn064.3>,
SLPCC<Gn403.4>, SLPCD<Gn403.5>). For the selection of a position coder,
see the section of "Multi spindle" and "Path spindle control".
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1402 JRV NPC

#0 NPC Feed per revolution without the position coder (function for converting feed per
revolution F to feed per minute F in the feed per revolution mode (G95)) is:
0: Not used
1: Used
#4 JRV Jog feed or incremental feed is

0: Performed at feed per minute.
1: Performed at feed per rotation.
NOTE
1 Specify a feedrate in parameter No. 1423.
2 For the machining center system, the option for
threading/synchronous feed is required.
1423 Feedrate in manual continuous feed (jog feed) for each axis

(1) When bit 4 (JRV) of parameter No. 1402 is set to 0 (feed per minute), specify a jog
feedrate (feed per minute) under an override of 100%.
- 1032 -
(2) When bit 4 (JRV) of parameter No. 1402 is set to 1 (feed per revolution), specify a
jog feedrate (feed per revolution) under an override of 100%.
NOTE
This parameter is clamped to the axis-by-axis manual rapid traverse
rate (parameter No. 1424).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3107 GSC

#3 GSC The feedrate to be displayed:

0: Is a feedrate per minute.
1: Follows the setting of bit 5 (FSS) of parameter No. 3191.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3191 FSS

#5 FSS Feedrate display is:

0: Switched between feedrate per minute and feedrate per revolution depending on the
operating state.
1: Fixed to feedrate per revolution irrespective of the operating state.
NOTE
If the bit 3(GSC) of parameter No.3107 is set to 1 and FSS is set to
0, feedrate par minute is displayed when all of the following
conditions become complete:
- G95(G99 for lathe systems).
- Other than manual feed, rapid traverse, dry run.
- During axis movement.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3729 FPRs

[Data type] Bit spindle
#1 FPRs Feed per revolution (without a position coder) is:

0: Not used for a spindle.
1: Used for a spindle.
In a machine that does not use a position coder, when FPRs is set to 1 for each axis, feed
per revolution can be performed with a spindle command. A feed per revolution is
specified with G95 (G99 for lathe systems) in the same way as for normal operation.
When multispindle control is performed, the target spindle for feed per revolution is
selected with a position coder select signal (PC2SLC<Gn028.7>, PC3SLC<Gn026.0>,
PC4SLC <Gn026.1>).
- 1033 -
NOTE
Enable constant surface speed control (bit 0 (SSC) of parameter No.
8133 is 1).
Caution
CAUTION
When the speed of the spindle is low, feedrate fluctuation may occur.
The slower the spindle rotates, the more frequently feedrate fluctuation occurs.
Reference item
7.1.5 One-digit F Code Feed (M Series)

M
Overview
- One-digit F code feed
When a one-digit number from 1 to 9 is specified after F, the feedrate set for that number in a parameters
Nos. 1451 to 1459 is used. When F0 is specified, the rapid traverse rate is applied.
NOTE
To use one-digit F code feed, set 1 in bit 1 (F1D) of parameter No. 8131.
By setting the one-digit F code feed signal F1D <Gn016.7> to 1 and rotating the manual pulse generator,
the feedrate of the currently selected number is decreased or increased.
The increment/decrement, ΔF, in feedrate per scale of the manual pulse generator is as follows:
Fmax
ΔF =
100n
Fmax : Feedrate upper limit for F1-F4 set by parameter 1460, or feedrate upper limit for F5-F9 set by
parameter 1461
n : Any value of 1 to 127 set by parameter 1450
The feedrate set or altered is kept even while the power is off. The current feedrate is displayed on the
screen.
- Cutting feed override during one-digit F code feed

In case bit 7 (F1O) of parameter No. 1406 is set to 1, the following functions are enabled for a cutting
feedrate during one-digit F code feed:
- Feedrate override
- Second feedrate override
- Override cancel
Even during machining using one-digit F code feed, the feedrate can be freely changed, within an
applicable override range, from the parameter-set value by changing the override switch.
Signal
One-digit F code feed signal F1D<Gn016.7>
[Classification] Input signal
- 1034 -
[Function] Increases or decreases one-digit F speed set by the parameters Nos. 1451 to 1459 using
the manual pulse generator.
Since the manual pulse generator may also be used for axis feeding, signal F1D
<G016.7> designates which function may be used.
[Operation] When the signal is 1, the one-digit F speed can be increased/decreased using the manual
pulse generator.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G016 F1D
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1406
F1O

#7 F1O For the cutting feedrate specified by a single-digit F code (F1 to F9), feedrate override,
second feedrate override, and override cancellation are:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
For the F0 feedrate, rapid traverse override is enabled regardless
of the setting of this parameter.
1450
Change of feedrate for one graduation on the manual pulse generator during one-digit F feed code

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to 127
Set the constant that determines the change in feedrate as the manual pulse generator is
rotated one graduation during one-digit F feed code.
F max i
ΔF = (where, i=1 or 2)
100n
In the above equation, set n. That is, the number of revolutions of the manual pulse
generator, required to reach feedrate Fmaxi is obtained. Fmaxi refers to the upper limit of
the feedrate for a one-digit F code feed command, and set it in parameter No. 1460 or
1461.
Fmax1: Upper limit of the feedrate for F1 to F4 (parameter No. 1460)
Fmax2: Upper limit of the feedrate for F5 to F9 (parameter No. 1461)
1451
Feedrate for F1
to to
1459
Feedrate for F9

- 1035 -

These parameters set the feedrates for one-digit F code feed commands F1 to F9. When a
one-digit F code feed command is specified, and the feedrate is changed by turning the
manual pulse generator, the parameter-set value also changes accordingly.
1460
Upper limit of feedrate for F1 to F4
1461
Upper limit of feedrate for F5 to F9

Set the upper limit of feedrate for the one-digit F code feed command.
As the feedrate increases by turning the manual pulse generator, the feedrate is clamped
when it reaches the upper limit set. If a one-digit F feed command F1 to F4 is executed,
the upper limit is that set in parameter No. 1460. If a one-digit F code feed command F5
to F9 is executed, the upper limit is that set in parameter No. 1461.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8131
F1D
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#1 F1D One-digit F code feed is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
Reference item
- 1036 -
7.1.6 Inverse Time Feed (M Series)

M
Overview
Feedrate of the tool can be specified by the move distance of the block and inverse time (FRN).
- Linear interpolation (G01)

FRN=1/Time (min) = Speed/Distance
Speed : mm/ min (metric input)
inch/ min (inch input)
Distance : mm (metric input)
inch (inch input)
- Circular interpolation (G02, G03)

FRN=1/Time (min) = Speed/Circle radius
Speed : mm/ min (metric input)
inch/ min (inch input)
Circle radius : mm (metric input)
inch (inch input)
CAUTION
In circular interpolation, the distance is not an actual distance of the block but the
speed is calculated from the circle radius.
Alarm and message

PS1202 NO F COMMAND AT G93 The F code in inverse time feed mode (G93) is not regarded as
being modal. It must be specified for each block.
Reference item
- 1037 -
7.1.7 Override
7.1.7.1 Rapid traverse override

Overview
An override of four steps (F0, 25%, 50%, and 100%) can be applied to the rapid traverse rate. F0 is set by
a parameter No. 1421.
The 1% step rapid traverse override selection signal HROV<Gn096.7> or 0.1% step rapid traverse
override selection signal FHROV<Gn353.7> enables a rapid traverse override to be selected in steps of
1% or 0.1% over a range of 0% to 100%.
Rapid traverse rate Override 5m/min

10m/min 50%
Fig. 7.1.7 (a) Rapid traverse override
- Feedrate
Actual feedrate is obtained by multiplying the rapid traverse rate preset by parameter No. 1420 by the
override value determined by this signal, whether in automatic or manual operation (including manual
reference position return).
- F0 rate
For F0 value, an absolute value is set by parameter No. 1421 within a range of 0 to rapid traverse rate (for
each axis).
- 1% step rapid traverse override

1% step rapid traverse override selection signal HROV determines whether rapid traverse override
specified with rapid traverse override signals ROV1 and ROV2<Gn014.0,.1> is used or 1% step rapid
traverse override is used.
When signal HROV is 0, override is applied to the rapid traverse rate using signals ROV1 and ROV2.
When signal HROV is 1, ROV1 and ROV2 are ignored, 1% step rapid traverse override signals *HROV0
to *HROV6<Gn096.0 to .6> being used to override the rapid traverse rate.
- 0.1% step rapid traverse override

With the 0.1% step rapid traverse override selection signal FHROV, a 1% step rapid traverse override or
0.1% step rapid traverse override can be selected for use.
When the HROV signal is set to 1 and the FHROV signal is set to 0, a 1% step rapid traverse override is
applied.
When the HROV and FHROV signals are both set to 1, the 1% step rapid traverse override is disabled,
and the rapid traverse override specified by the 0.1% step rapid traverse override signals *FHRO0 to
*FHRO9<Gn352.0 to .7,Gn353.0 to .1> is enabled.
- PMC axis control

These 1% step rapid traverse override signals or 0.1% step rapid traverse override selection signals are
also effective to the rapid traverse rate for the PMC axis. When rapid traverse override is applied to the
PMC axis (using rapid traverse override signals EROV1, EROV2 <Gn150.0,1>) with the setting of the
OVE bit (bit 2 of parameter No. 8001) independently of the CNC, the 1% step rapid traverse override
signals are ineffective.
- 1038 -
- Cutting feedrate override 0%

In case that the RF0 bit (bit 4 of parameter No.1401) is set to 1, when cutting feedrate override is 0%
during rapid traverse, the machine tool stops moving.
Signal
Rapid traverse override signal ROV1,ROV2<Gn014.0 to 1>
[Function] These signals override the rapid traverse rate
[Operation] These code signals correspond to the rates as follows (Table 7.1.7 (a)):
Table 7.1.7 (a) Signals ROV1 to ROV2 and override value

Rapid traverse override
Override value
ROV2 ROV1
0 0 100%
0 1 50%
1 0 25%
1 1 F0
F0 : Set in parameter No. 1421
1% step rapid traverse override selection signal HROV<Gn096.7>

[Function] Selects the rapid traverse override signals or the 1% step rapid traverse override signals.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the values of *HROV0 to *HROV6 are enabled. (Rapid
traverse override by signals ROV1 and ROV2 is disabled.)
When this signal is set to 0, Rapid traverse override by signals ROV1 and ROV2 is
enabled. (the values of *HROV0 to *HROV6 are disabled.)
1% step rapid traverse override signals *HROV0 to *HROV6<Gn096.0 to 6>

[Function] Applies override to the rapid traverse rate in the range of 0% to 100% in steps of 1%.
[Operation] These seven signals give a binary code indicating an override applied to the rapid traverse
rate.
- When a binary code corresponding to an override value of 101% to 127% is
specified, the applied override is clamped at 100%.
- Signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 are inverted signals.
To set an override value of 1%, set signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 to 1111110, which
corresponds to a binary code of 0000001.
0.1% step rapid traverse override selection signal FHROV<Gn353.7>

[Function] Selects whether 1% rapid traverse override signals or 0.1% step rapid traverse override
signals are enabled when the HROV signal is set to 1.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the values of *FHRO0 to *FHRO9 are enabled. (The values
of the *HROV0 to *HROV6 signals are invalidated.)
When this signal is set to 0, the values of *HROV0 to *HROV6 are enabled. (The values
of the *FHRO0 to *FHRO9 signals are invalidated.)
0.1% step rapid traverse override signals

*FHRO0 to *FHRO9<Gn352.0 to 7, Gn353.0 to 1>
[Function] Applies override to the rapid traverse rate in the range of 0% to 100% in steps of 0.1%.
[Operation] These ten signals give a binary code indicating an override applied to the rapid traverse
rate.
- 1039 -
- When a binary code corresponding to an override value of 100.1 to 102.3% is

- Signals *FHRO0 to *FHRO9 are inverted signals.
To set an override value of 0.1%, set signals *FHRO0 to *FHRO9 to 1111111110,
which corresponds to a binary code of 0000000001.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn014 ROV2 ROV1
Gn096 HROV *HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0
Gn352 *FHRO7 *FHRO6 *FHRO5 *FHRO4 *FHRO3 *FHRO2 *FHRO1 *FHRO0
Gn353 FHROV *FHRO9 *FHRO8
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 RF0


1421 F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis

Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3002 IOV

#4 IOV Override-related signal logic is:

0: Used without modification
(A signal of negative logic is used as a negative logic signal, and a signal of positive
logic is used as a positive logic signal.)
1: Inverted
(A signal of negative logic is used as a positive logic signal, and a signal of positive
logic is used as a negative logic signal.)
The signals indicated below are affected.

Signal of negative logic:
- Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7<Gn012>
- Second feedrate override signals*AFV0 to *AFV7<Gn013>
- 1040 -
- 0.01% step second feedrate override signals *APF00 to *APF15<Gn094, Gn095>
- Feedrate override signals (for PMC axis control)
*EFOV0g to *EFOV7g<G0151/G0163/G0175/G0187>
- Software operator’s panel signals *FV0O to *FV7O<Fn078>
Signals of positive logic:
- Rapid traverse override signals ROV1,ROV2<Gn014.0, Gn014.1>
- Software operator’s panel signals ROV1O,ROV2O<Fn076.4, Fn076.5>
- Rapid traverse override signals (for PMC axis control)
EROV1g,EROV2g<G0150.0, G0150.1/G0162.0, G0162.1/G0174.0,
G0174.1/G0186.0, G0186.1>
The signals indicated below are not affected.

- 1% step rapid traverse override selection signal HROV <Gn096.7>
- 1% step rapid traverse override signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 <Gn096.0 to
Gn096.6>
- 0.1% step rapid traverse override selection signal FHROV <Gn353.7>
- 0.1% step rapid traverse override signals *FHRO0 to *FHRO9 <Gn352.0 to
Gn352.7, Gn353.0 to Gn353.1>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8001 OVE

#2 OVE Signals related to dry run and override used in PMC axis control
0: Same signals as those used for the CNC
1: Signals specific to the PMC
The signals used depend on the settings of these parameter bits as indicated below.
Bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001 = 0 Bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001
Signals (same signals as those used for the =1
CNC) (signals specific to the PMC)
Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7 <Gn012> *EFV0g to *EFV7g <G0151>
Override cancellation signal OVC <Gn006.4> EOVCg <G0150.5>
Rapid traverse override signals ROV1, ROV2 <Gn014.0 to 1> EROV1g,EROV2g <G0150.0 to 1>
Dry run signal DRN <Gn046.7> EDRNg <G0150.7>
Rapid traverse selection signal RT <Gn019.7> ERTg <G0150.6>
1% step rapid traverse override
HROV <Gn096.7> None
selection signal
1% step rapid traverse override
*HROV0 to *HROV6 <Gn096.0 to 6> None
signals
0.1% step rapid traverse
FHROV <Gn353.7> None
override selection signal
0.1% step rapid traverse <Gn352.0 to 7,
*FHRO0 to *FHRO9 None
override signals Gn353.0 to 1>
(The signal addresses at PMC selection time are for the first group.)
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Rapid traverse override
- 1041 -
7.1.7.2 Feedrate override

Overview
A programmed feedrate can be reduced or increased by a percentage (%) selected by the override dial.
This feature is used to check a program.
For example, if the programmed feedrate is 100 mm/min, by setting the override value to 50% by using
the feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7 <Gn012>, it is possible to move the tool at 50 mm/min.
Feedrate 100 mm/min
(Specified by programmed)
Tool
Check the machining by altering

Feedrate 50 mm/min after the feedrate from the value
feedrate override specified in the program.
Workpiece
Fig. 7.1.7 (b) Feedrate override
Limitation
M
The feedrate override, the second feedrate override and the override cancel are disabled for a cutting
feedrate during one-digit F code feed. However, they are enabled in case that a bit 7 (F1O) of parameter
No.1406 is set to 1.
- Cutting feed override during rigid tapping

The feedrate override, the second feedrate override and the override cancel are disabled for
cutting/extraction operation in rigid tapping. However, they are enabled in case that a bit 4 (OVS) of
parameter No.5203 is set to 1.
- Cutting feed override in PMC axis control

The feedrate override and the override cancel are enabled even in the PMC axis control. However, signals
specific to PMC are enabled in case that a bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No.8001 is set to 1.
Signal
Feedrate Override signal *FV0 to *FV7<Gn012>
[Function] These signals override the cutting feedrate. Eight binary code signals correspond to
override values as follows:
7
Override value= ∑ | 2 i × Vi | %
i=0
Vi=0 when *FVi is 1 and
Vi=1 when *FVi is 0
These signals have the following weight.
*FV0 : 1% *FV1 : 2%
*FV2 : 4% *FV3 : 8%
*FV4 : 16% *FV5 : 32%
*FV6 : 64% *FV7 : 128 %
- 1042 -
When all signals are 0, they are regarded as overriding 0% in the same way as when all
signals are 1 .
Thus, the override is selectable in steps over a range of 0 to 254%.
[Operation] Actual feedrate is obtained by multiplying the specified speed by the override value
selected by this signal.
The override is regarded as 100%, regardless of this signal, in the following cases:
- Override cancel signal OVC<Gn006.4> is 1.
- During cutting in tap cycle of canned cycle;
- Tapping mode (G63)
- Thread cutting is in progress.
Some examples are listed below.
Table7.1.7 (b) Example of feedrate override

*FV0 to *FV7 Override vlue
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (%)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 3
1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 4
1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 5
1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 10
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 15
1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 20
1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 25
1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 30
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 35
1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 40
1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 45
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 50
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 60
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 70
1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 80
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 90
1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 100
0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 150
0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 200
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 254
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The value is calculated as follows.

1. In case that the override is 2%,
(1) Convert to binary data. 0000 0010
(2) Do logical NOT of binary data. 1111 1101
2. In case that the input signal is “1110 1110”,
(2) Convert to decimal data. 17%
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0
- 1043 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 RF0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1406
F1O

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3002 IOV


1: Inverted

- 1044 -
G0174.1/G0186.0, G0186.1>

Gn096.6>
Gn352.7, Gn353.0 to Gn353.1>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5203 OVS

#4 OVS In rigid tapping, override by the feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7 <Gn012> and
the second feedrate override signals *AFV0 to *AFV7 <Gn013> (or 0.01% step second
feedrate override signals *APF00 to *APF15 <Gn094, Gn095>), and the cancellation of
override by the override cancel signal OVC <Gn006.4> is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When feedrate override is enabled, extraction override is disabled.
The spindle override is clamped to 100% during rigid tapping, regardless of the setting of
this parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8001 OVE

Reference item
7.1.7.3 Second feedrate override

Overview
An override can be applied to the cutting feedrate. The override is applied to the feedrate to which an
override has been applied with the first feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7 <Gn012>.
(Actual feedrate) = F × FV1 × FV2
F: Specified cutting feedrate
FV1: Feedrate override (%)
FV2: Second feedrate override (%)
A percentage from 0 to 254 % can be selected in steps of 1% as the second feedrate override.
In case that a bit 3 (OV2) of parameter No.1402 is set to 1, a percentage from 0 to 655.34% can be
selected in steps 0.01% as the second feedrate override.
- 1045 -
NOTE
This function is an optional function.
Limitation
M


The second feedrate override is disabled in the PMC axis control.
Signal
Second feedrate override signals *AFV0 to *AFV7<Gn013>
[Function] The cutting feedrate is multiplied by the second feedrate override. These eight binary
code signals correspond to the override values as follows.
7
Override value= ∑ | 2 i × Vi | %
i=0
Vi=0 when *AFVi is 1 and
Vi=1 when *AFVi is 0
*AFV0 : 1% *AFV1 : 2%
*AFV2 : 4% *AFV3 : 8%
*AFV4 : 16% *AFV5 : 32%
*AFV6 : 64% *AFV7 : 128 %
If all signals are 0 or 1, the override is regarded as 0%. The override is selectable in steps
of 1% over a range of 0 to 254%.
[Operation] In case that a bit 3 (OV2) of parameter No.1402 is set to 0, those signals are enabled.
In cutting feed during automatic operation, the actual feedrate is obtained as follows.
Actual feedrate = (Specified speed) × (First override) × (Override value specified by this
signal)
Since the condition under which the first override is ignored and is set to 100% remains
valid, the second feedrate override is also assumed to 100%.
- 1046 -
Table7.1.7 (c) Example of second feedrate override
*AFV0 to *AFV7 Override value
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (%)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 3
1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 4
1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 5
1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 10
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 15
1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 20
1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 25
1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 30
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 35
1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 40
1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 45
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 50
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 60
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 70
1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 80
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 90
1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 100
0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 150
0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 200
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 254
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1. In case that the override is 2%,
(1) Convert to binary data. 0000 0010
2. In case that the input signal is “1110 1110”,
(2) Convert to decimal data. 17%
NOTE
In case that the software option of second feedrate override is
enabled and the second feedrate override is not used, those
signals must be set so that the override value is set to 100%.
0.01% step second feedrate override signals *APF00 to *APF15<Gn094, Gn095>

[Function] The cutting feedrate is multiplied by the second feedrate override. These sixteen binary
code signals correspond to the override values as follows.
15
Override value= ∑ | 2 i × Vi | ×0.01%
i=0
Vi=0 when *APFi is 1 and
Vi=1 when *APFi is 0
*APF00=0.01%, *APF01=0.02%, *APF02=0.04%, *APF03=0.08%
*APF04=0.16%, *APF05=0.32%, *APF06=0.64%, *APF07=1.28%
*APF08=2.56%, *APF09=5.12%, *APF10=10.24%, *APF11=20.48%
*APF12=40.96%, *APF13=81.92%, *APF14=163.84%, *APF15=327.68%
- 1047 -
If all signals are 0 or 1, the override is regarded as 0%. The override is selectable in steps
of 0.01% over a range of 0 to 655.34%.
[Operation] In case that a bit 3 (OV2) of parameter No.1402 is set to 1, those signals are enabled.
In cutting feed during automatic operation, the actual feedrate is obtained as follows.
Actual feedrate = (Specified speed) × (First override) × (Override value specified by this
signal)
Since the condition under which the first override is ignored and is set to 100% remains
valid, the second feedrate override is also assumed to 100%.
Table7.1.7 (d) Example of 0.01% step second feedrate override

*APF00～*APF15 Override value
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (%)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.00
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0.01
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0.02
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0.05
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0.10
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0.20
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0.50
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1.00
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 2.00
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 5.00
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 10.00
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 20.00
1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 50.00
1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 100.00
1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 200.00
0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 500.00
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 655.34
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.00

1. In case that the override is 23.45%,
(1) Multiply by 100 2345
(2) Convert to binary data. 0000 1001 0010 1001
(3) Do logical NOT of binary data. 1111 0110 1101 0110
2. In case that the input signal is “1110 1110 1110 1110”,
(1) Do logical NOT of binary data. 0001 0001 0001 0001
(2) Convert to decimal data. 4369
(3) Multiply by 0.01 43.69%
NOTE
In case that the software option of second feedrate override is
enabled and the second feedrate override is not used, those
signals must be set so that the override value is set to 100%.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn013 *AFV7 *AFV6 *AFV5 *AFV4 *AFV3 *AFV2 *AFV1 *AFV0
Gn094 *APF07 *APF06 *APF05 *APF04 *APF03 *APF02 *APF01 *APF00
Gn095 *APF15 *APF14 *APF13 *APF12 *APF11 *APF10 *APF09 *APF08
- 1048 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1402 OV2

#3 OV2 Signals used for 2nd feedrate override are

0: *AFV0 to *AFV7 <Gn013> (specified every 1%)
1: *APF00 to *APF15 <Gn094, Gn095> (specified every 0.01%)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1406
F1O

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3002 IOV


1: Inverted

- 1049 -

G0174.1/G0186.0, G0186.1>

Gn096.6>
Gn352.7, Gn353.0 to Gn353.1>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5203 OVS

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
this parameter.
7.1.7.4 Override cancel

Overview
The override cancel signal OVC<Gn006.4> fixes the feedrate override to 100%.
Limitation
M


The feedrate override and the override cancel are enabled even in the PMC axis control. However, signals
specific to PMC are enabled in case that a bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No.8001 is set to 1.
Signal
Override cancel signal OVC<Gn006.4>
- 1050 -
[Function] Feedrate override is fixed to 100%.
[Operation] When the signal is 1, the CNC operates as follows:
- The feedrate override is fixed to 100% regardless of the feedrate override signals
*FV0 to *FV7 <Gn012> or second feedrate override signals *AFV0 to *AFV7
<Gn013> (or 0.01% step second feedrate override signals *APF00 to *APF15
<Gn094, Gn095>). That is, the specified feedrate is used as is.
- Rapid traverse override and spindle speed override are not affected.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn006 OVC
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1406
F1O

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5203 OVS

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
this parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8001 OVE

- 1051 -
7.1.8 Automatic Corner Override

The movement of a tool in an inner corner or an inner arc is automatically decelerated during cutter
compensation, so that the load on the tool is reduced, and a surface obtained by cutting becomes smooth.
NOTE
To use automatic corner override, set 1 in bit 3 (AOV) of parameter No. 8131.
7.1.8.1 Inner corner automatic override (G62)

Explanation
- Overriding conditions
When G62 is specified, and the tool path with cutter compensation applied forms an inner corner, the
feedrate is automatically overridden at both ends of the corner.
There are four types of inner corners (Fig. 7.1.8 (a)).
2° ≤ θ ≤ θp ≤ 178° in Fig. 7.1.8 (a)
θp is a value set with parameter No. 1711. When θ is approximately equal to θp, the inner corner is
determined with an error of 0.001° or less.
:Tool
1. Straight line-straight line 2. Straight line-arc
:Programmed path
:Cutter center path
θ θ
3. Arc-straight line 4. Arc-arc
θ
θ
Fig. 7.1.8 (a) Inner corner
- Overriding range
When an inner corner is found, the feedrate is overridden before and after the intersection of the
corresponding tool paths. Feedrate override distances Le and Ls are linear dimensions between the
intersection of the tool paths and a point on either cutter center path (Fig. 7.1.8 (b), Fig. 7.1.8 (c), Fig.
7.1.8 (d)). Le and Ls are specified in parameters Nos.1713 and 1714.
Programmed path
Le Ls
a b
Cutter center path
An override is applied to the range from point a to point b.

Fig. 7.1.8 (b) Overriding range (straight line - straight line)
- 1052 -
An arc-shaped path is overridden if the start point and end point of the arc is in the same quadrant or in
two adjacent quadrants (Fig. 7.1.8 (c)).
Programmed path
Cutter center path
Fig. 7.1.8 (c) Overriding range (arc - arc)
On arc-shaped path <2> programmed as indicated below, an override occurs between points a and b and
between points c and d (Fig. 7.1.8 (d)).
Programmed path
d a
Le Ls Le Ls
C b
<2>
Tool Cutter center path
Fig. 7.1.8 (d) Overriding range (straight line - arc, arc - straight line)
- Override value
An override value is set with parameter No. 1712. An override value is valid even for dry run and
F1-digit feed specification.
In the feed per minute mode, the actual feedrate is as follows:
F × (inner corner automatic override) × (feedrate override)
Limitation
- Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
The inner corner override function is disabled during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.
- Start-up, G41, G42

The inner corner override function is not carried out for a corner preceded by a cutter compensation
start-up block or a corner followed by a block containing G41 or G42,.
- Offset value
If the offset value is zero, the inner corner override function is not executed.
- 1053 -
7.1.8.2 Internal circular cutting feedrate change

For internally offset circular cutting, the feedrate on a programmed path is set to a specified feedrate (F)
by specifying the circular cutting feedrate with respect to F, as indicated below (Fig. 7.1.8 (e)). This
function is valid in the cutter compensation mode, regardless of the G62 code.
Rc
F×
Rp
Rc: Cutter center path radius
Rp: Programmed tool path radius
It is also valid for the dry run and the one digit F cord feed.
Programmed
tool path
Rc Tool center path
Rp
Fig. 7.1.8 (e) Internal circular cutting feedrate change
If Rc is much smaller than Rp, Rc/Rp≒0; the tool stops. A minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) is to be
specified with parameter No. 1710. When Rc/Rp≤MDR, the feedrate of the tool is (F×MDR).
If parameter No. 1710 is 0, the minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) is 100%.
CAUTION
When internal circular cutting must be performed together with automatic
override for inner corners, the feedrate of the tool is as follows:
F×Rc/Rp×(inner corner override)×(feedrate override)
Parameter
Minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) for inner circular cutting feedrate change by automatic corner
1710
override

[Unit of data] %
Set a minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) for an inner circular cutting feedrate change by
automatic corner override.
In the case of circular cutting offset inward, the actual feedrate is determined by a
specified feedrate (F) as follows:
Rc
F× Rc: Radius of tool center path
Rp Rp: Programmed radius
Thus, the feedrate along the programmed path satisfies the specified value of F.
- 1054 -
Programmed path
Rc
Tool center path
Rp
However, if Rc is too small when compared with Rp, Rc/Rp 0 results to stop the tool.
So, a minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) is set, and the feedrate of the tool is set to
F×(MDR) when Rc/Rp ≤ MDR.
When this parameter is 0, the minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) is 100%.
1711 Inner determination angle (θp) for inner corner override

[Unit of data] deg
Set an inner determination angle for inner corner override in automatic corner overriding.
1712 Override value for inner corner override

[Unit of data] %
Set an inner corner override value in automatic corner overriding.
1713 Start distance (Le) for inner corner override

[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set a start distance for inner corner override in automatic corner overriding.
1714 End distance (Ls) for inner corner override

Set an end distance for inner corner override in automatic corner overriding.
When θ ≤ θp, an inner corner is assumed. (Parameter No. 1711 is used to set θp.)
- 1055 -
When a corner is determined to be an inner corner, an override is applied to the feedrate

in the range of Le in the previous block from the intersection of the corner and in the
range of Ls in the next block from the intersection of the corner.
Distances Le and Ls represent linear distances from the intersection of a corner to points
on the tool center path.
Le and Ls are set in parameters Nos. 1713 and 1714.
Programmed path
Tool center path
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8131
AOV
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#3 AOV Automatic corner override is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
7.1.9 Dwell/Auxiliary Function Time Override Function

This function applies override to the dwell and auxiliary (M/S/T/B) function in the range of 0% to 100%
in steps of 1%.
If the override is applied to auxiliary (M/S/T/B) function, the next block is executed after a shortage of
time. The actual processing time is considered to be 100%, and the shortage is calculated from the time.
NOTE
Explanation
- Override
To select whether to enable/disable this function, set the 1% step rapid traverse override selection signal
HROV<Gn096.7>. To select the override ratio, set the 1% step rapid traverse override signals *HROV0
to *HROV6 <Gn096.0-Gn096.6>.
- Dwell
Override can be applied to dwelling.
[Example]
When "G04 P10000;" is commanded, the relationships between override and dwell time is as
follows.
- 1056 -
Override Dwell time

25% 40.0 seconds
50% 20.0 seconds
75% 13.3 seconds
100% 10.0 seconds
NOTE
Override is invalid for dwell per revolution.
- Auxiliary function (M/S/T/B)

Override is applied to the time from the output of an M/S/T/B code to the end signal FIN<Gn004.3> turns
0. The time from the output of an M/S/T/B code to the MFIN, SFIN, TFIN, or BFIN is changed, for
high-speed M/S/T/B interface. The duration includes the time spent to interact with the PMC.
The next block begins after the end signal FIN<Gn004.3> is turned 0 and the shortage of time is elapsed.
S,T,B code
M,S,T,B code M code
MF,SF,TF,BF signal
(A)
(B)
FIN signal
Override target time The next block
begins.
(A) Delay time of strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF.(parameter No.3010)
(B) Time during which the M,S,T, or B function completion signal (FIN) can be
accepted.(parameter No.3011)
Timing chart for usual M/S/T/B interface
S,T,B code
M,S,T,B code M code
MF,SF,TF,BF signal
(A)
MFIN,SFIN,
TFIN,BFIN signal Override target time The next block
begins.
(A) Delay time of strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF.(parameter No.3010)
Timing chart for High-speed M/S/T/B interface
[Example]
If the override is 60%, and the following program is commanded.
N10 M03 ;
N20 ... ;
If the processing time of N10 block is 80ms, N20 block begins in about 56ms after the N10 block is
completed.
Shortage of time = 80msec×100/60-80msec = 53.333 56msec
- 1057 -
NOTE
The time is counted in units of 4ms or 8ms. And a fraction is raised up. The unit
is different depending on the system.
For the 1% step rapid traverse override signal, a value is decided when the auxiliary function is finished.
The override rate is not guaranteed when it fluctuates before/after the auxiliary function is finished.
If a move command and an auxiliary function are included in the same block, it operates as follows :
1. If the move command is finished before the auxiliary function:
- Override is enabled.
2. If the auxiliary function is finished before the move command:
- Override is disabled.
If more than 1 auxiliary function is included in the same block, a shortage of time is calculated from the
auxiliary function that requires the longest processing time.
NOTE
1 This function is invalid for dwell(command 04H) and auxiliary
functions(command 12H,14H,15H) in PMC axis control function.
2 For dwelling, the next block is not executed while the 1% step rapid traverse
override signal specifies 0%.
3 In the auxiliary function, if the feed hold is overlapped with a shortage of time,
the time is not counted as the shortage.
4 The parameter No. 3018 indicates the override ratio for auxiliary function when
the 1% step rapid traverse override signal specifies 0%. If this parameter is set
to 0, the ratio is assumed to 10%. However, the next block is not executed while
the 1% step rapid traverse override signal specifies 0%.
5 For M02/M30 auxiliary functions, this override function can be disabled/enabled
by bit 7 (OVM) of parameter No. 3002.
Signal
1% step rapid traverse override selection signal HROV<Gn096.7>
[Function] Selects the rapid traverse override signals or the 1% step rapid traverse override signals.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the values of *HROV0 to *HROV6 are enabled. (Rapid
traverse override by signals ROV1 and ROV2 is disabled.)
When this signal is set to 0, Rapid traverse override by signals ROV1 and ROV2 is
enabled. (the values of *HROV0 to *HROV6 are disabled.)
1% step rapid traverse override signals *HROV0 to *HROV6<Gn096.0-Gn096.6>

[Function] Applies override to the rapid traverse rate in the range of 0% to 100% in steps of 1%.
[Operation] These seven signals give a binary code indicating an override applied to the rapid traverse
rate.
- When a binary code corresponding to an override value of 101% to 127% is
- Signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 are inverted signals.
To set an override value of 1%, set signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 to “1111110”,
which corresponds to a binary code of “0000001”.
- 1058 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn096 HROV *HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1602 CAF

#2 CAF In cutter compensation mode or tool nose radius compensation mode, the circular cutting
feedrate change is;
0: Performed on the inner arc only.
1: Performed on the inner and outer arcs.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3002 OVM POV

#6 POV Dwell/Auxiliary function time override function is:

0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
#7 OVM In Dwell/Auxiliary function time override function, override function for M02,M30 is:
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
3010 Time lag in strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] msec
The time required to send strobe signals MF<Fn007.0>, SF<Fn007.2>, TF<Fn007.3>,
and BF<Fn007.7> after the M, S, T, and B codes are sent, respectively.
M, S, T, B code
MF, SF, TF, BF signal
Delay time
- 1059 -
NOTE
The time is counted in units of 4 ms. If the set value is not a
multiple of four, it is raised to the next multiple of four
Example
When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
If the high speed M/S/T/B interface is used, when 0 is set, 0 ms
is assumed.
The time count period may change, depending on the system.
3011 Acceptable width of M, S, T, and B function completion signal (FIN)

[Unit of data] msec
Set the minimum signal width of the valid M, S, T, and B function completion signal
(FIN).
M, S, T, B code
FIN sigal
Ignored because shorter Valid because longer

than min. signal width than min. signal width
NOTE
multiple of four, it is raised to the next multiple of four
Example
Percentage assumed when the 1% rapid traverse override signal indicates 0% during execution of an
3018
auxiliary function

[Unit of data] %
When the 1% rapid traverse override signal indicates 0% in the dwell/auxiliary function
time override function, this parameter sets the percentage for calculating an insufficient
time.
0% is assumed to be 10%.
- 1060 -
7.1.10 External Deceleration

Overview
The control axis is externally decelerated. The feedrate is decelerated by the external deceleration signals
from the machine. The deceleration rate is set by the parameters.
The external deceleration signal are provided for each axis and direction.
As five types of deceleration condition settings can be dynamically selected by the signals.
External deceleration can be applied to rapid traverse rate, cutting feedrate, and manual handle feedrate.
NOTE
To use external deceleration, set 1 in bit 2 (EDC) of parameter No.8131.
- Rapid traverse and cutting feed
Five types of deceleration conditions can be set by the parameters.
When deceleration conditions specified by multiple external signals input during machining are conflicted,
the condition with the lowest external deceleration rate is applied.
External deceleration settings 2, 3. 4, and 5 can be switched between enabled and disabled by the
parameters.
- Manual handle feed
Five types of deceleration conditions can be set by the parameters. For handle feed, the maximum
feedrate is switched when the external deceleration signal in the positive or negative direction for the
handle axis is set to 0. When multiple conditions are conflicted, the condition with the lowest maximum
feedrate is applied.
Signal
External deceleration signals 1
*+ED1 to *+ED8<Gn118>,*-ED1 to *-ED8<Gn120>
[Function] These signals specifies whether to apply external deceleration to each direction for each
control axis. The sign + or - preceding ED indicates the direction of feed which is
decelerated. The number following ED indicates the number of external deceleration
setting. The last number indicates the number of a control axis.
* xEDyz
z : 1 ….. The 1st axis is decelerated.
2 ….. The 2nd axis is decelerated.
3 ….. The 3rd axis is decelerated.
:
y: None.. External deceleration setting 1 is selected.

2 ….. External deceleration setting 2 is selected.
- 1061 -
x: + : The feed is decelerated in the plus (+) direction.

- : The feed is decelerated in the minus (-) direction.
[Operation] When a signal becomes 0, the corresponding axis decelerates to stop in the specified
direction.
If a specified feedrate is lower than the external deceleration rate, the specified feedrate is
selected.
Manual handle feed maximum feedrate change signal HNDLF<Gn023.3>

[Function] This signal switches for the maximum handle feedrate.
[Operation] When this signal is 0, clamping is performed by the manual rapid traverse rate (parameter
No. 1424) or parameter No. 1420. The external deceleration function is disabled for
handle feed.
When this signal is 1, clamping is performed by the maximum handle feedrate (parameter
No. 1434). The external deceleration function is enabled for handle feed.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn118 *+ED8 *+ED7 *+ED6 *+ED5 *+ED4 *+ED3 *+ED2 *+ED1
Gn120 *-ED8 *-ED7 *-ED6 *-ED5 *-ED4 *-ED3 *-ED2 *-ED1
Gn023 HNDLF
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 EDMx EDPx

[Data type] Bit axis
#4 EDPx In cutting feed, an external deceleration signal in the + direction for each axis is:
0: Invalid
1: Valid
#5 EDMx In cutting feed, an external deceleration signal in the - direction for each axis is:
0: Invalid
1: Valid
- 1062 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1405 EDR

#5 EDR As the external deceleration rate for positioning of linear interpolation type:
0: The external deceleration rate for cutting feed is used.
1: The external deceleration rate in rapid traverse for the first axis of path 1 is used.
Let us use external deceleration 1 as an example.
When this parameter bit is set to 0, the value of parameter No. 1426 is used as the
external deceleration rate for external deceleration 1.
When this parameter bit is set to 1, the value of axis 1 of parameter No. 1427 is used as
the external deceleration rate for external deceleration 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1406 EX3 EX2

#0 EX2 External deceleration function setting 2 is:

0: Invalid
1: Valid

0: Invalid
1: Valid
1426 External deceleration rate of cutting feed

Set an external deceleration rate for cutting feed or positioning of linear interpolation type
(G00).
1427 External deceleration rate of rapid traverse for each axis

Set the external deceleration rate of rapid traverse for each axis.
1434 Maximum manual handle feedrate for each axis

- 1063 -
Set a maximum manual handle feedrate for each axis in case of maximum manual handle
feedrate switch signal HNDLF<Gn023.3>=1.
1440 External deceleration rate setting 2 in cutting feed

Set external deceleration rate 2 for cutting feed or positioning of linear interpolation type
(G00).
1441 External deceleration rate setting 2 for each axis in rapid traverse

Set external deceleration rate 2 for each axis in rapid traverse.
1442 Maximum manual handle feedrate setting 2 for each axis

Set a maximum manual handle feedrate 2 for each axis.

(G00).

- 1064 -

[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min (machine unit)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8131 EDC
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#2 EDC External deceleration is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
12750 EX5 EX4


0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

(G00).
- 1065 -



(G00).


- 1066 -
7.1.11 Positioning by Optimum Accelerations

Overview
When rapid traverse is specified during automatic operation, the rapid traverse rate, time constant, and
loop gain can be switched according to the travel distance of the block by the function for positioning by
optimum accelerations. So, the time required for positioning and in-position check operations can be
reduced, resulting in cycle time reduction.
When rapid traverse (G00) is specified during automatic operation, the rapid traverse rate, time constant,
and loop gain are switched to one of seven levels according to the travel distance of the block. Parameters
are used to specify the rapid traverse rates, time constants, and loop gains corresponding to travel
distances.
NOTE
- Valid command
This function is enabled by the G00 command. In addition, this function is enabled for rapid traverse in a
canned cycle, automatic reference position return, and machine coordinate system selection. However,
this function is disabled in the cases indicated below, and the feedrate, time constant, and loop gain set in
parameters Nos. 1420, 1620, and 1825 respectively are applied.
(1) When automatic reference position return (G28) is specified before reference position establishment
(2) During the Cs contour control mode
(3) During the rigid tapping mode
(4) During the 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode
CAUTION
This function is disabled for positioning in a canned cycle.
- Cutting feed
This function is disabled for cutting feed.
- Manual operation
This function is disabled during manual operation. This function is also disabled when a movement is
made with a manual numeric command.
- Manual intervention
If a manual operation is inserted during automatic operation by halting rapid traverse with feed hold or
mode switching, the value of the loop gain is changed to the value set in parameter No. 1825. If the
program is restarted, the feedrate, time constant, and loop gain corresponding to the remaining travel
distance are used for the rest of the block.
- PMC axis control

This function is disabled for PMC axis control.
- Rapid traverse override

When this function is enabled, rapid traverse overlap (bit 4 (RTO) of parameter No. 1601 = 1) is enabled
if the same axis is not specified in successive blocks.
- 1067 -
Example)
Rapid traverse overlap is performed with the following commands:
N01 G00 X10.0 ;
N02 Z-10.0 ;
Rapid traverse overlap is not performed with the following commands:
N11 G00 X10.0 Z-10.0 ;
N12 Z-20.0 ;
- Rapid traverse bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration

When rapid traverse bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is used, T1, T2, and the rapid traverse rate in
the Fig. 7.1.11 are switched.
T2/2 T1 T2/2
Rapid
Time
Fig. 7.1.11
- Arbitrary angular axis control

This function is disabled for an axis to which angular axis control is applied.
- Coordinate system rotation, Scaling (M series)

During the coordinate system rotation mode, switching is performed for the travel distance after
coordinate system rotation. This also applies during the scaling mode.
- Tool radius/Tool nose radius compensation

During the cutter compensation mode or tool-nose radius compensation mode, switching is performed for
the travel distance after compensation.
- Linear interpolation type rapid traverse

When linear interpolation type rapid traverse is used (bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 = 1), this
function is disabled.
- AI advanced preview control (M Series) / AI contour control

During the AI advanced preview control (M Series) / AI contour control mode, this function is disabled if
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation or optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is used for
rapid traverse.
- Axis synchronous control

When using this function together with axis synchronous control, enable this function for both of the
master axis and slave axis (bit 0 (OAD) of parameter No. 6131 = 1) and set the same feedrate, time
constant, and loop gain values for the master axis and slave axis.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6131 OAD
- 1068 -
NOTE
#0 OAD The function for positioning by optimum acceleration (seven step switch of the rapid
traverse rate, time constant, and loop gain by the positioning distance to rapid traverse by
automatic operation) is
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6132 ILG

#0 ILG In the function for positioning by optimum acceleration, the switch of the loop gain is
0: Enabled. (Parameters Nos. 6181 to 6187 is used.)
1: Disabled. (Parameter No. 1825 is used.)
6136 Distance D1 for level 1 of positioning by optimum acceleration for each axis
11230 Distance to the 4th step in positioning by optimum acceleration for each axis D4

[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (B)
When using the function for switching the rapid traverse rate, time constant, and loop
gain according to the positioning distance, this parameter sets the positioning distance for
each axis.
NOTE
1 To use this parameter, set bit 0 (OADx) of parameter No. 6131 to
1.
2 If 0 is set in all of parameters Nos. 6136 to 6138 and 11230 to
11232, this function is disabled.
3 The settings must satisfy the following: D1<D2<D3<D4<D5<D6.
4 Switching in up to seven steps is possible. When up to four steps
are used, for example, set parameters so that expression
D1<D2<D3 is satisfied, and set a maximum value (such as
+999999.999 mm) for D4, D5, and D6.
- 1069 -
NOTE
5 For axes with diameter specification, set a diameter value. If
10.000 mm is set for an axis with diameter specification, for
example, switching is made when a movement takes place over a
distance of 10.000 mm in diameter.
6 In parameters Nos. 6136 to 6138 and 11230 to 11232, set a
distance for each axis. Block lengths must not be specified in these
parameters.
6161 Level 1 rapid traverse rate

[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table(C)
The rapid traverse rate for each axis is set.
6171 Level 1 rapid traverse time constant

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
The rapid traverse time constant for each axis is set.
6181 Level 1 servo loop gain
- 1070 -

[Unit of data] 0.01/sec
The servo loop gain for each axis is set.
If 0 is set, parameter No. 1825 is used.
6191 Time constant T2 of level 1 bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse T2
6195 Time constant T2 of level 5bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse T2

[Unit of data] msec
Time constant T2 of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis
is set.
- Table for correspondence between positioning distances and parameter

numbers
The correspondence is indicated in the Table 7.1.11.
Table 7.1.11
Rapid traverse Rapid traverse time Rapid traverse time
Level Positioning distance d Servo loop gain
rate constant T1 constant T2
1 0 < d ≤ D1 No.6161 No.6171 No.6191 No.6181
2 D1 < d ≤ D2 No.6162 No.6172 No.6192 No.6182
3 D2 < d ≤ D3 No.6163 No.6173 No.6193 No.6183
4 D3 < d ≤ D4 No.6164 No.6174 No.6194 No.6184
5 D4 < d ≤ D5 No.6165 No.6175 No.6195 No.6185
6 D5 < d ≤ D6 No.6166 No.6176 No.6196 No.6186
7 D6 < d No.6167 No.6177 No.6197 No.6187
- 1071 -
7.1.12 AI Advanced Preview Control (M Series) / AI Contour Control

I / AI Contour Control II
Overview
These functions are provided for high-speed, high-precision machining. This function enables
suppression of acceleration/deceleration delays and servo delays that become larger with increases in the
feedrate and reduction of machining profile errors.
AI contour control represents AI advanced preview control (M Series), AI contour control I and AI
contour control II in the rest of this manual.
The functions listed below are valid in the AI contour control mode.
Table7.1.12 (a)
AI advanced
AI contour AI contour
preview control
control I control II
(M series)
0i-TF 0i-TF
Model 0i-MF
0i-MF 0i-MF
Basic/option Basic Option Option
20 40 200
Number of blocks read ahead (When G8 is (When G8 is (When G8 is
specified: 1) specified: 1) specified: 1)
Look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before
Enabled Enabled Enabled
interpolation
Look-ahead bell-shaped acceleration/
Deceleration before interpolation
Function for changing time constant of
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
Advanced feed forward Enabled Enabled Enabled
Acceleration setting for each axis Enabled Enabled Enabled
Speed control based on the feedrate
difference on each axis
Speed control with
Acceleration in circular interpolation
Speed control with (When G8 is (When G8 is (When G8 is
the acceleration on each axis specified: Not specified: Not specified: Not
enabled) enabled) enabled)
Smooth speed control Not enabled Not enabled Enabled
(When G8 is
specified: Not
enabled)
Speed control with cutting load Not enabled Not enabled Enabled
Disregard of feedrate command Not enabled Not enabled Enabled
Jerk control (M Type) Not enabled Not enabled
Optional function
- Speed control with change of
(When G8 is
acceleration on each Axis
specified: Not
- Look-ahead smooth bell-shaped
enabled)
acceleration/deceleration before Interpolation
Nano smoothing (M Type) Not enabled Not enabled Optional function
- 1072 -
Format
G05.1 Q1 [R_] ; AI contour control mode on
:
G05.1 Q0 ; AI contour control mode off
R : Machining condition selecting level (1 to 10)
The AI contour control mode can be controlled also with the formats that have been used for the
conventional advanced preview control.
G08 P1 [R_] ; AI contour control mode on
:
G08 P0 ; AI contour control mode off
G05 P10000 [R_] ; AI contour control mode on
:
G05 P0 ; AI contour control mode off
NOTE
1 Always specify G05.1 and G08 in an independent block.
(Do not specify other G codes at the same time.)
2 The AI contour control mode can also be turned off at a reset.
3 G05.1 and G08 commands are separate commands respectively. Turn off the AI
contour control mode by the command that turns on the AI contour control mode.
AI contour control cannot be turned off by a different command.
4 The AI contour control mode can be turned on at the start of automatic operation
by setting bit 0 (SHP) of parameter No. 1604.
5 There are the following conditions when each AI contour control mode on / off is
commanded in the multiple.
(1) The AI contour control mode commands are G05.1 and G08 in the order of a
high-ranking command (G05.1 > G08). It is necessary to turn on the AI
contour control mode from the subordinate position command sequentially
when the multiple commands are executed.
(2) After the AI contour control mode is turned on by the G05.1Q1, if the G08
command is executed in the mode, alarm PS5110 “IMPROPER G-CODE
(AICC MODE)” occurs.
Example)
G05.1Q1 AI contour control mode on by G05.1
G08P1(P0) Alarm PS5110 occurs
(3) When the multiple commands are executed, each command that turns on/off
the AI contour control mode must be nested.
Example)
G08P1 AI contour control mode on by G08
:
G05.1Q1 AI contour control mode on by G05.1
:
G05.1Q0 AI contour control mode off by G05.1
:
G08P0 AI contour control mode off by G08
- 1073 -
Explanation
- Look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
There are two types of look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, the linear
acceleration/deceleration type and the bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration type.
Look-ahead bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation produces smoother
acceleration/deceleration.
- Setting an acceleration
A permissible acceleration for the linear acceleration/deceleration of each axis is set in parameter No.
1660. For bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration, acceleration change time (B) (period of transition from
constant speed state (A) to constant acceleration/ deceleration state (C)) is set in parameter No. 1772. In
the constant acceleration/deceleration state (C), acceleration/deceleration is performed with the maximum
tangential acceleration not exceeding the permissible acceleration of each axis specified in parameter No.
1660.
The acceleration change time specified in parameter No. 1772 is held constant, regardless of the
tangential acceleration.
Feedrate in tangent direction
Optimum inclination is automatically
calculated from the setting of parameter
No. 1660.
(A) (B) (C) (B) (A) (B) (C) (B) (A)
Time set by parameter No. 1772
Fig.7.1.12 (a)
- Method of determining the tangent acceleration

Acceleration/deceleration is performed with the largest tangent acceleration/deceleration that does not
exceed the permissible acceleration set for each axis.
(Example)
X-axis permissible acceleration: 1000 mm/sec2
Y-axis permissible acceleration: 1200 mm/sec2
Acceleration change time: 20 msec
Program:
N1 G01 G91 X20.0 F6000 ; (Move on the X-axis.)
G04 X0.01 ;
N2 Y20.0 ; (Move on the Y-axis.)
G04 X0.01 ;
N3 X20.0 Y20.0 ; (Move in the XY direction (at 45 degrees).)
Since N3 performs interpolation for the X and Y axes in the 45-degree direction, the acceleration of the Y
axis is controlled according to the X axis to become 1000 mm/s2. Therefore, the combined acceleration is
1414 mm/s2.
- 1074 -
Tangent feedrate
20ms
1000mm/sec2 1200mm/sec2 1414mm/sec2

gradient gradient gradient
20ms 20ms 20ms

Fig.7.1.12 (b)
- Acceleration
Acceleration is performed so that the feedrate programmed for a block is attained at the beginning of the
block.
When look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is valid for multiple blocks, acceleration
can be performed across more than one block.
Feedrate Speed control by look-ahead

acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
Programmed speed
Time
N1 N2 N3 N4 N5
Fig.7.1.12 (c)
- Deceleration
Deceleration starts in advance so that the feedrate programmed for a block is attained at the beginning of
the block.
When look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is valid for multiple blocks, deceleration
can be performed across more than one block.
- 1075 -
Feedrate Speed control by look-ahead

Deceleration acceleration/deceleration before
start point interpolation
Programmed speed
Deceleration
start point
Time
Fig.7.1.12 (d)
- Deceleration based on a distance

If the total distance of the blocks read ahead becomes shorter than or equal to the deceleration distance
obtained from the current feedrate, deceleration starts.
If the total distance of the blocks read ahead during deceleration increases, acceleration is performed.
If the blocks of a small amount of travel are successively specified, deceleration and acceleration may be
performed alternately, making the feedrate inconsistent.
To avoid this, decrease the programmed feedrate.
- Function for changing time constant of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration

Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is performed according to the acceleration and
acceleration change time set by the parameters, as shown in the figure below.
Feedrate
T1
Specified
feedrate
T1low
Low specified
feedrate Time
T2 T2
T1 : Time obtained from specified feedrate and specified acceleration

(specified feedrate/acceleration (parameter No. 1660))
T2 : Acceleration change time (parameter No. 1772)
Fig.7.1.12 (e)
Here, the acceleration change time (T2) remains constant regardless of the specified feedrate, while the
acceleration time for the linear section (T1), which is determined by acceleration, varies with the
specified feedrate. If T1 becomes shorter than T2 when the specified feedrate is low, linear
acceleration/deceleration not achieving the specified acceleration results, as shown in the figure below.
- 1076 -
Linear acceleration/deceleration not achieving

specified acceleration/deceleration
Feedrate
Specified
feedrate
Time
T1 T1
T2
T1 : Time obtained from specified feedrate and specified acceleration (specified

feedrate/acceleration (parameter No. 1660))
T2 : Acceleration change time (parameter No. 1772)
Fig.7.1.12 (f)
In such a case, set bit 3 (BCG) of parameter No. 7055 to 1. Then, the internal acceleration and vector time
constant of acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation are changed to make the
acceleration/deceleration pattern as close as possible to the optimum bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation based on a specified acceleration/deceleration reference speed, and so
acceleration/deceleration time is reduced.
Feedrate Acceleration/deceleration curve
Specified
feedrate
T1'
T2' T2'
Fig.7.1.12 (g)
There are three methods for specifying the acceleration/deceleration reference speed.
(1) Specifying the speed using an F in a G05.1 Q1 block
(2) Setting the speed on parameter No. 7066
(3) Setting the speed specified with the F command issued at the start of cutting as the reference speed
When F is specified in a G05.1Q1 block, the specified feedrate is assumed to be the

acceleration/deceleration reference speed. This command can be used only in the feed per minute mode.
If no F command is specified in a G05.1Q1 block, the feedrate specified in parameter No. 7066 is
assumed to be the acceleration/deceleration reference speed. If 0 is set in parameter No. 7066, the F
command specified in the cutting start block is assumed to be the acceleration/deceleration reference
speed.
- Automatic feedrate control function

In AI contour control mode, the feedrate is automatically controlled by the look-ahead of blocks.
The feedrate is determined using the following conditions. If the specified feedrate exceeds the
determined feedrate, acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation is performed to achieve the
determined feedrate.
(1) Feedrate changes on each axis at a corner and the permissible feedrate change that has been set
(2) Expected acceleration on each axis and the permissible acceleration that has been set
(3) Cutting load that is expected from the travel direction on the Z-axis
- 1077 -
Specified tool path

The machining error is decreased
because of the deceleration by
Tool path assumed when
difference in feedrate.
Al contour control is not
used
Tool path assumed when Al
contour control is used
The machining error is decreased

because of the deceleration with
the acceleration.
For details, see the explanation of each function.
- Speed control based on the feedrate difference on each axis at a corner

By using the speed control based on the feedrate difference on each axis at a corner, if a feedrate change
occurs on an axis on each axis at a corner, the feedrate is determined so that any feedrate difference
exceeding the permissible feedrate difference on that axis that has been set for parameter No. 1783 does
not occur, and deceleration is automatically performed.
- 1078 -
(Exam ple)
Prog ram
N1 G 01 G 91 X100.0 F50 00
N2 Y 100 .0
N2
Y
N1
Tangent feedrate Tange nt f eedrat e
Time The d eceleration b ased Paramet er No.1 783

on t he feedrat e differe nc e
is use d. Time
X -axis feedra te X-axis fee drate

The feed ra te differe nce
becomes s m all, and t he
The tangent feedra te is fee drate on e ac h ax is
s mooth, but the feedra te becomes s m ooth .
on eac h a xis is no t.
Paramet er No.1 783
Time Time
Y -axis fee drate Y-ax is fe edrate
Time P aramete r No.1 783 Time
W he n speed c ont rol b as ed o n th e feedrate W hen spe ed con trol based on t he f eedrat e diffe re nce is
difference is invalid v alid
Fig.7.1.12 (h)
The method of deceleration based on the feedrate difference differs depending on the setting made for
parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500).
If parameter FNW is set to 0, the largest feedrate that does not exceed the permissible feedrate difference
set for parameter No. 1783 is assumed to be the deceleration feedrate.
In this case, the deceleration feedrate differs if the travel direction differs, even if the shape is the same.
- 1079 -
(Example)
If parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 0 and the
permissible feedrate difference = 500 mm/min (on all axes)
Decelerate the X/Y axis down to 250

Decelerate the X axis mm/min
down to 500 mm/min (The tangent direction feedrate is 354
mm/min.)
Y
Fig.7.1.12 (i)
In the left-side example in the figure above, the X axis is inverted at the corner from the position direction
to the negative direction, and deceleration is performed so that the feedrate difference becomes 500
mm/min. In other words, the feedrate is 250 mm/min both when the axis moves in the position direction
and when it moves in the negative direction. As a result, the tangent direction feedrate becomes 354
mm/min.
X-axis
feedrate
250mm/min 500mm/min Time
Y-axis
feedrate
250mm/min Time
Fig.7.1.12 (j)
If parameter FNW is set to 1, the feedrate is determined not only with the condition that
the permissible feedrate difference and permissible acceleration on each axis are not exceeded, but also
that the deceleration feedrate is constant regardless of the travel direction if the shape is the same.
If this parameter is set to 1, the deceleration feedrate determined with the feedrate difference may be up to
30% lower than that determined if this parameter is set to 0.
- 1080 -
(Example)
If parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 1 and
permissible feedrate difference = 500 mm/min (on all axes)
Decelerate the X/Y axis down to

250 mm/min
(The tangent direction feedrate is
Decelerate the X axis 354 mm/min.)
down to 354 mm/min
Y
Fig.7.1.12 (k)
- Speed control with acceleration in circular interpolation

When high-speed cutting is performed in circular interpolation or helical interpolation, the actual tool
path has an error with respect to the programmed path. In circular interpolation, this error can be
approximated from the equation given below.
Y
Δr : Error
Specified path Δr : Maximum radius error (mm)

v : Feedrate (mm/sec)
Actual path r : Arc radius (mm)
a : Acceleration (mm/sec2)
T1 : Time constant of
acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation at cutting (sec)
r T2 : Time constant of servo motor (sec)
0 X
Fig.7.1.12 (l)
1 2 v2 1 2
Δr = (T1 + T22 ) = (T1 + T22 ) ⋅ a ........................................................................................ (Equation 1)
2 r 2
In actual machining, permissible error Δr is given, so the maximum permissible acceleration a (mm/sec2)
in equation 1 is determined.
Expression 1 is an expression when type of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is exponential
acceleration/deceleration. The radius error in the case of linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation is smaller than in case of exponential acceleration/deceleration by a factor of 12, excluding
any error caused by a servo motor time constant. The radius error in the case of bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is a half of linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.
When a specified feedrate causes the radial error from an arc having a programmed radius to exceed the
permissible error, speed control with acceleration in circular interpolation automatically clamps the
arc-cutting feedrate by using parameter settings.
Let the permissible acceleration calculated from the permissible acceleration set for each axis be A. Then,
maximum permissible feedrate v with programmed radius r is expressed as follows:
v = A ⋅ r .................................................................................................................................... (Equation 2)
If a specified feedrate exceeds feedrate v obtained from equation 2, the feedrate is clamped at feedrate v
automatically.
The permissible acceleration is specified in parameter No. 1735. If there is a difference in permissible
acceleration between two axes for circular interpolation, the lower acceleration is regarded as the
permissible acceleration.
- 1081 -
If the radius of an arc is small, too small value can be calculated as deceleration v. In such a case, the
lower feedrate limit can be set in parameter No. 1732 to prevent the feedrate from being decreased too
much.
- Speed control with the acceleration on each axis

When consecutive small lines are used to form a curve, as in the example shown in the エラー! 参照元
が見つかりません。Fig.7.1.12 (m), the feedrate differences on each axis at the individual corners are not
very large. Thus, deceleration with the feedrate differences is not effective. Consecutive small feedrate
differences, however, cause a large acceleration on each axis, as a whole.
In such a case, deceleration can be performed to reduce the impact on the machine and the machining
error caused by too large an acceleration. The deceleration feedrate is determined to be the feedrate that
does not cause the acceleration on each axis to exceed the permissible acceleration set for parameter No.
1737.
The deceleration feedrate is determined for each corner. The actual feedrate is the smaller of the
deceleration feedrate determined at the start point of the block and that determined at the end point.
Depending on the specified figure, a very low deceleration feedrate may be calculated. In such a case, the
lower feedrate limit can be set in parameter No. 1738 to prevent the feedrate from being decreased too
much.
In the following example, the acceleration (gradient of the broken line in the feedrate graph) at too large
at corners N2 to N4 and N6 to N8 and, therefore, deceleration is performed.
N8
N7
N9
N6
N5
Y
N1
X N4
N3
N2
X-axis
feedrate
Y-axis
feedrate
Tangent
feedrate
N1 N5 N9 N1 N5 N9
Fig.7.1.12 (m)
The method of determining the feedrate with the acceleration differs depending on the setting of
parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500).
- 1082 -
If parameter FNW is set to 0, the highest feedrate that does not cause the permissible acceleration set for
parameter No. 1737 to be exceeded is assumed to be the deceleration feedrate. In this case, the
deceleration feedrate differs depending on the travel direction even if the shape is the same, as shown in
the figure below.
(Example) If a circular shape with a radius of 10 mm is specified with small
line blocks
Parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 0
Permissible acceleration = 1000 mm/s2 (on all axes)
Tangent feedrate
F6000
The feedrate is
higher in these
directions.
Time
Fig.7.1.12 (n)
If parameter FNW is set to 1, the feedrate is determined with not only the condition that the permissible
acceleration on each axis is not exceeded but also the condition that the deceleration feedrate is constant
regardless of the travel direction if the shape is the same.
If this parameter is set to 1, the deceleration feedrate determined with the feedrate difference or
acceleration may be up to 30% lower than that determined if this parameter is set to 0.
(Example) If a circular shape with a radius of 10 mm is specified with
small line blocks
Parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 1,
2
radius = 10 mm, permissible acceleration = 1000 mm/s (on all axes)
Tangent feedrate
F6000
The tangent
feedrate is
constant.
Time
Fig.7.1.12 (o)
NOTE
In circular interpolation, the tangent feedrate is constant regardless of the setting
of the parameter.
When this function is effective, the feedrate might be clamped as well as the travel distance in the block is
small even if the travel distance in the block is long. Speed control with the acceleration is invalidated in
the block longer than the block length set to parameter No. 19518 if bit 1 (HNG) of parameter No. 19517
is set to 1.
- Smooth speed control

In speed control with acceleration, the smooth speed control function recognizes the entire figure from
preceding and following blocks including blocks read ahead to make a smooth feedrate determination.
When a curve is specified with successive minute straight lines, programmed values are rounded to the
least input increment before issued, so the machining profile is approximated with a broken line.
- 1083 -
When the feedrate is determined with acceleration in an ordinary manner, an optimum feedrate is
automatically calculated exactly for a programmed figure, so a large acceleration may result depending on
the command, which can lead to deceleration.
In such a case, the use of smooth speed control enables speed control by recognizing the entire figure,
which provides smooth speed control while suppressing local deceleration, therefore increasing the
feedrate.
Large acceleration
: Programmed path
: Recognized figure
Fig.7.1.12 (p)
Also for a part of a programmed figure in which a large acceleration would be required, the acceleration
is obtained based on the figure recognized from multiple blocks, and the feedrate is determined so that the
acceleration is within the permissible acceleration set in parameter No. 1737.
Tangential feedrate Deceleration with acceleration
in ordinary manner
Smooth speed control
Command with large acceleration
Time
Fig.7.1.12 (q)
Smooth speed control obtains the acceleration by using the figure recognized from the preceding and
following blocks including blocks read ahead, so smooth speed control is enabled even in parts in which
the acceleration increases.
Smooth speed control is enabled under the following conditions:
(1) Speed control with acceleration is enabled in the AI contour control II mode.
(2) Successive linear interpolation commands are specified.
(3) Bit 0 (HPF) of parameter No. 19503 is set to 1.
CAUTION
When smooth speed control is used, the feedrate in a certain figure such as a
corner may become larger than the feedrate obtained by ordinary speed control
with acceleration. For corners, set parameter No. 1783, which is the permissible
feedrate difference parameter for speed control with the feedrate difference at
corners, to perform appropriate deceleration by speed control with the corner
feedrate difference.
When this function is effective, the feedrate might be clamped as well as the travel distance in the block is
small even if the travel distance in the block is long. Smooth speed control is invalidated in the block
- 1084 -
longer than the travel distance set to parameter No. 19518 if bit 1 (HNG) of parameter No. 19517 is set to
1.
- Deceleration with the cutting load

Usually, the cutting resistance produced when machining is performed with the bottom of the cutter as the
tool lowers along the Z-axis is greater than the cutting resistance produced when machining is performed
with the side of the cutter as the tool rises along the Z-axis. Therefore, deceleration is required.
In AI contour control II, the tool travel direction on the Z-axis is used as a condition for calculating the
machining feedrate.
This function is enabled when parameter ZAG (bit 4 of No. 8451) is set to 1.
Fig. 7.1.12 (r) During ascent on the Z-axis
Fig. 7.1.12 (s) During descent on the Z-axis
The descent angle θ during descent on the Z-axis (angle formed by the XY plane and the tool center path)
is as shown in the エラー! 参照元が見つかりません。. The descent angle is classified into four areas,
and the override values for the individual areas are set for the following parameters:
Parameter No. 8456 for area 2
For area 1, however, no parameter is available, and an override of 100% is used at all times. The feedrate
obtained according to other feedrate control is multiplied by the override value of the area to which
descent angle θ belongs.
Area1 0º ≤ θ < 30º
Area2 30º ≤ θ < 45º
Area3 45º ≤ θ < 60º
Area4 60º ≤ θ < 90º
The feedrate can be overridden with an inclination by setting bit 1 (ZG2) of parameter No. 19515 to 1. In
this case, specify the override value for area 1 in parameter No. 19516.
- 1085 -
XY plane
30° Area1
90°
60°
Area4 45°
Area3 Area2
Fig.7.1.12 (t)
CAUTION
1 The speed control with the cutting feed is effective only when the tool is parallel
with the Z-axis. Thus, it may not be possible to apply this function, depending on
the structure of the machine used.
2 In the speed control with the cutting feed, the travel direction on the Z-axis is
determined with the appropriate NC command. If, therefore, manual intervention
is performed on the Z-axis with manual absolute on, or if a mirror image is
applied on the Z-axis, the direction on the Z-axis cannot be determined. When
using the speed control with the cutting load, do not use these functions.
3 When performing 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion, determine the
descent angle on the Z-axis using the converted coordinate system.
4 Speed control with the cutting load is enabled for all interpolations in the AI
contour control II mode. This function, however, can be made valid only for linear
interpolations by setting bit 4 (ZOL) of parameter No. 19503 to 1.
- Ignoring feedrate commands

In a block in which AI contour control II is enabled, all feedrate commands (F commands) can be ignored
by setting parameter NOF (bit 7 of No. 8451).
The term feedrate commands, as used here, refer to the following commands:
(1) Modal F commands before the block in which AI contour control II is enabled
(2) F commands and modal F commands in the block in which AI contour control II is enabled
When the feedrate commands are ignored, it is assumed that the upper feedrate limit specified for
parameter No. 8465 is specified.
Note, however, that any issued F commands and modal F commands are stored within the CNC.
Thus, in a block in which AI contour control II changes from the enabled state to the disabled state, the
modal values of the F commands described in (1) and (2) described above are used as modal F commands,
instead of the modal values of the F commands calculated by AI contour control II.
- Another example of determining the feedrate

If a specified feedrate exceeds the upper feedrate limit of AI contour control (in parameter No. 8465), the
feedrate is clamped at the upper feedrate. The upper feedrate limit is clamped at the maximum cutting
feedrate (parameter No. 1432)for acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.
When the maximum cutting feedrate for acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (parameter No.
1432) is set to 0, the maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No. 1430) is used.
- 1086 -
Status display
Depending on the control mode, one of the status indications shown below blinks at the lower right of the
screen.
Table7.1.12 (b)
Control mode Status display
AI advanced preview control AI APC
AI contour control I AICC 1
AI contour control II AICC 2
- In the case of AI advanced preview control or AI contour control, the character string to be
displayed can be changed using parameter Nos. 3241 to 3247.
- In the case of AI contour control II, the character string to be displayed can be changed using
parameter Nos. 3251 to 3257.
The advanced preview feed forward function when the AI contour control
mode is off
The advanced preview feed forward function is enabled when bit 1 (FEED) of parameter No. 2005 for
enabling the advanced preview feed forward function is set to 1 and a value is set in parameter No. 2092,
regardless of whether AI contour control is turned on or off.
By setting bit 2 (AOFF) of parameter No. 1611 to 1, the advanced preview feed forward function is
disable when command for turning on AI contour control is not specified yet.
Example of the advanced preview feed forward function turned on/off

(1) Bit 0 (SHP) of parameter No. 1604 is set to 0
When bit 0 (SHP) of parameter No. 1604 is set to 0, the AI contour control mode is not turned on if
the command for AI contour control ON is not specified. Program operation in this state is explained
below.
O0001;
N01 G90 G01 X50.0 Y50.0 F1000. ;
N02 G05.1 Q1 ;
N03 X100.0 Y100.0 ;
N04 G05.1 Q0 ;
N05 X150.0 Y150.0 ;
N06 M02 ;
(a) When bit 2 (AOFF) of parameter No. 1611 is set to 0

The advanced preview feed forward function is enabled in the N01, N03, and N05 blocks.
(b) When bit 2 (AOFF) of parameter No. 1611 is set to 1
The advanced preview feed forward function is enabled in the N03 block.
The advanced preview feed forward function is disabled in the N01 and N05 blocks.
(2) Bit 0 (SHP) of parameter No. 1604 is set to 1

When bit 0 (SHP) of parameter No. 1604 is set to 1, the program operates in the same way as when
G05.1Q1 is specified at automatic operation start time (from the reset state). Program operation from
the reset state is explained below.
O0001;
N01 G90 G01 X50.0 Y50.0 F1000. ;
N02 G05.1 Q1 ;
N03 X100.0 Y100.0 ;
N04 G05.1 Q0 ;
N05 X150.0 Y150.0 ;
N06 M99;
- 1087 -

The advanced preview feed forward function is enabled in all movement blocks of N01, N03,
and N05.
Immediately after automatic operation is started, the advanced preview feed forward function is
enabled in the N01 and N03 blocks and the advanced preview feed forward function is disabled
in the N05 block.
If N06 specifies M99 to return to the start of the program, the advanced preview feed forward
function is disabled in the N01 block because N04 turns off the AI contour control mode.
(3) When none of the AI contour control is specified

G05.1Q1 cannot be specified. This state is equivalent to the state where G05.1Q0 is specified, that is,
AI contour control is off at all times. Program operation in this state is described below.
O0002;
N01 G90 G01 X50.0 Y50.0 F1000. ;
N02 X100.0 Y100.0 ;
N03 X150.0 Y150.0 ;
N04 M02 ;

The advanced preview feed forward function is enabled in the N01, N02, and N03 blocks.
The advanced preview feed forward function is disabled in the N01, N02, and N03 blocks.
Limitation
- Conditions for temporarily canceling the AI contour control mode
If one of the commands listed below is issued in the AI contour control mode, the AI contour control
mode is canceled temporarily.
If the system becomes ready for AI contour control after it is canceled, the AI contour control mode is
restored automatically.
Table7.1.12 (c)
G code
Function name
M series T series
Positioning (rapid traverse) G00 G00
Unidirectional positioning G60 -
Spindle positioning - G00
Rigid tapping G74, G84 G84, G88
Threading (NOTE) G33 G32
Variable-lead threading (NOTE) - G34
Single threading cycle (NOTE) - G92
Multiple repetitive threading cycle (NOTE) - G76
Electronic box (EGB) G81, G81.4 -
When no move command is specified - -
G09
G09
One-shot G code other than those shown at right G38, G39
G38, G39
G45, G46, G47, G48
- 1088 -
NOTE
Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is invalid for a threading
command. Therefore, if acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is enabled
by a command that precedes or follows a threading command, the tool is
decelerated and stopped temporarily when the block changes.
Since the state of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation does not change
during continuous threading, deceleration does not occur when the block
changes.
Example
O0010
…
G5.1 Q1;
G01
… AI contour control mode
X1.0Y2.0Z3.0;
G00; Change to Positioning
… AI contour control mode is
G01; Return to Cutting feed temporarily canceled.
X2.0Y2.0Z4.0;
Automatically return the system to AI contour control mode
…
AI contour control mode
X4.0Y1.0Z2.0;
G5.1 Q0;
…
M30;
- Modal G codes usable when AI contour control is specified

In a modal G code state listed below, AI contour control can be specified.
Do not specify AI contour control in modal states other than these.
G13.1 : Polar coordinate interpolation mode cancel (T Series)
G15 : Polar coordinate command cancel (M Series)
G40 : Tool radius compensation cancel
G40.1 : Normal direction control cancel (M Series)
G50 : Scaling cancel(M Series)
G50.1 : Programmable mirror image cancel
G50.2 : Polygon turning cancel (T Series)
G64 : Cutting mode cancel
G67 : Macro modal call cancel
G69 : Coordinate system rotation/3-dimensional coordinate system conversion cancel
G80 : Canned cycle cancel
G97 : Constant surface speed control cancel
M
- Retrace
When the reverse execution is started in AI contour control mode, a reverse execution ends immediately
depending on a program then the backward movement is not possible.
During reverse execution and forward reexecution, the feedrate clamp function by acceleration under AI
contour control is disabled.
- 1089 -
Signal
AI contour control mode signal AICC <Fn062.0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal indicates that the system is in AI advanced preview control, AI contour
control mode.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to "1" when the cutting command or other conditions for AI contour
control is met in AI contour control mode.
This signal is set to "0" in the following cases.
(1) In the automatic operation suspend state
(2) In the automatic operation stop state
(3) When rapid traverse or other conditions under which AI contour control is
automatically cancelled are met
(4) When AI contour mode is cancelled
NOTE
1 Even if the conditions for automatically canceling AI contour
control, such as rapid traverse, are satisfied, the signal is output if
bit 1 (AIR) of parameter No. 1612 is 1 (status display in AI contour
control mode and the AI contour control mode signal are enabled).
2 Even when the AI contour control mode is executed with G08P1,
this signal is set to "1".
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F062 AICC
Parameter
1432 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

Set a maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation mode such as AI contour control. When this parameter is set to 0 or the
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode is not set, the maximum cutting
feedrate set in parameter No. 1430 is used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1602 LS2 BS2

#3 BS2 Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed in a mode of look-ahead

acceleration/deceleration before interpolation such as the AI contour control mode:
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/ deceleration is used.
(The setting of bit 6 (LS2) of parameter No. 1602 is followed.)
1: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is used.
- 1090 -
NOTE
This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(initialized type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
#6 LS2 Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed in a mode of

acceleration/deceleration before interpolation such as the AI contour control mode:
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is used.
1: Linear acceleration/deceleration is used.
NOTE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1604 SHP

#0 SHP When automatic operation is started, the state equivalent to the specification of G5.1Q1
for AI contour control is:
0: Not set
1: Set
NOTE
1 It is necessary to reset CNC once after this parameter is changed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1611 AOFF

#2 AOFF When AI contour control mode is off and the parameter of the advanced-preview feed
forward function is valid, the advanced-preview feed forward function is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1612 AIR

#1 AIR The status display and mode signal in AI contour control mode is:
0: Enabled only when the conditions for executing AI contour control are satisfied.
1: Enabled always in AI contour control mode.
- 1091 -
If this parameter is set to 1, in-mode blinking display and the AI contour control mode
signal AICC <Fn062.0> remain enabled in the AI contour control mode.
NOTE
The parameter is invalid during a stop on feed hold or a
single-block stop.
1660 Maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for each axis

[Unit of data] mm/sec2, inch/sec2, degree/sec2 (machine unit)
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D)
(When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 to +100000.0. When the machine system
is inch system, machine, 0.0 to +10000.0.)
Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/ deceleration before
interpolation for each axis.
If a value greater than 100000.0 is set, the value is clamped to 100000.0.
If 0 is set, the specification of 100000.0 is assumed. If 0 is set for all axes, however,
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is not performed.
If a maximum allowable acceleration rate set for one axis is greater than a maximum
allowable acceleration rate set for another axis by a factor of 2 or more, the feedrate at a
corner where the direction of travel abruptly changes can decrease temporarily.
NOTE
Minimum allowable feedrate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in circular
1732
interpolation

With the deceleration function based on acceleration in circular interpolation, an optimum
feedrate is automatically calculated so that acceleration produced by changing the move
direction in circular interpolation does not exceed the maximum allowable acceleration
rate specified in parameter No. 1735.
If the radius of an arc is very small, a calculated feedrate may become too low.
In such a case, the feedrate is prevented from decreasing below the value specified in this
parameter.
Maximum allowable acceleration rate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in circular
1735
interpolation for each axis

- 1092 -
Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate for the deceleration function based on
acceleration in circular interpolation.
Feedrate is controlled so that acceleration produced by changing the move direction in
circular interpolation does not exceed the value specified in this parameter.
For an axis with 0 set in this parameter, the deceleration function based on acceleration is
disabled.
If a different value is set in this parameter for each axis, a feedrate is determined from the
smaller of the acceleration rates specified for the two circular axes.
Maximum allowable acceleration rate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in AI contour
1737
control for each axis

Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate produced by changing the tool move
direction.
For an axis with 0 set in this parameter, the deceleration function based on acceleration is
disabled. If 0 is set for all axes, the deceleration function based on acceleration is not
performed.
In circular interpolation, however, the deceleration function based on feedrate control
using acceleration in circular interpolation (parameter No. 1735) is enabled.
1738 Minimum allowable feedrate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in AI contour control

With the deceleration function based on acceleration in AI contour control, a feedrate
most suitable for a desired figure is automatically calculated.
Depending on the figure, however, the calculated feedrate may become too low.
In such a case, the feedrate is prevented from decreasing below the value specified in this
parameter.
If overriding using the deceleration function based on cutting load is enabled, a feedrate
lower than the minimum allowable feedrate may be used.
FL rate for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation for each axis in the
1763
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode

- 1093 -
Set a minimum allowable feedrate (FL rate) for acceleration/ deceleration after cutting
feed interpolation in acceleration/deceleration before interpolation as in AI contour
control.
Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in the

1769

[Unit of data] msec
In the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode as in AI contour control, not
the ordinary time constant (parameter No. 1622) but the value of this parameter is used.
Be sure to specify the same time constant value for all axes except for a special
application. If different values are set, correct linear and circular figures cannot be
obtained.
1772 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] msec
Set an acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration before
interpolation (time for changing from the state of constant feedrate (A) to the state of
constant acceleration/deceleration (C) at the acceleration rate calculated from the
acceleration rate set in parameter No. 1660: time of (B) in the figure).
Feedrate in tangent direction

Optimum inclination is automatically
calculated from the setting of parameter
No. 1660.
(A) (B) (C) (B) (A) (B) (C) (B) (A)
Time set by parameter No. 1772
1783 Maximum allowable feedrate difference for feedrate determination based on corner feedrate difference

- 1094 -
If a feedrate component change for each axis exceeding the value set in this parameter
occurs at the joint of blocks, the feedrate determination function based on corner feedrate
difference finds a feedrate not exceeding the set value and performs deceleration by using
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. Thus, a shock to the machine and
machining error at a corner can be reduced.
3241 Character blinking in the AI advanced preview control or the AI contour control I mode (first character)
to to
Character blinking in the AI advanced preview control or the AI contour control I mode (seventh
3247
character)

Set the first to seventh blinking characters in the AI advanced preview control or the AI
contour control I mode by using ASCII codes represented as decimal numbers.
When 0 is set in all of these parameters,
"AI APC" blinks in AI advanced preview control mode.
"AICC 1" blinks in AI contour control I mode.
Code numbers 032 to 095 in the "CHARACTER CODE LIST" can be set.
3251 Character blinking in the AI contour control II mode (first character)

to to
3257 Character blinking in the AI contour control II mode (seventh character)

Set the first to seventh blinking characters in the AI contour control II mode by using
ASCII codes represented as decimal numbers.
When 0 is set in all of these parameters, "AICC 2" blinks.
Code numbers 032 to 095 in the "CHARACTER CODE LIST" can be set.
CHARACTER CODE LIST

Character Code Comment Character Code Comment Character Code Comment
032 Space 6 054 L 076
! 033 Exclamation 7 055 M 077
mark
” 034 Quotation 8 056 N 078
marks
# 035 Sharp 9 057 O 079
$ 036 Dollar mark : 058 Colon P 080
% 037 Percent ; 059 Semicolon Q 081
& 038 Ampersand < 060 Left angle bracket R 082
’ 039 Apostrophe = 061 Equal sign S 083
( 040 Left > 062 Right angle T 084
parenthesis bracket
) 041 Right ? 063 Question mark U 085
parenthesis
* 042 Asterisk @ 064 Commercial at V 086
mark
+ 043 Positive sign A 065 W 087
, 044 Comma B 066 X 088
- 045 Negative C 067 Y 089
sign
- 1095 -

. 046 Period D 068 Z 090
/ 047 Slash E 069 [ 091 Left square
bracket
0 048 F 070 ¥ 092 Yen mark
1 049 G 071 ] 093 Right square
bracket
2 050 H 072 094
3 051 I 073 _ 095 Underline
4 052 J 074
5 053 K 075
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7055 BCG

#3 BCG The pre-interpolation bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant change function

is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Acceleration/deceleration reference speed for the time constant change function of bell-shaped
7066

This parameter is used when the time constant change function of bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8451 NOF ZAG

#4 ZAG The deceleration function based on cutting load in AI contour control (deceleration based
on Z-axis fall angle) is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
When this parameter is set to 1, be sure to set parameters Nos. 8456, 8457, and 8458.
#7 NOF In AI contour control II, an F command is:

0: Not ignored.
1: Ignored.
When this parameter is set to 1, the specification of the maximum allowable feedrate set
in parameter No. 8465 is assumed.
- 1096 -
Override for range 2 that is applied during deceleration according to the cutting load in AI contour
8456
control II
8457
control II
8458
control II

[Unit of data] %
For the function of decelerating according to the cutting load in AI contour control II, the
override set in a parameter can be applied according to the angle at which the tool moves
downward along the Z-axis. The feedrate obtained according to other conditions is
multiplied by the override for the range containing angle θ at which the tool moves
downward.
However, when bit 1 (ZG2) of parameter No. 19515 is set to 0, no parameter is available
to range 1, and 100% is applied at all times. When bit 1 (ZG2) of parameter No. 19515 is
set to 1, set an override value for range 1 in parameter No. 19516.
Range 1 0°≤θ<30°
Range 2 30°≤θ<45°
Range 3 45°≤θ<60°
Range 4 60°≤θ≤90°
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8459 OVRB

#3 OVRB For deceleration based on a feedrate difference or acceleration rate in AI contour control,
override is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Usually, override is enabled for a specified feedrate, and AI contour control is applied to
the specified feedrate. When this parameter is set to 1, override is applied to a feedrate
placed under AI contour control.
8465 Maximum allowable feedrate for AI contour control

This parameter sets the maximum allowable feedrate for contour control.
If a feedrate higher than the setting of this parameter is specified in the AI contour control
mode, the feedrate is clamped to that set in this parameter.
If this parameter is set to 0, no clamping is performed.
When bit 7 (NOF) of parameter No. 8451 is set to 1, the tool moves, assuming that the
feedrate set in this parameter is specified. If 0 is set in this parameter at this time, a
movement is made at the specified feedrate.
- 1097 -
8466 Maximum allowable feedrate for AI contour control (when a rotation axis is singly specified)

This parameter sets the maximum allowable feedrate for AI contour control when a
rotation axis is singly specified.
If a feedrate higher than the setting of this parameter is specified in the AI contour control
mode, the feedrate is clamped to that set in this parameter.
If this parameter is set to 0, the feedrate is clamped to that set in parameter No. 8465.
When bit 7 (NOF) of parameter No. 8451 is set to 1 and a rotation axis is singly specified,
the tool moves, assuming that the feedrate set in this parameter is specified. If 0 is set in
this parameter at this time, the tool moves at the feedrate specified in parameter No. 8465.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19500 FCC FNW

#6 FNW When the feedrate is determined according to the feedrate difference and acceleration in
AI contour control:
0: The maximum feedrate at which the allowable feedrate difference and acceleration
for each axis are not exceeded is used.
1: A feedrate is determined to satisfy the condition that the allowable feedrate
difference and allowable acceleration rate of each axis are not exceeded, and also to
ensure that a constant deceleration rate is applied to the same figure regardless of the
direction of movement.
#7 FCC When there is an axis that requires one or more seconds for acceleration in look-ahead
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation:
0: Emphasis is placed on precision, so that the specified feedrate may not be reached.
1: Emphasis is placed on speed, so that the specified feedrate is produced.
When this parameter is set to 1, the precision of curved interpolation such as circular
interpolation may decrease.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19503 ZOL HPF

#0 HPF When a feedrate is determined based on acceleration in AI contour control II, smooth
feedrate control is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
NOTE
- 1098 -
#4 ZOL The deceleration function based on cutting load in AI contour control II (deceleration
based on Z-axis fall angle) is:
0: Enabled for all commands.
1: Enabled for linear interpolation commands only.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19515 ZG2

#1 ZG2 When the deceleration function based on cutting load in AI contour control (deceleration
based on Z-axis fall angle) is used:
0: Stepwise override values are applied.
1: Inclined override values are applied.
This parameter is valid only when bit 4 (ZAG) of parameter No. 8451 is set to 1.
When this parameter is set to 1, be sure to set parameters Nos. 19516, 8456, 8457, and
8458.
19516 Override for area 1 in deceleration based on cutting load in AI contour control II

[Unit of data] %
This parameter sets an override value for area 1 when the deceleration function based on
cutting load in AI contour control II is used.
This parameter is valid only when bit 1 (ZG2) of parameter No. 19515 is set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19517 HNG SNG

#0 SNG When smooth speed control is effective, by block length of the linear interpolation,
smooth speed control and speed control with change of acceleration on each axis;
0: Are not invalidated.
1: Are invalidated.
When smooth speed control is effective, smooth speed control and speed control with
change of acceleration on each axis are invalidated in the block longer than the block
length set to parameter No. 19518 if this parameter is set to 1.
NOTE
#1 HNG By block length of the linear interpolation, speed control with acceleration on each axis
and speed control with change of acceleration on each axis;
0: Are not invalidated.
1: Are invalidated.
- 1099 -
Speed control with acceleration on each axis and speed control with change of
acceleration on each axis are invalidated in the block longer than the block length set to
parameter No. 19518 if this parameter is set to 1.
NOTE
Block length in speed control with acceleration or smooth speed control and speed control with
19518
change of acceleration are invalidated

[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
This parameter sets the block length to invalidate speed control with acceleration on each
axis or smooth speed control and speed control with change of acceleration on each axis
by block length of the linear interpolation.
This parameter is effective when bit 1 (HNG) of parameter No. 19517 is set to 1 or bit 0
(SNG) of parameter No. 19517 is set to 1 if smooth speed control is effective.
Speed control with acceleration on each axis of smooth speed control and speed control
with change of acceleration on each axis are invalidated in the block longer than the
block length set to this parameter.
If 0.0 is set, the specification of 10.0 is assumed.
Alarm and message

PS5011 PARAMETER ZERO (CUT MAX) The setting of the parameter (No. 1430) for the maximum
cutting feedrate is 0.
PS5110 IMPROPER G-CODE (AICC MODE) An unspecifiable G code was specified in the AI contour
control mode.
Notes
- About processing macro statements
In AI contour control mode, the NC statements of multiple blocks are looked ahead. Macro statements
such as arithmetic expressions and conditional branches are processed as soon as they are read into the
buffer. Therefore, the timing of the macro statement execution is not always the specified order.
In case that you need to execute the macro statement after completing the NC block just before the macro
statement, specify M code or G code that is not buffered just before the macro statement. Specially, in
case of reading/writing the system variables to control signals, coordinates, offset value, etc., it may be
different system variable data by the timing of the NC statement execution. To avoid this phenomenon,
specify such M codes or G codes before the macro statement, if necessary.
- Setting of acceleration/deceleration, and feedrate

In the mode of look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, when a time required for
acceleration or deceleration is over one second, the feedrate could not reach the specified data.
When bit 7 (FCC) of parameter No.19500 is set to 1, the feedrate can reach the specified data.
In this case, however, the interpolation precision may be lower in curve interpolation such as circular
interpolation.
- 1100 -
7.1.13 Speed Command Extension in Least Input Increments C

Overview
When the least input increment C (IS-C) is selected, the limitations indicated in Table 7.1.13 (a) and
Table 7.1.13 (b) have conventionally been applied to the speed and acceleration parameters.
For example, when the unit of data is mm, and the increment system is IS-C, the maximum rapid traverse
rate and maximum cutting speed have been unable to exceed 100000 mm/min due to the limitations on
the valid data range.
- Conventional speed and angular velocity parameters

Table 7.1.13 (a)
mm/min IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
degree/min
inch/min IS-C 0.00001 0.00000 to +4000.00000
- Conventional acceleration and angular acceleration parameters

Table 7.1.13 (b)
mm/sec2 IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
degree/sec2
inch/sec2 IS-C 0.00001 0.00000 to +9999.99999
With an axis for which bit 7 (IESP) of parameter No. 1013 is set to 1 and IS-C is specified as the
increment system, this function extends the parameter input limitations to those indicated in Table 7.1.13
(c) and Table 7.1.13 (d).
With this function, values greater than the conventionally allowed values can be set in the speed and
acceleration parameters.
For example, the upper limit of the maximum rapid traverse rate and maximum cutting speed after this
function is applied is:
- About 1000000 mm/min when the unit of data is mm, and IS-C is used
- Speed and angular velocity parameters when this function is used

Table 7.1.13 (c)
mm/min IS-C 0.001 0.000 to +999000.000
degree/min
inch/min IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +9600.0000
- Acceleration and angular acceleration parameters when this function is used

Table 7.1.13 (d)
mm/sec2
IS-C 0.001 0.000 to +999999.999
degree/sec2
inch/sec2 IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
NOTE
Note that the least input increment and valid data range of set data vary from the
conventional ones.
- 1101 -
Limitation
- Time constant parameters for linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation and bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
If linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation is used in an operation such as rapid traverse, cutting feed, or manual feed, the maximum
allowable time constant value is a half of the conventional maximum allowable value.
The table below indicates the pertinent time constant parameters:
Parameter
Meaning
number
1620 Time constant T or T1 used for linear acceleration/deceleration or bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis
1621 Time constant T2 used for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis
1622 Time constant of acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis
1624 Time constant of acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis
1626 Acceleration/deceleration time constant in threading cycles for each axis
1769 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in the
5271-5274 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping extraction (first-stage to fourth-stage
gear)
5365-5368 Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant in rigid tapping (first-stage to fourth-stage gear)
- VCMD waveform display function

As the speed increases, the amount of data that can be obtained for VCMD waveform display increases.
So, the maximum treatable amount of data may be exceeded, resulting in incorrect waveform display.
- Positional deviation amount display on the servo setting screen

If the positional deviation amount exceeds -9999999 when a fast movement is made in the negative
direction, the displayed number of digits decreases by one digit due to a limitation on display space.
To reference a correct positional deviation amount, check diagnosis data No. 300, "Servo positional
deviation".
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1013 IESPx

NOTE
#7 IESPx When the least input increment is C (IS-C), the function to allow to set the larger value to
the parameter of the speed and the acceleration:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
As for the axis which set this parameter when the least input increment is C (IS-C), the
larger value can be set to the parameter of the speed and the acceleration.
The valid data ranges for the speed and acceleration parameters are indicated in Table
7.1.13 (c) and Table 7.1.13 (d) provided in "Overview".
- 1102 -
When this function is made effective, the digit number below the decimal point of the
parameter on input screen is changed. The digit number below the decimal point
decreases by one digit in case of the least input increment C (IS-C).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2282 ISE64

#3 ISE64 The speed limitation on the feed forward function (bit 1 (FEED) of parameter No. 2005 =
1) is:
0: Remains unchanged from the conventional value.
1: Extended.
When the feed forward function is enabled, the speed limitation on an axis for which this
parameter is set is extended as indicated below if the increment system is IS-C.
IS-C
Conventional Extended
Speed [Unit: mm/min] 100000 999000
Notes
NOTE
1 To use this function, the corresponding servo software is required.
2 This function cannot be set for an axis under PMC axis control.
- 1103 -
7.2 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL
7.2.1 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration

7.2.1.1 Automatic acceleration/deceleration
Overview
To prevent a mechanical shock, acceleration/deceleration is automatically applied when the tool starts and
ends its movement (Fig. 7.2.1.1 (a)).
Rapid traverse
FR : Rapid traverse
rate
FR TR : Acceleration/
deceleration
time constant
for rapid
traverse rate
0 Time
TR TR
Cutting feedrate
FC : Cutting feedrate
FC TC : Acceleration/
deceleration time
constant for a
cutting feedrate
0 Time
TC TC
Fig. 7.2.1.1 (a)
Acceleration and deceleration is performed when starting and ending movement, resulting in smooth start
and stop.
Automatic acceleration/deceleration is also performed when feedrate changes, so the change in speed is
also smooth.
It is not necessary to take acceleration/deceleration into consideration when programming.
Rapid traverse : Linear acceleration/deceleration (time constant per axis is set by parameter No. 1620)
Cutting feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant per axis is set by parameter 1622)
Jog feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant per axis is set by parameter No.
1624)
Rate after interpolation Rate after acceleration/deceleration
Servo motor
Acceleration/ Servo
deceleration
Pulse control control
CNC distribution
command (interpolation) Acceleration/ Servo
deceleration
control control
- 1104 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
THLx JGLx CTBx CTLx
1610
JGLx CTBx CTLx

#0 CTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or dry run during cutting feed

0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1: Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied.
NOTE
#1 CTBx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or dry run during cutting feed

0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/ deceleration is applied.
(depending on the setting in bit 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610)
1: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is applied.
NOTE
#4 JGLx Acceleration/deceleration in jog feed

1: The same acceleration/deceleration as for cutting feedrate is applied.
(Depending on the settings of bits 1 (CTBx) and 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610)
NOTE
#5 THLx Acceleration/deceleration in threading cycles

As the time constant and FL rate, however, the settings of parameters Nos. 1626 and
1627 for threading cycles are used.
Time constant T or T1 used for linear acceleration/deceleration or bell-shaped

1620

[Unit of data] msec
Specify a time constant used for acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse.
- 1105 -
[Example]
For linear acceleration/deceleration
Speed
Rapid traverse rate
(Parameter No. 1420)
T T
Time
Fig. 7.2.1.1 (b)
T : Setting of parameter No. 1620
For bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration

Speed Rapid traverse rate
T2 T2 T2 T2
Time
T1 T1
Fig. 7.2.1.1 (c)

T1 : Setting of parameter No. 1620
(However, T1 ≥ T2 must be satisfied.)
Total acceleration (deceleration) time : T1 + T2
Time for linear portion : T1‐T2
Time for curve portion : T2 × 2

[Unit of data] msec
Specify time constant T2 used for bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration in rapid traverse
for each axis.

[Unit of data] msec
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed,
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or linear acceleration/
deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each axis. Which type to use is selected
with bits 1 (CTBx) and 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610. Except for special applications,
the same time constant must be set for all axes in this parameter. If the time constants set
for the axes differ from each other, proper straight lines and arcs cannot be obtained.
- 1106 -
1623 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis

Set the lower limit (FL rate) of exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for
each axis.
1624 Time constant of acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis.

[Unit of data] msec
Set the time constant used for acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis.
1625 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis

Set the FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis.
This parameter allows only the exponential type.
Acceleration/deceleration time constant in threading cycles for each axis

1626

[Unit of data] msec
Set a time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in the threading cycles
G92 (T series) and G76 (T series) for each axis.
FL rate for acceleration/deceleration in threading cycles for each axis

1627

Set an FL rate for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in the threading cycles G92
(T series) and G76 (T series) for each axis. Set 0 at all times except in a special case.
- 1107 -
7.2.1.2 Rapid traverse block overlap

Overview
If rapid traverse blocks continue or the block next to a rapid traverse block does not move, the next block
can be executed when the feedrate of each axis of a rapid traverse block is decreased to the reduction ratio
set by the parameter.
Explanation
(Example) Fh: Rapid traverse rate
N10 G00 X10.0 ; α : Reduction ratio (set by parameter No. 1722)
N20 G00 Y10.0 ; Fd: Deceleration evaluation rate = Fdh×α/100
Axis speed
N10 G00 X10.0 ; N20 G00 Y10.0 ;
Y-axis speed
Fh
X-axis speed
Fd
Time
Start point of the next block
Fig. 7.2.1.2 (a)
NOTE
Whether the speed is reduced to the reduction ratio is determined based on
parameter No. 1420 (rapid traverse rate for each axis).
Limitation
Rapid traverse block overlap is disabled when:
• Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration is used for rapid traverse.
• The rapid traverse block overlap disable signal ROVLP <Gn053.5> is "1".
• In the rapid traverse command, dry run is enabled (bit 6 (RDR) of parameter No. 1401 = 1) and dry
run signal DRN <Gn046.7> is "1". (This function is not disabled, however, if manual rapid traverse
selection signal RT <Gn019.7> is set to "1".)
• Rapid traverse is of linear interpolation type (bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 = 1) and the
acceleration/deceleration is constant over time (bit 4 (PRT) of parameter No. 1603 = 1).
Signal
Rapid traverse block overlap disable signal ROVLP<Gn053.5>
[Function] This signal disables rapid traverse block overlap.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn053 ROVLP
- 1108 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1601 RTO

#4 RTO Block overlap in rapid traverse

0: Blocks are not overlapped in rapid traverse.
1: Blocks are overlapped in rapid traverse.
1722 Rapid traverse feedrate reduction ratio for overlapping rapid traverse blocks

[Data type] Byte axis
[Unit of data] %
This parameter is used when rapid traverse blocks are arranged successively, or when a
rapid traverse block is followed by a block that does not cause movement. When the
feedrate for each axis of a block is reduced to the ratio set in this parameter, the execution
of the next block is started.
NOTE
The parameter No. 1722 is effective when bit 4 (RTO) of parameter
No. 1601 is set to 1.
7.2.1.3 Programmable rapid traverse overlap

Overview
The programmable rapid traverse overlap supports:
• Changing the feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap from the macro program becomes
possible.
• Shortening the cycle time becomes possible by doing rapid traverse overlap between threading cycle
blocks.
NOTE
- Programmable rapid traverse overlap

If the bit 0 (PRO) of parameter No. 1612=0, the feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap is
specified by the parameter No. 1722. If the parameter PRO=1, the ratio is specified by the system
variables. Even if the parameter PRO=1, and the system variables other than 1 to 100 is specified, the
ratio is specified by the parameter No. 1722.
#100851 Feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap (1st axis)
#100852 Feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap (2nd axis)
:
#100874 Feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap (24th axis)
- 1109 -
NOTE
1 Available up to the number of controlled axes.
2 After the value is set, it is available until the system is reset.
To use this function, set the following signals and parameters.

• ROVLP<Gn053.5> is "0"
Rapid traverse block overlap disable signal
• Bit 4 (RTO) of parameter No. 1601=1
Blocks are overlapped in rapid traverse.
• Bit 0 (PRO) of parameter No. 1612=1
The feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap is specified by the system variables.
T
- Rapid traverse overlap between threading cycle blocks
Rapid traverse overlap is executed between "retract(3)" and "return(4)" and between "return(4)" and
"next-threading cycle positioning(1)"..
Overlap is executed between these blocks.
Return
X-axis
4 Cycle start point
Retract 3 1 Positioning
2
Z-axis
To use this function, set the following parameters.

• Bit 0 (CFR) of parameter No. 1611=1 :
For retraction after threading, the type of acceleration /deceleration after interpolation for rapid
traverse is used.
• Bit 4 (PRT) of parameter No. 1603=0 :
For positioning, acceleration/deceleration of acceleration fixed type is used.
The thread cutting cycle retract function is disabled.
Explanation
- Programmable rapid traverse overlap
How to specify the feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap by the system variables.
Example)
O0001;
N10 #100851=50; Write to system variable (ratio is 50%)
N20 G00 X10.00; Execute overlap (ratio is 50%)
N30 G00 Z10.00;
;
N50 #100851=100; Rewrite to system variable (ratio is 100%)
N60 G00 X30.00; Execute overlap (ratio is 100%)
N70 G00 Z50.00;
N80 M02;
- 1110 -
NOTE
1 To specify the feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap by the system
variables is executed as macro program.
2 Whether the feedrate has been reduced as specified by the reduction ratio is
compare with the parameter No. 1420 (Rapid traverse rate for each axis).
T
- Rapid traverse overlap between threading cycle blocks
To use rapid traverse overlap between threading cycle blocks, set the bit 3 (TCO) of parameter No. 1611
= 1.
Rapid traverse overlap between threading cycle blocks is executed as shown Fig. 7.2.1.3.
Example: Operation from retraction to cycle start point
Fh: Rapid traverse feedrate
α: Reduction ratio(specified in parameter No. 1726)
Axis speed
Fd: Reduction criterion feedrate = Fh × α/100
Retract along the X-axis Shift to the cycle start point along the Z-axis
Feedrate along the Z-axis

Fh
Feedrate along the X-axis
Fd
Time
Start point of the next block
Fig. 7.2.1.3
NOTE
Whether the feedrate has been reduced as specified by the reduction ratio is
compare with the parameter No. 1420 (Rapid traverse rate for each axis).
Restrictions
In following conditions, both rapid traverse block overlap and rapid traverse overlap between threading
cycle blocks are disabled.
• Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used in rapid traverse
• The bit 6 (RDR) of parameter No. 1401 = 1 (dry run for rapid traverse is enabled), and the dry run
signal DRN<Gn046.7> is "1" and the manual rapid traverse selection signal RT <Gn019.7> is set to
"0".
• The bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 = 1 (positioning is performed with linear interpolation) and
bit 4 (PRT) of parameter No. 1603=1 (acceleration/deceleration of time fixed type is used).
・Restrictions about programmable rapid traverse overlap

• Rapid traverse block overlap is disabled if the rapid traverse block overlap disable signal
ROVLP<Gn053.5> is "1".
T
・Restrictions about rapid traverse overlap between threading cycle blocks
• If this function is enabled, thread cycle retract function is disabled.
• The threading cycle command must be commanded in G40 mode (Cutter/tool nose radius
compensation cancel mode).
- 1111 -
• Rapid traverse block overlap disable signal ROVLP<Gn053.5> is invalid.
Signal
Rapid traverse block overlap disable signal ROVLP<Gn053.5>
[Function] This signal disables rapid traverse block overlap.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn053 ROVLP
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1601 RTO

#4 RTO Block overlap in rapid traverse

0: Blocks are not overlapped in rapid traverse.
1: Blocks are overlapped in rapid traverse.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1611 TCO

#3 TCO Blocks in a threading cycle are:

0: Not overlapped in rapid traverse.
1: Overlapped in rapid traverse.
In a threading cycle that is a turning canned cycle, the rapid traverse overlap function can
perform rapid traverse overlap between a retract operation and return operation and
between a return operation and a positioning operation for the next threading cycle.
The rapid traverse deceleration ratio in an overlap between blocks is set in parameter No.
1726.
NOTE
When this function is used, threading cycle retraction is disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1612 PRO

#0 PRO The feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap is specified by :
0: The parameter No. 1722
1: The system variables #100851[#_ROVLP[1]]-#100874[#_ROVLP[24]]
This function is available in following conditions.
Rapid traverse block overlap disable signal ROVLP<Gn053.5>="0" and bit 4 (RTO) of
parameter No. 1601=1(Blocks are overlapped in rapid traverse).
- 1112 -
1722 Rapid traverse feedrate reduction ratio for overlapping rapid traverse blocks

[Unit of data] %
This parameter is used when rapid traverse blocks are arranged successively, or when a
rapid traverse block is followed by a block that does not cause movement. When the
feedrate for each axis of a block is reduced to the ratio set in this parameter, the execution
NOTE
The parameter No. 1722 is effective when bit 4 (RTO) of parameter
1726 Rapid traverse rate reduction ratio for overlapping threading cycle blocks

[Unit of data] %
In a threading cycle that is a turning canned cycle, when the feedrate for each axis is
reduced to the deceleration ratio set in this parameter between a retraction and a return to
the cycle start point or between a return to the cycle start point and a movement to the
threading start point, the execution of the next block is started.
NOTE
The parameter No. 1726 is valid when bit 3 (TCO) of parameter
- 1113 -
7.2.2 Rapid Traverse Bell-shaped Acceleration/Deceleration

Overview
Rapid traverse bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration smoothly increases or decreases the rapid traverse
rate, reducing the stress and strain imposed on the machine due to the variation in the acceleration with
changes in the feedrate. As the time constant for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration can be smaller than
that for linear acceleration/deceleration, the time needed for acceleration/ deceleration can be reduced.
<Rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration> <Rapid traverse bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration>
Speed Speed
0 0
Time Time
Acceleration Acceleration
0 0
Time Time
This function is enabled when the time constants for rapid traverse bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
T1 and T2 are specified in parameters Nos. 1620 and 1621, respectively.
In this case, the time needed for acceleration/deceleration is as follows.
<Rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration>
Speed
Rapid traverse rate
Time T : Time constant for linear

T acceleration/deceleration
T
<Rapid traverse bell shaped acceleration/deceleration>

Speed
Rapid
traverse rate T1 : Set a time constant used for linear
acceleration/deceleration
T2 : Set a time for rounding.
Total time=T1+T2
Time for linear=T1-T2
Time for rounding part=T2
Time
T2/2 T1 T2/2
T2
- 1114 -
Set a time when rapid traverse override is 100%. When it is less than 100%, the total time is reduced
(constant acceleration method).
Value of T1 is determined from motor torque. Set a value of T2 to 24 msec or 32 msec.
Parameter
1620

[Unit of data] msec
[Example]
Speed
Rapid traverse rate
T T
Time

T2 T2 T2 T2
Time
T1 T1


[Unit of data] msec
for each axis.
- 1115 -
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (This manual) Automatic acceleration/deceleration
7.2.3 Linear Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed

Interpolation
Overview
If linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is enabled (if bit 0 (CTL) of
parameter No. 1610 is set to 1), acceleration/ deceleration is performed as follows:
Cutting feed:
Linear acceleration/deceleration (constant acceleration time)
Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant for each axis in parameter No. 1622.
Jog feed:
Exponential or linear acceleration/deceleration (constant acceleration time)
If the time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration is the same as that for exponential
acceleration/deceleration, the delay of linear acceleration/deceleration in relation to a command is 1/2 of
the delay of exponential acceleration/deceleration, so that the time required for acceleration and
deceleration can be reduced. If circular interpolation is performed, especially when high-speed cutting is
being performed, the actual tool path created after acceleration/deceleration will deviate from the
programmed arc in the radial direction. This deviation can also be reduced, in comparison with
exponential acceleration/deceleration, by applying linear acceleration/deceleration.
Speed Speed
→ Acceleration →
/deceleration
circuit
Time t Time
t
Speed Speed
→ Acceleration →
/deceleration
circuit
Time Time
t t
t : Time constant
This function is enabled when bit 0 (CTL) of parameter No. 1610 is set to 1. If bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is also enabled, bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration is executed. The time constants for cutting feed and jog feed for each axis are
specified in parameters Nos. 1622 and 1624 respectively, in the same way as for exponential
acceleration/deceleration. The values specified for the FL feedrate for cutting feed (parameter No. 1623)
and the FL feedrate for jog feed (parameter No. 1625) are ignored (always assumed to be 0).
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1610 JGLx CTLx

- 1116 -

NOTE

NOTE

[Unit of data] msec
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or linear
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each axis. Which type to
use is selected with bits 1 (CTBx) and 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610. Except for
special applications, the same time constant must be set for all axes in this parameter. If
the time constants set for the axes differ from each other, proper straight lines and arcs
cannot be obtained.

[Unit of data] msec
- 1117 -
Note
NOTE
1 If linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is enabled,
linear acceleration/deceleration is executed during cutting feed and during a dry
run. Linear acceleration/deceleration can also be executed during jog feed if the
bit 4 (JGL) of parameter No. 1610 is specified accordingly.
2 In circular interpolation especially when circular cutting is executed at high
speed, the actual path of the accelerated or decelerated tool deviates from the
specified arc in the direction of the radius.
Y
Δr : Error Δr : Maximum radius error (mm)
v : Feedrate (mm/s)
Specified path r : Radius of arc (mm)
T1 : Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
Actual path time constant cutting (sec)
T2 : Time constant of servo loop (sec)
(Inverse of position motor gain)
0 X
The maximum error in the radial direction (Δr) can be approximated by the
following expressions:
2
1 2 1 2 V
Δr = ( T1 + T2 ) …Exponential acceleration/deceleration
2 2 r
1 2 1 2 V2
Δr = ( T + T ) …Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
24 1 2 2 r
1 1 V2
Δr = ( T12 + T22 ) …Bell-shaped acceleration /deceleration after interpolation
48 2 r
If the error caused by the time constant of the servo motor is excluded, the error
cause by linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is 1/12 of that
caused by exponential acceleration/deceleration. The radius error in the case of
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is a half of linear
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.
3 Linear acceleration/deceleration can be executed both for cutting feed and for
jog feed along a PMC axis. Acceleration/deceleration for cutting feed is executed
even if acceleration/deceleration for jog feed is selected. In jog feed along the
PMC axis, the time constant for cutting feed is used instead of that for jog feed.
7.2.4 Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed

Interpolation
Overview
The bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation provides smooth acceleration
and deceleration to reduce stress and strain on the machine. If this function is enabled (if bit 1 (CTB) of
parameter No. 1610 is set to 1), acceleration/deceleration is performed as follows:
Cutting feed:
Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration (constant acceleration time)
Jog feed:
Exponential or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration (constant acceleration time)
- 1118 -
Speed Speed
Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
Acceleration/
deceleration function
Time Time
T T T : Time constant
Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation is enabled when bit 1 (CTB) of
parameter No.1610 is specified. The time constants for cutting feed and for jog feed for each axis are
specified in parameters Nos. 1622 and 1624 respectively, in the same way as exponential
acceleration/deceleration. The values specified for the FL feedrate for cutting feed (parameter No. 1623)
and the FL feedrate for jog feed (parameter No. 1625) are ignored (always assumed to be 0).
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1610 JGLx CTBx CTLx


NOTE
#1 CTBx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or dry run during cutting feed

0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/ deceleration is applied.
(depending on the setting in bit 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610)
1: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is applied.
NOTE

- 1119 -
NOTE

[Unit of data] msec
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or linear
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each axis. Which type to
use is selected with bits 1 (CTBx) and 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610. Except for
special applications, the same time constant must be set for all axes in this parameter. If
the time constants set for the axes differ from each other, proper straight lines and arcs
cannot be obtained.

[Unit of data] msec
Note
NOTE
1 If bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation during cutting feed is
enabled, bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is executed during cutting feed
and during a dry run. Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration can also be
executed during jog feed if the bit 4 (JGL) of parameter No. 1610 is specified
accordingly.
2 In circular interpolation, the actual tool path after acceleration/deceleration
deviates from the programmed arc in the radial direction. To overcome this radial
deviation, see the note on linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for
cutting feed.
3 Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration can be executed both for cutting feed and
for jog feed along a PMC axis. The time constant for acceleration/deceleration
for jog feed is the same as that for cutting feed. In jog feed along the PMC axis,
the time constant for cutting feed is used instead of that for jog feed.
- 1120 -
7.2.5 Optimum Torque Acceleration/Deceleration

Overview
This function enables acceleration/deceleration in accordance with the torque characteristics of the motor
and the characteristics of the machines due to its friction and gravity.
Usually, because of the friction of the machine, gravity, the torque characteristics of the motor, and other
factors, the acceleration/ deceleration performance (torque for acceleration/deceleration) is different with
direction of movement, acceleration or deceleration. In this function, acceleration pattern of rapid traverse
for the following situations, plus movement and acceleration, plus movement and deceleration, minus
movement and acceleration, minus movement and deceleration can be set into parameters according to the
torque for acceleration/deceleration of each situation. Acceleration/deceleration can be performed
according to these parameter setting, so that the most of the capability of the motor can be used and
positioning time can be reduced.
NOTE
Speed
A c c e l e r a t io n D e c e l e r a ti o n
T im e
and and
+ m ove + m ove
A c c e l e r a t io n D e c e l e r a ti o n
and and
- m ove - m ove
A c c e le r a ti o n
T im e
A c c / D e c p a t t e r n is t h e s a m e w a y in e a c h c o n d itio n .
Fig. 7.2.5 (a) Conventional acceleration/declaration
Speed
A c c e l e r a ti o n D e c e le r a tio n
T im e
and and
+ m ov e + m ov e
A c c e l e r a ti o n D e c e le r a tio n
and and
A c c e le r a t i o n - m ov e - m ov e
T im e
A c c / D e c p a t t e r n c a n b e c h a n g e d in e a c h c o n d it io n .
Fig. 7.2.5 (b) Acceleration/deceleration with this function
Explanation
Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration selects the acceleration pattern set with parameters on the basis
of the axial movement direction and the acceleration/deceleration state, determines the acceleration for
each axis from the current speed, and controls the tangential acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse.
- 1121 -
- Setting optimum torque acceleration/deceleration

When bit 0 (FAP) of parameter No. 19540 and bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 are set to 1, and a value
other than 0 is set for any one of the axes as the reference acceleration in parameter No. 1671 as shown in
the Fig. 7.2.5 (a), rapid traverse is accelerated/decelerated by optimum torque acceleration/deceleration.
Table 7.2.5 (a) Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration

Bit 0 (FAP) of parameter No. Bit 1 (LRP) of parameter Bell-shaped
Reference
19540 No. 1401 acceleration Acceleration pattern
acceleration
(Optimum torque acc/dec) (Linear type positioning) change time
See "Setting an
1 1 No.1671 No.1672
acceleration pattern".
To enable bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in addition to optimum torque acceleration/declaration,
set the bell-shaped acceleration change time with parameter No. 1672.
- Required conditions in addition to parameter setting

If the conditions for performing AI advanced preview control (M Series) / AI contour control and for
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation are satisfied, optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is
performed for accelerating and decelerating rapid traverse. However, when bit 0 (FAE) of parameter No.
11240 is set to 1, optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is enabled even if AI advanced preview
control (M Series) / AI contour control is disabled. If rapid traverse is subject to optimum torque
acceleration/deceleration, after-interpolation acceleration/deceleration does not apply to rapid traverse.
CAUTION
To use optimum torque acceleration/deceleration, set bit 5 (FRP) of parameter
No. 19501 to 1.
- Cases in which optimum torque acceleration/ deceleration is disabled

If optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is disabled by parameter settings, or the required conditions
other than parameter settings are not satisfied, acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is used to
accelerate and decelerate rapid traverse.
- Setting acceleration pattern data

Acceleration
P1 P2 Acceleration pattern
Aa P3
P0
P4 P5
Ab
Speed
Fa Fb
Fig. 7.2.5 (c) Setting acceleration pattern
Set the speed and the acceleration at each of the acceleration setting points P0 to P5 for each condition,
plus movement and acceleration, plus movement and deceleration, minus movement and acceleration,
minus movement and deceleration, and for each axis.
The line joining the acceleration setting points is regarded a acceleration pattern.
- 1122 -
For example, while the speed is between Fa and Fb in the Fig. 7.2.5 (c), the acceleration is calculated with
Aa and Ab. Tangential acceleration is controlled not to exceed the calculated acceleration for each axis.
CAUTION
It is not desirable to set an acceleration pattern in which a large acceleration is
set right at a speed of 0, because this will shock the machine. So, be sure to set
an acceleration pattern so that a relatively low acceleration rate is applied
at speed 0 as shown Fig. 7.2.5 (c).
Table 7.2.5 (b) Parameters for acceleration pattern

Acceleration parameter
During acceleration During deceleration
Acceleration Speed
During During During During
setting point parameter
movement in movement in movement in movement in
plus direction minus direction plus direction minus direction
P0 (Speed 0) No.19545 No.19551 No.19557 No.19563
P1 No.19541 No.19546 No.19552 No.19558 No.19564
P2 No.19542 No.19547 No.19553 No.19559 No.19565
P3 No.19543 No.19548 No.19554 No.19560 No.19566
P4 No.19544 No.19549 No.19555 No.19561 No.19567
P5 No.1420 No.19550 No.19556 No.19562 No.19568
The speed at P0 is 0, and the speed at P5 is the rapid traverse rate specified with parameter No. 1420. The
speeds at P1 to P4 are to be set into speed parameters Nos. 19541 to 19544 as ratio to the rapid traverse
speed (parameter No. 1420).
Any acceleration setting point for which the speed parameter (one of Nos. 19541 to 19544) is set to 0 will
be skipped, and the next point whose speed parameter is set to a non-zero value will be joined together as
acceleration pattern.
The accelerations at P0 to P5 are to be set into acceleration parameters Nos. 19545 to 19568 as ratio to the
reference acceleration. If any of the acceleration parameters Nos. 19545 to 19568 is set to 0, the
acceleration is assumed 100% (Reference acceleration). Acceleration parameters should be set to 0 at the
acceleration setting point whose speed parameter is set to 0.
If this function is enabled and parameter No. 1671 for an axis are set to 0, the following values are
assumed as the reference acceleration for that axis:
1000.0mm/sec2, 100.0inch/sec2, 100.0 deg/sec2
- Example of setting acceleration pattern data

In this example, the machine is equipped with the αiS 30/4000.
Motor speed at rapid traverse is 3000 (min-1).
120
100
Torque(Nm)
80
60
40
20
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
Speed(min-1)
Fig. 7.2.5 (d) Speed-torque characteristics of model αiS 30/4000
Specifications of the motor model αiS 30/4000

Rotor inertia :0.0099(Kgm2)
Maximum torque :100(Nm) Speed 0 to 2000(min-1)
- 1123 -
Torque at rapid traverse :79(Nm) Speed 3000(min-1)

Minimum torque :58(Nm) Speed 4000(min-1)
It assumes that 10 (Nm) is needed for the friction torque, so that the torque for acceleration/deceleration is
shown as the following figure.
Because the friction torque is different on each machine, it is necessary to observe the actual torque
output on the machine.
Maximum torque :90(=100-10)(Nm) Speed 0 to 2000(min-1)
Torque at rapid traverse :69(=79-10)(Nm) Speed 3000(min-1)
Minimum torque :48(=58-10)(Nm) Speed 4000(min-1)
100
Torque(Nm)
80
60
40
20
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
-1
Speed(min )
Fig. 7.2.5 (e) Torque for Acc/Dec with consideration of friction
Let the torque be x (Nm), the inertia be y(Kgm2), and the ball screw pitch p(mm), then the acceleration A
is calculated as follows:
x[ N ⋅ m] p x([kg ⋅ m / sec 2 ][m]) p
A= × [ mm ] = × [mm]
y[kg ⋅ m 2 ] 2π y[kg ⋅ m 2 ] 2π
x× p
= [mm / sec 2 ]
2π × y
Machine specification is assumed as follows,
Ball screw pitch : 16 (mm)
Inertia : The machine inertia is to be 2.0 times higher than that of the rotor.
(Rotor inertia: 0.0099 (Kgm2))
The acceleration at maximum torque is,
90 × 16
= 7717[mm / sec 2 ]
2π × 3.0 × 0.0099
The acceleration at rapid traverse is,
69 × 16
= 5916 [mm / sec 2 ]
2π × 3.0 × 0.0099
From the above data, the parameters related to acceleration pattern is given in the Table 7.2.5 (c).
The example assumes that the torque for acceleration/deceleration is the same regardless of whether
acceleration or deceleration is in progress or whether the movement is in the plus or minus direction.
- When setting the speed at P1, use the following value as a rough guide:
If a bell-shaped acceleration change time (parameter No. 1672) is set, use as a rough guide the ratio
of the following speed to the rapid traverse rate:
Reference acceleration × T2/4
where T2 is the bell-shaped acceleration change time (msec).
For example, assume T2 to be 40 msec, then the speed at P1 should be approximately
4124 [mm/sec2]×40 [msec]/4
=4124 [mm/sec2]×602×40 [msec]/60000/4
=2474 [mm/min]
- If no bell-shaped acceleration change time (parameter No. 1672) is set, use about 5% of the rapid
traverse rate as a rough guide.
- 1124 -
Table 7.2.5 (c) Example of setting parameters related to acceleration pattern
Parameter No. Setting Unit Remarks
Rapid traverse 1420 48000. mm/min The ball screw pitch is assumed 16 mm, so that
rate the rapid traverse rate is 48000 mm/min at the
maximum speed 3000 (min-1).
Reference 1671 4124. msec Reference acceleration is 4124mm/sec2.
acceleration
Speed at P1 19541 515 0.01% - Assuming that parameter No. 1672 (bell-shaped
acceleration change time) is set to 40 (msec),
the speed at P1 will be 2474 mm/min from the
calculation described on the previous page. Set
its ratio to the rapid traverse rate, or 5.15%.
0.0515=2474/48000
- If parameter No. 1672 (bell-shaped acceleration
change time) is not set, set about 5.00%.
Speed at P2 19542 6666 0.01% Since the torque characteristic is constant (90 Nm)
in speeds reaching 2000 min-1, set P2 to the ratio
of the speed (32000 mm/min) at 2000 min-1 to the
rapid traverse rate (48000 mm/min).
0.6666=32000 / 48000
Speeds at P3 to 19543 to 19544 0 0.01% P3 to P4 are skipped because the torque drops
P4 almost linearly from the speed
2000 (min-1) to 3000 (min-1).
Acceleration at 19545,19551, 9356 0.01% Set half the acceleration at P1, or 9356.
P0 19557,19563
Acceleration at 19546,19552, 18712 0.01% At P1, 90(Nm) can be used for the
P1 19558,19564 acceleration/deceleration, so set the ratio 7717
(mm/sec2) to 4124 (mm/sec2).
(1.8712 = 7717/4124)
Acceleration at 19547,19553 18712 0.01% At P2, set the same speed as that at P1.
P2 19559,19565
Acceleration at 19548 to 19549, 0 0.01% 0 is set because P3 to P4 are skipped.
P3 to P4 19554 to 19555,
19560 to 19561
19566 to 19567
Acceleration at 19550,19556 14345 0.01% At P5, 69(Nm) can be used for the
P5 19562,19568 acceleration/deceleration, so set the ratio 5916
(1.4345 = 5916 / 4124)
With the above parameter settings, the acceleration pattern will be shown as the Fig. 7.2.5 (f). From
speeds from 0 mm/min to 2474 mm/min, the acceleration as calculated in accordance with the
acceleration pattern is applied; from speeds from 2474 mm/min to 32000 mm/min, an acceleration of
7716 mm/sec2; and from speeds from 32000 mm/min to 48000 mm/min, the acceleration as calculated in
accordance with the acceleration pattern.
- 1125 -
9000
8000 P1 P2
2
Acceleration mm/sec
7000
6000 P5
5000
4000 P0
3000
2000
1000
0
0 8000 16000 24000 32000 40000 48000
Speed mm/min
Fig. 7.2.5 (f) Acceleration pattern with consideration of friction
NOTE
The values in the model αiS 30/4000 speed-torque characteristic diagram are
just typical ones. The values will change depending on the digital servo software,
parameters, input voltage, and other factors.
The optimum acceleration will, therefore, change due to the characteristics of the
machine.
- Examples of setting if the torque of acceleration/deceleration differs

depending on whether acceleration or deceleration is in progress and whether
the movement is in the plus or minus direction
From the effect of gravity and friction, torque for acceleration/deceleration is different on each condition,
such as acceleration, deceleration or plus move (up), minus move (down).
The following example is for the vertical axis and gravity and friction torque are assumed as follows.
Torque of gravity : 20 (Nm)
Torque of friction : 10 (Nm)
Because these value are different on each machine, it is necessary to observe the output torque on the
actual machine for deciding acceleration pattern.
The conditions are the same as the previous example.
(Condition)
Motor speed at rapid traverse : 3000(min-1)
Ball screw pitch : 16(mm)
Inertia : The machine inertia is to be 2.0 times higher than that of the rotor.
Rotor inertia : 0.0099(Kgm2)
Maximum torque : 100(Nm) Speed 0 to 2000(min-1)
Torque at rapid traverse : 79(Nm) Speed 3000(min-1)
Minimum torque : 58(Nm) Speed 4000(min-1)
(1) In case of plus move (up) and acceleration

Because torque of Gravity and friction work against the output torque of motor, the torque for
acceleration/deceleration is as follows.
Maximum torque : 70(=100-20-10) (Nm) Speed 0 to 2000(min-1)
Torque at rapid traverse : 49(=79-20-10) (Nm) Speed 3000(min-1)
Minimum torque : 28(=58-20-10) (Nm) Speed 4000(min-1)
- 1126 -
P0 P1
80
Torque(Nm)
60 P5
40
20
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
-1
Speed(min )
Fig. 7.2.5 (g) Torque for Acc/Dec in case of + move and acceleration with
consideration of gravity and friction.
Parameter setting is as follows,

Acceleration at P0 19545 7277 0.01% Set half the acceleration at P1, or 7277.
Acceleration at 19546,19547 14554 0.01% At P1 and P2, 70(Nm) can be used for the
P1-P2 acceleration/ deceleration, so set the ratio 6002
(1.4554 = 6002 / 4124)
Acceleration at 19548 to 19549 0 0.01% 0 is set because P3 to P4 are skipped.
P3-P4
Acceleration at P5 19550 10187 0.01% At P5, 49(Nm) can be used for the
acceleration/deceleration, so set the ratio 4201
(1.0187 = 4201 / 4124)
7000
P1 P2
6000
2
Acceleration mm/sec
5000
P5
4000
P0
3000
2000
1000
0
0 8000 16000 24000 32000 40000 48000
Speed mm/min
Fig. 7.2.5 (h) Acceleration pattern in case of + move and acceleration with
(2) In case of plus move (up) and deceleration

Because torque of Gravity and friction work forward to the output torque of motor, the torque for
acceleration/deceleration is as follows.
Maximum torque : 130(=100+20+10) (Nm) Speed 0 to 2000(min-1)
Torque at rapid traverse : 109(=79+20+10) (Nm) Speed 3000(min-1)
Minimum torque : 88(=58+20+10) (Nm) Speed 4000(min-1)
- 1127 -
P0 P1
150
P5
Torque(Nm)
100
50
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
Speed(min-1)
Fig. 7.2.5 (i) Torque for Acc/Dec in case of + move and deceleration with

Acceleration at 19557 13514 0.01% Set half the acceleration at P1, or 13514.
P0
Acceleration at 19558, 19559 27027 0.01% At P1 and P2, 130(Nm) can be used for the
(2.7027 = 11146 / 4124)
P3-P4
Acceleration at 19562 22662 0.01% At P5, 109(Nm) can be used for the
P5 acceleration/deceleration, so set the ratio 9346
(2.2662 = 9346 / 4124)
12000 P1 P2
2
10000
Acceleration mm/sec
8000 P5
6000
P0
4000
2000
0
0 8000 16000 24000 32000 40000 48000
Speed mm/min
Fig. 7.2.5 (j) Acceleration pattern in case of + move and deceleration with
(3) In case of minus move (down) and acceleration

Because torque of Gravity works forward to the output torque of motor and torque of friction works
against the output torque of motor, torque for acceleration/deceleration is as follows.
Maximum torque : 110(=100+20-10) (Nm) Speed 0 to 2000(min-1)
Torque at rapid traverse : 89(=79+20-10) (Nm) Speed 3000(min-1)
Minimum torque : 68(=58+20-10) (Nm) Speed 4000(min-1)
- 1128 -
150
P0 P1
Torque(Nm)
P5
100
50
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
Speed(min-1)
Fig. 7.2.5 (k) Torque for Acc/Dec in case of - move and acceleration with

P0
(2.2869 = 9431 / 4124)
P3-P4
(1.8504 = 7631 / 4124)
10000 P1 P2
9000
2
8000
Acceleration mm/sec
7000 P5
6000
5000 P0
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0 8000 16000 24000 32000 40000 48000
Speed mm/min
Fig. 7.2.5 (l) Acceleration pattern in case of - move and acceleration with
(4) In case of minus move (down) and deceleration

Because torque of Gravity works against the output torque of motor and torque of friction works
forward to the output torque of motor, torque for acceleration/deceleration is as follows.
Maximum torque : 90(=100-20+10) (Nm) Speed 0 to 2000(min-1)
Torque at rapid traverse : 69(=79-20+10) (Nm) Speed 3000(min-1)
Minimum torque : 48(=58-20+10) (Nm) Speed 4000(min-1)
- 1129 -
P0 P1
100
80 P5
Torque(Nm)
60
40
20
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
-1
Speed(min )
Fig. 7.2.5 (m) Torque for Acc/Dec in case of - move and deceleration with

P0
(1.8712 = 7717 / 4124)
Acceleration at 19566 to 19567, 0 0.01% 0 is set because P3 to P4 are skipped.
P3-P4
(1.4345 = 5916 / 4124)
9000
P1 P2
8000
2
Acceleration mm/sec
7000
6000 P5
5000
4000 P0
3000
2000
1000
0
0 8000 16000 24000 32000 40000 48000
Speed mm/min
Fig. 7.2.5 (n) Acceleration pattern in case of - move and deceleration with
Limitation
- Linear interpolation positioning
Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is not enabled unless linear interpolation positioning is set (bit
1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 1).
- Valid modes and conditions

Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is enabled when look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation (AI advanced preview control (M Series) / AI contour control mode) is active and the
conditions under which look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is performed are
satisfied (bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 1, and bit 5 (FRP) of parameter No. 19501 is set to 1,
and parameter No.1671 is set to non-zero value).
- 1130 -
However, when bit 0 (FAE) of parameter No. 11240 is set to 1, optimum torque acceleration/deceleration
is enabled even if AI advanced preview control (M Series) / AI contour control is disabled.
- Target axes
Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration cannot be performed for a specific axis only. All axes operated
by programmed commands are targeted for optimum torque acceleration/deceleration. This means that the
PMC axes are excluded.
- Acceleration pattern
In the same direction move, it is necessary that the acceleration during deceleration is set 1/3 of one
during acceleration at least.
Also, the acceleration pattern data must be set so that the time required for the deceleration from the rapid
traverse rate to a speed of 0 does not exceed 4000 (msec). This does not include the acceleration change
time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration.
If the deceleration acceleration ratio or the time required for the deceleration to a speed of 0 exceeds the
above range, alarm DS1710, “ILLEGAL ACC. PARAMETER (OPTIMUM TORQUE ACC/DEC)” will
be issued at the time rapid traverse is executed.
A slight error will occur between the specified acceleration and the actual acceleration.
Parameter
Maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for linear rapid
1671 traverse for each axis, or maximum allowable reference acceleration rate in optimum torque

(1) Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/ deceleration before
interpolation for linear rapid traverse.
If a value greater than 100000.0, the value is clamped to 100000.0.
If 0 is set, the specification of the following is assumed:
1000.0 mm/sec2
100.0 inch/sec2
100.0 degrees/sec2
If 0 is specified for all axes, however, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
is not performed.
(2) Maximum allowable reference acceleration rate in optimum torque
Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for linear rapid
1672 traverse, or acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in optimum torque

[Unit of data] msec
- 1131 -
(1) Set an acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration for linear
rapid traverse (time for changing from the state of constant feedrate (A) to the state
of constant acceleration/deceleration (C) at the acceleration rate calculated from the
acceleration rate set in parameter No. 1671: time of (B) in the figure below).
(2) Set an acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration in optimum
torque acceleration/deceleration (time for changing from the state of constant
feedrate (A) to the state of acceleration/deceleration (C) at the acceleration rate
calculated from optimum torque acceleration/deceleration: time of (B) in the figure).
F ee d ra te in ta n g e nt d ire ctio n
M axim u m a c ce le ra tio n ra te n ot e xc e ed in g
m a xim u m a llow a b le a c ce le ra tion rate s e t b y
p a ra m e te r N o . 1 6 7 1 fo r e a ch a xis is
a u to m atic a lly c a lc ula te d .
(A ) (B ) (C ) (B ) (A ) (B ) (C ) (B ) (A )
T im e se t b y p a ra m e te r N o . 1 6 7 2
Fig. 7.2.5 (o)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11240 FAE

#0 FAE During positioning when the AI advanced preview control (M Series) / AI contour
control mode is canceled, the optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19501 FRP

#5 FRP Linear rapid traverse is:

0: Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
1: Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate for each axis in parameter No. 1671.
When using bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, set an acceleration
rate change time in parameter No. 1672.
When this parameter is set to 1, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is also
applied to rapid traverse if all conditions below are satisfied. At this time,
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is not applied.
- Bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 1: Linear interpolation type positioning
- A value other than 0 is set in parameter No. 1671 for an axis.
- The AI advanced preview control (M Series) / AI contour control mode is set.
If all of these conditions are not satisfied, acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is
applied.
- 1132 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19540 FAP

#0 FAP Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When the linear positioning parameters, namely bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 and
bit 0 (FAP) of parameter No. 19540, are set to 1, and a value other than 0 is set in
reference acceleration parameter No. 1671 for an axis, the acceleration/deceleration for
rapid traverse becomes optimal torque acceleration/deceleration in the mode for
look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (or the AI advanced preview
control (M Series) / AI contour control mode). Optimal torque acceleration/ deceleration
is controlled according to parameter-set restricted acceleration curve data.
Setting an acceleration pattern

A cceleration
P1 P2 A ccele ratio n pattern
Aa P3
P0
P4 P5
Ab
Sp eed
Fa Fb
Fig. 7.2.5 (p)
Set the speed at each of the acceleration setting points (P0 to P5) in a corresponding
parameter, then in parameters for each axis, set acceleration rates applicable in the
following four cases at these speeds: when a movement in the positive direction is
accelerated, when a movement in the positive direction is decelerated, when a movement
in the negative direction is accelerated, and when a movement in the negative direction is
decelerated.
The line connecting the acceleration setting points is the acceleration pattern.
The acceleration rate for each axis is calculated. For example, between speeds Fa to Fb in
the above figure, the acceleration rates corresponding to these speeds, Aa to Ab, are used
for calculation.
The tangent acceleration is controlled so that it does not exceed the calculated
acceleration rate for each axis.
CAUTION
When an acceleration pattern is set, setting a high acceleration rate
immediately after a speed of 0 can cause an impact on the
machine, so it is not desirable. Therefore, be sure to apply a
relatively low acceleration rate at a speed of 0 as shown in the
above figure.
- 1133 -
19541 Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (speed at P1)

to to
19544 Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (speed at P4)

[Unit of data] 0.01%
The speeds at acceleration setting points P1 to P4 are to be set with speed parameters Nos.
19541 to 19544 as ratios to the rapid traverse speed (parameter No. 1420). The speed at
P0 is 0, and the speed at P5 is the rapid traverse rate specified with parameter No. 1420.
Any acceleration setting point for which the speed parameter (one of Nos. 19541 to
19544) is set to 0 will be skipped.
Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P0 during movement in + direction and

19545
acceleration)
to to
19550
acceleration)
Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P0 during movement in - direction and

19551
acceleration)
to to
19556
acceleration)

19557
deceleration)
to to
19562
deceleration)

19563
deceleration)
to to
19568
deceleration)

[Unit of data] 0.01%
For each travel direction and each acceleration/deceleration operation, set the allowable
acceleration rate at each of the acceleration setting points (P0 to P5). As an allowable
acceleration rate, set a ratio to the value set in the reference acceleration parameter No.
1671. When 0 is set, the specification of 100% is assumed.
Alarm and message

DS1710 ILLEGAL ACC. PARAMETER There are errors in the parameters of permissible acceleration for
(OPTIMUM TORQUE ACC/DEC) Optimum Torque Acceleration/Deceleration.
One of the following is the cause.
1) The ratio of the acceleration for deceleration to the
acceleration for the acceleration is lower than the limited
value.
2) The time to decelerate to 0 is larger than the maximum.
- 1134 -
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration
7.2.6 Corner Control

7.2.6.1 In-position check signal
Overview
On general CNCs, the feedrate during cutting feed never becomes 0 between two successive blocks.
So, a corner may be rounded.
This portion causes a corner
to be rounded.
Feedrate
Program path
Actual tool center

path
Time
By using the in-position check signal, control can be exercised so that machining can proceed to the next
block after checking that the acceleration/deceleration processing of the previous block is completed and
the effective area has been entered.
Feedrate
Time
Signal
In-position check signal SMZ<Gn053.6>
[Function] This signal selects whether to make an in-position check between successive cutting feed
blocks during automatic operation.
In general, slight rounding occurs between successive cutting feed blocks because of an
acceleration/deceleration delay or servo delay.
By making an in-position check (to proceed to the next block after waiting until
acceleration/deceleration and servo delays disappear), this rounding can be eliminated.
[Operation] When this signal is set to "0", machining proceeds to the next block without making an
in-position check between successive cutting feed blocks during automatic operation.
When this signal is set to "1", machining proceeds to the next block after making an
in-position check between successive cutting feed blocks during automatic operation.
- 1135 -
NOTE
Before and after a block for positioning, an in-position check is
made, regardless of the setting of this signal.
(However, the setting of bit 5 (NCI) of parameter No. 1601 is
followed.)
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn053 SMZ
7.2.6.2 In-position check

Overview
Whether the position of the servo motor is within a specified range is checked.
If the in-position check function is enabled, the CNC checks the position during deceleration. If the
position is found to exceed the specified range, the CNC does not execute the next block.
NOTE
The purpose of in-position check is to check that the servo motor has reached
within a specified range (specified with parameter No. 1826).
Signal
In-position signals INP1 to INP8<Fn104>
[Function] These signals indicate that the control axes are set to the in-position condition.
They are provided for each control axis, and the end number in the signal name
corresponds to the control axis number.
INPx
x : 1 ..... The 1st axis is set to the in-position condition.
2 ..... The 2nd axis is set to the in-position condition.
3 ..... The 3rd axis is set to the in-position condition.
: :
[Output cond.] These signals turn to "1" in the following case :
- The acceleration/deceleration delay of the corresponding control axis is 0 and the
servo error of the corresponding control axis is within the specified allowance.
These signals turn to "0" in the following cases :
- The acceleration/deceleration delay of the corresponding control axis is not 0.
- The servo error of the corresponding control axis exceeds the specified allowance.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn104 INP8 INP7 INP6 INP5 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1601 NCI

- 1136 -
#5 NCI An in-position check:

0: Confirms that the specified feedrate becomes 0 (the acceleration/deceleration delay
becomes 0) at deceleration time and that the machine position has reached a
specified position (the servo positional deviation is within the in-position width set
by parameter No. 1826).
1: Confirms only that the specified feedrate becomes 0 (the acceleration/deceleration
delay becomes 0) at deceleration time.
1826 In-position width for each axis

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
The in-position width is set for each axis.
When the deviation of the machine position from the specified position (the absolute
value of the positioning deviation) is smaller than the in-position width, the machine is
assumed to have reached the specified position. (The machine is in the in-position state.)
Note
NOTE
1 The in-position signals INP1 to INP8 <Fn104> may turn to "1" even during the
movement if the axis is fed at very low speed.
2 The in-position check function is enabled at the interface between two cutting
blocks, when the exact stop command (G09) or exact stop mode command
(G61) is specified
7.2.6.3 In-position check disable signal

Overview
In-position check disable signal NOINPS <Gn023.5> can be used to specify whether an in-position check
is executed.
Explanation
In-position check disable signal NOINPS <Gn023.5> can be used to disable a in-position check between
blocks. When an in-position check is disabled, the CNC does not perform an in-position check during
deceleration. That is, the CNC starts the next block before entering the in-position. This reduces the cycle
time.
NOTE
1 When an in-position check is disabled, the CNC starts the next block before
entering the in-position. Note that this may cause a difference between the
program command and the actual tool path.
- 1137 -
NOTE
2 In-position check disable signal NOINPS <Gn023.5> can disable an in-position
check between blocks, but cannot disable an in-position check by the following G
codes.
- Reference position return (G28)
- 2nd/3rd/4th reference position return (G30)
- Machine coordinate system selection (G53)
- Single direction positioning (G60)
However, this signal can disable an in-position check at the midpoint of G28 and
G30 or at the motion end point of G60.
To disable an in-position check in the reference position in G28 and G30,
specify reference position return (G28.2, G30.2).
Example
O0001;
N10 G00 X50.0;
N20 G00 X100.0;
N30 M30;
Note) The program starts at the position in which X-coordinate is 0.0.
<1> When NOINPS <Gn023.5> is "0"

(An in-position check is performed.)
N10 N20
Feedrate
Time
In-position check
<2> When NOINPS <Gn023.5> is "1"

(An in-position check is not p erformed.)
N10 N20
Feedrate
Servo delay
Time
Signal
In-position check disable signal NOINPS <Gn023.5>
[Function] Specifies whether an in-position check is performed.
[Operation] When this signal is set to "1", the controller operates as follows.
An in-position check is not performed regardless of the setting of bit 5 (NCI) of
parameter No. 1601. That is, the next block is executed before the in-position is entered.
The operation when an in-position check is not performed is the same as that in the case
where bit 5 (NCI) of parameter No. 1601 is 1.
- 1138 -
When this signal is set to "0", the controller operates as follows.
An in-position check follows the setting of bit 5 (NCI) of parameter No. 1601.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn023 NOINPS
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1601 NCI


7.2.6.4 In-position check independently of feed/rapid traverse

Overview
If separate in-position check for cutting feed and rapid traverse is executed, a small in-position check
range can be specified between those cutting feed blocks that require a high degree of precision. A large
in-position check range can be specified between those rapid traverse blocks that require quick
positioning.
Signal
See Item “In-position check.”.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1601 NCI


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1801 CIN CCI

- 1139 -
#4 CCI As the in-position width for cutting feed:

0: The parameter No. 1826 applicable to rapid traverse as well is used.
1: The parameter No. 1827 dedicated to cutting feed is used.
This parameter enables the in-position width for cutting feed (parameter No. 1827) to be
set instead of the in-position width for rapid traverse (parameter No. 1826).
By setting bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No. 1801, choose whether to use this function or the
conventional in-position check function.
This function, when specified, is enabled for all axes. So, for an axis that does not require
this function, set the same data in parameters Nos. 1826 and 1827.
#5 CIN When CCI is set to 1, the dedicated parameter for specifying an in-position width for
cutting feed is used:
0: Only when the next block specifies cutting feed.
1: Regardless of the next block.
The table indicates the relationships between the parameters for cutting feed and rapid
traverse.
Bit 5 (CIN) of parameter No. 1801

0 1
Rapid traverse → Rapid traverse →
No. 1826 No. 1826
Rapid traverse Rapid traverse
No. 1826 No. 1826
Cutting feed Cutting feed
0
Cutting feed → Cutting feed →
No. 1826 No. 1826
Bit 4 (CCI) of Cutting feed → Cutting feed →
No. 1826 No. 1826
parameter No.
1801 No. 1826 No. 1826
No. 1826 No. 1826
1
No. 1827 No. 1827
No. 1826 No. 1827
The parameters CCI and CIN can also be applied to a Cs axis.

1827 In-position width in cutting feed for each axis

- 1140 -
Set an in-position width for each axis in cutting feed. This parameter is used when bit 4
(CCI) of parameter No. 1801=1.
Note
NOTE
If the bit 5 (NCI) of parameter No. 1601 is set to 1, so that position check is not
performed during deceleration, this function is invalid. The system starts
execution of the next block as soon as deceleration has been completed, without
checking whether the servo position error is within the specified range.
7.2.7 Feed Forward in Rapid Traverse

Overview
Feed-forward control can be available even during rapid traverse. In this case, the servo position
deviation is reduced, thus it reduces the time required for positioning to within the specified range.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1800 FFR

#3 FFR Feed-forward control in rapid traverse is:

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Feed-forward is enabled only in normal cutting feed. When this parameter is set to 1,
feed-forward is enabled in rapid traverse as well. This capability reduces the servo
positional deviation, thus reducing the time required to enter the in-position width at the
time of positioning.
NOTE
1 The parameter setting becomes valid after reference position return
is completed.
Reference item
For details of this function, refer to the "FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series Maintenance Manual
(B-65285EN)."
- 1141 -
7.2.8 Optimum Acceleration/Deceleration for Rigid Tapping

Overview
This function can be used to flexibly set the acceleration/deceleration during cutting in rigid tapping
according to the torque characteristics of a spindle motor and the mechanical characteristics such as
machine friction. Depending on the torque characteristics of a spindle motor and the mechanical
characteristics, the acceleration/deceleration performance (referred to below as the maximum acceleration
curve) that can be output is not symmetrical in the low-speed and high-speed parts. The conventional
acceleration/deceleration (linear-shaped/bell-shaped) is symmetrical, so it was impossible to make the
most of the motor performance.
This function can be used to perform acceleration/deceleration so that the actual speed curve can follow
the maximum acceleration curve as close as possible. This can make the most of the motor performance
and reduce the cutting time. When rigid tapping is used in an area where the acceleration of the spindle
motor is constant, however, reduction in the cutting time cannot be expected.
If the acceleration pattern is set for the parameter for each gear, rigid tapping by acceleration following
the maximum acceleration curve.
In acceleration/deceleration during withdrawal, the acceleration/deceleration pattern during cutting is
used.
NOTE
Spindle speed
Spindle speed
Maximum
acceleration line
The best of
High-speed motor
performan
ce is not
drawn.
Symmetrical in Real
the low-speed acceleration
and high-speed pattern
parts
Low-speed
Time Acceleration
Fig. 7.2.8 (a) Conventional acceleration/deceleration (bell-shaped)
- 1142 -
Spindle speed
Spindle speed
Maximum
acceleration line
High-speed
Asymmetrical in
the low-speed Real
and high-speed acceleration
parts pattern
Low-speed
Time Acceleration
Fig. 7.2.8 (b) Acceleration/deceleration in which the maximum acceleration curve is followed by the actual
acceleration curve by this function
Explanation
This function selects an acceleration pattern set in the parameter based on the acceleration/deceleration
state of the spindle and the selected gears (between the spindle and the spindle motor), calculates the
allowable acceleration of the spindle from the current spindle acceleration, and performs rigid tapping by
controlling acceleration/deceleration so that the allowable acceleration of the spindle is not exceeded.
NOTE
In the text in this section, up to four stages of gears between the spindle and the
spindle motor in rigid tapping are described. Up to four stages of gears are used
in lathe systems, but up to three stages of gears are used in machining centers.
- Setting optimum acceleration/deceleration

Set bit 0 (RAU) of parameter No. 11420 to 1 to enable this function.
Allowable
acceleration
P0 P1 Acceleration pattern
Aa P2
P3
Ab P4
Spindle speed
Fa Fb
Fig. 7.2.8 (c) Acceleration setting point
For the parameter for each gear, set the rotation speed and allowable acceleration in the acceleration
setting points (P0 to P4) for each spindle acceleration/deceleration. The kinked line connecting the
acceleration setting points is the acceleration pattern.
In changes in the allowable acceleration, when, for example, speed Fa shifts to speed Fb in Fig. 7.2.8 (c),
the allowable accelerations Aa and Ab corresponding to these speeds are used.
- 1143 -
Table 7.2.8 (a) Parameters for acceleration patterns for each gear
Allowable acceleration
Parameter No. Parameter No. Accelerati Parameter No.
parameter number
Gear for maximum for maximum on setting for spindle
Forward/Reverse
acceleration spindle speed points speed
Acceleration Deceleration
P0 None (0%) 11441 11461
P1 11429 11442 11462
Gear 1 11421 5241 P2 11430 11443 11463
P3 11431 11444 11464
P4 None (100%) 11445 11465
P0 None (0%) 11446 11466
P1 11432 11447 11467
Gear 2 11422 5242 P2 11433 11448 11468
P3 11434 11449 11469
P4 None (100%) 11450 11470
P0 None (0%) 11451 11471
P1 11435 11452 11472
Gear 3 11423 5243 P2 11436 11453 11473
P3 11437 11454 11474
P4 None (100%) 11455 11475
P0 None (0%) 11456 11476
P1 11438 11457 11477
Gear 4 11424 5244 P2 11439 11458 11478
P3 11440 11459 11479
P4 None (100%) 11460 11480
- Set the parameter of the gear to be used.

- Set parameters Nos. 11421 to 11424 to the maximum acceleration (rev/sec2).
If these parameters are set to 0, a DS alarm DS1711, “ILLEGAL ACC. PARAMETER (RIGID
TAPPING OPTIMUM ACC/DEC)” is issued during execution.
- Since the spindle speed for P0 does not need to be set because it is 0%.
- Since the spindle speed for P4 does not need to be set because it is 100%.
- Set parameters Nos. 11429 to 11440 to the spindle speed for P1 to P3 as the ratio relative to the
maximum spindle speed (parameters Nos. 5241 to 5244) in rigid tapping.
- Set parameters Nos. 11441 to 11480 to the allowable acceleration for P0 to P4 as the ratio relative to
the maximum acceleration (parameters Nos. 11421 to 11424).
- Skip the acceleration setting point in which parameters Nos. 11429 to 11440 for spindle speed are
set to 0 and treat a line connecting to the next acceleration setting point in which a nonzero value is
set.
- When parameters Nos. 11441 to 11480 for allowable acceleration are set to 0, a value of 100% is
assumed.
- Expression indicating the relationship between torque and acceleration

When the torque is T (N ⋅ m ) and the inertia is J (kg ⋅ m 2 ) , acceleration A(rev sec 2 ) is calculated by
the following expression.
A = T (N ⋅ m ) J (kg ⋅ m 2
) (2 π )
=T ((kg ⋅ m sec 2
)(m )) J (kg ⋅ m ) (2π )
2
=T ((2 π ) ⋅ J )
- 1144 -
- Example of setting an acceleration pattern

40
30
Torque (Nm)
20
10
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
-1
Spindle motor speed (min )
Fig. 7.2.8 (d) Speed vs. torque of model αiI3/10000 in the operational area of 30 minutes and S3 60%
Structure
- The spindle and spindle motor are mutually connected directly.
- The spindle inertia is almost the same as the rotor inertia.
- The total inertial is double the rotor inertia.
- Motor model αiI3/10000
Specification of the model αiI3/10000 motor

Rotor inertia (
0.0148 kg ⋅ m 2 )
Maximum torque 34.3 ( N ⋅ m ) : Speed 0 to 1500 min −1 ( )
Spindle inertia (
0.0148 kg ⋅ m 2
)
The acceleration A(rev sec 2 ) at the maximum torque of 34.3 (N ⋅ m ) is calculated from the above
expression, which indicates the relationship between torque vs. acceleration.
A = 34.3 ((2π ) ⋅ 2.0 ⋅ 0.0148 ) (rev / sec 2 )

= 184.426(rev sec 2 )
An example of setting the parameters for acceleration patterns is shown in Table 7.2.8 (b).
Setting conditions
- The acceleration is constant for both acceleration and deceleration.
- The spindle and spindle motor is mutually connected directly (1:1).
- The maximum spindle speed is 6000 min-1.
Table 7.2.8 (b) Example of setting the parameters for acceleration patterns
Parameter Setting
Remarks
No. value (unit)
Maximum
6000
speed of 5241
(min-1)
spindle
Maximum 184
11421 Sets the maximum acceleration A.
acceleration (rev/sec2)
Spindle 25 Since the rotation speed for a torque of 34.3 (Nm) is up to 1500
11429
speed (P1) (%) (min-1), set P1 to 25% (1500 min-1).
Spindle 33 Since the torque drops linearly from 1500 (min-1) to 2000 (min-1), set
11430
speed (P2) (%) P2 to 33% (1980 min-1).
- 1145 -
Parameter Setting
Remarks
No. value (unit)
Spindle 50 Since the torque drops linearly from 2000 (min-1) to 3000 (min-1), set
11431
speed (P3 ) (%) P3 to 50% (3000 min-1).
Acceleration 11441 100 Set the acceleration at a rotation speed of 0 to 100% (torque 34.3
(P0) 11461 (%) (Nm)).
Acceleration 11442 100 Set the acceleration at the rotation speed of P1 to 100% (torque
(P1) 11462 (%) 34.3 (Nm)).
Acceleration 11443 72 Set the acceleration at the rotation speed of P2 to 72% (torque 25
(P2) 11463 (%) (Nm)).
(P3) 11464 (%) (Nm)).
(P4) 11465 (%) (Nm)).
If the parameters are set as described in Table 7.2.8 (c), the acceleration pattern is assumed as shown in
Fig. 7.2.8 (e).
200
Acceleration (rev/sec )
2
P0 P1
150
P2
100
P3
50
P4
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
Spindle speed (min-1)
Fig. 7.2.8 (e)
At P0, the rotation speed is 0 min-1 and the acceleration is 184 rev/sec2.
NOTE
1 The acceleration pattern needs to be set according to the specification of a
spindle motor and the characteristics of a machine.
2 Maximum spindle speed parameters Nos. 5241 to 5244 and spindle speed
parameters Nos. 11429 to 11440 may not match the speed of the spindle motor.
The acceleration pattern needs to be set by taking the actual speed of the
spindle motor into account.
For example, when half the spindle speed is the speed of the spindle motor, the
acceleration at the spindle speed of 6000 min-1 needs to be determined on the
basis of the torque at the motor speed of 3000 min-1.
3 The acceleration pattern needs to be changed when optimum
acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping is not operating in any path.
- Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
When using bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration, set parameters Nos. 11425 to 11428 to the bell-shaped
acceleration change time.
When not using bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration, set these parameters to 0.
- 1146 -
- Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation

When optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping is enabled, acceleration/deceleration after
compensation is not applied.
- Override
Various types of override are disabled, but the following override can be enabled.
- Extraction override
- Override signal
See the Section “Rigid Tapping” for details.
- Retraction for rigid tapping

Even in retraction for rigid tapping return, optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping is enabled.
- Functions that can be used simultaneously

Optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping can be used concurrently with the following
functions.
- 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion (3-dimensional rigid tapping)
- Tilted working plane command
- Composite control
- Tandem control
- Multi-spindle control
- Spindle command synchronous control
Restrictions
- Rigid tapping types
Optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping cannot be used in the following rigid tapping
functions.
- Rigid tapping with analog spindle
- Rigid tapping by manual handle
- Rigid tapping with Cs contour control
- Rigid tapping with servo motor
- Functions that cannot be used simultaneously

Optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping cannot be used concurrently with the following
functions.
- General purpose retract
Retract signal RTRCT <Gn066.4> is ignored while the optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid
tapping is executed.
- Acceleration line pattern

- An acceleration pattern can be set for both acceleration and deceleration, but the ratio of deceleration
to acceleration must be one-third or greater. For example, when the acceleration of a certain
acceleration setting point (Pn) is set to 90%, the deceleration of corresponding to the point must be
30% or greater.
- The acceleration pattern of deceleration needs to be set so that the time required for deceleration
from the maximum spindle speed to a rotation speed of 0 is 4000 msec or less. However, this time
does not include acceleration change time for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration.
- If the ratio of deceleration to acceleration or the time required for deceleration to a rotation speed of
0 falls outside the range, an alarm DS1711, “ILLEGAL ACC. PARAMETER (RIGID TAPPING
OPTIMUM ACC/DEC)” is issued during execution.
- There is slight calculation error between the set acceleration and the actual acceleration.
- 1147 -
Example of the adjustment

Assuming that we use the spindle motor, which has following character, at 8000min-1 for rigid tap.
Torque
35Nm
12Nm
-1
5.0Nm@8000min 3.5Nm
1500min-1 4500min-1 10000min-1
Speed
This motor has small torque at 8000min-1. When the acceleration is constant value in all speed, the torque
in low speed area is not utilized enough, because the tolerable acceleration is limited by the torque in high
speed area.
Torque command is saturated in high speed area.
Spindle speed (2000min-1/div)
Synchronous error (50pulse/div)
Torque in low speed area Spindle torque command (50%/div)
is not utilized enough.
600ms
Fig.7.2.8 (f) Example of measurement result without optimum acc./dec. for rigid tap
The adjustment of optimum acc./dec. for rigid tap is performed by following processes.
(1) The initial setting of the acceleration/deceleration pattern
(2) Tune the parameters so that the spindle torque command reaches near 100% in all speed area.
The detail of these processes is explained below.
NOTE
1 Perform the adjustment of optimum acc./dec. for rigid tap after the adjustment of
position gain and velocity loop gain. (Refer to the “Adjustment Procedure” of
"Rigid Tapping" in “FANUC AC SPINDLE PARAMETER MANUAL
(B-65280EN)“ for the details of the adjustment of the gain.)
2 In this document, the example treats gear 1. The same procedure can be
performed for other gear number.
(1)The initial setting of the acceleration/deceleration pattern

Please use “Acc./Dec performance measurement” for spindle tuning in SERVO GUIDE to determine the
initial settings for optimum acc./dec. for rigid tap.
Please open Graph Window and select [Tool] -> [Spindle Tuning] -> [Acc./Dec performance
measurement]. The following window will be shown after getting spindle information.
- 1148 -
Click [Spindle condition check] and confirm whether spindle conditions are proper or not.
Go back to the measurement window and after setting S command and upper limit of motor speed, click
“Start”. Please set higher value than the maximum rigid tap speed in S command box, if you can.
[min-1/sec]
We regard this level as 100%.
Based on this level, please
Acceleration during dec. calculate the acceleration
Acceleration during acc. value in each point.
Draw approximate
line for acceleration
character curve
[min-1]
P0 P1 P2 P3 P4
Please estimate the initial setting values from the measurement result. Please draw approximate line
through each setting point (P0-P4) to determine the acceleration character during acc./dec.. The above
data shows the character in acc./dec. with maximum torque. So available torque in rigid tap will be less
- 1149 -
than this character. Please set the initial value for optimum acc./dec. for rigid tap as 70% or so of
approximate line.
Example)The maximum acceleration (parameter No.11421) can be seen at 0-1500min-1 in

deceleration. It’s value is
37800(0 ~ 1500 min −1 )[min −1/ sec] ÷ 60[sec] × 0.7 = 441[rev / sec 2 ]
The rest of acceleration settings should be set as the proportion of this value.
Example)Parameter No.11441 is calculated from acceleration value (27600min-1/sec) at 0-1500min-1

in acceleration as follows:
27600[min −1/ sec] / 37800[min −1/ sec] × 100 = 73[%]
Table7.2.8 (c) Initial settings for optimum acc./dec. for rigid tap
Acc. setting
Maximum Maximum Acc. Spindle speed
(Ration to max. acc. [%])
Gear acceleration spindle speed setting (Ratio to max.
Forward / Reverse
[rev/sec2] [min-1] point speed [%])
During acc. During dec.
P0 None(0%) No.11441=73 No.11461=100
P1 No.11429=19 No.11442=73 No.11462=100
Gear 1 No.11421=441 No.5241=8000 P2 No.11430=38 No.11443=46 No.11463=46
P3 No.11431=60 No.11444=36 No.11464=36
P4 None(100%) No.11445=20 No.11465=20
500
450
Acceleration（rev/sec^2）
: Acceleration during dec.

400 : Acceleration during acc.
350
300
250 P0
P1
200
150 P4
P2
100 P3
50
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000
Spindle speed（min^-1）
Fig.7.2.8 (g) Initial settings for optimum acc./dec. for rigid tap

Spindle torque command (50%/div)
We can tune the acceleration settings a little more, 600ms

because there is a room to 100% in torque command.
Fig.7.2.8 (h) Example of measurement result after initial setting of optimum acc./dec. for rigid tap
- 1150 -
(2)Tune the parameters so that the spindle torque command reaches near 100% in
all speed area
Capture the data during the rigid tapping under initial setting of optimum acc./dec. for rigid tap by using
SERVO GUIDE. The data of spindle speed (SPSPD) and torque command (TCMD2(NOTE)) should be
captured. After confirming the measurement result with initial setting, please tune the acceleration
parameters so that the spindle torque command reaches near 100% in all speed area. When you tune them,
please use the test program, which has the maximum rigid tap speed, and start tuning from the high speed
point (P4) first, and continue to the low speed points in order.
NOTE
TCMD2 shows the torque command rate, in which the maximum torque,
considering torque limit value at each speed, is 100%.
To capture this data, following SERVO GUIDE and spindle software is required.
SERVO GUIDE: Ver.10.00 or later
Spindle soft: 9DB0 series 01 edition or later
If you can't use TCMD2, please use TCMD. However, TCMD does not consider
torque limit value. Thus, TCMD might be saturated at a value which is lower
than 100%. You can see whether torque command is saturated or not by
watching the data of bit12 of “SFLG1”. Please watch them together, if you use
TCMD.
Table7.2.8 (d) After tuning settings for optimum acc./dec. for rigid tap
Maximum Acc. setting
Maximum Acc. Spindle speed
spindle (Ration to max. acc. [%])
Gear acceleration setting (Ratio to max.
speed Forward / Reverse
[rev/sec2] point speed [%])
[min-1] During acc. During dec.
P0 None(0%) No.11442=73 No.11462=100
P1 No.11429=19 No.11442=73 No.11462=100
Gear 1 No.11421=441 No.5241=8000 P2 No.11430=38 No.11443=52 No.11463=60
P3 No.11431=60 No.11444=47 No.11464=55
P4 None(100%) No.11445=20 No.11465=40
500
450 : Acceleration during dec.
Acceleration（rev/sec^2）
400 : Acceleration during acc.

350
300 P0
P1
250
200 P2
150 P3
100
50 P4
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000
Spindle speed（min^-1）
Fig.7.2.8 (i) After tuning settings for optimum acc./dec. for rigid tap
- 1151 -

Spindle torque command (50%/div)
The motor torque is well 600ms

utilized in all speed area.
Fig.7.2.8 (j) Example of measurement result after tuning of optimum acc./dec. for rigid tap
In the above example, the acceleration time and deceleration time are reduced as follows by applying
optimum acc./dec. for rigid tap.
Function OFF Function ON
Acceleration time 976 ms 720 ms
Deceleration time 976 ms 588 ms
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11420 RAU

#0 RAU Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration function for rigid tapping is

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
11421 Maximum acceleration of the optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping (gear 1)

[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Unit of data] rev/sec2
[Valid data range] 0 to 10000.0
These parameters set maximum accelerations.
Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in optimum

11425
acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping (gear 1)

11426

11427
- 1152 -
11428

[Data type] Word spindle
[Unit of data] msec
These parameters set the acceleration change time of bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration in optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping (time
taken for the change from the constant speed state (A) to the acceleration state (C) with
the acceleration calculated from the optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping,
i.e., the time indicated by (B) in the figure below).
Speed (min-1)
Maximum acceleration that does not

exceed the maximum permissible
acceleration is automatically calculated.
(A) (B) (C) (B) (A) (B) (C) (B) (A)
Acceleration change time
11429 Spindle speed at P1 in optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid taping (gear 1)

[Data type] Byte spindle
[Unit of data] %
- 1153 -
These parameters set the spindle speeds at P1 to P3 of acceleration points P0 to P4 as

ratios to the maximum spindle speed (parameters Nos. 5241 to 5244). The spindle speed
at P0 is 0, while the spindle speed at P4 is the maximum spindle speed. Any acceleration
setting points where 0 is set will be skipped.
11441 Permissible acceleration at P0 in optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping (gear 1)

[Unit of data] %
These parameters set the permissible accelerations at acceleration setting points P0 to P4
as ratios to the maximum acceleration (parameters Nos. 11421 to 11424). At any
acceleration setting points where 0 is set, 100% is assumed.
- 1154 -
11461 Permissible deceleration at P0 in optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping (gear 1)

[Unit of data] %
These parameters set the permissible decelerations at acceleration setting points P0 to P4
as ratios to the maximum acceleration (parameters Nos. 11421 to 11424). At any
acceleration setting points where 0 is set, 100% is assumed.
- 1155 -
Alarm and message

DS1711 ILLEGAL ACC. PARAMETER (RIGID The allowable acceleration parameter of optimum
TAPPING OPTIMUM ACC/DEC) acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping is incorrectly set.
The probable causes are shown below.
<1> The ratio of deceleration to acceleration is less than
one-third.
<2> The time required for deceleration to a speed of 0
exceeds the maximum value.
<3> The maximum acceleration (parameters Nos. 11421
to 11424) is 0.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B-64604EN-1) Rigid tapping
(B-64604EN-2) Rigid tapping
7.2.9 Rapid Traverse Acceleration/deceleration before Interpolation

Overview
In linear type rapid traverse, the positioning path is linear. If acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is enabled, however, acceleration/deceleration can be performed with the linear path kept.
When the following conditions are met, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is enabled for rapid
traverse.
- When rapid traverse is of linear interpolation type (Bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 1)
- When acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is enabled for rapid traverse (Bit 5 (FRP) of
parameter No. 19501 is set to 1）
Deceleration and stop is always performed between blocks for which acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is enabled.
Rapid traverse block overwrapping is disabled.
- Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for rapid traverse

If parameter No. 1672 is set to bell-shaped change time when acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is enabled for rapid traverse, acceleration/deceleration becomes bell-shaped.
- Enabling acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for

If parameter No. 11242 is set for each axis to the time constant of acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation for rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, it is possible to enable
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is for acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.
NOTE
When enabling acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for rapid traverse
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, be sure to set the same time
constant for all axes except a special purpose. Otherwise, the correct line cannot
be obtained.
- 1156 -
- Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for rapid traverse in AI

advanced preview control (M Series) / AI contour control mode off
If all of the following conditions are satisfied, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for rapid
traverse is enabled in AI advanced preview control (M Series) / AI contour control mode off.
- AI advanced preview control (M Series) is valid or AI contour control I or AI contour control II
options is valid.
- The parameters for which acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for rapid traverse is enabled
are set.
- The setting of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for rapid traverse in the AI advanced
preview control (M Series) / AI contour control mode off is enabled (Bit 4 (ARB) of parameter
No.11240 is set to 1.)
Note
In the function which acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is invalid, this
function is also disabled.
- Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for rapid traverse in rigid tap.

When acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for rapid traverse is valid, if the setting of
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for rapid traverse in rigid tap is enabled (Bit 5 (RRB) of
parameter No.11240 is set to 1), acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for rapid traverse in rigid
tap is valid. (Rapid traverse in rigid tapping is the motion of dotted line in Fig.7.2.9 (a).)
However, the specification of acceleration/deceleration in the following functions follows the
specification of each function.
- Optimum Acceleration/Deceleration for Rigid Tapping
- Rigid Tapping with Servo Motor
G84 (G98) G84 (G99)
Spindle stop Spindle stop

Initial level
Operation 1
Operation 2 Operation 6 Spindle stop
Spindle CW Spindle
P Spindle CW P
stop
Point R Point R level Point R Point R level
Operation 3 Operation 5
Point Z Point Z
P P
Spindle stop Spindle CCW Spindle stop Spindle CCW
Operation 4
Fig.7.2.9 (a) Rigid tapping command
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 LRP

- 1157 -
#1 LRP Positioning (G00)

0: Positioning is performed with non-linear type positioning so that the tool moves
along each axis independently at rapid traverse.
1: Positioning is performed with linear interpolation so that the tool moves in a straight
line.
When using 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion, set this parameter to 1.
Maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for linear rapid
1671 traverse for each axis, or maximum allowable reference acceleration rate in optimum torque

(1) Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/ deceleration before
interpolation for linear rapid traverse.
If a value greater than 100000.0, the value is clamped to 100000.0.
If 0 is set, the specification of the following is assumed:
1000.0 mm/sec2
100.0 inch/sec2
100.0 degrees/sec2
If 0 is specified for all axes, however, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
is not performed.
(2) Maximum allowable reference acceleration rate in optimum torque
Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for linear rapid
1672 traverse, or acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in optimum torque

[Unit of data] msec
(1) Set an acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration for linear
rapid traverse (time for changing from the state of constant feedrate (A) to the state
of constant acceleration/deceleration (C) at the acceleration rate calculated from the
acceleration rate set in parameter No. 1671: time of (B) in the figure below).
(2) Set an acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration in optimum
torque acceleration/deceleration (time for changing from the state of constant
feedrate (A) to the state of acceleration/deceleration (C) at the acceleration rate
calculated from optimum torque acceleration/deceleration: time of (B) in the figure).
- 1158 -
F ee d ra te in ta n g e nt d ire ctio n
M axim u m a c ce le ra tio n ra te n ot e xc e ed in g
m a xim u m a llow a b le a c ce le ra tion rate s e t b y
p a ra m e te r N o . 1 6 7 1 fo r e a ch a xis is
a u to m atic a lly c a lc ula te d .
(A ) (B ) (C ) (B ) (A ) (B ) (C ) (B ) (A )
T im e se t b y p a ra m e te r N o . 1 6 7 2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11240 RRB ARB

#4 ARB Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for rapid traverse in AI advanced preview

control (M Series) / AI contour control mode off is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Note
This parameter is enabled when the parameters for which
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for rapid traverse is
enabled are set. (Refer to bit 5 (FRP) of parameter No.19501.)
#5 RRB Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for rapid traverse in rigid tap is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Note
This parameter is enabled when acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation for rapid traverse is valid. (Refer to bit 5 (FRP) of
parameter No.19501.)
Time constant of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation of acceleration/deceleration before

11242
interpolation in rapid traverse

[Unit of data] msec
This parameter is used for the time constant of acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation in rapid traverse.
application. If different time constants are set, a correct linear line cannot be obtained.
- 1159 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19501 FRP

#5 FRP Linear rapid traverse is:

0: Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
1: Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate for each axis in parameter No. 1671.
When using bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, set an acceleration
rate change time in parameter No. 1672.
When this parameter is set to 1, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is also

applied to rapid traverse if all conditions below are satisfied. At this time,
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is not applied.
- Bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 1: Linear interpolation type positioning
If all of these conditions are not satisfied, acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is
applied.
- 1160 -
7.3 JERK CONTROL (M SERIES)

M
7.3.1 Speed Control with Change of Acceleration on Each Axis (M

Series)
M
Overview
In portions in which acceleration changes largely, such as a portion where a programmed figure changes
from a straight line to curve, vibration or shock on the machine may occur. Speed control with change of
acceleration on each axis is a function to suppress machining errors due to vibration and machine shock
generated by change of acceleration. This function obtains a feedrate so that change of acceleration is
within the parameter-set permissible acceleration change amount for each axis, and performs deceleration
by using acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.
NOTE
To use this function, the both options for "Jerk control" and "AI contour control II"
are required.
Explanation
In the following example, the Y-axis acceleration changes largely at the contact point between a linear
interpolation and circular interpolation, so deceleration is performed.
From linear interpolation (N1) to circular interpolation (N2)
Y N1 N1
N2 N2
X
Vibration due to change
of acceleration
Feedrate Feedrate
Tangential
feedrate
Time Time
Time Time
Y-axis
acceleration
- Setting the permissible acceleration change amount

The permissible acceleration change amount for each axis is set in parameter No. 1788. When 0 is set in
this parameter for a certain axis, speed control with change of acceleration is not performed for that axis.
- 1161 -
- Parameter setting example

Suppose a figure shown Fig. 7.3.1 in which a straight line is followed by an arc. Let the specified feedrate
and the arc radius be 6000 mm/min and 10 mm, respectively. Then, the Y-axis acceleration change
amount at the contact point of the linear and arc portions is obtained as follows:
v2
= 1000mm / s 2
r
From straight line to arc
Y Specified feedrate: 6000 mm/min
Arc radius: 10 mm
Time
Y-axis Acceleration
acceleration change amount:
2
1000 mm/s
Acceleration
Fig. 7.3.1
To suppress the change of acceleration to 300 mm/sec2, set 300 mm/sec2 for the Y-axis in parameter No.
1788.
Note that the change of acceleration is determined from the interpolation data of the CNC, so it may differ
from the theoretical value.
The actual machine is affected by acceleration/deceleration and other factors, so the value to be set in the
parameter should be determined after adjustments are made.
- For successive linear interpolations

When there are successive linear interpolations, speed control with change of acceleration obtains the
deceleration feedrate from the change in acceleration between the start point and end point of a specified
block.
When a curve is specified using successive minute straight lines, programmed values are rounded to the
least input increment before issued, so the machining profile is approximated with a broken line. The
error due to rounding may increase change of acceleration, and especially when the line segments
specified by blocks are short, deceleration is performed frequently. As a result, the machining speed
cannot increase enough. In such a case, a relatively large value should be set in parameter No. 1789 as the
permissible acceleration change amount for each axis in successive linear interpolations to improve the
machining speed.
When a value other than 0 is set in parameter No. 1789 for an axis for which deceleration with change of
acceleration is enabled, this setting is regarded as the permissible acceleration change amount at corners
in which linear interpolations meet. (For portions where a linear interpolation and circular interpolation
meet and where circular interpolations meet, the setting in parameter No. 1788 is used.)
When 0 is set in parameter No. 1789 for an axis, the setting in parameter No. 1788 specifying the
ordinary permissible acceleration change amount is used even at a corner in which linear interpolations
meet.
When smooth speed control is used in speed control with permissible acceleration in AI contour control II,
the deceleration feedrate is obtained from the change of acceleration calculated by smooth speed control.
Therefore, the deceleration feedrate may be higher than the ordinary deceleration feedrate.
- 1162 -
When linear interpolation is followed

by circular interpolation, speed
control is performed using the
permissible acceleration change
amount set in parameter No. 1788.
Linear Circular
interpolation interpolation
For successive linear interpolations,

speed control is performed using the
permissible acceleration change
amount set in parameter No. 1789.
Linear
interpolation
Parameter
Maximum allowable acceleration change rate in feedrate determination based on acceleration change
1788
for each axis

Set a maximum allowable acceleration change rate for each axis in feedrate control based
on acceleration change under control on the rate of change of acceleration.
For an axis with 0 set in this parameter, feedrate control based on acceleration change is
disabled.
If 0 is set for all axes, feedrate control based on acceleration change is not exercised.
Maximum allowable acceleration change rate in feedrate determination based on acceleration change
1789
for each axis (linear interpolation)

Set a maximum allowable acceleration change rate for each axis in feedrate control based
on acceleration change under control on the rate of change of acceleration in successive
linear interpolation operations.
In feedrate control based on acceleration change at a corner between linear interpolation
operations, the maximum allowable acceleration change rate not set in parameter No.
1788 but set in this parameter is valid.
For an axis with 0 set in this parameter, the maximum allowable acceleration change rate
set in parameter No. 1788 is valid.
Feedrate control based on acceleration change is disabled for an axis with 0 set in
parameter No. 1788, so that the setting of this parameter for such an axis is ignored.
- 1163 -
7.3.2 Look-Ahead Smooth Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration

before Interpolation (M Series)
M
Overview
In look-ahead bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation performs smooth
acceleration/deceleration by changing the acceleration at a constant rate in specified acceleration change
time.
In look-ahead smooth bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, the jerk change time is
specified in parameter No. 1790 by using the percentage to the acceleration change time for look-ahead
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, and change of acceleration is also controlled so
that the change is bell-shaped.
This enables smoother acceleration/deceleration, therefore it reduces machine vibration and shock due to
NOTE
To use this function, the both options for "Jerk control" and "AI contour control II"
are required.
- 1164 -
(Look-ahead bell-shaped (Look-ahead smooth bell-shaped

acceleration/deceleration before interpolation) acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)
Tangential feedrate Tangential feedrate
Time Time
Acceleration change time
Time set in parameter No.
1772
Time Time
Jerk Jerk change time Jerk

acceleration Time set in parameter No. acceleration
1790 by using the
percentage to the
acceleration change time
Time Time
Explanation
- Setting the jerk change time
The jerk change time is set in parameter No. 1790 by using the percentage to the acceleration change
time.
The actual jerk change time is represented by the percentage to the acceleration change time set in
parameter No. 1772.
The jerk change time must be within a half of the acceleration change time, so the value to be set in the
parameter ranges 0 to 50 (percent).
If 0 or a value beyond the specifiable range is specified in parameter No. 1790, look-ahead smooth
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is not available.
- Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for linear type rapid traverse

When bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is used in acceleration/
deceleration before interpolation for linear type rapid traverse, enabling look-ahead smooth bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation applies smooth bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration to
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for linear type rapid traverse.
In this case, the jerk change time is represented by the percentage set in parameter No. 1790 to the
acceleration change time set in parameter No. 1672.
- 1165 -
- Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration

When bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is used in optimum torque acceleration/deceleration, enabling
look-ahead smooth bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation applies smooth bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration to optimum torque acceleration/
deceleration.
In this case, the jerk change time is represented by the percentage set in parameter No. 1790 to the
acceleration change time set in parameter No. 1672.
Parameter
Ratio of change time of the rate of change of acceleration in smooth bell-shaped
1790

[Unit of data] %
Set the ratio of the change time of the rate of change of acceleration to the change time of
acceleration(*1) by percentage (%) in smooth bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
before look-ahead interpolation.
If 0 is set in this parameter or a value not within the valid data range is specified in this
parameter, look-ahead smooth bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation
is not performed.
(*1) Parameter No. 1772 for look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

(cutting feed).
Parameter No. 1672 for acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in linear rapid
traverse, or for optimum torque acceleration/ deceleration.
- 1166 -
B-64603EN-1/01 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL
8 MULTI-PATH CONTROL
Chapter 8, “MULTI-PATH CONTROL”, consists of the following sections:
8.1 MULTI-PATH CONTROL.............................................................................................................1167

8.2 WAITING M CODES.....................................................................................................................1185
8.3 WAITING M CODES OF HIGH-SPEED TYPE ...........................................................................1190
8.4 INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH PATH (T SERIES) ........................................................1197
8.5 BALANCE CUTTING (T SERIES) ...............................................................................................1207
8.6 SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE CONTROL ...............................................................................1210
8.7 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL .......................................................................................................1255
8.8 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL A (WITH SPEED CONTROL) ....................................................1271
8.9 SYNCHRONOUS, COMPOSITE, AND SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL BY PROGRAM
COMMAND ...................................................................................................................................1272
8.10 COMBINATION OF SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL AND AI CONTOUR CONTROL.............1275
8.11 PATH SPINDLE CONTROL .........................................................................................................1281
8.12 MEMORY COMMON TO PATHS ...............................................................................................1290
8.13 PATH SINGLE BLOCK CHECK FUNCTION .............................................................................1293
8.14 PATH SELECTION/DISPLAY OF OPTIONAL PATH NAMES ................................................1294
8.15 WAITING FUNCTION BY SPECIFYING START POINT .........................................................1296
8.1 MULTI-PATH CONTROL

Overview
The multipath control function is designed to control the independent simultaneous machining with up to
2 paths, and the peripheral device such as a loader for performing a non-machining operation. (machining
path up to 2, loader path up to 2, up to 4 paths in total). This function is applicable to lathes and automatic
lathes which perform cutting simultaneously with multiple tool posts, and machines which require
additional control paths such as a loader control path.
For multipath simultaneous machining, each machining program is stored in a directory in program
memory for each path. When automatic operation is to be performed, each path is activated after selecting
a program for machining with path 1 and programs for machining with paths 2 from the programs stored
in the respective directories in program memory. Then the programs selected for the tool posts are
executed independently at the same time. When tool post 1 and tool post 2 need to wait for each other
during machining, the waiting function is available.
Other available functions specific to multipath control include tool post interference check, balance cut,
synchronization control, composite control, path spindle control, and memory common to paths.
Just one LCD/MDI is provided for the all paths. Before operation and display on the LCD/MDI, the path
selection signal is used to switch between the paths.
- 1167 -
8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-64603EN-1/01
- For a system with two paths

CNC
LCD/MDI
Program memory
Program directory for Path 1 Path 1 Path 1

path 1 program position axis
analysis control control
Programs
Program directory for Path 2 Path 2 Path 2

path 2 program position axis
analysis control control
Programs
Fig. 8.1 (a)
Explanation
- System configuration
In multi-path control, multiple paths are combined into a single machine group, and such multiple
machine groups, in turn, make up a single system.
Each of the elements making up multi-path control is explained below.
Example)
Configuration of multi-path control
CNC
Machine group 1 Machine group 2
Path 1 Path 2
Axis Axis Axis Axis
- Machine group
When there are multiple path, a group that is made up of such paths is called as machine group.
In same machine group, a data can be shared. And when an alarm is occurred, the operation of other paths
in the same machine group can be stopped.
Up to 3 groups are available, depending on the type of the CNC system.
The main items that depend on the machine group are shown below.
- Emergent stop signal *ESP <X0008.4,X0008.0,X0008.1>
- MDI reset key
- Operation during the occurrence of an alarm
- Path
A path refers to a group of axes controlled by the same CNC program command.
Up to 2 paths are available for machining, and up to 2 paths are available for loader control. Up to 4 paths
in total are available.
The machine group is specified for each path with parameter No.0980.
- 1168 -
- Controlled axes
The number of control axes which used throughout the entire system is specified with parameter No.0987.
The path number which each axis is controlled is specified with parameter No.0981. The path number can
be specified within the allowable number of control axes.
Example 1)
For 2-path system with a total of 6 control axes such as the following.
- 3 control axes in path 1.
Parameter No. 0981 Setting value Application
Logical, axis 1 1 Path 1, axis 1
Example 2)
For 3-path system with a total of 6 control axes such as the following.
NOTE
1 When the setting of parameter No. 981 is 0, the control axis is assigned to the
first path.
2 Any path having no control axis cannot be set.
- Spindle
The number of spindle which used throughout the entire system is specified with parameter No.0988.
The path number which each spindle is controlled is specified with parameter No.0982. The path number
can be specified within the allowable number of spindle.
Example)
For 2-path system with a total of 4 spindle such as the following.
- 3 spindles in path 1.
- 1 spindle in path 2.
Logical, spindle 1 1 Path 1, spindle 1
- 1169 -
NOTE
1 When the setting of parameter No. 982 is 0, the spindle is assigned to the first
path.
2 A spindle cannot assign to a loader path. Alarm PS0365, "TOO MANY
MAXIMUM SV/SP AXIS NUMBER PER PATH" is issued.
Example
- Example of a system configuration (2 path and loader path)
- Configuration example
B2
C1
C2
Front
Rear spindle
spindle 1 linear axis +
1 rotation axis
Machining Path 1
X1 X2
Y1 Y2
Z1 Z2
Loader
1st turret 1 linear axis + 2nd turret
3 linear axes 2 rotation axes 3 linear axes
C3 Machining Path 2
B3 Z3
Loader Path
- Conceptual drawing of the configuration
CNC unit
Path 1 Path 2 Path 3

(Machining path 1) (Machining path 2) (Loader path 1)
X1 Y1 Z1 C1 S1 X2 Y2 Z2 B2 C2 S2 B3 C3 Z3
Fig.8.1 (b)
- 1170 -
In the system configuration example shown in the example, Fig.8.1 (b), paths 1 and 2 are machining path,
and path 3 is path for the loader control. The parameter settings that accomplish that system configuration
are follows.
Machine Group to Which

Each Path Is to Belong
(Parameter No. 980)
Setting value
Path 1 1
Path 2 1
Path 3 (Loader control) 2
Number of the Path to Which Each Axis Is to Number of the Path to Which Each Spindle Is
Belong to Belong
(Parameter No. 981) (Parameter No. 982)
Setting value Setting value
Logical, axis 1 (X1) 1 Logical, spindle 1 (S1) 1
Logical, axis 2 (Y1) 1 Logical, spindle 2 (S2) 2
Logical, axis 3 (Z1) 1
Logical, axis 4 (C1) 1
Logical, axis 5 (X2) 2
Logical, axis 6 (Y2) 2
Logical, axis 8 (B2) 2
Logical, axis 10 (B3) 3
- DI/DO
In a multi-path system, the relations for interface signal address between the CNC and the PMCs is
follows.
The single PMC (ladder program) can be controlled the all paths. In addition, the multi PMC (ladder
program) can be controlled each path by multi-path PMC function (option).
Allocation with NC parameters

CNC Signal PMC
I/F X0000~
First PMC
G0000~ I/O
Path 1 G0000~/F0000~ device
F0000~ G1000~/F1000~ Y0000~ for first
PMC
G1000~
Path 2
F1000~ Second PMC
X0000~
I/O
(optional) device
G0000~/F0000~ for
Y0000~ second
G1000~/F1000~
PMC
- 1171 -
NOTE
1 In a multi-path PCM system, each PMC has an independent signal area. The F,
G, X, and Y signal addresses of each PMC are allocated, starting with address
0. In contrast, the F and G signal addresses as seen from the CNC are fixed
addresses in the same order as that of the path numbers. The F and G signal
addresses programmed by each Ladder program differ from the F and G signal
addresses as seen from the CNC.
2 The signal addresses relations between the CNC and the PMCs of each path
can be set with CNC parameters Nos. 11920 to 11929. For details of how to do
this, refer to Chapter 1 of the PMC Programming Manual.
Specific Setting Example for the Previous Example
CNC Signal PMC

I/F 1st PMC
G0000 ~ G0000~/F0000~
Path 1
F0000 ~ G1000~/F1000~ X0000 ~ I/O
Machine G2000~/F2000~ device
group G1000 ~ G3000~/F3000~ Y0000 ~ for 1st PMC
1 Path 2 G4000~/F4000~
F1000 ~ G5000~/F5000~
G6000~/F6000~
G7000~/F7000~
G8000~/F8000~
G9000~/F9000~
Machine G2000 ~ 2nd PMC

group Path 3 (optional)
2 F2000 ~
G0000~/F0000~
G1000~/F1000~
G2000~/F2000~ X0000 ~ I/O
G3000~/F3000~ device
G4000~/F4000~ Y0000 ~ for 2nd PMC
G5000~/F5000~
G6000~/F6000~
G7000~/F7000~
G8000~/F8000~
G9000~/F9000~
Fig.8.1 (c)
NOTE
If the PMC (Ladder program) specifically for loaders is used, assign a single
PMC path as the loader path, using the multi-path PMC function as in the Fig.8.1
(c).
Setting Examples for the Interface Between the NC and the PMCs
Parameter No. Setting value Application
11920 100 F0000 to F0767/G0000 to G0767 of the 1st PMC
11921 101 F1000 to F1767/G1000 to G1767 of the 1st PMC
11922 200 F0000 to F0767/G0000 to G0767 of the 2nd PMC
11923 0
11924 0
11925 0
11926 0
11927 0
11928 0
- 1172 -
Parameter No. Setting value Application

11929 0
In general, the address for each path as seen from the NC section is assigned as in the table below.
Signal Address for Each Path

Signal address Description
G0000 to G0767 Signal for path 1 (PMC to CNC)
F0000 to F0767 Signal for path 1 (CNC→PMC)
G1000 to G1767 Signal for path 2 (PMC→CNC)
The following signals follow separate settings from the above:

- Signals common to paths. (There are those arranged on path 1.)
- Signals for each controlled axis and for each spindle
- Signals for each group in PMC axis control
- Signals common to paths

These signals are common to paths.
Path select
Path select signal HEAD<G0063.0>
Auto screen clear function

Auto screen clear invalidation signal *CRTOF<G0062.1>
Screen hard copy function

Hard copy cancellation request signal HCABT<G0067.6>
Hard copy cancellation request acceptance signal HCAB2<F0061.2>
Hard copy execution request signal HCREQ<G0067.7>
Hard copy under execution signal HCEXE<F0061.3>
External key input function

External key input mode select signal ENBKY<G0066.1>
Key code read signal EKSET<G0066.7>
Key code signal EKC0 to EKC7<G0098.0to G0098.7>
Program screen display in progress signal PRGDPL<F0053.1>
Key code read completion signal EKENB<F0053.7>
Key input nullification signal INHKY<F0053.0>
NOTE
The signal area is common to paths. Key input is made on the currently selected
screen.
Memory protection function

Memory protection signal KEY1 to KEY4<G0046.3 to G0046.6>
Memory protect signal KEYO<F0075.6>
8.1.1 CNC Data Display, Setup, and Input/Output

There are offsets and custom macro variables for each path. For the path selected by the display unit, a
data can be displayed. And it can be input and output to an I/O device such as a memory card.
As for custom macro variables, the some or all of common variables can be used commonly between each
path by the settings of parameter.
- 1173 -
As for offsets, the data of offset can be used commonly between each path by the settings of parameter.
As for input/output, the file name can be renamed depend on each path by the settings of parameter.
8.1.2 Multi-path Functions

The functions specific to multi-path control are as listed below.
Waiting M codes
Path interference check (T Series)
Balance cutting (T Series)
Synchronous/Composite control
Superimposed control
Path spindle control
Memory common to paths
Path single block check function
Path selection/arbitrary path name display
NOTE
The functions waiting M code, memory common to paths, and path
selection/arbitrary path name display are valid for all machine groups. For
example, waiting can be performed across machine groups 1 and 2. The other
functions are valid only within the same machine group. For example,
synchronous control cannot be performed across machine groups 1 and 2.
The following provides an outline of each of the functions.
- Waiting M codes
When the progress of program is synchronized to the one for other path during machining, an M code is
used.
By specifying a waiting M code in the machining program for each of multiple paths, these paths can be
synchronized. When a waiting M code is specified for one path during automatic operation, the same M
code for another path is waited for to be specified, then the execution of the next block is started.
Specify the range of M codes that be used as a waiting M codes to the parameter in advance.
For details, refer to the Section, "WAITING M CODES" in this chapter.
T
- Interference check for each path (T Series)
When 2 tool posts with 2-path system is controlled for machining a workpiece in parallel, the each tool
post might be close to. If these two tool posts come into contact due to a program error or other setting
error, this will cause grave consequences such as the damage of the tool or the damage of the machine
itself.
The "Interference check for each path" refers to the function whereby if a command that will cause two
tool posts which is controlled by each path to interfere with each other as described above is specified,
these two tool posts are both decelerated to a stop before they actually come into contact.
For details, refer to the Section, "INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH PATH (T SERIES)" in this
chapter.
T
- Balance cutting (T Series)
When a thin workpiece is machined with turning, the deflection of workpiece occurs if it is machined
from a single side only. This function can be prevented the deflection by the machining from both sides at
the same time with using a cutting tool, and achieving higher precision machining. Unless the movements
of the two tools are synchronized with each other well, the workpiece will vibrate, making correct
- 1174 -
machining impossible. By using this function, the movements of the tool posts can be easily synchronized
and can be machined.
For details, refer to the Section, "BALANCE CUTTING (T SERIES)" in this chapter.
- Synchronous/Composite control
Usually, in 2-path control, the tool moves along the axes (X1, Z1, and C1) belonging to tool post 1 in
accordance with the move commands for tool post 1 and along the axes (X2, Z2, and C2) belonging to
tool post 2 in accordance with the move commands for tool post 2 (independent control for each tool
post). The any axis in one tool post can be synchronized to the any axis in another tool post by the
function, "Synchronous/Composite control" (Synchronous control).
The moving command for any axis in one tool post can be replaced to the one of any axes in another tool
post, and the replaced axis can be moved (Composite control).
For details, refer to the Section, "SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE CONTROL" in this chapter.
- Superimposed control
Usually, in 2-path control, the tool moves along the axes (X1, Z1, and C1) belonging to tool post 1 in
accordance with the move commands for tool post 1 and along the axes (X2, Z2, and C2) belonging to
tool post 2 in accordance with the move commands for tool post 2 (independent control for each tool
post). In superimposed control, the amount movement of any axis in one tool post can be superimposed to
the any axis in another tool post.
For details, refer to the Section, "SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL" in this chapter.
- Path spindle control

This function allows the spindle belonging to one path to follow the spindle command of another specific
path.
The feedback data from position coder can be switched to the spindle which assigned to any path. For
example, "threading" or "feed per revolution" on path 1 can be achieved by using the spindle in path 2.
For details, refer to the Section, "PATH SPINDLE CONTROL" in this chapter.
- Memory common to paths

In a machine with multiple paths, the custom macro common variables and tool compensation memory
which is independent with between a paths can be changed to common to paths through appropriate
parameter settings.
- Custom macro common variables

Part or all of common variables #100 to #149 and #500 and #531 of custom macros can be made into
those for common use by paths (variables that permit reading or writing by either of both paths).
- Tool compensation memory

The tool compensation memory of path 1 can be accessed by path 2 as well, for data reference and
setting.
The requirement is that the settings for tool compensation (such as the number of sets, the number of
digits, and the unit system) must be the same in both paths 1 and 2.
For details, refer to the Section, "MEMORY COMMON TO PATHS" in this chapter.
- Path single block check function

If one path enters the single block stop state, this function allows another path to enter the feedhold stop
state, enabling single block operation with the path machining programs being nearly synchronized.
For details, refer to the Section, "PATH SINGLE BLOCK CHECK FUNCTION" in this manual.
- Path selection/arbitrary path name display

Path selection/arbitrary path name display
- 1175 -
This function is used to select a path targeted for an operation that is performed for a specified path, for
example, displaying and setting various types of data (tool compensation or the like) for each path,
inputting the command program in MDI mode, or editing the machining program in program memory.
In addition, the name of each path can be changed by setting the parameter.
For details, refer to the Section, "PATH SELECTION/ARBITRARY PATH NAME DISPLAY" in this
chapter.
8.1.3 Cautions on Multi-path Control

- Parameter
WARNING
When a parameter is changed on MDI mode for a path, it is probable that other
paths are in MEM or other modes. Before changing parameters, check to be not
affect to the operations in the other paths.
In particular, use great caution not to change those parameters related to axes
and spindles during axis moving.
- MDI reset key

CAUTION
Only a single LCD/MDI set is provided for all paths. The operations and displays
on the LCD/MDI is switched by the path selection signal. However, the key
on the MDI panel is effective to all paths, regardless of the path selection signal.
Note, however, the effect of key can be limited to only the path which is
selected by the path selection signal or the machine group, by the setting bit 0
(RST) of parameter No. 8100 or bit 0 (MGR) of parameter No. 8106.
- Alarms during automatic operation

CAUTION
When an alarm occurs in a path during automatic operation, all paths in that
machine group will enter the feedhold state and stop.
By the setting of bit 1 (IAL) of parameter No. 8100, the alarm does not occur,
then the operation can be continued.
- Assignment of signals
CAUTION
1 When there are four paths
Input signals by the X address for each path are assigned to up to three paths.
Therefore, when there are four paths, the signals must be assigned by bit 2
(XSG) of parameter No. 3008.
2 When there are nine or more axes for one path
The X address of the reference position return deceleration signal (*DECx) for
each axis is assigned to up to 3 paths (up to eight axes for each path). Therefore,
when there are 4 paths or there are nine or more axes for one path, the signals
must be assigned by setting bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008, parameter No.
3013, and parameter No. 3014.
The input signal (G signal) and output signal (F signal) for each axis are assigned
to up to eight axes for each path. Therefore, when there are nine or more axes for
one path, the signals must be assigned by setting parameter No. 3021.
- 1176 -
Parameter
0980 Machine group number to which each path belongs
NOTE

Set the machine group number to which each path belongs.
NOTE
When 0 is set, each path is assumed to belong to machine group 1.
0981 Absolute path number to which each axis belongs
NOTE

Set the path to which each axis belongs.
NOTE
When 0 is set, each axis is assumed to belong to path 1.
0982 Absolute path number to which each spindle belongs
NOTE

Set the path to which each spindle belongs.
NOTE
When 0 is set, each spindle is assumed to belong to path 1.
0987 Number of control axes
NOTE

[Data type] Byte
- 1177 -
[Valid data range] 1 to maximum number of control axes

Set the number of control axes used throughout the entire system.
NOTE
1. Available number of control axes is different according to the model
and the option function, etc.
2. When this parameter is set to 0, the number of control axes is:
T series (lathe system) : 2 axes
M series (machining system) : 3 axes
0988 Number of spindle axes
NOTE

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 to maximum number of spindle axes
Set the number of spindle axes used throughout the entire system.
NOTE
1. Available number of spindle axes is different according to the model
and the option function, etc.
2. When this parameter is set to 0, the number of spindle axes is 1.
3. When number of spindle axes is set to 0, this parameter is set to -1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3008 XSG

NOTE
#2 XSG A signal assigned to an X address is:

0: Fixed at the address.
1: Able to be reassigned to an arbitrary X address.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, set parameters Nos. 3013, 3014,
3012, and 3019. If parameters Nos. 3013 and 3014 are not set, the
deceleration signal for reference position return is assigned to bit 0
of <X0000>. If parameters Nos. 3012 and 3019 are not set, the
skip signal, the PMC axis control skip signal, the measurement
position arrival signal, the manual feed interlock signal for each axis
direction, and the tool compensation value write signal are
assigned to <X0000>.
- 1178 -
3012 Skip signal assignment address
NOTE

Set an X address to which the skip signal SKIPn is to be assigned.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is
set to 1.
Depending on the configuration of the I/O Link, the actually usable
X addresses are:
<X0000 to X0127>, <X0200 to X0327>, <X0400 to X0527>,
<X0600 to X0727>
3013 X address to which the deceleration signal for reference position return is assigned
NOTE

Set an address to which the deceleration signal *DECn for reference position return for
each axis is to be assigned.
NOTE
set to 1.
X addresses are:
<X0000 to X0127>, <X0200 to X0327>, <X0400 to X0527>,
<X0600 to X0727>
3014 Bit position of an X address to which the deceleration signal for reference position return is assigned
NOTE

Set a bit position to which the deceleration signal for reference position return *DECn for
each axis is to be assigned.
- 1179 -
NOTE
set to 1.
Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal and measurement position arrival signals are
3019
assigned
NOTE

Set an X address to which the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP and the measurement
position arrival signals (XAE, YAE, and ZAE (Machining Center series) or XAE and
ZAE (Lathe series)) are to be assigned.
Example 1. When No.3012 is set to 5 and No.3019 is set to 6

When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 1, the PMC axis control skip signal, and
measurement position arrival signal are allocated to X0006 and the skip signal is
allocated to X0005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X005 SKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 (T series)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 (M series)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X006 ESKIP ZAE XAE (T series)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ESKIP ZAE YAE XAE (M series)
Example 2. When No.3012 is set to 5 and No.3019 is set to 5

When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 1, the PMC axis control skip signal,
measurement position arrival signal, and skip signal are allocated to X0005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X005 ESKIP ZAE XAE
SKIP (T series)
SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ESKIP ZAE YAE XAE
SKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 (M series)
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
NOTE
set to 1.
X addresses are:
X0 to X127, X200 to X327, X400 to X527, X600 to X727
- 1180 -
3021 Address to which an axis signal is assigned
NOTE

[Valid data range] 0 to 7, 10 to 17, 20 to 27, 30 to 37
For each axis of the CNC, set a PMC interface address.
Set a value according to the tables below.
Value of parameter No. 3021 (the second digit)
Setting value Input signal address Output signal address
0 G0000 to G0767 F0000 to F0767
1 G1000 to G1767 F1000 to F1767
2 G2000 to G2767 F2000 to F2767
3 G3000 to G2767 F3000 to F3767
Value of parameter No. 3021 (the first digit)

Setting value Input signal address Output signal address
0 0 0
1 1 1
:
7 7 7
[Example of setting]
Axis number No. 3021 Signal allocation
1 0 +J1<G0100.0>, -J1<G0102.0>, ZP1<F0090.0>, ...
2 1 +J2<G0100.1>, -J2<G0102.1>, ZP2<F0090.1>, ...
3 2 +J3<G0100.2>, -J3<G0102.2>, ZP3<F0090.2>, ...
4 10 +J4<G1100.0>, -J4<G1102.0>, ZP4<F1090.0>, ...
5 11 +J5<G1100.1>, -J5<G1102.1>, ZP5<F1090.1>, ...
If eight or less axes are used per path, the following signal allocation results when 0 is set
for all axes:
Axis 1 of path 1 = Setting equivalent to 0
:
:
NOTE
Set this parameter when more than eight axes are used per path.
The valid data range varies, depending on the system software.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8100 DSB IAL RST

[Data type] Bit machine group
- 1181 -
#0 RST The pressing of the key on the MDI panel is:

0: Valid for all paths.
1: Valid only for the path selected by the path selection signal.
The key on the MDI panel functions for all machine groups. So, in machine
groups for which this parameter is set to 0, a reset can be performed for all paths. In
machine groups for which this parameter is set to 1, a reset can be performed only for the
path that is selected by the path select signal.
NOTE
The path by which reset becomes actually effective depends on the
combination with bit 0 (MGR) of parameter No.8106 setting and
this parameter.
So, operations are performed as indicated in the example below.
[Example]
Suppose that the following 2-path system is used.
CNC
Path 1 Path 2
Axis Axis Axis Axis
(1) When RST (machine group 1) = 0 and RST (machine group 2) = 0 are set, the
reset key is valid for all paths.
Reset operation when the MDI key is pressed
Signal HEAD 0 1
(Path 1 selected) (Path 2 selected)
Path 1 Resetting valid Resetting valid
reset key is valid for a path selected by the path selection signal.
Signal and HEAD
0 1
Path 1 Resetting valid Resetting invalid
Path 2 Resetting invalid Resetting valid
following operation is performed:
Signal HEAD
0 1
Path 1 Resetting valid Resetting invalid
- 1182 -
#1 IAL Choice of an option concerning operation continuation when an alarm is issued, and
choice of an option concerning the start of automatic operation in alarm state:
0: • When an alarm is issued, the operation is stopped with the other path(s) in same
group placed in hold state.
• When the other path or paths in same group are placed in alarm state, automatic
operation cannot be started.
1: • Even when an alarm is issued, the operation is continued without stopping the other
path(s).
• Even when the other path or paths in same group are placed in alarm state, automatic
operation can be started.
#6 DSB The inter-path single block check function is:

0: Disabled.
When a single block stop occurs with a path, no single block stop occurs with the
other path(s).
1: Enabled.
When a single block stop occurs with a path, a feed hold stop occurs with all paths
in the same machine group.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8106 MGR

[Data type] Bit
#0 MGR When the RESET key on the MDI panel is pressed,

0: All machine groups are reset.
1: Only the machine groups to which the path selected by the path selection signal
belongs are reset.
NOTE
combination with bit 0 (RST) of parameter No. 8100 setting and this
parameter.
[Example]
Suppose that the following 2-machine-group with 4-path system is used.
Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 Path 4
[Example 1]
When the bit 0 (MGR) of parameter No. 8106 is set to 0:
When the RESET key on the MDI panel is pressed, all paths are reset
regardless of which path is selected.
[Example 2]
When the bit 0 (MGR) of parameter No. 8106 is set to 0 and path 1 is selected:
When the RESET key on the MDI panel is pressed, machine group 1 (paths 1
and 2) to which path 1 belongs is reset. Machine group 2 (paths 3 and 4) is not
reset.
- 1183 -
Bit 0 (MGR) of parameter No. 8106 can be used together with bit 0 (RST) of
parameter No. 8100. The following table lists the path or paths to be reset when
the RESET key on the MDI panel is pressed, according to the setting of bit 0
(RST) of parameter No. 8100 used when bit 0 (MGR) of parameter No. 8106 is
set to 1 for the machine group in the above example.
Bit 0 (RST) of Bit 0 (RST) of Selected path
No. parameter No. 8100 parameter No. 8100 Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 Path 4
(Machine group 1) (Machine group 2) Path(s) to be reset
1 0 0 1, 2 1, 2 3, 4 3, 4
2 0 1 1, 2 1, 2 3 4
3 1 0 1 2 3, 4 3, 4
4 1 1 1 2 3 4
Signal address
#2 #1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #0
#1 #1 #1 #1 #1
X0004 #1 ESKIP -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1
SKIP #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
T series SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
#1
X0004 #1 ESKIP #1 #1 #1
SKIP #1
SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 #1 #1 #1
M series SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
X0007 *DEC8 *DEC7 *DEC6 *DEC5 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
X0008 *ESP (*ESP) (*ESP)
#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
X0009 *DEC8 *DEC7 *DEC6 *DEC5 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
X0010 *DEC8#3 *DEC7#3 *DEC6#3 *DEC5#3 *DEC4#3 *DEC3#3 *DEC2#3 *DEC1#3
X0011 ESKIP#3 -MIT2#3 +MIT2#3 -MIT1#3 +MIT1#3

SKIP#3
T series SKIP6#3 SKIP5#3 SKIP4#3 SKIP3#3 SKIP2#3 SKIP8#3 SKIP7#3
X0011 ESKIP#3
SKIP#3 SKIP5#3 SKIP4#3 SKIP3#3
M series SKIP6#3 SKIP2#3 SKIP8#3 SKIP7#3
#2 #2 #2 #2 #2
X0013 #2 ESKIP -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1
SKIP #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
T series SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
#2
X0013 #2 ESKIP #2 #2 #2
SKIP #2
SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 #2 #2 #2
M series SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
Alarm and message

PS0365 TOO MANY MAXIMUM SV/SP The maximum control axis number or maximum control spindle
AXIS NUMBER PER PATH number which could be used within a path was exceeded.
PW0001 X-ADDRESS IS NOT The X address of the PMC could not be assigned correctly.
ASSIGNED. This alarm may occur in the following case:
- During the setting of parameter No. 3013, the X address could not
be assigned correctly for the deceleration dog (*DEC) for a return
to the reference position.
PW0002 PMC address is not The address to assign the axis signal is incorrect.
correct(AXIS). This alarm may occur in the following case:
- The parameter No. 3021 setting is incorrect.
- 1184 -
8.2 WAITING M CODES

Overview
Control based on M codes is used to cause one path to wait for the other during machining. When an M
code for waiting is specified in a block for one path during automatic operation, the other path waits for
the same M code to be specified before staring the execution of the next block.
A range of M codes used as M codes for waiting is to be set in the parameters Nos. 8110 and 8111
beforehand. Waiting can be ignored using a signal.
Address P to be specified in the same block as that containing a waiting M code can be set in either of
two ways:
• When the bit 1 (MWP) of parameter No. 8103 is set to 0 :
Waiting with a binary value specification
• When the bit 1 (MWP) of parameter No. 8103 is set to 1 :
Waiting with a path number combination specification
- Waiting specified with binary values
When bit 1 (MWP) of parameter No. 8103 is set to 0, the value specified at address P is assumed to be
obtained using binary values. The following table lists the path numbers and corresponding binary values.
Path number Binary value (decimal number)
1 1
2 or 2
Loader path 1(1 control path)
Loader path 1 (2 control paths) or 4
Loader path 2 (2 control paths) 8
The bit position of each path in binary representation is shown below.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Path 1( 20 = 1 )
Path 2 or
Loader path ( 21 = 2 )
To make all of paths 1, 2, and loader path 1 wait for one another, the P value is obtained as follows:
Binary value of path 1 1 (0000 0000 0000 0001)
Binary value of path 2 2 (0000 0000 0000 0010)
Binary value of loader path 1 4 (0000 0000 0000 0100)
Sum 7 (0000 0000 0000 0111)
All of the three paths can be made to wait for one another by specifying P7 together with an M code for
waiting.
- Waiting specified with a combination of path numbers

When bit 1 (MWP) of parameter No. 8103 is set to 1, the value specified at address P is assumed to be a
combination of path numbers. The following table lists the path numbers and corresponding values.
Path number Value (decimal number)
1 1
2 or 2
Loader path 1 (2 control paths) or 3
- 1185 -
Path number Value (decimal number)

Loader path 2 (2 control paths) 4
To make all of paths 1, 2, and loader path 1 wait for one another, the P value is a number consisting of 1,
2, and loader path 1.
Example) P123
There are no restrictions on the order in which the numeric characters are specified, the following six
possible values can be specified:
P123, P132, P213, P231, P312, P321
Path numbers specified in combination in different orders for different paths are effective as long as the
numbers of the relevant paths are specified.
Example)
The following are treated as the same P value and these paths can be made to wait for one another:
M200P123 for path 1, M200P231 for path 2, and M200P321 for loader path 1
Program example
- When the value specified at P is obtained using binary values
Assume that the no-wait signal NOWT <G0063.1> for path 2 (NMWT<G1063.7> for a system with three
or more paths) is set to "1" and M101 to M103 (parameter No. 8110 = 101 and parameter No. 8111 =
103) are set as M codes for waiting. In this case, programs O100, O200, and O300 for individual paths
are executed as follows:
Path 1 Path 2 Loader path 1
O0100; O0200; O0300;

G50 X Z ; G50 X Z ; G50 X Z ;
G00 X Z T0101; G00 X Z T0202; G00 X Z T0303;
M03 S1000; M03 S2000; M102 P7; ................ <2>
. M101 P3; .................. <1>
. G01 X Z F ;
M101 P3; .................. <1> .
G01 X Z F ; . <<Waiting (M102)>>
. M102 P7; .................. <2>
. M103 P7; .................. <3>
M102 P7; .................. <2> .
.
G00 X Z ;
M103 P7; .................. <3> .
.
.
.
<<Waiting (M103)>> .
M103 P7; .................. <3>
.
G01 X Z F ; .
G00 X Z ;
. .
. . .
<1> M101 P3; (making paths 1 and 2 wait for each other)
When the no-wait signal for path 2 is set to "0", paths 1 and 2 wait for each other. Because the signal
is set to "1", however, paths 1 and 2 ignore the M code for waiting and immediately execute the next
block.
<2> M102 P7; (making paths 1, 2, and loader path 1 wait for one another)
In this example, loader path 1 waits for processing on paths 1 and 2 to terminate. Because the
no-wait signal for path 2 is set to "1", however, loader path 1 assumes that waiting is completed
when processing on path 1 terminates, and executes the next block.
- 1186 -
In this example, paths 1 and 2 wait for processing on loader path 1 to terminate. Because the no-wait
signal for path 2 is set to "1", however, path 2 does not wait for processing on loader path 1 to
terminate and executes the next block, but path 1 waits for loader path 1.
- When the value specified at P is obtained using path numbers in combination

Assume that the no-wait <G0063.1> signal for path 2 (NMWT<G1063.7> for a system with three or more
paths) is set to "1" and M101 to M103 (parameter No. 8110 = 101 and parameter No. 8111 = 103) are set
as M codes for waiting. In this case, programs O100, O200, and O300 for individual paths are executed as
follows:
Path 1 Path 2 Loader path 1
O0100; O0200; O0300;

G50 X Z ; G50 X Z ; G50 X Z ;
G00 X Z T0101; G00 X Z T0202; G00 X Z T0303;
M03 S1000; M03 S2000; M102 P123; ............. <2>
. M101 P12; ................ <1>
. G01 X Z F ;
M101 P12;................ <1> .
G01 X Z F ; . <<Waiting (M102)>>
. M102 P123; .............. <2>
. M103 P123; .............. <3>
M102 P123; .............. <2> .
.
G00 X Z ;
M103 P123; .............. <3> .
.
.
.
<<Waiting (M103)>> .
M103 P123; .............. <3>
.
G01 X Z F ; .
G00 X Z ;
. .
. . .
<1> M101 P12; (making paths 1 and 2 wait for each other)
When the no-wait signal for path 2 is set to "0", paths 1 and 2 wait for each other. Because the signal
is set to "1", however, paths 1 and 2 ignore the M code for waiting and immediately execute the next
block.
In this example, loader path 1 waits for processing on paths 1 and 2 to terminate. Because the
no-wait signal for path 2 is set to "1", however, loader path 1 assumes that waiting is completed
when processing on path 1 terminates, and executes the next block.
In this example, paths 1 and 2 wait for processing on loader path 1 to terminate. Because the no-wait
signal for path 2 is set to "1", however, path 2 does not wait for processing on loader path 1 to
terminate and executes the next block, but path 1 waits for loader path 1.
Signal
You can invalidate waiting by using the no-wait signal.
The waiting M code of a path for which the no-wait signal is "1" is ignored by other paths, thereby
invalidating waiting. You use this signal if you are to perform automatic operation with a program
containing a waiting M code, but you want to keep a certain path stopped while performing automatic
operation in the other paths. For the path that you want to keep stopped, set the no-wait signal to "1".
- 1187 -
No-wait signal
NOWT<G0063.1>(for path common signal interface)
NMWT<Gn063.7>(for path individual signal interface)
[Function] Specifies whether to synchronize the paths by the waiting M code.
[Operation] When this signal turns to "1" the paths are not synchronized by the M code. The M code
for waiting specified in a machining program is ignored.
When this signal turns to "0", the paths are synchronized by the M code. When the M
code for waiting is specified for one path, the CNC waits for the corresponding M code of
another path to be issued, then starts executing the next block.
Waiting signal
WATO<F0063.6>(for path common signal interface)
WATO<Fn063.6>(for path individual signal interface)
[Function] Indicates that the M code is waiting for a path.
[Output cond.] These signals are "1" as long as:
- One path is waiting for another path. That is, the signal stays "1" for the period from
when the M code for waiting is issued to one path to when the corresponding M
code is issued to another path.
This signal is "0" as long as:
- Neither of the paths are waiting for the other.
NOTE
When the path common signal interface (bit 0 (MWT) of parameter
No. 8103 = 1) is used, F0063.6=1 results even if path 2 is placed in
the wait state.
So, when the wait state needs to be checked with each path, use
the path individual signal interface (bit 0 (MWT) of parameter No.
8103 = 0).
Signal address
- For path common signal interface
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0063 NOWT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0063 WATO
- For path individual signal interface

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn063 NMWT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn063 WATO
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8103 MWP MWT

[Data type] Bit
- 1188 -
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
#0 MWT As the signal interface for the waiting M code:

0: The path individual signal interface is used.
1: The path common signal interface is used.
This parameter can be selected only when 2-path control is used.
#1 MWP To specify a P command for the waiting M code/balance cut:

0: A binary value is used as conventionally done.
1: A path number combination is used.
8110 Waiting M code range (minimum value)
8111 Waiting M code range (maximum value)

[Data type] 2-word
[Valid data range] 0 ,100to99999999
A range of M code values can be set by specifying a minimum waiting M code value
(parameter No. 8110) and a maximum waiting M code value (parameter No. 8111).
(parameter No. 8110) ≤ (waiting M code) ≤ (parameter No. 8111)
Set 0 in these parameters when the waiting M code is not used.
Alarm and message

PS0160 MISMATCH WAITING <1> When different M codes are specified for path 1 and path 2 as
M-CODE waiting M codes without a P command.
<2> When the waiting M codes are not identical even though the P
commands are identical
<3> When the waiting M codes are identical and the P commands are
not identical (This occurs when a P command is specified with
binary value.)
<4> When the number lists in the P commands contain a different
number even though the waiting M codes are identical (This occurs
when a P command is specified by combining path numbers.)
<5> When a waiting M code without a P command (2-path waiting) and a
waiting M code with a P command (3-or-more-path waiting) were
specified at the same time
<6> When a waiting M code without a P command was specified for 3 or
more paths.
PS0161 ILLEGAL P OF WAITING <1> When address P is negative
M-CODE <2> When a P value inappropriate for the system configuration was
specified
<3> When a waiting M code without a P command (2-path waiting) was
specified in the system having 3 or more paths.
An alarm occurs in all the paths in which an alarm-related waiting M code has been executed, bringing
them into a single block stop and placing them in the automatic operation stop state.
At this time, the paths other than the alarm-related ones are stopped immediately, entering the automatic
operation idle state.
- 1189 -
Caution
CAUTION
1 Be sure to specify a waiting M code in an independent block.
2 Unlike other M codes, waiting M codes are not output to PMCs.
3 If you want to independently operate one path only, you need not delete that
waiting M code. Using the no-wait signal (NOWT for a 2-path system and NMWT
for a 3-path system), you can invalidate the waiting M code specified in the
machining program. For details, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool
builder.
4 To use a waiting M code in mode for multiple M commands in a single block, the
M code must be specified as the first M code.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Waiting for paths
8.3 WAITING M CODES OF HIGH-SPEED TYPE

Overview
Waiting M codes of high-speed type are useful function to reduce the cycle time of a program operation.
Specification
In order to use Waiting M codes of high-speed type, it is necessary to set the range of the M codes to
parameters Nos.8114 and 8115.
The usage of these type M codes is similar to normal waiting M codes. For instance, the way to set a path
by address P and to use a no-wait signal or so on are the same.
Format
M m (P p) ;
m : Number of an M code for waiting
p : (1) In the binary value specification mode, specify the sum of the binary values
corresponding to the numbers of paths which are to wait for one another.
(2) In the path number specification mode, specify the numbers of all paths that
are to wait for one another in combination.
NOTE
1 Specify a waiting M code only in a block.
2 The irrelevant command, which is specified with a waiting M code in a block, is
ignored.
Detail
Specifying the path by address P
The way to specify the path by address P is the same as normal waiting M codes.
Waiting signal
Waiting signal WATO<F0063.6> (for path common signal interface) and WATO<Fn063.6> (for path
individual signal interface) are output like normal waiting M codes.
- 1190 -
No-wait signal
No-wait signal NOWT<G0063.1> (for path common signal interface) and NMWT<Gn063.7> (for path
individual signal interface) are effective like normal waiting M codes.
Waiting M codes of high-speed type invalid signal

Waiting M codes of high-speed type are treated as normal waiting M codes when waiting M codes of
high-speed type invalid signal NHSW<G0579.6> is set to "1".
Limitation
Display of the currently executing program
Instead of the block of waiting M code, the block before waiting M code is displayed as the currently
executing program during waiting of high-speed type.
Function code signal and strobe signal

As for waiting M code of high-speed type, the function code signal and strobe signal are not output.
Modal display
Waiting M codes of high-speed type are not displayed as the information of M code modal.
Condition to treat waiting M codes of high-speed type as normal waiting M codes

When one of the following conditions is satisfied, waiting M codes of high-speed type are treated as
normal waiting M codes.
- Waiting M codes of high-speed type invalid signal is set to "1".

- The single-block operation is enabled.
- Waiting M codes of high-speed type are specified in the same block as the program number.
- In manual handle retrace function, the checking mode synchronizing an operation with a manual
handle pulse is selected.
- Animation or path drawing of dynamic graphic display is operated.
NOTE
1 Waiting between waiting M codes of high-speed type and waiting M codes of
high-speed type which are treated as normal waiting M codes cannot be
executed when setting bit 7 (HMA) of parameter No.11279 to 0. In this case,
alarm (PS0160) “MISMATCH WAITING M-CODE” occurs.
Example)
When either path 1 or path 2 is under the single block operation and waiting
by "waiting M code of high-speed type" is executed between path 1 and
path2, alarm (PS0160) occurs.
2 Waiting between waiting M codes of high-speed type and waiting M codes of
high-speed type which are treated as normal waiting M codes can be executed
when setting bit 7 (HMA) of parameter No.11279 to 1. And, waiting M codes of
high-speed type can be specified during Nano smoothing, Relation of cutter
compensation by setting bit 7 (HMA) of parameter No.11279 to 1. In this case,
waiting M codes of high-speed type are not work at a high-speed, waiting M
codes of high-speed type are treated as normal waiting M codes, and the
processing time of waiting M codes of high-speed type is equal with normal
waiting M codes.
- 1191 -
Auxiliary function output in moving axis function

Waiting is not executed even if waiting M code of high-speed type is specified, when Auxiliary function
output in moving axis command (G50.9) is given in the same block. In this case, M code is treated as a
normal auxiliary function.
Manual handle retrace function

In Manual handle retrace function, a backward movement cannot be executed while the block of waiting
M codes of high-speed type is executing. The backward movement ends when an operation enters the
next block of waiting M code of high-speed type during the backward movement. And ‘RVED’ is
displayed.
However, in the checking mode synchronizing with a manual handle pulse, the backward movement can
be executed when waiting M code of high-speed type was executed once during forward movement,
because the M code is treated as a normal M code in this case.
Retrace
The backward movement cannot be executed by Retrace function in the block of waiting M codes of
high-speed type. The backward movement ends when the next block of waiting M code of high-speed
type just starts executing during the backward movement. And ‘RVED’ is displayed.
Waiting function by specifying start point

Waiting M codes of high-speed type cannot act as waiting function by specifying start point. Alarm
(PS0160) occurs when such a command is specified. Use normal waiting M codes to use waiting function
by specifying start point.
Nano smoothing
Waiting M codes of high-speed type cannot be specified during Nano smoothing. Alarm (PS0343)
“ILLEGAL COMMAND IN NANO SMOOTHING” occurs when such a command is specified. Set the
bit 7 (HMA) of parameter No.11279 to 1, or use normal waiting M codes during Nano smoothing.
Relation of cutter compensation

Waiting M codes of high-speed type cannot be specified during the following cutter compensation
functions. Alarm (PS0160) occurs when such a command is specified. Set the bit 7 (HMA) of parameter
No.11279 to 1, or use normal waiting M codes during the following cutter compensation functions.
- Cutter compensation and tool nose radius compensation
NOTE
Waiting M codes of high-speed type cannot be specified just after the cancel
command of cutter compensation and tool nose radius compensation. Moreover,
waiting M codes of high-speed type cannot be specified while the vector of cutter
compensation is being held.
Multiple repetitive canned cycle

Waiting M codes of high-speed type cannot be specified during Multiple repetitive canned cycle G70 to
G73. Alarm (PS0160) occurs when such a command is specified. Use normal waiting M codes during
Multiple repetitive canned cycle G70 to G73.
Chamfering and corner R, Optional chamfering and corner R and Direct drawing
dimension programming
In the condition to treat waiting M codes of high-speed type as normal waiting M codes, alarm (PS0051)
“MISSING MOVE AFTER CNR/CHF” occurs when waiting M codes of high-speed type are specified
during Chamfering and corner R or Optional chamfering and corner R. And alarm (PS0312) “ILLEGAL
COMMAND IN DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING” occurs when waiting M codes
of high-speed type are specified during Direct drawing dimension programming.
- 1192 -
Quick program restart

When the program is interrupted by reset or etc. during executing waiting of high-speed type, the
previous block of waiting M codes is considered as the last restart point, instead of the block of waiting M
codes.
Output to the PMC

Waiting M codes are not output to the PMC unlike the other M codes.
Occurring alarm during waiting

The state of cycle start lamp signal STL<Fn000.5> is as follows when an alarm occurs during waiting.
Cycle start lamp signal STL<Fn000.5>

When alarms PS, SR or IO occurs. When other alarms occurs.
Waiting M codes of normal STL = 1 STL = 0
Waiting M codes of high-speed type STL = 0 STL = 0
Synchronous scroll function of multi-path editing function

In the block of waiting M codes of high-speed type, scroll waiting cannot be executed by Synchronous
scroll function of Multi-path editing function.
Block start interlock signal

Block start interlock signal *BSL<Gn008.3> is invalid for waiting M codes of high-speed type. However,
block start interlock signal *BSL<Gn008.3> is valid in the condition to treat waiting M codes of
high-speed type as normal waiting M codes.
Real-time custom macro

Execution timing of each real time macro statement is delayed compared with normal waiting M codes
when real time macro command is executed during the waiting by waiting M codes of high-speed type.
Please use normal waiting M codes for the waiting which is executed with real time macro command at
the same time.
Signal
Waiting M codes of high-speed type invalid signal NHSW<G0579.6>
[Function] Waiting M codes of high-speed type are invalidated.
[Operation] When this signal becomes "1":
M codes setting by parameters Nos.8114 and 8115 are treated as normal waiting M codes.
When this signal becomes "0":
M codes setting by parameters Nos.8114 and 8115 are treated as waiting M codes of
high-speed type.
NOTE
This signal cannot be changed during operating a program.
The state of signal at cycle start is kept.
No-wait signal
NOWT<G0063.1> (for path common signal interface)
NMWT<Gn063.7> (for path individual signal interface)
[Function] Specifies whether to synchronize the paths by the waiting M code or not.
- 1193 -
[Operation] When this signal turns to "1", inter-path synchronization by the M code is not performed.
The waiting M code specified in a machining program is ignored.
When this signal turns to "0", inter-paths synchronization by the M code is performed.
When the waiting M code is specified in one path, the CNC waits for the corresponding
M code of another path to be issued, then starts executing the next block.
Waiting signal
WATO<F0063.6> (for path common signal interface)
WATO<Fn063.6> (for path individual signal interface)
[Function] Indicates that the M code is waiting for another path.
[Output cond.] These signals are "1" as long as:
- A path is waiting for another path. That is, the signal stays "1" for the period from
when the path issues the M code for waiting to when another path issues the
corresponding M code.
This signal is "0" as long as:
- Neither of the paths is waiting for the other.
NOTE
1. Waiting signal might not be output when waiting is released in a
very short time.
2. Waiting signal might keep being output at 16ms or less, just after
waiting has been released.
Parameter
8114 Top number of waiting M codes of high-speed type

[Data type] 2-word
[Valid data range] 0, 100 to 99999999
Set the top number of waiting M codes of high-speed type.
Waiting M codes of high-speed type cannot be used when the setting value is 0 or out of
range.
8115 Number of waiting M codes of high-speed type

[Data type] word
Set the number of waiting M codes of high-speed type.
Waiting M codes of high-speed type cannot be used when the setting value is 0 or out of
range.
NOTE
Set the range of waiting M codes of high-speed type not to overlap
with the range of other waiting M codes. The M codes are regarded
as waiting M codes of high-speed type if overlapping.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11279 HMA

[Data type] Bit
- 1194 -
#7 HMA When waiting M codes of high-speed are specified during Nano smoothing, Relation of
cutter compensation, :
0: alarm occurs.
1: alarm not occurs.
NOTE
1 Processing time of waiting M codes of high-speed type during
Nano smoothing, Relation of cutter compensation is equal with
waiting M codes setting by parameter No.8110 and 8111 when
setting this parameter to 1.
2 Waiting M codes of high-speed type during Nano smoothing,
Relation of cutter compensation are treated with non-buffering and
non-movement block when setting this parameter to 1. Please note
enough about the function which changes operation by the
non-movement block (For example, cutter compensation and tool
nose radius compensation or etc.)
Alarm and message

PS0051 MISSING MOVE AFTER CNR/CHF Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the
block next to the chamfering or corner R block. Modify the
program.
PS0160 MISMATCH WAITING M-CODE 1. When different M codes were specified in path 1 and path
2 as waiting M codes without a P command.
2. When the waiting M codes were not the same even though
the P commands were the same.
3. When the waiting M codes were the same and the P
commands were not the same (This case occurs when a P
command was specified with binary value.)
4. When the number lists in the P commands contain a
different number even though the waiting M codes were
the same (This case occurs when a P command was
specified by combining path numbers.)
5. When a waiting M code without a P command (2-path
waiting) and a waiting M code with a P command
(3-or-more-path waiting) were specified at the same time
6. When a waiting M code without a P command was
specified for 3 or more paths.
7. When waiting was executed between waiting M codes of
high-speed type and waiting M codes of high-speed type
which are treated as normal waiting M codes.
8. When waiting M codes of high-speed type were specified
as waiting function by specifying start point.
PS0161 ILLEGAL P OF WAITING M-CODE 1. When the value of address P was negative.
2. When a P value inappropriate for the system configuration
was specified.
3. When a waiting M code without a P command (2-path
waiting) was specified in the system having 3 or more
paths.
- 1195 -

PS0312 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN DIRECT Direct input of drawing dimensions was commanded in an
DRAWING DIMENSIONS invalid format.
PROGRAMMING An attempt was made to specify an invalid G code during
direct input of drawing dimensions.
Two or more blocks not to be moved exist in consecutive
commands that specify direct input of drawing dimensions.
Although non-use of commas (,) (bit 4 of parameter No. 3405
= 1) was specified for direct input of drawing dimensions, a
comma was specified.
PS0343 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN NANO 1. G43, G44, or G49 was commanded during Nano
SMOOTHING smoothing.
2. Waiting M codes of high-speed type were commanded
during Nano smoothing when setting bit 7 (HMA) of
parameter No.11279 to 1.
- 1196 -
8.4 INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH PATH (T SERIES)

T
Overview
When tool posts on individual paths machine the same workpiece simultaneously, the tool posts can
approach each other very closely. If the tool posts interfere with each other due to a program error or any
other setting error, a serious damage such as a tool or machine destruction can occur.
The function "interference check for each path" decelerates and stops the tool posts on individual paths
before they actually make contact with each other if a command is issued and they will interfere with
each other as the result.
NOTE
Tool post 2
Tool post 1
Fig. 8.4 (a)
The contours and shapes of the tool posts on individual paths are checked to determine whether or not an
interference occurs.
The interference between loader path cannot be checked by this function.
Explanation
- Data Setting for the Interference check for each path
To make a path interference check, data including the relationships between the tool posts on individual
paths and interference forbidden areas (that is, tool shapes) needs to be set. The method of such data
setting is described below.
- Setting the positions for reference points of tool posts on individual paths
X described below is the axis for which 1 (X-axis of the three basic axes) is set in parameter No. 1022
and Z is the axis for which 3 (Z-axis of the three basic axes) is set in the parameter. If an invalid value is
set in this parameter, a path interference check is not made.
- 1197 -
(1) Setting the reference points for a two-path interference check

When bit 7 (IFP) of parameter No. 8140 is set to 0, a two-path interference check is made.
When reference point return operation is completed with all axes (X1, Z1, X2, Z2), the reference point of
tool post 1 is set at the origin of the ZX plane coordinate system. At this time, the position of the
reference point of tool post 2 is set in a parameter.
Tool post 2
Reference point
+X
ζ ε
+Z
Reference point
Tool post 1
Fig. 8.4 (b)
In the ZX plane coordinate system at the origin of which the reference point of tool post 1 is set, set the X
coordinate (ε) of the reference point of tool post 2 in parameter No. 8151, and its Z coordinate (ζ) in
parameter No. 8152.
The unit of setting is the least command increment. For an axis subject to diameter specification, a
diameter value is to be specified.
Measure (ε) and (ζ) when reference point return operation is completed with the four axes (X1, Z1, X2,
Z2) (when the tools are in their reference points). When relative coordinate parameters Nos. 8151 and
8152 of the tool posts are to be updated, reference point return operation must always be completed with
the four axes beforehand. Otherwise, the internally memorized relational positions of the tool posts are
not updated to new parameter values.
- Setting the relationship between the coordinate systems for a two-path

interference check
Set the relationship between the coordinate systems of the two tool posts using TY0 and TY1 (bits 0 and
1 of parameter No. 8140), with tool post 1 used as the reference.
- 1198 -
<1> When TY1=0 and TY0=0 <2> When TY1=0 and TY0=1
+X +X +X
Tool post 2
Tool post 1 Tool post 2
Tool post 1
+Z +Z
+Z
<3> When TY1=1and TY0=0 <4> When TY1=1 and TY0=1
+X +X
+Z Tool post 2 Tool post 1

+Z
+Z +Z
+X +X
Fig. 8.4 (c)
- Setting the interference forbidden area (setting common to conventional and

multipath specifications)
An interference forbidden area is set using a combination of two rectangular areas. The examples are
shown below.
(Example 1)
Area 1
Area 1
Area 2 Area 2
or
Fig. 8.4 (d)
(Example 2)
Area 2
Area 1
Fig. 8.4 (e)
- 1199 -
The relative coordinates of the upper and lower ends (points A and B and points C and D shown below)
of each of two rectangles are set, with the reference position of the tool post set as the origin.
A (X1, Z1)
+X
Area 1
B (I1, K1) C (X2, Z2)
Area 2
X1 > I1
+Z Z1 > K1
Reference X2 > I2
position Z2 > K2
D (I2, K2)
Fig. 8.4 (f)
Display and setting of an interference forbidden area in a multipath

interference check
Display and set tool figure data (interference forbidden area) by performing the following operations:
(1) With the path selection signal, select a path for which an interference forbidden area is to be
displayed and set in a multipath interference check.
(2) Press the function key .
(3) Press the chapter selection soft key [TOOL FIGURE].
(4) Display the screen including a tool number for which data is to be set.
Method 1: Switch the screen display by pressing the page key or cursor key.
Method 2: Enter a tool number to be set then press the [NO.SRH] soft key.
Fig. 8.4 (g)
(5) With the cursor keys, move the cursor to data to be set.
(When setting data for point A, move the cursor to X and Z. When setting data for point B, move the
cursor to I and K.)
(6) Enter the coordinate values of point A or point B by using numeric keys.
(The decimal point can also be entered.)
Enter the coordinate values of point A or point B by using numeric keys.
(The decimal point can also be entered.)
- 1200 -
+X
A (X, Z)
+Z
X>I
Reference position
Z>K
B (I, K)
Fig. 8.4 (h)
(7) By pressing the soft key [INPUT], the entered coordinate values are set.
(To add an entered value to the already set data, press the soft key [+INPUT].)
NOTE
Tool number
Tool figure data needs to be set for each tool number. A tool number used
here means an offset number. When both of geometry offset and wear offset
are used, a tool number corresponds to a wear offset number. When multiple
offset numbers are used for the same tool, the same data needs to be set as
tool figure data.
- Conditions for Making a Path Interference Check

A path interference check is made when conditions listed below are satisfied.
(1) Common conditions

- Bit 4 (IFE) of parameter No. 8140 for enabling the path interference check function is set to 0.
- The X- and Z-axes of the three basic axes are set for parameter No. 1022 for individual paths for
which a path interference check is to be made.
- After power is turned on, reference point return operation is completed with all axes. (When an
absolute-position detector is used, the matching between a machine position and absolute-position
detector position must be completed.)
- Offset numbers other than 0 are specified using T codes for tool posts on the paths for which a path
interference check is made.
- Values are input in either one or both of the areas of the tool shape data corresponding to the
specified tool number and the relationships among the values are X > I and Z > K.
- When manual mode is used, bit 3 (IFM) of parameter No. 8140 for enabling the tool post
interference check function in manual mode is set to 1.
(2) When the interference check conditions are satisfied

When all conditions for making a path interference check are satisfied, the
path-interference-check-in-progress signal is output to the PMC.
WARNING
To make a path interference check, the tool number for which tool shape data is
input must agree with the programmed tool number. An interference check
cannot be made correctly if the tool is selected by manual operation or if no tool
select command is specified at power-on.
Signal
Path interference check in progress signal TICHK<F0064.6>
[Function] Informs whether a path interference check is in progress.
- 1201 -
[Output cond.] This signal goes to "1" when:

- All conditions necessary to perform a path interference check on the tool posts of the
first and second paths have been satisfied.
This signal goes to "0" when:
- Any one of the conditions necessary to perform a path interference check on the tool
posts of the first and second paths have not been satisfied.
Path interference alarm signal TIALM<F0064.7>

[Function] Informs whether an alarm has occurred due to a path interference check.
[Output cond.] This signal goes to "1" when:
- The two tool posts are judged to interfere with each other while a path interference
check is in progress on the tool posts of the first and second paths.
This signal goes to "0" when:
- The two tool posts are judged not to interfere with each other while a path
interference check is in progress on the tool posts of the first and second paths.
- A path interference check is not performed (the path interference check signal
TICHK is "0")
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0064 TIALM TICHK
Caution
NOTE
1 If, during a path interference check, the tool posts of the two paths are judged to
have interfered with each other, both the paths are decelerated to a stop and the
control unit enters the alarm state. If this occurs, the path interference alarm
signal TIALM <F0064.7> is set to "1" to notify that an alarm has occurred in a
path interference check.
2 If an alarm occurs due to a path interference check, first switch to manual mode,
manually retract the tool post of the path in which the alarm occurred to a
position without interference, then perform a reset to cancel the alarm on the
control unit. By manually retracting the tool post, the TIALM signal <G0064.7>
will become "0" at the point when the tool post associated with the interference is
judged not to interfere. (This can be used as a guideline: If, after a tool post has
interfered, retracting it manually, you have only to retract it until the TIALM signal
<G0064.7> becomes "0".)
3 If an alarm occurs due to a path interference check, the axis and direction of
movement that were assumed at that time will be stored, so that the tool can no
longer be moved in the stored direction along the stored axis until the alarm on
the control unit is canceled with a reset. (Any start that will result in further
interference will be prohibited.)
- 1202 -
NOTE
4 If an interference alarm occurs, the tool post will stop before the interference
position if bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300 is set to 1.
If this parameter is set to 0, the CNC and the machine system will stop
somewhat later than the correct time, the positions at which they actually stop
will be closer to the other tool post that the interference position specified in tool
figure data. For safety, therefore, the tool figure data must be somewhat larger
than necessary. The excess distance L may be calculated from the rapid
traverse rate.
L = (Rapid traverse rate) x 1/7500
If, for example, the rapid traverse rate is 15 m/min, the figure data must be larger
by about 2 mm.
5 The interference between loader path cannot be checked by this function.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1300 BFA

#7 BFA When the stored stroke check 1, 2, or 3 alarm is issued, an interference alarm is issued
with the inter-path interference check function (lathe system), or a chuck/tail stock barrier
(lathe system) alarm is issued:
0: The tool stops after entering the prohibited area.
1: The tool stops before the prohibited area.
NOTE
1. This parameter is valid even in AI advanced preview control (M
Series) / AI contour control.
2. This parameter is invalid for the slave axis under axis synchronous
control.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ZCL IFE IFM IT0 TY1 TYO
8140

[Data type] Bit
- 1203 -
#0 TY0
#1 TY1 This parameter sets the coordinate system relationship between two tool posts based on
the tool post of path 1.
(1) When TY1=0 and TY0=0 (2) When TY1=0 and TY0=1
+X +X +X
Tool post 2
Tool post 1
+Z +Z
+Z
(3) When TY1=1 and TY0=0 (4) When TY1=1 and TY0=1
+X +X
+Z Tool post 2 Tool post 1

+Z
+Z
Tool post 1 Tool post 2 +Z
+X +X
Fig. 8.4 (i)
#2 IT0 When offset number 0 is specified by the T code,

0: Checking interference between paths is stopped until an offset number other than 0
is specified by the next T code.
1: Checking interference between paths is continued according to the previously
specified offset number.
#3 IFM In manual mode, a interference check between paths is:

0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
#4 IFE Interference check between paths is:

0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
#5 ZCL Specifies whether interference along the Z axis is checked while checking interference
between paths.
0: Checked.
1: Not checked (Only interference along the X axis is checked.)
Distance along the X axis between the reference positions of tool posts 1 and 2
8151
Distance along the Z axis between the reference positions of tool posts 1 and 2
8152

- 1204 -
[Data type] Real
[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
These parameters are used for checking the interference between two paths.
Each of these parameters sets the distance between the tool posts of two paths.
Tool post 2
Reference
position
+X
ζ ε
+Z
Reference
position
Tool post 1
In the Z-X plane coordinate system with its origin at the represent position of tool
post 1, set the X component value ε of the reference position of tool post 2 in
parameter No. 8151 and set the Z component value ζ in parameter No. 8152.
Fig. 8.4 (j)
WARNING
After modifying the parameter values, perform a manual reference
position return operation for both tool posts. Otherwise, the
internally stored positional relationships of the two tool posts are
not updated to the newly set parameter values.
Alarm and message

PS0169 ILLEGAL TOOL GEOMETRY DATA Incorrect tool figure data in interference check. Set correct
data, or select correct tool figure data.
OT0508 INTERFERENCE:+ A tool moving in the positive direction along the n axis has
fouled another tool post.
OT0509 INTERFERENCE:- A tool moving in the negative direction along the n axis has
fouled another tool post.
Alarms will occur individually for the axes associated with interference.
- 1205 -
WARNING
WARNING
After setting parameters for the interference check function, tool figure data
(contact prohibited area), etc., be sure to enter manual mode (parameter
settings must be such that an interference check is enabled even in manual
mode), let the tool post of each path interfere in all directions and confirm that a
normal interference area has been set.
- 1206 -
8.5 BALANCE CUTTING (T SERIES)

T
Overview
When a thin workpiece is to be machined as shown below, a precision machining can be achieved by
machining each side of the workpiece with a tool simultaneously; this function can prevent the workpiece
from warpage that can result when only one side is machined at a time (see the Fig. 8.5 (a)). When both
sides are machined at the same time, the movement of one tool must be in phase with that of the other tool.
Otherwise, the workpiece can vibrate, resulting in poor machining. With this function, the movement of
one tool post can be easily synchronized with that of the other tool post.
NOTE
Tool post 2
Tool post 1
Fig. 8.5 (a)
Specifying G68, which turns balance cutting mode on, causes balance cutting to be performed with the
tool post of path 1 and that of path 2.
NOTE
1 Balance cutting is not performed in dry run or machine lock state. G68 or G69
specified for one tool post is synchronized with G68 or G69 specified for the
other tool post, however.
2 In the balance cut mode, G68 specified for one tool post is not synchronized with
G68 specified for the other tool post. In the balance cut cancel mode, G69
specified for one tool post is not synchronized with G69 specified for the other
tool post.
3 Balance cutting is not performed in a block in which 0 is specified for the travel
distance.
4 Balance cutting is not performed when rapid traverse is specified.
5 To use this function, set 0 in bit 0 (NVC) of parameter No. 8137. Also, when this
function is used, mirror image for double turrets cannot be used. To use mirror
image for double turrets, set 1 in bit 0 (NVC) of parameter No. 8137.
- 1207 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NVC
8137
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#0 NVC Balance cutting is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
NOTE
When balance cutting is used (this parameter is 0), the mirror
image of facing tool posts cannot be used. To use the mirror image
of facing tool posts, set this parameter to 1.
Caution
CAUTION
1 Balance cut only starts cutting feed on both tool posts at the same time; it does
not maintain synchronization thereafter. To synchronize all the movements of
both tool posts, the setting for both tool posts, such as the travel distance and
feedrate, must be the same. Override and interlock can be applied
independently to both tool posts. The settings for both tool posts that are related
to override and interlock must also be the same to perform balance cutting.
2 After feed hold is applied during execution of balance cutting for both tool posts,
balance cutting is not performed at the restart. Balance cutting is performed
when the next move command is executed for both tool posts.
Note
NOTE
1 Time delay before the pulse distribution of both tool posts is started is 2 msec or
shorter.
2 Overlap is invalid. In the balance cut mode, synchronization is established at the
start of each move block in which cutting is specified, so movement can
momentarily stop.
3 In the balance cut mode, continuous thread cutting overlap is also invalid.
Perform continuous thread cutting in the balance cut cancel mode.
4 To establish synchronization at the start of pulse distribution in a block in which
thread cutting is specified, the same Position coder must be selected.
5 The cancel mode (G69) is unconditionally set by a reset.
6 When the option "mirror image for double turrets" is selected, the balance cut
function cannot be used. To use "mirror image for double turrets", set 1 in bit 0
(NVC) of parameter No. 8137 in order to disable "balance cut".
- 1208 -
Alarm and message

PS0163 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G68/G69 G68 and G69 are not independently commanded in balance cut.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Lathe system) Balance cutting (G68,G69)
(B-64304EN-1)
- 1209 -
8.6 SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE CONTROL

Overview
Multi-path control, which has multiple independent control paths built in, is used for such purposes as
controlling multiple turrets of a complex lathe. The axes (such as X1-and Z1-axes) belonging to path 1
are controlled by commands in path 1, and the axes (such as X2- and Z2-axes) belonging to path 2 are
controlled by commands in path 2.
NOTE
- Independent control in each path
Turret 1
X1 Machining is performed
by a path 2 program.
Z1
Workpiece 2
Workpiece 1
X2 Z2
Machining is performed
by a path 1 program. Turret 2
Fig. 8.6 (a)
This function enables synchronous control between paths or within a path, composite control between
paths, and superimposed control between paths, as explained below.
- Synchronous control
- Synchronization of an axis in one path with an axis in the other path
(Example)
Synchronization of the Z1-axis (master) with the Z2-axis (slave)
Turret 1
X1
Workpiece
Z1 Z2 (synchronized with
the Z1-axis)
Machining is performed by a path 1 program.
Fig. 8.6 (b)
- 1210 -
- Synchronization of an axis in one path with another axis in the same path
(Example)
Synchronization of the Z1-axis (master) with the B1-axis (slave)
Turret 1
X1
Tail stock
Workpiece
Z1 B1 (synchronized with the Z1-axis)
Fig. 8.6 (c)
- Composite control
- Interchanging move commands for an axis in one path with those for an axis in the other path.
(Example)
Interchanging commands between the X1- and X2-axes
→ Control both X2- and Z1-axes by commands in a path 1 program
Control both X1- and Z2-axes by commands in a path 2 program
Machining is performed Turret 1

X1
Z1
Workpiece 1
Workpiece 2
Z2
X2
Turret 2
Fig. 8.6 (d)
8.6.1 Synchronous Control

An axis in one path can be synchronized with another axis in the same path or an axis in another path.
This is done by issuing the same move commands for one axis (synchronous master axis) to another axis
(synchronous slave axis). Using bit 0 (SMRx) of parameter No. 8162 can cause the slave axis to move in
the direction opposite to that of the master axis. It is possible to place either the master or slave axis in a
parking state. The term parking here means to discontinue giving move commands to a servo system. No
coordinates are updated in the parking state. However that absolute and relative coordinates can be
updated using bit 2 (PKUx) of parameter No. 8162.
- 1211 -
NOTE
This function is included in the option "Synchronous and composite control".
To use this function, the above option is required.
Explanation
- Setting
Specify which axis is to be the synchronous master axis, with parameter No. 8180, using the path number
and the axis number.
(Example)
For an axis configuration in which all paths consist of X, Z, and Y axes
To synchronize the Z2-axis (slave) with the Z1-axis (master):
Parameter No. 8180z of path 2 = 102
To synchronize the X2-axis (slave) with the X1-axis (master):
Parameter No. 8180x of path 2 = 101
To synchronize the Y1-axis (slave) with the X1-axis (master):
Parameter No. 8180y of path 1 = 101
- Programming
Both before and after the M codes for a start and a cancellation of synchronous control, specify a waiting
M code.
Master axis path Slave axis path
: :
M100 ; M100;........................... Waiting
M200;........................... Start of synchronous control
M101; M101;........................... Waiting
: :
Independent operation Independent operation
: :
M100; M100;........................... Waiting
M201; ......................... Cancellation of synchronous control
M101; M101;........................... Waiting
: :
- Signal operation
When synchronization begins or ends (when an M code is issued, for example), the synchronous control
axis selection signals SYNC1 to SYNC8<Gn138> for the slave axis (from the PMC to the CNC) are
changed from "0" to "1" (to begin synchronization) or from "1" to "0" (to terminate synchronization). To
place an axis in a parking state, a parking signal PK1 to PK8<Gn122> is set to "1" for the target axis.
- Examples of applications
The following operations can be performed by using the synchronization functions together with the
parking function, which causes move commands for an axis to be ignored and keeps the axis at a rest.
(1) Moving an axis in one path in synchronization with an axis in the other path (Both master and slave
axes move.)
Example 1)
Synchronizing the Z2-axis (slave) with the Z1-axis (master) (machining with both ends of a
workpiece chucked)
- 1212 -
Turret 1
X1
Z1 Z2 (synchronized with the Z1-axis)
Fig. 8.6.1 (a)
Example 2)
Synchronizing the X2- and Z2-axes (master) with the X1- and Z1-axes (slave) (balance cutting)
Z1
Turret 1
X1
X2
Turret 2
Z2
Fig. 8.6.1 (b)
Example 3)
Synchronizing the B1-axis (slave) (tail stock axis) with the Z1-axis (master)
Turret 1
X1
Tail stock
Workpiece 1
Z1 B1 (synchronized with the Z1-axis)
Fig. 8.6.1 (c)
(2) Placing the movement along the synchronous master axis in the stopped state using a parking signal
is referred to as master parking. In this state, the tool will move along the slave axes only. In contrast,
placing the synchronous slave axes in the stopped state is referred to as slave parking. In this state,
the tool will move along the master axis only. This makes it possible to control a single motor from
both paths 1 and 2.
- 1213 -
Example 4)
Sharing one motor with the Z1- and Z2-axes (assuming that the motor is linked to the Z1-axis)
Master axis parking
Turret 1
X1
The X2- and Z1-axes are moved by commands

in a path 2 program (by synchronizing the
Z1-axis (slave) with the Z2-axis (master)). At this
point, the Z2-axis (master) is kept in a parking
state.
X2
Z1 Turret 2
Fig. 8.6.1 (d)
Slave axis parking

Turret 1
Z1 X1
The X1- and Z1-axes are moved by commands in

a path 1 program (by synchronizing the Z2-axis
(slave) with the Z1-axis (master)). At this point,
the Z2-axis (slave) is kept in a parking state.
X2
Turret 2
Fig. 8.6.1 (e)
Because the coordinates of both Z1- and Z2-axes are updated, move commands can be executed
immediately, without resetting up the coordinate system, when the synchronization state is switched.
Parking causes the positional relations between machine, absolute, and relative coordinates to shift. After
reference position return, therefore, set the workpiece coordinate system.
- Reference position return and its check during synchronous control
If a reference position return command is issued for a synchronous master axis during synchronous
control, it is executed normally for the master axis, but the slave axis does not return to its reference
position (the slave axis only moves in synchronization with the reference position return of the master
axis).
An exception is for automatic reference position return (G28) issued when the master axis is in a parking
state, in which case the amount of movement is calculated so that the slave axis returns to its reference
position provided that a reference position return has been carried for the slave axis. If the reference
position of the slave axis has not been established, alarm PS0354 “THE G28 WAS INSTRUCTED IN
WITH THE REF POS NOT FIXED IN SYNC MODE” will result.
If, in Cs axis synchronous control, the master axis is not in the parking state and the reference position of
the master axis has not been established, a reference position return operation will be performed in
reference to the master axis machine position, with the G28 command for the master axis.
- 1214 -
If the master axis is in the parking state and the reference position of the slave axis has not been
established, a reference position return operation will be performed in reference to the slave axis machine
position, with the G28 command for the master axis.
If more than one slave axis belongs to one master axis, a reference position return command is executed
so that the lowest-numbered slave axis returns to its reference position. If the master axis in one path is
subjected to both synchronization with an axis in the same path and synchronization with an axis in the
other path simultaneously, the lowest-numbered slave axis in the two paths is moved to the reference
position.
A return to the second (third or fourth) reference position by the G30 command works in the same way as
G28. In other words, usually only the master axis moves to the second (third or fourth) reference position.
If the master axis is parking, the lowest-numbered axis is caused to move to its second (third or fourth)
reference position.
If a reference position return check (G27) is specified during synchronous control, the master and slave
axes move to the specified position. Upon completion of movement, a check is made to see whether the
master axis is at its reference position (no check is made for the salve axes) unless the master axis is in a
parking state, in which case a check is made upon completion of positioning to see whether the
lowest-numbered slave axis is at its reference position.
- Out-of-synchronization detection
The term synchronous control used here only refers to an operation in which the same move command is
issued to multiple different servo systems at one time. Note that synchronous control does not involve
out-of-synchronization compensation, in which the positional deviation between multiple servo motors is
constantly checked and one of the servo motors is subjected to compensation to reduce the deviation.
However, using bit 1 (SERx) of parameter No. 8162 can specify detection of out-of-synchronization.
When the out-of-synchronization state is detected, the synchronization mode is canceled immediately
using bit 6 (SESx) of parameter No. 8169, alarm SV0407, “EXCESS ERROR” is issued and the servo
ready signal is turned off, or the excess synchronization error signal SEO <Fn559> is output.
- Automatic setting of a workpiece coordinate system

When synchronous control is started in a workpiece coordinate system, it is possible to specify the
workpiece coordinate system automatically. When synchronous control for a workpiece coordinate
system is terminated, it is possible to return the workpiece coordinate system to ordinary machining (not
synchronous control). The explanation of the workpiece coordinate system used during synchronous
control follows. When synchronous control is used to move an axis differently from the way originally
specified, for example, the master axis may be placed in a parking state, while the slave axis is allowed to
move. In such a case, it will be convenient if a coordinate system that indicates the current position of the
slave axis is used as a workpiece coordinate system for the master axis. Conventionally, this workpiece
coordinate system must be specified by program when synchronous control is started, because the
workpiece coordinate system does not originally belong to the master axis. This automatic workpiece
coordinate system setting function for synchronous control sets up this workpiece coordinate system
automatically. This function can also resume the original workpiece coordinate system for the master axis
automatically. Note that the workpiece coordinates of a salve axis can be automatically set through
appropriate parameter setting at the end of synchronous control only.
- Setting and commands

In addition to setting ordinary synchronous control, parameters must be specified as follows:
(1) To set up a workpiece coordinate system for synchronous control automatically when starting
synchronous control
Set bit 1 (SPMx) of parameter No. 8163 to 1.
Set parameter No. 8185 with the coordinates of the slave axis reference position relative to the
coordinates of the master axis when the master axis is at the reference position.
- 1215 -
(2) To resume the ordinary workpiece coordinate system automatically when terminating synchronous
control
Set bit 2 (SPSx) of parameter No. 8163 to 1. (Only the parameter of the master axis.)
Set parameter No. 1250 with the master axis coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system when
the master axis is at the reference position.
This synchronous control can be specified using the synchronous control axis selection signals
(SYNC1 to SYNC8) similarly to the ordinary synchronous control. When the signals are raised to
start synchronous control, a workpiece coordinate system for the master axis is automatically set up.
When the signals are dropped to terminate synchronous control, the original workpiece coordinate
system for the master axis is resumed automatically.
- Workpiece coordinate calculation method

(1) Workpiece coordinate system for synchronous control
(Master axis workpiece coordinate value) = (parameter No. 8185 for the master axis)
± (slave axis machine coordinate value) .............. <1>
+ (master axis machine coordinate value)............ <2>
<1> +: Bit 4 (SCDx) of parameter No. 8163 for the master axis = 0
-: Bit 4 (SCDx) of parameter No. 8163 for the master axis = 1
<2> Bit 3 (SCMx) of parameter No. 8163 for the master axis = 1 only
(2) Workpiece coordinate system for ordinary operation

(Master axis workpiece coordinate value)
= (parameter No. 1250 for the master axis) +(master axis machine coordinate value)
Caution
CAUTION
The same least command and input increments must apply to both master and
slave axes.
Note
NOTE
1 If more than one slave axis is synchronized with one master axis, the master
axis is set with the workpiece coordinate system that corresponds to the current
position of the first slave axis that is synchronized with the master axis.
2 A coordinate system can also be set with consideration given to tool offset,
through appropriate parameter settings. So, the coordinate system is set up
normally even when tool geometry compensation is applied.
8.6.2 Composite Control

Move commands can be interchanged between an axis in one path and an axis in the other path. In other
words, when a machining program is executed for one path, actual machining can be performed with an
axis in the other path. Coordinate systems can also be switched automatically between independent
control and composite control.
NOTE
This function is included in the option "Synchronous and composite control".
To use this function, the above option is required.
- 1216 -
Explanation
- Setting
Specify which axis is to interchange with which axis, with parameter No. 8183, using the path numbers
and the axis numbers.
Example)
Between the Z1- and Z2-axes:
Between the X1- and X2-axes:
Parameter No. 8183x of path 2 = 101
Between the X1- and Y2-axes:
To set up coordinate systems automatically when composite control begins or ends, set bits 4 (MPMx)
and 5 (MPSx) of parameter No. 8162 to 1, and specify the positional relationship between the coordinate
systems in parameter No. 8184.
- Programming
Both before and after the M codes for a start and a cancellation of composite control, specify a waiting M
code.
Composite control source Composite control destination
: :
M100 ; M100;......................................Waiting
M210;......................................Start of composite control
M101; M101;......................................Waiting
: :
: :
M100; M100;......................................Waiting
M211; ....................................Cancellation of composite control
M101; M101;......................................Waiting
: :
- Signal operation
When you want to start or cancel composite control (when you specify an M code, for example), change
the composite control axis select signal between MIX1 and MIX8<Gn128> for the axis subject to
composite control that is specified with parameter No. 8183 (the signal being sent from the PMC to the
CNC) from "0" to "1" (to start composite control) and from "1" to "0" (to cancel composite control).
Suppose that a machine has the X1- and Z1-axes belonging to path 1 and the X2- and Z2-axes belonging
to path 2 and that a workpiece moves along the Z1- and Z2-axes as directed by move commands. The
following examples interchange commands between the X1- and X2-axes.
- 1217 -
(1) Independent control
Turret 1
X1 Machining is performed by a path 2 program.
Workpiece 2
Workpiece 1
Z1 Z2
X2
Turret 2
Fig. 8.6.2 (a)
(2) Composite control
Turret 1
Machining is performed by a path 1 program. X1
Workpiece 2
Workpiece 1
Z1 Z2
X2
Turret 2
Fig. 8.6.2 (b)
During composite control, the X2- and Z1-axes are moved by a path 1 program, and the workpiece
coordinates of the X-axis in path 1 indicates the position of turret 2. Similarly, the X1- and Z2-axes are
moved by a path 2 program, and the workpiece coordinates of the X-axis in path 2 indicates the position
of turret 1.
- Spindle control
The composite control function does not switch the spindle speed command or the feed per rotation
command based on feedback pulses from the position coder. Therefore, the spindle speed command and
feedback pulses should be switched using the spindle command selection signals and spindle feedback
selection signals.
- 1218 -
- Tool offset during composite control

At the time of a switch between independent control and composite control, the preset offset value, tool
nose radius compensation/cutter compensation/tool length amounts will not be changed. After a control
switch, you must issue a new T/D/H code command to set an offset value again, if required.
- Reference position return during composite control

If G28 is issued to specify an automatic reference position return for an axis in one path during composite
control, an amount of movement is calculated so that the associated axis in the other path can move to the
reference position. In this case, the reference position for that axis must have already been established. If
the reference position of the axis of the other path subject to composite control has not been established,
alarm PS0359 “THE G28 WAS INSTRUCTED IN WITH THE REF POS NOT FIXED IN COMP
MODE” will result.
A manual reference position return is not allowed.
However, that during Cs axis composite control, a manual reference position return is allowed. If, after
the establishment of a reference position and before a switch to composite control, you want to enter the
state in which no reference position is established, set bit 5 (CRZ) of parameter No. 8161 to 1.
- Automatic workpiece coordinate system setting

By parameter setting, a workpiece coordinate system to be used during composite control can be
automatically set when composite control is started. When composite control is terminated, the workpiece
coordinate system can be automatically returned to the workpiece coordinate system used for ordinary
machining not under composite control.
A workpiece coordinate system to be used during composite control is explained below. For example,
when a movement is made on axes other than the specified axes by using composite control, it is
convenient to use a coordinate system that indicates the current position on the movement axes, as a
workpiece coordinate system for the specified axes. Such a workpiece coordinate system differs from the
original workpiece coordinate system for the specified axes, so that the coordinate system needs to be set
by programming when composite control is started. Moreover, the workpiece coordinate system needs to
be returned to the original workpiece coordinate system for the specified axes when composite control is
terminated. With this function, these coordinate systems can be set automatically.
Setting, command
When composite control is started, a workpiece coordinate system to be used during composite
control is automatically set for axes with bit 4 (MPMx) of parameter No. 8162 set to 1. When
composite control is terminated, the workpiece coordinate system can be automatically returned to
the workpiece coordinate system used for ordinary machining not under composite control in
connection with the axes with bit 5 (MPSx) of parameter No. 8162 set to 1.
To specify this function, the composite control axis change selection signals MIX1 to MIX32 are
used as in the case of ordinary composite control. When composite control is started by turning on
signals, a workpiece coordinate system for the composite axes is automatically set. Similarly, when
composite control is canceled by turning off signals, a workpiece coordinate system for the
composite axes is automatically set.
Workpiece coordinate calculation method

1) When no workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59, including additional workpiece coordinate
systems) is used (bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No.8136 is 1), a coordinate value calculated from the
coordinate value (parameter No. 8184) of the reference position on the composite control target axis
in the workpiece coordinate system of the local axis and the machine coordinate value of the
composite control target axis is set in a coordinate system at composite control start time.
In a coordinate system at composite control termination time, a coordinate value calculated from the
coordinate value (parameter No. 1250) of the reference position used for automatic coordinate
system setting on the local axis and the machine coordinate value on the local axis is set.
The method of coordinate value calculation is described below.
- 1219 -
(Example)
Composite control where the X1-axis and X2-axis are replaced with each other
X1m
ΔZ2m
Z1m
Path-1 reference X1
position ΔX2m
Path-2
workpiece
coordinate
system origin
Path-1 workpiece Z1 Z2
coordinate system origin
ΔX1m Path-2 reference

X2 position
Z2m
ΔZ1m
X2m
Fig. 8.6.2 (c)
The reference position of path 2 in the workpiece coordinate system of path 1 is at (ΔX1m,ΔZ1m).
The reference position of path 1 in the workpiece coordinate system of path 2 is at (ΔX2m,ΔZ2m).
Set ΔX1m in parameter No. 8184x for path 1. Set ΔX2m in parameter No. 8184x for path 2.
When composite control is started, a workpiece coordinate system is set to satisfy the following:
X1 = (Path-1 X-axis setting) ± (X2 machine coordinate value)
+ when bit 6 (MCDx) of parameter No. 8162 for path 1 = 0
− when bit 6 (MCDx) of parameter No. 8162 for path 1 = 1
X2 = (Path 2 X-axis setting) ± (X1 machine coordinate value)
+ when bit 6 (MCDx) of parameter No. 8162 for path 2 = 0
− when bit 6 (MCDx) of parameter No. 8162 for path 2 = 1
When composite control is terminated, a workpiece coordinate system is set to satisfy the following:
X1 = (Parameter No. 1250 for path 1) + (X1 machine coordinate value)
X2 = (Parameter No. 1250 for path 2) + (X2 machine coordinate value)
2) When a workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59, including additional workpiece coordinate
systems) is used (bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No.8136 is 0), workpiece coordinate system preset
operation (equivalent to G92.1 IP 0) is used for setting as described below, instead of coordinate
values based on the calculation method of 1) above.
When composite control is started, the workpiece coordinate system based on specified axes is
preset to a workpiece coordinate system shifted on the specified axes by the currently valid
workpiece origin offset values from the machine origin on the movement axes.
When composite control is terminated, the workpiece coordinate system based on composite axes is
preset to a workpiece coordinate system shifted on the local axes by the currently valid workpiece
origin offset values from the machine origin on the local axes.
- 1220 -
Signals
Synchronous control axis selection signals SYNC1 to SYNC8<Gn138>
[Function] These signals perform synchronous control.
[Operation] When one of these signals becomes "1", the control unit:
Begins synchronous control in such a way that the corresponding axis becomes a slave
axis.
The axis with which the slave axis is synchronized is determined by parameter No. 8180.
Parking signals PK1 to PK8<Gn122>

[Function] These signals place each axis in a parking state.
- Places the corresponding axis in a parking state.
If the corresponding axis is under synchronous control, it enters a parking state
immediately regardless of whether the axis is moving. If a parking signal is set to
"1" without specifying synchronous control, it is ignored.
Composite control axis change selection signals MIX1 to MIX8<Gn128>

[Function] These signals perform composite control.
- Begins composite control over the corresponding axis.
The axis with which the corresponding axis is controlled together is determined by
parameter No. 8183.
NOTE
For bit 1 (MIX) of parameter No. 8166, only a single signal for path
1 is available.
Synchronous/composite/superimposed control under way signals

SYN1O to SYN8O<Fn118>
[Function] These signals indicate each axis is being subjected to ssynchronous, composite, or
superimposed control.
[Output cond.] These signals become "1" under the following condition:
- The corresponding axis is under synchronous, composite, or superimposed control.
These signals become "0" under the following condition:
- The corresponding axis is not under synchronous, composite, or superimposed
control.
CAUTION
Whether each axis is under synchronous or composite control does
not always match whether the corresponding selection signal
(synchronous control axis selection or composite control axis
selection) has been issued or not. For example, if these signals are
set to "1" during an alarm, they are ignored. If a servo alarm occurs
during these types of control, they are terminated automatically.
Before attempting to perform these types of control, always check
the state of these signals.
- 1221 -
Synchronous master axis confirmation signals SYCM1 to SYCM8<Fn341>

[Function] These signals notify whether the corresponding axes are synchronous master axes.
- The corresponding axes are synchronous master axes.
- The corresponding axes are released from synchronous control.
Synchronous slave axis confirmation signals SYCS1 to SYCS8<Fn342>

[Function] These signals notify whether the corresponding axes are synchronous slave axes.
- The corresponding axes are synchronous slave axes.
- The corresponding axes are released from synchronous control.
Composite axis confirmation signals MIXO1 to MIXO8<Fn343>

[Function] These signals notify whether the corresponding axes are composite control axes.
- The corresponding axes are composite control axes.
- The corresponding axes are released from composite control.
Parking axis confirmation signals SMPK1 to SMPK8<Fn346>

[Function] These signals notify whether the corresponding axes are parking axes in synchronous
control.
- The corresponding axes are parking axes in synchronous control.
- The corresponding axes are released from synchronous control or from parking.
Excess synchronization error signals SEO1 to SEO8<Fn559>

[Function] These signals indicate whether excess synchronization error is detected.
[Operation] These signals become "1" under the following condition:
- Synchronization error exceeds the allowable range specified in parameter No. 8181.
- Synchronization error is within the allowable range specified in parameter No. 8181.
NOTE
1 These signals are valid when bit 1 (SERx) of parameter No. 8162 is
set to 1 and bit 6 (SESx) of parameter No. 8169 is set to 1.
2 These signals are output to the slave axis.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn122 PK8 PK7 PK6 PK5 PK4 PK3 PK2 PK1
Gn128 MIX8 MIX7 MIX6 MIX5 MIX4 MIX3 MIX2 MIX1
Gn138 SYNC8 SYNC7 SYNC6 SYNC5 SYNC4 SYNC3 SYNC2 SYNC1
- 1222 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn118 SYN8O SYN7O SYN6O SYN5O SYN4O SYN3O SYN2O SYN1O
Fn341 SYCM8 SYCM7 SYCM6 SYCM5 SYCM4 SYCM3 SYCM2 SYCM1
Fn342 SYCS8 SYCS7 SYCS6 SYCS5 SYCS4 SYCS3 SYCS2 SYCS1
Fn343 MIXO8 MIXO7 MIXO6 MIXO5 MIXO4 MIXO3 MIXO2 MIXO1
Fn346 SMPK8 SMPK7 SMPK6 SMPK5 SMPK4 SMPK3 SMPK2 SMPK1
Fn559 SEO8 SEO7 SEO6 SEO5 SEO4 SEO3 SEO2 SEO1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8136 NWZ
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#0 NWZ Workpiece coordinate system is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8160 NRS SPE NCS

#5 NCS If an overtravel alarm is issued for an axis under synchronous, composite, or

superimposed control, synchronous, composite, or superimposed control is:
0: Released.
1: Not released.
NOTE
If one of these paths is 1, both paths are assumed to be 1.
#6 SPE The synchronization deviation is:

0: The difference between the positioning deviation of the master axis and that of the
slave axis.
1: The difference between the positioning deviation of the master axis and that of the
slave axis plus the acceleration/deceleration delay.
NOTE
1 When the master and slave axes have different
acceleration/deceleration time constants, set 1.
2 SPE is valid when bit 1 (SERx) of parameter No. 8162 is set to 1.
SPE is used to find a synchronization deviation for comparison with
parameter No. 8181.
- 1223 -
#7 NRS When the system is reset, synchronous, composite, or superimposed control is:
0: Released.
1: Not released.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8161 NSR CRZ NMR

[Data type] Bit
#0 NMR When an axis subject to composite control is placed in servo-off state:

0: Composite control is stopped
1: Composite control is not stopped, provided bit 0 (FUP) of parameter No. 1819 is set
to 1 to disable follow-up for the axis.
#5 CRZ If the state of the composite control signal is switched in composite control on two axes
under Cs contour control, the reference position establishment state of the two axes in
composite control is:
0: Maintained. (The unestablished state is not assumed.)
1: Assumed to be unestablished.
#7 NSR When servo-off occurs with an axis in synchronous control:

0: Synchronous control is canceled.
1: Synchronous control is not canceled if follow-up operation is disabled for the axis
(with bit 0 (FUPx) of parameter No. 1819 set to 1).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8162 MUMx MCDx MPSx MPMx PKUx SERx SMRx

#0 SMRx Synchronous mirror-image control is:

0: Not applied. (The master and slave axes move in the same direction.)
1: Applied. (The master and slave axes move in opposite directions.)
#1 SERx The synchronization deviation is:

0: Not detected.
1: Detected.
NOTE
When both master and slave axes move in synchronization, the
positioning deviations of the corresponding axes are compared with
each other. If the difference is greater than or equal to the value
specified in parameter No. 8181, an alarm occurs. When either axis
is in the parking or machine-locked state, however, the
synchronization deviation is not detected.
#2 PKUx In the parking state,

0: The absolute, relative, and machine coordinates are not updated.
1: The absolute and relative coordinates are updated. The machine coordinates are not
updated.
- 1224 -
NOTE
1 With an axis for which polar coordinate interpolation is specified,
set this parameter to 1. If this parameter is set to 0, a coordinate
shift can occur when a single block stop or feed hold is performed
in the polar coordinate interpolation mode.
2 With an axis that is set to function as a synchronous master axis
and synchronous slave axis at the same time (with bit 1 (SYWx) of
parameter No. 8167), set this parameter to 1.
3 With an axis specified in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
mode, set this parameter to 1. If this parameter is set to 0, the
alarm PS0367 ”3-D CONV. WAS COMMANDED IN SYNC MODE
AS THE PARAMETER PKUx(NO.8162#2) IS 0.” is issued.
4 When specify the G53 command during master parking, set this
parameter to 1.
#4 MPMx When composite control is started, the workpiece coordinate system is:
0: Not set automatically.
1: Set automatically.
NOTE
When the workpiece coordinate system is automatically set at the
start of composite control, it is calculated from the following:
Current machine coordinates and the workpiece coordinates at the
reference point of each axis (parameter No. 8184).
When a workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59, including
additional workpiece coordinate systems) is used (bit 0 (NWZ) of
parameter No. 8136 is 0), however, instead of the coordinate value
obtained by the above calculation, the workpiece coordinate value
obtained by workpiece coordinate system presetting (equivalent to
G92.1 IP 0) in the machine coordinate system of the other axis in
composite control is set.
#5 MPSx When composite control is terminated, the workpiece coordinate system is:
NOTE
When the workpiece coordinate system is automatically set at the
end of composite control, it is calculated from the following: Current
machine coordinates and the workpiece coordinates at the
reference point of each axis under composite control (parameter
No. 1250)
When a workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59, including
additional workpiece coordinate systems) is used (bit 0 (NWZ) of
parameter No. 8136 is 0), however, instead of the coordinate value
obtained by the above calculation, the workpiece coordinate value
obtained by workpiece coordinate system presetting (equivalent to
G92.1 IP 0) in the machine coordinate system of the local axis is
set.
- 1225 -
#6 MCDx The axes to be replaced with each other under composite control have the coordinate
systems placed:
0: In the same direction. Simple composite control is applied. (A movement is made in
the same direction along the corresponding axis.)
1: In opposite directions. Mirror-image composite control is applied. (A movement is
made in the reverse direction along the corresponding axis.)
X1 X2
MCDz MCDx
0 0
Z1 Z2
X1
MCDz MCDx
0 1
Z1 Z2
X2
X1 X2
MCDz MCDx
1 0
Z1 Z2
X1
MCDz MCDx
1 1
Z1 Z2
X2
Fig. 8.6.2 (d)
#7 MUMx In composite control, a move command for the axis:

0: Can be specified.
1: Cannot be specified.
NOTE
Upon the execution of a move command along an axis for which
MUMx is set to 1 during mixed control, alarm PS0353 is issued. For
example, when axis X1 and axis X2 are placed under composite
control, and a command for axis X2 (motor for axis X1) is to be
disabled, set MUMx for path 2 to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8163 NUMx MMIx SMIx SCDx SCMx SPSx SPMx

#1 SPMx When synchronous control is started, automatic workpiece coordinate system setting for
the master axis is
0: Not Performed.
1: Performed.
- 1226 -
NOTE
When a workpiece coordinate system is automatically set at the
start of synchronous control, the workpiece coordinate system is
calculated from the current machine coordinates and the workpiece
coordinates of each axis at the reference position set in parameter
No. 8185.
#2 SPSx When synchronous control terminates, automatic workpiece coordinate system setting for
the master axis is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
NOTE
end of synchronous control, the workpiece coordinate system is
coordinates for each axis at the reference position set in parameter
No. 1250.
#3 SCMx When workpiece coordinates are calculated in synchronous control:

0: The workpiece coordinates are calculated from the machine coordinates of the slave
axis.
1: The workpiece coordinates are calculated from the machine coordinates of the
master axis and slave axis.
#4 SCDx The positive (+) directions of the master axis and slave axis in the coordinate system in
synchronous control are:
0: Identical.
1: Opposite.
Set the parameters SPMx, SPSx, SCMx, and SCDx for the master axis. These settings are
referenced during automatic workpiece coordinate setting for the master axis at the start
of synchronous control.
#5 SMIx In synchronous control, the manual handle interruption amount for the master axis or the
mirror image mode is:
0: Reflected in the slave axis.
1: Not reflected in the slave axis.
When this bit (SMIx) is set to 0

Manual handle interruption :
To the travel distance along the slave axis, the interruption amount of the
master axis is also added.
Mirror image :
When mirror image is applied to the master axis, mirror image is also applied
to the slave axis.
When this bit (SMIx) is set to 1

Manual handle interruption :
To the travel distance along the slave axis, the interruption amount of the
master axis is not added.
Mirror image :
Even when mirror image is applied to the master axis, mirror image is not
applied to the slave axis.
- 1227 -
#6 MMIx For a composite control axis, manual handle interruption under composite control is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
#7 NUMx When neither synchronous control nor composite control is applied, a move command for
the axis is:
0: Not disabled.
1: Disabled.
NOTE
If a move command is specified for an axis with NUMx set to 1
when neither synchronous control nor composite control is applied,
alarm PS0353 is issued.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MCEx MCSx MWEx MWSx
8164
MCEx MCSx

#0 MWSx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting, performed when composite control is
started, a workpiece shift and position offset are:
0: Not considered.
1: Considered.
NOTE
When bit 4 (MPMx) of parameter No. 8162 is set to 1 and
workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59, including additional
workpiece coordinate system) is not used (bit 0 (NWZ) of
parameter No. 8136 is 1), MWSx is enabled.
#1 MWEx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting, performed when composite control is
canceled, a workpiece shift and position offset are:
0: Not considered.
1: Considered.
NOTE
When bit 5 (MPSx) of parameter No. 8162 is set to 1 and
parameter No. 8136 is 1), MWEx is enabled.
#2 MCSx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting, performed when composite control is
started:
0: Parameter No. 8184 and the machine coordinate system of the composite control
target path are used.
1: The absolute coordinate system of the composite control target path is used.
- 1228 -
NOTE
When bit 4 (MPMx) of parameter No. 8162 is set to 1 and
parameter No. 8136 is 1), MCSx is enabled.
#3 MCEx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting, performed when composite control is
canceled:
0: Parameter No. 1250 and the machine coordinate system of the composite control
target path are used.
1: The absolute coordinate system of the composite control target path is used.
NOTE
When bit 5 (MPSx) of parameter No. 8162 is set to 1 and
parameter No. 8136 is 1), MCEx is enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8166 MIX

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#1 MIX For composite control:

0: A new 2-path interface. In this case, set the composite control axis selection signals
MIX1 to MIX8 for the axis that is placed under composite control by parameter No.
8183, from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0.
1: The conventional 2-path interface is used. In this case, set parameter No. 8183 for
path 2, and use the composite control axis selection signals of path 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SPVx SWSx SWMx SGSx SGMx SYWx
8167
SPVx SYWx

#1 SYWx The axis is:

0: Not used as a master axis and slave axis at the same time.
1: Used as a master axis and slave axis at the same time.
#2 SGMx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting at the start of synchronous control, a
tool offset is:
0: Considered.
1: Not considered.
- 1229 -
NOTE
SGMx is enabled when bit 1 (SPMx) of parameter No. 8163 is set
to 1.
#3 SGSx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting at the end of synchronous control, a
tool offset is:
0: Considered.
1: Not considered.
NOTE
SGSx is enabled when bit 2 (SPSx) of parameter No. 8163 or bit 6
(SPVx) of parameter No. 8167 is set to 1.
#4 SWMx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting at the start of synchronous control, a
workpiece shift is:
0: Not considered.
1: Considered.
NOTE
SWMx is enabled when bit 1 (SPMx) of parameter No. 8163 is set
to 1.
#5 SWSx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting at the end of synchronous control, a
workpiece shift is:
0: Not considered.
1: Considered.
NOTE
SWSx is enabled when bit 2 (SPSx) of parameter No. 8163 or bit 6
(SPVx) of parameter No. 8167 is set to 1.
#6 SPVx At the end of synchronous control, automatic workpiece coordinate system setting for the
slave axis is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
NOTE
end of synchronous control, the workpiece coordinate system is
coordinates for each axis at the reference position set in parameter
No. 1250.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8168 WST SVF MSO MPA

[Data type] Bit
- 1230 -
#0 MPA If an alarm concerning synchronous control, composite control, or superimposed control
is issued:
0: Both paths are placed in feed hold state.
1: Only the path including the axis placed under synchronous control, composite
control, or superimposed control is placed in the feed hold state.
Automatic operation in other path can be continued when bit 1 (IAL) of parameter
No.8100 is set to 1
#1 MSO When one of the following events occurs in synchronous control, composite control or
superimposed:
- The emergency stop signal *ESP <Gn008.4> is turned off.
- The servo-off signals SVF1 to SVF8 <Gn126.0 to Gn126.7> are turned on.
- A servo alarm is issued.
0: The synchronous, composite control or superimposed control mode is canceled and

follow-up operation is not performed.
For the operation to be performed when the servo-off signal is turned on, however,
the setting of bit 7 (NSR) of parameter No. 8161 is used in synchronous control or
the setting of bit 0 (NMR) of parameter No. 8161 is used in composite control.
1: The synchronous, composite control or superimposed control mode is not canceled.
The following operation is performed to perform follow-up operation:
When the emergency stop signal *ESP is turned off, the relevant path is determined
and operation is performed so that the emergency stop signal *ESP is virtually
turned off for the determined path.
When the servo-off signals are turned on, the relevant axis is determined and
operation is performed so that the servo-off signals are virtually turned on for the
determined axis.
When a servo alarm is issued, the relevant axis is determined and the alarm SV0003,
“SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE/SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL MODE CAN'T
BE CONTINUED” is issued for the determined axis to stop moving the tool along
the axis. When bit 2 (SVF) of parameter No. 8168 is set to 1, this servo-off
specification follows the SVF setting.
NOTE
1 This setting is valid also during operation. For all axes placed
under synchronous, composite control or superimposed control,
the emergency stop signal is turned off, the servo-off signal is
turned on, or a servo alarm is issued.
2 If the servo-off signal is turned on, DS1933 "NEED REF RETURN
(SYNC:MIX:OVL)" will be generated in superimposed control.
After canceling alarm, perform a manual reference position return.
#2 SVF When an axis under composite control is placed in the servo-off state:
0: Composite control is canceled.
1: Composite control is not canceled.
Follow-up specification follows the setting of bit 0 (FUPx) of parameter No. 1819.
When bit 2 (SVF) of parameter No. 8168 is set to 1, bit 0 (NMR) of parameter No. 8161
is invalid. Bit 1 (MSO) of parameter No. 8168, specification for servo-off, is also invalid.
- 1231 -
NOTE
If a composite control axis is placed in the servo-off state when
stopped, set this parameter to 1.
#4 MWR When the workpiece coordinate system is automatically set if synchronous control,
composite control, or superimposed control is started or ended, the tool compensation
number is:
0: Canceled.
1: Not canceled.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the workpiece coordinate system
(G54 to G59, including additional workpiece coordinate system) is
enabled (bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 0).
#6 WST When a workpiece coordinate system is automatically set up for a slave axis at the end of
synchronous control, workpiece coordinate system presetting is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
NOTE
option is enabled, and bit 6 (SPV) of parameter No. 8167 is set to
1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8169 SESx MRFx MVMx MDMx

#0 MDMx As machine coordinates in composite control:

0: Coordinates for the local path are displayed.
1: Coordinates for the other path in composite control are displayed.
#1 MVMx In composite control, machine coordinates (#5021 and above) to be read are:
0: Machine coordinates of the local path.
1: Machine coordinates of the other path in composite control.
#2 MRFx In composite control, the rapid traverse rate is:

0: The rapid traverse rate for the specified axis.
1: The rapid traverse rate for the axis along which a movement is made.
#6 S E Sx If a synchronization error is out of the tolerable range (specified with parameter No.
8181):
0: Alarm SV0407, “EXCESS ERROR”, is issued.
1: No alarm is issued. Instead, the excess synchronization error signal SEO<Fn559> is
output.
SESx is valid when bit 1 (SERx) of parameter No. 8162 is 1. Specify the value of this
parameter for the slave axis.
- 1232 -
8180 Master axis with which an axis is synchronized under synchronous control

[Valid data range] 101, 102, 103, . . . , (path number)*100+(intra-path relative axis number) (101, 102,
103, . . . , 201, 202, 203, . . . )
This parameter sets the path number and intra-path relative axis number of the master axis
with which each axis is synchronized. When zero is specified, the axis does not become a
slave axis and is not synchronized with another axis. When an identical number is
specified in two or more parameters, one master axis has two or more slave axes.
8181 Synchronization error limit of each axis

When the synchronization deviation detected (bit 1 (SERx) of parameter No. 8162 is set
to 1), this parameter specifies the limit of the difference between the positioning deviation
of the slave axis and that of the master axis. Set this parameter to the slave axis.
8183 Composite control axis of the other path in composite control for each axis

103, . . . , 201, 202, 203, . . . )
This parameter sets with which axis each axis is to be placed under composite control.
When zero is specified, control of the axis is not replaced under composite control. An
identical number can be specified in two or more parameters, but composite control
cannot be exercised for all of them at a time.
NOTE
When the two-path interface is used (bit 1 (MIX) of parameter No.
8166 is set to 1), set this parameter for path 2.
Coordinates of the reference point of an axis on the coordinate system of another axis under
8184
composite control

[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
This parameter specifies the coordinates of the reference point of an axis on the
coordinate system of another axis under composite control.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 4 (MPMx) of parameter No. 8162
is set to 1, and workpiece coordinate systems (G54 to G59,
including additional workpiece coordinate systems) are not used(bit
0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 1).
- 1233 -
8185 Workpiece coordinates on each axis at the reference position

[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
This parameter sets the workpiece coordinates on each master axis, subject to
synchronous control, when the master and slave axes are at the reference position. This
parameter is enabled when bit 1 (SPMx) of parameter No. 8163 is set to 1. Set this
parameter for the master axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MWK
11284

[Data type] Bit
#7 MWK When the workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59, including additional workpiece
coordinate system) is valid (when bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No.8136 is 0), the behavior
of the coordinate system setting when the composite control is begun or ended is:
0: The FS0i-F specification. (The preset which corresponds to G92.1 is performed.)
1: The FS0i-C specification.
Diagnosis data
The diagnosis data displays synchronous errors.
3502 Display of synchronous error for each axis

[Meaning] Displays the difference between the master and slave axes in position deviation if
synchronous deviation detection is performed (bit 1 (SERx) of parameter No. 8162 =1).
The positional deviation difference is:
(positional deviation of the master axis) ± (positional deviation of the slave axis)
+ if a mirror image is applied to the synchronization command.

- if no mirror image is applied to the synchronization command.
Alarm and message

If any of the following alarms occurs, synchronous or composite control will be canceled for all axes.
- P/S alarm
PS0350 PARAMETER OF THE INDEX OF An illegal synchronization control axis number (parameter No.
THE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL 8180) is set.
AXIS SET ERROR.
PS0351 BECAUSE THE AXIS IS MOVING, While the axis being subject to synchronization control was
THE SYNC CONTROL IS CAN'T BE moving, an attempt was made to start or cancel the
USED. synchronization control by a synchronization control axis
selection signal.
- 1234 -

PS0352 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AXIS This error occurred when:
COMPOSITION ERROR. 1) An attempt was made to perform synchronization control
for the axis during a synchronization, composition, or
superposition.
2) An attempt was made to synchronize a further
great-grandchild for a parent-child-grandchild relation.
3) An attempt was made to operate synchronization control
although a parent-child-grandchild relation was not set.
PS0353 THE INSTRUCTION WAS DONE This error occurred when:
FOR THE AXIS WHICH WAS NOT - For synchronization
ABLE TO MOVE. 1) A move command was issued to the axis for which bit 7
(NUMx) of parameter No. 8163 is set to 1.
2) A move command was issued to the slave axis.
- For composition
1) A move command was issued to the axis for which bit 7
(NUMx) of parameter No. 8163 is set to 1.
2) A move command was issued to the axis for which bit 7
(MUMx) of parameter No. 8162 is set to 1.
PS0354 THE G28 WAS INSTRUCTED IN This error occurred when G28 was specified to the master
WITH THE REF POS NOT FIXED IN axis being parking during synchronization control, but an axis
SYNC MODE reference position is not set for the slave axis.
PS0355 PARAMETER OF THE INDEX OF An illegal composite control axis number (parameter No.
THE COMPOSITE CONTROL AXIS 8183) is specified.
SET ERROR.
PS0356 BECAUSE THE AXIS IS MOVING, While the axis being subject to composite control was moving,
THE COMP CONTROL IS CAN'T BE an attempt was made to start or cancel the composite control
USED. by a composite control axis selection signal.
PS0357 COMPOSITE CONTROL AXIS This error occurred when an attempt was made to perform
COMPOSITION ERROR. composite control for the axis during a synchronization,
composition, or superposition.
PS0359 THE G28 WAS INSTRUCTED IN This error occurred when G28 was specified to the composite
WITH THE REF POS NOT FIXED IN axis during composite control, but a reference position is not
COMP MODE set to the other part of the composition.
PS0367 3-D CONV. WAS COMMANDED IN A 3-dimensional coordinate conversion was commanded
SYNC MODE AS THE PARAMETER during synchronization control when the bit 2 (PKUx) of
PKUx(NO.8162#2) IS 0. parameter No. 8162 was 0.
- D/S alarm
DS1933 NEED REF The relation between a machine coordinate of an axis in
RETURN(SYNC:MIX:OVL) synchronization, composition, or superposition control, and
the absolute, or relative coordinate was displaced.
Perform the manual return to the reference position.
- Servo alarm
SV0407 EXCESS ERROR The difference value of the amount of positional deviation for
the synchronization axis exceeded the setting value. (during
synchronization control only)
- 1235 -
Caution
- Items common to synchronous control and composite control
CAUTION
1 At the start or end of synchronous or composite control, the tool must be
stopped on the axis subject to that control.
2 Before or after an M code for starting or canceling synchronous or composite
control during automatic operation, be sure to specify a waiting M code (M code
without buffering). When exercising synchronous or composite control in a path,
be sure to prohibit look-ahead operation by specifying an M code without
buffering before or after an M code for starting or canceling synchronous or
composite control.
3 The axes under synchronous or composite control must match in least command
increment, Detection unit, and diameter/radius specification. Otherwise, the
amounts of travel will not be equal.
4 In synchronous or composite control, do not change the parameters related to it
(including axis control, increment system, feedrate, and
acceleration/deceleration control).
5 Before starting synchronous or composite control, make sure that the axes
subject to it has undergone a reference position return after the power was
turned on or that a reference position has been established with an absolute
pulse coder.
6 If an emergency stop or servo off is performed or if a servo alarm occurs, the
coordinates will change due to synchronous or composite control. If this occurs
alarm DS1933, “NEED REF RETURN (SYNC:MIX:OVL)" will be generated. After
canceling the emergency stop, canceling servo off, or restoring from the servo
alarm, perform a reference position return and coordinate system setting first,
then start synchronous or composite control.
7 Acceleration/deceleration control, pitch error compensation, backlash
compensation, and stored stroke check are performed independently, regardless
of synchronous or composite control.
8 The following servo software functions cannot be used with synchronous or
composite control:
- Abnormal load detection and switching function for each of cutting and rapid
traverse
- Fine acceleration/deceleration and switching function for each of cutting and
rapid traverse
9 The following functions cannot be used in synchronous or composite control:
- Electronic gear box
- High precision oscillation function
- Spindle positioning
- Tool retract and recover
- Manual numeric command
10 During synchronous or composite control, reference position establishment
based on "linear scale with absolute address reference mark" or "linear scale
with absolute address zero point" is impossible.
- 1236 -
NOTE
1 This function is an option function.
2 You can place more than one axis under synchronous or composite control at
the same time. You cannot, however, synchronize an axis to multiple axes at the
same time, synchronize the interchanging axis under composite control to
another axis, or duplicate an interchange.
3 Synchronous or composite control cannot be performed on a linear axis and a
rotation axis.
- Items related to synchronous control only

CAUTION
1 In synchronous control, you cannot issue a move command for the synchronous
axis on the synchronous slave.
2 The axes under synchronous control must match in acceleration/deceleration
time constant and servo parameters, insofar as possible. If their settings greatly
differ, the actual machine movement will deviate.
3 Even if you perform operations that do not move the machine but change the
workpiece coordinate system only, such as workpiece coordinate system
setting/shifting and geometric offset commands, on the synchronous master, this
will not be reflected in the workpiece coordinate system on the slave.
4 If you perform workpiece coordinate system setting/wear offset commands, tool
nose radius compensation, or cutter compensation on the synchronous master,
the travel path on the synchronous slave will shift by the offset, but the offset will
not be set as an offset amount. (No offset vector will be created.)
5 The synchronous or composite control option and axis synchronous control
option can be specified at the same time. In this case, the master axis subject to
axis synchronous control can be set as the master axis subject to synchronous
control. The master axis subject to axis synchronous control cannot be used as
the slave axis subject to synchronous control, and the slave axis subject to axis
synchronous control cannot be used as the master or slave axis subject to
synchronous control.
6 If you want to perform a tool retract and recover operation for axes in the
synchronous control mode, perform the operation for the master axis. In the
same way as in ordinary synchronous control, the master and slave axes move
together.
- Items related to composite control only

CAUTION
1 If you want to place a tapping axis under composite control, place it under
composite control first, then issue a rigid tapping command. In rigid tapping
mode, you must not switch the composite control axis selection signal; be sure
to do this in the rigid tapping canceled state.
2 If you place a tapping axis under composite control, rigid tapping will be
performed using the time constant, loop gain, in-position width, and the
positional deviation limits during stoppage/travel of the interchanging axis in
composite control.
- 1237 -
CAUTION
3 In composite control, the loop gain may be switched depending on the switching
of the Cs contour control switching signal and of the composite control axis
selection signal. For this reason, switch the signals in the state in which the tool
has stopped on the related axis. If you change the loop gain while the tool is
moving along an axis, shock may result.
4 The synchronous or composite control option and axis synchronous control
option can be specified at the same time. An axis used for movement under
composite control can be selected as the master axis for axis synchronous
control, but cannot be specified as a slave axis for axis synchronous control.
5 If you want to perform a tool retract and recovery operation for axes in the
composite control mode, perform the operation for the composite control source
axis. In the same way as in ordinary composite control, the composite control
destination axis moves.
Limitation
- Limitations on synchronous control and composite control
Function In synchronous control In composite control
Acceleration/deceleration control The synchronous slave axis is subject to The acceleration/deceleration type of
acceleration/deceleration of the same the specified path is used. As the time
type as the synchronous master axis. constants, those specific to the axes
As the time constants, those specific to are used (3).
the axes are used.
Acceleration/deceleration before The synchronous slave axis is subject to The acceleration/deceleration settings
interpolation the same acceleration/deceleration as of the specified path are used.
the synchronous master axis.
Cutting feedrate clamp Clamping is performed on the Clamping is performed on the
synchronous master. specified path (4).
Reference position return Possible on the synchronous master Possible on axes not related to
axis if the axis is not in parking. Only composite control. Only automatic
automatic reference position return reference position return (G28) is
(G28) is possible if the synchronous possible on an axis under composite
master axis is in parking. control.
2nd, 3rd, 4th reference position Same as above. Same as above.
return
Reference position return check Same as above. Same as above.
PMC axis control Possible on axes other than the Possible.
synchronous slave axis. (If a slave axis
is specified as a PMC control axis,
alarm PS0130 is issued.)
Polar coordinate interpolation, Possible. Possible. (In polar coordinate
Cylindrical interpolation interpolation or cylindrical
interpolation mode, composite control
cannot be turned ON/OFF.)
Handle interruption See bit 5 (SMI) of parameter No. 8163. Possible with bit 6 (MMI) of parameter
No. 8163
Mirror image See bit 5 (SMI) of parameter No. 8163. Signals in the specified path are
effective (4).
Machine lock Signals in the individual paths are Signals in the specified path are
effective (1). effective (4).
Inter lock Signals on the synchronous master side Signals in the specified path are
are valid for the synchronous slave effective (4).
axis.(2)
- 1238 -
Function In synchronous control In composite control

Override Signals on the synchronous master side Signals in the specified path are
axis.(2)
External deceleration Signals on the synchronous master side Signals in the specified path are
axis.(2)
Skip function Not possible on the synchronous slave Possible on axes not related to
axis. composite control.
Automatic tool offset Not possible on the synchronous slave Possible on axes not related to
axis. composite control.
Follow-up Not possible during synchronization. Not possible during composite
control.
Program restart Not possible with a program containing Not possible with a program
synchronous control. containing composite control.
Cs contour control Synchronous control possible (5). Composite control possible (5).
Spindle positioning Synchronous control does not possible Composite control does not possible
EGB function Synchronous control does not possible Composite control does not possible
Servo off Synchronous control does not possible Possible unless the interchanging
axis in composite control is in the
servo off state.
(1) Processed after synchronous pulses are transferred to the slave.

(2) Processed on the master, then transfers synchronous pulses.
(3) Transfers composite control pulses and the acceleration/ deceleration type. As the time constant,
uses that on the slave.
(4) Processed on the master, then transfers composite control pulses.
(5) Limited to combinations of Cs axes.
- Reading of coordinates in synchronous or composite control

In synchronous or composite control, the reading of custom macro system variable positional information
or of current coordinates from the PMC window is as follows:
Positional information type In synchronous control In composite control
Absolute coordinate Reading possible. Reading possible.
Machine coordinate Reading possible. Reading possible.
End point of each block Reading possible on the master only. Reading possible.
Skip signal position Reading possible on the master only. Reading not possible.
- Canceling synchronous or composite control

Synchronous or composite control is canceled in the event of the following, as well as when the
synchronous/composite control axis selection signal becomes 0.
(1) Emergency stop
(2) Reset
(3) Servo alarm
(4) Servo off *1
(5) Overtravel
(6) Alarm related to synchronous or composite control
(7) Alarm PW0000
If one of the above events occurs in either path, all paths will be released from synchronous or composite
control. If one of the above events occurs in either path in synchronous or composite control, the other
path will automatically be placed in feedhold state (during automatic operation) or in interlock state
(during manual operation).
*1: By setting bit 0 (NMR) of parameter No. 8161 to 1, you can prohibit the composite control axis from
release from the synchronous or composite control state even if the axis enters the servo off state.
- 1239 -
By setting bit 7 (NSR) of parameter No. 8161 to 1, you can prohibit the synchronous control axis
from release from the synchronous or composite control even if the axis enters the servo off state.
- Axis state output signals in synchronous or composite control

State output signal In synchronous control In composite control
Axis moving signals - During movement along the master or - On the axis on which a move
MVn <Fn102> slave axis, the master axis signal command is executed, the signal
goes 1. goes 1. The signal on the axis
- The slave axis signal is always 0 (1). along which the tool is actually
moving does not turn to 1 (1).
Axis moving direction signals - On the master axis, the moving - Actual moving direction on the axis
MVDn <Fn106> direction of the master axis. (moving direction after mirror image
- On the slave axis, moving direction processing in composite control).
after mirror image processing.
In-position signals - The master axis signal goes 1 when - The signal in the specified path
INPn <Fn104> both the master and slave axes are in reflects the state of the moving axis
the in-position state. with that specification.
- The slave axis signal is always 1.
Reference position establishment - The signal on the axis for which the - The signal on the axis for which the
signal reference position has been reference position has been
ZRFn <Fn120> established turns to 1. established turns to 1.
Reference position return - After completion of reference position - The signal on the axis along which
completion signal return of the master axis, the signal the tool is actually moving turns to
ZPn <Fn094> on the master axis turns to 1. 1.
- The slave axis is synchronized with
movement of the master axis, but is
not subjected to reference position
return. The signal turns to 0.
- When the master axis is parking, the
slave axis is subjected to reference
position return. The signal on the
slave axis turns to 1.
(1) In a positional deviation check, regardless of the states of these signals, parameter No. 1828 is used
if move command pulses are sent to the motor (regardless of whether the axis is the master or slave)
as the limit, and parameter No. 1829 if none are sent.
Examples of Use
- Examples of independent control and of synchronous control on the Z1 and
Z2 axes
(1) Machine configuration
(a) Independent control
Separate machining operations
Turret 1
are performed in path 1 (X1-Z1)
and in path 2 (X2-Z2) X1
Spindle S1 Spindle S2
Z1 Z2
X2
Turret 2
Fig. 8.6.2 (e)
- 1240 -
(b) Z1-Z2 axis synchronous control
A single workpiece is held on both sides, and
Turret 1
the spindle is moved with Z1 commands.
X1
Z1 Z2
Turret 2
Fig. 8.6.2 (f)
(2) Parameter settings

• To synchronize the Z2 (slave) axis with the Z1 (master) axis, set parameter No. 8180z of path 2
to "102".
• Because the plus directions of the Z1 (master) and Z2 (slave) axes are opposite, perform
synchronization with a mirror image applied. To that end, set bit 0 (SMRz) of parameter No.
8162 of path 2 to 1.
• Because the movements along the Z1 (master) and Z2 (slave) axes must be equal, perform
synchronous error detection. Set bit 1 (SERz) of parameter No. 8162 of path 2 to 1. Set the
synchronous error limit in parameter No. 8181z of path 2, in the range of 100 to 1000. (The
setting differs with each machine.)
• During synchronization, the difference between the Z1 (master) axis and the Z2 (slave) axis in
positional deviation is displayed as No. 3502 on the diagnosis data of path 2.
(3) Signal operation

• To start synchronous movement along the Z1 (master) axis and the Z2 (slave) axis, set signal
SYNC2 <G1138.1> to 1.
• To cancel synchronization, set signal SYNC2 <G1138.1> to 0.
• When an emergency stop, NC reset, or alarm occurs, set signal SYNC2 <G1138.1> to 0.
• Set signals other than signal SYNC2 <G1138.1> to 0.
(4) Program example

Path 1 Path 2
N1000 ... N2000 ... Independent machining of each path
N1010 Z80.0 ; N2010 Z150.0 ; Move the workpiece and the chuck to position
N1020 M200 ; N2020 M200 ; Waiting
N2030 M61 ; Workpiece clamping and start of synchronization
N1040 M201 ; N2040 M201 ; Waiting
N1050 M3 S800 ; Forward spindle rotation
N1060 Z- 25.0 ; Movement along the Z1 axis
N1070 ... Machining along the X1 and Z1 axes
N1080 M200 ; N2080 M200 ; Waiting
N1090 M62 ; Cancellation of synchronization and unclamping of
workpiece
N1100 M201 ; N2100 M201 ; Waiting
where
M61 is an M code that clamps the workpiece and sets signal SYNC2 <G1138.1> to 1, and
M62 is an M code that sets signal SYNC2 <G1138.1> to 0 and unclamps the workpiece.
- 1241 -
(5) Note
NOTE
1 An operation to make the speeds of spindles S1 and S2 identical is required. To
do this, issue a spindle command of path 1 to both S1 and S2.
2 A waiting M code is an M code without buffering.
- Examples of independent control and interpolation on the X1 and Z2 axes

Turret 1
Z1 Z2
X2
Turret 2
Fig. 8.6.2 (g)
(b) Interpolation on the X1 and Z2 axes

Machining is performed with
Turret 1
turret (X1) and spindle S2
X1
(Z2).
Spindle Ｓ Spindle Ｓ
Z1 Z2
X2
Turret 2
Fig. 8.6.2 (h)
There are two ways to perform interpolation on the X1 and Z2 axes.

1. Use the program of path 2 to issue a command to the X2 and Z2 axes to synchronize the X1 (slave)
axis to the X2 (master) axis and to park the X2 (master) axis. For path 1, do not issue a move
command.
2. Perform composite control to let the X1 and X2 axes interchange between paths. For path 1, do not
issue a move command.
The following explains the ways using synchronous control and composite control separately.
If using synchronous control

- To synchronize the X1 (slave) axis to the X2 (master) axis, set parameter No. 8180x of path 1
to "201".
- For both X1 (slave) and X2 (master) axes, no mirror image is required because the direction
away from the center of the workpiece is the plus direction of coordinates.
- Do not perform synchronous error detection because the X2 (master) axis is parked.
- During synchronization, the difference between the X2 (master) and X1 (slave) axes in
positional deviation is displayed as No. 3502 on the diagnosis data of path 1.
- 1242 -
- To start synchronous control on the X2 (master) axis and the X1 (slave) axis, set signals
SYNC1 <G0138.0> and PK1 <G1122.0> to 1.
- To cancel synchronization, set signals SYNC1 <G0138.0> and PK1 <G1122.0> to 0.
- When an emergency stop, NC reset, or alarm occurs, set SYNC1 <G0138.0> and PK1
<G1122.0> to 0.
- Set signals other than SYNC1 <G0138.0> and PK1 <G1122.0> to 0.
(3) Program example
Path 1 Path 2
N1000 ... N2000 . . . Independent machining of each path
N1010 Z0 ; N2010 Z20.0 ; Move each workpiece to position
N1020 X120.0 ; N2020 X120.0 ; Move each X axis to the synchronization start
position (X1=X2)
N1030 M200 ; N2030 M200 ; Waiting
N2040 M55 ; Synchronize the X2 and X1 axes and start parking
on the X2 axis
N1050 M201 ; N2050 M201 ; Waiting
N2060 T0212 ; Set the offset for turret 1
N2070 S1000 M4 ; Reverse spindle rotation
N2080 G0 X30.0 Z55.0 ;
N2090 G1 F0.2 W-15.0 ; Machining along the X1 and Z2 axes
N2100 . . .
N1110 M200 ; N2110 M200 ; Waiting
N2120 M56 ; Cancellation of synchronization and parking
N1130 M201 ; N2130 M201 ; Waiting
where
M55 is an M code to start the control of turret 1 with the program of path 2, and M56 is an M code
that cancel the control of turret 1 with the program of path 2.
NOTE
During synchronous control on the X axis, no move command can be issued
from path 1 to the X1 (slave) axis, but movement along the Z1 axis is possible.
If using composite control

- To perform composite control by letting the X1 and X2 axes interchange, set parameter No.
8183x of path 2 to "101".
- Because the direction of the coordinates on the X1 axis is opposite from that of the coordinates
on the X2 axis, set bit 6 (MCDx) of parameter No. 8162 of path 2 to 1.
- To automatically set the position of turret 1 in the workpiece coordinate system of path 2 at the
start of composite control, set bit 5 (MPSx) of parameter No. 8162 of path 2 to 1.
- To automatically set the position of turret 1 in the workpiece coordinate system of path 1 at the
end of composite control, set bit 4 (MPMx) of parameter No. 8162 of path 1 to 1.
- Assuming that the X coordinate of the reference position of turret 1 in the workpiece coordinate
system of path 2 is -150.0 mm as shown in the figure below, set parameter No. 8184x of path 2
to "-150000" to automatically set the coordinate system.
- 1243 -
Reference position of 150.0mm

turret 1
Z2
X2
Fig. 8.6.2 (i)

- To start composite control on the X2 and X1 axes, set signal MIX1 <G1128.0> to 1.
- To cancel composite control, set signal MIX1 <G1128.0> to 0.
- When an emergency stop, NC reset, or alarm occurs, set MIX1 <G1128.0> to 0.
- Set signals other than MIX1 <G1128.0> to 0.
(3) Program example
Path 1 Path 2
N1000 . . . N2000 . . . Independent machining of each path
N1010 Z0 ; N2010 Z20.0 ; Move each workpiece to position
N2020 X120. ; Move along the X2 axis to a non-interference
position
N1030 M200 ; N2030 M200 ; Waiting
N2040 M55 ; Start composite control on the X2 and X1 axes
(perform automatic coordinate system setup)
N1050 M201 ; N2050 M201 ; Waiting
N2060 T0212 ; Set the offset for turret 1
N2070 S1000 M4 ;
N2080 G0 U10.0 W- 20.0 ; Machining along the X1 and Z2 axes
N2090 G1 F0.2 W- 15.0 ;
N2100 . . .
N1110 M200 ; N2110 M200 ; Waiting
N2120 M56 ; Cancel composite control (perform automatic
coordinate system setup)
N1120 M201 ; N2120 M201 ; Waiting
where
M55 is an M code to start the control of turret 1 with the program of path 2, and
M56 is an M code that cancel the control of turret 1 with the program of path 2.
NOTE
1 At the start and end of composite control, you do not necessarily perform
automatic setup of the coordinate system. If you do not perform automatic
setting, the program will set an appropriate one internally.
2 During composite control on the X axis, you can issue a move command for the
X axis in path 1 to move the tool along the X2 axis.
- 1244 -
NOTE
3 With the parameter settings above, turret 1 will be positioned on the minus side
of the X coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system of path 2. For this
reason, specify with the opposite sign as usual, such as U+10.0 and U-10.0 to
move turret 1 toward the center of the workpiece and move it away from it,
respectively.
If this is inconvenient, specify the following parameter settings:
Bit 6 (MCDx) of parameter No. 8162 = 0
Parameter No. 8184x = 150000
These settings cause turret 1 to exist on the plus side of the X coordinates
virtually.
Actual position of turret 1 Bit 6 (MCDx) of parameter No. 8162 = 1

No.8164x = -150000
Z2
Spindle S2
Virtual position of turret 1 X2

Bit 6 (MCDx) of parameter No. 8162 = 0
No.8164x = 150000
Fig. 8.6.2 (j)
- Examples of independent control and of interpolation on X1-Z2 and X2-Z1

Z2
Spindle S2
Workpiece 1 and turret 1

are controlled with X2
Turret 2
program of path 1
Turret 1
X1 are controlled with
program of path 2
Spindle S1
Z1
Fig. 8.6.2 (k)
- 1245 -
(b) X1-Z2 and X2-Z1 interpolation

Z2
are controlled with
program of path 2
Spindle S2
X1 Turret 1
Turret 2 X2

are controlled with
Spindle S1
program of path 2
Z1
Fig. 8.6.2 (l)

- To perform composite control by letting the X1 and X2 axes interchange, set parameter No.
8183x of path 2 to "101".
- Because the direction of the coordinates on the X1 axis is opposite from that of the coordinates
on the X2 axis, set bit 6 (MCDx) of parameter No. 8162 of path 2 to 1.
- To automatically set the position of the remote turret in the workpiece coordinate system of
each path at the start of composite control, set bit 4 (MPMx) of parameter No. 8162 of each of
paths 1 and 2 to 1.
- To automatically set the position of the local turret in the workpiece coordinate system of each
path at the end of composite control, set bit 5 (MPSx) of parameter No. 8162 of each of paths 1
and 2 to 1.
- Assuming that the relations between the workpiece coordinates of each path and the reference
position are as shown in the figure below, set parameter No. 8184x of path 1 to "200000" and
No. 8184x of path 2 to "180000".
Z2
Reference position
180.0mm of turret 1 Reference
position of turret 2
X2
X1 120.0mm
200.0mm
Z1
Fig. 8.6.2 (m)

- To start composite control on the X2 and X1 axes, set signal MIX1 <G1128.0> to 1.
- To cancel composite control, set signal MIX1 <G1128.0> to 0.
- 1246 -
- When an emergency stop, NC reset, or alarm occurs, set signal MIX1 <G1128.0> to 0.
- Set signals other than signal MIX1 <G1128.0> to 0.
(4) Program example

Path 1 Path 2
N1000 . . . N2000 ... Independent machining of each path
N1010 M200 ; N2010 M200 ; Waiting
N2020 M55 ; Start composite control on the X1 and
X2 axes
N1030 M201 ; N2030 M201 ; Waiting
N1040 T0313 ; N2040 T0212 ; Selection of composite control tool and
setting of offset
N1050 G50 W120.0 ; N2050 G50 W120.0 ; Shifting of Z axis workpiece coordinate
system
N1060 S1000 M4 ; N2060 S1500 M4 ;
N1070 G0 X20.0 Z15.0 ; N2070 G0 X15.0 Z30.0;
N1080 G1 F0.5 W- 8.0 ; N2080 G1 F0.1 W-5.0 ; Start of composite control
N1090 ... N2090 . . .
N1100 M200 ; N2100 M200 ; Waiting
N2110 M56 ; End of composite control
N1120 M201 ; N2120 M201 ; Waiting
N1130 G50 W- 120.0 ; N2130 G50 W-120.0 ; Shifting of Z axis workpiece coordinate
system
N1140 ... N2140 . . . Independent machining of each path
where
M55 is an M code to start composite control (set signal MIX1 <G1128.0> to 1), and
M56 is an M code to cancel composite control (set signal MIX1 <G1128.0> to 0).
NOTE
At the start and end of composite control, you do not necessarily perform
automatic setup of the coordinate system. If you do not perform automatic
setting, the program will set an appropriate one internally.
Others
- In the preceding explanation, a single synchronous control or composite control operation is
explained. In reality, however, you can select multiple synchronous control or composite control
operations and execute them at the same time: Set all necessary parameters in advance, and specify
which synchronous or composite control to perform, using appropriate signals. Make sure that a
single axis is not subject to multiple synchronous/composite control operations at the same time.
- You can set only a single set of axes subject to synchronous or composite control. If you require
multiple sets, use the programmable parameter input function (G10) to change the parameter settings
in the program. Before changing parameters, make sure that the associated synchronous or
composite control has been canceled. If parameters are changed during Synchronous control or
Composite control, the changes will not take effect immediately. For the changes made to the
parameters to take effect, it is necessary to turn off synchronous or composite control mode and turn
it back on.
(Example)
Change parameter settings to synchronize the Z2 (slave) axis to the Y1 (master) axis.
(To set parameter No. 8180z of path 2 to "103", execute a program such as that shown below.)
N0200 . . .
N0210 G10 L50 ; Start of parameter settings
N0220 N8180 P2 R103 ; Set parameter No. 8180z to "103".
- 1247 -
N0230 G11 ; End of parameter settings

N0240 . . .
Execute blocks G10 and G11 while the Y1 and Z2 axes are not subject to synchronous or
composite control.
Troubleshooting
1. Unable to start synchronous or composite control. (No alarm occurs.)
(1) The correct synchronous or composite control options have not been set up.
→ To perform synchronous or composite control, you must set up the correct options.
(2) The synchronous/composite control axis selection signals <Gn128> or <Gn138> is not changed
from 0 to 1.
→ Synchronous or composite control starts when the synchronous/composite control axis
selection signal <Gn128> or <Gn138> is changed from 0 to 1. After synchronous or
composite control ends due to a reset or alarm, merely canceling the reset or alarm cause
will not cause synchronous or composite control to restart. After canceling the reset or
alarm cause, you must make the signal rise again.
(3) The axis number of the axis subject to synchronous or composite control is not set in the
appropriate parameter.
→ To perform synchronous control, set the axis number of the master axis in parameter No.
8180. To perform composite control, set the axis number of the interchanging axis in
parameter No. 8183. If using a 2-path interface, use the parameter of path 2.
(4) Synchronous or composite control cannot be started if the NC unit is one of the following
states:
- Emergency stop
- Reset
- Servo alarm
- Alarm PW0000
- Alarm related to synchronous or composite control
Synchronous or composite control cannot be started, either, if the axis on which synchronous or
composite control is to start is either of the following states:
- Servo off
- Overtravel
2. An attempt to raise a synchronous or composite start signal results in an alarm.

(1) An attempt is made to use an axis already under synchronous or composite control for another
synchronous or composite signal operation. (Alarms PS0352 and PS0357)
→ You cannot use a single axis for a combination of multiple synchronous or composite
control operations. Note, however, that the synchronous master axis can be the master of
multiple synchronous slave axes at the same time. You can add additional slave axes while
synchronous control is in progress.
(2) The axis number set in a parameter is greater than the number of controllable axes. (Alarms
PS0350 and PS0355)
→ The number of the synchronous master axis and that of the interchanging axis subject to
composite control must not exceed the number of axes controllable in the remote path (or
the local path if you are to perform synchronous control in that path).
(3) The tool is moving along the axis that you want to control. (Alarms PS0351 and PS0356)
→ At the start of synchronous or composite control, the tool must be stopped on the axis
subject to that control. That the tool is stopped on an axis means that the speed specified
after acceleration/deceleration is zero.
(4) An axis on which you want to perform synchronous or composite control belongs to another
machine group. (Alarms PS0350 and PS0355)
→ The axes on which you want to perform synchronous or composite control must be of the
same machine group.
- 1248 -
3. An attempt to cancel synchronous or composite control results in alarms PS0351 and S0356.
(1) The tool is moving along the axis on which the control you want to cancel.
→ To cancel synchronous or composite control, the tool must be stopped on the axis on
which to cancel it. That the tool is stopped on an axis means that the speed specified after
acceleration/deceleration is zero. Before canceling, make sure that the movement in
progress signal Fn102 has changed to 0.
4. During synchronous control or composite control, an alarm occurs.

(1) A move command is issued for a synchronous slave axis. (Alarm PS0353)
→ No move command can be issued for a synchronous slave axis, whether it be automatic or
manual.
(2) A move command is issued for an axis under composite control for which bit 7 (MUMx) of
parameter No. 8162 is set to 1. (Alarm PS0353)
→ During composite control, no move command can be issued for an axis for which bit 7
(MUMx) of parameter No. 8162 is set to 1, whether it be automatic or manual.
(3) During synchronous control, an automatic reference position return command with G28 is
issued for a parking master axis. (Alarm PS0354)
→ In this case, a reference position return is performed on the slave axis, requiring that the
reference position of the slave axis be established.
(4) During composite control, an automatic reference position return command with G28 is issued.
(Alarm PS0359)
→ In this case, a reference position return is performed on the remote interchanging axis,
requiring that the reference position of the interchanging axis be established.
(5) During synchronous control, a 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is specified. (Alarm
PS0367)
→ For the synchronous master axis to be specified in 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
mode, set bit 2 (PKUx) of parameter No. 8162 to 1.
5. During synchronous control, servo alarm SV0407 occurs.

(1) The difference between the synchronous master and slave axes in positional deviation is too
large.
→ When the difference between synchronous master and slave axes in positional deviation
exceeds the parameter (No.8181) while checking the synchronous error, alarm (SV0407)
occurs. In general, this alarm occurs if the difference between the synchronous master and
slave axes in acceleration/deceleration time constant or servo parameter is large. It can
also occur if the actual movement of the machine is not correct (is not correctly
synchronized) due to some cause or other.
6. During synchronous control, the machine position deviates.

(1) The synchronous master and slave axes in acceleration/deceleration time constant or servo
parameter (such as loop gain) differs.
→ In this synchronous control, acceleration/deceleration control and servo control are
performed in the master and slave independently of each other. (That is, move commands
are synchronized.) For this reason, if the master and slave differ in acceleration/
deceleration time constant and servo characteristics, the actual movement of the machine
may not fully match.
7. The travel distance is not correct during synchronous or composite control.

(1) The master and slave axes differ in diameter/radius specification or inch/millimeter setting.
→ In synchronous or composite control, diameter/radius conversion or inch/millimeter
conversion is not performed between master and slave. The master and slave must match
in least command increment.
- 1249 -
8. After a switch to synchronous or composite control, the tool does not move to the specified
coordinates.
(1) After a switch to synchronous or composite control, a move command is issued without waiting
(with an M code without buffering).
→ If, during automatic operation, you want to start or cancel synchronous or composite
control with automatic coordinate system setting, be sure to perform waiting (with an M
code without buffering) before and after that.
9. Synchronous or composite control is canceled although the synchronous/composite control axis

selection signal <Gn128> or <Gn138> is not changed from 1 to 0.
→ In synchronous or composite control, synchronous or composite control will be automatically
canceled if at least either of the paths enters one of the following states:
- Emergency stop
- Reset
- Servo alarm
- Alarm PW0000
- Alarm related to synchronous or composite control
In addition, if at least one of the axes on which synchronous or composite control is in progress
enters either of the following states:
- Servo off
- Overtravel
10. Alarm DS1933 occurs.

→ In synchronous or composite control, alarm DS1933 occurs if at least one path enters one of the
following states:
- Emergency stop
- Servo off
- Servo alarm
After canceling the emergency stop, after canceling servo off, or after restoring from the servo
alarm, first perform a reference position return or coordinate system setting and then start
synchronous or composite control.
8.6.3 Hypothetical Cs Axis Control

Overview
This function allows you to add a hypothetical Cs axis to a path to which no serial spindle is actually
connected.
Usually, performing composite control on Cs axes in 2-path control requires that both of the axes to be
interchanged between paths be Cs axes. Using this function, however, enables composite control in which
a hypothetical Cs axis and a Cs axis to which a serial spindle is actually connected interchange with each
other. This makes it possible to move the serial spindle with Cs contour control that is connected to
another path with a command to move from a path to which a serial spindle is not connected to a
hypothetical Cs axis.
NOTE
To use this function, all following functions are required.
- Serial spindle (bit 5 (SSN) of parameter No.8133 is 0)
- Cs contour control (bit 1 (AXC) of parameter No.8133 is 0, and bit 2 (SCS) of
parameter No.8133 is 1)
- Synchronous/composite control (optional function)
- 1250 -
Explanation
By setting bit 7 (CDMx) of parameter No. 1014 to 1 and setting a Cs axis in parameter No. 1023, you can
add the hypothetical Cs axis to a path to which a serial spindle is not actually connected.
In 2-path control, this enables composite control in which a hypothetical Cs axis and an actual Cs axis
connected to another path interchange with each other.
For the hypothetical Cs axis, you need not set up a Cs contour control mode switching signal.
NOTE
1 An attempt to turn ON the Cs contour control mode switching signal for a
hypothetical Cs axis results in alarm SP0752.
2 If a program issues a move command for a hypothetical Cs axis for which
composite control is OFF or for a hypothetical Cs axis and a Cs axis under
composite control, alarm PS0197 will occur.
Example of control in which a hypothetical Cs axis and composite control are combined
1) Control in which a Cs contour control axis (a single serial spindle) is used in two paths
[Machining pattern]
Usually, machining is performed in path 1, using X1-Z1-C1.
By performing composite control on C1-C2, you can operate C1 (Cs axis) with a C2 command in path 2,
thereby enabling machining using X2-Z2-C1.
X2
Tool post 2
Z2
Hypothetical
Cs axis
C2
Composite control
C1
Tool post 1 Z1
X1
Fig. 8.6.3 (a)
Axis configuration
Path 1 Path 2
X1 (servo axis) X2 (servo axis)
Z1 (servo axis) Z2 (servo axis)
C1 (Cs-axis) C2 (hypothetical Cs axis)
- 1251 -
Parameter setting
Parameter No. 1023 Bit 7 of parameter No. 1014
(servo axis number) (Hypothetical Cs axis setting)
1st axis Path 1, axis 1, X1 1 0
2nd axis Path 1, axis 2, Z1 2 0
3rd axis Path 1, axis 3, C1 -1 0
4th axis Path 2, axis 1, X2 3 0
5th axis Path 2, axis 2, Z2 4 0
6th axis Path 2, axis 3, C2 -2 1
Parameter No. 3717 (spindle motor number)

1st spindle Path 1, spindle 1 1
2nd spindle Path 2, spindle 1 0
2) Control in which Cs contour control axes (two serial spindle) are used in two paths
[Machining pattern]
Usually, machining is performed in path 1, using X1-Z1-C1, and in path 2, using X2-Z2-C2.
By performing composite control on B1-C2, you can operate C2 (Cs axis) with a B1 command in path 1,
By performing composite control on C1-B2, you can operate C1 (Cs axis) with a B2 command in path 2,
Tool post 2
X2
Z2
Hypothetical
Cs axis
B2 C2
Composite Composite
control control
C1 B1
C1
Hypothetical
Cs axis
Z1
X1
Tool post 1
Fig. 8.6.3 (b)
Axis configuration
Path 1 Path 2
X1 (servo axis) X2 (servo axis)
Z1 (servo axis) Z2 (servo axis)
C1 (Cs-axis) C2 (Cs-axis)
B1 (hypothetical Cs axis) B2 (hypothetical Cs axis)
Configuration in which by using a hypothetical Cs axis, the addresses of commands for the Cs axis in the
remote path are set separately from those of commands for the Cs axis in the local path.
- 1252 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1014 CDMx

NOTE
#7 CDMx The Cs contour control axis is:

0: Not a virtual Cs axis
1: Virtual Cs axis
NOTE

This parameter associates each control axis with a specific servo axis. Specify values
1+8n, 2+8n, 3+8n, 4+8n, 5+8n, and 6+8n (n = 0, 1, 2, …, 9) like 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, …, 77, and
78.
The control axis number is the order number that is used for setting the axis-type
parameters or axis-type machine signals
With an axis for which Cs contour control/spindle positioning is to be performed, set
-(spindle number) as the servo axis number.
Example)
When exercising Cs contour control on the fourth controlled axis by using the first
spindle, set -1.
3717 Spindle amplifier number to each spindle
NOTE

[Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled axes
Set a spindle amplifier number to be assigned to each spindle.
0: No spindle amplifier is connected.
1: Spindle motor connected to amplifier number 1 is used.
to
n: Spindle motor connected to amplifier number n is used.
- 1253 -
Alarm and message

PS0197 C-AXIS COMMANDED IN The program specified a movement along the Cs-axis when the Cs
SPINDLE MODE contour control switching signal was off.
SP0752 SPINDLE MODE CHANGE This alarm is generated if the system does not properly terminate a
ERROR mode change. The modes include the Cs contour control, spindle
positioning, rigid tapping, and spindle control modes. The alarm is
activated if the spindle control unit does not respond correctly to
the mode change command issued by the NC.
Caution
CAUTION
1 Set the necessary parameters such as feedrate for the hypothetical Cs axis as
well. You need not set serial spindle parameters (such as Nos. 4000 to 4799).
2 For Cs contour control, see the explanation of each function.
- 1254 -
8.7 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL

Overview
The superimposed control function adds the amount of movement of an axis (superimposed control
master axis) in one path to an axis (superimposed control slave axis) on the other path for which ordinary
move commands are being executed. This function is similar to synchronous control but differs from it in
that move commands can be issued not only for the master axis but also for the slave axis. The slave axis
moves by the sum of the amount of movement specified by its own move commands and the amount of
movement specified by move commands for the master axis. Appropriate setting of bit 3 (OMRx) of
parameter No. 8162 can reverse the direction in which the master and slave axes move.
NOTE
- Independent control of each path
Turret 1
X1 Machining is performed
Z1
Workpiece 2
Workpiece 1
X2 Z2
by a path 1 program. Turret 2
Fig. 8.7 (a)
This function enables superimposed control between paths and in a single path, as described below.
- 1255 -
The move command for any axis is superimposed on an axis of another path.
(Example)
Superimpose the movement along the Z1 (master) axis on the Z2 (slave) axis.
Turret 1 Machining is performed by a path 1

X1 program.
Workpiece
Z1
X2
Turret 2
Z2
Fig. 8.7 (b)
Explanation
- Setting
Specify which axis is to be the master axis to be under superimposed control, with parameter No. 8186,
using the path number and the axis number.
Example)
To superimpose the movement of the Z1-axis (master) to that of the Z2-axis (slave) :
To superimpose the movement of the X1-axis (master) to that of the Z2-axis (slave) :
To superimpose the movement of the X1-axis (master) to that of the Y1-axis (slave) :
- Programming
Both before and after the M codes for a start and a cancellation of superimposed control, specify a waiting
M code.
Master axis path Slave axis path
: :
M100 ; M100; Waiting
M220; Start of superimposed control
M101; M101; Waiting
: :
: :
M100; M100; Waiting
M221; Cancellation of superimposed control
M101; M101; Waiting
: :
- Signal operation
When superimposed control begins or ends (when an M code is issued), the superimposed control axis
selection signals OVLS1 to OVLS8 <Gn190> for the target slave axis (from the PMC to the CNC) are
changed from 0 to 1 (to begin superimposed control) or from 1 to 0 (to terminate superimposed control).
- 1256 -
Suppose that a workpiece on the spindle (Z1-axis) that moves along the axis is to be cut with a tool
in path 1 and a tool in path 2 simultaneously. This example superimposes the amount of movement
of the Z1-axis (master) on that of the Z2-axis (slave).
Turret 1 Machining is performed by a path 1

X1 program.
Workpiece
Z2
Z1
Fig. 8.7 (c)
- Feedrate
Because the amount of movement of the master axis is added to that of the slave axis, the resulting
speed of the slave axis may become much larger than a normal speed. ("Normal speed" refers to
such a feedrate as a rapid traverse rate set by a parameter.)
- Differences between superimposed control and ordinary synchronous control

- Neither out-of-synchronization compensation or detection is performed between the master and
slave axes during superimposed control.
- A parking signal is ineffective for axes under superimposed control.
- A reference position return cannot be specified for the salve axis under superimposed control.
- Follow-up
If an emergency stop or servo alarm occurs during superimposed control, the follow-up operation is
performed on machine coordinates. After the emergency stop or servo alarm is canceled, the
workpiece coordinate system is preset.
To enable this function, set the following parameters:
- Set bit 7 (NRS) of parameter No. 8160 to 0.
- Set bit 1 (MSO) of parameter No. 8168 to 1.
- Set bit 5 (OPSx) of parameter No. 8164 to 1.
NOTE
1 Servo off generates alarm DS1933 "NEED REF RETURN(SYNC:MIX:OVL)".
After canceling the alarm, perform the manual return to the reference position.
2 To preset workpiece coordinates, use a workpiece coordinate system (bit 0
(NWZ) of parameter No.8136 is 0). If there is no workpiece coordinate system
(bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No.8136 is 1), manual return to the reference position
is required. Even if 1 is set in bit 5 (OPSx) of parameter No. 8164, absolute
coordinates cannot be restored normally after the emergency stop or servo
alarm is canceled.
- 1257 -
Signal
Superimposed control axis selection signals OVLS1 to OVLS8 <Gn190>
[Function] These signals perform superimposed control.
[Operation] When one of these signals becomes 1, the control unit:
- Begins superimposed control over the corresponding axis.
The master axis is selected according to parameter No. 8186.
Synchronous/composite/superimposed control under way signals SYN1O to

SYN8O <Fn118>
[Function] These signals indicate each axis is being subjected to synchronous, composite, or
[Output cond.] These signals become 1 under the following condition:
- The corresponding axis is under synchronous, composite, or superimposed control.
These signals become 0 under the following condition:
- The corresponding axis is not under synchronous, composite, or superimposed
control.
CAUTION
Whether each axis is under superimposed control does not always
match whether the superimposed control axis selection signal has
been issued or not. For example, if these signals are set to 1 during
an alarm, they are ignored. If a servo alarm occurs during
superimposed control, they are terminated automatically. Before
attempting to perform superimposed control, always check the
state of these signals.
Superimposed control master axis confirmation signals OVMO1 to OVMO8

<Fn344>
[Function] These signals notify whether the corresponding axes are superimposed control master
axes.
- The corresponding axes are superimposed control master axes.
- The corresponding axes are released from superimposed control.
Superimposed control slave axis confirmation signals OVSO1 to OVSO8 <Fn345>

[Function] These signals notify whether the corresponding axes are superimposed control slave axes.
- The corresponding axes are superimposed slave axes.
- The corresponding axes are released from superimposed control.
- 1258 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn190 OVLS8 OVLS7 OVLS6 OVLS5 OVLS4 OVLS3 OVLS2 OVLS1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn118 SYN8O SYN7O SYN6O SYN5O SYN4O SYN3O SYN2O SYN1O
Fn344 OVMO8 OVMO7 OVMO6 OVMO5 OVMO4 OVMO3 OVMO2 OVMO1
Fn345 OVSO8 OVSO7 OVSO6 OVSO5 OVSO4 OVSO3 OVSO2 OVSO1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8136 NWZ
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#0 NWZ Workpiece coordinate system is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8160 NRS NCS AXS

#4 AXS When the axis moving signals MV1 to MV8<Fn102> or the axis moving direction signals
MVD1 to MVD8<Fn106> of the slave axis in superimposed control is output:
0: State output is performed according to the result of adding superimposed move
pulses.
1: State output is performed according to the result of movement along each axis
instead of superimposed move pulses.
#5 NCS If an overtravel alarm is issued for an axis under synchronous, composite, or

superimposed control, synchronous, composite, or superimposed control is:
0: Released.
1: Not released.
NOTE
If one of these paths is 1, both paths are assumed to be 1.
#7 NRS When the system is reset, synchronous, composite, or superimposed control is:
0: Released.
1: Not released.
- 1259 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8162 OMRx

#3 OMRx Superimposed mirror-image control is:

0: Not applied. (The superimposed pulse is simply added.)
1: Applied. (The inverted superimposed pulse is added.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8164 SOKx OPSx

#5 OPSx When superimposed control is canceled, control in which an amount of movement along
a master axis subject to superimposed control is added to the workpiece coordinate of a
slave axis is:
0: Not applied.
1: Applied.
NOTE
When the workpiece coordinate system option is enabled(bit 0
(NWZ) of parameter No.8136 is 0), workpiece coordinate system
presetting (equivalent to G92.1IP0) is performed to set up a
coordinate system.
#6 SOKx If a master axis subject to superimposed control is also subject to synchronous control:
0: An alarm is issued when superimposed control is started during synchronous
control.
1: No alarm is issued when superimposed control is started during synchronous
control.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8168 MWR SVF MSO MPA

[Data type] Bit
#0 MPA If an alarm concerning synchronous control, composite control, or superimposed control

is issued:
0: All paths of the machine group to which the alarm occurrence path belongs are
placed in feed hold state.
1: Only the path including the axis placed under synchronous control, composite
control, or superimposed control is placed in the feed hold state.
#1 MSO When one of the following events occurs in synchronous control, composite control or
superimposed control:
• The emergency stop signal *ESP <Gn008.4> is turned off.
• The servo-off signals SVF1 to SVF8 <Gn126.0 to Gn126.7> are turned on.
• A servo alarm is issued.
- 1260 -
0: The synchronous, composite control or superimposed control mode is canceled and
follow-up operation is not performed.
For the operation to be performed when the servo-off signal is turned on, however,
the setting of bit 7 (NSR) of parameter No. 8161 is used in synchronous control or
the setting of bit 0 (NMR) of parameter No. 8161 is used in composite control.
1: The synchronous, composite control or superimposed control mode is not canceled.
The following operation is performed to perform follow-up operation:
When the emergency stop signal *ESP is turned off, the relevant path is determined
and operation is performed so that the emergency stop signal *ESP is virtually
turned off for the determined path.
When the servo-off signals SVF1 to SVF8 are turned on, the relevant axis is
determined and operation is performed so that the servo-off signals SVF1 to SVF8
are virtually turned on for the determined axis.
When a servo alarm is issued, the relevant axis is determined and the alarm SV0003,
“SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE/SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL MODE CAN'T
BE CONTINUED” is issued for the determined axis to stop moving the tool along
the axis. When bit 2 (SVF) of parameter No. 8168 is set to 1, this servo-off
specification follows the SVF setting.
NOTE
1 This setting is valid also during operation. For all axes placed under
synchronous, composite control or superimposed control, the
emergency stop signal is turned off, the servo-off signal is turned
on, or a servo alarm is issued.
2 If the servo-off signal is turned on, DS1933 "NEED REF RETURN
(SYNC:MIX:OVL)" will be generated in superimposed control.
After canceling alarm, perform a manual reference position return.
#2 SVF When an axis under composite control is placed in the servo-off state:
0: Composite control is canceled.
1: Composite control is not canceled.
Follow-up specification follows the setting of bit 0 (FUPx) of parameter No. 1819.
When bit 2 (SVF) of parameter No. 8168 is set to 1, bit 0 (NMR) of parameter No. 8161
is invalid. Bit 1 (MSO) of parameter No. 8168, specification for servo-off, is also invalid.
NOTE
If a composite control axis is placed in the servo-off state when
stopped, set this parameter to 1.
#4 MWR When the workpiece coordinate system is automatically set if synchronous control,
composite control, or superimposed control is started or ended, the tool compensation
number is:
0: Canceled.
1: Not canceled.
- 1261 -
NOTE
(G54 to G59, including additional workpiece coordinate system) is
enabled (bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 0).
8186 Master axis under superimposed control

103, . . . , 201, 202, 203, . . . )
This parameter sets the path number and intra-path relative axis number of a
superimposed master axis for each axis when superimposed control is exercised. When
zero is specified, the axis does not become a slave axis under superimposed control and
the move pulse of another axis is not superimposed.
An identical number can be specified in two or more parameters to exercise superimposed
control simultaneously. This means that superimposed control with one master axis and
multiple slave axes is possible.
A slave axis may function as the master axis of another axis to allow three-generation
superimposed control: parent (master axis) - child (slave axis/master axis) - grandchild
(slave axis).
In this case, a movement along the child is made by its travel distance plus the travel
distance of the parent, and a movement along the grandchild is made by its travel distance
plus the travel distance of the child plus the travel distance of the parent.
Example of the relationship of parent (X1 of path 1) - child (X2 of path 2) - grandchild
(U2 is 4th axis of path 2):
The travel distance of X1 is superimposed on X2, and the travel distances of X1 and X2
are further superimposed on U2.
Parameter No. 8186 (X axis) of path 2 = 101
Parameter No. 8186 (U axis) of path 2 = 201
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11284 SSH

[Data type] Bit
#0 SSH During superimposed control, manual handle interruption to the slave axis is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Alarm and message

If any of the following alarms occurs, superimposed control will be released for all axes.
- P/S alarm
PS0360 PARAMETER OF THE INDEX OF An illegal superimposed control axis number (parameter No.
THE SUPERPOS CONTROL AXIS 8186) is specified.
SET ERROR.
- 1262 -

PS0361 BECAUSE THE AXIS IS MOVING, While the axis being subject to superimposed control was
THE SUPERPOS CONTROL IS moving, an attempt was made to start or cancel the
CAN'T BE USED. superimposed control by a superimposed control axis
selection signal.
PS0362 SUPERPOSITION CONTROL AXIS This error occurred when:
COMPOSITION ERROR. 1) An attempt was made to perform superimposed control
for the axis during a synchronization, composition, or
superimposed.
2) An attempt was made to synchronize a further
great-grandchild for a parent-child-grandchild relation.
PS0363 THE G28 WAS INSTRUCTED IN TO This error occurred when G28 was specified to the
THE SUPERPOS CONTROL SLAVE superimposed control slave axis during superimposed
AXIS. control.
PS0364 THE G53 WAS INSTRUCTED IN TO In superimposed control, this error occurs if G53 is specified
THE SUPERPOS CONTROL SLAVE to the slave axis during movement along the master axis.
AXIS.
- D/S alarm
DS1933 NEED REF The relation between a machine coordinate of an axis in
RETURN(SYNC:MIX:OVL) synchronization, composition, or superimposed control, and
the absolute, or relative coordinate was displaced.
Perform the manual return to the reference position.
Caution
CAUTION
1 At the start or end of superimposed control, the tool must be stopped on the axis
subject to that control.
2 Before or after an M code for starting or canceling superimposed control during
automatic operation, be sure to specify a waiting M code (M code without
buffering). When exercising superimposed control in a path, be sure to prohibit
look-ahead operation by specifying an M code without buffering before or after
an M code for starting or canceling superimposed control.
3 The axes under superimposed control must match in least command increment,
Detection unit, and diameter/radius specification. Otherwise, the amounts of
travel will not be equal.
4 In superimposed control, do not change the parameters related to it (including
axis control, increment system, feedrate, and acceleration/deceleration control).
5 Before starting superimposed control, make sure that the axes subject to it has
undergone a reference position return after the power was turned on or that a
reference position has been established with an absolute pulse coder.
6 If an emergency stop or servo off is performed or if a servo alarm occurs, the
coordinates will change due to superimposed. If this occurs, alarm DS1933,
“NEED REF RETURN (SYNC:MIX:OVL)" will be generated. After canceling the
emergency stop, canceling servo off, or restoring from the servo alarm, perform
a reference position return and coordinate system setting first, then start
7 In superimposed control, pitch error compensation, backlash compensation, and
stored stroke check are performed on the position resulting from adding
superimposing pulses.
- 1263 -
CAUTION
8 The following servo software functions cannot be used with superimposed
control:
- Feed forward function(*)
- Advance preview feed forward function(*)
- Fine acceleration/deceleration
- Abnormal load detection and switching function for each of cutting and rapid
traverse
- Fine acceleration/deceleration and switching function for each of cutting and
rapid traverse
- Cutting/rapid velocity gain switching function
- Electric current 1/2 and PI switching function for each of cutting and rapid
traverse
- Torque command filter switching function for each of cutting and rapid
traverse
9 The following functions cannot be used in superimposed control:
- Electronic gear box
- High precision oscillation function
- AI advanced preview control (M Series) / AI contour control I/II (*)
- Tool retract and recover
(*) Please refer the section of "SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL AVAILABLE IN
THE AI CONTOUR CONTROL MODE".
10 During superimposed control, reference position establishment based on "linear
scale with absolute address reference mark" or "linear scale with absolute
address zero point" is impossible.
NOTE
1 You can place more than one axis under superimposed control at the same time.
You cannot, however, place an axis subject to synchronous or composite control
under superimposed control.
2 Superimposed control cannot be performed on a linear axis and a rotation axis.
3 The superimposed control option and axis synchronous control option can be
specified at the same time. In this case, the master axis for superimposed
control can be specified as the master axis for axis synchronous control.
Limitation
- Limitations on superimposed control
Function In superimposed control
Acceleration/deceleration control The move pulses of the superimposed control master axis after
acceleration/deceleration are added to those of the slave axis after
Reference position return Not allowed for a superimposed slave axis.
2nd, 3rd, 4th reference position return Not allowed for a superimposed slave axis.
Reference position return check Not allowed for a superimposed slave axis.
Machine coordinate system selection Not allowed for a superimposed slave axis. (3)
PMC axis control Allowed.
Polar coordinate interpolation, Cylindrical Allowed.
interpolation
Handle interruption Not allowed for a superimposed control axis. (4)
Mirror image Only master signals are effective to superimposing pulses. (1)
Machine lock Only master signals are effective to superimposing pulses. (1)
- 1264 -
Function In superimposed control

Inter lock Only master signals are effective to superimposing pulses. (1)
Override Only master signals are effective to superimposing pulses. (1)
External deceleration Only master signals are effective to superimposing pulses. (1)
Skip function Allowed.
Automatic tool offset Not allowed for a superimposed slave axis.
Follow-up Not allowed in superimposed control.
Program restart Not allowed for program containing superimposed control.
Cs contour control Superimposed control is possible. (2)
Spindle positioning Superimposed control is impossible.
EGB function Not allowed in superimposed control.
Servo off Superimposed control is impossible.
(1) For the move commands inherent to the master and slave, these functions are processed as usual; for
superimposed pulses from the master axis, these functions are not applied to the slave.
(2) Limited to combinations of Cs axes. Switch to Cs mode and perform a reference position return first,
then start superimposed control.
(3) If there are no superimposed pulses from the master axis, the machine coordinate system selection
command can be specified on the path containing the slave axis.
Example)
If X1 is a master axis, and X2 is a slave axis
Path 1 Path 2
M120 ; M120; Waiting
G01Z100.0; G53X50.0; X1 (master axis)-X2 (slave axis) superimposed control
M121; M121; Waiting
In this case, alarm PS0364 is not issued because there is no command for X1, which is the
master axis of X2 on path 2.
(4) If bit 0 (SSH) of parameter No. 11284 is set to 1, handle interrupt can be performed on the slave
axis.
- Reading of coordinates in superimposed control

In superimposed control, the reading of custom macro system variable positional information or of
current coordinates from the PMC window is as follows:
Positional information type In superimposed control
Absolute coordinate Reading possible. (1)
Machine coordinate Reading possible.
End point of each block Reading possible. (1)
Skip signal position Reading possible. (1)
(1) Superimposing pulses are not added.
- Canceling superimposed control

Superimposed control is canceled in the event of the following, as well as when the
synchronous/composite/superimposed control axis selection signal becomes 0.
(1) Emergency stop
(2) Reset
(3) Servo alarm
(4) Servo off
(5) Overtravel
(6) Alarm related to superimposed control
(7) Alarm PW0000
If one of the above events occurs in either path, all paths will be released from superimposed control. If
one of the above events occurs in either path in superimposed control, the other path will automatically be
placed in feedhold state (during automatic operation) or in interlock state (during manual operation).
- 1265 -
- Axis state output signals in superimposed control

State output signal In superimposed control
Axis moving signals - On the master axis, as usual.
MVn <Fn102> - The slave axis reflects the travel state with the command on the
slave, regardless of superimposed control pulses (1)(2).
Axis moving direction signals - On the master axis, the moving direction of the master axis.
MVDn <Fn106> - For the slave axis, the moving direction after superimposed
control pulses are added (2).
In-position signals - On the master axis, as usual.
INPn <Fn104> - The slave axis signal is always 1.
Reference position establishment signal - The signal on the axis for which the reference position has been
ZRFn <Fn120> established turns to 1.
Reference position return completion signal - The signal value for each axis depends on the state of the axis.
ZPn <Fn094>
(1) In a positional deviation check, regardless of the states of these signals, parameter No. 1828 is used
if move command pulses are sent to the motor (regardless of whether the axis is the master or slave)
as the limit, and parameter No. 1829 if none are sent.
(2) Using bit 4 (AXS) of parameter No. 8160, you can switch the slave axis state output between results
with superimposed control pulses added and results of individual axial movements.
Examples of Use
- Examples of independent control and of superimposed control on the Z1 and
Z2 axes
Turret 1
Z1 X2
Turret 2
Z2
Fig. 8.7 (d)
- 1266 -
(b) Z1-Z2 axis superimposed control
The workpiece attached
to spindle S1 is machined Turret 1
with path 1 (X1-Z1) and X1
path 2 (X2-Z2).
Z1
X2
Turret 2
Z2
Fig. 8.7 (e)
(2) Parameter setting

- To superimpose the move command for the Z1 (master) axis on that of the Z2 (slave) axis, set
parameter No. 8186z of path 2 to "102".
- Because the plus directions of the Z1 (master) and Z2 (slave) axes are opposite from each other,
perform superimposed control with a mirror image applied. To do this, set bit 3 (OMRz) of
parameter No. 8162 of path 2 to 1.

- To start superimposed movement along the Z1 (master) axis and the Z2 (slave) axis, set signal
OVLS2 <G1190.1> to 1.
- To cancel superimpose, set signal OVLS2 <G1190.1> to 0.
- When an emergency stop, NC reset, or alarm occurs, set signal OVLS2 <G1190.1> to 0.
- Set signals other than signal OVLS2 <G1190.1> to 0.
- 1267 -
(4) Program example

Path 1 Path 2
N1010 M200 ; N2010 M200 ; Waiting
N2020 M55 ; Start of superimposed control from the
Z1 axis to the Z2 axis
N1030 M201 ; N2030 M201 ; Waiting

N2040 T0414 ; Selection of a superimposed control tool and
setting of an offset
N1050 S1000 M3 ;
N1060 G0 X20.0 Z15.0 ; N2060 G0 X18.0 Z120.0 ;
N1070 G1 F0.5 W-8.0 ; N2070 G1 F0.1 W5.0 ; Machining by turret 1 and turret2
N1080 . .. N2080 . . .
N1010 M200 ; N2010 M200 ; Waiting
N2100 M56 ; End of superimposed control
N1010 M201 ; N2010 M201 ; Waiting
N1120 . .. N2120 . . . Independent machining of each path
where
M55 is an M code to start superimposed control, and
M56 is an M code to cancel superimposed control.
CAUTION
If performing constant surface speed control, you must determine the spindle
command in which path is currently effective to spindle S1.
NOTE
Input the speed of spindle S1 (feedback pulses from the position coder) to both
paths 1 and 2.
Troubleshooting
1. Unable to start superimposed control. (No alarm occurs.)
(1) The correct superimposed control options have not been set up.
→ To perform superimposed control, you must set up the correct options.
(2) The superimposed control axis selection signals OVLS1 to OVLS8 <Gn190> is not set to 1.
→ Superimposed control starts when the superimposed control axis selection signals OVLS1
to OVLS8 <Gn190> is changed from 0 to 1. After superimposed control ends due to a
reset or alarm, merely canceling the reset or alarm cause will not cause superimposed
control to restart. After canceling the reset or alarm cause, you must make the signal rise
again.
(3) The axis number of the axis subject to superimposed control is not set in the appropriate
parameter.
→ To perform superimposed control, set the axis number of the master axis in parameter No.
8186.
(4) Superimposed control cannot be started if the NC unit is one of the following states:
- Emergency stop
- Reset
- Servo alarm
- Alarm PW0000
- Alarm related to superimposed control
- 1268 -
Superimposed control cannot be started, either, if the axis on which superimposed control is to
start is either of the following states:
- Servo off
- Overtravel
2. An attempt to raise a superimposed start signal results in an alarm.

(1) An attempt is made to use an axis already under superimposed control for another
superimposed signal operation. (Alarm PS0360)
→ You cannot use a single axis for a combination of multiple superimposed control
operations.
(2) The axis number set in a parameter is greater than the number of controllable axes. (Alarm
PS0360)
→ The number of the superimposed master axis and that of the interchanging axis subject to
superimposed control must not exceed the number of axes controllable in the remote path
(or the local path if you are to perform superimposed control in that path).
(3) The tool is moving along the axis that you want to control. (Alarm PS0361)
→ At the start of superimposed control, the tool must be stopped on the axis subject to that
control. That the tool is stopped on an axis means that the speed specified after
acceleration/deceleration is zero.
(4) An axis on which you want to perform superimposed control belongs to another machine group.
(Alarm PS0360)
→ The axes on which you want to perform superimposed control must be of the same
machine group.
3. An attempt to cancel superimposed control results in alarm PS0361.

(1) The tool is moving along the axis on which the control you want to cancel.
→ To cancel superimposed control, the tool must be stopped on the axis on which to cancel it.
That the tool is stopped on an axis means that the speed specified after
acceleration/deceleration is zero. Before canceling, make sure that the axis moving signals
MV1 to MV8 <Fn102> has changed to 0.
4. In superimposed control, the amount of travel is not correct.

(1) The master and slave axes differ in diameter/radius specification or in inch/millimeter setting.
→ In superimposed control, diameter/radius conversion or inch/millimeter conversion is not
performed between master and slave. The master and slave must match in least command
increment.
5. In superimposed control, alarm PS0363 occurs.

(1) In superimposed control, a reference position return is performed on the slave axis.
→ No reference position return can be performed on the slave axis under superimposed
control.
6. Superimposed control is canceled although the superimposed control axis selection signals OVLS1
to OVLS8 <Gn190> is not changed from 1 to 0.
→ In superimposed control, superimposed control will be automatically canceled if at least either
of the paths enters one of the following states:
- Emergency stop
- Reset
- Servo alarm
- Alarm PW0000
- Alarm related to superimposed control
In addition, if at least one of the axes on which superimposed control is in progress enters either
of the following states:
- Servo off
- 1269 -
- Overtravel
7. Alarm DS1933 occurs.

→ In superimposed control, alarm DS1933 occurs if at least one path enters one of the following
states:
- Emergency stop
- Servo off
- Servo alarm
After canceling the emergency stop, after canceling servo off, or after restoring from the servo
alarm, first perform a reference position return or coordinate system setting and then start
- 1270 -
8.8 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL A (WITH SPEED CONTROL)

For a slave axis under superimposed control, a travel distance specified by the program for the master
axis path is added to a travel distance specified by the program for the slave axis path. So, the actual
speed on a slave axis is excessively higher than ordinary speed ("ordinary speed" means a speed such as a
parameter-set rapid traverse rate).
To prevent this, feedrates and a linear acceleration/deceleration time constant in rapid traverse can be set
for use only during superimposed control with this function.
The parameters for feedrates and a time constant usable only during superimposed control are indicated
below.
- Rapid traverse rate Parameter No. 8190
- F0 velocity of rapid traverse override Parameter No. 8191
- Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant in rapid traverse Parameter No. 8192
- Maximum cutting feedrate Parameter No. 8194
(- Manual rapid traverse rate Value of parameter No. 8190 or 1424,
whichever smaller)
During superimposed control, each of the master and slave axes uses these separately set parameters.
Set proper values, considering a feedrate after addition of a travel distance.
NOTE
Parameter
8190 Rapid traverse rate of an axis under superimposed control

[Valid data range] Refer to standard parameter setting table (C) (See “PREFACE” in this manual.)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0 to +999000.0)
Set a rapid traverse rate for each of the axes when the rapid traverse override of the axes
(master and slave axes) under superimposed control is 100%. The manual rapid traverse
rate set in this parameter or the manual rapid traverse rate set in parameter No. 1424,
whichever smaller, is used.
If this parameter is set to 0, the normal rapid traverse rate (parameter No. 1420) is used.
8191 F0 velocity of rapid traverse override of an axis under superimposed control

Set the F0 velocity of rapid traverse override of an axis under superimposed control (each
of the master and slave axes).
If this parameter is set to 0, the F0 velocity of rapid traverse override in normal operation
(parameter No. 1421) is used.
- 1271 -
8192 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant in rapid traverse of an axis under superimposed control

[Unit of data] msec
This parameter specifies the linear acceleration/deceleration time constant in rapid
traverse for each of the axes (master and slave axes) under superimposed control.
8194 Maximum cutting feedrate in superimposed control

Set the maximum cutting feedrate that can be applied under superimposed control.
If this parameter is set to 0, the maximum cutting feedrate in normal operation (parameter
No. 1430) is used.
8.9 SYNCHRONOUS, COMPOSITE, AND SUPERIMPOSED

CONTROL BY PROGRAM COMMAND
Overview
Synchronous control, composite control, and superimposed control can be started or canceled using a
program command instead of a DI signal.
Synchronous control, composite control, and superimposed control based on a DI signal is also possible.
For the basic operations of synchronous control, composite control, and superimposed control, see
Section 8.5, "SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL", and Section 8.6,
"SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL".
NOTE
To use this function, this function and any option of follows is required.
- Synchronous and composite control
- Superimposed control A (with speed control)
- 1272 -
Format
G51.4 P_ Q_ (L_) ; Start synchronous control (L_ can be omitted)
G50.4 Q_ ; Cancel synchronous control
P: Number to identify synchronous master axis

Q: Number to identify synchronous slave axis
L: Parking state command
1: Master parking (slave parking cancel)
2: Slave parking (master parking cancel)
0: No parking (parking cancel)
(When L is omitted, the specification of L0 is assumed.)
G51.5 P_ Q_ ; Start composite control

G50.5 P_ Q_ ; Cancel composite control
P: Number to identify composite axis 1

Q: Number to identify composite axis 2
G51.6 P_ Q_ ; Start superimposed control

G50.6 Q_ ; Cancel superimposed control
P: Number to identify superimposed master axis

Q: Number to identify superimposed slave axis
Identification numbers are unique values that set into parameter No. 12600 in order to
identify each axes.
G51.4/G50.4, G51.5/G50.5, and G51.6/G50.6 are one-shot G codes of group 00.
Explanation
Synchronous control is exercised by the G51.4/G50.4 commands instead of the synchronous control axis
selection signals (SYNC1 to SYNC8<Gn138.0-7>, n=0 to 9).
- Composite control
Composite control is exercised by the G51.5/G50.5 commands instead of the composite control axis
change selection signals (MIX1 to MIX8<Gn128.0-7>, n=0 to 1).
Superimposed control is exercised by the G51.6/G50.6 commands instead of the superimposed control
axis selection signals (OVLS1 to OVLS8<Gn190.0-7>, n=0 to 1).
Parameter
12600 Identification Number for synchronous, composite, and superimposed control by program command

[Valid data range] 0,1 to 32767
Set identification numbers that can be specified with P,Q addresses.
The axis whose identification number is 0 cannot become under synchronous, composite,
and superimposed control by program command.
- 1273 -
The same identification number cannot be set to two or more axes through all paths.
When the same identification number is set, alarm PS5339 occurs at
G50.4/G50.5/G50.6/G51.4/G51.5/G51.6 block.
Alarm and message

PS5339 ILLEGAL FORMAT COMMAND IS 1. The value of P, Q, or L specified by
EXECUTED IN SYNC/MIX/OVL G51.4/G50.4/G51.5/G50.5/G51.6/G50.6 is invalid.
CONTROL. 2. A duplicate value is specified by parameter No. 12600.
Note
NOTE
1 If a G code (G50.4/G50.5/G50.6) for canceling synchronous, composite, or
superimposed control based on a program command is specified using a DI
signal for an axis under synchronous, composite, or superimposed control,
synchronous, composite, or superimposed control is canceled.
2 If the synchronous control axis selection signal/composite control axis change
selection signal/superimposed control axis selection signal is set to 0 from 1 for
an axis under synchronous, composite, or superimposed control based on a
program command, synchronous, composite, or superimposed control is
canceled.
- 1274 -
8.10 COMBINATION OF SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL AND AI

CONTOUR CONTROL
Overview
The superimposed control can be performed on the AI advanced preview control (M Series) / AI contour
control mode.(AI advanced preview control (M Series) and AI contour control are described at the
following as AI contour control.)
Moreover, advance preview feed forward function becomes effective by the AI contour control when the
parameters about advance preview feed forward function are set.
Explanation
To use superimposed control and AI contour control simultaneously during automatic operation, it is
necessary to set the AI contour control permission signal OVLN to 1 and place the CNC in the advanced
superimposition mode.
NOTE
1 To use superimposed control in the AI contour control mode, set the AI contour
control permission signal for the master and slave axis paths to 1. If
superimposed control is started when the advanced superimposition mode is off,
AI contour control is turned off.
2 Setting the AI contour control permission signal to 1 immediately after power-on
can place the master and slave axis paths in the advanced superimposition
mode without specifying a superimposed control mode on command in the
program.
See the following example for the program sequence for specifying M codes for the advanced
superimposition mode and superimposed control.
Program example)
Path of master axis Path of slave axis

M100 ; ----- Waiting M100; ----- Waiting
M210; ----- Advanced superimposition mode on. (Note 1) M212; ----- Advanced superimposition mode on.
M60; ----- Starts superimposed control.
M101; ----- Waiting M101; ----- Waiting
G05.1Q1; ----- AI contour control mode on. (Note 2) G05.1Q1; ----- AI contour control mode on.
~ ~
: ------ Master axis move commands ~
~ ~
M61; ----- Cancels superimposed control.
M211; ----- Advanced superimposition mode off. (Note 1) M213; ----- Advanced superimposition mode off.
NOTE
1 Turn the advanced superimposition mode on or off after canceling superimposed
control for the slave path.
2 The AI contour control mode can be turned on by setting bit 0 (SHP) of
parameter No. 1604 to 1 instead of using G05.1Q1;.
- 1275 -
(1) Specify the waiting M code before and after the M codes for starting advanced superimposition and
(a) Starts advanced superimposed control.
Set the AI contour control permission signal OVLN to 1 and confirm that the advanced
superimposition mode signal OVLNS is changed to 1.
(b) Starts superimposed control.
Set the superimposed control axis selection signal OVLS1 to OVLS8 for the slave axis of
superimposed control to 1 (start of superimposed control) and confirm that the superimposed
control under way signal SYN1O to SYN8O is changed to 1.
(2) Specify the waiting M code before and after the M codes for canceling advanced superimposition
and superimposed control.
(a) Cancels superimposed control.
Set the superimposed control axis selection signal OVLS1 to OVLS8 for the slave axis of
superimposed control to 0 (cancel of superimposed control) and confirm that the superimposed
control under way signal SYN1O to SYN8O is changed to 0.
(b) Cancels advanced superimposed control.
Set the AI contour control permission signal OVLN to 0 and confirm that the advanced
superimposition mode signal OVLNS is changed to 0.
Functions for which the advanced superimpositon mode cannot be specified

For any path for which the advanced superimposition mode is on, the following functions cannot be
specified.
If any of the following functions is specified in the advanced superimposition mode, alarm PS0502 is
issued.
- Reference position return in Cs contour control (G00,G28)
- Skip function (G31)
- Automatic tool length measurement / Automatic tool offset
- Low-speed type automatic reference position return (G28)
- High-speed program check
These functions can be specified after the advanced superimposition mode and superimposed control are
turned off.
See the following example for the program sequence for specifying M codes for the advanced
superimposition mode and superimposed control when a function that cannot be specified in the advanced
superimposition mode is used.
Program example) (specifying G31 for the slave axis)
Path of master axis Path of slave axis

M210; ----- Advanced superimposition mode on. M212; ----- Advanced superimposition mode on.
G05.1Q1; ----- AI contour control mode on. G05.1Q1; ----- AI contour control mode on.
~ ~
~ ~
M211; ----- Advanced superimposition mode off. M213; ----- Advanced superimposition mode off.
~ G31;
- 1276 -
M210; ----- Advanced superimposition mode on. M212; ----- Advanced superimposition mode on.
~ ~
~ ~
M213; ----- Advanced superimposition mode off. M213; ----- Advanced superimposition mode off.
NOTE
1 Start and cancel superimposed control for the slave axis. Specify the M code for
starting or canceling superimposed control in a block without specifying other
commands.
2 Use an unbuffered M code as the M code for turning the advanced
superimposition mode on or off. (parameters Nos. 3411 to 3420)
3 Do not specify any move or PMC axis control command between the M code for
turning the advanced superimposition mode on or off and a waiting M code.
Sequence of advanced superimposition and superimposed control start command

Advanced superimposition
mode on M command
AI contour control permission

signal OVLN
mode signal OVLNS
Completion signal FIN
Strobe signal MF
Waiting between paths
Superimposed control start

M command
axis selection signal
OVLS
Synchronous/composite/
superimposed control
under way signal SYN
Strobe signal MF
Fig. 8.10 (a)
- 1277 -
1. When the M code for turning the advanced superimposition mode on is specified and the AI contour
control permission signal OVLN is set to 1, the advanced superimposition mode signal OVLNS
becomes 1.
2. The completion signal FIN is operated for completion.
3. The waiting M code is specified in both the master and slave axis paths.
4. When the M code for starting superimposed control is specified, and the superimposed control axis
selection signal OVLS is set to 1, superimposed control starts. And, the superimposed control under
way signal SYN becomes 1.
5. When the superimposed control under way signal SYN becomes 1, the completion signal FIN is
operated for completion.
Sequence of advanced superimposition and superimposed control cancel

command
cancel M command
Superimposed control axis
selection signal OVLS
Synchronous/composite/
superimposed control
under way signal SYN
Completion signal
FIN
Strobe signal MF
Waiting between paths

Advanced
superimposition mode off
M command
AI contour control
permission signal OVLN
mode signal OVLNS
Completion signal
FIN
Strobe signal MF
Fig. 8.10 (b)
1. When the M code for canceling superimposed control is specified and the superimposed control axis
selection signal OVLS is set to 0, superimposed control is canceled.
2. When the superimposed control axis selection signal OVLS becomes 0, the completion signal FIN is
3. The waiting M code is specified in both the master and slave axis paths.
4. When the M code for turning the advanced superimposition mode off is specified and the AI contour
control permission signal OVLN is set to 0, the advanced superimposition mode signal OVLNS
becomes 0.
- 1278 -
5. When the AI contour control permission signal OVLN becomes 0, the completion signal FIN is
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8008 PFE

#1 PFE If an AI contour control permission signal (such as the advanced superimposition signal
or inter-path flexible synchronization mode select signal) <G531.4> is set to "1",
advanced preview feed forward for PMC axis control rapid traverse (00h), cutting feed -
feed per minute (01h), cutting feed - feed per revolution (02h), and cutting feed -
sec/block specification (21h) is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
This parameter is valid for rapid traverse (00h) when bit 3 (FFR) of
parameter No. 1800 is 1 (advanced preview feed forward is
enabled for rapid traverse).
Signal
Superimposed control axis selection signals OVLS1 to OVLS8 <Gn190>
[Function] These signals perform superimposed control.
[Operation] When one of these signals becomes 1, the control unit operates as follows:
- Starts superimposed control with using the corresponding axis as the slave axis.
Uses an axis as the master axis following the setting in parameter No. 8186.
Synchronous/composite/superimposed control under way signals

SYN1O to SYN8O <Fn118>
[Function] These signals indicate that each axis is in the synchronous, composite, or superimposed
control mode.
- The corresponding axis is in the superimposed control mode.
- The corresponding axis is not in the superimposed control mode.
AI contour control permission signal OVLN <Gn531.4>

[Function] This signal enables superimposed control in the AI contour control mode by advanced
superimposition.
[Operation] When this signal becomes 1, the control unit operates as follows:
- The corresponding path enters the advanced superimposition mode.
When the AI contour control permission signal is changed to 1 or 0, the tool must stop
along all axes (other than PMC axes) in the target path. If the tool moves along any axis,
alarm DS0071 is issued.
- 1279 -
In the PMC axis control mode in which bit 1 of parameter No. 8008 is set to enable the
relevant function, however, also stop the tool along the PMC axes, then change the AI
contour control permission signal to 1 or 0.
Advanced superimposition mode signal OVLNS <Fn545.1>

[Function] This signal indicates the advanced superimposition mode.
[Output cond.] This signal becomes 1 under the following condition:
- The corresponding path is in the advanced superimposition mode.
This signal becomes 0 under the following condition:
- The corresponding path is not in the advanced superimposition mode.
Alarm and message

PS0502 ILLEGAL G-CODE (SUPERIMPOSED A G code unavailable in the advanced superimposition
AHEAD) mode was specified.
DS0071 START OR RELEASE OF To start or cancel the advanced superimposition
SUPERIMPOSED AHEAD CANNOT BE mode, the tool must be stopped along all axes.
DONE
DS0072 MANUAL REFERENCE RETURN CANNOT In the advanced superimposition mode, manual
BE DONE reference position return cannot be performed.
Limitation
- Manual reference position return
In the advanced superimposition mode, manual reference position return cannot be performed. If an
attempt is made to perform manual reference position return in the advanced superimposition mode, alarm
DS0072 is issued.
- PMC axis control

In a system in which this function (AI contour control permission signal OVLN <Gn531.4>) is used, to
use PMC axis control for the master axis of superimposed control, bit 1 (PFE) of parameter No. 8008
must be set to 1.
In this case, the following commands can be specified in the PMC axis control mode: rapid traverse (00h),
cutting feed (01h, 02h, and 21h).
PMC axis control cannot be used for the slave axis of superimposed control.
- Others
The limitations on superimposed control and AI contour control are applied to this function. For basic
specifications of and limitations on superimposed control and AI contour control, see the explanation of
superimposed control and AI contour control in this manual.
- 1280 -
8.11 PATH SPINDLE CONTROL

Overview
This function allows a workpiece attached to one spindle to be machined simultaneously with two tool
posts and each of two workpieces attached to each of two spindles to be machined simultaneously with
each of two tool posts.
Tool post 1
Spindle
Tool post 2
Fig. 8.11 (a) Application to a lathe with one spindle and two tool posts
Tool post 1
Spindle 1 Spindle 2
Tool post 2
Fig. 8.11 (b) Application to a lathe with two spindles and two tool posts
The spindle belonging to each path can generally be controlled by programmed commands for the path.
With path spindle command selection signals, programmed commands for any path can control the
spindle belonging to any path.
When feed per revolution is performed on each path, the feedback pulses from the position coder attached
on the spindle belonging to the path are generally used. With path spindle feedback selection signals, feed
per revolution can be performed using the feedback pulses from the position coder attached on the spindle
belonging to any path.
NOTE
1 The spindle speed is changed by spindle commands from multiple paths
because path spindle command selection signals switch to spindle commands
from relevant paths. Create a PMC sequence which determines whether spindle
commands programmed for each path can be executed and switches over to
another path spindle command selection signal.
- 1281 -
NOTE
2 When multiple paths share one analog spindle, during execution of a thread
cutting command for a path, a function (such as thread cutting or feed per
revolution) which uses the feedback pulses from the spindle on another path
cannot be executed normally. Put restrictions so that during execution of thread
cutting on a path, feed per revolution and other functions are not executed for
the tool post on another path.
Explanation
• Selecting spindle commands
Each path spindle command selection signal (input) can be used to switch over to spindle commands
for the relevant path that the spindle belonging to each path follows.
• Selecting the feedback pulses from a position coder

When a serial spindle is used, each path spindle feedback selection signal (input) can be used to
switch over to the feedback pulses from the position coder attached on the spindle belonging to the
relevant path that each path uses in the NC. Thread cutting and feed per revolution using the spindle
belonging to a different path can be performed.
The following two signal types are available as selection methods using signals and each type is specified
by parameter setting as follows.
Bit 0 (2P2) of parameter No. 3703 Signal type
0 Signal type A
1 Signal type B
The using method and meaning of signals differ depending on the signal type. For details, see the
explanation of signals.
Each signal type is applicable to the following spindle configurations.

Controlling the spindle belonging to Controlling the spindle belonging to
Signal type
path 1 from path 1 or 2 path 1 or 2 from path 1 or 2
Signal type A { ×
Signal type B { {
NOTE
When the path spindle control function is used, the spindle gear selection
method must be the T type.
For a machining center system, set bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No. 3706 to 1 to
select the T type as the spindle gear selection method.
- When multiple spindles belong to individual paths

Multi-spindle control can be used simultaneously to issue spindle commands to any spindle belonging to
individual paths.
When multi-spindle control is not used, path spindle control is valid only for the 1st spindle belonging to
individual paths.
The following two methods are available for selecting spindle commands in multi-spindle control:
1) Selecting spindle commands using signals (Bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 0.)
2) Selecting spindle commands using address P (Bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1.)
- 1282 -
When spindle commands are selected using address P, processing including path spindle command
selection is performed in a multipath system. For this reason, spindle command selection using signals is
invalid (this selection is made by spindle selection signals SWS1 to SWS4 <Gn027.0 to Gn027.2 and
Gn026.3> and path spindle command selection signals SLSPA <Gn063.2>, SLSPB <Gn063.3>, SLSPC
<Gn404.0>, and SLSPD <Gn404.1>).
Only one address P can be specified together with a spindle command and there is a one-to-one
correspondence between address P values and spindles. For this reason, a spindle command in the same
block cannot control multiple spindles simultaneously.
Selecting the feedback pulses from a position coder

The simultaneous use of multi-spindle control enables feed per revolution using the feedback pulses from
the position coder on any spindle belonging to each path. Use signals (combination of position coder
selection signal and path spindle feedback selection signal) to select the feedback pulses from a position
coder.
Path 1 Path 2
Spindle Spindle Spindle Spindle

command feedback command feedback
SLPCA #1 SLPCB #1 Selection of spindle

commands and feedback
0 1 1 0 pulses among paths
0 1 1 0
SLSPA #1 SLSPB #1
Spindle command Spindle PC for Spindle command Spindle PC for

for path 1 path 1 for path 2 path 2
SWS1 #1 SWS2 #1 PC2SLC#1 SWS1 #2 SWS2 #2 PC2SLC#2
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Selection of spindle
commands and feedback
pulses within a path
PC for spindle 1 PC for spindle 2 PC for spindle 1 PC for spindle 2
Spindle 1 Spindle 2 Spindle 1 Spindle 2
Fig. 8.11 (c) Configuration in which four spindles belonging to paths 1 and 2 are shared between the two
paths (Path spindle control (signal type B) + multi-spindle control)
Signal
There are two signal types, which are selected with appropriate parameter settings.
0 Signal type A
- 1283 -

1 Signal type B
- Signal type A
Path spindle command selection signal SLSPA <G0063.2>
[Function] This signal specifies the path of the program commands to be effective to the spindles
belonging to path 1.
[Operation]
Signal input Program command to be effective to the spindle belonging to
SLSPA<G0063.2> path m (= n + 1)
0 Spindle command of path 1
Path spindle feedback selection signal SLPCA<G0064.2>,SLPCB<G0064.3>

[Function] You need not control the path spindle feedback selection signal because the spindle
feedback signal of path 1 is always effective to paths 1 and 2.
Path spindle command confirmation signal COSP <F0064.5>

[Function] This signal notifies which path the spindle command last specified came from.
- A spindle command is issued from path 2.
- A spindle command is issued from path 1, or no spindle command is issued from
either path.
In the state in which spindle commands for both paths 1 and 2 are effective to the spindles
belonging to path 1, this signal allows you to determine which path the spindle command
last specified came from.
NOTE
Spindle commands refer to S code commands, maximum speed
command (G50S), M03/M04/M05, and commands for the constant
surface speed control (G96 and G97).
- 1284 -
Path 1 Path 2

0 1
SLSPA #1
Spindle command Spindle PC for

for path 1 path 1
Spindle 1
Fig. 8.11 (d) Configuration in which the spindle of path 1 is shared by 2 paths
- Signal type B
Path spindle command selection signal SLSPA<G0063.2>,SLSPB<G0063.3>
[Function] This signal specifies the path of the program commands to be effective to the spindles
belonging to paths 1 and 2.
[Operation]
SLSPA<G0063.2> path 1

SLSPB<G0063.3> path 2
Path spindle feedback selection signal SLPCA<G0064.2>,SLPCB<G0064.3>

[Function] In paths 1 and 2, this signal specifies the path to which the spindle to which position
coder feedback pulses are to be effective belongs.
[Operation]
Signal input In path 1, the path to which the spindle to which position coder
SLPCA<G0064.2> feedback pulses are to be effective belongs
0 Spindle PC of path 1
- 1285 -
Signal input In path 2, the path to which the spindle to which position coder
SLPCB<G0064.3> feedback pulses are to be effective belongs
Path spindle command confirmation signal COSP<F0064.5>

[Function] This signal notifies which path the spindle command last specified came from.
- A spindle command is issued from path 2.
- A spindle command is issued from path 1, or no spindle command is issued from
either path.
In the state in which spindle commands for both paths 1 and 2 are effective to the spindles
belonging to path 1, this signal allows you to determine which path the spindle command
last specified came from.
NOTE
Spindle commands refer to S code commands, maximum speed
command (G50S), M03/M04/M05, and commands for the constant
surface speed control (G96 and G97).
Path 1 Path 2

SLPCA #1 SLPCB #1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 0
SLSPA #1 SLSPB #1
Spindle command Spindle PC for Spindle command Spindle PC for
for path 1 path 1 for path 2 path 2
1st spindle (path 1) 1st spindle (path 2)
Fig. 8.11 (e) Configuration in which the spindles in paths 1 and 2 are shared by 2 paths
- 1286 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn063 SLSPB SLSPA
Gn064 SLPCB SLPCA
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn064 COSP
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3702 EMS

#1 EMS The multi-spindle control is:

0: Used.
1: Not used.
NOTE
1 Set this parameter for a path that does not require multi-spindle
control in a 2-path control system.
2 To use this parameter requires enabling multi-spindle control
(setting bit 3 (MSP) of parameter No. 8133).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3703 MPP 2P2

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#0 2P2 When a 2-path system is used, inter-path spindle control allows:

0: Configuration where the spindle that belongs to one path only is shared between
path 1 and path 2.
1: Configuration where the spindles that belong to path 1 and 2 are shared between the
two paths.
#3 MPP In multi-spindle control, a spindle selection using a programmed command instead of

using Spindle selection signals (SWS1 to SWS4<G027.0 to 2, G026.3>) is:
0: Not made.
1: Made.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, set parameter No. 3781 at the same
time.
- 1287 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3706 PCS

#3 PCS When a 2-path system is used, and multi-spindle control is enabled with each path, as the
position coder signals (PC2SLC<Gn028.7>) for selecting the position coder of a spindle
among the multiple spindles that belong to a path selected by the inter-path spindle
feedback selection signals:
0: The signals of the path selected by the inter-path spindle feedback selection signal
are used.
1: The signals of the local path are used.
3781 P code for selecting the spindle in multi-spindle control

If bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1, set the P code to select each spindle
under multi-spindle control. Specify the P code in a block containing the S command.
[Example] If the P code value for selecting the second spindle is set to 3,
S1000 P3;
causes the second spindle to rotate at S1000.
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid if bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set
to 1.
2 If this parameter is set to 0, the corresponding spindle cannot be
selected by a P code.
3 Under 2-path control, the P code specified here is valid for each
path.
For instance, if the P code to select the first spindle of path 2 is set
to 21, specifying S1000 P21; in path 1 causes the first spindle of
path 2 to be rotated at S1000.
4 Identical P code values cannot be used for different spindles.
(Identical P code values cannot be used even if the paths are
different.)
5 When this parameter is used (when bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No.
3703 is set to 1), the spindle command selection signal is invalid.
6 To use this parameter, the multi-spindle control function is needed
(M series). To use this parameter, enable multi-spindle control (bit
3 (MSP) of parameter No. 8133 is 1).
- 1288 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8133 MSP
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#3 MSP Multi-spindle is
0: Not Used.
1: Used.
Alarm and message

PS5305 ILLEGAL SPINDLE NUMBER In a spindle select function by address P for a multiple spindle
control,
1) Address P is not specified.
2) Parameter No. 3781 is not specified to the spindle to be
selected.
3) An illegal G code which cannot be commanded with an
S_P_; command is specified.
4) The multi spindle cannot be used because the bit 1 (EMS)
of parameter No. 3702 is 1.
5) The spindle amplifier number of each spindle is not set in
parameter No. 3717.
6) A prohibited command for a spindle was issued
(parameter No. 11090).
7) An invalid value is set in parameter No. 11090.
Note
NOTE
Signals used to operate the spindle control unit are not influenced by path
spindle command selection signals; process them with a PMC Ladder program,
if required.
(Example: SFRA<G0070.5> is always a forward rotation command to the first
serial spindle control amplifier of path 1.)
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Path spindle control
- 1289 -
8.12 MEMORY COMMON TO PATHS

Overview
In a 2-path system, this function enables data within the specified range to be accessed as data common to
all paths. The data includes tool compensation memory and custom macro common variables.
Explanation
Part or all of tool compensation memory for individual paths can be used as common data by setting
parameter No. 5029.
Machining center Lathe system tool
system tool compensation for path 2
compensation for path 1
Tool
compensation
number 1
No.5029=20 30 tool 50 tool

compen- compen-
Tool sation sation
compensation values values
number 20
Fig. 8.12 (a)
NOTE
1 Set a value less than the number of tool compensation values for each path for
parameter No. 5029.
2 If the value set for parameter No. 5029 is greater than the number of tool
compensation values for each path, the minimum number of tool compensation
values for individual paths is assumed.
- Custom macro common variables

All or part of custom macro common variables #100 to #149 (or #199) and #500 to #599 (or #999) can be
used as common data by setting parameters Nos. 6036 (#100 to #149 (, #199, or #499)) and 6037 (#500
to #599 (or #999)).
Macro variables Macro variables
for path 1 for path 2
Macro variable number 100
No.6036=20 50 macro 50 macro

variables variables
Macro variable number 119
Fig. 8.12 (b)
- 1290 -
NOTE
If the value of parameter No. 6036 or 6037 exceeds the maximum number of
macro common variables, the maximum number of macro common variables is
assumed.
Parameter
5024 Number of tool compensation values
NOTE

Set the maximum allowable number of tool compensation values used for each path.
Ensure that the total number of values set in parameter No. 5024 for the individual paths
is within the number of compensation values usable in the entire system. The number of
compensation values usable in the entire system depends on the option configuration.
If the total number of values set in parameter No. 5024 for the individual paths exceeds
the number of compensation values usable in the entire system, or 0 is set in parameter
No. 5024 for all paths, the number of compensation values usable for each path is a value
obtained by dividing the number of compensation values usable in the entire system by
the number of paths.
Tool compensation values as many as the number of compensation values used for each
path are displayed on the screen. If tool compensation numbers more than the number of
compensation values usable for each path are specified, alarm PS0115 “VARIABLE NO.
OUT OF RANGE” is issued.
For example, 64 tool compensation sets are used, 20 sets may be allocated to path 1, 30
sets to path 2, and 14 sets to path 3. All of 64 sets need not be used.
5029 Number of tool compensation value memories common to paths
NOTE

[Data type] Word
When using memories common to paths, set the number of common tool compensation
values in this parameter.
Ensure that the setting of this parameter does not exceed the number of tool compensation
values set for each path (parameter No. 5024).
[Example 1] When parameter No. 5029 = 10, parameter No. 5024 (path 1) = 15, and parameter No.
5024 (path 2) = 30 in a 2-path system, tool compensation numbers 1 to 10 of all paths are
made common.
[Example 2] When parameter No. 5029 = 20 and the other conditions are the same as for Example 1,
tool compensation numbers 1 to 15 are made common.
- 1291 -
NOTE
1 Ensure that the setting of parameter No. 5029 does not exceed the
number of tool compensation values for each path (parameter No.
5024). If the setting of parameter No. 5029 exceeds the number of
compensation values of a path, the least of the numbers of
compensation values in all paths is made common.
2 When 0 or a negative value is set, memories common to paths are
not used.
6036 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #100 to #199 (#499))

[Data type] Word
When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom
macro common variables to be shared (custom macro variables common to paths).
Common variables #100 to #199 (up to #499 in a system with the embedded macro
option) may be shared. Ensure that the maximum number of usable macro common
variables is not exceeded.
[Example] When 20 is set in parameter No. 6036
#100 to #119: Shared by all paths
#120 to #149: Used by each path independently
NOTE
When 0 or a negative value is set, the memory common to paths is
not used.
6037 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #500 to #999)

[Data type] Word
When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom
macro common variables to be shared (custom macro variables common to paths).
Common variables #500 to #999 may be shared. Ensure that the maximum number of
usable macro common variables is not exceeded.
[Example] When 50 is set in parameter No. 6037
#500 to #549: Shared by all paths
#550 to #599: Used by each path independently
NOTE
When 0 or a negative value is set, the memory common to paths is
not used.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Memory common to paths
- 1292 -
8.13 PATH SINGLE BLOCK CHECK FUNCTION

Overview
In 2-path control, each of the paths has single block command signals, so that their respective automatic
operation programs can be brought to a single block stop. Even if, however, the single block command
signals of the respective paths are set to 1, the times at which the programs will stop may not match,
depending on the difference among command programs.
Example
Assuming that the following programs are started to perform SBK operation at the
position of X0.0 in both paths
Path 1 Path 2
O0001; O0002;
N1 G01 X10.0 F100 ; N1 G01 X20.0 F100 ;
N2 X20.0 ; :
: :
In the above example, path 1 enters the single block stop state after the completion of the movement by
"X10.0", while in path 2, the movement by "X20.0" will be executed immediately.
This function prevents such an event from occurring; as soon as one path enters the single block stop state,
this function places other paths in the feedhold stop states. This function enables single block operation
while making sure that the machining programs of multiple paths have nearly been synchronized.
Because the single block command signals of the individual paths remain effective, so that uses such as
the following are possible:
<1> Single block operation in which the single block command signal of path 1 only is set to 1 to follow
the program of path 1
<2> Single block operation in which the single block command signals of multiple paths are set to 1 to
follow the end of a specified block in one of the paths.
WARNING
If one of the paths is in the single block prohibited state or in the feedhold
prohibited state due to threading, etc, the paths will not enter the stop state until
that state is canceled. However, the paths enter the stop state if the single block
prohibited state is set by the custom macro system variable #3003.
CAUTION
No operations such as synchronous processing on paths are performed. In an
example such as that shown above, therefore, path 2 enters the feedhold stop
state after the completion of the movement by "X10.0", but the stop position will
be near "X10.0".
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8100 DSB

- 1293 -
#6 DSB The inter-path single block check function is:

0: Disabled.
If one of the paths undergoes a single block stop, only the path undergoes a single
block stop.
1: Enabled.
If one of the paths undergoes a single block stop, the other path undergoes a feed
hold stop.
8.14 PATH SELECTION/DISPLAY OF OPTIONAL PATH NAMES

Overview
Path selection specifies whether operations performed using the MDI unit is for each path.
The operations, as used here, include displaying and setting data items (such as tool compensation values),
entering command programs in MDI mode, and editing machining programs in program memory.
Also note that the name of each path can be changed by parameter.
Signal
Path selection signals (Tool post selection signal)
HEAD<G063.0>
[Function] These signals select the path the MDI unit is to be for.
[Operation] The MDI panel operation is intended for the path specified by HEAD. The relationship
between the path selection signal and the path to be selected is as follows.
Path selection signal

Path to be selected
HEAD<G063.0>
"0" Path 1
"1" Path 2
Signal address
G063 HEAD
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8100 IAL RST

#0 RST The pressing of the key on the MDI unit is:

0: Valid for all paths.
1: Valid only for the path selected by the path selection signal.
The key on the MDI unit functions for all machine groups. So, in machine groups
for which this parameter is set to 0, a reset can be performed for all paths. In machine
groups for which this parameter is set to 1, a reset can be performed only for the path that
is selected by the path select signal.
- 1294 -
NOTE
combination with bit 0 (MGR) of parameter No. 8106 setting and
this parameter.
#1 IAL Choice of an option concerning operation continuation when an alarm is issued, and
choice of an option concerning the start of automatic operation in alarm state:
0: • When an alarm is issued, the operation is stopped with the other path(s) in same
group placed in hold state.
• When the other path or paths in same group are placed in alarm state, automatic
operation cannot be started.
1: • Even when an alarm is issued, the operation is continued without stopping the other
path(s).
• Even when the other path or paths in same group are placed in alarm state, automatic
operation can be started.
3141 Path name (1st character)
3142 Path name (2nd character)
3143 Path name (3rd character)
3144 Path name (4th character)

[Valid data range] See the "CHARACTER CODE LIST".
Specify a path name with codes.
Any character string consisting of alphanumeric characters, katakana characters, and
special characters with a maximum length of seven characters can be displayed as a series
name.
NOTE
When 0 is set in parameter No. 3141, PATH1(,PATH2...) are
displayed as path names.
CHARACTER CODE LIST

032 Space 6 054 L 076
! 033 Exclamation 7 055 M 077
mark
” 034 Quotation 8 056 N 078
marks
# 035 Sharp 9 057 O 079
$ 036 Dollar mark : 058 Colon P 080
% 037 Percent ; 059 Semicolon Q 081
& 038 Ampersand < 060 Left angle bracket R 082
’ 039 Apostrophe = 061 Equal sign S 083
( 040 Left > 062 Right angle T 084
parenthesis bracket
- 1295 -

) 041 Right ? 063 Question mark U 085
parenthesis
* 042 Asterisk @ 064 Commercial at V 086
mark
+ 043 Positive sign A 065 W 087
, 044 Comma B 066 X 088
- 045 Negative C 067 Y 089
sign
. 046 Period D 068 Z 090
/ 047 Slash E 069 [ 091 Left square
bracket
0 048 F 070 ¥ 092 Yen mark
1 049 G 071 ] 093 Right square
bracket
2 050 H 072 094
3 051 I 073 _ 095 Underline
4 052 J 074
5 053 K 075
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3208 PSC

[Data type] Bit
#5 PSC When the path is switched based on Path selection signal :

0: The screen display is switched to the last selected screen of the path.
1: The same screen as for the path before switching is displayed.
8.15 WAITING FUNCTION BY SPECIFYING START POINT

Overview
M codes control the first and second paths so that one waits for the other during machining. When an M
code for waiting is specified in a block of a path during automatic operation, the other path waits for the
same M code to be specified before staring the execution of the next block.
In this function, by specifying a start point with a waiting M code, absolute coordinate value of that path
or the other path can be used as the condition for waiting.
- 1296 -
Format
M_ P3 L_ IP ;
Format to specify coordinates of a start point.
M : Waiting M code.
IP : Absolute coordinate value of a start point.
L : Type of waiting (0,1).
L0 : This path waits until absolute coordinate on the other path arrives at
start point.
L1 : The other path waits until absolute coordinate on this path arrives at
start point.
P3 : Be sure to specify P3 (It can’t be omitted).
∗The meaning of P command can be switched to “pattern of waiting with path
number” by the parameter MWP (No.8103#1).
For more detail information, please refer to “8.2 WAITING M CODES” in this
manual.
Note.
Specify absolute coordinate value of start point after M_ P_ L_. If start point is
specified before M_ P_ L_, this block is operated as a normal waiting M code.
Specify L in an only one path.
If L is not specified in a block, this block is operated as a normal waiting M code, not
the waiting function by specifying start point.
M_ P3 ;
Format not to specify coordinates of start point.
- 1297 -
Operation
(1) When a waiting M code is specified on one path during automatic operation, that path waits until the
other path executes the same waiting M code.
(2) After all related paths execute the same waiting M, CNC compares the programmed coordinate
values with current ones, and CNC decides a waiting area.
Waiting is completed when absolute coordinate value enters the gray area in the following chart.
When command in coordinates for two axes
Start point which is

Absolute coordinate value
commanded by program.
when a waiting M code is
executed.
Waiting is completed when absolute

coordinate value enters this area.
When command in coordinates for one axis
Start point which is

Absolute coordinate value
commanded by program.
when a waiting M code is
executed.
Waiting is completed when absolute

coordinate value enters this area.
(3) If L0 is commanded on a path, the path waits until absolute coordinate value on the other path enters
a gray area. If L1 is commanded, a next block of a waiting M code is executed, and the path with L1
makes the other path wait until absolute coordinate value of the path with L1 enters a gray area.
(4) After completing the waiting, the waited path begins to execute a following block of a waiting
M code.
- 1298 -
Example of program
L0 command
Path 1 Path 2
O0100; O0100;
G00 X0.0 ; G00 X0.0 Z0.0 ;
G00 Z0.0 ; M103 P3 L0 X10.0 Z10.0 ;
:
G00 X50.0 Z50.0 ; Waiting for (1).
M103 P3; .......................(1)
Path2 begins to wait till
X-30.0 Z-30.0 ;...............(2)
other path crosses
coordinate values (X≤10.0,
Z≤10.0).
Path2 begins to execute a
next block because
coordinate values of other
path crosses (X≤10.0,
Z≤10.0) in the middle of
block (2).
Path 1 Path 2
O0100; O0100;
G00 X0.0 ; G00 X0.0 Z0.0 ;
G00 Z0.0 ; M103 P3 L0 X10.0 Z10.0 ;
: ......................................
G00 X50.0 Z50.0 ; Waiting for (1)
M103 P3; .......................(1)
Path2 begins to wait till
other path crosses
S1000 M03 ; coordinate values (X≤10.0,
Z≤10.0).
G99 G01 X-30.0 F0.2 ; ..(2)
Path2 keeps waiting
Z-30.0 ;..........................(3)
because the requirement of
Z axis is not met though
coordinate value of X axis
crosses (X≤ 10.0) in block
(2).
Path2 begins to execute a
next block because
coordinate values crosses
Z≤10.0 on the way of block
(3)
- 1299 -
L1 command
Path 1 Path 2
O0100; O0100;
G00 X0.0 ; G00 X0.0 Z0.0 ;
G00 Z0.0 ; M103 P3 L1 X10.0 Z10.0 ;
: ......................................
G00 X50.0 Z50.0 ; Waiting for (1)
M103 P3; .......................(1)
Waiting till other path Path2 begins to execute a

crosses coordinate values next block
(X≥10.0, Z≥10.0)
Path1 begins to execute a G00 X50.0 Z50.0 ; .........(2)

next block because
coordinate values crosses
(X≥10.0, Z≥10.0) in the
middle of block (2).
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3104 DAC DAL

#6 DAL The displayed absolute position is

0: The actual position that takes tool length offset into account.
1: The programmed position that does not take tool length offset into account.
NOTE
In lathe systems, whether a tool offset is excluded from displaying
absolute position is determined by the setting of bit 1 (DAP) of
parameter No.3129.
#7 DAC When an absolute position are displayed:

0: Values not excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool
nose radius compensation are displayed.
1: Values excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool nose
radius compensation (programmed positions) are displayed.
NOTE
When the parameter DAC is set to 1, in the command like circle
interpolation where the cutter compensation vector is changed
constantly, an absolute position is not correctly displayed during its
interpolation except its start point and its end point.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3129 DAP

- 1300 -
#1 DAP For absolute coordinate display:
0: The actual position including a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed.
1: The programmed position excluding a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed.
NOTE
In machining center systems, whether the tool length offset is
excluded from displaying absolute position is determined according
to the setting of bit 6 (DAL) of parameter No.3104
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8101 STW

#1 STW Waiting function by specifying start point is

0: Not effective.
1: Effective. (The option of the waiting function by specifying start point is necessary)
8110 Waiting M code range (minimum value)
8111 Waiting M code range (maximum value)

[Data type] 2-word
[Valid data range] 0 ,100 to 99999999
A range of M code values can be set by specifying a minimum waiting M code value
(parameter No. 8110) and a maximum waiting M code value (parameter No. 8111).
(parameter No. 8110) ･ (waiting M code) ･ (parameter No. 8111)
Set 0 in these parameters when the waiting M code is not used.
Signal
No-wait signal
NMWT<Gn063.7>(for path individual signal interface)
[Function] Specifies whether to synchronize the paths by the waiting M code.
[Operation] When this signal turns to 1 the paths are not synchronized by the M code. The M code for
waiting specified in a machining program is ignored.
When this signal turns to 0, the paths are synchronized by the M code. When the M code
for waiting is specified for one path, the CNC waits for the corresponding M code of
another path to be issued, then starts executing the next block.
NOTE
Set all signals NMWT <Gn063.7> to "1" for ignoring the waiting
when using M code for the waiting function by specifying start
point.
- 1301 -
Waiting signal
WATO<F0063.6>(for path common signal interface)
WATO<Fn063.6>(for path individual signal interface)
[Function] Indicates that a waiting M code is being executed.
[Output cond.] These signals are 1 as long as:
- One path is waiting for another path. That is, the signal stays 1 for the period from
when the M code for waiting is issued to one path to when the corresponding M
code is issued to another path. In addition of the waiting function by specifying start
point, the signal stays 1 when one path is waiting for the completion of the axis
movement.
This signal is 0 as long as:
- Neither of the paths is waiting for the other.
Auxiliary function code signals M00 to M31<Fn010 to Fn013>

[Function] These signals report that auxiliary functions are specified.
[Output cond.] When the waiting function by specifying start point is available, these signals are output
during waiting for other path M code or the completion of the axis movement.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn063 NWMT
Fn010 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00
Fn011 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08
Fn012 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16
Fn013 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24
Fn063 WATO
Alarm and message

PS0003 TOO MANY DIGIT Data entered with more digits than permitted in the NC
instruction word.
The number of permissible digits varies according to the
function and the word.
PS0009 IMPROPER NC-ADDRESS An illegal address was specified, or parameter 1020 is not
set.
- 1302 -
PS0160 MISMATCH WAITING M-CODE A waiting M-code is in error.
<1> When different M codes are specified for path 1 and path
2 as waiting M codes without a P command.
<2> When the waiting M codes are not identical even though
the P commands are identical
<3> When the waiting M codes are identical and the P
commands are not identical (This occurs when a P
command is specified with binary value.)
<4> When the number lists in the P commands contain a
different number even though the waiting M codes are
identical (This occurs when a P command is specified by
combining path numbers.)
<5> When a waiting M code without a P command (2-path
waiting) and a waiting M code with a P command
(3-or-more-path waiting) were specified at the same time
<6> When a waiting M code without a P command was
specified for 3 or more paths.
<7> When the waiting function by specifying start point and a
waiting M code without a P command (2-path waiting)
were specified at the same time.
PS0161 ILLEGAL P OF WAITING M-CODE P in a waiting M-code is incorrect.
<1> When address P is negative
<2> When a P value inappropriate for the system
configuration was specified
<3> When a waiting M code without a P command (2-path
waiting) was specified in the system having 3 or more
paths.
<4> When P7 and L0 were specified at the same time.
Note
Inch / metric switching

Specifying coordinates of the waiting function by specifying start point might be failed when the input
unit system is changed by G20/G21 during executing program.
O0100; O0100;
G20 ; (METRIC) G00 X0. Z0. ;
G00 X0 Z0. ; M103 P3 L0 X10. Z10. ; .
: (When M103 is executed,
G21 ; (INCH) the other path is a unit of
metric.)
G00 X50. Z50. ;
Coordinates of a different
M103 P3; .......................(1) unit are compared because
X-30. Z-30. ; ..................(2) the input unit system has
been changed when
waiting M code ends.
Current block display

The start position coordinates are not displayed in the current block display and the next block display of
the program screen.
Execution macro
The waiting function by specifying start point cannot be used in execution macro (P-code program).
Also, macro cannot be called by M code of the waiting function by specifying start point.
- 1303 -
Manual operation during waiting

Even if mode of operation is changed to the manual mode during waiting by specifying start position,
waiting is completed when absolute coordinate value enters the specified area.
At this time, please change to the manual mode in only a path which axis moves, and please maintain
memory mode in a path that is waiting.
Repetition of waiting command

When both of paths command L0, waiting is not completed and halt because each path waits for the
movement of the other path.
Path 1) Path2)
M_ P_ L0 X_ Z_ ; Halt M_ P_ L0 X_ Z_ ; Halt
When a path command L1 and another path command L0, waiting of a path with L1 is completed and
executes a next block, however waiting of a path with L0 is not completed and halt.
Path 1) Path2)
M_ P_ L1 X_ Z_ ; Execute a next block M_ P_ L0 X_ Z_ ; Halt
Amount of tool compensation and current position display

When the absolute coordinate value of the current position display reaches the start position, waiting is
completed. Therefore, the start position can be shifted from the program coordinates when the tool
compensation (wear-out compensation and tool-nose radius compensation etc.) is effective.
Example)
T0101 ; (When the amount wear-out compensation is X = -1.000)
G00 X0.0 ;
M103 P3 L1 X10.0 ;
G00 X20.0 ;
- When DAL (3104#6)=0, waiting is completed when absolute coordinate value is X = 10.000 and
the amount of distance to go is X = 9.000.
- When DAL (3104#6)=0, waiting is completed when absolute coordinate value is X = 10.000 and
the amount of distance to go is X = 10.000.
Flexible path axis assignment

Please do not execute flexible path axis assignment when paths are waiting.
Retrace (M system)
When the waiting function by specifying start point is available, a waiting M code cannot move backward.
Only forward movement is possible.
Manual handle retrace

Forward movement
There is not any restriction in forward movement.
Backward movement
When this function is effective, manual handle retrace function prohibits changing direction at a
waiting M code block in backward movement. Continue backward movement until waiting M code
is appeared in all paths.
- 1304 -
NOTE
When this function or waiting M code is used with manual handle retrace, please
set parameter HMP(No.6400#4) to 1 in the both of paths, and when inversion or
backward movement is inhibited in other path, inversion or backward movement
is inhibited also for the current executed path.
Incremental command
Even if incremental command mode is selected by G91 command in G code system B or C at the path
where M code for the waiting function by specifying start point is specified, it is assumed that absolute
coordinate value is specified as a start point.
If address U, V or W, that are incremental commands, are specified as start point, the alarm PS0009
occurs.
Rotary axis rollover

If a rotary axis which has roll-over function is specified as an axis of start point, this coordinate value, to
which roll-over function is not applied, is compared with the current absolute coordinate value which is
rounded by the angle corresponding to one rotation to judge whether a condition for waiting is met.
Example)
The axis A is the rotary axis and the amount of movement per rotation is 360.000
(Parameter (No.1260)=360.000）
N10 G00 A0.0 ;

N20 M100 P3 L1 A180.0 ;
N30 G00 A-10.0 ;
After the end of N30 block, the absolute coordinate value of A axis is 350.0. Therefore, because this
value becomes A≥180.0 in the middle of this block, waiting is completed.
- 1305 -
9.FUNCTION FOR LOADER CONTROL B-64603EN-1/01
9 FUNCTION FOR LOADER CONTROL

Chapter 9, “FUNCTION FOR LOADER CONTROL”, consists of the following sections:
9.1 FUNCTION FOR LOADER CONTROL.....................................................................................1306
9.1 FUNCTION FOR LOADER CONTROL

Overview
The function for loader control is used to control the devices for performing a non-machining operation
(peripheral device such as a loader). When this function is valid, the path for performing a loader control
is added besides a path for machining.
(In the subsequent explanation, the path which applies the function for loader control is called the loader
path, while the other path is called the machining path.)
NOTE
Explanation
- System configuration
When the function for loader control is valid, a combination of paths is as follows.
Machining path 1 + Loader path 1

Machining path 1 + Loader path 1 + Loader path 2
Machining path 1 + Machining path 2 + Loader path 1
Machining path 1 + Machining path 2 + Loader path 1 + Loader path 2
Loader paths follow machining paths.

When a number of machining paths is only 1, loader paths are added as the second or later path.
When a number of machining paths is 2, loader paths are added as the third or later path.
Machining Loader path1 Machining Loader path1 Loader path2

path1 (2nd path) path1 (2nd path) (3rd path)
Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis
Machining Machining Loader path1 Machining Machining Loader path1 Loader path2
path1 Path2 (3rd path) path1 Path2 (3rd path) (4th path)
(2 d h) (2 d h)
Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis
NOTE
1 To use the loader path 2, the addition of loader control path option is required in
addition to the function for loader control option.
2 The number of controlled paths which is indicated in diagnosis data No.1111 is
the same as a number of machining paths. A number of loader paths is not
included.
- 1306 -
B-64603EN-1/01 9.FUNCTION FOR LOADER CONTROL
The following parameters disable the function for loader control.
NLC(No.8104#7) NL2(No.8104#6) Loader path 1 Loader path 2
0 0 { {
0 1 { ¯
1 0/1 ¯ ¯
{: Valid (The path is added.)
¯: Invalid (The path is not added.)
- Machine group
A machine group is available on a loader path. Up to 3 machine groups can be used.
Example)
CNC unit
1st machine group 2nd machine group 3rd machine group

Machining Machining Loader Loader
path1 path2 path1 Path2
Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis
- Number of feed axes

The number of maximum feed axes for a loader path is 3 per path. However, there is the following
restriction on the number of connectable servo motors in the entire system including machining paths and
loader paths.
In case of using HRV2 control: Up to 12

In case of using HRV3 control: Up to 10
- Designation of spindle axes

The loader path does not have a spindle. When the loader path is specified in a parameter No. 982, which
specifies the path to which each spindle belongs, alarm PS0365, “TOO MANY MAXIMUM SV/SP
AXIS NUMBER PER PATH” is issued.
- Part program storage size / Number of registerable programs

A part program storage size and a number of registerable programs for the loader path are included in
them of the entire system. Even when the loader path is added, part program storage size / number of
registerable programs of the entire system do not change.
- DI/DO
The DI/DO specifications of the loader path confirm to the DI/DO specifications in multipath control. In
the loader path also, therefore, create a ladder program with the same interface as that for the machining
path.
Addresses of signals for a loader path are as follows.
• In case that a number of machining path is only 1:

Loader path 1: F1000 to F1767, G1000 to G1767 (the 2nd path in the entire system)
Loader path 2: F2000 to F2767, G2000 to G2767 (the 3rd path in the entire system)
• In case that a number of machining path is 2:

Loader path 1: F2000 to F2767, G2000 to G2767 (the 3rd path in the entire system)
Loader path 2: F3000 to F3767, G3000 to G3767 (the 4th path in the entire system)
- 1307 -
- Path selection
When the loader control selection signal LCBS <G0251.1> turns to "1", the loader path 1 is subjected to
screen display or MDI operation. If the loader path 2 exists, when the loader control 2 selection signal
LCB2 <G0251.2> turns to "1", the loader path 2 is subjected to screen display or MDI operation.
When both signals are set to "1", the loader path 1 is selected.
When both the loader control selection signal and the loader control 2 selection signal are set to "0", a
selected path can be switched between a machining path and a loader path by MDI key operation.
Whenever MDI keys and are pressed at the same time, a selected path is switched between
a machining path and a loader path alternately. If the loader path 2 exists, when the loader path 1 is
selected, the loader path 2 is switched by the MDI key operation. In case of switching from a loader path
to a machining path, a machining path which is selected by the path selection signal HEAD <G0063.0> is
switched.
Example)
4-path system (machining path 1 + machining path 2 + loader path 1 + loader path 2)
• In case of selecting the machining path 1 by the path selection signal (HEAD="0")
Whenever MDI keys and are pressed at the same time, a selected path is switched in
the following order.
Machining path 1 Loader path 1 Loader path 2
Path selection by MDI key operation can be disabled by setting bit 3 (SCD) of parameter No.8106.
When the loader path is selected, “LC” is displayed at the lower right of the screen. If the loader path 2
exists, “LC1” is displayed on the loader path 1 and “LC2” is displayed on the loader path 2. Optional path
name can be displayed by setting parameters Nos. 3141 to 3147. A name of the loader path can be
displayed in reverse video by setting bit 1 (LCI) of parameter No.11362.
- Waiting M codes
Waiting M codes are available between the loader path and the machining path. For details, refer to
“WAITING M CODES” in this manual.
- Custom macro common variables between each path

All or part of custom macro common variables can be used as data common to all paths including
machining paths and loader paths. For details, refer to “MRMORY COMMON TO PATHS” in this
manual.
- Position switch
Up to 24 position switch signals can be output in the loader path. 16 position switch signals (PSW01 to
PSW16) are output to the conventional signal address. The other position switch signals (PSW17 to
PSW24) are output to the address <Fn330>. The controlled axes corresponding to their position switches
are specified in parameters Nos. 6966 to 6973, and the operating ranges are set in parameters Nos. 6974
to 6989. As to the machining path, up to 16 position switch signals is available conventionally.
NOTE
The position switch signals (PSW17 to PSW24) are available only for the loader
path.
- 1308 -
- Spindle speed control

The loader path does not have spindle speed control. If an S command is executed in a loader path, the
specified value is output directly on the Spindle function code signals as an auxiliary function.
- Tool functions
The loader path does not have tool functions. If a T command is executed in a loader path, the specified
value is output directly on the Tool function code signals as an auxiliary function. The loader path does
not have a tool offset number and the tool compensation screen.
- C language executor / Macro executor

When a loader path is specified by the C-language executor or the macro executor, use the following path
number.
• In case that a number of machining path is only 1:
Loader path 1: 2 (the 2nd path in the entire system)
Loader path 2: 3 (the 3rd path in the entire system)
• In case that a number of machining path is 2:

Loader path 1: 3 (the 3rd path in the entire system)
Loader path 2: 4 (the 4th path in the entire system)
- Peripheral axis control

When the function for loader control is valid, peripheral axis control cannot be used.
- Usable G codes
The following table shows the G codes which are available for a loader path. When the G codes which are
not listed in this table are specified in a loader path, alarm PS0010, “IMPROPER G-CODE” is issued.
T
G code system for a loader path can be set to a different system for a machining path. Which G code
system is selected is set using bit 6 (GSB) and bit 7 (GSC) of parameter No. 3401.
Table 9.1 (a) Specifications

Machining Lathe system
center G code system Function
system A B C
G00 G00 G00 G00 Positioning (Rapid traverse)
G01 G01 G01 G01 Linear interpolation (Cutting feed)
G04 G04 G04 G04 Dwell
G04.1 G04.1 G04.1 G04.1 G code preventing buffering
G09 G09 G09 G09 Exact stop
G10 G10 G10 G10 Programmable data input
G11 G11 G11 G11 Programmable data input mode cancel
G20 G20 G20 G70 Input in inch
G21 G21 G21 G71 Input in mm
G22 G22 G22 G22 Stored stroke check function on
G23 G23 G23 G23 Stored stroke check function off
G27 G27 G27 G27 Reference position return check
G28 G28 G28 G28 Return to reference position
G30 G30 G30 G30 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return
G31 G31 G31 G31 Skip function
G92 G50 G92 G92 Coordinate system setting
G92.1 G50.3 G92.1 G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset
G52 G52 G52 G52 Local coordinate system setting
G53 G53 G53 G53 Machine coordinate system setting
G54 G54 G54 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
- 1309 -
Table 9.1 (a) Specifications

Machining Lathe system
center G code system Function
system A B C
G54.1 - - - Additional workpiece coordinate systems
G61 G61 G61 G61 Exact stop mode
G63 G63 G63 G63 Tapping mode
G64 G64 G64 G64 Cutting mode
G65 G65 G65 G65 Macro call
G66 G66 G66 G66 Macro modal call
G67 G67 G67 G67 Macro modal call cancel
G94 G98 G94 G94 Feed per minute
G90 - G90 G90 Absolute programming
G91 - G91 G91 Incremental programming
- Specifications
The following table shows functions which are available for a loader path. The functions which are not
listed in this table are not available. Some of the following functions are optional functions. If required
options are not specified, these functions cannot be used even on a loader path. For details of each
function, refer to respective items in this manual.
Table 9.1 (b) Specifications

Item Specifications
Controlled axis
Max. feed axes/1 path 3 axes
Axis control by PMC
Axis name
Axis name expansion
Incremental system (IS-A, IS-B, IS-C)
HRV2 control
HRV3 control
Inch/metric conversion
Interlock
Machine lock
Emergency stop
Overtravel
Stored stroke check 1
Stored stroke check 2,3
Stroke limit check before move
Mirror image
Servo off/Mechanical handle
Unexpected disturbance torque detection function
Position switch
High speed position switch
Dual check safety
Test mode function for Acceptance Test Dual check safety is required.
Operation
Automatic operation (memory)
MDI operation
- 1310 -
Item Specifications
Program restart
Quick program restart
Manual intervention and return
Wrong operation prevention
Dry run
Single block
Jog feed
Manual reference position return
Manual 2nd/3rd/4th reference position return
Reference position setting without DOG
Reference position setting with mechanical stopper
Reference point setting with mechanical stopper by
Grid Method
Manual handle feed
Active block cancel
High speed program check
Dwell/Auxiliary function time override function
Interpolation functions
Positioning G00
Exact stop mode G61
Tapping mode G63
Cutting mode G64
Exact stop G09
Linear interpolation G01
Dwell G04, Dwell in seconds
Skip G31
High-speed skip Input signal is 4 point.
Torque limit skip
Reference position return G28
Reference position return check G27
2nd reference position return G30
3rd/4th reference position return
Feed function
Rapid traverse override F0, 25, 50, 100% or 0～100%(1% Step)
Feed per minute
Automatic acceleration/deceleration
Rapid traverse bell-shaped
Linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed
interpolation
Bell-type acceleration/ deceleration after cutting
feed interpolation
Feedrate override 0～254％
One-digit F code feed M series only
Jog override 0～655.34％
External deceleration
Rapid traverse block overlap
Programmable rapid traverse overlap
In-position check signal
Program input
Optional block skip 9
Program file name
- 1311 -
Item Specifications
Absolute/incremental programming G90/G91
Decimal point programming/ pocket calculator type
decimal point programming
Diameter/radius programming
Rotary axis designation
Coordinate system setting
Workpiece coordinate system G52～G59
Addition of workpiece coordinate system G54.1, Mseries only
Workpiece coordinate system preset
G code system (A/B/C)
Programmable data input G10
Programmable parameter input
Sub program call
Custom macro
Custom macro common variables between each
path
G code preventing buffering
Macro executor
Macro executor + C language executor
FANUC PICTURE executor
FANUC PICTURE function
Auxiliary function
Auxiliary function M8 digit
2nd auxiliary function B8 digit
High-speed M/S/T/B interface
Waiting function
Waiting M codes of high-speed type
Multiple command of auxiliary function 5 commands
Waiting function by specifying start point
Accuracy compensation function
Backlash compensation
Backlash compensation for each rapid traverse
and cutting feed
Stored pitch error compensation
Editing operation
Part program editing
Extended part program editing
Key and program encryption
Password function
Playback
Background editing
Memory card program edit & operation
Multi-path editing function
Setting and display
Optional path name display
Operating monitor screen
Servo setting screen
Servo waveform display
Trouble diagnosis
Machine alarm diagnosis
Software operator's panel
Machine operation menu
- 1312 -
Item Specifications
Machining paths and loader paths are displayed in the same
Multi-language display
language.
Data protection key
Protection of data at eight levels
Warning function against modification of setting
Graphic display
Data input/output
Reader/puncher interface
External machine zero point shift
External message
External data input
External key input
External workpiece number search
External program number search
Memory card input/output
USB memory input/output
External I/O device control
One touch macro call
Signal
Path selection signal HEAD<G0063.0>
[Function] These signals select the path the MDI panel is to be for.
[Operation] The MDI panel operation is intended for the path specified by HEAD. The relationship
between the path selection signal and the path to be selected is as follows.
Path selection signal
Path to be selected
HEAD<G063.0>
"0" Path 1
"1" Path 2
Loader control selection signal LCBS<G0251.1>

Loader control 2 selection signal LCB2<G0251.2>
[Function] Switches the object of screen display or MDI operation between a machining path and a
loader path.
[Operation] When LCBS turns to "1", the loader path 1 is subjected to screen display or MDI
operation. When LCB2 turns to "1", the loader path 2 is subjected to screen display or
MDI operation. When both signals are set to "1", the loader path 1 is selectes.
When LCBS or LCB2 is set from "1" to "0", a machining path is switched. Selected path
is a machining path which is selected by the path selection signal (HEAD<G0063.0>).
NOTE
1 If the loader path 2 exists, the LCB2 signal is available.
2 If both signals are set to “0”, a selected path can be switched
between a machining path and a loader path by pressing MDI keys
and at the same time.
Position switch signals PSW17 to PSW24<Fn330>

- 1313 -
[Function] Indicate that the machine coordinates along the controlled axes specified by parameters
Nos. 6966 to 6973 are within the ranges specified by parameters Nos. 6974 to 6989.
This position switch signal corresponding to the n-th position switch function is PSWn.
(n: 17 to 27)
[Output cond.] These signals are "1" in the following case:
- When the machine coordinates along the controlled axes are within the specified
ranges.
These signals are "0" in the following case:
- When the machine coordinates along the controlled axes are not within the specified
ranges.
NOTE
These signals are available only for the loader path.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0063 HEAD
G0251 LCB2 LCBS
Fn330 PSW24 PSW23 PSW22 PSW21 PSW20 PSW19 PSW18 PSW17
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0138 MDP

[Data type] Bit
#0 MDP To the extensions of input/output files, a path number is:

0: Not added.
1: Added.
NOTE
The extension ot the loader path 1 is “PL1” and the loader path 2 is
“PL2”.
3141 Path name (1st character)
3142 Path name (2nd character)
3143 Path name (3rd character)

[Valid data range] See the character-code correspondence table.
Specify a path name with codes.
- 1314 -
Any character string consisting of alphanumeric characters, katakana characters, and
special characters with a maximum length of seven characters can be displayed as a series
name.
When the parameter (No.3141) is set to 0 in a loader path, a path name is as follows.
- In case that the loader path 2 does not exit: “LC”
- In case that the loader path 2 exits: “LC1”(loader path 1), “LC2”(loader path 2),
6966 Controlled axis for which the 17th position switch function is performed
: :
6973 Controlled axis for which the 24th position switch function is performed

[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the controlled axis number corresponding to one of the seventeenth to twenty-fourh
position switch functions. When the machine coordinate of the corresponding axis is
within a parameter-set range, the corresponding position switch signal is output to the
PMC.
NOTE
1 The setting 0 means that the position switch function is not used.
2 The 17th to 24th position switch function is available only for the
loader path.
6974 Maximum value of the operating range of the 17th position switch
: :
6981 Maximum value of the operating range of the 24th position switch

Set the maximum value of the operating range of the seventeenth to twnty-fourth position
switches.
NOTE
The 17th to 24th position switch function is available only for the
loader path.
6982 Minimum value of the operating range of the 17th position switch
: :
6989 Minimum value of the operating range of the 24th position switch

Set the minimum value of the operating range of the seventeenth to twnty-fourth position
switches.
- 1315 -
NOTE
The 17th to 24th position switch function is available only for the
loader path.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8104 NLC NL2

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#6 NL2 These parameters are used to enable or disable the function for loader control.
#7 NLC
NLC NL2 Loader path 1 Loader path 2
0 0 ○ ○
0 1 ○ ×
1 0/1 × ×
○: Valid (The path is added.)
×: Invalid (The path is not added.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8106 SCD

[Data type] Bit
#3 SCD When the function for loader control is valid, path selection by pressing MDI keys
and at the same time is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11362 LCI

NOTE
#1 LCI When the function for loader control is valid, a path neme at the lower right of the screen
is displayed in:
0: Normal display.
1: Reverse display.
- 1316 -
NOTE
This parameter is available only for the loader path.
Alarm and message

PS0010 IMPROPER G-CODE An unusable G code is specified.
PS0365 TOO MANY MAXIMUM SV/SP AXIS The maximum control axis number or maximum control spindle
NUMBER PER PATH number which could be used within a path was exceeded.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Function for loader control
- 1317 -
10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
10 AUXILIARY FUNCTION
Chapter 10, "AUXILIARY FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
10.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION ......................................................1318

10.2 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK................................................................................................1331
10.3 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK ...............................................................1332
10.4 HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE .........................................................................................1335
10.5 M CODE GROUPING FUNCTION.............................................................................................1338
10.6 M-CODE PROTECT FUNCTION ...............................................................................................1341
10.7 AUXILIARY FUNCTION OUTPUT IN MOVING AXIS..........................................................1345
10.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION

Overview
- Auxiliary function (M code)
When an M code address is programmed, a code signal and a strobe signal are sent to the machine. The
machine uses these signals to turn on or off its functions.
Usually, only one M code can be specified in one block. In some cases, however, up to five M codes can
be specified for some types of machine tools (see "MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN ONE BLOCK")
Also, parameter No. 3030 can specify the maximum digits and if a specified value exceeds the maximum
digits, an alarm may be issued.
- 2nd auxiliary function (B code)

When up to eight digits are specified after address B, a code signal and strobe signal are sent. These
signals are used to index the rotation axis of the machine. The code signal is retained until another B code
is specified.
In each block, a single B code can be specified. The maximum number of digits that can be specified after
address B is specified in parameter No. 3033. If a specified value exceeds the maximum digits, an alarm
may be issued.
The address for specifying the 2nd auxiliary function can be changed from B to another address (A, C, U,
V, or W) by parameter setting (parameter No. 3460).
Explanation
- Command format of 2nd auxiliary function
Command range
-99999999 to 99999999
Command method
The value specified after the address of the second auxiliary function is output on the code signals B00 to
B31. Note the following about a output value.
1. When a command with a decimal point or a negative command is disabled

(When bit 0 (AUP) of parameter No. 3450 is set to 0)
When the second auxiliary function with no decimal point is specified, the specified value is output
on the code signals as is, regardless of the desktop calculator decimal point setting (bit 0 (DPI) of
parameter No. 3401).
- 1318 -
B-64603EN-1/01 10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION
Example:
Specified value Output value
B10 10
When the second auxiliary function with a decimal point is specified, alarm PS0007 is issued.
When the second auxiliary function is specified with a negative value, alarm PS0006 is issued.
2. When a command with a decimal point or a negative command is enabled

(When bit 0 (AUP) of parameter No. 3450 is set to 1)
When the desktop calculator decimal point setting is not specified (when bit 0 (DPI) of parameter
No. 3401 is set to 0), if the second auxiliary function with no decimal point is specified, the
specified value is output on the code signals as is.
Example:
B10 10
When desktop calculator decimal point input is specified (when bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401 is
set to 1), if the second auxiliary function with no decimal point is specified, the specified value
multiplied by a magnification is output on the code signals. (Magnifications are shown in Table 10.1
(a).)
Example:
B10 10000 (When metric input is used and the reference axis is IS-B. The
magnification is 1000.)
When the second auxiliary function with a decimal point is specified, the specified value multiplied
by a magnification is output to the code signals. (Magnifications are shown in Table 10.1 (a).)
Example:
B10. 10000 (When metric input is used and the reference axis is IS-B. The
magnification is 1000.)
B0.123 1230 (When inch input is used, the reference axis is IS-B, and parameter
AUX is set to 1. The magnification is 10000.)
The magnification is determined as shown below (Table 10.1 (a)) according to the setting unit of the
reference axis (specified by parameter No. 1031) and bit 0 (AUX) of parameter No. 3405.
Table 10.1 (a) Magnifications for an output value when the second auxiliary function with a decimal point is
specified for desktop calculator decimal point input
Parameter Parameter
Setting unit
AUX = 0 AUX = 1
Reference axis: IS-A 100× 100×
Metric input system Reference axis: IS-B 1000× 1000×
Reference axis: IS-C 10000× 10000×
Reference axis: IS-A 100× 1000×
Inch input system Reference axis: IS-B 1000× 10000×
Reference axis: IS-C 10000× 100000×
- 1319 -
CAUTION
If a decimal fraction remains after multiplying the specified value with a decimal
point by a magnitude in Table 10.1 (a), the fraction is truncated.
Example:
B0.12345 1234 (When inch input is used, the reference axis is IS-B, and
parameter AUX is set to 1. The magnification is 10000.)
NOTE
If the number of digits of the specified value exceeds the allowable number of
digits (set by parameter No. 3033), alarm PS0003 is issued.
When the specified value is multiplied by a magnitude in Table 10.1 (a), the
allowable number of digits must be set for the resultant value.
Basic procedure
The following signals (Table 10.1 (b)) are used with these functions. (For details of the spindle-speed
function and tool function, see Chapters “SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION” and “TOOL FUNCTION”.)
Table 10.1 (b)

Program Output signal Input signal
Function
address Code signal Strobe signal Distribution end signal Completion signal
Auxiliary function M M00 to M31 MF DEN FIN
Spindle speed
S S00 to S31 SF
function
Tool function T T00 to T31 TF
2nd auxiliary function B B00 to B31 BF
Each function uses different program addresses and different signals, but they all input and output signals
in the same way, as described below. (A sample procedure for the auxiliary function is described below.
The procedures for the spindle speed function, tool function, and 2nd auxiliary function, are obtained
simply by substituting S, T, or B in place of M.)
<1> Suppose that Mxxx is specified in a program.

For xxx, the number of specifiable digits is specified in parameters Nos. 3030 to 3033 for each
function. If a specified value exceeds the maximum digits, an alarm may be issued.
<2> Code signal M00 to M31 is sent to machine interface. After period TMF, specified in parameter No.
3010 (standard value: 16 msec), the strobe signal MF is set to 1. The code signal is the binary
representation of the programmed value xxx.(*1) If a move, dwell, spindle, or other function is
specified in the same block as the auxiliary function, the execution of the other function is started
when the code signal of the auxiliary function is sent.
<3> When the strobe signal is set to 1, read the code signal and perform the corresponding operation on
the PMC side.
<4> To execute an operation after the completion of the move, dwell or other function specified in the
block, wait until distribution end signal DEN is set to 1.
<5> Upon completion of the operation, set completion signal FIN to 1 on the PMC side. The completion
signal is used by the auxiliary function, spindle function, tool function, 2nd auxiliary function,
external operation function described later, and other functions. If any of these functions are
executed simultaneously, the completion signal must be set to 1 upon completion of all the
functions.
<6> If the completion signal remains set to 1 for longer than period TFIN, specified in parameter No.
3011 (standard value: 16 msec), the CNC sets the strobe signal to 0 and reports that the completion
signal has been received.
<7> When the strobe signal is set to 0, set the completion signal to 0 in the PMC.
- 1320 -
<8> When the completion signal is set to 0, the CNC sets all code signals to 0 and completes all
sequences of the auxiliary function.(*2)
<9> Once all other commands in the same block have been completed, the CNC executes the next block.
(*1) When the tool function is executed, the programmed tool number is sent as the code signal
(lathe series).
(*2) When the spindle-speed function, tool function, or 2nd auxiliary function is executed, the code
signal is maintained until a new code for the corresponding function is specified.
The timing diagram is shown below (Fig. 10.1 (a)):
Example 1 Single auxiliary function specified in a block

<1><2> <3> <5> <6> <7><8><9>
M command (independent) Mxxx

(*2)
Code signals M00 to M31
Strobe signals MF
PMC side action
End signal FIN
Distribution end signals DEN
TMF TFIN
Fig. 10.1 (a)
Example 2 Move command and auxiliary function in the same block

a) Execution of a auxiliary function without waiting for move command
completion
<1><2> <3> <5> <6> <7><8> <9>
M command Mxxx
Move command
Code signals M00 to M31 (*2)
Strobe signal MF
PMC side action
End signal FIN
Distribution end signal DEN
TMF TFIN
- 1321 -
b) Execution of a auxiliary function after move command completion

<1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6><7><8> <9>
M command Mxx
Move command
(*2)
Strobe signal MF
PMC side action
End signal FIN
Distribution end signals DEN
TMF TFIN
Signal
End signal FIN<Gn004.3>
[Function] This signal reports the completion of a auxiliary function, spindle function, tool function,
2nd auxiliary function, or external operation function.
[Operation] For the control unit operation and procedure when this signal goes “1”, see the
description of "Basic procedure" above.
The FIN signal must remain “1” for a certain time (TFIN, which is set by a parameter No.
3011) or longer. The FIN signal driven “1” is ignored if the FIN signal goes “0” before
TFIN elapses.
CAUTION
Only one end signal is used for all functions above. The end signal
must go “1” after all functions are completed.
2nd auxiliary function end signal BFIN<Gn005.7>

[Function] This signal reports the completion of a 2nd auxiliary function using the high-speed
M/S/T/B interface.
[Operation] For the control unit operation and procedure when this signal goes “1”, see the
description of "Basic procedure" above.
Distribution end signal DEN<Fn001.3>

[Function] These signals report that all commands (such as move commands and dwell) are
completed except those auxiliary functions, spindle functions, 2nd auxiliary functions
tool functions, and so forth that are contained in the same block and have been sent to the
PMC. They also report that the end signal from the PMC is being awaited.
[Output cond.] The DEN signal turns to “1” when:
- Waiting for the completion of auxiliary functions, spindle functions, tool functions,
and 2nd auxiliary functions, and all other commands in the same block are
completed, and the current position is in the in-position.
The DEN signal turns to “0” when:
- The execution of one block is completed
- 1322 -
NOTE
1 Bit 5 (NCI) of parameter No. 1601 can specify, whether to only
check if an acceleration/deceleration delay is eliminated, or to
also check if a servo delay (error) has been reduced to within a
certain range.
2 When the high-speed MSTB interface is used, the distribution end
signal DEN may be set to “0” when the execution of one block is
completed. To do this, set bit 2 (CHM) of parameter No. 3002 to
1.
Decode M signals
DM00<Fn009.7>,DM01<Fn009.6>,DM02<Fn009.5>,DM30<Fn009.4>
[Function] These signals report particular auxiliary functions are specified. The auxiliary functions
in a command program correspond to output signals as indicated below.
Command program Output signal

M00 DM00
M01 DM01
M02 DM02
M30 DM30
[Output cond.] A decode M signal goes “1” when:

- The corresponding auxiliary function is specified, and any move commands and
dwell commands specified in the same block are completed. These signals are not
output when the end signal of the auxiliary function is returned before completion of
such move commands and dwell commands.
A decode M signal goes “0” when:
- The FIN signal goes “1”
- Reset occurs

Auxiliary function strobe signal MF<Fn007.0>
[Function] These signals report the specification of auxiliary functions.
[Output cond.] For the output conditions and procedure, see the description of "Basic procedure" above.
NOTE
1 The following auxiliary functions are only processed internally by
the control unit; they are not output to the PMC when programmed:
- M98, M99, M198
- M code that calls a sub program (parameters Nos. 6071 to
6079)
- M code that calls a custom macro (parameters Nos. 6080 to
6089)
2 Decode signals as well as the code signals and strobe signal are
output for the auxiliary functions listed below.
M00, M01, M02, M30
- 1323 -
Spindle function code signals S00 to S31<Fn022 to Fn025>

Spindle function strobe signal SF<Fn007.2>
[Function] These signals report that spindle functions have been specified.
Tool function code signals T00 to T31<Fn026 to Fn029>

Tool function strobe signal TF<Fn007.3>
[Function] These signals report that tool functions have been specified.
2nd auxiliary function code signals B00 to B31<Fn030 to Fn033>

2nd auxiliary function strobe signal BF<Fn007.7>
[Function] These signals report that second auxiliary functions have been specified.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn004 FIN
Gn005 BFIN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn001 DEN
Fn007 BF TF SF MF
Fn009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30
Fn010 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00
Fn011 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08
Fn012 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16
Fn013 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24
Fn022 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00
Fn023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08
Fn024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16
Fn025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24
Fn026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00
Fn027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08
Fn028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16
Fn029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24
Fn030 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00
Fn031 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08
Fn032 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16
- 1324 -
Fn033 B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24
Parameter
3010 Time lag in strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF

[Unit of data] msec
The time required to send strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF after the M, S, T, and B
codes are sent, respectively.
M, S, T, B code
Delay time
NOTE
multiple of four, it is raised to the next multiple of eight
Example
3011 Acceptable width of M, S, T, and B function completion signal (FIN)

[Unit of data] msec
Set the minimum signal width of the valid M, S, T, and B function completion signal
(FIN).
M, S, T, B code
FIN sigal
Ignored because shorter Valid because longer

than min. signal width than min. signal width
- 1325 -
NOTE
multiple of four, it is raised to the next multiple of eight
Example
3030 Allowable number of digits for the M code
3031 Allowable number of digits for the S code
3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code

Set the allowable numbers of digits for the M, S, and T codes.
When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed to be 8.
3033 Allowable number of digits for the B code (second auxiliary function)

Set the allowable number of digits for the second auxiliary function.
To enable a decimal point to be specified, bit 0 (AUP) of parameter No. 3450 must be set
to 1. In this case, the allowable number of digits set in this parameter includes the number
of decimal places.
If a value exceeding the allowable number of digits is specified, the alarm PS0003 is
issued.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3401 DPI

#0 DPI When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a decimal point
0: The least input increment is assumed. (Normal decimal point input)
1: The unit of mm, inches, degree, or second is assumed. (Pocket calculator type
decimal point input)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3404 M02 M30

- 1326 -
#4 M30 When M30 is specified in a memory operation:
0: M30 is sent to the machine, and the head of the program is automatically searched
for. So, when the ready signal FIN is returned and a reset or reset and rewind
operation is not performed, the program is executed, starting from the beginning.
1: M30 is sent to the machine, but the head of the program is not searched for. (The
head of the program is searched for by the reset and rewind signal.)
#5 M02 When M02 is specified in memory operation:

0: M02 is sent to the machine, and the head of the program is automatically searched
for. So, when the end signal FIN is returned and a reset or reset and rewind
operation is not performed, the program is executed, starting from the beginning.
1: M02 is sent to the machine, but the head of the program is not searched for. (The
head of the program is searched for by the reset and rewind signal.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3405 AUX

#0 AUX When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-type decimal point input
format or with a decimal point, the multiplication factor for a value output (onto the code
signal) relative to a specified value is such that:
0: The same multiplication factor is used for both of metric input and inch input.
1: A multiplication factor used for inch input is 10 times greater than that used for
metric input.
When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-type decimal point input
format or with a decimal point, the value output onto the code signal is a specified value
multiplied by a value indicated below.
Increment system Parameter AUX=0 Parameter AUX=1
Metric IS-A for reference axis 100 times 100 times
input IS-B for reference axis 1000 times 1000 times
system IS-C for reference axis 10000 times 10000 times
IS-A for reference axis 100 times 1000 times
Inch input
IS-B for reference axis 1000 times 10000 times
system
IS-C for reference axis 10000 times 100000 times
3411 M code preventing buffering 1

to to

Set M codes that prevent buffering the following blocks. If processing directed by an M
code must be performed by the machine without buffering the following block, specify
the M code.
M00, M01, M02, and M30 always prevent buffering even when they are not specified in
these parameters.
3421 Range specification 1 of M codes that do not perform buffering (lower limit)
3422 Range specification 1 of M codes that do not perform buffering (upper limit)
- 1327 -

When a specified M code is within the range specified with parameters Nos. 3421 and
3422, 3423 and 3424, 3425 and 3426, 3427 and 3428, 3429 and 3430, or 3431 and 3432,
buffering for the next block is not performed until the execution of the block is
completed.
NOTE
M00, M01, M02, and M30 are M codes that do not perform
buffering, regardless of parameter setting.
M98, M99, M codes for calling subprograms, and M codes for
calling custom macros are M codes that performs buffering,
regardless of parameter setting.
3436 Range specification 1 of second auxiliary function codes that do not perform buffering (lower limit)
3437 Range specification 1 of second auxiliary function codes that do not perform buffering (upper limit)
3438 Range specification 2 of second auxiliary function codes that do not perform buffering (lower limit)
3439 Range specification 2 of second auxiliary function codes that do not perform buffering (upper limit)

Set the upper limit and lower limit of a series of second auxiliary function codes that do
not perform buffering.
These parameters are invalid if the setting of an upper limit conflicts with the setting of a
lower limit.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3450 BDX AUP

- 1328 -
#0 AUP The second auxiliary function specified in the calculator-type decimal point input format,
with a decimal point, or with a negative value is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
If the second auxiliary function is specified after setting this bit to 0, the following
operation results:
1. When a value is specified without a decimal point
A specified value is output onto the code signal without modification, regardless of
the setting of the calculator-type decimal point input format (with bit 0 (DPI) of
parameter No. 3401).
2. When a value is specified with a decimal point
The alarm PS0007, “ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT” is issued.
3. When a negative value is specified
The alarm PS0006, “ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN” is issued.
#7 BDX When ASCII code is called using the same address as the address for the second auxiliary
function (specified by parameter No. 3460), this parameter prevents the argument unit
used when the second auxiliary function is enabled from differing from the argument unit
used when the function is disabled.
0: When bit 0 (AUP) of parameter No. 3450 is set to 1, the argument unit differs,
depending on whether the second auxiliary function is enabled or disabled.
1: The same argument unit is used. (The unit applied when the option for the second
auxiliary function is selected is used.)
3460 Second auxiliary function specification address

[Valid data range] 65to67, 85to87
Specify which of A, B, C, U, V, and W is to be used as the address for specifying the
second auxiliary function. If an address used as an axis name is specified, the second
auxiliary function is disabled.
Name A B C U V W
Setting value 65 66 67 85 86 87
Address B is assumed when a value other than the above is set.
However, the name U, V, or W can be used with the T series only when G code system B
or C is used. When a value from 85 to 87 is specified with G code system A, the
specification address for the second auxiliary function is B.

to to

Set M codes that prevent buffering the following blocks. If processing directed by an M
code must be performed by the machine without buffering the following block, specify
the M code.
M00, M01, M02, and M30 always prevent buffering even when they are not specified in
these parameters.
- 1329 -
Note
NOTE
1 When a move command and auxiliary function are specified in the same block,
the commands are executed in one of the following two ways:
(1) Simultaneous execution of the move command and auxiliary function
commands.
(2) Executing auxiliary function commands upon completion of move command
execution.
The selection of either sequence depends on the sequence of PMC.
2 When the 2nd auxiliary function is provided, the address used for specifying the
2nd auxiliary function (B or the address specified with parameter No. 3460)
cannot be used as an axis address.
3 The block following M00, M01, M02 and M30, is not read into the input buffer
register, if present. Similarly, ten M codes which do not buffer can be set by
parameters Nos. 3411 to 3420 and 11290 to 11299.
4 For M00 and M01, auxiliary function code signal, auxiliary function strobe signal,
and M decode signals are only sent; the control of program stop and optional
stop shall be designed on the PMC side.
5 When the automatic operation is stopped by M02 or M30, it is necessary to send
the external reset signal from the machine side to the CNC, instead of the FIN
signal. When the external reset signal is returned against the M02 or M30, the
control returns to the top of the program recently executed, and enters the reset
state. When the FIN signal is returned, the control returns to the beginning of the
program recently executed, and executes it from the top.
6 In programmable data entry (G10)/programmable parameter entry (G10/G11)
command blocks and modes, auxiliary function code (M, S, T, and B) commands
are disabled. If a specified code is not in the G10 command format, alarm
PS1144, "G10 FORMAT ERROR", is issued.
Alarm and message

instruction word.
PS0006 ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN A minus sign (–) was specified at an NC instruction word or
system variable where no minus signal may be specified.
PS0007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT A decimal point (.) was specified at an address where no
decimal point may be specified, or two decimal points were
specified.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Auxiliary function (M code)
2nd auxiliary function (B code)
- 1330 -
10.2 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK

Overview
Inhibits execution of a specified M, S, T and B function. That is, code signals and strobe signals are not
issued. This function is used to check a program.
Signal
Auxiliary function lock signal AFL<Gn005.6>
[Function] This signal selects auxiliary function lock. That is, this signal disables the execution of
specified M, S, T, and B functions.
[Operation] When this signal turns to “1”, the control unit functions as described below.
(1) The control unit does not execute M, S, T, and B functions specified for memory
operation, DNC operation, or MDI operation. That is, the control unit stops the
output of code signals and strobe signals (MF, SF, TF, BF).
(2) If this signal turns to “1” after code signal output, the output operation is executed in
the ordinary manner until its completion (that is, until the FIN signal is received, and
the strobe signal turns to “0”).
(3) Among the auxiliary functions, M00, M01, M02, and M30 are executed even when
this signal is “1”. All code signals, strobe signals, decode signals are output in the
ordinary manner.
(4) Among the auxiliary functions, even when this signal is “1”, those functions (M98
and M99) that are executed in the control unit without outputting their execution
results are executed in the ordinary manner.
CAUTION
Even when this signal is “1”, spindle analog output or spindle serial
output is executed.
Auxiliary function lock check signal MAFL<Fn004.4>

[Function] This signal reports the state of the auxiliary function lock signal AFL.
[Output cond.] This signal turns to “1” when:
- The auxiliary function lock signal AFL is “1”
This signal turns to 0 when:
- The auxiliary function lock signal AFL is “0”
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn005 AFL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn004 MAFL
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Machine lock and auxiliary function lock
- 1331 -
10.3 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK

Overview
So far, one block has been able to contain only one M code. However, this function allows up to three M
codes to be contained in one block, when bit 7(M3B) of parameter No. 3404 is set to 1. And, Up to five
M codes can be specified in a block, when bit 5(M5B) of parameter No. 11630 is set to 1.
Up to five M codes specified in a block are simultaneously output to the machine (PMC). This means that
compared with the conventional method of a single M command in a single block, a shorter cycle time
can be realized in machining.
(Example)
One M command in a single block Multiple M commands in a single block
M40; M40M50M60 M70M80;
M50; G28G91X0Y0Z0;
M60; :
M70; :
M80; :
G28G91X0Y0Z0; :
: :
:
:
Explanation
Basic procedure
(1) Assume that "MaaMbbMccMddMee;" was commanded by the program.
(2) The 1st M command (Maa) sends the code signals M00 to M31 in a manner similar to the
conventional one-block single command. The strobe signal MF is set to “1” after a time TMF set by
parameter No. 3010 (Standard setting: 16 msec).
The second M command (Mbb) sends the code signal M200-M231, the third M command (Mcc)
sends the code signal M300-M331, the forth M command (Mdd) sends the code signal M400-M431,
the fifth M command (Mee) sends the code signal M500-M531, and their respective strobe signals
MF2, MF3, MF4 and MF5 are set to “1”.
Furthermore, the three code signals are sent simultaneously.
The strobe signals MF, MF2, MF3, MF4 and MF5 become “1” at the same time.
The code signal is a binary notation of the program command aa, bb and cc.
(3) On the PMC side, read the code signals corresponding to the respective strobe signals when the
strobe signals become “1”, and perform the appropriate operations.
(4) When the operation of all M commands ends on the PMC side, the end signal (FIN) is set to “1”.
(5) When the completion signal stays “1” for a time (TFIN) set by parameter No. 3011 (Standard: 16
msec), all strobe signals (MF, MF2, MF3, MF4 and MF5) are set to “0” at the same time and the
reception of completion signal is reported.
(6) On the PMC side, when MF, MF2, MF3, MF4 and MF5 are set to “0”, the completion signal is set to
“0”.
- 1332 -
A time chart for this procedure is shown below (Fig. 10.3 (a)):
M command ( MaaMbbMccMddMee;)
Strobe signal MF
PMC side operation

Strobe signal MF2
PMC side operation

Strobe signal MF3
PMC side operation

Strobe signal MF4
PMC side operation

Strobe signal MF5
PMC side operation
End signalFIN
TMF TFIN
Fig. 10.3 (a)
Signal
2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th M function code signals
When three M code in a single block is effective（bit 7(M3B) of parameter No. 3404 is set to 1）
M200 to M215<Fn014 to Fn015>,M300 to M315<Fn016 to Fn017>
When five M code in a single block is effective（bit 5(M5B) of parameter No. 11630 is set to 1）
M200 to M231<Fn014 to Fn017>, M300 to M331<Fn564 to Fn567>
M400 to M431<Fn568 to Fn571>, M500 to M531<Fn572 to Fn575>
2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th M Function strobe signals
MF2 <Fn008.4>,MF3<Fn008.5>,MF4<Fn008.6>,MF5<Fn008.7>
[Function] Indicates that second, third, forth and fifth auxiliary functions have been issued.
[Output cond.] For the output conditions and procedure, see the description of “Basic Procedure” above.
- 1333 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn008 MF5 MF4 MF3 MF2
Fn014 M207 M206 M205 M204 M203 M202 M201 M200
Fn015 M215 M214 M213 M212 M211 M210 M209 M208
When three M code in a single block is effective（bit 7(M3B) of parameter No. 3404 is set to 1）
Fn016 M307 M306 M305 M304 M303 M302 M301 M300
Fn017 M315 M314 M313 M312 M311 M310 M309 M308
When five M code in a single block is effective（bit 5(M5B) of parameter No. 11630 is set to 1）
Fn016 M223 M222 M221 M220 M219 M218 M217 M216
Fn017 M231 M230 M229 M228 M227 M226 M225 M224
Fn564 M307 M306 M305 M304 M303 M302 M301 M300
Fn565 M315 M314 M313 M312 M311 M310 M309 M308
Fn566 M323 M322 M321 M320 M319 M318 M317 M316
Fn567 M331 M330 M329 M328 M327 M326 M325 M324
Fn568 M407 M406 M405 M404 M403 M402 M401 M400
Fn569 M415 M414 M413 M412 M411 M410 M409 M408
Fn570 M423 M422 M421 M420 M419 M418 M417 M416
Fn571 M431 M430 M429 M428 M427 M426 M425 M424
Fn572 M507 M506 M505 M504 M503 M502 M501 M500
Fn573 M515 M514 M513 M512 M511 M510 M509 M508
Fn574 M523 M522 M521 M520 M519 M518 M517 M516
Fn575 M531 M530 M529 M528 M527 M526 M525 M524
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3404 M3B

#7 M3B The number of M codes that can be specified in one block

0: One
1: Up to three
- 1334 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11630 M5B

#5 M5B The number of M codes that can be specified in one block

0: One ( up to three when bit 7(M3B) of parameter No. 3404 is set to 1)
1: Up to five
Caution
CAUTION
1 M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, or M198 must not be specified together with
another M code.
2 Some M codes other than M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, and M198 cannot
be specified together with other M codes; each of those M codes must be
specified alone in a single block. Such M codes include those that make the
CNC perform internal operations in addition to sending the M code signals to the
PMC. For example, such M codes are M codes for calling program numbers
9001 to 9009 and M codes for disabling advance reading (buffering) of
subsequent blocks.
The M codes that can be specified in a single block must be those that the CNC
only sends the M code signals to the PMC side.
Note
NOTE
1 CNC allows up to five M codes to be specified in one block. However, some M
codes cannot be specified at the same time due to mechanical operation
restrictions. For example, M42 can be specified only after the mechanical
operation of M41 is completed.
2 When bit 7(M3B) of parameter No. 3404 is set to 1, the 1st M code can be up to
8 digits and 2nd, 3rd M codes can be the values up to 65535. When bit 5(M5B)
of parameter No. 11630 is set to 1, the 1st to 5th M code can be up to 8 digits.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Multiple M commands in a single block
10.4 HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE

Overview
To accelerate M/S/T/B function execution, the high-speed M/S/T/B interface has simplified the transfer
of the strobe and completion signals of the M/S/T/B functions.
Whether to use the usual system or high-speed system for strobe signal and completion signal handling
can be specified by bit 7 (MHI) of parameter No. 3001.
The description below uses the auxiliary functions (M code commands) as an example. The same
description applies to the spindle function (S code), tool function (T code) and 2nd auxiliary function (B
code).
- 1335 -
Explanation
- Basic procedure
(1) Assume that the following program is given:
Mxx;
Myy;
(2) In response to an M command, the CNC system sends out the code signals M00 to M31.
The CNC system inverts the logical level of the strobe signal MF, that is, from “0” to “1”, or from
“1” to “0”.
(3) The CNC system inverts the strobe signal, then when the logical level of the auxiliary function
completion signal MFIN becomes the same as the strobe signal, the CNC assumes the completion of
PMC sequence.
With the usual method, the operation is assumed to be completed when a falling edge (“1” to “0”) of
the M/S/T/B completion signal FIN is received after a rising edge (“0” to “1”) of the FIN signal is
detected. This new system, on the other hand, assumes the operation has been completed upon
detection of only one transition of the completion signal.
In addition, the usual system uses only one completion signal (FIN) common to the M/S/T/B
functions. This new system uses a different completion signal for each of the M, S, T, and B
functions; the completion signals for the M, S, T, and B functions are MFIN, SFIN, TFIN, and BFIN,
respectively.
The Fig. 10.4 (a) below shows the timing chart of these signals with the new system. For comparison,
Fig. 10.4 (b) shows the timing chart of the conventional system.
Next block
Code signals
Mxx Myy
Strobe signal MF
PMC side operation
Auxiliary function
completion signal MFIN
Fig. 10.4 (a) Timing chart of the high-speed system
Next block
Code signals
Mxx Myy
Strobe signal MF
PMC side operation
Fig. 10.4 (b) Timing chart of the usual system
A high-speed interface can also be used for multiple M commands issued for one block. This interface
provides separate completion signals for each of the 5 M codes. They are called MFIN (the same name as
for the single M command per block function), MFIN2, MFIN3, MFIN4 and MFIN5 respectively. The
signal transfer sequence for multiple M codes per block is the same as that for a single M code per block.
- 1336 -
The high-speed interface can also be used for the external operation function. In this case, special external
operation signal EFD and completion signal EFIN are used.
The procedure for sending and receiving these signals is identical to that for sending and receiving the
strobe and completion signals of the auxiliary function (machining center system).
Signal
Auxiliary function completion signal MFIN<Gn005.0>
[Function] Reports that the execution of a auxiliary function using the high-speed M/S/T/B interface
is completed.
[Operation] For the operation and procedure of the control unit when this signal turns to “1” or “0”,
see the description of "Basic procedure" above.
Spindle function completion signal SFIN<Gn005.2>

[Function] Reports that the execution of a spindle speed function using the high-speed M/S/T/B
interface is completed.
Tool function completion signal TFIN<Gn005.3>

[Function] Reports that the execution of a tool function using the high-speed M/S/T/B interface is
completed.
2nd auxiliary function completion signal BFIN<Gn005.7>

[Function] Reports that the execution of a second auxiliary function using the high-speed M/S/T/B
2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th M function completion signals

MFIN2<Gn004.4>,MFIN3<Gn004.5>, MFIN4<Gn004.6>, MFIN5<Gn004.7>
[Function] Indicate that when the high-speed interface is used for multiple M commands per block,
the 2nd to 5th M functions have been completed.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn004 MFIN5 MFIN4 MFIN3 MFIN2
Gn005 BFIN TFIN SFIN MFIN
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3001 MHI

- 1337 -
#7 MHI Exchange of strobe and completion signals for the M, S, T, and B

0: Normal
1: High-speed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3002 CHM

#0 CHM For high-speed M/S/T/B, the distribution end signal DEN and an auxiliary function code
signal M00 to M31 are:
0: Not turned off even upon completion of the execution of the auxiliary function.
1: Turned off upon completion of the execution of the auxiliary function.
Note
NOTE
1 The strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF are “0” when the power is turned on.
2 When the control unit is reset, MF, SF, TF, and BF are set to “0”.
3 Using bit 0 (CHM) of parameter No. 3002, select whether to turn the distribution
end signal DEN and the auxiliary function code signals M00 to M31 to “0” at the
completion of one block.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Auxiliary function, 2nd auxiliary function
(This manual) Multiple M commands in a single block
10.5 M CODE GROUPING FUNCTION

Overview
Classifying up to 500 M codes into up to 127 groups allows the user:
• To receive an alarm if an M code that must be specified alone is included when multiple M codes are
specified in a block.
• To receive an alarm if M codes belonging to the same group are specified in the same block when
multiple M codes are specified in a block.
NOTE
Setting an M code group number using the setting screen

- Procedure for displaying the M code group setting screen
You can use the “M code group setting screen” to set a group number for each M code.
Display the “M code group setting screen” using the following procedure:
1 Press function key and the continuous menu key several times. Soft key [M CODE GROUP]
appears.
2 Press soft key [M CODE GROUP].
- 1338 -
In the “NO.” field, M codes for which an M code group can be set are displayed.
An M code group can be set for the following M codes: M00 to M99, and any 400 M codes selected from
M100 and subsequent M codes. For details of how to add the 100th and subsequent M codes, see the
explanation of parameters Nos. 3441 to 3444.
In the “DATA” field, the M code group number corresponding to each M code is displayed.
- Setting a group number

To set an M code group number on the “M code group setting screen,” use the following procedure:
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Set “PARAMETER WRITING” on the setting screen to 1.
3 Display the “M code group setting screen.
4 Move the cursor to the M code to be set using page keys and cursor keys. You can also enter the
number of the M code to be set and press soft key [NO.SRH] to move the cursor to the M code.
5 Enter a group number and press soft key [INPUT] or the key.
The valid range of M code group numbers is from 1 to 127 (127 groups). If a value of 0 is input, it is not
registered as an M code group.
- Examples of setting parameters Nos. 3441 to 3444

In the following examples, the number of digits of an M code is 4.
<1> to <4> indicate parameters Nos. 3441 to 3444.
(1) When <1> = 300, <2> = 400, <3> = 500, and <4> = 900 are set
Number
0000
: 100 codes
0099
0300
: 100 codes
0399
0400 M code groups can be set for M0000 to M0099,
: 100 codes M0300 to M0599, and M0900 to M999.
0499 M codes M0300 to M0599 and M0900 to M999 are
0500 added to the M code group setting screen.
: 100 codes
0599
0900
: 100 codes
0999
- 1339 -
(2) When <1> = 200, <2> = 0, <3> = 550, and <4> = 800 are set
Number
0000
:
0099
0200 M code groups can be set for M0000 to M0099,
: M0200 to M0299, M0550 to M0649, and M0800
0299 to M0899.
0550 (The setting of parameter <2> is invalid because
: it is 0.)
0649 In this case, M codes M0200 to M0299, M0550 to
0800 M0649, and M0800 to M0899 are added to the
: M code group setting screen.
0899
M code group check function

When multiple M commands in a single block (enabled when bit 7 (M3B) of parameter No. 3404 is set to
1) are used, you can check the following items. You can also select whether to check the items using bit 1
(MGC) of parameter No. 3400.
(1) M code to be specified in a single block containing no other M codes
If an M code which must be specified in a single block containing no other M codes is specified
together with another M code, an alarm PS5016, ”ILLEGAL COMBINATION OF M CODES” is
issued.
(2) M codes in the same group
If multiple M codes in the same group are specified together, an alarm PS5016 is issued.
The valid range of group numbers is from 0 to 127 (128 groups).

Group numbers 0 and 1 have special meaning. Note the following points:
• Each M code with group number 1 is assumed to be an M code to be specified in a single block
containing no other M codes.
• For each M code with group number 0, the “same group M code check” is ignored. That is, when
multiple M codes with group number 0 are specified in a single block, the alarm is not issued.
• For each M code with group number 0, the “check for an M code to be specified in a single block
containing no other M codes” is not ignored. That is, if an M code with group number 1 and an M
code with group number 0 are specified in a single block, the alarm is issued.
• For M codes that are not to be output to the machine such as M98, M99, M198, and M codes for
subprogram and macro calls (set in parameters Nos. 6071 to 6079 and Nos. 6080 to 6089 and with
the macro executor), be sure to set 0 as the group number.
• For M00, M01, M02, M30, and M codes for which buffering is suppressed (set in parameters Nos.
3411 to 3432 and 11290 to 11299), be sure to set 1 as the group number.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3400 MGC

#1 MGC When a single block specifies multiple M commands, an M code group check is:
0: Made.
1: Not made.
- 1340 -
3441 Start number of M codes for which an M code group can be set (1)

[Valid data range] 0, 100to99999999
Code numbers 0 to 99 on the M code group setting screen correspond to M00 to M99.
When adding M codes after the first 100 M codes, specify a start M code number in these
parameters. Thus, up to 400 M codes can be added to the M code group setting screen in
groups of 100 M codes starting with the set value. When 0 is set, no M codes are added to
the M code group setting screen.
When setting these parameters, follow the setting condition described below. If the
condition is not satisfied, no M codes are added to the M code group setting screen as in
the case where 0 is set.
(Setting condition)
The settings of parameters (1) to (4) (excluding the setting of 0) must satisfy:
99 < (1), (1)+99 < (2), (2)+99 < (3), (3) +99 < (4)
Alarm and message

PS5016 ILLEGAL COMBINATION OF M CODES M codes which belonged to the same group were specified
in a block. Alternatively, an M code which must be
specified without other M codes in the block was specified
in a block with other M codes.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) M Code Grouping Function
10.6 M-CODE PROTECT FUNCTION

Overview
This function permits the execution of specific M-codes (miscellaneous functions) only if they are
specified from within a program called with a macro call.
This makes it possible to protect specific M-codes for use in macro programs for machine control from
illegal use in user machining programs.
NOTE
Detailed explanation
This function permits the execution of M codes for use as miscellaneous functions only if they are
specified from with a program called with a macro call.
Set the M codes to protect, as described below.

(1) Setting them individually
Set the M codes to protect in parameters Nos. 11631 to 11640.
- 1341 -
Up to ten M codes can be set.

(2) Setting a range
Set a range of M codes to protect in parameters Nos. 11641 to 11646. Up to three ranges of M
codes can be set.
Example of setting)
1st set 2nd set 3rd set
M code No.11641＝50 No.11643＝150 No.11645＝900
Number of codes No.11642＝10 No.11644＝5 No.11646＝30
M codes to protect M50 to M59 M150 to M154 M900 to M929
Example of use)
Parameter No. 11631 = 50: M50 is set as the M code to protect.
Macro program called by
Main program M100 with a macro call
O001 ; O9020 ;
G90 G00 : G28 G90 Z10. :
: :
: :
M100 ; M50 ; (1)
: :
: :
M50 ; (2) M99 ;
:
:
In this example, the following takes place:

(1) The M50 command specified for protection is specified from within a program called with a macro
call and is, therefore, executable.
(2) The M50 command specified for protection is specified from within the main program and is,
therefore, not executable. (Alarm PS0501, “THE COMMANDED M-CODE CAN NOT BE
EXECUTED” is issued.)
NOTE
1 Macro calls that can execute the M codes (auxiliary functions) specified for
protection are as follows:
- Macro call using a G/M code
- Macro call using a macro interruption
- Macro call using a T/S/second auxiliary function code
(With this function, they are treated as macro calls.)
2 The calls below cannot execute the M codes specified for protection.
- Macro call using a G65/G66/G66.1
- Subprogram call
(except a T/S/second auxiliary function code.)
3 M code commands from execution macros are always executable.
- 1342 -
NOTE
4 It is possible to specify the target M codes (auxiliary functions) from a
subprogram in a state in which a macro call is already executed.
Example) Main program
→ Macro call
→ Subprogram call
(M code command)
The target M code is specified from a subprogram called from a macro program
and is, therefore, executable.
5 This function is invalid to the following M codes:
- M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99
Parameter
11631 M code 1 to protect

[Valid data range] 3 to 99999999 (except 30, 98, and 99)
In connection with the M code protect function, these parameters set the M codes
(auxiliary functions) to be permitted for execution from macro programs only.
NOTE
Set 0 in any of the parameters that are not used.
11641 M code start number to protect (1st set)
11643 M code start number to protect (2nd set)
11645 M code start number to protect (3rd set)

[Valid data range] 3 to 99999999 (except 30, 98, and 99)
11642 Number of M codes to protect (1st set)
11644 Number of M codes to protect (2nd set)
- 1343 -
11646 Number of M codes to protect (3rd set)

In connection with the M code protect function, these parameters set the M codes
(auxiliary functions) to be permitted for execution from macro programs only. Set an M
code number and the number of consecutive M codes.
Up to three such sets can be set.
Any sets in which either the M code number or the number of M codes is out of range are
invalid.
Example of setting)
1st set 2nd set 3rd set
M code No.11641＝50 No.11643＝150 No.11645＝900
Number of codes No.11642＝10 No.11644＝5 No.11646＝30
M codes to protect M50 to M59 M150 to M154 M900 to M929
Example of use)
Parameter No. 11631 = 50: M50 is set as the M code to protect.
Macro program called by
Main program M100 with a macro call
O001 ; O9020 ;
G90 G00 : G28 G90 Z10. :
: :
: :
M100 ; M50 ; (1)
: :
: :
M50 ; (2) M99 ;
:
:
In this example, the following takes place:

(1) The M50 command specified for protection is specified from within a program
called with a macro call and is, therefore, executable.
(2) The M50 command specified for protection is specified from within the main
program and is, therefore, not executable. (Alarm PS0501 is issued.)
NOTE
1 Macro calls that can execute the M codes (auxiliary functions)
specified for protection are as follows:
- Macro call using a G/M code
- Macro call using a macro interruption
- Macro call using a T/S/second auxiliary function code
(With this function, they are treated as macro calls.)
2 The calls below cannot execute the M codes specified for
protection.
- Macro call using a G65/G66/G66.1
- Subprogram call
(except a T/S/second auxiliary function code.)
3 M code commands from execution macros are always executable.
- 1344 -
NOTE
4 It is possible to specify the target M codes (auxiliary functions) from
a subprogram in a state in which a macro call is already executed.
Example) Main program
→ Macro call
→ Subprogram call
(M code command)
The target M code is specified from a subprogram called from a
macro program and is, therefore, executable.
5 M code commands in MDI mode are also checked in the same
way.
6 This function is invalid to the following M codes:
- M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99
Alarm and message

No. Message Description
PS0501 THE COMMANDED M-CODE CAN NOT The M code set in one of parameters Nos. 11631 to 11646
BE EXECUTED is specified from other than a macro call with an execution
macro, macro interruption, or a G/M code or from other
than a subprogram call with a T/S/second auxiliary function
code.
10.7 AUXILIARY FUNCTION OUTPUT IN MOVING AXIS

Overview
By specifying absolute coordinate values and auxiliary functions (M, B) at G50.9 block, the auxiliary
functions are output to PMC when absolute coordinate enters the specified area in the next movement
block.
G50.9 can be specified up to 2 blocks consecutively. In other words, auxiliary function output points in
a movement block can be specified up to two.
Code signals and strobe signals are output to the same signal address as a usual auxiliary function.
NOTE
- 1345 -
Format
G50.9 IP_ Mm11 Mm12 Mm13 Bb11 ;
G50.9 IP_ Mm21 Mm22 Mm23 Bb21 ;
(Movement command block) Mm01 Mm02 Mm03 Bb01 Ss01 Tt01 ;
IP_ : Auxiliary function output start point. (Absolute coordinate value)
M m11 : 1st M auxiliary function (1st block)
M m12 : 2nd M auxiliary function (1st block)
M m13 : 3rd M auxiliary function (1st block)
B b11 : 2nd auxiliary function (1st block)
M m21 : 1st M auxiliary function (2nd block)
M m22 : 2nd M auxiliary function (2nd block)
M m23 : 3rd M auxiliary function (2nd block)
B b21 : 2nd auxiliary function (2nd block)
M m01 : 1st M auxiliary function (movement block)
M m02 : 2nd M auxiliary function (movement block)
M m03 : 3rd M auxiliary function (movement block)
B b01 : 2nd auxiliary function (movement block)
S s01 : Spindle speed command
T t01 : T command (Tool compensation)
- At least one axis of auxiliary function output start point must be commanded at G50.9 block. The
alarm PS5330, ” G50.9 FORMAT ERROR” occurs if there is not an axis address at G50.9 block.
- At least one auxiliary function must be commanded at G50.9 block. The alarm PS5330,” G50.9
FORMAT ERROR” occurs if an auxiliary function isn't commanded.
- It is possible to command G50.9 block up to 2 blocks consecutively. The alarm PS5330,” G50.9
FORMAT ERROR” occurs if more than 3 blocks are commanded.
- Incremental programming cannot be specified in G50.9 block. The alarm PS0009, ”IMPROPER
NC ADDRESS” occurs. Also, in case of incremental mode (G91) in G code system B/C,
incremental programming in G50.9 block is regarded as absolute programming.
Operation
(1) At the start point of movement block, M/S/T/B codes (m01,m02,m03,b01,s01,t01) of movement block
are output to PMC, and moving is started.
The 1st output start point The 2nd output start point
Mm01,Mm02,Mm03,Bb01,Ss01,Tt01 of
movement block are output to PMC at the
start point.
- 1346 -
(2) When moving to the 1st output start point that is specified at the 1st G50.9 block, if FIN processing of
M/S/T/B code which was output to PMC in (1) has completed, M code (m11,m12,m13) and B code
(b11) of the 1st G50.9 block are output to PMC.
If FIN processing has not completed, M code (m11,m12,m13) and B code (b11) are not output to
PMC at the 1st output start point. They are output immediately after FIN processing completes.
Code signals and strobe signals are output to the same signal address as usual auxiliary function.
Mm11,Mm12,Mm13,Bb11 specified at the

1st G50.9 block are output to PMC
(3) When moving to the 2nd output start point that is specified at the 2nd G50.9 block, if FIN processing
of M/S/T/B code which was output to PMC in (2) has completed, M code (m21,m22,m23) and B
code (b21) of the 2nd G50.9 block are output to PMC.
If FIN processing has not completed, M code (m21,m22,m23) and B code (b21) are not output to
PMC at the 2nd output start point. They are output immediately after FIN processing completes.
Mm21,Mm22,Mm23,Bb21 specified at the

2nd G50.9 block are output to PMC.
(4) When movement completes, if absolute coordinate has not reached the value that was specified at
G50.9 blocks, the alarm PS5331, “ILLEGAL COMMANDED POSITION“ occurs.
Specification of output start point
When coordinates for 2 axes are specified
Specified coordinate Absolute coordinate when
at G50.9 block. G50.9 executes.
Auxiliary functions are output when absolute
coordinate enters this area.
- 1347 -
When coordinate for 1 axis is specified
Specified coordinate Absolute coordinate when
at G50.9 block. G50.9 executes.
Auxiliary functions are output when absolute
coordinate enters this area.
Priority of auxiliary function output

If absolute coordinate have entered the area that was specified at the 2nd G50.9 block while they have not
entered the area that was specified at the 1st G50.9 block, auxiliary function of the 2nd G50.9 block are
not output at that time. After absolute coordinate entered the area that was specified at the 1st G50.9
block and FIN processing completed, auxiliary function of the 2nd G50.9 block are output finally.
Alarm at movement completion

When movement completes, if absolute coordinate has not reached the value that was specified at G50.9
blocks, the alarm PS5331, ”ILLEGAL COMMANDED POSITION” occurs.
The alarm PS5331, ”ILLEGAL COMMANDED POSITION” occurs if next block after G50.9 block is no
movement command because absolute coordinate does not reach to the value that was specified at G50.9
block.
Example 1) M code
G00 X100. ;
G50.9 X200. M128 ;
M01; ← The alarm PS5331 occurs.
G00 X300. ;
Example 2) Empty block

G00 X100. ;
G50.9 X200. M128 ;
; (Empty block) ← The alarm PS5331 occurs.
G00 X300. ;
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3001 MHI

#7 MHI Handshake of strobe and completion signals for the M, S, T, and B

0: Normal
1: High-speed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3104 DAC DAL

- 1348 -
#6 DAL The displayed absolute position is

0: The actual position that takes tool length offset into account.
1: The programmed position that does not take tool length offset into account.
NOTE
In lathe systems, whether a tool offset is excluded from displaying
absolute position is determined by the setting of bit 1 (DAP) of
parameter No.3129.
#7 DAC When an absolute position are displayed:

0: Values not excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool
nose radius compensation are displayed.
1: Values excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool nose
radius compensation (programmed positions) are displayed.
NOTE
When the parameter DAC is set to 1, in the command like circle
interpolation where the cutter compensation vector is changed
constantly, an absolute position is not correctly displayed during its
interpolation except its start point and its end point.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3129 DAP


0: The actual position including a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed.
NOTE
In machining center systems, whether the tool length offset is
excluded from displaying absolute position is determined according
to the setting of bit 6 (DAL) of parameter No.3104.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8132 TLF
NOTE

[Data type] Bit Path
#0 TLF Tool life management is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
- 1349 -
Signal
2nd M function code signals M200 to M215<Fn014 to Fn015>
3rd M function code signals M300 to M315<Fn016 to Fn017>
Auxiliary function strobe signal MF<Fn007.0>
2nd M Function strobe signal MF2<Fn008.4>
3rd M Function strobe signal<Fn008.5>
[Function] These signals report that M codes have been specified.
[Output cond.] About output condition, procedure etc, please refer to the section, "AUXILIARY
FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION" and "MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A
SINGLE BLOCK" in this manual.
2nd auxiliary function code signals B00 to B31<Fn030 to Fn033>

2nd auxiliary function strobe signal BF<Fn007.7>
[Function] These signals report that second auxiliary functions have been specified.
[Output cond.] About output condition, procedure etc, please refer to the section, "AUXILIARY
FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION" in this manual.
End signal FIN<Gn004.3>

[Function] This signal reports the completion of an auxiliary function, a spindle function, a tool
function, a 2nd auxiliary function, or an external operation function.
[Operation] About input condition, procedure etc, please refer to the section, "AUXILIARY
Auxiliary function completion signal MFIN<Gn005.0>

[Function] Reports that the execution of an auxiliary function using the high-speed M/S/T/B
2nd M function completion signal MFIN2<Gn004.4>

3rd M function completion signal MFIN3<Gn004.5>
[Function] Indicate that when the high-speed interface is used for multiple M commands per block,
the 2nd to 3rd M functions have been completed.
FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION" and "MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A
SINGLE BLOCK" in this manual.
2nd auxiliary function completion signal BFIN<Gn005.7>

[Function] Reports that the execution of a second auxiliary function using the high-speed M/S/T/B
interface is completed
- 1350 -
Auxiliary function during axis movement output signal

MVAF1<Fn316.4>, MVAF2<Fn316.5>
[Function] Indicates that auxiliary functions specified at G50.9 blocks are outputting.
1st output point : MVAF1
2nd output point : MVAF2
[Output cond.] These signals turn to “1” when
- The absolute coordinate reach the 1st output point and auxiliary function code
signals M00 to M31<Fn010 to Fn013> or 2nd auxiliary function code signals B00 to
B31<Fn030 to Fn033> are output.
- The absolute coordinate reach the 2nd output point and auxiliary function code
signals M00 to M31<Fn010 to Fn013> or 2nd auxiliary function code signals B00 to
B31<Fn030 to Fn033> are output.
These signals turn to “0” when
- Each FIN processing has been completed.
- Reset occurs
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn004 MFIN3 MFIN2 FIN
Gn005 BFIN AFL TFIN SFIN MFIN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn007 BF TF SF MF
Fn008 MF3 MF2
Fn010 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00
Fn011 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08
Fn012 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16
Fn013 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24
Fn014 M207 M206 M205 M204 M203 M202 M201 M200
Fn015 M215 M214 M213 M212 M211 M210 M209 M208
Fn016 M307 M306 M305 M304 M303 M302 M301 M300
Fn017 M315 M314 M313 M312 M311 M310 M309 M308
Fn030 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00
Fn031 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08
Fn032 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16
Fn033 B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24
Fn316 MVAF2 MVAF1
- 1351 -
Example of ladder sequence

Axes movement
Axes movement
M code signals Mm01 Mm11 Mm21

<Fn010-Fn013>
MF<Fn007.0>
FIN<Gn004.3>
MVAF1<Fn316.4>
MVAF2<Fn316.5>
Alarm and message

PS5330 G50.9 FORMAT ERROR - There is not coordinates value specification in G50.9
block.
- There is not M code, B code command in the G50.9
block.
- G50.9 is commanded in canned cycle mode.
- 3 blocks of G50.9 block are commanded consecutively.
PS5331 ILLEGAL COMMANDED POSITION It didn't reach a commanded absolute coordinate value. The
movement command or absolute coordinates at G50.9
block are wrong.
Note
Tool nose radius compensation/Cutter compensation C
Because G50.9 block is treated as a block without movement, “Tool nose radius compensation” and
“Cutter compensation C” are temporarily canceled when two G50.9 blocks are commanded
consecutively.
Tool compensation
When tool compensation amount is changed by T code at the movement block, absolute coordinate value
changes according to tool compensation amount. Therefore, absolute coordinate value sometimes enters
the area specified by G50.9 block, at the head of the movement block.
Program restart
The histories of M code displayed in the screen of program restart are not in actual output order but in
commanded block order.
Multiple M commands in a single block

The parameter M3B (No.3404#7) must be set to 1 in order to command multiple M codes in one block.
- 1352 -
M30, M02, M00, M01

Decode signals DM30, DM02, DM01, DM00 are not output while axes are moving if M30, M02, M01,
M00 are specified at G50.9 block. These decode signals are output at movement completion, but not
output if FIN processing for M30, M02, M01, M00 have already completed.
M98, M198
Subprogram call M code (M98, M198) cannot be commanded at G50.9 block.
The alarm PS0076, ”PROGRAM NOT FOUND” occurs.
Macro call M code

Custom macro call M code cannot be commanded at G50.9 block.
Tool life management, Tool management

Even if the M code (M06, etc.) which counts tool life is commanded at G50.9 block, tool life count isn't
done.
NOTE
1 Tool management is optional function.
2 For using tool life management, set parameter TLF (No.8132#0) to 1.
Waiting M code
Even if a waiting M code is commanded at the G50.9 block, waiting function isn't executed. It is
recognized as a usual auxiliary function.
Rigid tapping beginning M code

Even if M code (M29) for beginning rigid tap is commanded at G50.9 block, a mode doesn't switch over
to rigid tapping.
M code group check

If plural M codes of one group are commanded at G50.9 block, the alarm PS5016, ”ILLEGAL
COMBINATION OF MCODES” occurs.
Manual handle retrace
G50.9 block and movement block cannot move backward in manual handle retrace mode.
Only forward movement is possible.
Canned cycle
Canned cycle cannot be specified as movement command block.
Auxiliary function lock

According to the condition of Auxiliary function lock signal AFL <Gn005.6> at beginning of movement
block, auxiliary functions are output to PMC.
- 1353 -

signal AFL<Gn005.6>
The 1st output start point
Movement Axes movement
M code signals
No output No output
<Fn010-Fn013>
MF<Fn007.0>
FIN<Gn004.3>

signal AFL<Gn005.6>
The 1st output start point
Movement Axes movement
M code signals
Mm01 Mm11
<Fn010-Fn013>
MF<Fn007.0>
FIN<Gn004.3>
M code for spindle command (M03/M04/M05)

M code for spindle command (M03/M04/M05) is cannot be specified in G50.9 block.
These M codes are recognized as usual auxiliary functions.
M code that is set by parameter

M code in which specific operation is enabled by parameter setting is cannot be specified in G50.9 block.
This M code is recognized as a usual auxiliary function.
Retrace (M system)
G50.9 block and movement block cannot move backward. Only forward movement is possible.
Dynamic graphic display

Instruction information of M code that is specified in G50.9 block is not displayed in Path Drawing
screen/Animation screen
Manual intervention
Do not operate manual intervention in G50.9 block.
Single block
During single block operation, G50.9 block stops.
- 1354 -
Incremental programming
Incremental programming cannot be specified in G50.9 block. The alarm PS0009, ”IMPROPER
NC ADDRESS” occurs.
Also, in case of incremental mode (G91) in G code system B/C, incremental programming in G50.9 block
is treated as absolute programming.
- 1355 -
11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
11 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION

Chapter 11, "SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
11.1 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT)..................................................................1356

11.2 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT.......................................................................................................1357
11.3 SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUT....................................................................................................1368
11.4 SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL..................................................................................1372
11.5 SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL .....................................................................................................1377
11.6 SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC .........................................................................1404
11.7 EXTENDED SPINDLE NAME ...................................................................................................1410
11.8 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL .............................................................................1410
11.9 ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT (T SERIES)...................................................................1422
11.10 SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES)........................................................................................1424
11.11 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL ..........................................................................................................1456
11.12 MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL ....................................................................................................1491
11.13 RIGID TAPPING..........................................................................................................................1517
11.14 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL....................................................................................1598
11.15 SPINDLE ORIENTATION ..........................................................................................................1623
11.16 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING ..............................................................................................1629
11.17 SPINDLE COMMAND SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL .............................................................1632
11.18 SPINDLE COMMAND SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL INDEPENDENT PITCH ERROR
COMPENSATION FUNCTION ..................................................................................................1644
11.19 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION (T SERIES) ................................................1648
11.20 SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO MOTOR..........................................................................1659
11.21 SPINDLE REVOLUTION NUMBER HISTORY FUNCTION ..................................................1715
11.22 SERVO/SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL .....................................................................1717
11.23 HIGH-PRECISION SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL ....................................................................1739
11.24 SIMPLE SPINDLE ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX ........................................................................1743
11.25 SPINDLE SPEED COMMAND CLAMP ....................................................................................1748
11.26 SETTING OF FEEDBACK PULSES FOR SPINDLE FEEDBACK PULSES ...........................1751
11.27 RESOLUTION OF SPINDLE SPEED COMMAND...................................................................1753
11.1 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT)

Overview
When up to five digits are specified after address S, code and strobe signals are sent out and used to
control the spindle speed. The code signals are retained until another S code is issued.
One S code is used for each block. Parameter No. 3031 can be used to specify the maximum number of
digits. If a number greater than the maximum number is specified, an alarm can be raised.
Signal
Refer to section "Auxiliary Function/Second Auxiliary Function."
Parameter
3031 Allowable number of digits for the S code
[Data type] Byte

Set the allowable numbers of digits for the S code.
- 1356 -
B-64603EN-1/01 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Note
NOTE
1 When a move command and a spindle-speed function command are specified
within the same block, the commands are executed in either of the following two
ways:
(1) The move command and spindle-speed function are started at the same time.
(2) After the move command is completed, the spindle-speed function command
is started.
Whether (1) or (2) takes place depends on the processing on the PMC side.
2 For S code output when spindle serial output or spindle analog output is used,
see Section 11.4, "SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL".
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Auxiliary function/2nd auxiliary function
(this manual) Spindle speed control
11.2 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT

Overview
Spindle serial output is a spindle motor control interface.
The spindle serial output can control up to four serial spindles (up to third serial spindles per path).
There are two types of spindle motor control interfaces: spindle serial output and spindle analog output,
and this section explains the spindle serial output.
Explanation
The terms "logical n-th spindle", "n-th spindle in a path", and "n-th spindle amplifier" in the subsequent
descriptions refer to the following:
• Logical n-th spindle:
The n-th spindle to be controlled in the overall system
• N-th spindle (in a path):
The n-th spindle to be controlled in a path.
The first, second, third, and fourth spindles in the descriptions refer to relative spindle numbers
within a path. (For a single-path system, the logical n-th spindle equals the n-th spindle.)
• N-th spindle amplifier:
The n-th spindle amplifier (amplifier No. n) actually connected to the CNC.
For the relationships between them, see "Spindle numbers vs. spindle motors" described later.
For how to set a spindle configuration for each path in multipath control, see the description of spindles in
"Multipath Control".
The Table 11.2 (a) and Table 11.2 (a) lists the relationship between the spindles and functions.
Table 11.2 (a)

Spindle Serial spindle (*1)
Function First spindle Second spindle Third spindle Fourth spindle
Threading/feed per revolution
Available Available(*3) Available(*3) Available(*3)
(synchronous feed)
Constant surface spindle control Available Available(*3) Available(*3) Available(*3)
Spindle speed fluctuation detection (T
series)
- 1357 -
Spindle Serial spindle (*1)

Function First spindle Second spindle Third spindle Fourth spindle
Actual spindle speed output (T series) Available Available(*3) Available(*3) Available(*3)
Spindle positioning (T series) Available Available(*3) Available(*3) Available(*3)
Cs contour control Available Available Available Available
Multi-spindle control Available Available Available Available
Rigid tapping Available Available(*3) Available(*3) Available(*3)
Spindle synchronous control Available Available Available Available
Spindle command synchronous control Available Available Available Available
Spindle control unit functions, such as
spindle orientation, spindle output Available Available Available Available
switching, spindle switching, and etc. (*4)
Polygon turning (T series) (using the
servo motor axis and spindle)
Polygon machining with two spindles (T
Available Available Available Available
series)
Spindle output control by the PMC Available Available Available Available
NOTE
1 The spindle serial output is required (Bit 5 (SSN) of parameter No.8133 is 1).
2 The multi-spindle control option is required (M series). Multi-spindle control is
required. (To use multi-spindle control, set bit 3 (MSP) of parameter No. 8133
to 1, and bit 1 (EMS) of parameter No. 3702 to 0.)
3 These functions belong to the spindle control unit. They cannot be used unless
the spindle control unit supports those functions.
- Spindle numbers vs. spindle motors

Logical spindle numbers are associated with spindle motors as follows:
1. Logical spindle numbers and amplifier numbers

Logical spindle numbers indicate the order of spindles to be controlled (the logical arrangement
order). Parameters for the individual spindles are arranged in this order. Logical spindle numbers are
assigned sequentially from 1 to the maximum number of spindles. DI/DO signals are allocated for
each spindle number within a path, and their signal locations are incremented by 1000 for each path.
Amplifier numbers indicate the order of spindle amplifiers actually connected to the CNC (the
physical arrangement order). They are assigned as shown below (Fig. 11.2 (a)). When a spindle
motor is connected to each spindle amplifier, the spindle amplifier numbers and spindle motor
numbers match.
- 1358 -
2. Setting method
CNC main Servo card Servo motor

FSSB Line Servo amplifier
COP10A-1 Servo motor
board (Three-axis)
Servo motor
Spindle amplifier
Spindle motor
(Number 1)
Spindle amplifier
Spindle motor
(Number 2)
Servo amplifier
Servo motor
(Single-axis)
Servo amplifier Servo motor

(Two-axis) Servo motor
Spindle amplifier
Spindle motor
(Number 3)
Spindle amplifier
Spindle motor
(Number 4)
Fig. 11.2 (a) Connection of serial spindles
For each spindle, set the type of the motor in bit 0 (A/S) of parameter No. 3716, and set the amplifier
number in parameter No. 3717. For spindles not to be used, set 0 as the amplifier numbers.
Example 1)
When using one serial spindle in a single-path system
Parameter First spindle Second spindle Third spindle Fourth spindle
Bit 0 (A/S) of parameter No. 3716 1 0 0 0
No.3717 1 0 0 0
Example 2)
When using four serial spindles in a single-path system
No.3717 1 2 3 4
NOTE
In addition, it is necessary to set FSSB. Refer to the section, "FSSB Setting" in
this manual for details.
Signal
Spindle control unit signals for the serial spindle
<Gn070 - Gn073><Gn304 - Gn307><Fn045 - Fn048><Fn306 - Fn307> : 1st spindle
<Gn074 - Gn077><Gn308 - Gn311><Fn049 - Fn052><Fn308 - Fn309> : 2nd spindle
<Gn204 - Gn207><Gn312 - Gn315><Fn168 - Fn171><Fn310 - Fn311> : 3rd spindle
<Gn266 - Gn269><Gn316 - Gn319><Fn266 - Fn269><Fn312 - Fn313> : 4th spindle
These addresses are assigned to locations on the CNC, but the signals at these addresses
are input/output signals of the serial spindle control unit. For details of the signals at these
addresses, refer to the following manuals of serial spindles:
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series DESCRIPTIONS (B-65282EN)
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series DESCRIPTIONS (B-65272EN)
- 1359 -
Serial spindle control unit signals (such as the alarm signals ALMA, ALMB<F045.0,
F049.0> etc) are disabled and its operation is not guaranteed after power-on until the
parameters have been transferred from the CNC to the spindle amplifier.
After checking the following spindle operation ready signals to see the ready status, use
serial spindle control unit signals.
Spindle ready signals

SRSP1R<Fn034.6> : 1st spindle
SRSP2R<Fn034.5> : 2nd spindle
SRSP3R<Fn034.4> : 3rd spindle
SRSP4R<Fn034.3> : 4th spindle
[Function] These signals post that a corresponding spindle is ready for operation.
These signals are set to “1” when:
The corresponding spindle becomes ready for operation (when the following conditions
are met).
- The option for the corresponding spindle is provided and is set for use.
- There is no serial communication alarm. (Serial spindle)
- Serial spindle parameters have been transferred. (Serial spindle)
- The spindle control software is ready for operation. (Serial spindle)
These signals are set to “0” when:
The corresponding spindle is not ready for operation.
All-spindle operation ready signal SRSRDY <F0034.7>

[Function] This signal posts that all spindles used are ready for operation.
The signal is set to “1” when:
All spindles used become ready for operation.
The signal is set to “0” when:
Some of the spindles used are not ready for operation.
Spindle warning detail signals SPWRN1 to SPWRN9 <Fn264.0 to Fn265.0>

[Function] Before an alarm is issued, the occurrence of a warning condition is posted via the warning
interface, which is independent of the conventional alarm interface.
Nine signals are output to indicate a decimal code. The relationship between the spindle
warning number and signals is expressed as follows:
A warning number is output according to the spindle amplifier status as follows:
∑{2 }
8
Spindle warning No.＝ i -1
× SPWRN i + 28 × SPWRN 9
i =1
Warning Description of Spindle operation

No. warning
56 SPM internal cooling When the stopped state of the internal cooling fan is
fan stopped detected, the warning number is posted from the spindle
amplifier to the CNC. The spindle continues operating.
About one minute later, an alarm number is posted, and the
spindle is placed in the free running state.
88 SPM radiator cooling When the stopped state of the external cooling fan is
fan stopped detected, the warning number is posted from the spindle
amplifier to the CNC. The spindle continues operating.
If the main circuit overheats because the external cooling
fan is stopped, an alarm is posted, and the spindle is
placed in the free running state.
- 1360 -
Warning Description of Spindle operation

No. warning
58 Overload on converter A warning number is output according to the signal received
main circuit from the PSM
59 Converter internal In the warning state, the spindle continues operating.
cooling fan stopped
113 Converter radiator
cooling fan stopped
The spindle warning detail signals are set to “0” when all alarm factors are eliminated.
When a warning is issued in more than one spindle within the same path, the spindle
warning detail signals indicate the warning No. of the spindle having the smallest spindle
number.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0034 SRSRDY
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn034 SRSP1R SRSP2R SRSP3R SRSP4R
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn264 SPWRN8 SPWRN7 SPWRN6 SPWRN5 SPWRN4 SPWRN3 SPWRN2 SPWRN1
Fn265 SPWRN9
- Serial spindle control unit signals

For first spindle
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn070 MRDYA ORCMA SFRA SRVA CTH1A CTH2A TLMHA TLMLA
Gn071 RCHA RSLA INTGA SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA *ESPA ARSTA
Gn072 RCHHGA MFNHGA INCMDA OVRA DEFMDA NRROA ROTAA INDXA
Gn073 MPOFA SLVA MORCMA
Gn304
Gn305
Gn306
Gn307
Fn045 ORARA TLMA LDT2A LDT1A SARA SDTA SSTA ALMA
Fn046 SLVSA RCFNA RCHPA CFINA CHPA
Fn047 INCSTA PC1DTA
Fn048
Fn306
Fn307
- 1361 -
For second spindle

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn074 MRDYB ORCMB SFRB SRVB CTH1B CTH2B TLMHB TLMLB
Gn075 RCHB RSLB INTGB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB
Gn076 RCHHGB MFNHGB INCMDB OVRB DEFMDB NRROB ROTAB INDXB
Gn077 MPOFB SLVB MORCMB
Gn308
Gn309
Gn310
Gn311
Fn049 ORARB TLMB LDT2B LDT1B SARB SDTB SSTB ALMB
Fn050 SLVSB RCFNB RCHPB CFINB CHPB
Fn051 INCSTB PC1DTB
Fn052
Fn308
Fn309
For third spindle

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn204 MRDYC ORCMC SFRC SRVC CTH1C CTH2C TLMHC TLMLC
Gn205 RCHC RSLC INTGC SOCNC MCFNC SPSLC *ESPC ARSTC
Gn206 RCHHGC MFNHGC INCMDC OVRC DEFMDC NRROC ROTAC INDXC
Gn207 MPOFC SLVC MORCMC
Gn312
Gn313
Gn314
Gn315
Fn168 ORARC TLMC LDT2C LDT1C SARC SDTC SSTC ALMC
Fn169 SLVSC RCFNC RCHPC CFINC CHPC
Fn170 INCSTC PC1DTC
Fn171
Fn310
Fn311
- 1362 -
For fourth spindle

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn266 MRDYD ORCMD SFRD SRVD CTH1D CTH2D TLMHD TLMLD
Gn267 RCHD RSLD INTGD SOCND MCFND SPSLD *ESPD ARSTD
Gn268 RCHHGD MFNHGD INCMDD OVRD DEFMDD NRROD ROTAD INDXD
Gn269 MPOFD SLVD MORCMD
Gn316
Gn317
Gn318
Gn319
Fn266 ORARD TLMD LDT2D LDT1D SARD SDTD SSTD ALMD
Fn267 SLVSD RCFND RCHPD CFIND CHPD
Fn268 INCSTD PC1DTD
Fn269
Fn312
Fn313
Parameter
- Settings for spindle motors and spindle numbers
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3716 A/Ss

NOTE
#0 A/Ss Spindle motor type is :

0: Analog spindle.
1: Serial spindle.
NOTE
To use a serial spindle, set bit 5 (SSN) of parameter No. 8133 to 0.
3717 Motor number to each spindle
NOTE

- 1363 -

to
NOTE
1 In addition, it is necessary to set FSSB. Refer to the section, "FSSB
Setting" in this manual for details.
2 If value of this parameter is larger than the maximum value, the
alarm SP1996, "ILLEGAL SPINDLE PARAMETER SETTING"
occurs.
3 If the spindle motor is treated as hypothetical Cs axis control or
spindle control with servo motor, set this parameter to “0”.
4 In the display order of the parameter No.982, the spindle axes
since the spindle axis that 0 is set to this parameter become
invalid, too. However, the case that the spindle motor is treated as
hypothetical Cs axis control or spindle control with servo motor is
excepted.
Example) On the following setting, S3 and S4 spindle axes are
invalid when the spindle motor of S3 is not treated as
hypothetical Cs axis control or spindle control with servo
motor.
Display order of Setting value of Setting value of
No.982 No.982 No.3717
S1 1 1
S2 2 2
S3 1 0
S4 2 3
3718 Subscript for display of a serial spindle (main spindle) or analog spindle

Set a subscript to be added to spindle speed display on a screen such as the position
display screen.
Used when the spindle switching function is not used, or used for the main spindle when
the spindle switching function is used.
NOTE
This parameter is invalid when an extended spindle name is used.
3719 Subscript for display of a serial spindle (sub-spindle)

- 1364 -
display screen.
Used for the sub-spindle when the spindle switching function is used.
NOTE
- Connection of serial spindle control unit

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4019 PLD
4195 PLD

#7 PLD When power is turned on, spindle amplifier parameters for the serial spindle are:
No. 4019 : (Used when the spindle switching function is not used, or used for the main
spindle when the spindle switching function is used)
No. 4195 : (Used for the sub-spindle when the spindle switching function is used)
When this parameter is set to 1 after the spindle motor model code parameter is set, the
next power-on operation sets the standard values for the motor model in parameters and
sets this parameter to 0.
Spindle motor model code

4133
(Used when spindle switching function is not used, or used for main spindle in spindle switching)
Spindle motor model code

4309
(For sub-spindle when spindle switching function is provided)

When setting initial parameters for the serial spindle, specify the spindle motor model
code.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8133 SSN MSP
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#3 MSP Multi-spindle is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
- 1365 -
#5 SSN Spindle serial output is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
Set this parameter as shown below depending on the spindle configuration.
Spindle configuration Parameter SSN

When all spindles in the entire system are serial spindles 0
When serial spindles and analog spindles are mixed in the entire system 0
When all spindles in the entire system are analog spindles 1
- Parameters for the serial spindle control unit

Parameters Nos. 4000 to 4799: For serial spindles
Although the above parameters are stored as CNC parameters, they are actually used by the spindle
control unit of serial spindles.
For details of these parameters, refer to the following manuals of serial spindles:
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series PARAMETER MANUAL (B-65280EN)
Alarm and message

SP1220 NO SPINDLE AMP. Either the cable connected to a serial spindle amplifier is
broken, or the serial spindle amplifier is not connected.
SP1225 CRC ERROR (SERIAL SPINDLE) A CRC error (communications error) occurred in
communications between the CNC and the serial spindle
amplifier.
SP1226 FRAMING ERROR (SERIAL A framing error occurred in communications between the CNC
SPINDLE) and the serial spindle amplifier.
SP1227 RECEIVING ERROR (SERIAL A receive error occurred in communications between the CNC
SPINDLE) and the serial spindle amplifier.
SP1228 COMMUNICATION ERROR A communications error occurred between the CNC and the
(SERIAL SPINDLE) serial spindle amplifier.
SP1229 COMMUNICATION ERROR SERIAL A communications error occurred between serial spindle
SPINDLE AMP. amplifiers (amplifiers of even number and odd number).
SP1245 COMMUNICATION DATA ERROR A communication data error was detected on the CNC.
to Inquire of FANUC, please.
SP1247
SP1969 SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR An error occurred in the spindle control software.
SP1972
SP1976 SERIAL SPINDLE An error occurred in the spindle control software.
to COMMUNICATION ERROR Inquire of FANUC, please.
SP1979
SP1980 SERIAL SPINDLE AMP. ERROR Defect on serial spindle amplifier.
SP1984
SP1985 SERIAL SPINDLE CONTROL Defective SIC–LSI on serial spindle amplifier.
to ERROR Inquire of FANUC, please.
SP1987
SP1988, SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR An error occurred in the spindle control software.
SP1989 Inquire of FANUC, please.
SP1996 ILLEGAL SPINDLE PARAMETER The spindle was assigned incorrectly. Check to see the
SETTING following parameter. (No.3716 or 3717)
SP9000 An alarm is issued from the spindle amplifier unit of the serial
or later spindle. For details, refer to the manual of the serial spindle.
- 1366 -
Diagnosis data
- Information about spindle control
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1570 CF2
CF2 0: The spindle interface does not operate normally.

1: The spindle interface operates normally.
403 Spindle motor temperature information

[Unit of data] °C
When the αi spindle interface is used, the temperature of the αi spindle motor winding is
indicated. The overheat temperature varies depending on the motor.
NOTE
The overheat temperature has the following error:
Lower than 160°C: Up to 5°C
160 to 180°C: Up to 10°C
- Indication of serial spindle load meter and speed meter

410 Spindle load meter indication (%)
-1
411 Spindle motor speed indication (min )

For correct indication of the load meter and motor speed, the following parameters must
be set properly:
Maximum motor speed: Set for each axis in parameters Nos. 4020 (MAIN) and 4196
(SUB).
Load meter indication at maximum output: Set for each axis in parameters Nos. 4127
(MAIN) and 4276 (SUB).
NOTE
Parameters for (MAIN) and (SUB) must be set when the spindle
switching function is used.
When the spindle switching function is not used, set the
parameters for (MAIN).
445 Position data of position coder (pulse)
NOTE
Once spindle orientation is performed after power-on, position data
can be read. To read position data, set bit 1(SPP) of parameter No.
3117 to 1.
(Except when maintenance is performed, bit 1(SPP) of parameter
No. 3117 must be set to 0.)
- 1367 -
710 Spindle status error No.

The status error number transferred from the spindle amplifier is indicated.
When the spindle is disabled by an error such as a PMC signal input error (for example,
when two operation modes are specified at the same time), a status error is recognized
while the spindle is disabled. When the signal is input normally, the normal operation is
resumed.
For details of spindle error numbers, see the description of alarms (SP alarms) related to
serial spindles in the alarm list.
712 Spindle warning No.

The warning number transferred from the spindle amplifier is indicated.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (This manual) FSSB Setting
11.3 SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUT

Overview
Spindle analog output is a spindle motor control interface.
The spindle analog output can control up to 1 analog spindle.
This section assumes that an analog spindle is set for the first spindle (serial spindles are not used with an
analog spindle, but only an analog spindle is used). When using both serial and analog spindles, see the
next section, "SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL".
Explanation
The terms "logical n-th spindle", "n-th spindle in a path", and "n-th spindle amplifier" used herein are
defined as follows:
• Logical n-th spindle:
The n-th spindle to be controlled as counted throughout the system
• N-th spindle (in a path):
The n-th spindle to be controlled as counted within a path
The terms "first spindle", "second spindle", "third spindle", and "fourth spindle" used herein refer to
relative spindle numbers within a path. (In a single-path system, the logical n-th spindle is the n-th
spindle.)
For the relationships between them, see "Spindle numbers vs. spindle motors" described later.
For how to set a spindle configuration for each path to be subjected to multi-path control, see the
description of spindles in "Multipath Control".
The Table 11.3 (a) lists the relationships between the spindles and functions.
- 1368 -
Table 11.3 (a)
Spindle Analog spindle
Function First spindle
Threading/feed per revolution (synchronous feed) Available
Constant surface speed control Available
Spindle speed fluctuation detection (T series) Available
Actual spindle speed output (T series) Available
Spindle positioning (T series) Available
Cs contour control Unavailable
Multi-spindle control Unavailable
Rigid tapping Available
Spindle synchronous control Unavailable
Spindle command synchronous control Unavailable
Spindle control unit functions, such as spindle orientation, spindle output switching,
Available
and spindle switching (NOTE 1)
Polygon machining (T series) (using the servo motor axis and spindle) Available
Polygon machining with two spindles (T series) Unavailable
Spindle output control by the PMC Available
NOTE
the spindle control unit supports them.
- Spindle numbers vs. spindle motors

Logical spindle numbers are associated with spindle motors as follows:
1. Logical spindle numbers and amplifier numbers
Logical spindle numbers indicate the order of spindles to be controlled (the logical arrangement
order). Parameters for the individual spindles are arranged in this order. Logical spindle numbers are
assigned sequentially from 1 to the maximum number of spindles.
Amplifier numbers indicate the order of spindle amplifiers actually connected to the CNC (the
physical arrangement order). They are assigned as shown below (Fig. 11.3 (a)).
(Because only one analog spindle can be connected, the spindle amplifier and spindle motor are each
assigned with number 1.)
2. Setting method
CNC Amplifier No.1 Spindle motor
Main board
Fig. 11.3 (a) Connection of analog spindle
3. Setting
For each spindle, the type of the motor used is set in bit 0 (A/S) of parameter No. 3716, and the
amplifier number, in parameter No. 3717. For spindles not to be used, the amplifier numbers are 0.
No.3717 1 0 0 0
- 1369 -
Note
NOTE
1 If a failure occurs in the D/A converter, the following conditions occur.
- Alarm SP1241, “D/A CONVERTER ERROR” is issued.
- The spindle command voltage is set to 0.
- The spindle enable signal is set to “0”.
2 The load meter value (motor load) always becomes 0 no matter what condition
occurs.
Parameter
- Settings for spindle motors and spindle numbers
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3716 A/Ss

NOTE

0: Analog spindle.
1: Serial spindle.
NOTE
To use a serial spindle, set bit 5 (SSN) of parameter No. 8133 to 0.
NOTE

to

display screen.
- 1370 -
NOTE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3790 KSA

#0 KSA In the thread cutting (G33(M), G32,G34,G76,G92(T)) and polygon turning (G51.2(T)) by
using analog spindle, while until the one-rotation-signal is detected at the start of
threading, the display value of spindle speed is:
0 : Lowered temporarily, or to zero in some cases.
1 : Not changed from the start.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3798 ALM

[Data type] Bit
#0 ALM The spindle alarm (SP****) for all spindles is:

0: Enabled.
1: Ignored.
When this parameter is set to 1, the spindle-related alarms are ignored. So, be sure to set
this parameter to 0 at all times except for special cases such as maintenance.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3799 NDPs NALs

#0 NALs An alarm detected on the spindle amplifier side is:

0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
(This parameter is valid when bit 0 (ALM) of parameter No. 3798 is set to 0.)
When this parameter is set to 1, an alarm detected on the spindle amplifier side is ignored.
So, be sure to set this parameter to 0 at all times except for special cases such as
maintenance.
#1 NDPs When an analog spindle is used, a position coder disconnection check is:
0: Made.
1: Not made.
(This parameter is valid when bit 0 (NAL) of parameter No. 3799 is set to 0.)
When no position coder is used with an analog spindle, set this parameter to 1.
- 1371 -
NOTE
When an analog spindle is used at the same time under serial /
analog spindle control, a position coder cannot be used for the
analog spindle.
Be sure to set this parameter to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8133 SSN
NOTE

[Data type] Bit

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

Alarm and message

SP1241 D/A CONVERTER ERROR The D/A converter for controlling analog spindles is
erroneous.
SP1996 ILLEGAL SPINDLE PARAMETER The spindle was assigned incorrectly. Check to see the
SETTING following parameter. (No.3716 or 3717)
11.4 SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL

Overview
Serial/analog spindle control allows an analog spindle to be used as one of the controlled spindles in the
entire system. Only spindle speed command control and spindle speed command control by the PMC can
be used.
NOTE
1 When using a serial spindle, set bit 5 (SSN) of parameter No. 8133 to 0.
2 The analog spindle must be assigned to the last of the spindle configuration.
Explanation
Serial/analog spindle control allows only one analog spindle to be used as one of the controlled spindles
in the entire system. The analog spindle used must be assigned to the last spindle of the spindle
configuration.
- 1372 -
Spindle functions available in serial/analog spindle control

The table below lists the relationship between the spindles and functions:
Spindle
Serial spindle (NOTE 1) Analog spindle
Function
Threading/feed per revolution (synchronous feed) Available Unavailable
Constant surface speed control Available Unavailable
Spindle speed fluctuation detection Available Unavailable
Actual spindle speed output (T series) Available Unavailable
Spindle positioning (T series) Available Unavailable
Cs contour control Available Unavailable
Rigid tapping Available Unavailable
Spindle synchronous control Available Unavailable
Simple spindle synchronous control Available Unavailable
Spindle control unit functions, such as spindle
orientation, spindle output switching, and spindle Available Available
switching (NOTE 2)
Polygon machining (T series)
Available Unavailable
(using the servo motor axis and spindle)
Polygon machining with two spindles (T series)
Available Unavailable
(Spindle and spindle polygon)
Spindle output control by the PMC Available Available
NOTE
1 When using a serial spindle, set bit 5 (SSN) of parameter No. 8133 to 0.
the spindle control unit supports these functions.
Connection example
Connect the analog spindle to JA40.
When an analog spindle is used under serial/analog spindle control, a position coder cannot be attached to
the analog spindle.
For connection of serial spindles, refer to CONNECTION MANUAL (Hardware) (B64603EN).
- When connecting one serial spindle and one analog spindle (when the
maximum number of controllable spindles is two)
JA41 Motor No. 1 (serial)

CNC
JA40 Motor No. 2 (analog)
Restrictions
When an analog spindle is used under serial/analog spindle control, there are restrictions as follows:
1 Be sure to assign the analog spindle as the last spindle of the controlled spindles.
Example:
When there are two controlled spindles, and one of these spindles is an analog spindle
The controlled spindle number of the analog spindle is 2.
Set the spindle amplifier number of the analog spindle (parameter No. 3717) to 2.
2 A position coder cannot be installed.
- 1373 -
3 Only spindle speed command control and spindle speed command control by the PMC can be used.
Other control and spindle functions cannot be used.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3702 EMS


0: Used.
1: Not used.
NOTE
Make the setting on the side of the path in which multi-spindle
control is unnecessary in 2-path control.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3716 A/Ss

NOTE

0: Analog spindle.
1: Serial spindle.
NOTE
1 A maximum of one analog spindle can be controlled.
2 To use a serial spindle, set bit 5 (SSN) of parameter No. 8133 to 0.
3 When using an analog spindle, assign it at the end of the spindle
configuration.
NOTE

- 1374 -
NOTE
When using an analog spindle, assign it at the end of the spindle
configuration.
(Example)
When there are three spindles in an entire system (two serial
spindles and one analog spindle), set the spindle amplifier
number (this parameter) of the analog spindle to 3.
3718 Subscript for display of a serial spindle or analog spindle

display screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3798 ALM

[Data type] Bit
#0 ALM The spindle alarm (SP****) for all spindles is:

0: Enabled.
1: Ignored.
When this parameter is set to 1, the spindle-related alarms are ignored. So, be sure to set
this parameter to 0 at all times except for special cases such as maintenance.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3799 NDPs NALs

#0 NALs An alarm detected on the spindle amplifier side is:

0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
(This parameter is valid when bit 0 (ALM) of parameter No. 3798 is set to 0.)
When this parameter is set to 1, an alarm detected on the spindle amplifier side is ignored.
So, be sure to set this parameter to 0 at all times except for special cases such as
maintenance.
#1 NDPs When an analog spindle is used, a position coder disconnection check is:
0: Made.
1: Not made.
(This parameter is valid when bit 0 (NAL) of parameter No. 3799 is set to 0.)
When no position coder is used with an analog spindle, set this parameter to 1.
- 1375 -
NOTE
When an analog spindle is used simultaneously with serial spindle
by serial/analog spindle control, a position coder cannot be used as
the analog spindle. Be sure to set this parameter to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8133 SSN
NOTE

[Data type] Bit

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

- 1376 -
11.5 SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL

Explanation
This section explains the following in relation to spindle speed control:
• Command flow in spindle speed control
• Processing for gear change (M and T type gear selection methods)
• Position coder feedback signal
• Speed arrival signal (SAR)
- Command flow of spindle speed control

The following chart summarizes spindle speed control.
CNC PMC and machine

Machining program, etc.
↓
- S command Output to the PMC

Gear select signal output (M series)
(GR3O, GR 2O, GR1O) (to change the machine gear).
S code/SF signal output Output to the PMC

(to be used for ladders).
- Spindle stop signal/spindle orientation signal Switching in the machine

- Spindle override signal (*SSTP/SOR, SOV0 to SOV7) ← From the PMC
- Processing for gear change Input the gear select signal ← From the PMC
(S command → spindle motor speed conversion) (GR1, GR2) (T type)
Clamp the speed according to parameters.
CNC output specification (result of speed conversion) Output to the PMC

S12 bit code output (R12O to R01O) (used for ladders)
- Determine the output. ← Output specification by the PMC ← From the PMC
(Selected by the SIND signal) (set to R12I to R01I)
Specify output polarity in the CNC.

(M03/M04 and parameter No. 3706 = TCW, CWM)
- Determination of output polarity ← Polarity specification by the PMC ← From the PMC
(Selected by the SSIN signal) (set to SGN)
Thread cutting, Control over the Input the spindle

start of cutting ←
feed per revolution, speed arrival
etc. feed. signal (SAR).
- Position coder Monitor the arrival spindle

- Command output to the spindle,
speed
spindle enable signal output, feedback signal
gain, and offset
Spindle Spindle Position

amplifier motor coder
Sensors
Gear change Spindle
Input the spindle amplifier
mechanism
control signal from the PMC,
Mechanical section of the machine
Fig. 11.5 (a)
- 1377 -
- S command
The S command specifies the spindle speed entered from machining programs, etc. for the CNC.
For constant surface speed control (during G96 mode), the CNC converts the specified surface speed to
the spindle speed.
M
When the M type gear selection method is used (a machining center is used, the constant surface speed
control is not provided (bit 0 (SSC) of parameter No. 8133 is 0), and bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No. 3706
is 0), the CNC determines the necessary gear stage for obtaining a certain spindle speed according to the
settings in parameters Nos. 3741, 3742, 3743, and so on and the S command value, and posts the gear
stage to the PMC.
(GR3O, GR2O, GR1O<Fn034.2, 1, 0>)
- S code/SF signal output

With the spindle serial output (bit 5 (SSN) of parameter No. 8133 is 0), the spindle control function in the
CNC converts the S command value to the output value for the spindle motor. Furthermore, the response
with the S code/SF signal to an S command input differs from when neither gear changing nor the
constant surface speed control function (bit 0 (SSC) of parameter No. 8133 is set to 0) is enabled, as
follows (see below).
M
M series → Outputs the S code.
The SF signal is output only when the CNC directs the PMC to change the gear.
T
T series → Outputs neither S code nor SF signal.
(This is because the S code is not always the spindle speed when the constant surface speed control
option is used (bit 0 (SSC) of parameter No. 8133 is 1).)
If you use the S code and SF signal for processing in the PMC ladder, you must specify parameters
related to parameter No. 3705.
- Spindle stop signal (*SSTP)

When the CNC performs spindle speed control, the speed command output to the spindle is set to “0” by
this signal. Setting this signal to “0” stops the spindle.
To enable speed commands to be issued to the spindle, set this signal to “1”.
- Spindle orientation signal (SOR)

If the spindle orientation signal is logical 1 and the spindle stop signal is logical 0, the spindle rotates in
the direction specified by bit 5 (ORM) of parameter No. 3706 at a constant speed specified by parameter
No. 3732.
Because the spindle rotates at a constant speed regardless of the gear stage, this signal can be used to
rotate the spindle to drive the stopper or pin during mechanical spindle positioning.
M
For the machining center system, setting bit 1 (GST) of parameter No. 3705 enables the spindle motor to
rotate at a constant speed. This function can be used for gear shifting because it maintains a constant
speed of the gear change mechanism.
- Spindle speed override signal (SOV00 to SOV07)

This signal specifies an override of 0% to 254% for the specified S value for spindle control.
However, the spindle speed override function is disabled when the CNC is in the following state:
Tapping cycle (M series : G84, G74 T series : G84, G88)
- 1378 -
Thread cutting (M series : G33 T series : G32, G92, and G76)
When the spindle speed control is performed but the spindle speed override is not used, set the override
value to 100%.
- Processing for gear changing

Although the S command contains the spindle speed, the object that is actually controlled is the spindle
motor. Therefore, the CNC must have some provision to detect the gear stage between the speed and
spindle motor.
There are two types of gear selection methods:
M type (for the machining center system only)
The CNC selects a gear stage according to the range of speed for each gear stage previously specified in a
parameter, as directed by the S command, and informs the PMC of the selected gear stage (one of the
three gear stages ) using the gear select signal output (GR3O, GR2O, GR1O).
Also, the CNC outputs the spindle speed based on the selected gear stage (output as the gear select
signal).
T type
The gear stage to be used is determined on the machine side, and the gear stage is input using the gear
selection signals (GR1 and GR2) (one of the four gear stages).
The CNC outputs the appropriate speed command for the selected gear range.
- Selection of gear change system

M
The machining center system can use either M or T type.
M type → Without constant surface speed control option, and bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No. 3706 = 0
T type → With constant surface speed control, or bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No. 3706 = 1
NOTE
The M type gear selection method cannot be selected when one of the following
functions is used:
- Constant surface speed control
- Extended spindle name
- Spindle control between paths
T
The lathe system can use only T type.
- M type gear selection method

By specifying from S0 to S99999 in memory or MDI operation, the CNC outputs a command
corresponding to the spindle speed. There is a two-speed (GR1O and GR2O) or three-speed range (GR1O,
GR2O, GR3O), set by parameters Nos. 3741-3743, and the gear selection signal is output simultaneously.
When the gear selection signal is changed, the SF signal is output at the same time.
By setting bit 6 (SFA) of parameter No. 3705, SF can also be output regardless of gear change.
The meaning of the gear signals is Table 11.5 (a):
Table 11.5 (a)
Gear 2-stage Gear 3-state Remarks
GR1O Low Low Low : Low Gear
GR2O High Middle Middle : Middle Gear
GR3O High High : High Gear
The speed commands output to the spindle motor are as follows:
- 1379 -
• For the serial spindle, the speed commands are processed as values 0 to 16383 between the CNC and
spindle control unit.
• For the analog spindle, the speed commands are output to the analog voltage signal SVC as analog
voltages 0 to 10 V.
The following descriptions exemplify the analog spindle. However, they can be applied to the serial
spindle on the assumption that spindle motor speed with analog voltage 10 V corresponds to the
maximum spindle motor speed.
(i) M type gear change method A (See Fig. 11.5 (b).)
Spindle motor speed command
(Analog voltage command)
For gear 2-stage
10V
Upper limit of
spindle speed (Vc)
GR2O (GR3O)
GR1O (GR2O)
(GR1O)
Spindle speed
command
(S code input)
A B C
Vmin Vmax Vmax Vmax ( ) for gear 3-stage

A× A× B× C×
4095 4095 4095 4095
Fig. 11.5 (b) S code input and output voltage
Set the following values as parameters:

• Constant Vmax: for upper limit of spindle speed (parameter No. 3736)
Upper limit of spindle speed

Vmax = 4095 ×
Spindle speed at command voltage 10V
• Constant Vmin; for lower limit of spindle speed (parameter No. 3735)
Lower limit of spindle speed

Vmin = 4095 ×
Spindle speed at command voltage 10V
• Spindle speed A (min-1) ; at command voltage 10V and low gear (parameter no. 3741)
• Spindle speed B (min-1) ; at command voltage 10V and high gear (or middle-high gear)
(parameter no. 3742)
• Spindle speed C (min-1) ; at command voltage 10V and high gear (parameter no. 3743)
NOTE
If a specified voltage of 10 V is already higher than the acceptable input voltage
for the spindle drive system, calculate hypothetically the spindle speed that
corresponds to 10 V using a proportional calculation method and use it instead.
Now, in response to the specified S code, the speed command and gear select
commands (GR3O, GR2O, GR1O) are output to the spindle motor as shown in
Fig. 11.5 (b).
- 1380 -
(ii) Gear change point during tapping cycle mode (G84, G74)
In case of G84 (tapping cycle) or G74 (counter tapping cycle) the gear shift speed is changed by bit
3 (SGT) of parameter No. 3705. In this case, gear shift is performed at the speed set by parameters
Nos. 3761 and 3762 (Fig. 11.5 (c)).
(analog voltage output)
10V
Upper limit
voltage of GR1O
spindle motor
speed (Vc)
GR2O
Spindle speed command

(S code input)
D A E B C
D : Gear shift point (parameter No. 3761) for low/high speed change (or low/medium speed change) (set by parameter as min-1
value) during tapping.
E : Gear shift point (parameter No. 3762) (3-stage gear) for medium/high speed change (set by parameter as min-1 value)
during tapping.
Fig. 11.5 (c) S code input and output voltage (in tapping)
M
(iii) M type gear change method B (M series) (See Fig. 11.5 (d).)
The speed (min-1) at which the low-speed and the high-speed gears are changed can be set as
parameters Nos. 3751 and 3752 by setting bit 2 (SGB) of parameter No. 3705. When a 3-stage gear
is used, it is possible to set the speeds (min-1) for switching low-speed and medium-speed gears, and
medium-speed and high-speed gears, using parameters Nos. 3751 and 3752.
(analog voltage output)
10V
VC
VH
GR3O
VL
GR1O GR2O

(S code input)
A B C
Vmin Vmaxl Vmaxh Vmax

A× A× B× C×
4095 4095 4095 4095
VC: Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor.
VH: Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor with high-speed gears (medium speed gear for
3-stage gear)
VL: Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor at low-speed gear
Fig. 11.5 (d) M type gear change B
- 1381 -
When using this function, set the following parameters:

• Constant Vmax (Parameter No. 3736) related to the upper limit of spindle motor speed (min-1)
Upper limit of spindle motor speed

Vmax = 4095 ×
Spindle motor speed when the command voltage is 10V
• Constant Vmin (Parameter No. 3735) related to the lower limit of spindle motor speed (min-1)
Lower limit of spindle motor speed

Vmin = 4095 ×
• Constant Vmaxl (Parameter No. 3751) related to the upper limit of spindle motor speed (min-1) with
low-speed gears
Upper limit of spindle motor speed with low-speed gears

Vmaxl = 4095 ×
• Constant Vmaxh (Parameter No. 3752) related to the upper limit of spindle motor speed (min-1) with
high-speed gears (medium-speed gear for 3-stage gear)
Upper limit of spindle motor speed with high-speed gears

Vmaxh = 4095 ×
• Spindle speed A (Parameter No. 3741) (min-1) with low-speed gears when the command voltage is
10V
• Spindle speed B (Parameter No. 3742) (min-1) with high-speed gears when the command voltage is
10V (medium-speed gear for 3-stage)
• Spindle speed C (Parameter No. 3743) (min-1) with high-speed gears when the command voltage is
10V (3-stage gear)
Spindle motor speed commands (0 to 10V) and gear selecting signals (GR1O, GR2O, GR3O) are issued
on each S code command as shown in the Fig. 11.5 (d):
CAUTION
1 In a tapping cycle when bit 3 (SGT) of parameter No. 3705 is set, the gears are
changed over at the gear changing point for tapping.
2 For this function (bit 2 (SGB) of parameter No. 3705 = 1), when only one-stage
gear is used, the voltage corresponding to the upper limit value to the spindle
motor is calculated using Vmaxl, and when 2-stage gear is used, it is calculated
according to Vmaxh. Therefore, when SGB is 1, set Vmaxl when only one-stage
gear is used, Vmaxl and Vmaxh when 2-stage gear is used.
Bit 6 (GMB) of parameter No. 3712 can be used to select the maximum spindle motor speed for each
gear.
When the bit 6 (GMB) of parameter No. 3712 is set to 0:

The maximum motor speed when each gear is used is clamped by parameters No. 3741 to 3743 or
parameter No. 3736.
- 1382 -
Gear switching point

S1 Spindle speed clamp point of each gear
Maximum speed of the

spindle motor
No.3736
Spindle motor speed when
switching from gear 2 to
gear 3
No.3752

gear 2
No.3751
Maximum spindle Maximum spindle Maximum spindle

speed for gear 1 speed for gear 2 speed
Maximum spindle Maximum spindle
S1
speed for gear 1 speed for gear 2
No.3741 No.3742
Fig. 11.5 (e) When the bit 6 (GMB) of parameter No. 3712 is set to 0
When the bit 6 (GMB) of parameter No. 3712 is set to 1:

The maximum motor speed of gear 1 is clamped at the motor speed of the switching point from gear
1 to gear 2 and the maximum motor speed of gear 2 is clamped at the motor speed of the switching
point from gear 2 to gear 3.
Gear switching point

S1 Spindle speed clamp point of each gear
Maximum speed of the

spindle motor
No.3736
gear 3
No.3752
gear 2
No.3751
Maximum spindle Maximum spindle Maximum spindle

speed for gear 1 speed for gear 2 speed
Maximum spindle Maximum spindle
S1
speed for gear 1 speed for gear 2
No.3741 No.3742
Fig. 11.5 (f) When the bit 6 (GMB) of parameter No. 3712 is set to 1
- 1383 -
- Time chart
When S code is commanded, the I/O signal time chart is :
(i) When Gear select signal does not change
S code read
To next block
Spindle speed
command output
VH
VL
0V
In this case, the SF signal is not output and the CNC advances to the next block automatically after
the next spindle speed command is output.
(ii) When Gear select signal change

S code read
To next block
Gear select
signal
TMF
GR3O
/GR2O
/GR1O SF
FIN
TMF
TFIN

VH
VL
0V
In this case, the gear select signal is output; after elapse of the time constant set by parameter (TMF),
the SF signal is output. After another TMF elapse, the spindle speed command is output. On the
PMC side, change the gears by this SF signal, and return the FIN signal after the end of gear change.
The time chart for SF and FIN signals is the same as in S code output. TMF, set by parameter No.
3010, is common to M, S and T functions.
Moreover, specifying bit 6 (SFA) of parameter No. 3705 can specify that the SF signal be output
even if no gear change is used.
- Details of T type (Input of GR1, GR2)

To perform the T type gear change, the maximum spindle speed for each gear side must be set in
parameters Nos. 3741 to 3744.
The gear select signal is a 2 bit code signal (GR1, GR2). The relationship between the signal and gear
number is Table 11.5 (b):
Table 11.5 (b)
Gear select signal
Gear No. Parameter No. for max. spindle speed
GR1 GR2
"0" "0" 1 No. 3741
"1" "0" 2 No. 3742
"0" "1" 3 No. 3743
"1" "1" 4 No. 3744
- 1384 -
The following descriptions apply to the analog spindle. Like the descriptions of the M type, they also
apply to the serial spindle on the assumption that spindle motor speed with analog voltage 10 V
corresponds to the maximum spindle motor speed.
In addition, for the speed command output to the spindle motor, analog voltages 0 to 10 V for analog
spindle control correspond to digital data 0 to 16383 for serial spindle control. However, it might be
easier if you consider them code signals from 0 to 4095 for convenience sake without distinguishing
between serial and analog spindles.
Assume that gear switching is two stage switching. If the spindle speed with the output voltage 10 V is
1000 min-1 for the low speed gear (G1) and 2000 min-1 for the high speed gear (G2), set these speeds by
the parameters Nos. 3741 and 3742. In this case, the analog voltage has the linear relationship shown
below (Fig. 11.5 (g)).
N
-1
2000min When gear 2 selected
-1 When gear 1 selected

1000min
-1
600min
Volt
0 V2 V1 10
Fig. 11.5 (g)
When spindle speed S=600 is given, V1 (for G1) or V2 (for G2) in the Fig. 11.5 (g) is calculated inside
the CNC and output to the machine side.
V1 ; 6 (V)
V2 ; 3 (V)
The value of output voltage V is calculated automatically from the following equations:
V = 10N / R
R : Spindle speed at 10V output voltage
N : Spindle speed given by S command of 5 digits
This is equivalent to the G97 mode for constant surface speed control.
See "CONSTATNT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL" for operations during the constant surface speed
control mode (G96).
- Determining spindle speed command output R12O-R01O (Output) R12I-R01I

(Input) SIND (Input)
Using the above processing for gear change, the CNC calculates the speed command output to the spindle
motor that is necessary to obtain the specified spindle speed with the gear.
The calculation result is output to the PMC through S12-bit code signals indicating a value 0 to 4095.
(R12O to R01O<Fn037.3 to Fn036.0>)
Then, according to the selection by the signal used to select the spindle motor speed command SIND
<Gn033.7>, the speed command output to the spindle motor is determined.
SIND signal <Gn033.7> Speed command output to spindle motor
"0" Speed command output calculated by CNC
Speed command output set by PMC
"1"
Also see "SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC".
- Polarity of spindle speed command output

The speed command output to the spindle motor is determined as described above, but the actual output
polarity is determined by the CNC as follows (Table 11.5 (c)):
- 1385 -
Table 11.5 (c)

Bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No. 3706 Bit 6 (CWM) of parameter No. 3706 Output polarity
0 0 +(M03/M04 command)
0 1 -(M03/M04 command)
1 0 +(M03 command), -(M04 command)
1 1 -(M03 command), +(M04 command)
Then, according to the selection by the signal used to select the polarity of the spindle motor speed
command SSIN <Gn033.6>, the output polarity of the speed command output to the spindle motor is
determined.
SSIN signal <Gn033.6> Output polarity of speed command output to spindle motor
"0" Output polarity determined by CNC
Output polarity set by PMC
"1"
Also see "SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC".
NOTE
When bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No. 3706 is 1, and the output polarity is to be
determined by the CNC, the CNC cannot determine the output polarity if M03 or
M04 has not been specified even once since power-on. As a result, no
command is output to the spindle.
- Command output to the spindle control unit

According to the speed command output and the polarity determined so far, the command is sent to the
spindle control unit as follows:
• For serial spindle → Digital data 0 to ±16383
• For analog spindle → Analog voltage 0 to ±10 V
- Conditions for stopping spindle speed command output

A command being output to the spindle is set to 0 when *SSTP is set to “0” and when a command that
sets the spindle speed command output to 0 such as a S0 command is specified.
With M05, emergency stop, and a reset, the CNC does not set the command output to the spindle to 0.
- Position coder feedback signal

The position coder is necessary for thread cutting or feed per revolution.
The position coder detects the actual spindle speed and the one-rotation signal (used to detect a fixed
point on the spindle for threading). Number of pulses output from the position coder is set in parameter
No. 3720.
When the gear ratio between the position coder and spindle is to be used, set the gear ratio for the position
coder and spindle in parameters Nos. 3721 and 3722, respectively.
However, in the machine to do thread cutting, connect mechanically between the spindle and position
coder by the gear ratio=1:1. And these parameters set the No.3721=0, No.3722=0. (It is the setting for the
gear ratio 1:1.)
In the general thread cutting, the same thread grooves must be cut several times. To cutting the same
thread groove repeatedly, it is necessary to detect the fixed point on the spindle. (One fixed point in the
one rotation of the spindle.) One-rotation signal is used for the detection of the one fixed point. Typically,
the one-rotation signal is generated on the one fixed point in the one rotation of the position coder.
For these reasons, when doing the thread cutting, the position coder and spindle must be connected by the
gear ratio 1:1.
See "RIGID TAPPING" for position coder connection for rigid tapping.
- 1386 -
- Speed arrival signal SAR <Gn029.4>

The spindle speed arrival signal SAR is an input signal used as a condition for the CNC to start cutting
feed. This signal is used generally when cutting feed should be started after the spindle reaches the
specified speed.
In this case, a sensor is used to check the spindle speed. The detected speed is sent to the CNC via the
PMC.
When the above operation is performed continuously using the PMC ladder, however, cutting feed may
be started based on the SAR signal indicating the previous spindle state (spindle speed before change), if
the spindle speed change command and the cutting feed command are issued at the same time.
To avoid the above problem, monitoring the SAR signal can be deferred for a time specified by parameter
No. 3740 after the S command or cutting feed command was issued.
When using the SAR signal, set bit 0 (SAR) of parameter No. 3708 to 1.
Item No. 0000 (SPEED ARRIVAL ON) on the diagnosis screen is kept at 1 while this function is keeping
the cutting feed block at a halt.
- Reading actual spindle speeds by PMC window

The actual speed of the serial spindles can be read by PMC window (function code 138). Actual spindle
speed is calculated by multiplying the ratio of the gear and motor speed. The gear which is in use is
distinguished by the following signals.
Table11.5 (d) Gear selection status

Bit 1 (SLG) of parameter No.3787
0 1
Gear Clutch/gear signals M type T type
number (serial spindle) gear selection method gear selection method
Gear selection signals Gear selection signals
CTH1 CTH2 GR3O GR2O GR1O GR2 GR1
1 "0" "0" "0" "0" "1" "0" "0"
2 "0" "1" "0" "1" "0" "0" "1"
3 "1" "0" "1" "0" "0" "1" "0"
4 "1" "1" - - - "1" "1"
- Analog spindle
Gain and offset
The analog spindle may require gain and offset voltage adjustment depending on the spindle motor speed
amplifier being used.
The following parameters are available for such adjustment.
Gain adjustment data: Parameter No. 3730
Offset voltage compensation: Parameter No. 3731
Spindle enable signal ENB<Fn001.4>

Another output related to spindle control is the spindle enable signal ENB.
The ENB signal is logical “1” when a nonzero command output is sent to the spindle. If the command is
logical 0, the ENB signal becomes logical “0”.
When the analog spindle is being used, an offset voltage in the spindle motor speed amplifier may cause
the spindle motor to rotate at low speed even if the command output (in this case, analog voltage) to the
spindle is zero. The ENB signal can be used to stop the motor in such a case.
Electrical specification of analog spindle interface

The ENB1/2 signal on the analog spindle interface is an interface signal that is turned on and off under
the same conditions as of the spindle enable signal <Fn001.4>, and it can be used even when a serial
spindle is used.
For related signals on the analog spindle interface, refer to the description of the analog spindle interface
in the section of the spindle connection in "Connection Manual (Hardware)".
- 1387 -
Signal
Spindle stop signal *SSTP<Gn029.6>
[Function] The command output to the spindle is disabled.
[Operation] When the spindle stop signal turns to “0”, the output voltage becomes 0V and the enable
signal ENB turns to “0” (M05 is not output).
When this signal turns to “1”, the analog voltage returns to its original value and the ENB
signal turns to “1”.
Sxxxx
Input command M03 M05 M04 S0
Auxiliary function processing
“1"
Spindle stop signal “0"
Command output to 0
the spindle
Enable signal
The above time chart is an example. Actually, the time chart should meet the specification
of the spindle control unit.
- When this signal is not used, always set the signal to “1”.
- When the M03, M04, or M05 command is issued, the CNC outputs the code signal
and strobe signal only.
Spindle orientation signal SOR<Gn029.5>

[Function] The spindle or the spindle motor is rotated at a constant
[Operation] When the spindle orientation signal turns to “1” and the spindle stop signal *SSTP turns
to “0”, a spindle speed command which lets the spindle rotate at the constant speed set by
parameter No. 3732 is output. The enable signal ENB also turns to “1”. This signal is
disabled when the spindle stop signal is “1”.
In the machining center system, when the spindle speed for orientation is set by bit 1
(GST) of parameter No. 3705 and the SOR signal is input, the CNC outputs the spindle
speed command corresponding to the speed set to parameter 3732 with an output polarity
set by bit 5 (ORM) of parameter No. 3706, but the gear select signal does not change.
For example, if the SOR signal is turned to 1 with high gear selected, and the speed set to
parameter No. 3732 is in the low gear range, the gear select signal does not change and
the command output is calculated and output to obtain the set speed at high gear.
When the spindle motor speed is set by bit 1 (GST) of parameter No. 3705=1, the
command output is output regardless of gear select signal. When the spindle motor speed
is set, it is used for gear shift.
Example of usage is shown below:
- 1388 -
Input command
M19 M03
Stop command Orientation detection
Spindle stop signal
Spindle orientation signal
Max. 70ms
Max. 70ms
Command output to 0
the spindle
Enable signal
Spindle speed
0min-1
RL (Constant speed set by parameter No. 3732)
Spindle speed override signals SOV0 to SOV7<Gn030>

[Function] The spindle speed override signal specifies an override from 0% to 254% in 1% units for
the S command sent to the CNC.
[Operation] An override value in binary must be set in 8 bits from SOV7 to SOV0.
The spindle speed override function is disabled (an override of 100% is applied) under
the following conditions:
- Tapping cycle (M series : G84, G74 T series : G84, G88)
- Thread cutting (M series : G33 T series : G32, G92, G76)
→ When this function is not in use, specify an override of 100%; otherwise, an override
of 0% becomes effective, thus disabling the spindle from rotating.
Spindle speed arrival signal SAR<Gn029.4>

[Function] The SAR signal initiates cutting feed. In other words, if the signal is logical “0”, cutting
feed will not start.
[Operation] Generally, this signal is used to inform the CNC that the spindle has reached the specified
speed.
For this purpose, the signal must be set to “1” only after the actual speed of the spindle
has reached the specified speed.
Setting parameter No. 3740 with a wait time before the start of checking the SAR signal
inhibits cutting feed from starting under a condition of SAR = “1” specified before the
change of the spindle command.
To use the SAR signal, it is necessary to set bit 0 (SAR) of parameter No. 3708 to 1.
The CNC checks the SAR signal under the following conditions:
a. Bit 0 (SAR) of parameter No. 3708 is set to 1.
- 1389 -
b. Before starting distribution of the first feed (move command) block after shifting
from the rapid traverse mode to the cutting feed mode. This checking is performed
after the time set by parameter No. 3740 has elapsed after the feed block is read.
c. Before starting distribution of the first feed command block after an S code is
commanded. The wait time for checking is the same as in item b.
d. When an S code and feed are programmed in the same block, the S code (or
command output to the spindle) is output, and the SAR signal is checked after a
fixed time elapses. If the SAR signal is set to “1”, feed begins.
CAUTION
According to the conditions of item d above, note that if the circuit
is so designed that SAR is turned to “0” simultaneously with the
output of an S code and the change of spindle speed is initiated by
the DEN signal, the operation will stop. That is, the spindle speed
does not reach the commanded speed because the CNC is waiting
for the DEN signal and distribution is not started because the CNC
is waiting for the SAR signal.

[Function] Informs absence or presence of spindle output command.
The ENB signal becomes logical “0” when the command output to the spindle becomes
logical 0. Otherwise, the signal is logical “1”.
During analog spindle control, S0 may not be able to stop the spindle from rotating at low
speed because of an offset voltage in the spindle motor speed control amplifier. In such a
case, the ENB signal can be used to provide a condition to determine whether to stop the
motor.
The analog spindle interface has electric signals (ENB1 and ENB2) similar to the ENB.
These signals work under the same conditions as with the ENB signal.
The ENB signal can be used also for serial spindle control.
Gear selection signals GR1O, GR2O, GR3O<Fn034.0 to .2>

[Function] The gear select signal specifies a gear stage to the PMC.
For details of this signal, see descriptions on the M type gear selection method in
"Overview."
Gear selection signals GR1, GR2<Gn028.1, .2>

[Function] This signal informs the CNC of the gear stage currently selected.
[Operation] For details of this signal, see descriptions on the T type gear selection method in
"Overview."
S12-bit code signals R01O to R12O<Fn036.0 to Fn037.3>

[Function] These signals convert the spindle speed command value calculated by the CNC to code
signals 0 to 4095.
The relationship between the spindle speed command value (calculated by the CNC) and
the value output by this signal is as shown below.
- 1390 -
S12 bit code signal
4095
0
16383 (Digital data) ← Serial spindle
0 10V (Analog voltage) ← Analog spindle
These signals convert the spindle speed command value calculated by the spindle control
function of the CNC to data from 0 to 4095 (for both serial and analog spindle control)
and outputs the result. This does not match the command set by spindle output control of
the PMC. (See "SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC".)
- Other signals
Spindle speed function code signals S00 to S31<Fn022 to Fn025> (Output)
Spindle speed function strobe signal SF<Fn007.2> (Output)
See "SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTIONS" and "SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC" for these
signals.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn028 GR2 GR1
Gn029 *SSTP SOR SAR
Gn030 SOV7 SOV 6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0
Fn001 ENB
Fn007 SF
Fn022 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00
Fn023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08
Fn024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16
Fn025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24
Fn034 GR3O GR2O GR1O
Fn036 R08O R07O R06O R05O R04O R03O R02O R01O
Fn037 R12O R11O R10O R09O
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
EVS ESF
3705
SFA NSF SGT SGB GST ESF

- 1391 -
#0 ESF When the spindle control function (Spindle analog output or Spindle serial output) is used,
and the constant surface speed control function is used or bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No.
3706 is set to 1:
0: S codes and SF are output for all S commands.
1: For the T series:
S codes and SF are not output for an S command in the constant surface speed
control (G96) mode and a command for maximum spindle speed clamping
(G92 S_; (G50 for G code system A)).
For the M series:
control (G96) mode.
NOTE
The operation of this parameter varies between the T series and M
series.
For the T series:
This parameter is valid when bit 4 (EVS) of parameter No. 3705
is set to 1.
For the M series:
For an S command for maximum spindle speed clamping
(G92 S_;), SF is not output, regardless of the setting of this
parameter.
#1 GST The SOR signal is used for:

0: Spindle orientation
1: Gear shift
#2 SGB Gear switching method is:

0: Method A (Parameters Nos. 3741 to 3743 for the maximum spindle speed at each
gear are used for gear selection.)
1: Method B (Parameters Nos. 3751 and 3752 for the spindle speed at the gear
switching point are used for gear selection.)
#3 SGT Gear switching method during tapping cycle (G84 and G74) is:
0: Method A (Same as the normal gear switching method)
1: Method B (Gears are switched during tapping cycle according to the spindle speed
set in parameters Nos. 3761 and 3762).
#4 EVS When the spindle control function (Spindle analog output or Spindle serial output) is used,
S codes and SF are:
0: Not output for an S command.
1: Output for an S command.
The output of S codes and SF for an S command in constant surface speed control mode
(G96), or for an S command used to specify maximum spindle speed clamping (G92 S_;
(G50 for G code system A)) depends on the setting of bit 0 (ESF) of parameter No. 3705.
#5 NSF For the M series, when a T type gear is selected (with bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No. 3706
set to 1 or constant surface speed control is enabled (bit 0 (SSC) of parameter No. 8133 is
1)), and an S code is specified:
0: SF is output.
1: SF is not output.
- 1392 -
NOTE
This parameter does not affect S code output. For an S command
for maximum spindle speed clamping (G92 S_;), SF is not output,
regardless of the setting of this parameter.
#6 SFA The SF signal is output:

0: When gears are switched.
1: Irrespective of whether gears are switched.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
TCW CWM ORM
3706
TCW CWM ORM GTT

#4 GTT Spindle gear selection method is:

0: Type M.
1: Type T.
NOTE
1 M type
The gear selection signal is not input. The CNC selects a gear
based on the speed range of each gear set by a parameter
beforehand according to S codes, and the selected gear is posted
by outputting the gear selection signal. Moreover, the spindle
speed matching the gear selected by the output gear selection
signal is output.
T type
The gear selection signal is input. The spindle speed matching the
gear selected by this signal is output.
2 When the constant surface speed control is enabled (bit 0 (SSC) of
parameter No. 8133 is 1), type T is selected, regardless of whether
this parameter is specified.
3 When type T spindle gear switching is selected, the following
parameters have no effect:
No.3705#2(SGB), No.3751, No.3752,
No.3705#1(GST), No.3705#3(SGT), No.3761, No.3762,
No.3705#6(SFA), No.3735, No.3736
On the other hand, parameter No. 3744 becomes usable.
#5 ORM Voltage polarity during spindle orientation

0: Positive
1: Negative
#6 CWM
#7 TCW Voltage polarity when the spindle speed voltage is output
TCW CWM Voltage polarity

0 0 Both M03 and M04 positive
0 1 Both M03 and M04 negative
1 0 M03 positive, M04 negative
- 1393 -

1 1 M03 negative, M04 positive
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
TSO SAT SAR
3708
TSO SAR

#0 SAR The spindle speed arrival signal SAR is:

0: Not checked
1: Checked
#1 SAT Check of the spindle speed arrival signal SAR at the start of executing the thread cutting
block
0: The signal is checked only when bit 0 (SAR) of parameter No. 3708 is set to 1.
1: The signal is always checked irrespective of the setting of SAR.
NOTE
When thread cutting blocks are consecutive, the spindle speed
arrival signal is not checked for the second and subsequent thread
cutting blocks.
#6 TSO During a threading or tapping cycle, the spindle override is:

0: Disabled (tied to 100%).
1: Enabled.
NOTE
During rigid tapping, the override is tied to 100%, irrespective of the
setting of this parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3709 SAM

#0 SAM The sampling frequency to obtain the average spindle speed

0: 4 (Normally, set to 0.)
1: 1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3712 GMB

[Data type] Bit
#6 GMB With type-M gear switching method B, the speed of each gear is clamped to:
0 : The maximum rotation speed (No. 3741 to No. 3743) of each gear or the maximum
clamping speed (No. 3736) of the spindle motor.
1 : The spindle motor speed (No. 3751) at the gear switching point between gear 1 and
gear 2, and
- 1394 -
The spindle motor speed (No. 3752) at the gear switching point between gear 2 and
gear 3.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3715 NSAx

#0 NSAx When a move command is executed for an axis, the spindle speed arrival signal SAR is:
0: Checked.
1: Not checked.
Set an axis for which the spindle speed arrival signal SAR need not be checked when a
move command is executed for the axis. When a move command is specified only for an
axis with this parameter set to 1, the spindle speed arrival signal SAR is not checked.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3716 A/Ss

NOTE

0: Analog spindle.
1: Serial spindle.
NOTE
1 The 1 analog spindle at the maximum can be controlled in a
system.
3 When using an analog spindle, assign it at the end of the spindle
configuration.
NOTE

to
- 1395 -
NOTE
When using an analog spindle, assign it at the end of the spindle
configuration.
(Example)
When there are three spindles in an entire system (two serial
spindles and one analog spindle), set the spindle amplifier
number (this parameter) of the analog spindle to 3.

display screen.
3720 Number of position coder pulses
NOTE

Set the number of position coder pulses.
3721 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side

Set the number of gear teeth on the position coder side in speed control (such as feed per
revolution).
3722 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side

Set the number of gear teeth on the spindle side in speed control (such as feed per
revolution).
- 1396 -
CAUTION
Parameter No.3721 and No.3722 can not be used for thread
cutting. If thread cutting was done by setting the any value on these
parameters, the correct screw can't be cut.
In the machine to do thread cutting, connect mechanically between
the spindle and position coder by the gear ratio=1:1. And these
parameters set the No.3721=0, No.3722=0.
(It is the setting for the gear ratio 1:1.)
3730 Data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of spindle speed
[Input type]
Parameter input
[Data type]
Word spindle
[Unit of data]
0.1%
[Valid data range]
700 to 1250
Set data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of spindle speed.
[Adjustment method]
<1> Assign standard value 1000 to the parameter.
<2> Specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle speed is the
maximum voltage (10 V).
<3> Measure the output voltage.
<4> Assign the value obtained by the following equation to parameter No. 3730.
Setting value = (10 (V) / Measured data (V)) × 1000
<5> After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the
spindle speed is the maximum voltage. Confirm that the output voltage is 10V.
NOTE
This parameter needs not to be set for serial spindles.
3731 Compensation value for the offset voltage of spindle speed analog output
[Input type]
Parameter input
[Data type]
Word spindle
[Unit of data]
Velo
[Valid data range]
-1024 to 1024
Set a compensation value for the offset voltage of spindle speed analog output.
Setting = -8191 × offset voltage (V)/12.5
[Adjustment method]
<1> Assign standard value 0 to the parameter.
<2> Specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle speed is 0.
<3> Measure the output voltage.
<4> Assign the value obtained by the following equation to parameter No. 3731.
-8191 × Offset voltage (V)
Setting value =
12.5
<5> After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the
spindle speed is 0. Confirm that the output voltage is 0V.
NOTE
This parameter needs not to be set for serial spindles.
3732 The spindle speed during spindle orientation or the spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift

- 1397 -

Set the spindle speed during spindle orientation or the spindle motor speed during gear
shift.
When bit 1 (GST) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 0, set the spindle speed during spindle
orientation in min-1.
When bit 1 (GST) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1, set the spindle motor speed during
spindle gear shift calculated from the following formula.
For a serial spindle
Spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift
Setting value = × 16383
Maximum spindle motor speed
For an analog spindle
Spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift
3735
Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor

Set the minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor.
Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor
3736
Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor

Set the maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor.
Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor
Spindle motor speed
Max. speed (4095, 10V)
Spindle motor max. clamp speed

(Parameter No.3736)
Spindle motor minimum clamp speed

(Parameter No.3735)
(S command)
- 1398 -
3740 Time elapsed prior to checking the spindle speed arrival signal

[Unit of data] msec
Set the time elapsed from the execution of the S function up to the checking of the
spindle speed arrival signal.
3741 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1

[Unit of data] min-1
Set the maximum spindle speed corresponding to each gear.
Spindle motor speed

(Parameter No.3736)

(Parameter No.3735)
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3 (S command)
Max. speed Max. speed Max. speed
(Parameter (Parameter (Parameter
No.3741) No.3742) No.3743)
- 1399 -
3751
Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2
3752
Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3

For gear switching method B, set the spindle motor speed when the gears are switched.
Setting value =
(Spindle motor speed when the gears are switched / Maximum spindle motor speed) ×
4095
Spindle motor speed
Spindle motor max. clamp speed Parameter No.3736

Speed at gear 2-3 change point Parameter No.3752
Speed at gear 1-2 change point Parameter No.3751
Spindle motor minimum clamp speed Parameter No.3735
Spindle speed
Gear 3 command
Gear 1 Gear 2
max speed (S command)
max. speed max. speed
parameter parameter parameter
No.3741 No.3742 No.3743
Gear 1-2 Gear 2-3

change change
point point
- 1400 -
3761
Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 during tapping
3762

When method B is selected as the gear change method in the tapping cycle (when bit 3
(SGT) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1), set the spindle speed at a change point of each
gear.
Spindle motor speed

(Parameter No.3736)

(Parameter No.3735)
Spindle speed
Gear 3 command
Gear 1 Gear 2
Max. speed (S command)
Max. speed Max. speed
Parameter Parameter Parameter
No.3741 No.3742 No.3743
Gear 1-2 Gear 2-3

change point change point
parameter parameter
No.3761 No.3762
3772 Maximum spindle speed

This parameter sets the maximum spindle speed.
When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum speed of the spindle is
specified, or the speed of the spindle exceeds the maximum speed because of the spindle
speed override function, the spindle speed is clamped at the maximum speed set in the
parameter.
CAUTION
1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the speed of the spindle is not
clamped.
- 1401 -
CAUTION
2 When spindle speed command control is applied using the PMC,
this parameter has no effect, and the spindle speed is not clamped.
NOTE
1 For M series, this parameter is valid if the function of constant
surface speed control is enabled (bit 0 (SSC) of parameter No.
8133 is 1).
2 When the constant surface speed control is enabled (bit 0 (SSC) of
parameter No. 8133 is 1), the spindle speed is clamped at the
maximum speed, regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97
mode is specified.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3787 SLG

#1 SLG In spindle speed calculation, gear selection status is judged from:

0 : Clutch/gear signals.
1 : Gear selection signals.
NOTE
1 Address of clutch/gear signals is as follows.
CTH1A, CTH2A<Gn070.3, Gn070.2> (First spindle)
CTH1B, CTH2B<Gn074.3, Gn074.2> (Second spindle)
CTH1C, CTH2C<Gn204.3, Gn204.2> (Third spindle)
CTH1D, CTH2D<Gn266.3, Gn266.2> (Fourth spindle)
2 Address of gear selection signals is as follows.
M type gear selection method
GR1O, GR2O, GR3O<Fn034.0, Fn034.1, Fn034.2>
T type gear selection method
GR1, GR2 <Gn028.1, Gn028.2> (First spindle)
GR21, GR22<Gn029.0, Gn029.1> (Second spindle)
GR31, GR32<Gn029.2, Gn029.3> (Third spindle)
GR41, GR42<Gn031.4, Gn031.5> (Fourth spindle)
3792 The sampling frequency to obtain the average spindle speed

[Unit of data] No unit
The sampling frequency is 2^(parameter data).
NOTE
1 If this parameter is 0 or out of range, the sampling frequency to
obtain the average spindle speed obeys SAM (parameter
No.3709#0). If you would like to set sampling frequency to 1, set
this parameter to 0, and SAM (parameter No.3709#0) to 1.
- 1402 -
NOTE
2 If you change this parameter, operate on the condition that spindle
rotation is stop state and the function to use spindle feedback such
as feed per revolution is not executed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3799 SPC

#6 SPC The position coder pulse to obtain the average spindle speed is:
0 : Sampled without sign data.
1 : Sampled with sign data.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8133 SSC
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#0 SSC Constant surface speed control is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
Caution
CAUTION
This section mentioned a spindle speed control that should be prepared on the
CNC side. But it is also necessary to design the processing of the signals to the
spindle control unit.
Refer to the manual of the spindle control unit used and take necessary actions
on the spindle control unit.
- 1403 -
11.6 SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC

Overview
The PMC can control the speed and polarity of each spindle motor, connected.
The first to fourth spindles each have their own individual interfaces. By using a PMC ladder program,
the user can control the spindles as desired. This section describes how to use the PMC to control spindle
rotation and provides example applications.
Explanation
- Switching control
This function can be used to specify the following:
• Spindle motor speed (number of rotations)
• Output polarity for each spindle motor (direction of rotation)
Usually, the CNC is used to control the speed and polarity of the first spindle motor. If the multi-spindle
control is added, the CNC can also control the second to fourth spindle motors.
This function allows the user to select whether the CNC or PMC is used to control the speed and output
polarity of the spindle motors.
- Specifying the spindle motor speed

The PMC can be used to specify the spindle motor speed upon executing the following:
• Switching the controller from the CNC to the PMC, by issuing a signal used to select the spindle
motor speed command SINDx
• Setting the spindle motor speed data, calculated by the PMC, in spindle control signals R01Ix to
R12Ix
When controlled by the PMC, the spindle motor speed is not affected by any signal (for example, the
spindle speed override signal) or parameter settings (for example, the maximum speed clamp parameter)
related to the spindle speed command of the CNC spindle control function.
→ If the multi-spindle control is added, however, the spindle stop signal *SSTPx <Gn027.3, 4, 5,
Gn026.6> can be used to stop a PMC-controlled spindle.
The spindle motor speed data is obtained from the following expression. Its value can range from 0 to
4095:
Spindle motor speed
Spindle motor speed data = × 4095
Maximum spindle motor speed (parameter No. 4020)
Remark)
Usually, the spindle speed must be controlled. If a gear train is used to connect the spindle to the
spindle motor, first obtain the maximum spindle speed at the maximum spindle motor speed.
Spindle speed
Spindle motor speed data = × 4095
Maximum spindle speed
By using this expression, the spindle motor speed data can easily be obtained.
- Specifying the output polarity for the spindle motor

The PMC can specify the spindle motor output polarity when the following are executed:
• Switching the controller from the CNC to the PMC, by issuing a signal used to select the polarity of
the spindle motor speed command SSINx
• Specifying the output polarity to the signal used to specify the polarity of the spindle motor selected
by the PMC SGNx
- 1404 -
- S-code and SF signals

To control the spindle by the PMC, the PMC may be required to read the S value specified by the CNC.
If the spindle serial output/spindle analog control function is added (if the PMC can control the spindle),
the S-code signals <Fn022 to Fn025> and SF signal <Fn007.2> can be output only when several
conditions, determined by the CNC spindle control, are satisfied. In some cases, the signals cannot be
used under standard conditions.
Specify the related bits of parameter No. 3705 according to the desired application, then use the S-code
and SF signals.
- Twelve code signals corresponding to the S value (output)

Twelve code signals corresponding to S value R01O to R12O <Fn036.0 to Fn037.3> are output to the
first spindle motor. The output data is calculated from the results of the CNC spindle control. (See Section
SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL.)
Even while a spindle is subject to PMC control, an S command that is issued to the CNC is converted to
spindle output data and output.
The SIND signal determines whether the speed output command, issued to the spindle motor, is obtained
from the twelve code signals corresponding to the S value, or from the R01I to R12I signals calculated
and specified by the PMC.
The use of this signal may simplify PMC ladder processing used to enable PMC spindle control.
Using twelve code signals corresponding to S values R01O to R12O <Fn036.0 to Fn037.3>, the input
command status of spindle output control by the PMC is not output.
Example
- Sample application 1)
Controlling the first and second spindles of a lathe system
→ Share the gear stages between the first and second spindles.
(If the first spindle uses two gears, for example, specify parameters Nos. 3743 and 3744, thus
enabling the use of gears 3 and 4 for the second spindle.)
Perform the necessary setting to enable control of the first and second spindles by the PMC.
To specify a rotation command for the first spindle, enter the gears for the first spindle in GR1 and
GR2 and obtain the data of the twelve code signals corresponding to the S value. Specify the data as
the speed output command for the first spindle in the PMC control interface for the first spindle.
To specify a rotation command for the second spindle, enter the gears to be used for the second
spindle in GR1 and GR2 and obtain the data of the twelve code signals corresponding to the S value.
Specify the data as the speed output command for the second spindle in the PMC control interface
for the second spindle.
- Sample application 2)
With the stop position of the serial spindle specified externally, specifying the S value as the angle of the
stop position for spindle orientation after the spindle positioning mode has been selected
→ Use the gears that are not being used for the first spindle.
(In this application, gear 4 is used to calculate the spindle position. Set parameters Nos. 3744 to
360.)
Specify the M code used to set the spindle to positioning mode and stop the spindle. Enter gear 4 in
GR1 and GR2.
Then, specify a spindle positioning angle with the S command.
(To specify the position of 145 degrees, for example, specify S145;.)
Expression 145/360 4095 is calculated and the result is output to the twelve code signals
corresponding to the S value (output signal). Enter the data in external stop position commands
SHA00 to SHA11 <Gn078.0 to Gn079.3> and perform the orientation.
- 1405 -
Signal
PMC spindle control signals
SIND,SSIN,SGN,<Gn033.7,6,5>R01I-R12I<Gn032.0-Gn033.3>: for 1st spindle
SIND2,SSIN2,SGN2,<Gn035.7,6,5>R01I2-R12I2<Gn034.0-Gn035.3>: for 2nd spindle
SIND3,SSIN3,SGN3,<Gn037.7,6,5>R01I3-R12I3<Gn036.0-Gn037.3>: for 3rd spindle
SIND4,SSIN4,SGN4,<Gn273.7,6,5>R01I4-R12I4<Gn272.0-Gn273.3>: for 4th spindle
[Function] The above signals enable the control of a spindle motor by issuing commands from the
PMC.
Both the speed and polarity of the spindle motor (direction of rotation) can be controlled.
The speed command and polarity are usually specified by the CNC. The use of these
signals allows the user to select whether the speed and polarity are controlled by the CNC
or PMC.
Even if the multi-spindle control is not provided, these signals allow the second and third
spindles to be controlled.
When the multi-spindle control and type A are being used (if the bit 2 (MSI) of parameter
No. 3709 is set to 0), the signals for the second to fourth spindles cannot be used.
- Details of the signals

• Signal used to select the spindle motor speed command SINDx
→ The above signal is used to select whether the spindle motor speed is controlled by the CNC or
PMC.
“1” : The spindle motor is controlled according to speed commands (R01Ix to R12Ix) issued by
the PMC.
“0” : The spindle motor is controlled according to speed commands issued by the CNC. The
spindle speed specified with the S command is output.
• Signals used to input the spindle motor speed command issued by the PMC R01Ix to R12Ix
→ If the PMC is being used to control the spindle motor speed command, specify, in binary
format, the value obtained using the following expression.
Spindle motor speed
Value to be specified = × 4095
Maximum spindle motor speed (parameter No. 4020)
(Spindle motor speed)

Maximum spindle
motor speed
-1
0 min Code signal
0 4095
• Signal used to select the polarity of the spindle motor speed command, SSINx
→ The above signal selects whether the output polarity of the spindle motor speed command is
controlled by the CNC or PMC.
“1” : The spindle motor is controlled according to the polarity command (SGNx) issued by the
PMC.
“0” : The CNC controls the polarity. The polarity is determined by the bits 7 (TCW) and 6
(CWM) of parameter No. 3706 and the M03 or M04 command.
- 1406 -
• Signal used to specify the polarity of the spindle motor selected by the PMC, SGNx
→ If the PMC is used to control the output polarity of the spindle motor speed command, specify
the polarity with this signal.
“1” : The output polarity of the spindle is negative.
“0” : The output polarity of the spindle is positive.
Twelve code signals corresponding to the S value

R01O to R12O<Fn036.0 to Fn037.3>
[Function] The S value, specified in the CNC part program, is converted to the speed output of the
spindle motor that is required to control the connected spindle. The converted value is
sent to the PMC with twelve code signals, in proportional to the spindle motor speed
output.
The speed data, the final result of the CNC spindle control, is output to the spindle motor
after the spindle gear ratio, spindle speed override, speed clamp, conversion of the surface
speed into the spindle speed by the constant surface speed control command, and other
data have been considered.
Code signal
4095
(Speed output to the spindle motor)
0
-1
0 min Maximum spindle motor speed
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I
Gn033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I
Gn034 R08I2 R07I2 R06I2 R05I2 R04I2 R03I2 R02I2 R01I2
Gn035 SIND2 SSIN2 SGN2 R12I2 R11I2 R10I2 R09I2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
- 1407 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
EVS ESF
3705
SFA NSF ESF

3706 is set to 1:
For the M series:
control (G96) mode.
NOTE
series.
For the T series:
is set to 1.
For the M series:
parameter.
S codes and SF are:
set to 1 or with the option for constant surface speed control), and an S code is specified:
0: SF is output.
NOTE

- 1408 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3709 MSI

#2 MSI In multi-spindle control, the signal used to select the spindle motor speed command SIND
is valid
0: Only when the first spindle is valid (SIND signal for the 2nd, 3rd spindle becomes
ineffective) (TYPE-A)
1: For each spindle irrespective of whether the spindle is selected (Each spindle has its
own SIND signal). (TYPE-B)
Note
NOTE
1 If the spindle fails to move after the PMC issues the spindle motor speed
command, check the following:
Type A is selected (the bit 2 (MSI) of parameter No. 3709 is set to 0) when the
multi-spindle control is used.
→ The second to fourth spindles cannot be controlled. The first spindle can be
controlled only when the spindle selection signal SWS1 is set to “1”.
The spindle stop signal for each axis is set to “0” when the multi-spindle control
is being used.
→ Spindle stop signal for each axis *SSTPx <G027.3, 4, 5, G026.6> stops the
spindle.
M03/M04 is not specified when the CNC is being used to control the output
polarity.
→ If the bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No. 3706 is set to 1, the M03/M04 command
issued to the CNC changes the output polarity for the spindle motor. If no
M03/M04 command is specified after the CNC is turned on, the specified
speed output is not sent to the spindle motor because the output polarity has
not been determined.
2 The SF signal indicates that output of the S code to the PMC has been
completed. The signal does not indicate the end of the command for specifying
the spindle speed.
3 For an explanation of connecting the second, third or fourth spindle, see
Sections "SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT" and "MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL."
4 If the multi-spindle control is not being used, the CNC does not issue any
commands to the second to fourth spindles. The output polarity is controlled by
the SGNx signal. It is not affected by the SSINx signal.
The speed output to the spindle motor can be controlled only when the SINDx
signal is set to “1”.
- 1409 -
11.7 EXTENDED SPINDLE NAME

Overview
Extended spindle names can consist of up to three characters beginning with ‘S’, which is the first spindle
name character. Use of extended spindle names allows commands to be issued to a particular spindle
without specifying a P command.
For details, see the description of extended spindle names in "MULTI SPINDLE CONTROL".
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (This manual) Multi-spindle control
11.8 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL

Overview
When a surface speed (in m/min or feet/min) is specified with an S code (a numeric value following S),
the spindle speed is controlled so that the surface speed is kept constant with respect to the change in tool
position.
Spindle speed N
r
Surface speed S=2πr⋅N
Fig. 11.8 (a) Relationship between surface speed and spindle speed
NOTE
When using constant surface speed control, set bit 0 (SSC) of parameter No.
8133 to 1.
Explanation
Specify constant surface speed control as follows:
G96 S_ (Surface speed m/min (in metric input) or feet/min (in inch input))
To cancel constant surface speed control, specify the following:
G97 S_ (Spindle speed min-1)
To perform constant surface speed control, the maximum spindle speed for each gear select signal issued
from the PMC side must be set by parameters Nos. 3741-3744.
The gear select signal is a 2 bit code signal (GR1, GR2). The relationship between the signal and gear
number is :
GR1 GR2 Gear number
"0" "0" 1
"1" "0" 2
"0" "1" 3
"1" "1" 4*
(* :Gear 4 is available only in the lathe specifications.)
- 1410 -
- Example of Spindle Analog Output

Assume that gear switching is two stage switching. If the spindle speed with the output 10 V is 1000
min-1 for the low speed gear (G1) and 2000 min-1 for the high speed gear (G2), set these speeds to the
parameters Nos. 3741 and 3742, respectively. In this case, the spindle output has the linear relationship
shown below (Fig. 11.8 (b)):
N
-1
2000min G2
When gear 2
selected
G1
-1
1000min When gear 1
-1 selected
600min
Spindle output
(Volt)
0 V2 V1 10
Fig. 11.8 (b)
Here, S = 60 m/min is given as the surface speed; if the position of the present X-axis cutter is 16 mm
from the center, the spindle speed N becomes 600 min-1 (S = 2πr⋅N). Therefore, V1 (for G1) or V2 (for
G2) is calculated inside the CNC and output to the machine side.
V1 ; 6 (V)
V2 ; 3 (V)
The value of output voltage V is calculated automatically from the following equations:
(i) G96
V=10S/2πrR
R : Spindle speed (min-1) at 10V output voltage (that is , spindle speed set by parameters Nos. 3741
to 3744)
S : Surface speed (m/min) specified by S command
r : Radius value in the X-axis direction (m)
(ii) G97
V=10N/R
R : Spindle speed at 10V output voltage (min-1)
N : Spindle speed given by S command (min-1)
- Spindle Serial Output

The output to the spindle in spindle serial output is a digital data.
Therefore assume the following relation for calculation:
Spindle analog output (voltage) 10V = Spindle serial output (digital data) 4095.
The above calculation becomes as follows:
The value of Spindle output D:
(i) G96
D=4095S/2πrR
R : Spindle speed (min-1) at maximum spindle motor speed (that is , spindle speed set by
parameters Nos. 3741 to No. 3744)
S : Surface speed (m/min) specified by S
r : Radius value in the X-axis direction (m)
(ii) G97
D=4095N/R
R : Spindle speed at maximum spindle motor speed (min-1)
N : Spindle speed given by S command (min-1)
- 1411 -
- Constant surface speed control with no position coder

With a machine having (or using) no position coder, constant surface speed control cannot usually be
performed during feed per revolution, but is enabled by setting bit 1 (FPR) of parameter No. 3729 or bit 2
(PCL) of parameter No. 1405 to 1.
NOTE
1 This function is not effective to spindle output control by the PMC.
2 When the setting of bit 1 (FPR) of parameter No.3729 or bit 2 (PCL) of parameter
No.1405 is 1, feed per revolution cannot be used to spindle output control by the
PMC.
For example, the following program is executed with G code system B and diameters specified.
N1 G00 X50. Z10. ;
N2 G96 G95 S12 ; ←Constant surface speed control and feed per revolution begin.
N3 G01 X20. Z30. F10.;
N4 Z50. ;
N5 G97 S200; ←Constant surface speed control ends.
N6 G00 Z200.;
N7 M30 ;
Z
N3
N4
Fig. 11.8 (c) Feed per revolution without position coder
In this program, block N2 issues a constant surface speed control command (G96), a surface speed
command (S12 m/min), and a feed-per-revolution command (G95). Block N3 causes the CNC to change
the spindle speed specification from 76.4 min-1 to 191 min-1 so as to maintain a constant surface speed
during movement to X = 20.
Meanwhile, the feed-per-revolution speed is changed according to the changed spindle speed
specification, and used for movement along the feed axis. However, the specified spindle speed is
clamped to the upper limit to the spindle speed specification (for the first spindle, using parameter No.
3772). In the above program, the feed-per-revolution speed command F10 in block N3 corresponds to an
actual speed of 764 (mm/min) to 1910 (mm/min).
- Command for maximum spindle speed clamping

When rotation at the maximum spindle speed set by the parameter causes a problem in constant surface
speed control, execute a command (M series: G92S_; T series: G50S_;) for maximum spindle speed
clamping before starting constant surface speed control in order to prevent the spindle from rotating at a
speed equal to or greater than a certain rotation speed.
If bit 4 (CSA) of parameter No. 3712 is set to 1, it is possible to prevent the spindle from rotating at an
unintended speed by issuing alarm PS5557, “NO MAX SP SPEED CLAMP COMMAND”, if constant
surface speed control is specified when a command for maximum spindle speed clamping has not been
executed after power-on due to a program error or an operation error such as execution of a machining
program in an incorrect order.
- 1412 -
- Spindle speed calculation during the 3-dimensional coordinate system

conversion / the tilted working plane indexing
In the constant surface speed control in the 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion / the tilted
working plane indexing mode, the coordinate system which is the standard of speed calculation can be
changed by the parameter 3CS(No.11221#6).
Table11.8 (a) The standard coordinate system of spindle speed calculation

Parameter 3CS Coordinate system of standard
0 Workpiece coordinate
Program coordinate (3-dimensional coordinate system conversion)
1
/ Feature coordinate (Tilted working plane indexing)
Program coordinate (G68) /

Z X' Feature coordinate (G68.2)
Tool (parameter 3CS=1)
r'=10.0(mm)
Z'
Spindle speed N 45°

X Workpiece coordinate (G54)
(parameter 3CS=0)
r=7.0711(mm)
Fig.11.8 (d) Spindle speed calculation during the 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion /
the tilted working plane indexing
Example)
When the followings are set by the programming.
- the surface speed S=10(m/min)
- the axis as the calculation reference is X
N1 G68 X0 Y0 Z0 I0 J1 K0 R-45.0
N2 G01 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 F100.0
N3 G96 S10 P1
N4 X10.0 Y0 Z0
N5 G97
N6 G69
Table11.8 (b) The spindle speed in N4 (calculation by relation of N=S/2πr)

Radius value r (mm) In the axis (X)
Parameter 3CS Spindle speed N(mm-1)
as the calculation reference
0 7.0711 225
1 10.0 159
- 1413 -
Clamp of maximum spindle speed
When bit 0 (CLM) of parameter No.3785 is set to 0, and spindle selection by extended spindle name is
enabled, if extended spindle name is commanded at clamp command of maximum spindle speed G92
(G50 in G code system A of T series), alarm PS0539, “MAX SP SPEED CLAMP COMMAND ERROR”
is issued. “S” has to be commanded at clamp command of maximum spindle speed.
Example)
Suppose that extended spindle name is set as follows.
Table11.8 (c)
Spindle number Extended spindle name
First spindle S
Second spindle SB
If “G92 SB30 ;” is commanded, alarm PS0539, “MAX SP SPEED CLAMP COMMAND ERROR” is
issued. Clamp of maximum spindle speed has to be commanded “G92 S30 ;”. If “S” is set as extended
spindle name, alarm PS0539 is not issued.
Selection of axis as the calculation reference in constant surface speed control

When bit 0 (CLM) of parameter No.3785 is set to 0, and spindle selection by address P or extended
spindle name of multi-spindle control is enabled, selection of axis as the calculation reference in constant
surface speed control “G96 P_ ;” is commanded, alarm PS0190, “ILLEGAL AXIS SELECTED (G96)” is
issued. Please change the setting of parameter No.3770 using programmable parameter input (G10) or the
like in changing axis as the calculation reference in constant surface speed control.
Example
Suppose that spindle selection by address P is enabled.
- If “G96 P_ ;” is commanded, alarm PS0190 is issued.
- If “G96 S_ P_ ;” is commanded, spindle selected by address P is controlled by constant surface speed
control.
Example
Suppose that extended spindle name is set as Table 11.7 (c).
- If “G96 P_ ;” is commanded, alarm PS0190 is issued.
- If “G96 S_ P_ ;” , or “G96 SB_ P_ ” is commanded, alarm PS0190 is issued.
When extended spindle name is enabled, address P cannot be commanded at G96 block.
G96 command without surface speed

When bit 1 (G96) of parameter No.3785 is set to 1, and spindle selection by address P or extended spindle
name is enabled, if G96 command without surface speed is commanded, alarm PS5355, “S CODE IS
NOT COMMANDED AT G96” is issued.
NOTE
When spindle selection by address P or extended spindle name is enabled, if
G96 is commanded without surface speed, surface speed which is commanded
at previous G96 command is applied. Axis as the calculation reference in
constant surface speed control which is commanded previously regardless of
G96/G97 mode is applied. In order to prevent rotation of unexpected spindle by
G96 command without surface speed, please command surface speed at G96
command.
- 1414 -
- System variable
Clamp value of spindle maximum speed
System variable System variable name
Attribute Description
number
#100959 [#_CSSSMAX] Spindle maximum speed commanded at clamp command
R
of maximum spindle speed
CNC reads block ahead of the executing block. The value of this system variable can be read after being
executed clamp command of maximum spindle speed.
Example 1)
O1234 ;
N10 G92 S5000 ;
N20 G96 S60 ;
N30 G01 X200.0 Z-300.0 F2.0 ;
:
:
N60 G92 S2500 ;
N70 #1 = #100959 ;
Suppose that N30 block is executing. And suppose that CNC has read up to N70 block. Because N60
block has not been executed, maximum spindle speed which can be read at N70 block is 5000[min-1]
commanded at N10 block. Therefore, 5000 is substituted for #1. In program of example 1, if 2500 has to
be substituted for #1, command block preventing buffering (such as M code preventing buffering) before
N70 block.
In the following cases, #100959 is -1.

- Clamp command of maximum spindle speed G92 (G50 in G code system A of T series) has not been
executed after turning on the power.
- Rigid tapping
If rigid tapping is commanded during constant surface speed control, alarm PS0200, ”ILLEGAL S CODE
COMMAND” is issued. Command rigid tapping after canceling constant surface speed control.
Signal
Gear selection signal (Input) GR2, GR1<Gn028.2,1>
Refer to Section, "SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL."
Constant surface speed signal CSS<Fn002.2>

[Function] This signal indicates that constant surface speed control is in progress.
[Output cond.] “1” indicates that constant surface speed control mode (G96) is in progress, while “0”
indicates it is not.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn002 CSS
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1405 PCL

- 1415 -
#2 PCL The function for constant surface speed control without the position coder is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
NOTE
1 The option for constant surface speed control is required.
3 When this parameter is set to 1, feed per revolution cannot be used
to spindle output control by the PMC.

Spindle motor speed

(Parameter No.3736)

(Parameter No.3735)
(S command)
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
No.3741) No.3742) No.3743)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
EVS ESF
3705
NSF ESF

- 1416 -
3706 is set to 1:
For the M series:
control (G96) mode.
NOTE
series.
For the T series:
is set to 1.
For the M series:
parameter.
S codes and SF are:
0: SF is output.
NOTE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3706
GTT


0: Type M.
1: Type T.
- 1417 -
NOTE
1 M type
signal is output.
T type
2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected, type T
is selected, regardless of whether this parameter is specified.
No.3705#2(SGB), No.3751, No.3752,
No.3705#1(GST), No.3705#3(SGT), No.3761, No.3762,
No.3705#6(SFA), No.3735, No.3736
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3708 SOC

#5 SOC During constant surface speed control (G96 mode), the speed clamp by the maximum
spindle speed clamp command (G92 S_; (G50 for G code system A of lathe system)) is
carried out:
0: Before spindle speed override.
1: After spindle speed override.
If this parameter is set to 0, the spindle speed may exceed the maximum spindle speed
(numeric value following S in G92 S_; (G50 for G code system A of lathe system)).
If this parameter is set to 1, the spindle speed is limited to the maximum spindle speed.
The spindle speed is limited to the upper limit of spindle speed specified in parameter No.
3772, irrespective of the setting of this parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3709 RSC

#1 RSC In the constant surface speed control mode, the surface speed of a rapid traverse block is
calculated:
0: In accordance with the coordinates of the end point.
1: In accordance with the current value, as in cutting feed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3712 CSA

[Data type] Bit
- 1418 -
#4 CSA When the constant surface speed control command (G96S_) is issued, if no command for
maximum spindle speed clamping (G92S_; in system M or G50S_; in system T) has been
executed since power turn-on:
0 : No alarm is issued (conventional specification).
1 : Alarm PS5557, “NO MAX SP SPEED CLAMP COMMAND”, is issued.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3729 FPRs

#1 FPRs Feed per revolution (without a position coder) is:

0: Not used for a spindle.
1: Used for a spindle.
In a machine that does not use a position coder, when FPRs is set to 1 for each axis, feed
per revolution can be performed with a spindle command. A feed per revolution is
specified with G95 (G99 for lathe systems) in the same way as for normal operation.
When multi-spindle control is performed, the target spindle for feed per revolution is
selected with a position coder select signal (PC2SLC<Gn028.7>, PC3SLC<Gn026.0>,
PC4SLC <Gn026.1>).
NOTE
1 The option for constant surface speed control is required.
3 When this parameter is set to 1, feed per revolution cannot be used
to spindle output control by the PMC.
3770 Axis as the calculation reference in constant surface speed control

[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the axis as the calculation reference in constant surface speed control.
NOTE
When 0 is set, constant surface speed control is always applied to
the X-axis. In this case, specifying P in a G96 block has no effect
on the constant surface speed control.
3771 Minimum spindle speed in constant surface speed control mode (G96)

Set the minimum spindle speed in the constant surface speed control mode (G96).
When constant surface speed control is performed and the spindle speed is lower than the
speed given by this parameter, the spindle speed is clamped to the speed given by this
parameter.

- 1419 -

specified, or the speed of the spindle exceeds the maximum speed because of the spindle
parameter.
CAUTION
clamped.
NOTE
1 For M series, this parameter is valid if the function of constant
surface speed control is provided.
2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected, the
spindle speed is clamped at the maximum speed, regardless of
whether the G96 mode or G97 mode is specified.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3785 G96 CLM

[Data type] Bit
#0 CLM When spindle selection by address P or extended spindle name of multi-spindle control is
enabled, constant surface speed control command is:
0: The following specifications.
- If extended spindle name is commanded in clamp command of maximum
spindle speed, alarm PS0539, “MAX SP SPEED CLAMP COMMAND
ERROR” is issued.
- If address P is commanded at selection of axis as the calculation reference in
constant surface speed control, alarm PS0190, “ILLEGAL AXIS SELECTED
(G96)” is issued.
1: Conventional specifications.
#1 G96 When spindle selection by address P in multi-spindle control, or extended spindle name is
enabled, if G96 is commanded without surface speed :
0: Alarm PS5355, ” S CODE IS NOT COMMANDED AT G96” is not issued.
1: Alarm PS5355 is issued.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8133 SSC
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
- 1420 -
#0 SSC Constant surface speed control is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11221 3CS

#6 3CS The spindle speed calculation of constant surface speed control during the 3-dimensional
coordinate system conversion / the tilted working plane indexing is :
0: Based on the workpiece coordinate system.
1: Based on the program coordinate system (3-dimensional coordinate system
conversion) / the feature coordinate system (Tilted working plane indexing).
Alarm and message

PS0190 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECTED (G96) An illegal value was specified in P in a G96 block or parameter
No. 3770.
When spindle selection by address P or extended spindle
name of multi-spindle control is enabled, selection of axis as
the calculation reference in constant surface speed control
“G96 P_ ;” cannot be commanded.
PS0539 MAX SP SPEED CLAMP Clamp of maximum spindle speed is illegal. Extended spindle
COMMAND ERROR name cannot be commanded for clamp of maximum spindle
speed.
PS5355 S CODE IS NOT COMMANDED AT S code is not commanded at G96. Command S code at G96
G96 block.
PS5557 NO MAX SP SPEED CLAMP No command for maximum spindle speed clamping (M series:
COMMAND G92S_; T series: G50S_;) was executed before the constant
surface speed control command (G96S_) was started.
Execute a command for maximum spindle speed clamping.
Caution
CAUTION
1 If the spindle speed corresponding to the calculated surface speed exceeds the
speed specified in the spindle speed clamp command (G50S_ for T series and
G92S_ for M series) during the G96 mode, the actual spindle speed is clamped
at the value specified in the spindle speed clamp command.
If the specified spindle speed is lower than the value specified in parameter No.
3771, the actual spindle speed is clamped at the speed specified by No. 3771.
2 If the constant surface speed control function is provided for a machining center
system, it affects gear change under normal spindle control. (See "SPINDLE
SPEED CONTROL.")
- 1421 -
Note
NOTE
Simultaneous use of multi-spindle control enables constant surface speed
control for spindles other than the first spindle. (See "MULTI-SPINDLE
CONTROL.")
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Constant surface speed control (G96, G97)
11.9 ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT (T SERIES)

T
Overview
The PMC can read actual spindle speed.
Signal
Actual spindle speed signals
AR00 to AR15<Fn040, Fn041> : First spindle
AR002 to AR152<Fn202, Fn203> : Second spindle
AR003 to AR153<Fn206, Fn207> : Third spindle
AR004 to AR154<Fn272, Fn273> : Fourth spindle
[Function] These 16-bit binary code signals output from the CNC to the PMC the actual spindle
speed obtained by feedback pulses from the position coder mounted on the spindle.
[Output cond.] These 16-bit binary code signals are always output. The actual spindle speed and the
signals have the following relationship:
∑ {2 ×V }min
15
−1
Spindle speed = i
i
i =0
where Vi = 0 when ARi is 0 and Vi = 1 when ARi is 1
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn040 AR07 AR06 AR05 AR04 AR03 AR02 AR01 AR00
- 1422 -
Note
NOTE
An absolute error of about 0.5 min-1 exists as a measuring error.
If the speed exceeds 65535min-1, 65535 is assumed and output.
- 1423 -
11.10 SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES)

T
Overview
This function positions the spindle using the spindle motor and position coder.
The function has a coarser least command increment compared with the Cs contour control function and
has no interpolation capability with other axes. However, it can be installed more easily because the
position detector is a position coder.
Generally, the spindle positioning axes are clamped mechanically except when positioning is under way.
NOTE
1 Be sure to set 1 in bit 1 (AXC) of parameter No.8133 and 0 in bit 2 (SCS) of
parameter No.8133 to use the spindle positioning function.
2 Both serial spindle Cs contour control function and spindle positioning function
cannot be made effective at the same time.
If both are specified as AXC=1 and SCS=1, both functions become invalid.
Therefore, when a negative value is set in parameter No.1023 with above
specification, alarm (SV1026) is generated.
parameter No.8133 to use the serial spindle Cs contour control function.
Explanation
In the turning process, the workpiece is rotated by the spindle to which it is attached (spindle rotation
mode), at the speed specified for the spindle motor. This spindle control state is called the spindle rotation
mode.
The workpiece mounted on the spindle can be positioned at a certain angle by moving the spindle
attached to the spindle motor by the certain angle. This function is called the spindle positioning function.
This spindle control state is called the spindle positioning mode.
The spindle positioning function can perform the following operations:

• Release the spindle rotation mode and enter the spindle positioning mode
Specifying a particular M code (set in the relevant parameter) sets a reference position in the spindle
positioning mode. (spindle orientation)
• Position the spindle in the spindle positioning mode
1) Position an optional angle using axis address,
2) Position a semi-fixed angle using a specific M code (set in the relevant parameter).
• Release the spindle positioning mode and enter the spindle rotation mode
Specifying a particular M code (set in the relevant parameter) changes the spindle to the spindle
rotation mode.
The least command increment, least input increment, and maximum value for the spindle positioning axis
are as follows:
• Least command increment
360/4096 0.088 deg (When the gear ratio of the spindle to position coder is 1:1)
• Least input increment
0.001 deg (IS-B)
• Max. programmable dimension
±999999.999 deg
- 1424 -
- Control block diagram

S pindle speed
control
S pindle
E rror S pindle m otor
am plifier
counter
G ear ratio n : m
n
P osition coder G ear ratio 1 : 2 Spindle
The spindle positioning function is enabled only when the number of pulses of the position coder is 4096
pulses and the gear ratio of the spindle to position coder is one of the ratios listed below.
1: 2 n （n : Integer not smaller than 0）
The least command increment (detection unit) for each gear ratio is as follows (Table 11.10 (a)):
Table 11.10 (a)
Gear ratio of spindle to position coder Least command increment (detection unit) deg
1:1 0.088 (1×360/4096)
1:2 0.176 (2×360/4096)
1:4 0.352 (4×360/4096)
1:8 0.703 (8×360/4096)
1:N (N×360/4096)
- Selecting a spindle positioning axis

As the target axis for spindle positioning, any axis address can be set in parameter No. 1020.
When setting the servo axis number of a spindle positioning axis (in parameter No. 1023), add a minus
sign (-) to the spindle number for which spindle positioning is to be performed.
Spindle positioning axes are assigned after the end of controlled axes.
Setting example 1)
Servo axis : X, Y, Z
Spindle positioning axis : C (first spindle)
Number of spindles : 1
Number of controlled axes Parameter No. 1020 Parameter No. 1023
1 88 (X) 1
2 89 (Y) 2
3 90 (Z) 3
4 67 (C) -1
Setting example 2)
Servo axis : X, Z
Spindle positioning axis : C (first spindle), B (second spindle)
Number of spindles : 2
Number of controlled axes Parameter No. 1020 Parameter No. 1023
1 88 (X) 1
2 90 (Z) 2
3 67 (C) -1
4 66 (B) -2
- 1425 -
- Switching to spindle positioning mode

Switching to the spindle positioning mode is specified using the M code set in parameter No. 4960.
When the spindle motor is used for the ordinary spindle operation (the spindle rotation mode), switching
to the spindle positioning mode must be made before spindle positioning can be performed.
Spindle orientation
After switching to the spindle positioning mode is completed, a spindle orientation is performed. The
orientation function stops the spindle at a predetermined position.
The orientation direction is specified by using bit 5 (ZMI) of parameter No. 1006 for analog spindles or
bit 4 (RETSV) of parameter No. 4000 for serial spindles.
With the grid shift function, the orientation position can be shifted within ±180 degrees by setting
parameter No. 1850 when the spindle is an analog spindle, or can be shifted within the range from 0 to
360 degrees by setting parameter No. 4073 when the spindle is a serial spindle.
Orientation speed
When an analog spindle is used, a movement is made at the rapid traverse rate used for reference position
return, which is set in parameter No. 1428, until the orientation enable speed is attained, and after the
one-rotation signal is detected, orientation is performed at the FL feedrate set in parameter No. 1425.
* Orientation enable speed

⎛ F ×P ⎞
1024 ≥ ⎜ ⎟ ≥ 128 ( pulses )
⎝ 60 × G × 0.088 ⎠
Set the orientation enable speed so that the expression shown is satisfied:
F : Rapid traverse rate for reference position return (deg/min)
G : Position gain (1/sec)
P : Gear ratio of the spindle to position coder
If the above condition is not satisfied, the one-rotation signal cannot be detected, so the spindle continues
moving at the rapid traverse rate.
The rapid traverse rate for reference position return cannot be overridden.
* FL speed
Set the FL feedrate so that the following expression is satisfied:
⎛ FL × P ⎞
1024 ≥ ⎜ ⎟ ≥ effective area of spindle ( pulses)
⎝ 60 × G × 0.088 ⎠
FL : Feedrate (deg/min)
G : Position gain (1/sec)
P : Gear ratio of the spindle to position coder
If the above condition is not satisfied, the accurate stop position cannot be detected, so the orientation is
started again from the rapid traverse operation.
When a serial spindle is used, the orientation speed is determined by parameter settings on the spindle
side.
When an orientation is performed for a serial spindle, the spindle motor rotates several turns and then the
spindle is stopped at the orientation position.
Omitting orientation
When the orientation at the time of switching to the spindle positioning mode is not required (for example,
when no start position is specified, and only incremental positioning from the current position is needed),
the orientation performed at the time of switching to the spindle positioning mode can be omitted by
setting bit 2 (ISZ) of parameter No. 4950. In this case, when the M code for switching to the spindle
positioning mode is specified, the spindle control mode is just changed to the spindle positioning mode
without orientation. This completes the switching to the spindle positioning mode.
- 1426 -
Program origin
The position at which the orientation is completed is regarded as the program origin. The program origin
can be changed by coordinate system setting (G92 (T series G code B, C/M series) or G50 (T series G
code A)) or automatic coordinate system setting (bit 0 (ZPR) of parameter No. 1201).
When the orientation is omitted, the program origin is not established, so operations by absolute
commands in spindle positioning by axis address are not guaranteed.
- Command system
The command system comes in two types: The first positions a semi-fixed angle; the second positions an
optional angle.
Semi-fixed angle positioning

Specify a positioning angle with an M code. Six types of M codes Mα to M(α+5) can be specified. The
value of α is set in parameter No. 4962 in advance. The positioning angles corresponding to Mα to
M(α+5) are listed below, and β is set in parameter No. 4963 in advance.
M code
Indexing angle (Example) β=30°
(Example) β=α+5
Mα β 30°
M (α+1) 2β 60°
M (α+2) 3β 90°
M (α+3) 4β 120°
M (α+4) 5β 150°
M (α+5) 6β 180°
When the number (γ) of M codes used is specified in parameter No. 4964, M codes Mα to M(α+(γ-1))
can be specified in up to 255 ways (Mα to M(α+(255-1))).
M code
Indexing angle (Example) β=30°
(Example) γ = 11
Mα β 30°
M (α+1) 2β 60°
M (α+2) 3β 90°
M (α+3) 4β 120°
to to to
M (α+11-1) 11β 330°
One of the rotation directions can be set by setting bit 1 (IDM) of parameter No. 4950.
Optional angle positioning

The position at any angle is specified by using an axis address followed by a signed numeric value. The
axis address must be specified in the G00 mode.
(In the subsequent explanation, the axis address is assumed to be the C-axis.)
(Example)
C-45000
C180.000
A numeric value with a decimal point can be entered. The position of the decimal point denotes the
degree position.
(Example) C36.0 = C36
Absolute and incremental commands

Positioning by specifying a semi-fixed angle (by M code) is always incremental.
One of the rotation directions can be set by setting bit 1 (IDM) of parameter No. 4950.
- 1427 -
For positioning at any angle, an absolute command and an incremental command can be specified.
When an absolute command is used for positioning at any angle, short-cut control (by setting bit 1 (RAB)
of parameter No. 1008 to 0) is also enabled using the rotation axis rollover function (by setting bit 0
(ROA) of parameter No. 1008 to 1).
Program origin
90°
180°
G code system A for T series G code system B, C for T series

Command method Address Command of A-B Address used Command of A-B
used on the above Figure and G-code on the above Figure
Direct the end point
Absolute
position by the distance C C180.0 ; G90, C G90C180.0 ;
command
from the program origin
Command by the
Incremental
distance between the H H90.0 ; G91, C G91C90.0 ;
command
start and end points.
Spindle positioning feedrate

Spindle positioning is done at the rapid traverse rate specified by parameter No. 1420.
Overrides of 100%, 50%, 25% and F0 (parameter No. 1421) are also applied.
- Spindle positioning reset

A specific M code (parameter No. 4961) must be specified when the mode is changed from spindle
positioning to normal spindle rotation.
Also in the following cases, the spindle positioning mode is canceled, and the spindle rotation mode is
entered:
<1> A reset operation (including emergency stop) is performed when a servo alarm is issued.
<2> A reset operation (including emergency stop) is performed when a spindle alarm is issued.
<3> The orientation operation is stopped in the middle by a reset, alarm, and so on.
<4> A reset operation (including emergency stop) is performed when bit 0 (IOR) of parameter No. 4950
is set to 1.
Diagnosis data
1544 Spindle positioning sequence status
The spindle positioning sequence status is indicated. (For each spindle)
1) Sequence for switching to the spindle positioning mode

Indication Description
- 1428 -
00010003 Wait until spindle stop complete signal SPSTPs is turned on (“0”->”1”)
00010005 Wait for completion of switching to spindle positioning mode
00010006 Wait until spindle unclamp completion signals *SUCPFs is turned on (“1”->”0”)
00010008 Wait for completion of orientation operation
00010009 Wait for completion of preset processing after orientation
0001000A Wait until spindle clamp completion signals *SCPFs is turned on (“1”->”0”)
2) Spindle positioning sequence

00020004 Wait until SPSTPs is turned on (“0”->”1”)
Wait until *SUCPFs is turned on (“1”->”0”)
00020006 Wait for completion of positioning operation
00020007 Wait until *SCPFs is turned on (“1”->”0”)
For spindle positioning sequence B specifications (when bit 7 (IMB) of parameter No. 4950 is set to
1)
00040006 Wait until *SUCPFs is turned on (“1”->”0”)
0004000A Wait for completion of spindle positioning mode cancellation
3) Spindle positioning mode cancellation sequence

Wait until *SUCPFs is turned on (“1”->”0”)
00030004 Wait for completion of spindle positioning mode cancellation
5207 Clamp/unclamp sequence status
The clamp/unclamp sequence status is indicated. (For each controlled axis)
1) Sequence for switching to the spindle positioning mode

00030001 Wait until spindle stop complete signal SPSTPs is turned on (“0”->”1”)
00030004 Wait until spindle unclamp completion signals *SUCPFs is turned on (“1”->”0”)
00030005 Wait for completion of orientation operation
00030006 Wait until spindle clamp completion signals *SCPFs is turned on (“1”->”0”)
2) Spindle positioning sequence

00070002 Wait until *SUCPFs is turned on (“1”->”0”)
For spindle positioning sequence B specifications (when bit 7 (IMB) of parameter No. 4950 is set to
1)
000D0001 Wait until SPSTPs is turned on (“0”->”1”)
000D0002 Wait for completion of switching to spindle positioning mode
000D0004 Wait until *SUCPFs is turned on (“1”->”0”)
000D0005 Wait for completion of positioning operation
000D0006 Wait until *SCPFs is turned on (“1”->”0”)
- 1429 -
000D0007 Wait for completion of spindle positioning mode cancellation
3) Spindle positioning mode cancellation sequence

000B0001 Wait until SPSTPs is turned on (“0”->”1”)
000B0002 Wait until *SUCPFs is turned on (“1”->”0”)
000B0004 Wait for completion of spindle positioning mode cancellation
FFFFFFFF End of sequence
Spindle screen
In the spindle positioning mode, indications related to the spindle positioning mode appear.
Signal
Spindle unclamp signals
SUCLPA<Fn038.1> : First spindle
SUCLPB<Fn400.1> : Second spindle
SUCLPC<Fn400.2> : Third spindle
SUCLPD<Fn400.3> : Fourth spindle
[Function] These signals specify that spindle mechanical clamping be released in a spindle
positioning sequence.
When this signal turns to “1”, unclamp the spindle on the machine (release the brakes or
extract the pin).
[Output cond.] Refer to the sequence (time chart) in this section.
Spindle unclamp completion signals

*SUCPFA<Gn028.4> : First spindle
*SUCPFB<Gn400.1> : Second spindle
*SUCPFC<Gn400.2> : Third spindle
*SUCPFD<Gn400.3> : Fourth spindle
[Function] These signals indicate that unclamping the spindle is complete in response to the spindle
unclamp signal SUCLPs.
Spindle clamp signals

SCLPA<Fn038.0> : First spindle
SCLPB<Fn401.1> : Second spindle
SCLPC<Fn401.2> : Third spindle
SCLPD<Fn401.3> : Fourth spindle
[Function] These signals specify that the spindle be clamped mechanically in a spindle positioning
sequence.
When this signal turns to “1”, clamp the spindle on the machine (apply the brakes or
insert the pin).
- 1430 -
Spindle clamp completion signals

*SCPFA<Gn028.5> : First spindle
*SCPFB<Gn401.1> : Second spindle
*SCPFC<Gn401.2> : Third spindle
*SCPFD<Gn401.3> : Fourth spindle
[Function] These signals indicate that clamping the spindle is complete in response to the spindle
clamp signal SCLPs.
Spindle positioning mode signals

MSPOSA<Fn039.0> : First spindle
MSPOSB<Fn402.1> : Second spindle
MSPOSC<Fn402.2> : Third spindle
MSPOSD<Fn402.3> : Fourth spindle
[Function] These signals indicate that the spindle is in the spindle positioning mode.
Spindle stop complete signal

SPSTPA<Gn028.6> : First spindle
SPSTPB<Gn402.1> : Second spindle
SPSTPC<Gn402.2> : Third spindle
SPSTPD<Gn402.3> : Fourth spindle
[Function] After checking that these signals are set to 1, the CNC performs spindle orientation,
spindle positioning, and spindle positioning cancellation.
- Signals related to gear change

Gear selection signals GR1O,GR2O,GR3O<Fn034.0 to 2>
[Function] These signals inform the PMC of the selected gear stage.
[Output cond.] For information about these signals, see "SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL".
Gear selection signals GR1, GR2<Gn028.1,2>

[Function] These signals inform the CNC of the gear stage currently selected.
[Operation] For information about these signals, see "SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL".
Clutch/gear signals (serial spindle)

CTH1A,CTH2A<Gn070.3,Gn070.2> : First spindle
CTH1B,CTH2B<Gn074.3,Gn074.2> : Second spindle
CTH1C,CTH2C<Gn204.3,Gn204.2> : Third spindle
CTH1D,CTH2D<Gn266.3,Gn266.2> : Fourth spindle
See the relevant manual of the serial spindle.
These signals determine the gear parameters (such as the loop gain) to be used.
Although the gear selection signals for a serial spindle are CTH1 and CTH2, also input GR1 and GR2.
Avoid changing the states of these signals in the spindle positioning mode.
Relationship between selected gear and spindle gear selection signals
- 1431 -
CNC side Serial spindle side

GR2 GR1 Selected gear CTH1 CTH2
0 0 1st gear 0 0
0 1 2nd gear 0 1
1 0 3rd gear 1 0
1 1 4th gear 1 1
NOTE
The above combinations of clutch/gear signals (CTH1 and CTH2) are just
examples.
Since the serial spindle selects a gear by using CTH1 and CTH2 independent of
gear selection on the CNC, the signals must be input as necessary, and serial
spindle parameters must be set accordingly.
- Other signals
Reference position return completion signal ZPx<Fn094>
[Function] This signal indicates that spindle orientation of the spindle positioning axis is completed.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to 1 when spindle orientation is completed, and the signal is set to 0
when spindle positioning or spindle positioning cancellation is performed.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn028 SPSTPA *SCPFA *SUCPFA
Gn028 GR2 GR1
Gn400 *SUCPFD *SUCPFC *SUCPFB
Gn401 *SCPFD *SCPFC *SCPFB
Gn402 SPSTPD SPSTPC SPSTPB
Fn038 SUCLPA SCLPA
Fn039 MSPOSA
Fn094 ZP8 ZP7 ZP6 ZP5 ZP4 ZP3 ZP2 ZP1
Fn400 SUCLPD SUCLPC SUCLPB
Fn401 SCLPD SCLPC SCLPB
Fn402 MSPOSD MSPOSC MSPOSB
- For first serial spindle

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn070 CTH1A CTH2A
- 1432 -
- For second serial spindle

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn074 CTH1B CTH2B
- For third serial spindle

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn204 CTH1C CTH2C
- For fourth serial spindle

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn266 CTH1D CTH2D
- Sequence (Time chart)

Switching to the spindle positioning mode
The operation of canceling the spindle rotation mode to enter the spindle positioning mode is performed
by specifying an M code for switching to the spindle positioning mode.
Set the M code for switching to the spindle positioning mode in parameter No. 4960 in advance.
<1> Suppose that an M code is specified by a program.
<2> Auxiliary function code signal M00 to M31 is sent, and the auxiliary function strobe signal MF is set
to 1 at the same time. This sending procedure is the same as for ordinary auxiliary functions.
<3> When strobe signal MF is set to 1, the PMC must read the code signal and perform corresponding
processing. After completing the corresponding processing, the PMC sets spindle stop complete
signal SPSTPs to 1 when the spindle is stopped.
<4> As soon as setting strobe signal MF to 1, the CNC checks whether spindle stop complete signal
SPSTPs is set to 1. When SPSTPs is set to 1, the CNC changes the spindle control mode from the
spindle rotation mode to spindle positioning mode, and sets spindle positioning mode signal
MSPOSs to 1.
<5> The CNC sets spindle unclamp signal SUCLPs to 1.
<6> When spindle unclamp signal SUCLPs is set to 1, the PMC performs processing to make the spindle
usable for positioning. When completing the processing, the PMC sets spindle unclamp completion
signal *SUCPFs to 0.
<7> When spindle unclamp completion signal *SUCPFs are set to 0, the CNC sets spindle unclamp
signal SUCLPs to 0 to post that the CNC has received the *SUCPFs signal.
<8> When spindle unclamp signal SUCLPs is set to 0, the PMC must set spindle unclamp completion
signal *SUCPFs to 1.
<9> The CNC rotates the spindle and stops the spindle at a certain position. (This is generally called
spindle orientation.) Then, the CNC sets reference position return completion signal ZPx (x denotes
the controlled axis number of the spindle positioning axis) to 1.
<10>The CNC sets spindle clamp signal SCLPs to 1.
<11>When spindle clamp signal SCLPs is set to 1, the PMC clamps the spindle mechanically with a
device such as a clutch or shot pin as necessary. After completing the clamping operation, the PMC
sets spindle clamp completion signal *SCPFs to 0.
<12>When spindle clamp completion signal *SCPFs is set to 0, the CNC sets spindle clamp signal SCLPs
to 0 to post that the CNC has received *SCPFs.
<13>When spindle clamp signal SCLPs is set to 0, the PMC sets spindle clamp completion signal
*SCPFs to 1.
<14>Finally, the PMC sets completion signal FIN to 1 for auxiliary function strobe signal MF. In
response to this, the CNC sets the MF signal to 0. Then, the PMC sets the FIN signal to 0.
- 1433 -
Timing chart for switching to spindle positioning mode
M code command
Strobe signal
MF
Spindle stop complete
signals SPSTPs
Spindle position control
Spindle positioning mode
signals MSPOS
Spindle enabled
SUCLPs
Spindle unclamp completion
signals *SUCPFs
Spindle orientation
Reference position return completion signals
ZPx
SCLPs
Spindle clamp completion signals
*SCPFs
Auxiliary function completion signal
FIN
CAUTION
1 Switching between the spindle rotation mode and spindle positioning mode must
be performed on the machine side in response to M code commands issued
from the CNC.
When the spindle positioning mode is canceled, the spindle becomes ready for
accepting speed commands such as an S command. Therefore, a PMC ladder
program must be created so that spindle rotation is not performed when the
spindle is clamped on the machine side.
Example:
When the spindle is clamped on the machine side, spindle stop signal *SSTP
<G029.6> is set to 0.
- 1434 -
CAUTION
2 When the spindle is clamped on the machine side (by using a device such as a
clutch or shot pin), the spindle must be disabled. Enabling or disabling the
spindle means to separately instruct the spindle control unit to enable or disable
spindle motor operation by the PMC ladder and so on.
Example: When a serial spindle is enabled, SFRA <G070.5> is set to 1. When
the serial spindle is disabled, SFRA <G070.5> is set to 0.
Refer to the manual of the spindle control unit to be connected, and add
instructions to the ladder program.
Spindle positioning
In the spindle positioning mode, positioning is performed using one of the following two programmed
commands:
1) Positioning at a semi-fixed angle by specifying an M code
2) Positioning at any angle by specifying an axis address
The operations performed by using the above two specification methods are the same, except that in
positioning at any angle, input/output signals related to auxiliary functions are not exchanged.
The M code used for positioning at a semi-fixed angle is set in parameters Nos. 4962 and 4964 in
advance.
When positioning at a semi-fixed angle is performed by specifying the M code, specification A or B can
be selected by setting bit 7 (IMB) of parameter No. 4950.
If specification B is selected, specifying an M code that specifies the spindle positioning angle performs
operations (1) to (3) below successively.
(1) Canceling the spindle rotation mode and switching to the spindle positioning mode
(2) Positioning the spindle in the spindle positioning mode
(3) Canceling the spindle positioning mode and switching to the spindle rotation mode
If specification A is selected, only the spindle positioning operation is performed in the spindle
positioning mode.
[Specification A: Bit 7 (IMB) of parameter No. 4950 = 0 ]

<1> Suppose that an M code is specified by a program. If an M code is specified in the spindle rotation
mode, the CNC issues alarm PS0224.
SPSTPs is set to 1. When SPSTPs is set to 1, the CNC sets the spindle unclamp signal SUCLPs to 1.
<5> When spindle unclamp signal SUCLPs is set to 1, the PMC unclamps the spindle, and when
unclamping of the spindle is completed, the PMC sets spindle unclamp completion signal *SUCPFs
to 0.
<6> When spindle unclamp completion signal *SUCPFs is set to 0, the CNC sets spindle unclamp signal
SUCLPs to 0 to post that the CNC has received the *SUCPFs signal.
<7> When spindle unclamp signal SUCLPs is set to 0, the PMC must set spindle unclamp completion
signal *SUCPFs to 1. After setting the SUCLPs signal to 0, the CNC rotates the spindle, makes a
movement as specified, then stops the spindle.
<8> The CNC sets spindle clamp signal SCLPs to 1.
<9> When spindle clamp signal SCLPs is set to 1, the PMC clamps the spindle mechanically with a
sets spindle clamp completion signal *SCLPFs to 0.
- 1435 -
<10>When spindle clamp completion signal*SCLPs is set to 0, the CNC sets spindle clamp signal SCLPs
to 0 to post that the CNC has received *SCLPFs
*SCLPFs to 1.
Timing chart for spindle positioning (specification A)
M code command
Strobe signal
MF
signals SPSTPs
Spindle position
control
MSPOS
Spindle enabled
signals SUCLPs
Reference position return
completion signals *SUCPFs
Spindle positioning rotation
SCLPs
Spindle clamp completion
signals *SCPFs
FIN
[Specification B: Bit 7 (IMB) of parameter No. 4950 = 1 ]

<1> Suppose that an M code is specified in a program.
- 1436 -
SPSTPs is set to 1. When the SPSTPs signal is set to 1, the CNC switches the spindle control mode
from the spindle rotation mode to spindle positioning mode, and sets spindle positioning mode
signal MSPOSs to 1.
<5> The CNC sets spindle unclamp signal SUCLPs to 1.
to 0.
SUCLPs to 0 to post that the CNC has received the *SUCPFs signal.
<8> When spindle unclamp signal SUCLPs is set to 0, the PMC sets spindle unclamp completion signal
*SUCPFs to 1.
<9> After setting the SUCLPs signal to 0, the CNC rotates the spindle, makes a movement as specified,
then stops the spindle.
<10>The CNC sets spindle clamp signal SCLPs to 1.
<11>When spindle clamp signal SCLPs is set to 1, the PMC clamps the spindle mechanically with a
sets spindle clamp completion signal *SCLPFs to 0.
<12>When spindle clamp completion signal *SCLPs is set to 0, the CNC sets spindle clamp signal
SCLPs to 0 to post that the CNC has received *SCLPFs. The CNC sets the SCLPs signal to 0, and
switches the spindle control mode from the spindle positioning mode to spindle rotation mode at the
same time. The CNC sets spindle positioning mode signal MSPOSs to 0.
*SCLPFs to 1.
- 1437 -
Timing chart for spindle positioning (specification B)
M code command
Strobe signal
MF
signals SPSTPs
Spindle position control
Spindle positioning mode
signals MSPOS
Spindle enabled
SUCLPs
signals *SUCPFs
Spindle rotation
SCLPs
Spindle clamp
completion signals *SCPFs
FIN
Canceling spindle positioning

To cancel the spindle positioning mode and enter the spindle rotation mode again, use an M code for
canceling the spindle positioning mode.
Set the M code in parameter No. 4961 in advance.
<1> Suppose that an M code is specified in a program.

- 1438 -
SPSTPs is set to 1. When the SPSTPs signal is set to 1, the CNC sets spindle unclamp signal
SUCLPs to 1.
to 0.
SUCLPs to 0 to post that the CNC has received the *SUCPFs signal. As soon as setting the SUCLPs
signal to 0, the CNC switches the spindle control mode from the spindle positioning mode to spindle
rotation mode. The CNC sets spindle positioning mode signal MSPOSs to 0.
<7> When spindle unclamp signal SUCLPs is set to 0, the PMC sets spindle unclamp completion signal
*SUCPFs to 1.
<8> Finally, the PMC sets completion signal FIN to 1 for auxiliary function strobe signal MF. In
Timing chart for canceling spindle positioning mode
M code command
Strobe signal
signals MF
signals SPSTPs
Spindle position
control
Spindle positioning
mode signals MSPOS
SUCLPs
signals *SUCPFs
Auxiliary function
completion signal FIN
Parameter
Major related parameters are described below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 ZRNx

- 1439 -
#0 ZRNx If a move command other than G28 is specified by automatic operation when no
reference position return is performed yet after the power is turned on:
0: The alarm PS0224, "PERFORM REFERENCE POSITION RETURN." is issued.
1: Operation is performed without issuing an alarm.
NOTE
1 The state in which a reference position has not been established
refers to the following state:
- When an absolute position detector is not used and reference
position return has not been performed even once after power-up
- When an absolute position detector is used and the association of
the machine position with the position detected with the absolute
position detector has not been completed (See the description of
bit 4 (APZx) of parameter No. 1815.)
2 When the Cs axis coordinates are to be set up, set ZRN to 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx DIAx ROSx ROTx

NOTE
#0 ROTx Setting linear or rotation axis.

#1 ROSx
ROSx ROTx Meaning
0 0 Linear axis
(1) Inch/metric conversion is done.
(2) All coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°)
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No.
3624)
0 1 Rotary axis (A type)
(1) Inch/metric conversion is not done.
(2) Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360°. Absolute coordinate
values are rounded or not rounded by bits 0 (ROAx) and 2 (RRLx) of
parameter No. 1008.
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. (Refer to parameter
No. 3624)
(4) Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the reference
position return direction and the move amount does not exceed one
rotation.
1 1 Rotary axis (B type)
(2) Machine coordinate values, absolute coordinate values and relative
coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°).
3624)
(4) Cannot be used with the rotary axis roll-over function and the index table
indexing function (M series)
- 1440 -
ROSx ROTx Meaning

Except for the Setting is invalid (unused)
above.
#3 DIAx The move command for each axis is based on:

0: Radius specification
1: Diameter specification
#5 ZMIx The direction of manual reference position return is:

0: + direction
1: - direction
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1013 ISCx ISAx

NOTE
#0 ISAx
#1 ISCx Increment system of each axis
Increment system Bit 1 (ISC) Bit 0 (ISA)
IS-A 0 1
IS-B 0 0
IS-C 1 0
IS-B is specified for the spindle positioning axis. So, set ISA to ISC to 0.
1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system

To determine a plane for circular interpolation, cutter compensation, and so forth (G17:
Xp-Yp plane, G18: Zp-Xp plane, G19: Yp-Zp plane) specify which of the basic three
axes (X, Y, and Z) is used for each control axis, or a parallel axis of which basic axis is
used for each control axis.
A basic axis (X, Y, or Z) can be specified only for one control axis.
Two or more control axes can be set as parallel axes for the same basic axis.
Setting Meaning
0 Rotary axis (Neither the basic three axes nor a parallel axis )
1 X axis of the basic three axes
2 Y axis of the basic three axes
3 Z axis of the basic three axes
5 Axis parallel to the X axis
6 Axis parallel to the Y axis
7 Axis parallel to the Z axis
In general, the increment system and diameter/radius specification of an axis set as a

parallel axis are to be set in the same way as for the basic three axes.
- 1441 -
NOTE

78.
Set the spindle number targeted for spindle positioning preceded by a minus sign (-1 to
–4), as the servo axis number of an axis used as the spindle positioning axis.
Settings
-1 : Spindle positioning by using the first spindle
-2 : Spindle positioning by using the second spindle
-3 : Spindle positioning by using the third spindle
-4 : Spindle positioning by using the fourth spindle
NOTE
One spindle cannot be set as multiple spindle positioning axes.
1260 The shift amount per one rotation of a rotary axis
NOTE

[Unit of data] Degree
(B))
Set the shift amount per one rotation of a rotary axis.
For the rotary axis used for cylindrical interpolation, set the standard value.
For the spindle positioning axis, set 360.0.

- 1442 -
1620

[Unit of data] msec
[Example]
Speed
Rapid traverse rate
T T
Time

T2 T2 T2 T2
Time
T1 T1

1820 Command multiplier for each axis (CMR)
NOTE

Set 2 for spindle positioning axis.
- 1443 -
1821 Reference counter size for each axis
NOTE

Set a reference counter size.
As a reference counter size, specify a grid interval for reference position return based on
the grid method.
When a value less than 0 is set, the specification of 10000 is assumed.


1828 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in movement

Set the positioning deviation limit in movement for each axis.
If the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning deviation limit during movement, a
servo alarm SV0411 is generated, and operation is stopped immediately (as in emergency
stop).
Generally, set the positioning deviation for rapid traverse plus some margin in this
parameter.
1829 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the stopped state

- 1444 -
Set the positioning deviation limit in the stopped state for each axis.
If, in the stopped state, the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning deviation limit
set for stopped state, a servo alarm SV0410 is generated, and operation is stopped
immediately (as in emergency stop).
1850 Grid shift and reference position shift for each axis
NOTE

[Valid data range] -99999999 to 99999999
To shift the reference position, the grid can be shifted by the amount set in this parameter.
Up to the maximum value counted by the reference counter can be specified as the grid
shift.
In case of bit 4 (SFDx) of parameter No. 1008 is 0: Grid shift
In case of bit 4 (SFDx) of parameter No. 1008 is 1: Reference point shift
NOTE
For setting the reference position without dogs, only the grid shift
function can be used.
(The reference position shift function cannot be used.)
1851 Backlash compensating value for each axis

Set the backlash compensating value for each axis.
When the machine moves in a direction opposite to the reference position return direction
after the power is turned on, the first backlash compensation is performed.
NOTE


- 1445 -
revolution).

revolution).
CAUTION
cutting.
If thread cutting was done by setting the any value on these
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4000 RETSV

#4 RETSV Reference position return direction of spindle on servo mode. (spindle positioning, rigid
tapping, etc.)
0 : CCW (Counter clockwise)
1 : CW (Clockwise)
NOTE
The direction for spindle orientation (or reference position return) in
spindle positioning using a serial spindle is determined by this
parameter.
4056 Gear ratio (HIGH)
4057 Gear ration (MEDIUM HIGH)
4058 Gear ratio (MEDIUM LOW)
4059 Gear ratio (LOW)

[Unit of data] Motor speed per spindle rotation × 100
These parameters set the gear ration between the spindle and spindle motor.
- 1446 -
NOTE
Set the gear ration between spindle and AC spindle motor when
the spindle positioning is performed with serial spindle. For which
gear is used, it depends on the clutch/gear signal (serial spindle)
CTH1s, CTH1s.
4065 Position gain in servo mode (HIGH)
4066 Position gain in servo mode (MEDIUM HIGH)
4067 Position gain in servo mode (MEDIUM LOW)
4068 Position gain in servo mode (LOW)

[Unit of data] 0.01 sec-1
These parameters set a servo loop gain on servo mode. (spindle positioning, rigid tapping,
etc.)
NOTE
When the spindle positioning by a serial spindle is performed, set
the position control loop gain in place of parameter No. 4970. For
which gear is used, it depends on the clutch/gear signal (serial
spindle) CTH1s, CTH1s.
4073 Grid shift amount on servo mode

[Valid data range] 0to4096
This parameter sets a grid shift amount (distance from the position of a one-rotation
signal to the machine zero point) in a servo mode (such as spindle positioning or rigid
tapping).
NOTE
The setting of this parameter is used as a grid shift amount for
orientation (reference position return) in spindle positioning using a
serial spindle.
4074 Reference position return speed on servo mode

The spindle speed set in this parameter is used for spindle orientation in a servo mode
(such as spindle positioning or rigid tapping).
- 1447 -
NOTE
The setting of this parameter is used as a grid shift amount for
orientation (reference position return) in spindle positioning using a
serial spindle.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4950 IMBs ESIs TRVs ISZs IDMs IORs

#0 IORs Resetting the system in the spindle positioning mode

0: Does not release the mode.
1: Releases the mode
#1 IDMs The direction of spindle positioning (half-fixed angle positioning based on M codes) is:
0: Plus direction.
1: Minus direction.
#2 ISZs When an M code for switching to the spindle positioning mode is specified for spindle
positioning:
0: The spindle is switched to the spindle positioning mode, and spindle orientation
operation is performed.
1: Only the switching of the spindle to the spindle positioning mode is performed.
(Spindle orientation operation is not performed.)
#5 TRVs The rotation direction for spindle positioning is:

0: Same as the specified sign.
1: Opposite to the specified sign.
NOTE
When a serial spindle is used, this parameter is invalid for the
specification of a rotation direction for the orientation command.
#6 ESIs The unit of rapid traverse rate on the spindle positioning axis is:
0: Not increased by a factor of 10.
1: Increased by a factor of 10.
#7 IMBs When the spindle positioning function is used, half-fixed angle positioning based on M
codes uses:
0: Specification A
1: Specification B
In the case of half-fixed angle positioning based on M codes, three types of spindle
positioning operations can occur:
(1) The spindle rotation mode is cleared, then the mode is switched to the spindle
positioning mode. (After switching to the spindle positioning mode, spindle
orientation operation is also performed.)
(2) Spindle positioning is performed in the spindle positioning mode.
(3) The spindle positioning mode is cleared, then the mode is switched to the spindle
rotation mode.
• In the case of specification A:
Operations (1) to (3) are specified using separate M codes.
(1) Specified using an M code for switching to the spindle positioning mode.
(See parameter No. 4960)
- 1448 -
(2) Specified using M codes for specifying a spindle positioning angle.
(See parameter No. 4962)
(3) Specified using M codes for clearing spindle positioning operation.
(See parameter No. 4961.)
• In the case of specification B:
When M codes for specifying a spindle positioning angle are specified, operations
(1) to (3) are performed successively. (See parameter No. 4962.) (However, spindle
orientation operation of (1) is not performed.)
4960 M code specifying the spindle orientation

Set an M code for switching to the spindle positioning mode.
NOTE
1 Do not set an M code that duplicates other M codes used for
spindle positioning.
2 Do not set an M code used with other functions (such as M00-05,
30, 98, and 99, and M codes for calling subprograms).
4961 M code releasing the spindle positioning mode

Set an M code for canceling the spindle positioning mode on the spindle positioning axis.
NOTE
4962 M code for specifying a spindle positioning angle

Two methods are available for specifying spindle positioning. One method uses axis
address for arbitrary-angle positioning. The other use an M code for half-fixed angle
positioning. This parameter sets an M code for the latter method.
In this parameter, set an M code to be used for half-fixed angle positioning based on M
codes.
Six M code from Mα to M(α+5) are used for half-fixed angle positioning, when α is the
value of this parameter.
• When the number of M codes is set in parameter No. 4964, let α be the value set in
parameter No. 4962, and let β be the value set in parameter No. 4964. Then, β M
codes from Mα to M(α+β-1) are used as M codes for half-fixed angle positioning
based on M codes.
The table below indicates the relationship between the M codes and positioning angles.
- 1449 -
Example: Positioning
M code Positioning angle
angle when θ = 30°
Mα θ 30°
M(α+1) 2θ 60°
M(α+2) 3θ 90°
M(α+3) 4θ 120°
M(α+4) 5θ 150°
M(α+5) 6θ 180°
: : :
M(α+β-1) β×θ β×30°
β represents the number of M codes set in parameter No. 4964.

(When parameter No. 4964 is set to 0, β = 6.)
θ represents the basic angular displacement set in parameter No. 4963.
NOTE
4963 Basic angle for half-fixed angle positioning

[Data type] Real spindle
This parameter sets a basic angular displacement used for half-fixed angle positioning
using M codes.
4964 Number of M codes for specifying a spindle positioning angle

This parameter sets the number of M codes used for Half-fixed angle positioning using M
codes.
As many M codes as the number specified in this parameter, starting with the M code
specified in parameter No. 4962, are used to specify half-fixed angle positioning.
Let α be the value of parameter No. 4962, and let β be the value of parameter No. 4964.
That is, M codes from Mα to M(α+β-1) are used for half-fixed angle positioning.
Setting this parameter to 0 has the same effect as setting 6. That is, M code from Mα to
M(α+5) are used for half-fixed angle positioning.
NOTE
1 Make sure that M codes from Mα to M (α+β-1) do not duplicate
other M codes.
- 1450 -
4970 Position gain

Set the position gain of the analog spindle in the spindle positioning mode.
4971 Position gain multiplier (first stage)

to to
4974 Position gain multiplier (fourth stage)

Set a position gain multiplier for an analog spindle in spindle positioning.
Position gain multiplier GC is obtained from the following equation:
2048000 × 360 × PC × E
GC =
PLS × SP × L
PLS Number of pulses output from the position coder (pulses/rev)
SP Number of gear teeth on the spindle side
PC Number of gear teeth on the position coder side
E Specified voltage (V) for turning the spindle motor at 1000 min-1
L Angular displacement of the spindle (degrees) per spindle motor rotation
[Example] For the spindle motor and gear ratio given below, GC is calculated as follows:
PLS = 4096 pulse/rev
SP =1
PC =1
E = 2.2 V
L = 360 deg
2048000 × 360 × 1× 2.2
GC = = 1100
4096 × 1× 360
NOTE
On the assumption that the spindle motor used turns at 4500 min-1
at 10 V, 2.2 V is required to turn the spindle motor at 1000 min-1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SCS AXC
8133
SCS
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#1 AXC Spindle positioning is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
- 1451 -
NOTE
1 Be sure to set 1 in bit 1 (AXC) of parameter No.8133 and 0 in bit 2
(SCS) of parameter No.8133 to use the spindle positioning
function.
2 Both serial spindle Cs contour control function and spindle
positioning function cannot be made effective at the same time.
If both are specified as AXC=1 and SCS=1, both functions become
invalid.
Therefore, when a negative value is set in parameter No.1023 with
above specification, alarm (SV1026) is generated.
(SCS) of parameter No.8133 to use the serial spindle Cs contour
control function.
#2 SCS Cs contour control is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
NOTE
control function.
invalid.
function.
Alarm and message

PS0136 SPOS AXIS - OTHER AXIS SAME The spindle positioning axis and another axis are specified in
TIME the same block.
PS0137 M-CODE & MOVE CMD IN SAME The spindle positioning axis and another axis are specified in
BLK. the same block.
PS0194 SPINDLE COMMAND IN A Cs contour control mode, spindle positioning command, or
SYNCHRO-MODE rigid tapping mode was specified during the spindle
synchronous control mode or spindle command synchronous
control mode.
PS0224 ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED Reference position return has not been performed before the
automatic operation starts. Perform reference position return
only when the bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is set to 0.
Or, spindle positioning command is specified in spindle
rotation mode. Switch to spindle positioning mode and
specify spindle positioning command.
PS1509 DUPLICATE M-CODE A function to which the same code as this M code is set
(SPOS AXIS ORIENTATION) exists. (spindle positioning, orientation)
PS1510 DUPLICATE M-CODE (SPOS AXIS A function to which the same code as this M code is set
POSITIONING) exists. (spindle positioning, positioning)
- 1452 -

PS1511 DUPLICATE M-CODE (SPOS AXIS A function to which the same code as this M code is set
RELEASE) exists. (spindle positioning, mode cancel)
PS1543 ILLEGAL GEAR SETTING The gear ratio between the spindle and position coder, or the
set position coder number of pulses is illegal in the spindle
positioning function.
SP0752 SPINDLE MODE CHANGE ERROR This alarm is generated if the system does not properly
terminate a mode change. The modes include the Cs contour
control, spindle positioning, rigid tapping, and spindle control
modes. The alarm is activated if the spindle control unit does
not respond correctly to the mode change command issued
by the NC.
SP1224 ILLEGAL SPINDLE-POSITION The spindle–position coder gear ratio was incorrect.
CODER GEAR RATIO
SP1233 POSITION CODER OVERFLOW The error counter/speed instruction value of the position
coder overflowed.
SP1234 GRID SHIFT OVERFLOW Grid shift overflowed.
SP1240 DISCONNECT POSITION CODER The analog spindle position coder is broken.
SP1243 ILLEGAL SPINDLE PARAMETER The setting for the spindle position gain is incorrect.
SETTING(GAIN)
SP1244 MOTION VALUE OVERFLOW The amount of distribution to a spindle is too much
SV0410 EXCESS ERROR (STOP) The amount of positional deviation during stopping exceeded
the parameter No. 1829 setting value.
SV0411 EXCESS ERROR (MOVING) The amount of positional deviation during traveling became
excessive than the parameter setting value.
SV1026 ILLEGAL AXIS ARRANGE The parameter for servo axis arrange is not set correctly.
- Parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number of each axis) is
set to a negative value or a duplicate value.
- The settings for parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number
of each axis) were made with a certain setting skipped
among 1 to 6, 9 to 14, or 17 to 22.
- A setting of a multiple of 8 or a multiple of 8 minus 1 was
made.
Caution
CAUTION
1 While the operations for spindle positioning (canceling the spindle rotation mode
to enter the spindle positioning mode, positioning the spindle in the spindle
positioning mode, and canceling the spindle positioning mode to enter the
spindle rotation mode) are being performed, automatic operation stop signal *SP
is invalid. This means that even when the * SP signal is set to 0, automatic
operation does not stop until the entire sequence is completed.
2 Dry run and machine lock are not enabled during spindle positioning.
3 For M codes used for the spindle positioning function, auxiliary function lock is
not enabled.
4 The spindle positioning function and the serial spindle Cs contour control
function cannot be used together. If both functions are specified, positioning has
priority.
5 The spindle positioning axis is treated as one of the controlled axes. Therefore,
signals related to controlled axes (such as an overtravel signal) must be set.
6 When analog spindles are used, set exact drift compensation values.
If an inappropriate drift compensation value is set, the positional deviation
amount in the stopped state does not become 0. As a result, the following
problems may occur when spindle orientation or spindle positioning is
- 1453 -
CAUTION
performed:
- In-position wait state is entered, which results in a stop.
- The spindle position is deviated. (The spindle does not reach or passes a
specified position.)
- Note on using the rigid tapping function together

CAUTION
When using the rigid tapping function together with the spindle positioning
function, do not specify rigid tapping in the spindle positioning mode, and
contrariwise, do not specify spindle positioning in the rigid tapping mode.
Note
NOTE
1 M code commands related to spindle positioning must each be specified in an
independent block. A block for specifying such an M code must not contain any
other command. (An M command related to spindle positioning for another
spindle must not be contained in the same block, either.)
Even when the function for enabling specification of multiple M codes in a single
block is used together, spindle positioning M codes must be specified in an
independent block.
2 The axis address for spindle positioning must be specified in an independent
block. A block for specifying such an address must not contain any other
command. The following commands, however, can be specified together with the
axis address in the same block:
G00,G90,G91,G92 (M series, G code system B or C for T series)
G00,G50 (G code system A for T series)
3 M code commands related to spindle positioning are not buffered.
4 Spindle positioning cannot be performed by manual operations (such as a jog
feed, manual handle feed, and manual numeric command).
5 Spindle positioning cannot be performed through PMC axis control.
6 Program restart/block restart cannot be performed for spindle positioning. Use
MDI for specification.
7 The stored stroke limit check is disabled for the spindle positioning axis.
8 The axis removal function is disabled for the spindle positioning axis.
9 The pitch error compensation function is disabled for the spindle positioning axis.
10 When a setting is made to omit spindle orientation, the reference position return
completion signal is not set to 1.
11 In spindle orientation, all-axes interlock/each-axis interlock checks are made only
at the start of the block. Even when the signal is input in the middle of block
execution, it is ignored.
12 The difference between a move command and the actual movement amount is
maintained until the spindle positioning mode is canceled.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Auxiliary function/2nd auxiliary function
(This manual) Spindle serial output/analog output
Spindle speed control
- 1454 -
- 1455 -
11.11 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL
11.11.1 Cs Contour Control

Overview
The Cs contour control function positions the serial spindle using the spindle motor in conjunction with a
dedicated detector mounted on the spindle.
This function can perform more accurate positioning than the spindle positioning function, and has an
interpolation capability with other servo axes.
NOTE
parameter No.8133 to use the serial spindle Cs contour control function.
2 Both serial spindle Cs contour control function and spindle positioning function
cannot be made effective at the same time.
If both are specified as AXC=1 and SCS=1, both functions become invalid.
Therefore, when a negative value is set in parameter No.1023 with above
specification, alarm SV1026, "ILLEGAL AXIS ARRANGE" is generated.
parameter No.8133 to use the spindle positioning function.
4 To use a serial spindle, set bit 5 (SSN) of parameter No. 8133 to 0. For details,
see "SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT" mentioned previously.
- Increment system
As the least input increment of the Cs contour control axis, IS-B or IS-C must be set.
Selecting IS-C requires the following parameter settings:
Bit 1 (ISC) of parameter No. 1013 = 1
Bit 7 (CSC) of parameter No. 3729 = 1
Bit 0 (CS360M) of parameter No. 4005 = 1
- Command multiplication
Command multiplication for the Cs contour control axis must be set to 2 (1×).
Explanation
In Cs contour control, positioning is possible, as well as interpolation between the Cs contour control axis
and a servo axis.
Performing speed control on a serial spindle is referred to as spindle rotation control (the spindle being
rotated with a speed command), while performing position control on a spindle is referred to as spindle
contour control (the spindle being rotated with a move command). The function for performing such
spindle contour control is the Cs contour control function.
Switching between spindle speed control and spindle contour control is performed by the DI signal from
the PMC.
In the Cs contour control mode, the Cs contour control axis can be operated either manually or
automatically, in the same way as normal servo axes.
(For a reference position return, see the relevant description in this section.)
- Setting the Cs contour control axis

If bit 7 (CSS) of parameter No. 3704 is 0:
Cs contour control is enabled for the first spindle in the path.
- 1456 -
The axis used for Cs contour control must be set as an axis of the axes controlled by the CNC. Any
controlled axis may be set as the Cs contour control axis.
Using parameter No. 1023, assign "-1" in the field corresponding to the chosen servo axis. (For
single-path systems)
As the servo axis number (parameter No. 1023) of the axis used as the Cs contour control axis, set the
number of the target logical spindle for Cs contour control with a minus sign (-1 to -n). (For multi-path
systems)
This setting must be made only once for each control system. The spindle operating as the Cs contour
control axis is the first spindle in the path.
Cs contour control can be performed for each spindle.
As the servo axis number (parameter No. 1023) of the axis used as the Cs contour control axis, set the
number of the target logical spindle for Cs contour control with a minus sign (-1 to -n).
Cs contour control can be performed for more than one spindle at the same time.
The axis used as the Cs contour control axis must be set as a rotation axis (bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No.
1006 and parameter No. 1022)
- Command Address
The address for the move command in Cs contour control is the axis name specified in parameter No.
1020. This address is arbitrary.
- Switching between spindle speed control and Cs contour control

• Switching from spindle speed control to Cs contour control
When the Cs contour control change signal CON <Gn027.7> is 1, the first spindle is regarded
as the Cs contour control axis.
When the Cs contour control change signal for each spindle CONS1 to CONS4 <Gn274.0 to
3> is 1, the corresponding spindle is regarded as the Cs contour control axis.
When the mode is switched while the spindle is rotating, the spindle stops immediately to perform the
change.
• Switching from Cs contour control mode to spindle speed control mode

When the Cs contour control change signal CON <Gn027.7> is 0, each spindle is placed in the
spindle speed control mode.
When the Cs contour control change signal for each spindle CONS1 to CONS4 <Gn274.0 to
3> is 0, the corresponding spindle is placed in the spindle speed control mode.
Confirm that the move command for the spindle has been completed, then specify the switch. If it is
switched while the spindle is moving, the machine enters interlock, or excessive position deviation alarm
occurs.
- Setting axes for interpolation with a Cs contour control axis

Up to five servo axes can be used for interpolation with a Cs contour control axis. Any servo axes can be
selected for interpolation with the Cs contour control axis by parameter setting. Set parameters as follows:
• When no servo axis is used for interpolation, specify 0 in parameters Nos. 3900, 3910, 3920, 3930,
3940.
• When one or more servo axes are used for interpolation, set the parameter for each as follows :
- 1457 -
(1) Assign the axis number (1 to 8) to each of the servo axes used for interpolation in parameters Nos.
39n0 (n=0, 1, 2, 3, or 4).
(2) Set the loop gain for each of the servo axes specified in (1) in parameter nos. 39n1, 39n2, 39n3,
39n4. The loop gain must be the position loop gain for the Cs contour control axis or a desired value.
Four parameters are provided to correspond to the four gears of the spindle. Use those parameters
according to the inputs of the serial spindle clutch /gear signal CTH1A, CTH2A <Gn70.3, 2>.
(3) When the number of servo axes to be used for interpolation is smaller than five, set 0 in remaining
parameter nos. 39n0.
Note on setting bit 7 (CSS) of parameter No. 3704 to 1

Common settings are used whichever spindle is used for Cs contour control. When Cs contour control is
performed with more than one spindle, the parameters for the gear specified by the clutch/gear signals
(CTH1 and CTH2) of the serial spindle for which the Cs contour mode is specified last are used.
When bit 7 (ALG) of parameter No. 1814 is set to 1, the loop gain can be set automatically at the time of
switching between spindle speed control and Cs contour control.
• Automatic setting of the loop gain at the time of switching between spindle speed control and Cs
contour control
1 Switching from spindle speed control to Cs contour control
The position loop gain of the Cs contour control axis selected by the clutch/gear signals (CTH1
and CTH2) (one of parameters Nos. 4069, 4070, 4071, and 4072) is set automatically for the
servo axis for which bit 7 (ALG) of parameter No. 1814 is set to 1.
When there are multiple Cs contour control axes, the smallest one of the position gain values
selected for these axes is set automatically for the other Cs contour control axes and servo axes.
2 Switching from Cs contour control to spindle speed control
The original position gain (parameter No. 1825) is set automatically for the servo axis.
When there are multiple Cs contour control axes, and there are still remaining Cs contour
control axes, the smallest one of the position gain values selected for the individual remaining
Cs contour control axes is set automatically for the other Cs contour control axes and servo
axes.
3 Switching between spindle speed control and Cs contour control during automatic operation
Switching is impossible during automatic operation and during axis movement.
If switching from spindle speed control to Cs contour control or vice versa is made in the
middle of a block executed in automatic operation, position gains do not change immediately;
they are set automatically after all controlled axes are stopped completely.
4 Similarly, when switching between spindle speed control and Cs contour control is made in
other than automatic operation, automatic setting is performed after the completely stopped
states of all controlled axes are confirmed
- Reference Position Return of Cs Contour Control Axis

After the serial spindle is switched from spindle speed control to Cs contour control mode, the current
position is undefined. Return the spindle to the reference position.
The reference position return of the Cs contour control axis is as follows:
• In manual mode
After the serial spindle enters the Cs contour control mode, move the spindle in the direction of the
reference position by turning on the feed axis and direction select signal (+Jn <Gn100> or -Jn
<Gn102>). The spindle starts the movement to the reference position; when it reaches that position,
the reference position return completion signal ZPn <Fn094> turns to 1.
Turning any feed axis and direction select signal to 1 moves the tool in the reference position
direction.
• In the automatic mode
(i) G00 command
- 1458 -
If a serial spindle is placed in the Cs contour control mode, then the G00 command is issued
without performing reference position return even once when bit 1 (NRF) of parameter No.
3700 is 0, the serial spindle performs a reference position return.
As G00 is specified, the serial spindle indexes the reference position, then performs positioning
at a specified position.
Only when positioning at the reference position is performed, the reference position return
completion signal ZPn <Fn094> is set to 1 after completion of the positioning operation.
When a reference position return has been performed at least once, a G00 command performs a
normal positioning operation.
When a reference position return is performed manually or by using G28, the spindle is always
positioned at the reference position; on the other hand, when a reference position return is
performed by using G00, the spindle can be positioned at any specified position.
NOTE
Set bit 0 (ZRN) of parameter No.1005 to 1.
(ii) G28 command

After the serial spindle is put in the Cs contour control mode, issuing the G28 command stops
the spindle motor, then moves the spindle to the midpoint. The spindle then returns to the
reference position. At this point, the reference position return completion signal ZPn <Fn094>
turns to 1. When the serial spindle has returned to the reference position once while in the Cs
contour control mode, the G28 command positions the spindle at the reference position without
moving to the midpoint and ZPn comes on.
• Reference position return speed
After the serial spindle is put in the Cs contour control mode, the reference position return speed is
the value of reference position return speed in Cs contour control (parameter No.4074). When
reference position return speed in Cs contour control (parameter No.4074) is set to 0, the reference
position return speed is the value of maximum speed in Cs contour control (parameter No.4021).
• Interruption of reference position return
(i) Manual operation
Return to the reference position can be interrupted by resetting, emergency stop, or turning off
the feed axis and direction select signal. When the interrupted return operation is resumed, start
from the beginning.
(ii) Automatic operation
Return to the reference position can be interrupted by resetting, emergency stop, or feed hold.
When the interrupted return operation is resumed, start from the beginning.
- Operation of Cs contour control axis (Manual/Automatic)

If a reference position return is performed on the Cs contour control axis, the axis can be operated in the
same way as a normal NC axis.
In the spindle speed control mode, on the other hand, it does not operate as the Cs contour control axis,
and alarm PS0197 occurs during automatic operation.
In the spindle speed mode, inhibit manual operation of the Cs contour control axis using the PMC ladder.
Diagnosis data
- Display of Position Error of Cs Contour Control Axis
418 Position deviation amount of each spindle
Position deviation amount of the position loop for the each spindle.
This diagnostic data shows information obtained from the serial spindle control unit. This diagnosis data
position error of the spindle contour axis during spindle contour control.
The position error can also be checked using a servo error display (DGN of No. 300) for an axis under Cs
contour control.
- 1459 -
300 Position deviation amount of each servo axis
Signal
Cs contour control change signal CON<Gn027.7>
[Function] This signal specifies that the first spindle be switched between the spindle speed control
and Cs contour control modes.
This signal is valid when bit 7 (CSS) of parameter No. 3704 is 0.
Cs contour control change signals in each axis

CONS1<Gn274.0> : First spindle
CONS2<Gn274.1> : Second spindle
CONS3<Gn274.2> : Third spindle
CONS4<Gn274.3> : Fourth spindle
[Function] This signal specifies that the first spindle be switched between the spindle speed control
and Cs contour control modes.
This signal is valid when bit 7 (CSS) of parameter No. 3704 is 1. In this case, Cs contour
control change signal CON <Gn027.7> is invalid.
Cs contour control change completion signal FSCSL<Fn044.1>

[Function] This signal posts that the first spindle has switched to the Cs contour control mode.
This signal is set to 1 when:
The spindle switches to the Cs contour control mode.
The signal is set to 0 when:
The spindle is not in the Cs contour control mode (is in the spindle speed control mode).
This signal is valid when bit 7 (CSS) of parameter No. 3704 is 0.
Cs contour control change completion signal in each axis

FCSS1<Fn274.0>:First spindle
FCSS2<Fn274.1>:Second spindle
FCSS3<Fn274.2>:Third spindle
FCSS4<Fn274.3>:Fourth spindle
[Function] This signal posts that the spindle has switched to the Cs contour control mode.
This signal is set to 1 when:
The spindle switches to the Cs contour control mode.
The signal is set to 0 when:
The spindle is not in the Cs contour control mode (is in the spindle speed control mode).
This signal is valid when bit 7 (CSS) of parameter No. 3704 is 1. In this case, Cs contour
control change completion signal FSCSL <Fn044.1> is invalid.
- 1460 -
- Time Chart
Spindle speed control Cs contour control Spindle speed control
CON
Gear change and

operation of spindle
motor must be
completed
FSCSL
Switching internal control Switching internal control
NOTE
1 Any mechanical gear change needed and inputs for GR1, GR2, CTH1A, and
CTH2A must be completed before the CON signal selects Cs contour control
mode.
2 A servo excessive error may be generated if the spindle motor is not ready for
operation. (Signal SRVA, SFRA <Gn070.4, 5> or other required signals must be
appropriately processed on the machine side).
3 In the Cs contouring control mode, do not change the SFR (SRV) signal.
- Other signals
Gear select signals GR1O,GR2O,GR3O<Fn034.0 to 2>
[Function] This signal is output to the PMC to specify the gear stage.
For information about this signal, see "SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL".
Gear select signals GR1,GR2<Gn028.1, Gn028.2>

[Function] This signal informs the CNC of the gear stage currently selected.
[Operation] For information about this signal, see "SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL".
Clutch/Gear signal (Serial spindle)

CTH1A,CTH2A<Gn070.3,Gn070.2> : First spindle
CTH1B,CTH2B<Gn074.3,Gn074.2> : Second spindle
CTH1C,CTH2C<Gn204.3,Gn204.2> : Third spindle
CTH1D,CTH2D<Gn266.3,Gn266.2> : Fourth spindle
Refer to the manual of serial spindle.
These signals determine what parameter (loop gain, etc.) to be used for each gear position.
CTH1 and CTH2 are the gear select signals for the serial spindle, but GR1 and GR2 must also be set. Do
not change these signals while in the Cs contour control mode.
Relationship between gears selected and spindle gear select signals
- 1461 -
CNC side
Serial spindle
T/M series with CSSC M series without CSSC
GR2 GR1 Gear selection GR3O GR2O GR1O Gear selection CTH1 CTH2
0 0 1st stage 0 0 0 1st stage 0 0
0 1 2nd stage 0 1 1 2nd stage 0 1
1 0 3rd stage 1 0 0 3rd stage 1 0
1 1 4th stage 1 1
CSSC: Constant surface speed control
NOTE
1 When the M series does not include the constant surface speed control option,
and bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No. 3706=0, GR1 and GR2 do not need to be
input. Input CTH1 and CTH2 when gears are changed using GR1O, GR2O and
GR3O.
2 The above combination of clutch/gear signals CTH1 and CTH2 is an example.
The serial spindle gear is selected by CTH1 and CTH2 independently of gear
selection on the CNC side. So, enter necessary signals, and set the
corresponding serial spindle parameters.
Cs contour control axis reference position return completion signals

ZP1 to ZP8<Fn094>
[Function] This signal indicates that a reference position return has been made for the Cs contour
control axis.
ZPx
x : 1 ..... Reference position return completion signal of 1st spindle
2 ..... Reference position return completion signal of 2nd spindle
3 ..... Reference position return completion signal of 3rd spindle
: :
: :
If a manual reference position return or automatic reference position return by G28 is
performed during the Cs contour control mode, this signal becomes logical 1 when the Cs
contour control axis reaches the reference position.
Signals on manual operation

Feed axis and direction select signal +Jn, -Jn <Gn100, Gn102> (Input) Manual handle feed axis select
signal HSnA, HSnB, HSnC, HSnD <Gn018, Gn019> (Input) (Refer to respective items in this manual)
The Cs contour control axis can be manually operated in the same way as normal servo axes, except for a
manual reference position return. In the spindle speed control mode, however, manual operations for the
Cs contour control axis must be inhibited using the PMC ladder, etc.
- 1462 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn027 CON
Gn028 GR2 GR1
Gn274 CONS4 CONS3 CONS2 CONS1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn044 FSCSL
Fn094 ZP8 ZP7 ZP6 ZP5 ZP4 ZP3 ZP2 ZP1
Fn274 FCSS4 FCSS3 FCSS2 FCSS1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn070 MRDYA SFRA SRVA CTH1A CTH2A TLMHA TLMLA
Fn045 LDT2A LDT1A

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn074 MRDYB SFRB SRVB CTH1B CTH2B TLMHB TLMLB
Fn049 LDT2B LDT1B

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn204 MRDYC SFRC SRVC CTH1C CTH2C TLMHC TLMLC
Fn168 LDT2C LDT1C

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn266 MRDYD SFRD SRVD CTH1D CTH2D TLMHD TLMLD
Fn266 LDT2D LDT1D
Parameter
Major related parameters are described below.
In addition to the parameters described below, axis speed, acceleration, indication, and other parameters
can be used. It is not necessary to set the digital servo parameters (parameters Nos. 2000 and up) for the
axis used as the Cs contour control axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 ZRNx

- 1463 -
0: The alarm PS0224, "ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED." is issued.
NOTE
2 When the Cs axis coordinates are to be set up, set this parameter
to 0.
3 To use a function that establishes the reference point and makes a
movement with a command other than G28, such as an axis of Cs
contour control, set this parameter to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 DIAx ROSx ROTx

NOTE

#1 ROSx
ROSx ROTx Meaning
0 0 Linear axis
3624)
parameter No. 1008.
No. 3624)
rotation.
- 1464 -
ROSx ROTx Meaning

3624)
above.
Set a Cs contouring control axis as a rotation axis.
NOTE
1 Inch/metric conversion is not performed on rotation axes.
2 For rotation axes, the machine coordinate system is normalized to
the range from 0 to 360 degrees. Automatic reference position
return (G28, G30) is done in the direction of manual reference
position return and the amount of travel does not exceed one turn.
#3 DIAx The move command for each axis is based on:

0: Radius specification
1: Diameter specification
For a Cs contouring control, set 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1013 ISEx ISDx ISCx ISAx

NOTE
#0 ISAx
#1 ISCx Increment system of each axis
Increment system Bit 1 (ISC) Bit 0 (ISA)
IS-A 0 1
IS-B 0 0
IS-C 1 0

Xp-Yp plane, G18: Zp-Xp plane, G19: Yp-Zp plane) specify which of the basic three
- 1465 -
Setting Meaning

NOTE

78.
With an axis for which Cs contour control/spindle positioning is to be performed, set
[Example] When exercising Cs contour control on the fourth controlled axis by using the first
spindle, set -1.
NOTE

(B))
For a Cs contouring control, set 360.0.
- 1466 -


1620

[Unit of data] msec
[Example]
Speed
Rapid traverse rate
T T
Time

T2 T2 T2 T2
Time
T1 T1


- 1467 -

[Unit of data] msec
for each axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1814 ALGx

#7 ALGx The servo axis loop gain in the Cs contour control mode is:
0: Not matched with the Cs contour control loop gain.
1: Matched with the Cs contour control loop gain.
NOTE
1 For those axes that are used for EGB, spindle positioning, index
table indexing, PMC axis control, rigid tapping, and so forth, set this
parameter to 0 (Not matched with the Cs contouring control loop
gain).
2 When specifying axes subject to interpolation with the Cs
contouring control axis by using parameter No. 39n0 (n = 0 to 4),
set this parameter to 0.
3 When making a setting so that a position gain is automatically set
at the time of Cs contouring control switching by setting bit 7 (ALG)
of parameter No. 1814 to 1, set all of parameter No. 39n0 (n = 0 to
4) to 0.
1820 Command multiplier for each axis (CMR)
NOTE

[Unit of data] 0.5 times
1825 Servo loop gain for each axis

Set the loop gain for position control for each axis.
- 1468 -
NOTE
If there is a servo axis that is subject to interpolation with the Cs
contouring control axis, set parameters Nos. 3900 to 3944 to match
the loop gain of the Cs contouring control axis to that of the servo
axis in the Cs contour control mode.


stop).
parameter.

1830 Axis-by-axis positional deviation limit at servo-off time

This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit at servo-off time, on an
axis-by-axis basis.
If the value specified with this parameter is exceeded at servo-off time, a servo alarm is
issued to cause an immediate stop (same as an emergency stop). Usually, set the same
value as a positional deviation at stop time.
- 1469 -
1851 Backlash compensating value for each axis

Set the backlash compensating value for each axis.
When the machine moves in a direction opposite to the reference position return direction
after the power is turned on, the first backlash compensation is performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3700 NRF

#1 NRF With the first move command (G00) after switching the series spindle to Cs contour
control mode:
0: A reference position return operation is once performed then positioning is
performed.
1: A normal positioning operation is performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3704 CSS

NOTE
#7 CSS On the each spindle, Cs contour control is:

0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3716 A/Ss

NOTE

0: Analog spindle.
1: Serial spindle.
- 1470 -
NOTE
3 When using an analog spindle, set it at the end of the spindle
configuration.
NOTE

to
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3729 CSCs NCSs CSNs

#2 CSNs When the Cs contour control mode is turned off, an in-position check is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
#3 NCSs When the Cs contour control mode is set:

0: Switching to Cs contour control is completed when the spindle activating current is
on (the spindle amplifier is ready for operation in the Cs contour control mode).
1: Switching to Cs contour control is completed even when the spindle activating
current is off (the spindle amplifier is not ready for operation in the Cs contour
control mode).
If this parameter is set to 1, the Cs contour control switch end signal is output without
waiting for the spindle to decelerate to a stop.
#7 CSCs The increment system of the Cs contour control axis is:

0: IS-B.
1: IS-C.
3900 Number of servo axis for interpolation with Cs contour control axis

[Valid data range] 0 to number of controlled axes
Set the number of the servo axis to be used for interpolation with the Cs contour control
axis. (For group 1)
- 1471 -
NOTE
When there is no servo axis used for interpolation with the Cs
contour control axis, set 0.
3901 Loop gain for servo axis for interpolation with Cs contour control axis (HIGH gear)
3902 Loop gain for servo axis for interpolation with Cs contour control axis (MEDIUM HIGH gear)
3903 Loop gain for servo axis for interpolation with Cs contour control axis (MEDIUM LOW gear)
3904 Loop gain for servo axis for interpolation with Cs contour control axis (LOW gear)

Set the servo loop gain for each spindle gear of the servo axis used for interpolation with
the Cs contour control axis. (For group 1)

axis. (For group 2)
NOTE
When there is no servo axis for interpolation with the Cs contour
control axis, or when there is not more than one servo axis, set 0.


- 1472 -
axis. (For group 3)
NOTE
control axis, or when there is not more than two servo axes, set 0.


axis. (For group 4)
NOTE
control axis, or when there is not more than three servo axes, set 0.


- 1473 -

axis. (For group 5)
NOTE
control axis, or when there is not more than four servo axes, set 0.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4000 CSO

#3 CSO Direction of reference position return in Cs contour control
0: Reference position return is performed by rotating the spindle counterclockwise
(when viewed from the motor output axis).
1: Reference position return is performed by rotating the spindle clockwise (when
viewed from the motor output axis).
4021 Maximum speed in Cs contour control

Set the maximum speed of the spindle in Cs contour control.
4056 Gear ratio (HIGH gear)
4057 Gear ratio (MEDIUM HIGH gear)
4058 Gear ratio (MEDIUM LOW gear)
4059 Gear ratio (LOW gear)

[Unit of data] Motor speed per spindle rotation × 100
Set the gear ratio of the spindle to spindle motor.
- 1474 -
NOTE
When a serial spindle is positioned, set the gear ratio of the spindle
to spindle motor.
The gear ratio to be used for spindle operations is set by
clutch/gear signals (serial spindle) CTH1s and CTH2s.
4069 Position gain in Cs contour control (HIGH gear)
4070 Position gain in Cs contour control (MEDIUM HIGH gear)
4071 Position gain in Cs contour control (MEDIUM LOW gear)
4072 Position gain in Cs contour control (LOW gear)

Set the position gain in Cs contour control.
4074 Reference position return speed in servo mode

As the spindle orientation speed in a servo mode (spindle positioning, rigid tapping, and
so on), the spindle speed set in this parameter is used.
NOTE
When a serial spindle is positioned, the orientation (reference
position return) speed depends on this parameter.
4135 Grid shift amount in Cs contour control

[Valid data range] Within ±1 rotation (For 1-micron detection, for example, -360000 to 360000)
Set the grid shift amount (the distance from the one-rotation signal position to machine
zero point) in Cs contour control.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SCS AXC
8133
SCS
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
- 1475 -
#1 AXC Spindle positioning is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
NOTE
function.
invalid.
control function.
#2 SCS Cs contour control is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
NOTE
control function.
invalid.
function.
Alarm and message

control mode.
PS0197 C-AXIS COMMANDED IN SPINDLE The program specified a movement along the Cs-axis when
MODE the Cs contour control switching signal was off.
SP0752 SPINDLE MODE CHANGE ERROR This alarm is generated if the system does not properly
terminate a mode change. The modes include the Cs contour
control, spindle positioning, rigid tapping, and spindle control
modes. The alarm is activated if the spindle control unit does
not respond correctly to the mode change command issued by
the NC.
- 1476 -
Caution
CAUTION
1 The M codes to specify Cs contour control mode switching must be assigned to
M codes not buffered. (Parameters Nos. 3411 to 3420 and 11290 to 11299)
2 Avoid changing spindle gears in Cs contour control mode. When a gear change
is required, be sure to perform the gear change in spindle speed control mode.
3 The following error compensation functions are enabled for the Cs contour
control axis:
Pitch error compensation, both-direction pitch error compensation, backlash
compensation
4 For the axis under Cs contour control, the following functions cannot be used:
- Index table indexing
- Axis switching
- Polar coordinate command
- PMC axis control (However, it is possible to use under Cs contour
control when Rapid traverse (00h), Cutting feed (01h), Continuous feed (06h),
Machine coordinate system selection (20h), Speed command (10h) and
position control is selected.
(parameter VCP (No.8007#2)=1 and EVP(No.8005#4) =1))
- Removal of controlled axis
5 In the Cs contour control mode, when an axis control parameter for the Cs
contour control axis such as the acceleration/deceleration time constant is
changed, the new parameter value does not become valid immediately. The new
parameter value becomes valid after the Cs contour control mode is canceled
then entered again.
6 When the position gain is automatically set at Cs contour control switching (when
bit 7 (ALG) of parameter No. 1814 is set to 1), changing the setting in
parameters Nos. 4069 to 4072 of the loop gain corresponding to the selected
spindle gear does not make the new setting valid immediately.
To make the new setting valid, cancel the Cs contour control mode, then set the
Cs contour control mode again. If more than one Cs contour control axis is
present, however, the newly set value is included in the position gain values
selected for these axes among which the smallest value is to be selected.
Reference item
For details of the parameters (parameters Nos. 4000 to 4539), signals, and alarms for the serial spindle
control unit, refer to the following manuals of serial spindles:
11.11.2 Cs Contour Control Torque Limit Skip

Overview
This function enables a torque limit skip for the Cs contour control axis.
Explanation
Torque limit command signal TLMH and load detection signal LDT1 for serial spindles are used to make
a torque limit skip for the Cs contour control axis.
With this function, if load detection signal LDT1 of a serial spindle operated under Cs contour control is
set to 1 when a torque limit skip is specified (G31 P98/P99), skip processing is performed.
- 1477 -
To use this function, make the following settings:

(1) Set bit 0 (CST) of parameter No. 6215 for the corresponding Cs contour control axis to 1.
(2) Set a torque limit in parameter No. 4025. (Unit: %, maximum torque ratio)
(3) Set torque limit command signal TLMH to 1. In this signal state, the output torque is limited to the
value set in parameter No. 4025.
(4) Set the load detection level in parameter No. 4026. This setting must be slightly smaller than the
torque limit set in step (2) above.
When this load detection level is reached, load detection signal LDT1 is output, enabling skip processing
if a torque limit skip is specified (G31 P98/P99).
The other specifications are the same as for normal torque limit skip. For details of the torque limit skip,
refer to the description of torque limit skip in "Connection Manual (Function)" and the description of
torque limit skip in "Operator’s Manual".
For torque limit command signal TLMH and load detection signal LDT1 for serial spindles, refer to
relevant manuals such as "FANUC Spindle Motor αi series PARAMETER MANUAL" (B-65280EN).
NOTE
The torque limit override function by address Q (when bit 0 (TQO) of parameter
No. 6286 is set to 1) is disabled for Cs contour control axes. PMC sequence
programs must be created so that Cs contour control axes are always placed in
the torque limit state before the G31 P99/P98 is specified.
(Sample program)
O0012
:
Mxx (Specify torque limit from PMC)
:
G31 P99 C200.F100. (Torque limit skip command)
:
Mxx (Cancel torque limit from PMC)
:
M30
Signal
Torque limit command signal (serial spindle)
TLMHA<Gn070.1> : First spindle
TLMHB<Gn074.1> : Second spindle
TLMHC<Gn204.1> : Third spindle
TLMHD<Gn266.1> : Fourth spindle
[Function] These signals limit the output torque of the corresponding serial spindle to the value set in
parameter No. 4025. To cause a torque limit skip for a Cs contour control axis, set this
signal to 1. For details, refer to the relevant manual of the serial spindle.
Load detection signal (serial spindle)

LDT1A <Fn045.4> : First spindle
LDT1B <Fn049.4> : Second spindle
LDT1C <Fn168.4> : Third spindle
LDT1D <Fn266.4> : Fourth spindle
- 1478 -
[Function] These signals are output when the load on the corresponding serial spindle has reached
the value set in parameter No. 4026.
For details, refer to the relevant manual of the serial spindle.
Torque limit state signal (serial spindle)

TLMA <Fn045.6> : First spindle
TLMB <Fn049.6> : Second spindle
TLMC <Fn168.6> : Third spindle
TLMD <Fn266.6> : Fourth spindle
[Function] These signals are output when the torque is being limited by the corresponding torque
limit command signal.
For details, refer to the relevant manual on the serial spindle.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn070 TLMHA
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn045 TLMA LDT1A

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn074 TLMHB
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1
Fn049 TLMB LDT1B

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn204 TLMHC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn168 TLMC LDT1C

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn266 TLMHD
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn266 TLMD LDT1D
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6215 CSTx

#0 CSTx On a Cs contour control axis, torque limit skip operation is:

0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
Torque limit skip operation is performed using the torque limit command signal TLMH
and the load detection signal LDT1 of the serial spindle.
- 1479 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4009 LDTOUT

#4 LDTOUT Whether to output the load detection signals (LDT1 and LDT2) during
acceleration/deceleration:
0: Not output during acceleration/deceleration. (standard setting value)
1: Output (at all times) during acceleration/deceleration if the parameter-set level is
exceeded.
4025 Torque limit value

[Unit of data] 1%
[Valid data range] 0to100
Set a torque limit value applicable when a torque limit command (TLMH) is specified.
Specify limit value data, assuming that the maximum torque represents 100%.
4026 Load detection level 1

[Unit of data] 1%
Set the detection range of the load detection signal (LDT1).
When the motor output exceeds (setting data)% of the maximum output, the load
detection signal LDT1 is set to 1.
NOTE
1 If torque limit skip is specified (with bit 0 of parameter No. 6215 set
to 1) for a Cs contouring control axis, an excessive error check
during a stop is not made for the axis when the load detection state
(LDT1 = 1) is set while the torque limit command is specified
(TLMH = 1) in the Cs contouring control mode.
2 If torque limit skip is specified (with bit 0 of parameter No. 6215 set
to 1) for a Cs contouring control axis, an in-position check is not
made for the axis when the load detection state (LDT1 = 1) is set in
the Cs contouring control mode.
11.11.3 Arbitrary Reference Position Setting Function

Overview
When bit 0 (CRF) of parameter No. 3700 is set to 1, any position can be set as the reference position by
the first reference position return command (G28 or a manual reference position return) issued after the
serial spindle enters the Cs contour control mode.
NOTE
- 1480 -
Explanation
When the first reference position return command (G28 or a manual reference position return) is executed
after the serial spindle enters the Cs contour control mode, a reference position return is performed with
the current position assumed to be the reference position. Therefore, a spindle movement for positioning
at the reference position is not made.
Since the reference position return operation does not involve positioning to a spindle position specific to
the spindle, the cycle time can be reduced.
NOTE
1 The spindle position at a reference position set by a reference position return
operation by using this function is not guaranteed to match the spindle position
at a reference position set by a reference position return operation performed
again after the Cs contour control mode is turned off then back on.
2 When an intermediate point is specified in G28, a movement to the intermediate
point is made, then that position is set as the reference position.
3 When this function is used, and a G00 command is issued for a Cs contour
control axis without performing a reference position return even once after the
serial spindle is placed in the Cs contour control mode, alarm PS0303 is issued
even if bit 1 (NRF) of parameter No. 3700 is set to 0. A reference position return
must always be performed using the G28 command.
4 When this function is used, grid shift at the time of reference position return
(parameter No. 4135) is invalid.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3700 CRF

#0 CRF Reference position setting at an arbitrary position under Cs contour control is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
NOTE
When this function is used, an attempt to specify G00 for a Cs
contour control axis without performing a reference position return
operation even once after switching the serial spindle to the Cs
contour control mode results in the alarm PS0303 even if bit 1
(NRF) of parameter No. 3700 is set to 0. Be sure to perform a
reference position return operation by specifying G28.
- 1481 -
Alarm and message

PS0303 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN When the setting of a reference position at any position was
IS NOT PERFORMED possible in Cs contour control (bit 0 (CRF) of parameter No.
3700 = 1), a G00 command was issued for the Cs contour
axis without a return to the reference position after the serial
spindle was switched to Cs contour control mode.
Perform a reference position return with a G28 command
before issuing a G00 command.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-64483EN-1) Cs contour control
11.11.4 Cs Contour Control Axis Coordinate Establishment

Overview
Shifting a serial spindle from spindle rotation control to Cs contour control results in its current position
being lost.
This function is intended to establish the current position without making a reference position return. This
is done by setting the Cs axis coordinate establishment request signal CSFIx<Gn274.4 to 7> to 1.
NOTE
Once the power has been turned on, this function remains enabled until the
power is turned off after the return of the Cs contour axis to the reference
position.
Explanation
- Setting
This function is enabled by setting bit 2 (CSF) of parameter No. 3712 and bit 5 (CSPTRE) of parameter
No. 4353 to 1.
(Using this function requires resetting bit 7 (RFCHK3) of parameter No. 4016 to 0.)
Inhibit buffering with the M code (parameters Nos. 3411 to 3432 and 11290 to 11299) used to set the Cs
axis coordinate establishment request signal CSFIx<Gn274.4 to 7> to 1.
- Cs axis coordinate establishment procedure

(1) Turn the Cs contour control mode ON, using the M code as a trigger, and set the Cs axis coordinate
establishment request signal CSFIx<Gn274.4 to 7> to 1.
(2) The absolute, relative, and machine coordinate systems for the Cs axis are established if the Cs axis
origin established state signal CSPENx is 1.
(Establishing the relative coordinate system requires setting bit 3 (PPD) of parameter No. 3104 to 1.)
(3) Once the coordinate systems are established, the reference position established signal
ZRFx<Fn120.0 to 7> becomes 1. So, reset the Cs axis coordinate establishment request signal
CSFIx<Gn274.4 to 7> to 0.
(4) Perform the FIN processing for the M code.
NOTE
1 When inputting the MRDY, SFR, and SRV signals from the PMC to serial
spindles via the CNC, ensure they are input normally.
- 1482 -
NOTE
2 In an emergency stop or servo alarm condition, no Cs axis coordinate system
can be established.
3 Do not shift the Cs contour axis when Cs axis coordinate establishment is under
way.
- Case in which no Cs axis coordinate establishment can be performed

If Cs axis coordinate establishment cannot be performed, alarm PS5346 is issued for the path where the
absolute coordinates (workpiece coordinates) are is to be established.
The following conditions prevent Cs axis coordinate establishment.

• The Cs axis origin established state signal CSPENx is 0.
• An attempt to transfer positional information from the spindle amplifier has failed.
• The servo section is off when an attempt is made to start Cs axis coordinate establishment.
• The Cs axis is under synchronous control or superimposed control.
• An emergency stop condition has occurred during coordinate establishment.
• The Cs axis has exited composite control during coordinate establishment.
• An attempt has been made to start synchronous, composite, or superimposed control for the Cs axis
during coordinate establishment.
The Cs axis coordinate establishment alarm signal CSFOx<Fn274.4 to 7> becomes 1 in the path to which
the spindle is connected. So, reset the Cs axis coordinate establishment request signal CSFIx<Gn274.4 to
7> to 0.
Resetting the Cs axis coordinate establishment request signal CSFIx<Gn274.4 to 7> to 0 causes the Cs
axis coordinate establishment alarm signal CSFOx<Fn274.4 to 7> to be reset to 0.
- Clearing alarm PS5346

Alarm PS5346 cannot be cleared before the Cs axis reference return position is established.
In the path where alarm PS5346 occurred, make a manual reference position return for the Cs axis.
Once the reference position has been established, a reset can clear alarm PS5346.
Performing a reset after the Cs contour control mode is exited enables alarm PS5346 to be cleared.
- 1483 -
- Sequence (timing chart)

Case in which Cs axis coordinate establishment has been completed normally
M code for turning the
M code
Cs contour mode ON
<Fn010 to 013>
MF<Fn007.0>
CSPENA<Fn048.4>
CSFIx<Gn274.4 to 7>
CON<G n027.7>
or
CONSx<Gn274.0 to 3>
FSCSL<Fn044.1>
or
FCSSx<Fn274.0 to 3>
Coordinate established
ZRFx<Fn120.0 to 7>
CSFOx<Fn274.4 to 7>
FIN<Gn004.3>
Cs axis coordinate establishment remains enabled in the Cs contour mode.

In any mode other than the Cs contour mode, setting the Cs axis coordinate establishment request signal
CSFIx<Gn274.4 to 7> to 1 causes Cs axis coordinate establishment to be ignored.
- 1484 -
Case in which Cs axis coordinate establishment cannot be achieved
M code
Cs contour mode ON
<Fn010 to 013>
MF<Fn007.0>
CSPENA<Fn048.4>
CSFIx<Gn274.4 to 7>
CON<G n027.7>
or
CONSx<Gn274.0 to 3>
FSCSL<Fn044.1>
or
Interrupted
FCSSx<Fn274.0 to 3>
ZRFx<Fn120.0 to 7>
CSFOx<Fn274.4 to 7>
FIN<Gn004.3>
A failure in coordinate establishment prev ents the ZRFx signal <Fn0120.0 to 7> from
being set to "1".
- 1485 -
Example sequence in which the Cs axis is under composite control in a 2-path system
M code
Cs contour mode ON
<F010 to 013>
MF<F0007.0>
CSPENA<F1048.4>
CSFIx<G1274.4 to 7>
CON<G1027.7>
FSCSL<F1044.1>
ZRFx<F1120>
CSFOx<F1274.4 to 7>
FIN<G0004.3>
(1) In path 1, issuing an M code causes the MF signal <F0007.0> to be set to 1.

(2) Make sure that the Cs axis origin established state signal CSPENA <F1048.4> in path 2 is 1, and set
the Cs axis coordinate establishment request signal CSFI1<G1274.4> and Cs axis contour control
switching signal CON<G1027.7> in path 2 to 1.
(3) The absolute and relative coordinates in path 1 and the machine coordinates in path 2 are
established.
(4) Upon completion of count-up, the reference position establishment signal ZRFx<F0120.0 to 7> in
path 2 becomes 1. So, reset the Cs axis coordinate establishment request signal CSFI1<G1274.4> in
path 2 to 0.
(5) Perform FIN processing for the M code in path 1.
Note
- CMR
Set the command multiplier CMR (parameter No. 1820) for the Cs axis to be subjected to composite
control to the same value. If it is set to a different value, coordinate establishment does not end normally.

Feed axis synchronization control cannot be used for the Cs contour control axis.
Setting the Cs axis establishment request signal CSFIx <Gn274.4 to 7> to 1 during synchronization
control results in alarm PS5346.
- 1486 -
After disabling synchronization control, perform Cs coordinate establishment, and then start
synchronization control again.
- Composite control
Disabling or enabling composite control during Cs axis coordinate establishment results in alarm PS5346.
- Superimposed Control
Setting the Cs axis coordinate establishment request signal CSFIx <Gn274.4 to 7> to 1 during
superimposed control results in alarm PS5346.
After disabling superimposed control, perform Cs coordinate establishment, and then start superimposed
control again.

If the master axis is parked, coordinate establishment is performed according to the slave axis machine
position.
Set the Cs axis coordinate establishment request signal CSFIx <Gn274.4 to 7> for the master axis to 1.
The Cs axis coordinate establishment alarm signal CSFOx <Fn274.4 to 7> that is output corresponds to
the master axis.
- External machine coordinate system shift

Do not shift external machine coordinate systems during Cs axis coordinate establishment.
Signal
Cs axis coordinate establishment request signals CSFI1 to CSFI4<Gn274.4 to 7>
[Function] These signals perform the Cs axis coordinate establishment (Cs contour control function).
[Operation] When the signals become 1, the control unit behaves as follows:
If the signals are 1 in the Cs contour control mode, the absolute and machine coordinates
are established according to the Cs axis machine position.
When the signals become 0, the control unit behaves as follows:
The Cs axis coordinate establishment alarm signal CSFOx<Fn274.4 to 7> becomes 0.
Cs axis coordinate establishment alarm signals CSFO1 to CSFO4<Fn274.4 to 7>

[Function] These signals indicate that Cs axis coordinate establishment has not been completed
normally.
These signal is 1 in the following case :
- Cs axis coordinate establishment has not been completed normally.
- The Cs contour control mode is exited, or
- The corresponding Cs axis coordinate establishment request signal CSFIx<Gn274.4
to 7> becomes 0.
Cs axis origin established state signals

First spindle: CSPENA<Fn048.4>, Second spindle: CSPENB<Fn052.4>,
Third spindle: CSPENC<Fn171.4>, Fourth spindle: CSPEND<Fn269.4>
[Function] These signals indicate that Cs coordinate establishment processing is available.
- A reference position return is completed normally in the Cs contour control mode.
- A spindle alarm is detected or the spindle motor rotation speed exceeds the
maximum allowable rotation speed (specified in parameter No. 4020).
- 1487 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn274 CSFI4 CSFI3 CSFI2 CSFI1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn048 CSPENA
Fn052 CSPENB
Fn171 CSPENC
Fn269 CSPEND
Fn274 CSFO4 CSFO3 CSFO2 CSFO1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 ZRNx

0: The alarm PS0224, "PERFORM REFERENCE POSITION RETURN." is issued.
NOTE
2 When the Cs axis coordinates are to be set up, set this parameter
to 0.
3 To use a function that establishes the reference point and makes a
movement with a command other than G28, such as an axis of Cs
contour control, set this parameter to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3712 CSF

[Data type] Bit
#2 CSF In the Cs contour control mode, the function for setting machine coordinates and absolute
coordinates based on the machine position of the spindle if the origin is already set up is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
- 1488 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4353 CSPTRE

#5 CSPTRE Specifies whether to enable Cs axis positional data transfer, as follows:

0: Disable.
1: Enable.
To use this function, reset bit 7 (RFCHK3) of parameter No. 4016 to 0.
Alarm and message

PS5346 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN The coordinate establishment of the Cs contour control axis is
IS NOT PERFORMED not made.
Perform a manual reference position return.
1. When Cs coordinate establishment is made for the Cs-axis
for which the Cs-axis reference position status signal
CSPENx is 0
2. When positional information is not sent from the spindle
amplifier
3. When the servo off state is entered during the start of
Cs-axis coordinate establishment
4. When the Cs-axis is subjected to synchronous control or
superposition control
5. When the emergency stop state is entered during
coordinate establishment
6. When an attempt is made to release composite control for
the Cs axis being subjected to coordinate establishment
7. When an attempt is made to start synchronous, composite,
or superposition control for the Cs axis being subjected to
coordinate establishment.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Cs contour control
(This manual)
11.11.5 Cs Contour Control Manual High-Speed Reference Position

Return
Overview
This function makes it possible to perform high-speed type reference position return as manual reference
position return after the reference position for the Cs contour control axis is established (ZRF <Fn120> =
1).
Explanation
As manual reference position return after the reference position for the Cs contour control axis is
established,
• When the bit 6 (CHM) of parameter No. 3729 is set to 0:
Spindle orientation is performed.
• When the bit 6 (CHM) of parameter No. 3729 is set to 1:
- 1489 -
High-speed type reference position return is performed.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3729 CHMs

#6 CHMs Manual reference position return after the reference position for the Cs contour control
axis is established is performed as:
0: Spindle orientation operation.
1: High-speed type of reference position return operation.
Limitation
- Manual reference position return before the reference position is established
If manual reference position return is performed on the Cs contour control axis before the reference
position is established, the return is performed as spindle orientation even if bit 6 (CHM) of parameter No.
3729 is set to 1.
- 1490 -
11.12 MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL

Overview
In addition to the first spindle, the second to fourth spindles can be controlled using an S command from
the CNC.
Spindle commands are specified using a single S command as conventionally done. A spindle is selected
depending on the signal from the PMC or the address P command.
Gear change between two stages can be made for the second, third, and fourth spindles in the same
manner as for the first spindle.
A maximum speed can be set for each spindle, and the speed of each spindle can be clamped to the
corresponding maximum speed (according to the setting in parameter No. 3772).
The position coder interfaces for the second to fourth spindles can be selected and added.
The first to fourth position coders are selected by signals from the PMC.
NOTE
Multi-spindle control can be used by setting bit 3 (MSP) of parameter No. 8133
to 1 and bit 1 (EMS) of parameter No. 3702 to 0.
Explanation
- Multi-spindle control in machining center
M
• Only when the T-type gear change is selected (when the constant surface speed control function is
selected (bit 0 (SCC) of parameter No. 8133 is 1) or when bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No. 3706 is set
to 1), multi-spindle control is enabled.
• For information about rigid tapping, see "RIGID TAPPING".
NOTE
For the M series, multi-spindle control is optional function.
- Control methods
There are three types of multi-spindle control methods: a method that can use the SIND (spindle motor
speed control by the PMC) function only for the first spindle (TYPE-A), a method that can use the SIND
function for the four spindles independently (TYPE-B), and a method that is equivalent to TYPE-B and
can use address P to select the spindle to be controlled by the S command.
Basic control 1 (Common to TYPE-A and TYPE-B)

An S command is sent as a speed command to each spindle selected, using a spindle selection signal
(SWS1 to SWS4 <Gn027.0-2>, <Gn026.3>). Each spindle rotates at the specified speed. If a spindle is
not sent a spindle selection signal, it continues to rotate at its previous speed. This allows the spindles to
rotate at different speeds at the same time.
Basic control 2 (Common to TYPE-A, TYPE-B, and the method of making

spindle selection by address P)
Each spindle also has a spindle stop signal (*SSTP1 to *SSTP4 <Gn027.3-5>, <Gn026.6>) to stop its
rotation; an unused spindle can still be stopped.
There is a spindle enable signal to control each spindle; ENB <Fn001.4> controls the first spindle, while
ENB2 to ENB4 <Fn038.2, 3>, <Fn039.1> control the second and third spindles, respectively.
The PMC signals PC2SLC, PC3SLC, and PC4SLC <Gn028.7>, <Gn026.0>, <Gn026.1> is used to select
between the first to fourth position coders.
- 1491 -
When multi-spindle control is disabled

When bit 1 (EMS) of parameter No. 3702 is 1, multi-spindle control is disabled. In this case, only the first
spindle can be controlled using the S command even if more than one spindle is present.
S command Spindle 1
Spindle 2
Spindle 3
Spindle 4
Multi-spindle control (TYPE-A)

When bit 2 (MSI) of parameter No. 3709=0, TYPE-A is used.
When the first spindle is selected with the SWS1 signal, the SIND signal <Gn033.7> is used to determine
whether the spindle analog voltage is controlled by the PMC or CNC; then signals R01I to R12I
<Gn032.0 to Gn033.3> are used to set that spindle’s analog voltage. These signals do not affect the
second to fourth spindles.
The PMC-based polarity (rotation direction) control signals SGN<Gn033.5> and SSIN <Gn033.6> will
function for any spindle selected by SWS1 to SWS4.
The concept of Type A multi-spindle control is outlined below (Fig. 11.12 (a)).
Keep 1 Spindle 1
Keep 2 Spindle 2
S command
Keep 3 Spindle 3
Keep 4 Spindle 4
Fig. 11.12 (a)
Multi-spindle control (TYPE-B)

Select Type B control by setting bit 2 (MSI) of parameter No. 3709 to 1.
Each spindle has its own SIND, SSIN and SGN signals.
Each of these signals functions regardless of selection state of the spindle selection signals (SWS1 to
SWS4).
When either the spindle selection signals (SWS1 to SWS4) or the SIND signal for the first, second, third,
or fourth spindle is set to 1, the polarity control signals SSIN, SGN will function.
The concept of Type B multi-spindle control outlined below (Fig. 11.12 (b)).
Keep 1 Spindle 1
Keep 2 Spindle 2
S command
Keep 3 Spindle 3
Keep 4 Spindle 4
Fig. 11.12 (b)

- 1492 -
Multi-spindle control: when a spindle is selected by address P

If bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1, a spindle is selected by address P. This control method is
basically the same as TYPE-B. The first, second, third, and fourth spindles each have their own SIND,
SSIN, and SGN signals. A spindle is selected by the P command instead of the spindle selection signals
(SWS1 to SWS4). The relationship between the P code and the selected spindle is set in parameter No.
3781.
Polarity (rotation direction) control signals SSIN and SGN for each spindle are valid only for the spindle
selected by the P command or for the spindle of which SIND signal is 1.
The concept of multi-spindle control (spindle selection by address P) is outlined below (Fig. 11.12 (c)).
P command
Keep 1 Spindle 1
Keep 2 Spindle 2
S command
Keep 3 Spindle 3
Keep 4 Spindle 4
Fig. 11.12 (c)
In case of multi-path control, the P code becomes valid in all paths. For example, suppose that the P code
to select the first spindle of path 2 is set to 21. When the following is specified in path 1:
S1000 P21;
Then, 1000 is specified for the first spindle in path 2. Therefore, the same P code cannot be used even in
different paths.
A spindle is selected by address P

Restrictions
The command for spindle selection by address P and the G code or M code including address P cannot be
commanded on the same block. If you use the same address, it may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly. Command on separate block. About the function including address P, refer to the appendix
“List of functions include address P in the program command”.
Extended spindle name

Usually, S is used as commands for spindles. If the conditions listed below are all satisfied, extended
spindle names can be used. Extended spindle names can consist of up to three characters beginning with S
as the first spindle name character, and use of an extended spindle name allows a command to be
executed for a specific spindle.
• The serial (analog) spindle function is enabled.
• The multi-spindle control is enabled.
• Bit 0 (EEA) of parameter No. 1000 is 1.
• Bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is 1.
• Bit 1 (ESN) of parameter No. 3798 is 1.
• Bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No. 3706 is 1. (for machining center system only)
As the second and third characters of spindle names, any characters from 0 to 9 and from A to Z may be
set in ASCII code. In spindles, the third spindle name character is not valid unless the second spindle
name character is set. If a character 0 to 9 is set as the second spindle name character, a character A to Z
must not be set as the third spindle name character.
- 1493 -
If a spindle name ends with a numeric character, ‘=‘ is required between the spindle name and a specified
value.
Spindle name Spindle name Spindle name

1st character 2nd character 3rd character
(fixed) (No.3738) (No.3739)
‘0’ to ‘9’ ‘0’ to ‘9’
Setting value ‘S’ ‘0’ to ‘9’
‘A’ to ‘Z’
‘A’ to ‘Z’
Correct example <1> 1 1
Correct example <2> A 1
‘S’
Correct example <3> A B
Incorrect example 1 A
In case of multi-path control, extended spindle names become valid in all paths. For example, suppose
that the first spindle of path 2 is named SA. When the following is specified in path 1:
SA1000;
Then, 1000 is specified for the first spindle in path 2. Therefore, the same extended spindle name cannot
be used even in different paths.
Restrictions
More than one extended spindle name cannot be specified within the same block. Also, ‘S’ and an
extended spindle name cannot be specified together within the same block. If they are specified together,
P/S alarm No. 333 is issued.
When extended spindle names are used, subscripts (MAIN (in parameter No. 3718), SUB (in parameter
No. 3719) cannot be used.
When the custom macro function is enabled, the same extended spindle names as reserved words cannot
be used. They are regarded as reserved words.
The target spindle for rigid tapping cannot be selected by specifying an extended spindle name.
Multi-spindle address P signal

When extended spindle names are used, the value in parameter No. 3781 corresponding to the spindle
number of the spindle name specified last is output to MSP00 to MSP15 <Fn160.0 to Fn161.7>. If a
command for a spindle has not been specified even once, the value set in parameter No. 3775 is output.
Supplement
When extended spindle names are used, the value of the spindle command specified last is indicated as
the modal indication of S.
When the serial (analog) spindle function and multi-spindle control are enabled, the method for selecting
the target spindle is determined according to the settings of bit 3(MPP) of parameter No. 3703 and bit 1
(ESN) of parameter No. 3798 as follows:
Bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. Bit 1 (ESN) of parameter No.

Method for selecting target
3703 3798
0 0 Signal selection
1 0 P command (S_ P_)
Specification of extended spindle name
1 1 or
P command (S_ P_)
If MPP and ESN are both set to 1, both the S_P_ command and extended spindle names can be used.
- 1494 -
NOTE
Address S indicates a command for all spindles. When multiple spindles are
used, and bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is 1, a particular spindle must be
specified by using address P and so on. If spindle name S is set when extended
spindle names are used, S indicates a particular spindle (except the command
for clamping at the maximum spindle speed in constant surface control
(G50(G92)S_)).
This means that if spindle name S is set when extended spindle names are
used, a command specifying S only is a command for the spindle named S.
(Even when P is specified in the same block, it is ignored.) When S is not set in
a spindle name, a command specifying S only is regarded as a command for the
spindle for which a command has been issued last. (This is the same as the
operation of a command specifying only S when multiple spindles are used,
extended spindle names are not used, and bit 2 (MPA) of parameter No. 3706 is
set to 1.)
Example: When extended spindle names are used, and commands with
extended spindle names and S_P_ commands are used together
1. When the first spindle is SA, the second spindle is SB, and 1 is set for the first
spindle and 2 is set for the second spindle in parameter No. 3781
If bit 2 (MPA) of parameter No. 3706 is 0
N10 M03;
N20 SA100; → 100 is specified for 1st spindle.
N30 SB200; → 200 is specified for 2nd spindle.
N40 S200P1; → 200 is specified for 1st spindle.
N50 S300; → P/S alarm No. 5305 is issued.
N60 S200P2;
N70 S300;
N80 SA400;
N90 S500;
N100 SB400;
N110 S500;
N10 M03;
N40 S200P1; → 200 is specified for 1st spindle.
N50 S300; → 300 is specified for 1st spindle.
N60 S200P2; → 200 is specified for 2nd spindle.
N70 S300; → 300 is specified for 2nd spindle.
N90 S500; → 500 is specified for 1st spindle.
- 1495 -
NOTE
2. When the first spindle is SA, the second spindle is S, and 1 is set for the first
spindle and 2 is set for the second spindle in parameter No. 3781
N10 M03;
N10 M03;
Example
- Example of setting spindle names when extended spindle names are used
No.3738=0,No.3739=0 → ‘S’
No.3738=65,No.3739=0 → ‘SA’
No.3738=66,No.3739=65 → ‘SBA’
No.3738=49,No.3739=0 → ‘S1’
No.3738=49,No.3739=48 → ‘S10’
No.3738=0,No.3739=65 → ‘S’
- Specifying spindle names that end with a numeric character

S1=100
S11=200
- Specifying spindle names that end with an alphabetical character

S100 or S=100
SB200 or SB=200
SBB300 or SBB=300
Override for individual spindles

Different override values can be applied to individual axes separately at a time. The override values can
be selected from between 0% and 254%. This function is made usable by setting bit 3 (MSC) of
parameter No. 3713 to 1 for multi-spindle control.
- 1496 -
- Specification
When each spindle speed override function (bit 4 (EOV) of parameter No. 3713 =1) is effective, the
specifications is as following.
- Override signals for each spindle are following.
SOV0 to 7: Override signal for the first spindle
SOV20 to 27: Override signal for the second spindle
SOV30 to 37: Override signal for the third spindle
SOV40 to 47: Override signal for the fourth spindle
- Because override is applied to individual axes separately, it is possible to use different values for
each axis simultaneously.
SOV0 to 7
1st spindle Override 1st spindle
SOV20 to 27
SOV0 to 7 2nd spindle Override 2nd spindle
S command Override S command
rd
SOV30 to 37
3 spindle
Override 3rd spindle
SOV40 to 47
4th spindle
Override 4th spindle
Fig. 11.12 (d) Bit 4 (EOV) of parameter No. 3713 = 0 Fig. 11.12 (e) Bit 4 (EOV) of parameter No. 3713 = 1
Also for spindle control in a multi-path system, this function can be used to apply override to individual
axes separately. Fig. 11.12 (f), “Bit 4 (EOV) of parameter No. 3713 = 0 (2-path system)” and Fig. 11.12
(g), “Bit 4 (EOV) of parameter No. 3713 = 1 (2-path system)” are examples of using this function for a
2-path system. In these examples, both path 1 and path 2 spindles are controlled by the spindle commands
in path 2.
1st spindle#2 1st spindle#1
S command
nd #2 Override 2nd spindle#1

2 spindle
SOV0#2 to 7#2
3rd spindle#2 3rd spindle#1

Path 2 Path 1
Fig. 11.12 (f) Bit 4 (EOV) of parameter No. 3713 = 0 (2-path system)
#1 #1
SOV0#2 to 7#2 SOV0 to 7
1st spindle#2 Override Override 1st spindle#1
S
#2 #2 command SOV20#1 to 27#1
SOV20 to 27
nd
2 spindle
#2 Override Override 2nd spindle#1
SOV30#2 to 37#2 Path 2 Path 1 SOV30#1 to 37#1

rd
3 spindle
#2
Override 3rd spindle#1
Override
Fig. 11.12 (g) Bit 4 (EOV) of parameter No. 3713 = 1 (2-path system)
- 1497 -
- Note
- Before this function can be used, multi-spindle control must be enabled.
NOTE
Multi-spindle control can be used by setting bit 3 (MSP) of parameter No. 8133
to 1 and bit 1 (EMS) of parameter No. 3702 to 0.
- Setting bit 5 (SOV) of parameter No. 3106 (spindle override value display) causes the override value
for the first spindle to be displayed. (Bit 5 (SOV) of parameter No. 3106 is valid when bit 2 (DPS) of
parameter No. 3105 is set to 1.)
- When constant surface speed control is used, override is applied after the spindle rotation speed is
clamped to the clamp speed specified by the spindle rotation speed clamp command (for the T series,
G50S_, or for the M series, G92S_). Note, therefore, that if an override of 100% or higher is applied,
the spindle may rotate faster than the specified clamp speed.
Bit 5 (SOC) of parameter No. 3708 (for specifying to clamp the spindle rotation speed for constant
surface speed control after spindle speed override is put into effect) is invalid. The note given above
still applies even if this parameter is set. The spindle rotation speed can be clamped to the clamp
speed specified as the spindle rotation speed upper limit (parameter No. 3772).
- When this function is in use, a spindle override of 100% is applied during tapping cycle mode
operation (for the M series, G84 and G74 or, for the T series, G84 and G88) or threading operation
(for the M series, G33 or, for the T series, G32, G92, and G76). Setting bit 6 (TSO) of parameter No.
3708 to 1 enables spindle override.
- For spindles not subjected to override, keep their spindle override signals set to 100%.
- No spindle override is applied to spindles which are under spindle rotation speed control directed by
the PMC.
Position coder selection by address P (bit 6 (MPC) of parameter No. 3713=1)

When the spindle is selected by address P in multi-spindle control (bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703=1),
position coder feedback is automatically selected by address P for feed per revolution, thread cutting, and
so on.
- Explanation
When the spindle is selected by address P in multi-spindle control (bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703=1),
the program of spindle selection by address P is as follows.
S_ P_ ;
When the bit 6 (MPC) of parameter No. 3713 is set to 1, this command causes the position coder to be
automatically selected according to the selected spindle. This condition is the same as the selection of the
position coder by the position coder select signals PC2SLC<Gn028.7>, PC3SLC<Gn026.0> and
PC4SLC<Gn026.1> and inter-path spindle feed-back signals SLPCA<Gn064.2>, SLPCB<Gn064.3>,
SLPCC<Gn403.4>, and SLPCD<Gn403.5>. (These signals are ignored even if they are set from the PMC
ladder.)
- Example
In the following program:
S1000 P21 ;
G99 G01 Z100. F1. ;
(1) The first spindle in path 2 is specified by S1000.

(2) Position coder feed-back for the first spindle in path 2 is selected automatically.
(Used in feed per revolution)
- 1498 -
S command
CNC P P value
command
Path 1 First spindle 11
S1000 P21;
G99G01Z100 F1.; Second spindle 12
Path 2
First spindle 21
Second spindle 22
Position coder feedback
- Relationship with other functions

Constant surface speed control
The control function for keeping the surface speed constant can be used with any of the four spindles, if
the spindle speed is within the range allowable for this function. (If position coders are required, this
function is enabled for serial spindles.) The spindle selection signal (SWS1 to SWS4) for the spindle must
stay set at 1 during machining using this function.
Spindle speed fluctuation detection

When this function is used with multi-spindle control, multiple position coders can be used. So, when a
spindle speed fluctuation is detected, attention must be paid to the states of the position coder selection
signals (PC2SLC, PC3SLC, and PC4LC) and spindle selection signals (SWS1 to SWS4)
Actual spindle speed output

The actual spindle speed output function conveys speed information obtained from the position coder
specified by the position coder selection signals (PC2SLC, PC3SLC, and PC4SLC) to the PMC.
Polygon turning
Polygon turning rotates a tool axis in phase with the spindle. To perform polygon turning when
multi-spindle control issued, select the spindle and the position coder associated with the spindle.
Spindle synchronization, polygon turning between spindles, simplified

synchronization control
During spindle synchronization, polygon turning between spindles or simplified synchronization control,
the slave spindle operates in phase with the master spindle. Multi-spindle control for the master spindle
can be used during synchronization control, but multi-spindle control for the slave spindle is disabled.
Rigid tapping
One of the first to fourth spindles can be selected as the rigid tapping axis according to the states of the
spindle selection signals (SWS1 to SWS4) to perform rigid tapping. However, the following restrictions
are imposed:
- Set the SWS1 to SWS4 signals before directing rigid tapping;
- Do not switch the SWS1 to SWS4 signals during rigid tapping; and
- Use the appropriate ENB signal (either ENB or ENB2) for the selected spindle as the ENB signal for
the rigid tapping PMC sequence.
The spindles not used for rigid tapping can be rotated at a speed specified before rigid tapping starts, or
can be stopped.
- 1499 -
Ladder sequence (signal operation)

Outline of the CNC processing and the relation with the ladder
On multi-spindle control TYPE-A and TYPE-B, CNC considers S command (program command), signals
related to S command (ex. Spindle override) and G-code (ex. G96/G97), and converts to the actual
spindle rotation speed. Then CNC sends this value only to the spindle that is selected by spindle selection
signals SWS1 to SWS4 <Gn027.0 to Gn027.2 and Gn026.3>. On this document, a series of this
processing is called "S renewal processing". S renewal processing is asynchronously executed with the
changing of the select/non-select condition of the spindle by ladder sequence. Therefore, the order of the
changing of the select/non-select condition of each spindle and S command must be considered by the
ladder sequence or the program command according to the necessity.
S command
Ladder can confirm the S command by SF signal. In case of waiting the completion of S renewal
processing after the S command, please take time by using the timer of ladder and so on.
A necessary processing time to complete S renewal processing from the S command is 16msec. As for the
output condition of SF signal, please refer to parameter No.3705. On T series system, please set EVS
(Parameter No.3705#4) to "1" to output SF signal.
Time chart
The example of the time chart when executing the following program is shown.
M1_ S1_ ; ................. (1)
M2_ S2_ ; ............... (2)
(1): The program to execute S command of S1_ to the 1st spindle.
(2): The program to execute S command of S2_ to the 2nd spindle.
And at this time, the 1st spindle must keep S1_, which was commanded in (1).
The following time chart shows example in case of high-speed M/S/T/B. (Parameter No.3001#7=1)
- 1500 -
(1) (2)
M code M1 M2
MF
MFIN
S code S1 S2
SF
( ) ( )
X msec * X msec *
SFIN
(A) (A)
( )
X msec *
SWS1
(B)
( )
X msec *
SWS2
(B)
(*) As for the value of "X msec", refer to the following Appendix 1.
In the time chart, it takes time to start S renewal processing of CNC in (A).
At this time, both SWS1 and SWS2 signals are "0". Therefore, S command is not forwarded to any
spindle even when S renewal processing is completed.
It takes time to execute S renewal processing with selecting the objective spindle (SWSx=1) in (B).
At this time, the 1st spindle (or the 2nd spindle) is selected, the renewal S command is forwarded to the
objective spindle after completing S renewal processing.
If (B) ends, please return all spindles to non-selected condition (SWSx=0).
(Supplement 1) The (A) part and the (B) part are timer of ladder sequence. As for X msec, please apply
the value which suits the condition “X msec > 16 msec”.
(Supplement 2) While machining by the constant surface control, the spindle must be always selected
condition. Please refer to "Relationship with other functions" previously described.
Signal
Spindle selection signals SWS1,SWS2,SWS3,SWS4<Gn027.0,1,2>,<Gn026.3>
[Function] Controls whether S command specified to the NC is output to the spindle or not in
multi-spindle control.
SWS1 1 : Outputs a speed command to the first spindle.
0 : Outputs no speed command to the first spindle.
- 1501 -
SWS2 1 : Outputs a speed command to the second spindle.

0: Outputs no speed command to the second spindle.
SWS3 1 : Outputs a speed command to the third spindle.
0: Outputs no speed command to the third spindle.
SWS4 1 : Outputs a speed command to the fourth spindle.
0: Outputs no speed command to the fourth spindle.
Individual spindle stop signals

*SSTP1,*SSTP2,*SSTP3,*SSTP4<Gn027.3,4,5>,<Gn026.6>
[Function] Effective only to multi-spindle control, each spindle can be stopped by this signal.
*SSTP1 1 : Does not set 0 min-1 for output to the first spindle.
0 : Sets 0 min-1 for output to the first spindle.
*SSTP2 1 : Does not set 0 min-1 for output to the second spindle.
0 : Sets 0 min-1 for output to the second spindle.
*SSTP3 1 : Does not set 0 min-1 for output to the third spindle.
0 : Sets 0 min-1 for output to the third spindle.
*SSTP4 1 : Does not set 0 min-1 for output to the fourth spindle.
0 : Sets 0 min-1 for output to the fourth spindle.
Gear select signals

GR11<Gn028.1>,GR12<Gn028.2>,GR21<Gn029.0>,GR22<Gn029.1>,
GR31<Gn029.2>,GR32<Gn029.3>,GR41<Gn031.4>,GR42<Gn031.5>
[Function] Gear selection signals when multi-spindle control is equipped. These signals post the gear
stage currently selected (4 stages).
Gear GRs1 GRs2
Gear 1 0 0
Gear 2 1 0
Gear 3 0 1
Gear 4 1 1
(s is 1, 2, 3, or 4.)
Position coder selection signals

PC2SLC<Gn028.7>,PC3SLC<Gn026.0>,PC4SLC<Gn026.1>
[Function] These signals select the position coder of the serial spindle used for multi-spindle control.
Position coder to be selected PC2SLC PC3SLC PC4SLC
First position coder 0 0 0
Second position coder 1 0 0
Third position coder 0 1 0
Fourth position coder 0 0 1
If PC2SLC, PC3SLC, and PC4SLC are set to 1, the position coder of a lower number is
selected.
When the second, third, or fourth position coder is not installed, do not switch this signal.
Always set 0 for first position coder.
Spindle enable signals

ENB<Fn001.4>,ENB2<Fn038.2>,ENB3<Fn038.3>,ENB4<Fn039.1>
- 1502 -
[Function] These signals inform PMC of whether or not to perform output to the second to fourth
spindles in multi-spindle control. The signals are used as a condition to stop the analog
spindle, and are also used for a PMC ladder sequence that is associated with rigid tapping.
(See "RIGID TAPPING.")
[Output cond.] ENB Enables output of command other than 0 to the first spindle control unit.
Outputs 0 to the first spindle control unit.
ENB2 Enables output of command other than 0 to the second spindle control unit.
Outputs 0 to the second spindle control unit.
ENB3 Enables output of command other than 0 to the third spindle control unit.
Outputs 0 to the third spindle control unit.
ENB4 Enables output of command other than 0 to the fourth spindle control unit.
Outputs 0 to the fourth spindle control unit.
Spindles control signal by PMC

For 1st spindle SIND,SSIN,SGN<Gn033.7,6,5>,R01I-R12I<Gn032.0-Gn033.3>
For 2nd spindle SIND2,SSIN2,SGN2<Gn035.7,6,5>,R01I2-R12I2<Gn034.0-Gn035.3>
For 3rd spindle SIND3,SSIN3,SGN3<Gn037.7,6,5>,R01I3-R12I3<Gn036.0-Gn037.3>
For 4th spindle SIND4,SSIN4,SGN4<Gn273.7,6,5>,R01I4-R12I4<Gn272.0-Gn273.3>
[Function] The spindle motor of each spindle can be controlled by issuing commands from the PMC.
The speed command and polarity (rotation direction) of the spindle motor can be
controlled. Usually, CNC commands are used to specify a speed and polarity. By using
these signals, whether commands issued from the CNC or PMC are to be used for this
control can be selected.
Even when multi-spindle control is not being used, the signals can be used to control the
second to fourth spindles.
When multi-spindle control is being used, and TYPE-A is selected (bit 2 (MSI) of
parameter No. 3709 is set to 0), the signals for the second to fourth spindles cannot be
used.
For details of each signal, see "SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC."
S12-bit code signals

R01O to R12O<Fn036.0 to Fn037.3>,
R01O2 to R12O2<Fn200.0 to Fn201.3>,
R01O3 to R12O3<Fn204.0 to Fn205.3>,
R01O4 to R12O4<Fn270.0 to Fn271.3>,
[Function] If bit 3 (MRS) of parameter No. 3709 is 1, the spindle speed command value calculated
by the CNC is converted to a code signal from 0 to 4095, and the conversion result is
output to a spindle. If MRS is set to 0, the data of the currently selected spindle (when
more than one spindle is selected, the spindle with the smallest number) is output only to
R01O to R12O for the first spindle.
[Output cond.] The relationship between the spindle speed command output value (the value calculated
by the CNC) and the value output to these signals is plotted in the graph shown below.
Note that for either a serial or analog spindle, the output value on these signals is a value
0 to 4095 as a result of conversion from the spindle speed command output value
calculated by the spindle control function of the CNC; the output value on these signals is
not the actual output value.
- 1503 -
Code signal
4095
(Spindle motor speed output)

0
-1 Maximum speed
0 min
of spindle motor
Address P signals MSP00 to MSP15<Fn160.0 to Fn161.7>

[Function] The P value specified last by the S_P_; command is output.
When extended spindle names are used, the value in parameter No. 3781 corresponding
to the spindle number of the spindle name specified last is output.
[Output cond.] When multi-spindle control by using address P is enabled (bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No.
3703 is 1), the P value specified in the S_P_; command is output. When no S_P_;
command has been specified even once since power-up, the initial P value set in
parameter No. 3775 is output.
When extended spindle names are used, the value in parameter No. 3781 corresponding
to the spindle number of the spindle name specified last is output. When no spindle name
has been specified even once, the value set in parameter No. 3775 is output.
1st spindle speed override signal SOV0 to SOV7<Gn030>

2nd spindle speed override signal SOV20 to SOV27<Gn376>
3rd spindle speed override signal SOV30 to SOV37<Gn377>
4th spindle speed override signal SOV40 to SOV47<Gn378>
[Function] If bit 4 (EOV) of parameter No. 3713 = 1, an override of 0% to 254% of the rotation
speed specified by the CNC can be applied to individual spindles separately.
[Operation] Specify an override value, using an 8-bit binary number.
If all bits are 1, however, an override of 0% is assumed.
NOTE
If bit 4 (EOV) of parameter No. 3713 = 0, the override signals
SOV0 to SOV7 are applied to all spindles that receive speed
commands.
The signals SOV20 to SOV27, SOV30 to SOV37, and SOV40 to
SOV47 are invalid.
Spindle command path specification signal SPSP<Gn536.7>

[Function] Turns spindle command path specification ON or OFF.
[Operation] If a command based on address P (bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 = 1 and bit 1
(ESN) of parameter No. 3798 = 0) or a command based on an extended spindle name (bit
3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 = 1, bit 0 (EEA) of parameter No. 1000 = 1, and bit 1
(ESN) of parameter No. 3798 = 1) is used in multi-spindle control:
- 1504 -
- Setting this signal to 1 enables path specification for spindle commands.
Spindle commands can be issued from the path specified by parameter No. 11090.
If a spindle command is issued from a path other than the path, PS5305 alarm is
issued.
- Setting this signal to 0 disables path specification for spindle commands.
Spindle commands can be issued from individual paths no matter what the setting of
parameter No. 11090.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn026 *SSTP4 SWS4 PC4SLC PC3SLC
Gn027 *SSTP3 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS3 SWS2 SWS1
Gn028 PC2SLC GR2 GR1
Gn029 *SSTP GR32 GR31 GR22 GR21
Gn030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0
Gn031 GR42 GR41
Gn032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I
Gn033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I
Gn536 SPSP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn001 ENB
Fn038 ENB3 ENB2
Fn039 ENB4
Fn160 MSP07 MSP06 MSP05 MSP04 MSP03 MSP02 MSP01 MSP00
Fn200 R08O2 R07O2 R06O2 R05O2 R04O2 R03O2 R02O2 R01O2
- 1505 -
Fn201 R12O2 R11O2 R10O2 R09O2
Fn205 R12O3 R11O3 R10O3 R09O3
Fn271 R12O4 R11O4 R10O4 R09O4
Parameter
Parameters related to the first spindle and first position coder are the same as those used conventionally.
The following explains the parameters added in connection with this function and related parameters:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1000 EEA

[Data type] Bit
#0 EEA An extended axis name and extended spindle name are:

0: Invalid
1: Valid
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3106 SOV

[Data type] Bit
#5 SOV A spindle override value is:

0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when bit 2 (DPS) of parameter No.
3105 is set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3702 EMS


0: Used.
1: Not used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3703 MPP

[Data type] Bit
- 1506 -
NOTE

using the signals (SWS1 to SWS4<Gn027.0 to Gn027.2, Gn026.3>) is:
0: Not made.
1: Made.
NOTE
time.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MPA
3706
GTT MPA

#2 MPA If a spindle is to be selected using a P command (with bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703
set to 1) in multi-spindle control, and a P command is not specified together with an S
command:
0: The alarm PS5305, “ILLEGAL SPINDLE NUMBER” is issued.
1: The last P specified by S_ P_; (by S_ P_; specified for the path in case of a
multi-path system) is used. If P is not specified even once after power-up, the value
of parameter No. 3775 is used.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No.
3703 is set to 1.

0: Type M.
1: Type T.
NOTE
1 This parameter is effected for M system.
2 M type
signal is output.
T type
3 When the constant surface speed control is selected (bit 0 (SSC) of
parameter No. 8133 is 1), type T is selected, regardless of whether
this parameter is specified.
- 1507 -
NOTE
No.3705#2(SGB), No.3751, No.3752,
No.3705#1(GST), No.3705#3(SGT), No.3761, No.3762,
No.3705#6(SFA), No.3735, No.3736
5 When multi spindle control is used, select to T type.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3708 TSO SOC

#5 SOC During constant surface speed control (G96 mode), the speed clamp by the maximum
spindle speed clamp command (G92 S_; (G50 for G code system A of lathe system)) is
carried out:
0: Before spindle speed override.
1: After spindle speed override.
If this parameter is set to 0, the spindle speed may exceed the maximum spindle speed
(numeric value following S in G92 S_; (G50 for G code system A of lathe system)).
If this parameter is set to 1, the spindle speed is limited to the maximum spindle speed.
The spindle speed is limited to the upper limit of spindle speed specified in parameter No.
3772, irrespective of the setting of this parameter.
#6 TSO During a threading or tapping cycle, the spindle override is:

0: Disabled (tied to 100%).
1: Enabled.
NOTE
During rigid tapping, the override is tied to 100%, irrespective of the
setting of this parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3709 MRS MSI

#2 MSI In multi-spindle control, the SIND signal is valid

#3 MRS When the actual spindle speed signals and S 12-bit code signals are output in
multi-spindle control:
0: The signals common to the first spindle and second spindle are used, and the signals
for the spindle selected by the spindle selection signal are output.
1: The signals for the first spindle and the signals for the second spindle are output
separately.
- 1508 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3713 MPC EOV MSC

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#3 MSC Multi-spindle control TYPE-C is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.
NOTE
If parameter MSC and bit 2 (MSI) of parameter No. 3709 for
multi-spindle control TYPE-B ) are set to 1 at the same time,
multi-spindle control TYPE-C is enabled.
#4 EOV Each spindle speed override is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.
NOTE
Multi-spindle control TYPE-C (bit 3 (MSC) of parameter No.
3713=1) is necessary to use this function.
#6 MPC When a spindle is selected with address P in a program during multi-spindle control (bit 3
(MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1), position coder feedback used for thread cutting,
feed per revolution, and so forth is:
0: Not changed automatically according to the selected spindle.
1: Changed automatically according to the selected spindle.
NOTE
Setting this parameter produces the same effects as when position
coder select signals PC2SLC<Gn028.7>, PC3SLC<Gn026.0>, and
PC4SLC<Gn026.1>, inter-path spindle feedback signals
SLPCA<Gn064.2>, SLPCB<Gn064.3>, SLPCC<Gn403.4>, and
SLPCD<Gn403.5> are set.
At this time, even when an attempt to set these signals is made by
a PMC ladder, these signal operations are ignored.

display screen.
- 1509 -
NOTE

display screen.
NOTE
NOTE

[Unit of data] Number of pulses
[Valid data range] Serial spindle
: 0, 4096 When bit 7 (FBP) of parameter No.3716 is set to 1: 4096×2^14
Spindle control with servo motor
Analog spindle
: 0, 4096 When bit 7 (FBP) of parameter No.3716 is set to 1: from 0 to 400000

In analog spindle, 4096 is set to parameter automatically if parameter No.3720 is set to 0
or less.
In serial spindle or spindle control with servo motor, the setting method is changed by
setting of the bit 7 (FBP) of parameter No.3716.
- When the bit 7 (FBP) of parameter No.3716 is set to 0:
4096 is set to parameter automatically if parameter No.3720 is set to 0 or less.
4096×2^14 is set to parameter automatically.

revolution).

- 1510 -
revolution).
CAUTION
cutting.
If thread cutting was done by setting the any value on these
3738 Spindle name 2 of each spindle
3739 Spindle name 3 of each spindle

[Valid data range] 48 to 57, 65 to 90
The command for a spindle is basically "S".
When all conditions below are satisfied, however, an extended spindle name can be used.
An extended spindle name consists of up to three characters starting with "S" as the first
spindle name. Thus, a command for a spindle can be specified.
- The serial (analog) spindle function is enabled.
- The multi-spindle control is enabled.
- Bit 0 (EEA) of parameter No. 1000 is set to 1.
- Bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1.
- Bit 1 (ESN) of parameter No. 3798 is set to 1.
- Bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No. 3706 is set to 1. (M series only)
As spindle name 2 (parameter No. 3738) and spindle name 3 (parameter No. 3739),
ASCII codes from 0 to 9 and A to Z can be arbitrary set. However, before spindle name 3
for a spindle can be valid, spindle name 2 must be set for the spindle. Moreover, when a
character from 0 to 9 is set as spindle name 2, do not set a character from A to Z as
spindle name 3.
NOTE
1 When an extended spindle name is used, a subscript (for a main
spindle (parameter No. 3718)) and a subscript (for a sub-spindle
(parameter No. 3719)) are unusable.
2 When the custom macro function is enabled, the same extended
spindle name as a reserved word must not be used. Such an
extended spindle name is regarded as a reserved word.
- 1511 -

Spindle motor speed

(Parameter No.3736)

(Parameter No.3735)
(S command)
No.3741) No.3742) No.3743)

specified , or the speed of the spindle exceeds the maximum speed because of the spindle
parameter.
CAUTION
clamped.
NOTE
1 For M series, this parameter is valid when constant surface speed
control is selected (bit 0 (SSC) of parameter No. 8133 is 1).
2 When the constant surface speed control is selected, the spindle
speed is clamped at the maximum speed, regardless of whether
the G96 mode or G97 mode is specified.
- 1512 -
3775 Default P command value for spindle selection in multi-spindle control
NOTE

When bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1 and bit 2 (MPA) of parameter No.
3706 is set to 1 in multi-spindle control, set a default P command value applicable if S_P_
is not specified even once after power-up.

S1000 P2;
NOTE
to 1.
3 Under multi-path control, the P code specified here is valid for each
path.
different.)
6 To use this parameter, enable multi-spindle control (bit 3 (MSP) of
parameter No. 8133 is 1).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3798 ESN

[Data type] Bit
#1 ESN When the multi-spindle control is enabled and bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set
to 1, a spindle is specified in a program by using:
0: P command.
1: Extended spindle name.
- 1513 -
A spindle to be specified is selected as follows:

Bit 1 (ESN) of Bit 3 (MPP) of
Selection method
parameter No. 3798 parameter No. 3703
0 1 P command
1 1 Extended spindle name
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 0 (EEA) of parameter No. 1000 is
set to 1.
When setting this parameter to 1, set also parameter No. 3738 and
No. 3739 properly.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8133 MSP
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#3 MSP Multi-spindle is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
11090 Path number with which the rotation of each spindle is specified

When a path is specified for spindle commands, this parameter sets a path number with
which the rotation of a spindle can be specified.
0: Spindle commands can be issued from all paths.
1 to 10: Spindle commands can be issued from a set path.
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when spindle command path specification
signal SPSP<Gn536.7> is set to 1.
2 If the setting is illegal, an alarm PS5305, “ILLEGAL SPINDLE
NUMBER” is issued when a spindle command is issued from any
one of the paths.
3 This setting does not apply to spindle commands using the spindle
select signals SWS1 to SWS4<Gn027.0 to Gn027.2, Gn026.3>.
- 1514 -
Caution
CAUTION
1 If the primary spindle stop signal *SSTP<Gn029.6> for stopping all selected
(SWS1 to SWS4) spindles’ rotation is cleared, the speed command is restored.
A spindle not selected by SWS1 to SWS4 and rotating at its previous speed,
which is stopped using its respective command *SSTP1 to *SSTP4, cannot be
restored to that speed when the signal is cleared.
2 While a function using a position coder feedback such as feed per revolution and
a threading command is being executed, avoid changing the selection of a
position coder by using position coder selection signals PC2SLC<Gn028.7> ,
PC3SLC<Gn026.0> , and PC4SLC<Gn026.1> .
3 Type A multi-spindle control differs from Type B in the relationship between the
SWS1 and SIND signals for the first spindle. In Type B, SIND functions only when
SWS1 is set to 1. In Type A, SIND functions whether SWS1 is 1 or 0; each
spindle is selected by either of its respective SWS1 or SIND signals being set to
1.
Note
NOTE
1 The spindle orientation signal SOR<Gn029.5>, spindle speed override signals
SOV0 to SOV7<Gn030>, and spindle stop signal *SSTP <Gn029.6> only
function for the selected signals.
2 The multi-spindle control allows multiple position coder interfaces to be used. But
the number of actual speed indications on the CNC screen does not change.
The speed based on the feedback information of the selected position coder is
displayed.
3 An SOR command has priority over S commands and SIND-based rotation
control from the PMC, and will cause all selected spindles to perform orientation
rotation.
Alarm and message

PS0333 TOO MANY SPINDLE Multiple spindle commands could be found in the same block in
COMMANDS using an expansion spindle name.
Only one spindle could be commanded in the same block.
PS5305 ILLEGAL SPINDLE NUMBER In a spindle select function by address P for a multiple spindle
control,
1 Address P is not specified.
2 Parameter No. 3781 is not specified to the spindle to be
selected.
3 An illegal G code which cannot be commanded with an S_P_;
command is specified.
4 The multi-spindle control cannot be used because the bit 1
(EMS) of parameter No. 3702 is 1.
5 The spindle amplifier number of each spindle is not set in
parameter No. 3717.
6 A prohibited command for a spindle was issued (parameter
No. 11090).
7 An invalid value is set in parameter No. 11090.
- 1515 -

SP1202 SPINDLE SELECT ERROR In the multi-spindle control, the spindle number other than the
valid spindle number was selected by a position coder select
signal. An attempt was made to select the spindle number of the
system having no valid spindle.
- 1516 -
11.13 RIGID TAPPING

Overview
In a tapping cycle (Machining center system: G84/G74, Lathe system: G84/G88), synchronous control is
applied to the tapping operation of a tapping axis and the operation of the spindle.
This capability eliminates the need to use a tool such as a float tapper, thus enabling higher-speed,
higher-precision tapping.
Whether a tapping cycle is an ordinary tapping cycle or rigid tapping cycle is determined by the
miscellaneous function code for rigid tapping M29. (A different M code can be used by setting the
parameters accordingly, but M29 is used in the description given here.)
By setting the parameters, G codes for tapping cycles can be changed to G codes for rigid tapping only. In
this case, the CNC specifies M29 internally.
To perform rigid tapping, the following must be added to the ordinary connections:
- Connection of a position coder to the spindles
- Addition of a sequence to the PMC
- Setting of related parameters
To avoid duplicate descriptions, assume the following unless noted otherwise:
G code for a tapping cycle

Machining center system Lathe system
G84/G74 G84/G88
Gear selection method

Machining center system Lathe system
M-type or T-type gear selection method T-type gear selection method only
Parameters used according to the number of gear stages

No.5221 to No.5224, No.5231 to No.5234, No.5241 to No.5244,
No.5386 to No.5389, etc.
CAUTION
1 In the text of this section, a description of up to four-step gears is provided.
Gears of four steps are used with the lathe system, but gears of up to only three
steps are used with the machining center system.
2 When M-type gear selection is used for the machining center system, the
maximum spindle speed for rigid tapping (specified with parameters Nos. 5241
to 5243) must also be set for parameter No. 5243 regardless of the number of
gear steps. (For a system having a single gear step, set the same value as that
of parameter No. 5241 for parameter No. 5243. For a system having two gear
steps, set the same value as that of parameter No. 5242 for parameter No.
5243.)
The descriptions given in this section (such as spindle gear switching and M-type/T-type) are based on
the explanation given in Section "SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL."
Refer to Section "SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL" as necessary.
- Specification of machining center system/lathe system

The differences in the specifications for rigid tapping for the machining center system and lathe system
are described below.
- 1517 -
M
Rigid tapping of machining center system
The tapping cycle G84 and the reverse tapping cycle G74 can be used to specify machining center system
rigid tapping.
A drilling axis can be arbitrarily selected from the basic axes X, Y, Z, as well as axes parallel to the basic
axes, by setting the corresponding parameters accordingly (bit 0 (FXY) of parameter No. 5101).
The spindle operations of G84 and G74 are reversed with respect to each other.
T
Rigid tapping of lathe system
The face tapping cycle G84 and the side tapping cycle G88 can be used to specify lathe system rigid
tapping.
Depending on the rigid tapping command, rigid tapping can be performed along the Z-axis (when G84 is
used) or the X-axis (when G88 is used).
A reverse tapping cycle, like that supported by machining center system, is not available.
See "Rigid Tapping with Spindle of Another Path" for explanations about rigid tapping between different
paths (rigid tapping on a spindle for tool post 2 as directed by a command for tool post 1) in a multi-path
system.
The relationships between rigid tapping and multi-spindle control are described below.
Without multi-spindle control

Rigid tapping can be performed with the first spindle only.
With multi-spindle control

Rigid tapping can be performed by selecting the second through fourth spindles in addition to the first
spindle.
11.13.1 Connection Among Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Position

Coder
As shown in the figures (Fig. 11.13.1 (a) and Fig. 11.13.1 (b)) below a gear ratio can be inserted between
the spindle and spindle motor (n : m), and between the spindle and position coder (N : M).
Spindle control
Error Spindle Spindle motor

counter amplifier
Gear ratio n:m
Position Gear ratio N : M Spindle

coder
The number of pulses per position coder

revolution is set in parameter No. 3720.
Fig. 11.13.1 (a) When a position coder is externally attached (on the spindle side)
- 1518 -
Spindle control The number of pulses per position coder

revolution is set in parameter No. 3720.
Spindle
Spindle Position coder
Error motor
amplifier
counter
Gear ratio n : m
N:M
Spindle
Fig. 11.13.1 (b) When a position coder is built into a spindle motor
(1) Gear between spindle and spindle motor

Up to three gear stages (machining center system) or four gear stages (lathe system) can be provided
between the spindle and the spindle motor.
The gear ratio is arbitrary. The distance of spindle rotation per revolution of spindle motor is different,
based on the gear ratio. The speed command to the spindle motor will be adjusted.
(2) Gear between spindle and position coder

The position coder is used to detect the position of the spindle.
The gear ratio between the spindle and position coder is set in parameters Nos. 5221 to 5224 and 5231 to
5234.
When a position coder is externally attached, the gear ratio between the spindle and position coder is not
changed by a gear change between the spindle motor and spindle. So, set the same number of teeth in
parameters Nos. 5221 to 5224 and 5231 to 5234.
When a position coder is built into a spindle motor, the gear ratio between the spindle and position coder
is changed by a gear change between the spindle motor and spindle. So, set the number of teeth for each
gear in parameters Nos. 5221 to 5224 and 5231 to 5234.
Example of setting for the machining center system)
Built-in position coder
Spindle
motor
1st gear set
2nd gear set
3rd gear set 1st gear set 30 : 70

2nd gear set 50 : 50
3rd gear set 70 : 30
Spindle
Parameter No. Set value Meaning

5221 70 Number of teeth of the 1st gear for the spindle side
5222 50 Number of teeth of the 2nd gear for the spindle side
5223 30 Number of teeth of the 3rd gear for the spindle side
5231 30 Number of teeth of the 1st gear for the position coder side
- 1519 -
Parameter No. Set value Meaning

5232 50 Number of teeth of the 2nd gear for the position coder side
5233 70 Number of teeth of the 3rd gear for the position coder side
For the lathe system, up to four gear stages can be set.
(3) Rigid tapping and machines with multiple gears

When performing rigid tapping on a machine that has multiple gears, note the points below.

M
The CNC determines whether gears need changing using the gear change specification mentioned in
section “SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL”. If the gears need to be changed, the CNC generates the S
function code read signal SF <F007.2> and gear selection signals GR1O, GR2O, and GR3O <F034.0-2>
to notify the PMC. Change gears using the PMC, based on these signals.
- T type gear selection method

The CNC does not process gear changes. Using the PMC, determine whether gears need changing, and
make the change if needed.
When the CNC has the S function code, it outputs signal SF <F007.2> and S function code signals S00 to
S31 <F022-F025> to the PMC. (However, parameter No. 3705 and its related parameters need to be set
for S code and SF signal output).
The PMC side finds a gear whose spindle speed range includes the spindle speed specified by an S
function code. A selected gear is to be output onto the gear selection signals GR1 and GR2 (G028.1,2 for
the first spindle, G029.0,1 for the second spindle, G029.2,3 for the third spindle, and G031.4,5 for the
fourth spindle) for notification to the CNC. Regardless of the gear selection method, the clutch/gear
selection signals CTH2 and CHT1 (G070.3,2 for the first spindle, G074.3,2 for the second spindle,
G204.3,2 for the third spindle, and G266.3,2 for the fourth spindle) corresponding to a gear change are to
be input for notification through the CNC to the serial spindle control unit.
Changing gears during rigid tapping requires a different process from that for gear changes during normal
machining. As described above, changing gears conforms to the gear change specifications mentioned in
section "SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL" when the M type gear selection method has been selected. With
the T type gear selection method, changing gears conforms to the logic programmed in the PMC.
Regardless of the option's selection, if the range in which the spindle speed specified by the S function
code does not correspond to the currently selected gear, the gears are changed.
The Table 11.13.1 (a) lists the spindle speed ranges for each gear during normal machining (assuming no
machine restrictions) and rigid tapping:
Table 11.13.1 (a)
Spindle speed range (normal machining)
Gear
Lower limit Upper limit
Maximum low-speed gear speed
Maximum spindle motor speed × L%
Low-speed gear 1 revolution
=
Low-speed gear ratio
Maximum medium-speed gear speed
Maximum low-speed gear speed + 1 Maximum spindle motor speed × L%
Medium speed gear
revolution =
Medium speed gear ratio
Maximum high-speed gear speed
Maximum medium-speed gear speed + 1 Maximum spindle motor speed × L%
High-speed gear
revolution =
High-speed gear ratio
- 1520 -
NOTE
Table 11.13.1 (a) shows an example of three gears. L% indicates a spindle
motor protection constant (up to 100). L can be specified for each gear using
method B for changing in M type gear selection method (bit 2 (SGB) of
parameter No. 3705 is set to 1).
The spindle speed range of each gear in rigid tapping must satisfy the Table 11.13.1 (b).
Table 11.13.1 (b)
Spindle speed range (during rigid tapping)
Gear
Lower limit Upper limit
Maximum low-speed gear speed
Basic spindle motor speed + α
Low-speed gear 1 revolution
=
Low-speed gear ratio
Maximum medium-speed gear speed
Maximum low-speed gear speed + 1 Basic spindle motor speed + α
Medium speed gear
revolution =
Medium-speed gear ratio
Maximum high-speed gear speed
Maximum medium-speed gear speed + 1 Basic spindle motor speed + α
High-speed gear
revolution =
High-speed gear ratio
NOTE
This table show an example of three gears. For the basic spindle motor speed,
refer to the spindle motor description manual. "+α" means that the spindle motor
speed may slightly exceed the basic spindle motor speed.
If the M type gear selection method is used, use gear change method B (bit 3 (SGT) of parameter No.
3705 is set to 1) in the tapping cycle to specify the following:
The table above shows the maximum low-speed gear speed during rigid tapping for gear 1 to gear 2
change point (parameter No. 3761). The table above shows the maximum medium-speed gear speed
during rigid tapping for gear 2 to gear 3 change point (parameter No. 3762). If the T type gear selection
method is used, add the rigid tapping logic to the logic programmed in the PMC. See Section "SPINDLE
SPEED CONTROL" for details of the spindle gear change specifications. The loop gain can be specified
for each gear.
In parameters Nos. 5281 to 5284, set the loop gain of each gear. Set a loop gain multiplier in parameters
Nos. 5291 to 5294. Specify the time constant and the maximum spindle speed for each gear.
Use parameters Nos. 5261 to 5264 to specify the time constant.
Use parameters Nos. 5241 to 5244 to specify the maximum spindle speed.
For M type gear selection method, set the maximum spindle speed to parameter No. 5243, irrespective of
the number of gear stages used.
Setting bit 2 (TDR) of parameter No. 5201 to 1 enables setting of the time constants used during
extraction for each gear set. Specify the extraction time constant for each gear in parameters Nos. 5271 to
5274.
It is recommended that a value of about 1:8 to 8:1 be actually used as the gear ratio between the spindle
and position coder.
- 1521 -
11.13.2 Rigid Tapping Specification

- Feed rate
In rigid tapping mode, the drilling axis is fed at a rate specified by F. The spindle speed is specified by S
360 [deg/min].
A detailed description of commands for feed per minute and feed per revolution is provided later.

Linear acceleration/deceleration or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration can be applied.
A detailed description is provided later.
- Look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

Look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is disabled.
- Override
Various types of overrides are disabled. However, the following overrides can be enabled by setting
parameters:
- Override signal
A detailed description is provided later.
- Dry run
Dry run is valid for G84/G74 (for machining center system) or G84/G88 (for lathe system). When the dry
run is applied to the drilling axis speed of G84/G74 or G84/G88, tapping is performed. The spindle speed
will match the dry run speed.
- Machine lock
When G84/G74 (for machining center system) or G84/G88 (for lathe system) is executed with the
machine locked, however the drilling axis and the spindle do not move.
- Reset
When the reset operation is performed during rigid tapping, the mode is reset. The spindle motor goes to
the ordinary mode. However, the G84/G74 (machining center system) or G84/G88 (lathe system) mode
may not be canceled with bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402.
- Feed hold and single block

In the G84/G74 (machining center system) or G84/G88 (lathe system) mode, the feed hold and single
block functions are disabled when bit 6 (FHD) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 0. The functions are
enabled when the bit is set to 1.
- Operation mode
G84/G74 (for machining center system) or G84/G88 (for lathe system) can be executed only in the MEM
and MDI modes.
- Manual feed
When performing rigid tapping by using manual handle feed, see the description of the “MANUAL
RIGID TAPPING”.
Rigid tapping cannot be used with other types of manual feed.
- Backlash compensation
In rigid tapping mode, the backlash is compensated for the lost motion at forward and reverse spindle
rotations. Set it using parameters Nos. 5321 to 5324. The normal backlash compensation is inserted on the
drilling axis.
- 1522 -
- C-axis clamp/unclamp
T
An M code can be specified to clamp/unclamp the C-axis mechanically in rigid tapping. By adding an M
code for clamping to a block specifying G84/G88 (lathe system), both M codes are output.
A description of timing is provided later.
An M code for clamping is to be set in parameter No. 5110. An M code for unclamping assumes the value
set in parameter No. 5110 + 1.
No.5110
0 Other than 0
No M code is output. M code is output.
11.13.3 Commands for Feed per Minute and Feed per Revolution
In rigid tapping commands for feed per minute and feed per revolution can be specified.
(Example)
The example below specifies rigid tapping in feed per minute mode for cutting a thread with a lead of 1
mm at a spindle speed of 1,000 min-1. (In feed per minute mode, F/S determines the thread lead.)
O0002 ;
G94 ;
:
M29 S1000 ;
G84 X50. Y30. Z-100. R-20. F1000 ;
:
G80 ;
The example below specifies rigid tapping in feed per rotation mode for cutting the same thread at the
same spindle speed as above. (In feed per rotation mode, F determines the thread lead.)
O0001 ;
G95 ;
:
M29 S1000 ;
G84 X50. Y30. Z-100. R-20. F1. ;
:
G80 ;
NOTE
Even in the feed per revolution mode, pulses distributed for the drilling axis are
converted to a command for feed per minute. Thus, feed per rotation mode does
not strictly implement feed per rotation. Accordingly, even if the spindle stops for
some reason, the drilling axis does not stop.
- 1523 -
11.13.4 Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation

Linear acceleration/deceleration or bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration can be applied.
When bit 2 (TDR) of parameter No. 5201 is set to 1, time constants for cutting and extraction can be set
in separate parameters (Parameters Nos. 5271 to 5274).
- Linear acceleration/deceleration
By setting bit 5 (RBL) of parameter No. 5203 to 0, linear acceleration/deceleration of constant
acceleration type can be applied.
In parameters Nos. 5261 5264, set a time required to reach a maximum spindle speed.
The actual time constant is the ratio between a maximum spindle speed and S command value.
Example)
Suppose that the parameters are set as follows: time constant TC = 800 msec and maximum spindle
speed S = 4000 min-1.
min-1
4000
800 800 msec
When S2000 is specified, the acceleration/deceleration time is 400 msec. When S1000 is specified, the
acceleration/deceleration time is 200 msec. This means that the acceleration rate in linear
acceleration/deceleration at rigid tapping time is constant.
- Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
By setting bit 5 (RBL) of parameter No. 5203 to 1, bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration of constant
acceleration type can be applied.
In parameters Nos. 5261 to 5264, set a time required to reach a maximum spindle speed (linear portion).
In parameters Nos. 5365 to 5368, set a time for the curved portion.
The actual time constant for the linear portion is the ratio between a maximum spindle speed and S
command value.
To the curved portion, not an S command value but a set value is applied.
This means that the actual time constant is [linear portion value obtained by proportional calculation +
value for curved portion].
- 1524 -
Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
min-1 (constant acceleration type)
<1>
msec
T2 T2
T1
Set time constants T1 and T2 in parameters.
(Acceleration rate of linear portion <1> is constant from
settings of maximum spindle speed and T1.)
NOTE
1 Even when bit 2 (TDR) of parameter No. 5201 is set to 1, the values set in
parameters Nos. 5365 to 5368 are used for cutting and extraction in the curved
portions.
2 When 0 is set in parameters Nos. 5365 to 5368, linear acceleration/deceleration
is used.
3 In 3-dimensional rigid tapping, bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is disabled,
and linear acceleration/deceleration is used.
11.13.5 Override
Various types of overrides are disabled. However, the following overrides can be enabled by setting
parameters:
- Override signal
(1) Extraction override

For extraction override, a parameter-set fixed override value or programmed override value can be used at
the time of extraction (including extraction operation at peck drilling/high-speed peck drilling).
- Parameter specification
Set bit 4 (DOV) of parameter No. 5200 to 1, and set an override value in parameter No. 5211.
An override value from 0% to 200% can be set in steps of 1%. When bit 3 (OVU) of parameter No. 5201
is set to 1, an override value from 0% to 2000% can be set in steps of 10%.
- Program specification
When bit 4 (DOV) of parameter No. 5200 and bit 4(OV3) of parameter No. 5201 are set to 1, a spindle
speed to be used at extraction time can be programmed.
Using address J in a block specifying rigid tapping, specify a spindle speed to be used at extraction time.
Example)
When S = 1000 min-1 for cutting and S = 2000 min-1 for extraction
:
M29 S1000 ;
G84 Z-100. F1000. J2000 ;
- 1525 -
:
The following calculation is made for conversion to an actual override value:
Spindle speed for extraction (J command)
Override value (%) = ×100
Spindle speed (S command)
So, the spindle speed at extraction time may not match the speed specified by address J. If an override
value not within the range 100% to 200% is specified, the specification of 100% is assumed.
The table below summarizes the setting of an extraction override value by parameter
specification/program specification.
Parameter setting DOV=1
DOV=0
Command OV3=1 OV3=0
Spindle speed for extraction Within the range 100% to 200% Program specification
Parameter
is specified by address J. Not within the range 100% to 200% 100% 100%
No. 5211
Spindle speed for extraction is not specified by address J. Parameter No. 5211
NOTE
1 When specifying address J, do not use the decimal point.
If the decimal point is used, the specified value is handled as described below.
Example) When the increment system for the reference axis is IS-B
- When calculator-type decimal point input is not used
The specified value is converted to a value considering the least input
increment.
"J200.0" is converted to 200000 min-1.
- When calculator-type decimal point input is used
The specified value is converted to a value with the decimal places
discarded.
"J200.0" is converted to 200 min-1.
2 When specifying address J, do not use the minus sign.
When the minus sign is used, the specification of a value not within the range
100% to 200% is assumed.
3 Find a maximum allowable extraction override value according to the expression
below so that the spindle speed multiplied by an extraction override value does
not exceed the maximum speed (parameters Nos. 5241 to 5244) of the gear in
use. For this reason, a mismatch with the maximum spindle speed can occur,
depending on the override value.
Maximum spindle speed (parameter setting)
Maximum override value (%) = ×100
4 Address J for specifying a spindle speed for extraction, when specified in the
rigid tapping mode, remains valid until the canned cycle is canceled.
(2) Override signals

When bit 4 (OVS) of parameter No. 5203 is set to 1, a cutting/extraction operation in rigid tapping can be
overridden as described below.
• Override is applied using the feedrate override signal.
(When the second feedrate override signal is valid, the second feedrate override is applied to the
feedrate to which the feedrate override is already applied.
• Override is canceled using the override cancel signal.
The relationship between this function and overriding each operation is described below.
• At the time of cutting
When the override cancel signal = 0
Value specified by the override signal
- 1526 -
100%
• At the time of extraction
Value specified by the override signal
When extraction override is disabled
100%
When extraction override is enabled
Value specified by an extraction override value
NOTE
Find a maximum allowable override value according to the expression below so
that the spindle speed multiplied by an override value does not exceed the
maximum speed (parameters Nos. 5241 to 5244) of the gear in use. For this
reason, a mismatch with the maximum spindle speed can occur, depending on
the override value.
Maximum spindle speed (parameter setting)
Maximum override value (%) = ×100
11.13.6 Reference Position Return

For serial spindles, setting bit 0 (ORI) of parameter No. 5202 to 1 enables a reference position return to be
made for a spindle at the start of rigid tapping.
When a movement is made to a R point in the rigid tapping mode, the reference position return direction
is determined on the serial interface spindle side for reference position return. With the grid shift function,
the reference position can be shifted within the range 0° to 360°.
Set a reference position return direction in bit 4 (RETSV) of parameter No. 4000. Set a grid shift amount
in parameter No. 4073.
NOTE
1 A feedrate for reference position return is determined from the position where
the tool is stopped when the rigid tapping mode is set, and the amount of travel
found from the reference position. Accordingly, no fixed speed is applied.
2 When the gear ratio between the spindle and position coder is not 1:2n (n:
integer other than 0), the tool may not be able to return to the same reference
position.
11.13.7 FS10/11 Format Command

M
When bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No. 0001 is set to 1, rigid tapping can be specified in the FS10/11
command format.
(1) :
Sxxxx ;
G84.2/G84.3 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ L_ ;
:
(2) :
G84.2/G84.3 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ L_ Sxxxx ;
:
- 1527 -
G84.2 : Rigid tapping cycle

G84.3 : Rigid reverse tapping cycle
X,Y : Tapping position
Z : Position of the bottom face of a tapped hole
R : Position of a R point
P : Dwell time at the bottom of a tapped hole and at R point return time
F : Cutting feedrate
L : Number of repeats
S : Spindle speed
NOTE
This function enables the rigid tapping function to be specified in the FS10/11
command format without changing the rigid tapping sequence (such as handling
with the PMC).
T
When bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No. 0001 is set to 1 and bit 3 (F16) of parameter No. 5102 is set to 0,
rigid tapping can be specified in the FS10/11 command format.
(1) :
Sxxxx ;
G84.2 X_ C_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ L_ ;
:
(2) :
G84.2 X_ C_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ L_ S_ ;
:
G84.2 : Rigid tapping cycle G code

X,C : Tapping position
R : Position of a R point
P : Dwell time at the bottom of a tapped hole and at R point return time
S : Spindle speed
The differences from the FS0i command format are as follows:

- No G code can make a distinction between a front tapping cycle and side tapping cycle. A tapping
axis is determined by plane selection (G17/G18/G19). Select a plane that matches a front tapping
cycle/side tapping cycle.
Plane select Drilling axis
G17: Xp-Yp plane Zp
G18: Zp-Xp plane Yp
G19: Yp-Zp plane Xp
Xp : X axis or its parallel axis
Yp : Y axis or its parallel axis
Zp : Z axis or its parallel axis
NOTE
With bit 0 (FXY) of parameter No. 5101, the Z-axis can be used as the tapping
axis at all times. If FXY is set to 0, the Z-axis is used as the tapping axis at all
times.
- 1528 -
- The M code for C-axis clamping cannot be specified.
- The specification of a R point depends on the G code system and parameter setting as described
below.
1. When the bit 3 (F16) of parameter No. 5102 is set 0.
Bit 6 (RAB) of parameter No. 5102
0 1
G code system
Incremental command at all times A B,C
Absolute command at all times Follows G90/G91.
Bit 7 (RDI) of parameter No. 5102

0 1
Diameter command at all times Follows the diameter specification/radius specification of the tapping axis.
2. When the bit 3 (F16) of parameter No. 5102 is set 1.

An incremental command based on radius specification is used, regardless of bit 6 (RAB) and
bit 7 (RDI) of parameter No. 5102.
NOTE
This function enables the rigid tapping function to be specified in the FS10/11
command format without changing the rigid tapping sequence (such as handling
with the PMC).
11.13.8 Multi-Spindle Control

When multi-spindle control is used, rigid tapping can be performed by selecting spindles from the first to
fourth spindles. A spindle can be selected as described below (Table 11.13.8 (a)) by parameter setting.
Table 11.13.8 (a)

Lathe system
Machining center system Bit 7 (SRS) of parameter No. 5200
0 1
Bit 3 (MPP) Selected using the spindle Selected using the spindle Selected using the rigid
of 0 selection signals SWS1 to selection signals SWS1 to tapping spindle selection
parameter SWS4 SWS4 signals RGTSP1 to RGTSP4
No. 3703 1 Selected using an NC command (address P)
For details of the method of selection using the spindle selection signals/rigid tapping spindle selection
signals, see the descriptions of signals provided later.
For details of the method of selection using an NC command (address P), see "MULTI-SPINDLE
CONTROL" provided later.
11.13.9 3-dimensional Rigid Tapping

By performing rigid tapping in 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode or Tilted working plane
indexing mode, the tapping operation can be directed to the angular direction specified by 3-dimensional
conversion command or Tilted working plane indexing command.
Be sure to use this function with 3-dimensional coordinate conversion or Tilted working plane indexing.
- 1529 -
11.13.10 Rigid Tapping with Spindle of Another Path

Overview
In multi-path system, rigid tapping with spindle of other path different from specified path can be
executed by path spindle control function. The spindle which executes rigid tapping is selected according
to the spindle command selection signals.
If multi-spindle control option is provided, not only the path but also the spindle executed with rigid
tapping can be selected.
Specifications
- Case in which no multi-spindle control is available
If bit 4 (SPR) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1, using spindle command select signals, like the S
command, makes it possible to specify a path from which rigid tapping command is to be used to control
a spindle in a specific path.
The spindle command select signals are described below.
(Example)
2-path system: SLSPA<G063.2> (for a spindle in path 1) and SLSPB<G063.3> (for a spindle in
path 2)
- Case in which the multi-spindle control is available

- Signal-based command
If bit 1 (EMS) of parameter No. 3702 is set to 0 and bit 4 (SPR) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1,
enables an arbitrary spindle in an arbitrary path to be used for rigid tapping.
Before a rigid tapping command is issued, the spindle to be used for rigid tapping is selected using a
signal.
- Address P-based command
If bit 1 (EMS) of parameter No. 3702 is set to 0 and bit 4 (SPR) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1,
makes it possible to use, for rigid tapping, a spindle connected to a path other than the one in which
the command is issued. Setting bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 to 1 enables a spindle to be
selected for use in rigid tapping according to a program (P code).
Adding address P to the S command for rigid tapping enables a spindle to be selected for use in rigid
tapping.
(Example: M29 S1000 P22 ;)
It is necessary to set, in advance, parameter No. 3781 with relationships between P values and axes
selected with specific P values.
Refer to descriptions of “MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL” in the related connection manual for

explanations about how to use address P to select a spindle.
Example 1 Case in which no multi-spindle control is used

On a 2-path lathe with 2 spindles under 2-path control (bit 0 (2P2) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1), the
following signals are set up as stated when rigid tapping is carried out using the rigid tapping command
(machining program) and servo section (Z #1 in the Fig. 11.13.10 (a)) in path 1 and the first spindle (SP1
#2
in the Fig. 11.13.10 (a)) connected to path 2.
<1> SLSPB<G63.3> =1: The spindle connected to path 2 is controlled by commands in path 1.
<2> SLSPA<G63.2> = 1: The spindle connected to path 1 is controlled by commands in path 2.
Rigid tapping is carried out on the first spindle (SP1#2) in path 2.
- 1530 -
Parameter setting
(common to the paths)
CNC Bit 4 (SPR) of parameter No. 3703 = "1"
Bit 0 (2P2) of parameter No. 3703 = "1"
Path 1 Path 2
Rigid tapping command

M29 S_ ;
G84 Z_ F_;
X #1 X #2
Z #1 Z #2
SLSPA=1 SLSPB=1
SP1 #1 SP1 #2
Fig. 11.13.10 (a)
(Supplement)
In the above example system configuration, the signal operation described in <2> is necessary to
make each command correspond to the spindles selected by the commands on a one-to-one basis.
The way the spindle select signals are handled may vary according to the number of control paths in
the CNC and the number of controlled axes (bits 0 (2P2) and 2 (MPM) of parameter No. 3703).
Example 2 Case in which multi-spindle control is used (signal-based command)

On a 2-path lathe with 4 spindles under 2-path control (bit 0 (2P2) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1), the
following signals are set up as stated when rigid tapping is carried out using the rigid tapping command
(machining program) and servo section (Z #1 in the Fig. 11.13.10 (b)) in path 1 and the second spindle
(SP1 #2 in the Fig. 11.13.10 (b)) connected to path 2.
<1> SLSPB<G63.3> = 1: The spindle connected to path 2 is controlled by commands in path 1.
<2> SLSPA<G63.2> = 1: The spindle connected to path 1 is controlled by commands in path 2.
<3> SWS1#2<G1027.0> ＝0
<4> SWS2#2<G1027.1> ＝1: Rigid tapping is carried out on the second spindle (SP2#2) in path 2.
- 1531 -
Parameter setting
CNC (common to the paths)
Path 1 Path 2 Bit 4 (SPR) of parameter No. 3703 = "1"
Bit 0 (2P2) of parameter No. 3703 = "1"

M29 S_ ;
G84 Z_ F_;
X #1 X #2
Z #1 Z #2
SLSPA=1 SLSPB=1
SP1 #1 SP1 #2 #2
SWS1 =0
SP2 #1 SP2 #2
#2
SWS2 =1
Fig. 11.13.10 (b)
(Supplement)
In the above example system configuration, the signal operation described in <2> is necessary to
make each command correspond to the spindles selected by the commands on a one-to-one basis.
The way the spindle select signals are handled may vary according to the number of control paths in
the CNC and the number of controlled axes (bits 0 (2P2) and 2 (MPM) of parameter No. 3703).
Example 3 Case in which multi-spindle control is used (address P-based

command)
On a 2-path lathe with 4 spindles under 2-path control (bit 0 (2P2) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1),
before a rigid tapping command is issued, the following parameters are set up as stated if rigid tapping is
to be carried out using the rigid tapping command (machining program) and servo section (Z #1 in the Fig.
11.13.10 (c)) in path 1 and the second spindle (SP2 #2 in the Fig. 11.13.10 (c)) connected to path 2.
No.3781 #1 S1 (Path 1: P value for selecting the first spindle) = 11
No.3781 #1 S2 (Path 1: P value for selecting the second spindle) = 12
No.3781 #2 S3 (Path 2: P value for selecting the first spindle) = 21
No.3781 #2 S4 (Path 2: P value for selecting the second spindle) = 22
- 1532 -
Parameter setting
(common to the paths)
Bit 4 (SPR) of parameter No. 3703 = "1"
CNC Bit 0 (2P2) of parameter No. 3703 = "1"
Bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 = "1"
Path 1 Path 2
Multi-spindle
M29 S_ P22;
G84 Z_ F_;
X #1 X #2
PRM No.3781 (S1)＝11 PRM No.3781(S3) ＝21 Z #2

#1
Z
PRM No.3781(S2) ＝12 PRM No.3781(S4) ＝22
SP1 #1 SP1 #2
SP2 #1 SP2 #2
Fig. 11.13.10 (c)
The P code for selecting a spindle is added to the rigid tapping S command to execute a machining
program. In this example, SP2 #2 must be controlled. So, the P code is used to issue a value (22) specified
by parameter No. 3781 #2 (S4).
Restrictions
Observe the following restrictions.
- Paths issuing rigid tapping commands must correspond to spindles on which rigid tapping is carried
out on a one-to-one basis.
- If this function is used to carry out rigid tapping on a spindle in a path other than a command-issuing
path, the spindle must be put in the spindle control mode in advance.
- This function is unusable for servo motor-based rigid tapping.
The alarms below are raised if a restriction above is not observed, that is, if a condition stated below
occurs.
Alarm PS0205 "RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL OFF"
- Rigid tapping commands in multiple paths attempted to carry out rigid tapping on the same spindle
simultaneously.
- A rigid tapping command was issued to a spindle control axis with servo motor in a path other than
the command issuing path.
Alarm SP0752 "SPINDLE MODE CHANGE ERROR"
- A spindle selected by a rigid tapping command was in a mode other than the spindle control mode.
The modes other than the spindle control mode include:
Cs contour axis
Spindle positioning
Spindle-synchronous, inter-spindle polygon machining
Rigid tapping (controlled by commands from another path)
- 1533 -
[Example] 2-path system with each path having 2 spindles

(Rigid tapping is carried out on a spindle pointed to by an arrowhead)
Spindle on which
Path issuing
rigid tapping is MPP = 0 MPP = 1
commands
carried out
First spindle
Path 1
Second spindle
Example 1 Available Available
First spindle
Path 2
Second spindle
First spindle
Path 1
Unavailable
Second spindle
Example 2 Alarm Available
First spindle PS0205
Path 2
Second spindle
First spindle
Path 1
Unavailable
Second spindle
Example 3 Alarm Available
Path 2
Second spindle
First spindle
Path 1
Unavailable
Second spindle Unavailable
Example 4 Alarm
Alarm PS0205
Path 2
Second spindle
If the rigid tapping spindle is not in the spindle control mode (for example, is in the Cs contour control
mode), rigid tapping cannot be carried out in any of the above cases.
Notes
- This function is enabled when serial spindles are used. Issuing commands to an arbitrary spindle in a
path other than a command issuing path requires the multi-spindle control (bit 3 (MSP) of parameter
No. 8133 is 1).
- This function is unusable for rigid tapping with servo motor.
- If rigid tapping is carried out on a spindle in a path other than a command issuing path, the ENB
signal is also shifted to the path to which the spindle is connected. Be careful when using the spindle
ENB signal in the rigid tapping release sequence.
- Be careful not to issue a spindle mode switching command from one path and a rigid tapping
command from another path to the same spindle simultaneously (for example, using an inter-path
wait M code).
- 1534 -
Example: The Cs contour control function is executed on the first spindle in path 1. After that, a rigid
tapping command is issued from path 2 to that spindle.
Commands in path 1 Commands in path 2
: :
M20 ; (Enter Cs contour control mode) :
G00 C90.0 ; (C-axis positioning) :
M21 ; (Exit from Cs contour control mode) :
M12000 ; ← Waiting → M12000 ;
: M29 S_ P11 ; (Rigid tapping)
: G84 X_ Z_ F_ ；
M12000: Inter-path wait M code (see descriptions of parameter Nos. 8110 and 8111)
Parameter No.3781 for 1st spindle of path 1 ＝ 11
- If this function is used to carry out rigid tapping on a spindle connected to a path other than a
command issuing path, the settings in the path to which the spindle is connected are applied to the
following parameters.
No.5214 (synchronization error width)
Nos.5221 to 5224 (number of gear teeth on spindle side)
Nos.5231 to 5234 (number of gear teeth on PC side)
Nos.5241 to 5244 (maximum rotation speed)
Nos.5261 to 5264 (acceleration/deceleration constant)
Nos.5271 to 5274 (acceleration/deceleration constant for retracting)
Nos.5280 to 5284 (loop gain)
No.5301, No.5303, No.5305 (spindle effective area (for in-position check))
No.5311, No.5351, No.5355 (excessive error during spindle movement)
No.5313, No.5353, No.5357 (excessive error with spindle at stop)
Nos.5321 to 5324, 5325, 5326, 5327, 5328 (backlash)
- 1535 -
11.13.11 Diagnosis Data

For rigid tapping adjustment, the diagnosis screen displays information related to rigid tapping.
- Display of command pulses and position deviation amounts
- Spindle position deviation → Diagnosis data No. 0450
- Number of command pulses distributed to the spindle (momentary value) → Diagnosis data No.
0451
- Cumulative number of command pulses distributed to the spindle → Diagnosis data No. 0454
- Display of rigid tapping synchronization error
- Spindle-converted move command difference → Diagnosis data No. 0455
- Spindle-converted position deviation difference → Diagnosis data No. 0456
- Synchronization error range → Diagnosis data No. 0457
- Spindle-converted move amount difference (maximum value) → Diagnosis data No. 0460
- Spindle-converted machine position difference (momentary value) → Diagnosis data No. 0461
- Spindle-converted machine position difference (maximum value) → Diagnosis data No. 0462
spindle move command

Spindle - converted move command difference = Σ −
gear ratio
(tapping axis move command) × number of pulses per spindle revolution
Σ
thread lead
spindle position deviation
Spindle - converted position deviation difference = −
gear ratio
(drilling axis position deviation) × number of pulses per spindle revolution
thread lead
Synchronization error range =
(maximum spindle - converted move position deviation difference on the positive side) -
(maximum spindle - converted position deviation difference on the negative side)
Drilling axis machine position＝∑ [drilling axis move command] − drilling axis position deviation
Spindle machine position＝∑ [spindle move command] − spindle position deviation
Spindle - converted machine position deviation difference＝
drilling axis machine position × number of pulses per spindle revolution spindle machine position
－
thread lead gear ratio
If a maximum allowable synchronization error range is set in parameter No. 5214, the position deviation
alarm during spindle movement (alarm SP0741) is issued to indicate that the set synchronization error
range has been exceeded. (If 0 is set in parameter No. 5214, no check is performed to detect whether the
synchronization error range has been exceeded.)
- Error difference display

- Momentary error difference between the spindle and drilling axis → Diagnosis data No. 0452
- Maximum error difference between the spindle and drilling axis → Diagnosis data No. 0453
Diagnosis display No. 0452 is cleared to 0 when rigid tapping mode is set or canceled, and diagnosis data
No. 0453 is cleared to 0 in the positioning of the rigid tapping cycle.
- 1536 -
The following figure shows the tapping axis as the Z axis.
Z-axis
error
Zc
Z
Speed 1 1
Zc = × × × 102 (Theoretical value)
60 Gain Detection unit
Ze = Z-axis error counts (measured value)
Spindle
error
Sc
Se
Speed × 360 1 1
Sc = × × × 102 (Theoretical value)
60 Gain Detection unit
Se = Spindle error counts (measured value)
Speed : mm/min or inch/min

Gain : 0.01sec-1
Detection unit : mm,inch,or deg
Speed : min-1
Z
ΔZ= × 100 [%]
Zc
The error difference between the spindle and Z axis
Se
can be obtained by ΔS-ΔZ. This value is sampled at
ΔS= × 100 [%] intervals of 8 ms.
Sc
- Display of spindle position data

Position coder signal pulse data from the spindle one-rotation signal is displayed.
- Position coder signal pulse data of each spindle → Diagnosis data No.445
NOTE
1 For an unconnected spindle, 0 is displayed.
2 For display of this data, the conditions below must be satisfied.
<1> Serial spindle
<2> Bit 1 (SPP) of parameter No. 3117 must be set to 1.
<3> A compliant spindle amplifier must be used.
<4> Compliant spindle control software must be used.
<5> The state where the serial spindle has detected a one-rotation signal must
be set.
To detect a one-rotation signal accurately, spindle orientation must be
performed. This orientation operation needs to be performed only once after the
power is turned on.
Whether a one-rotation signal has been detected can be known by checking the
serial spindle state signals (PC1DEA to PC1DED).
- 1537 -
Diagnosis data
- Spindle position data
0445 SPINDLE POSITION DATA
Position coder signal pulse data from the spindle one-rotation signal of each spindle
(serial spindle only)
[Unit] Pulse
- Spindle position deviation

0450 SPINDLE MOTION ERROR
Spindle position deviation during rigid tapping
[Unit] Pulse
- Number of pulses distributed to the spindle

0451 SPINDLE MOTION PULSE
Number of pulses distributed to the spindle during rigid tapping
[Unit] Pulse
- Error difference between the spindle and drilling axis (momentary value)
0452 RIGID ERROR
Momentary error difference between the spindle and drilling axis during rigid tapping
(signed)
[Unit] %
- Error difference between the spindle and drilling axis (maximum)

0453 RIGID ERROR (MAX)
Maximum error difference between the spindle and drilling axis during rigid tapping
(absolute value)
[Unit] %
- Cumulative number of pulses distributed to the spindle during drilling tapping

0454 SPINDLE PULSE (SUM)
Cumulative number of pulses distributed to the spindle during rigid tapping
[Unit] Pulse
- Spindle-converted move command difference during rigid tapping

(momentary value)
0455 SYNC. PULSE (SUM)
Momentary spindle-converted move during command difference between the spindle and
the drilling axis during rigid tapping
[Unit] Pulse
- Spindle-converted position deviation difference during rigid tapping

(momentary value)
0456 SYNC. ERROR
Momentary spindle-converted position deviation difference between the spindle and the
drilling axis during rigid tapping
[Unit] Pulse
- Synchronization error range during rigid tapping (maximum value)

0457 SYNC. WIDTH
Synchronization error range during rigid tapping (maximum value)
[Unit] Pulse
- 1538 -
- Spindle-converted move command difference during rigid tapping (maximum

value)
0460 SYNC. PULSE (MAX)
Maximum spindle-converted move during command difference between the spindle and
the drilling axis during rigid tapping
[Unit] Pulse
- Spindle-converted machine position difference during rigid tapping

(momentary value)
0461 MACHIN POS ERROR
Spindle-converted machine position difference during rigid tapping (momentary value)
[Unit] Pulse
- Spindle-converted machine position difference during rigid tapping (maximum

value)
0462 MACHIN POS ERROR (MAX)
Spindle-converted machine position difference during rigid tapping (maximum value)
[Unit] Pulse
11.13.12 Command Format

T
Command format for the lathe system

The rigid tapping mode can be specified in one of two formats: FS0i format and FS10/11 format. A
usable format can be selected by parameter setting.
Parameter
Bit 1 (FCV) of Bit 3 (F16) of Executable command format
parameter No. 0001 parameter No. 5102
0 - FS0i format only (The number of repeats is specified using address K.)
FS10/11 format or
1 0
FS0i format (The number of repeats is specified using address K.)
1 1 FS0i format only (The number of repeats is specified using address L.)
This subsection describes the FS0i command format for rigid tapping on the lathe system. For the
machining center system, refer to the description of "RIGID TAPPING" in the Operator's Manual.
- G84 : Front tapping cycle

The first axis of a plane is a drilling axis, and the other axes are positioning axes.
Bit 0 (RTX) of parameter No. 5209 Plane selection Drilling axis
G17: Xp-Yp plane Xp
0 G18: Zp-Xp plane Zp
G19: Yp-Zp plane Yp
1 (Note) Zp
Note) These are invalid in the FS10/11 format.
1. When the bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No. 0001 is set to 0 :

G84 X_C_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ M_ ;
G84 : Front tapping cycle G code
X C : Tapping position
- 1539 -

R : Position of an R point (incremental command at all times)
P : Dwell time at the bottom of a tapped hole
K : Number of repeats
M : M code for C-axis clamping

G84 X_C_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ L_ M_ ;
G84 : Front tapping cycle G code
X C : Tapping position
- G88 : Side tapping cycle

The second axis of a plane is a drilling axis, and the other axes are positioning axes.
Bit 0 (RTX) of parameter No. 5209 Plane selection Drilling axis
G17: Xp-Yp plane Yp
0 G18: Zp-Xp plane Xp
G19: Yp-Zp plane Zp
1 (Note) Xp
Note) These are invalid in the FS10/11 format.

G88 Z_C_ X_ R_ P_ F_ K_ M_ ;
G88 : Side tapping cycle G code
Z C : Tapping position
X : Position of the bottom face of a tapped hole
K : Number of repeats

G88 Z_C_ X_ R_ P_ F_ L_ M_ ;
G88 : Side tapping cycle G code
Z C : Tapping position
X : Position of the bottom face of a tapped hole
- 1540 -
- Method of specification
The rigid tapping mode can be specified using one of three methods:
- Specification of M29S_ before specifying a tapping cycle
- Specification of M29S_ in the same block
- Enabling rigid tapping to be performed without specifying M29S_
When using the third method, specify S_ either before or in a block containing G84 (G88).
Thus, the spindle stops, after which the tapping cycle specified next is placed in rigid tapping mode.
When Spindle selection by address P of Multi spindle is enabled, if S is commanded at G84(G88) block,
alarm PS5305, “ILLEGAL SPINDLE NUMBER” is issued. Command S before G84(G88) block.
- Specifying M29 before a block containing G84 (G88)

M29 S_;
G84(G88) X_C_(Z_C_) Z_(X_) R_ P_ F_ K_ M_;
X_C_(Z_C_); Rigid tapping mode
X_C_(Z_C_);
:
G80;
- Specifying M29 and G84 (G88) in the same block

(However, the M code for C-axis clamping cannot be specified.)
G84(G88) X_C_(Z_C_) Z_(X_) R_ P_ F_ K_ M29 S_;
X_C_(Z_C_);
Rigid tapping mode
X_C_(Z_C_);
:
G80;
- Converting G84 (G88) to a G code for rigid tapping

(by setting bit 0 (G84) of parameter No. 5200 to 1)
G84(G88) X_C_(Z_C_) Z_(X_) R_ P_ F_ K_ S_ M_;
X_C_(Z_C_);
Rigid tapping mode
X_C_(Z_C_);
:
G80;
- Notes on the lathe system

NOTE
1 In feed per minute mode, F_/S**** determines a thread lead. In feed per rotation
mode, F_ specifies a thread lead.
2 S**** must specify a value that does not exceed the value set in the maximum
spindle speed parameters Nos. 5241 to 5244 for the gear to be used. Otherwise,
an alarm PS0200, “ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND” is issued in a block containing
G84 (G88).
3 F_ must specify a value that does not exceed the maximum cutting feedrate.
When 0 is specified, an alarm PS0201, “FEEDRATE NOT FOUND IN RIGID
TAP” is issued.
4 Between M29 and G84 (G88), S and a command for movement along an axis
must not be specified. Further, M29 must not be specified in a tapping cycle.
Otherwise, alarms PS0203, “PROGRAM MISS AT RIGID TAPPING” and
PS0204, “ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION” are issued, respectively.
5 In the rigid tapping mode, G84 and G88 must not be specified in succession.
Cancel the rigid tapping mode before specifying G84 and G88 in succession.
- 1541 -
G84, G88 (Tapping cycle)

G84 (G88) (G98 mode) G84 (G88) (G99 mode)

Mα Mα
Initial point Initial point

Motion 1 Motion 1
Motion 2 Motion 6 Motion 2
Spindle CW Spindle CW
Spindle stop, Mβ, P2 Spindle stop, Mβ, P2
R point R point
Motion 3 Motion 5 Motion 3 Motion 5
Z(X) point Z(X) point

P1 P1
Motion 4 Spindle CCW Motion 4 Spindle CCW
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
P1 Dwell specified by address P in the program
P2 Dwell set by parameter No. 5111 (not performed in the FS15 format)
Mα Output of an M code for C-axis clamping

Mβ Output of an M code for C-axis unclamping (β=α+1) (not performed in the FS15 format)
Supplement: P1, Mα, Mβ, and P2, when not specified, are not executed and output.
CAUTION
For cutting feed along the Z(X)-axis and override in extraction, see Subsection
"Override".
NOTE
G code system A does not include G98 (return to initial level) and G99 (return to
R point level). Return to the initial level is always used.
11.13.13 Position Control Loop Gain Parameter Switching

In rigid tapping, the position control loop gain of the drilling axis must match that of the spindle.
Specifically, change the position control loop gain of the drilling axis at the following timings:
(1) A change from a position control loop gain for normal operation to a position control loop gain for
rigid tapping must be made when the cutting along the drilling axis is started (when operation 3 is
started).
(2) A change from a position control loop gain for rigid tapping to a position control loop gain for
normal operation must be made when the operation after the completion of extraction along the
drilling axis is started (when operation 6 is started).
- 1542 -
While a position control loop gain for rigid tapping is selected, the parameters dedicated to rigid tapping
are used for the following parameters for the drilling axis:
(1) In-position width
(Parameters Nos.5300, 5302, 5304, and 5306)
(2) Position deviation limit during stop
(3) Position deviation limit during travel
The above parameters dedicated to rigid tapping are usually used to specify the in-position width at the R
point for operation 2. However, an ordinary parameter No. 1826 can be selected by using bit 4 (IRR) of
parameter No. 5202.
NOTE
If bit 5 (NCI) of parameter No. 1601 is set to 1, no in-position check is made at
the R point for operation 2 except when bit 1 (RIP) of parameter No. 5209 is set
to 1.
1) As in-position width parameters:
Ordinary parameters are used.
Parameters for rigid tapping are used.

Initial point
Motion 1 2) As parameters for position deviation limits during stop:
Motion 2 Motion 6 Parameters for rigid tapping are used.
3) As parameters for position deviation limits during travel:

R point Parameters for rigid tapping are used.
Motion 3 Motion 5
Rapid traverse
Z axis feed
P Dwell
Z point
P
Motion 4
11.13.14 Signal
11.13.14.1 Signals for the rigid tapping function

Rigid tapping signal RGTAP<Gn061.0>
[Function] When M29 (miscellaneous function for preparation for rigid tapping) is specified, the
PMC enters rigid tapping mode, then turns on this signal to notify the CNC.
1 : The PMC enters in rigid tapping mode.
0 : The PMC does not enter rigid tapping mode.
For an explanation of placing the PMC in rigid tapping mode, see the description of the
interface with the PMC, given later.
- 1543 -
This signal posts whether the PMC has entered rigid tapping mode. If this signal is not set
to 1, even when M29 is specified, a P/S alarm is issued in a G84/G74(machining center
system) or G84/G88(lathe system) block.
Spindle rotation direction signals RGSPM,RGSPP<Fn065.1,0>

[Function] During rigid tapping, these signals notify the PMC of whether the spindle is rotating in
the forward or reverse direction.
→ During rigid tapping, the spindle is:
RGSPP 1 : Rotating in the forward direction (CW).
0 : Not rotating in the forward direction (CW).
RGSPM 1 : Rotating in the reverse direction (CCW).
0 : Not rotating in the reverse direction (CCW).
[Output cond.] These signals are output when the spindle is rotating in rigid tapping mode. This means
that, even in rigid tapping mode, these signals are not output, for example, when the
spindle is being positioned to a hole position, or a dwell operation is in progress at the
bottom of a hole or at an R point.
These signals are not output in the feed hold state or single block stop state. When the
spindle is placed in the interlock stop state, machine lock state, or Z-axis ignore state,
however, the spindle is not regarded as having stopped; these signals are output.
These signals are valid only in rigid tapping mode. In normal spindle control, these
signals are not output; both RGSPP and RGSPM are set to 0.
Rigid tapping in-progress signal RTAP<Fn076.3>

[Function] This signal notifies the PMC that rigid tapping mode is active.
RTAP 1 : Rigid tapping mode is currently active.
0 : Rigid tapping mode is not currently active.
By latching M29, the PMC knows that rigid tapping mode has been specified, and thus
performs the required processing on the PMC side. This signal can substitute for the
latching of M29. Even in this case, however, FIN for M29 cannot be omitted.
11.13.14.2 Signals related to S code output

[Function] These signals post whether the spindle output is 0. In rigid tapping mode, these signals
are used to cancel rigid tapping in a PMC sequence associated with rigid tapping. For
details, see the explanation of the interface with the PMC, given later.
Spindle-speed function code signals (binary output) S00 to S31<Fn022 to Fn025>

Spindle-speed function strobe signals SF<Fn007.2>
[Function] These signals send S codes specified for the CNC, in binary format, to the PMC.
[Output cond.] When an S code is specified, the specified value is output, in binary format, with these
signals. When the new spindle speed data is fully set, the SF signal is set to 1.
Before rigid tapping can be performed, however, parameter setting is required to output
these signals, as described below.
Machining center system :
SF output depends on the gear selection method, as described below.
[1] M-type gear selection method
SF output depends on bit 6 (SFA) of parameter No. 3705.
- 1544 -
[2] T-type gear selection method
SF output depends on the setting of bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No. 3705.
Lathe system :
The following parameter needs to be set to output S codes and SF:
Bit 4 (EVS) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1
In rigid tapping, when SF is to be used by the PMC to read an S code output signal for
gear switching or output switching, set the above parameters as required.
NOTE
1 The timing charts, given later, give examples of gear switching by
setting the parameters as follows:
Machining center system : SFA=0,NSF=0
Lathe system : EVS=1
2 When the constant surface speed control function is being used, an
S code (specifying a surface speed) used for constant surface
control (G96) is output. Such an S code can be distinguished from
an S code used for specifying a rotation speed. One method is to
use, for example, the constant surface speed control in-progress
signal <F002.2> for the processing performed on the PMC side.
Another method is to mask the S code and SF signal, output by
setting bit 0 (ESF) of parameter No. 3705.
11.13.14.3 Signals related to gear switching

Gear selection signals (output) GR3O,GR2O,GR1O<Fn034.2,1,0>
M
[Operation] When M-type gear selection is being used, these signals are used in a PMC sequence for
rigid tapping.
The signals post, to the PMC, information about a spindle gear to be used, according to
the value of S_ specified at the execution of G84 (G74).
When gear switching becomes necessary, the states of the signals change together with
the SF signal.
The PMC should perform gear switching according to the information posted by the gear
selection signals.
Reference information:
The table below indicates the relationship between the output signals and gear
selection.
GR3O GR2O GR1O

1st (low) speed gear 0 0 1
2nd (medium) speed gear 0 1 0
3rd (high) speed gear 1 0 0
Gear selection signals (input) GR2,GR1<Gn028.2,1>

[Operation] When T-type gear selection is being used, these signals are used in a PMC sequence for
rigid tapping.
The signals post, to the CNC, information about a spindle gear to be used.
- 1545 -
The table below shows the relationship between the output signals and spindle gear
selection.
GR1 GR2
1st (low) speed gear 0 0
2nd (medium) speed gear 1 0
3rd (high) speed gear 0 1
4th (high) speed gear 1 1
The serial spindle clutch/gear selection signals <G070.3,2> must be set in addition to the
setting of the gear selection signal described above.
NOTE
In machining center system rigid tapping, the specification of the
4th (high) speed gear is invalid. If specified, the system assumes
that the 3rd (high) speed gear has been specified.
11.13.14.4 Signals related to the addition of multi-spindle control

Spindle enable signals ENB<Fn001.4>,ENB2,ENB3<Fn038.2,3>,ENB4<Fn039.1>
[Function] These signals post whether the spindle output to each spindle is 0 in multi-spindle control.
In rigid tapping mode, these signals are used to cancel rigid tapping in a PMC sequence
associated with rigid tapping.
For details, see the explanation of the interface with the PMC, given later.
Gear selection signals (input)

GR2,GR1<Gn028.2,1>,GR22,GR21<Gn029.1,0>,GR32,GR31<Gn029.3,2>,
GR42,GR41<Gn031.5,4>
[Operation] When the T-type gear selection method is employed in multi-spindle control, these
signals are used with a PMC sequence for rigid tapping.
The signals post, to the CNC, information about a spindle gear to be used.
The table below shows the relationship between the output signals and spindle gear
selection.
GRs1 GRs2
1st (low) speed gear 0 0
2nd (medium) speed gear 1 0
3rd (high) speed gear 0 1
4th (high) speed gear 1 1
(s is -, 2, 3, or 4.)
The serial spindle clutch/gear selection signals (G070.3,2 for the first spindle, G074.3,2
for the second spindle, G204.3,2 for the third spindle, and G266.3,2 for the fourth
spindle) must be set in addition to the setting of the gear selection signal described above.
NOTE
In machining center system rigid tapping, the specification of the
4th (high) speed gear is invalid. If specified, the system assumes
that the 3rd (high) speed gear has been specified.
- 1546 -
Spindle selection signals

SWS1<Gn027.0>,SWS2<Gn027.1>,SWS3<Gn027.2>,SWS4<Gn026.3>
Rigid tapping spindle selection signals
RGTSP1<Gn061.4>,RGTSP2<Gn061.5>RGTSP3<Gn061.6>,RGTSP4<Gn061.7>
T

[Operation] SWS1 to SWS4 are used to transfer spindle commands when the multi-spindle control
option is used. In rigid tapping, the signals can be shared to select a spindle to be used for
rigid tapping. (The signals can be used for this purpose when bit 7 (SRS) of parameter No.
5200 is set to 0.)
RGTSP1, RGTSP2, RGTSP3, and RGTSP4 are used to select a spindle used for rigid
tapping, independently of the SWS1 to SWS4 signals, when the multi-spindle control
option is being used. (The signals can be used when bit 7 (SRS) of parameter No. 5200 is
set to 1. These signals are supported only by the lathe system.)
See the tables below for details of the settings of these signals.
When bit 7 (SRS) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 0, to select a spindle to be used for rigid
tapping, set the signals as indicated below.
Signal state
Spindle used for rigid tapping
SWS1 SWS2 SWS3 SWS4
First spindle 1 0 0 0
Second spindle 0 1 0 0
Third spindle 0 0 1 0
Fourth spindle 0 0 0 1
Alarm PS0205 is issued. 0 0 0 0
When bit 7 (SRS) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 1, to select a spindle to be used for rigid
tapping, set the signals as indicated below.
Signal state
Spindle used for rigid tapping
RGTSP1 RGTSP2 RGTSP3 RGTSP4
First spindle 1 0 0 0
Second spindle 0 1 0 0
Third spindle 0 0 1 0
Fourth spindle 0 0 0 1
Alarm PS0205 is issued. 0 0 0 0
NOTE
1 These signals must be applied before the command for rigid
tapping (M29 S....; G84 X...) is specified. The states of these
signals must not be changed before rigid tapping has been
completed.
2 When multiple signals from SWS1 to SWS4 are set to 1
simultaneously, the signals are checked in the order from SWS1 to
SWS2 to SWS3 to SWS4, and the spindle corresponding to the
signal that is first found to be set to 1 is assumed to be specified.
3 Similarly, when multiple signals from RGTSP1 to RGTSP4 are set
to 1 simultaneously, the signals are checked in the order from
RGTSP1 to RGTSP2 to RGTSP3 to RGTSP4, and the spindle
corresponding to the signal that is first found to be set to 1 is
assumed to be specified.
- 1547 -
Spindle-by-spindle stop
signals*SSTP1<Gn027.3>,*SSTP2<Gn027.4>,*SSTP3<Gn027.5>,
*SSTP4<Gn026.6>
[Operation] These signals are used to stop each spindle when the multi-spindle control option is used.
In a PMC sequence for rigid tapping, the ENB and ENB2 signals are used. Accordingly,
the logic of the signals used for a spindle selected to perform rigid tapping must match
the logic of the spindle stop signal *SSTP.
*SSTP1 1 : The output to the first spindle is not forced to 0 min-1.
0 : 0 min-1 is commanded to first spindle.
*SSTP2 1 : The output to the second spindle is not forced to 0 min-1.
0 : 0 min-1 is commanded to second spindle.
*SSTP3 1 : The output to the third spindle is not forced to 0 min-1.
0 : 0 min-1 is commanded to third spindle.
*SSTP4 1 : The output to the fourth spindle is not forced to 0 min-1.
0 : 0 min-1 is commanded to fourth spindle.
Position coder selection signal

PC2SLC<Gn028.7>,PC3SLC<Gn026.0>,PC4SLC<Gn026.1>
[Operation] This signal is used to select the position coder when the multi-spindle control option is
being used. Note, however, that it cannot be used with a spindle selected to perform rigid
tapping.
For rigid tapping, this signal is not used. Instead, a position loop is constructed by
combining the first spindle with the first position coder, by combining the second spindle
with the second position coder, by combining the third spindle with the third position
coder, or by combining the fourth spindle with the fourth position coder.
However, the display of the actual speed is switched by this signal, even during rigid
tapping.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn026 *SSTP4 SWS4 PC4SLC PC3SLC
Gn027 *SSPT3 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS3 SWS2 SWS1
Gn028 PC2SLC GR2 GR1
Gn029 *SSTP GR32 GR31 GR22 GR21
Gn031 GR42 GR41
Gn061 RGTSP4 RGTSP3 RGTSP2 RGTSP1 RGTAP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn001 ENB
Fn007 SF
Fn022 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00
- 1548 -
Fn023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08
Fn024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16
Fn025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24
Fn038 ENB3 ENB2
Fn039 ENB4
Fn065 RGSPM RGSPP
Fn076 RTAP
11.13.14.5 Notes on interface with the PMC

The following describes some notes in designing the interface with the PMC.
- Rigid tapping mode management and ENB (ENB2,ENB3,ENB4)
The PMC must manage rigid tapping mode as follows: rigid tapping mode is set using M29, and is
canceled upon the issue of a reset or at the falling edge of the spindle enable signal ENB in rigid tapping
mode. ENB is used during rigid tapping in this way, so the spindle stop signal *SSTP must not be set to
0.
However, the spindle orientation function (*SSTP and SOR) may be used for gear switching. To do so,
ensure that the PMC does not cancel rigid tapping mode on a falling edge of ENB while *SSTP is 0.
Rigid tapping mode may be set on a rising edge of the RTAP signal instead of by using M29, and
canceled on a falling edge of the RTAP signal instead of the ENB signal. In rigid tapping under multi
-spindle control, use the spindle enable signal ENBs for the spindle engaged in rigid tapping to exercise
control.
- Controlling spindle output by the PMC
When the SIND signal is set to 1, spindle output is controlled by the signals (SSIN, SGN, R1I to R12I)
output from the PMC.
At this time, the effect of ENB is as described above. In addition, when rigid tapping mode is canceled in
a block containing G80;, the momentary rotation of the spindle, caused by a delay in the PMC processing,
can result. Accordingly, the PMC's control over spindle output must be disabled in rigid tapping mode by
setting SIND to 0.
In rigid tapping under multi-spindle control, ensure, for a similar reason, that in the rigid tapping mode,
PMC-based control is disabled (SINDs = 0) for the spindle used for rigid tapping.
- T-type gear selection method
When T-type gear selection is used, the PMC must determine whether gear switching is to be performed,
and subsequently perform gear switching as required. For this purpose, each time a spindle-speed
function code is specified, the spindle-speed function code read signal (SF) and spindle-speed function
code signals (S00 to S31) must be output to the PMC. The required parameter settings are described
below.
- Machining center system :
Set bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No. 3705 to 0 to output SF.
- Lathe system :
Set bit 4 (EVS) of parameter No. 3705 to 1 to output SF.
- Gear switching timing
In general, a block containing M29 (miscellaneous function for preparation for rigid tapping) specifies S_,
S_ being output when a block containing G84/G74 (machining center system) or G84/G88 (lathe system)
is executed. This means that gear switching is performed in the block specifying G84 (G74).
- 1549 -
- When rigid tapping mode is specified

M29 (miscellaneous function for preparation for rigid tapping) and S_ specify rigid tapping mode. When
M29 is accepted by the PMC, the following processing must be performed:
- Stop the spindle when it is rotating.
- Check that the spindle has stopped completely, then set the rigid tapping signal RGTAP <G061.0>
to on.
- Activate the spindle motor. Activate the motor so that a positive speed command rotates the spindle
in the forward direction (CCW when viewed from the - side of the tapping axis).
- Return FIN at least 250 ms after activation.
NOTE
The condition "at least 250 ms after activation" results from there being no way
of checking the completion of spindle motor activation. Therefore, this wait
period serves as an alternative. The time required for activation to be completed
varies with the spindle motor and amplifier. Therefore, this value of 250 ms is
given as a guideline only.
In an M29 block, S_ is not executed, merely being read in. Spindle output is equivalent to the
specification of S0. S_ is executed in a G84/G74 (machining center system) or G84/G88 (lathe system
block.) The timing chart is shown in the chart indicating the execution of G84/G74 or G84/G88.
- Execution of G84/G74 (machining center system) or G84/G88 (lathe system

block)
When M29S_; is specified, S_ is read in, spindle output being equivalent to the specification of S0;. S_ is
output when G84/G74 (machining center system) or G84/G88 (lathe system block) is executed. Thus, the
processing described below is performed.
- When M-type gear selection is used

When using a machine that features multiple gear stages for use with the spindle motor and spindle, and
the newly programmed S_ is outside the previously selected gear range, the spindle-speed function strobe
signal SF <F007.2> and gear selection signals (output) GR3O, GR2O, GR1O <F034.2, 1, 0> are output to
the PMC.
At this time, perform gear switching at the PMC.
- When T-type gear selection is used

The spindle-speed function strobe signal SF <F007.2> and spindle-speed function code signals S00 to
S31 <F022 to F025> are output to the PMC. (However, parameter setting is required to enable output of
the S codes and SF signal. See the description of each bit of parameter No. 3705.)
At this time, the PMC must determine whether gear switching is to be performed, and perform gear
switching as required. The selected gear must be reflected in the gear selection signals (input) GR2 and
GR1 <G028.2, 1> for notification to the CNC.
From GR2 and GR1, the CNC determines which gear is selected.
However, note the difference between the machining center system and lathe system, as described below.
- Machining center system :
Up to three gear stages are supported. If the fourth gear stage is selected, it is assumed that the third
gear stage is selected.
- Lathe system :
Up to four gear stages are supported.
(A gear selection is posted to the CNC with the gear selection signal for each spindle.)
- 1550 -
- C-axis clamp/unclamp
T
When an M code for C-axis clamping is specified in a block specifying G84/G88, the M codes for C-axis
clamping/unclamping are output at the following timings:
- The M code for clamping is output at the time of rapid traverse to the R point level (operation 2).
When FIN is returned, tapping (operation 3) starts.
- After extraction from the hole bottom to the R point level (operation 5), the M code for unclamping
is output. When FIN is returned, dwell or rapid traverse to the initial level (operation 6) starts.
The rigid tapping mode can be specified in three different methods. One method specifies M29 before
G84. The second method specifies M29 and G84 in the same block. The third method uses G84 as a rigid
tapping G code. In any method, however, PMC processing is the same. (In any case, the M29 code is
output.)
- 1551 -
11.13.15 Timing Charts for Rigid Tapping Specification

The timing chart for rigid tapping specification depends on the method used to specify rigid tapping mode,
the gear selection method (M-type or T-type), and whether to perform gear switching.
From the table, find the appropriate timing chart and apply the information it contains as necessary.
M
Specification method
Gear selection method
Gear M29 and G84/G74 By parameter setting,
M-type M29 is specified
switching are specified in the G84/G74 is specified as a G
T-type before G84/G74.
same block. code for rigid tapping.
Not performed Fig. 11.13.15 (a) Fig. 11.13.15 (e) Fig. 11.13.15 (i)
M-type
Performed Fig. 11.13.15 (b) Fig. 11.13.15 (f) Fig. 11.13.15 (j)
Not performed Fig. 11.13.15 (c) Fig. 11.13.15 (g) Fig. 11.13.15 (k)
T-type
Performed Fig. 11.13.15 (d) Fig. 11.13.15 (h) Fig. 11.13.15 (l)
T
Specification method
Gear switching M29 is specified M29 and G84/G88 are By parameter setting, G84/G88 is
before G84/G88. specified in the same block. specified as a G code for rigid tapping.
Not performed Fig. 11.13.15 (m) Fig. 11.13.15 (o) Fig. 11.13.15 (q)
Performed Fig. 11.13.15 (n) Fig. 11.13.15 (p) Fig. 11.13.15 (r)
NOTE
For more information about the M/T type gear selection method, see Section
"SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL." Note the following:
Machining center system :
When constant surface speed control is not being used and bit 4 (GTT) of
parameter No. 3706 is set to 0. → M-type
When constant surface speed control is being used, or bit 4 (GTT) of
parameter No. 3706 is set to 1. → T-type
Lathe system : T-type only
- 1552 -
11.13.15.1 When M29 is specified before G84/G74

M29
RTAP
Motion 1 Motion 2
G84/G74
ENB
To be masked to the motion 2
Spindle output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more*
FIN
Rotation
Excitation SFR
Position
loop
Fig. 11.13.15 (a) Gear is not changed
NOTE
The delay(*) is not necessary, when an appropriate value is set to the parameter
No.4099 for the delay time for stable motor excitation.
- 1553 -
M29
RTAP
Motion 1 Motion 2
G84/G74
ENB
Spindle output *Gear

change
motion
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more*
FIN
Rotation
Gear change
Excitation SFR
Position
loop
Fig. 11.13.15 (b) When gear change is performed (from low to middle gear)
NOTE
1 This time chart show an example where the gear has shifted from low to middle
gear. One of the gear select signals (GR1O, GR2O, GR3O) has turned from 1 to
0, and one of the two remaining signals has turned from 0 to 1. This changes the
gear.
2 The delay(*) is not necessary, when an appropriate value is set to the parameter
- 1554 -
M29
RTAP
Motion 1 Motion 2
G84/G74
ENB
Spindle output
SF
S code output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP
250ms
or more*
FIN
Rotation
Excitation SFR
Position
loop
Fig. 11.13.15 (c) Gear change is not performed
NOTE
- 1555 -
M29
RTAP
Motion 1 Motion 2
G84/G74
ENB
Spindle output *Gear

change
motion
SF
S code output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more*
FIN
Rotation
Gear change
Excitation SFR
Position
loop
Fig. 11.13.15 (d) When gear-change is performed (low to middle gear)

NOTE
1 This time chart shows an example where the gear has changed from low to
middle gear. The PMC selects a required gear through an S code output and
selects the gear using the GR1 and GR2 signals to inform CNC of the selected
gear.
- 1556 -
11.13.15.2 M29 and G84/G74 are specified in the same block

- M type gear selection
M29
RTAP
Motion 1 Motion 2
G84/G74
ENB
Spindle output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more*
FIN
Rotation
Excitation SFR
Position
loop
Fig. 11.13.15 (e) When gear-change is not performed
NOTE
- 1557 -
M29
RTAP
Motion 1 Motion 2
G84/G74
ENB
Spindle output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more*
FIN
Rotation
Gear change
Excitation SFR
Position
loop
Fig. 11.13.15 (f) When gear-change is performed (middle to high gear)
NOTE
1 This time chart shows an example where the gear has shifted from middle to
high gear. One of the gear select signals (GR1O, GR2O, GR3O) has turned
from 1 to 0, and one of the two remaining signals has tuned from 0 to 1. This
changes the gear.
- 1558 -
M29
RTAP
Motion 1 Motion 2
G84/G74
ENB
Spindle output
SF
S code output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more*
FIN
Rotation
Excitation SFR
Position
loop
Fig. 11.13.15 (g) When gear change is not performed
NOTE
- 1559 -
M29
RTAP
Motion 1 Motion 2
G84/G74
ENB
Spindle output
SF
S code output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more*
FIN
Rotation
Gear change
Excitation SFR
Position
loop
Fig. 11.13.15 (h) When gear-change is performed (middle to high gear)
NOTE
1 This time chart shows an example where the gear has changed from middle to high
gear. The PMC selects a required gear through an S code output and selects the
gear using the GR1 and GR2 signals to inform CNC of the selected gear.
- 1560 -
11.13.15.3 Specifying G84/G74 for rigid tapping by parameters

- M type gear selection
M29
RTAP
Motion 1 Motion 2
G84/G74 M29 is commanded

internally.
ENB
Spindle output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more*
FIN
Rotation
Excitaiton SFR
Position
loop
Fig. 11.13.15 (i) When gear-change is not performed
NOTE
- 1561 -
M29
RTAP
Motion 1 Motion 2
G84/G74
ENB
To be masked to motion 2
Spindle output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more*
FIN
Rotation
Gear change
Excitation
Position
loop
Fig. 11.13.15 (j) When gear change is performed (high to low gear)
NOTE
1 This time chart shows an example where the gear has shifted from high to low
gear. One of the gear select signals (GR1O, GR2O, GR3O) has turned from 1 to
0, and one of the two remaining signals has turned from 0 to 1. This changes the
gear.
- 1562 -
M29
RTAP
Motiion 1 Motion 2

internally.
ENB
Spindle output
SF
S code output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more*
FIN
Rotation
Excitation SFR
Position
loop
Fig. 11.13.15 (k) When gear change is not performed
NOTE
- 1563 -
M29
RTAP
Motion 1 Motion 2

internally.
ENB
Spindle output
SF
S code output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more*
FIN
Rotation
Gear change
Excitation SFR
Position
loop
Fig. 11.13.15 (l) When gear-change is performed (high to low gear)
NOTE
1 This time chart shows an example where the gear has changed from high to low
gear. The PMC selects a required gear through an S code output and inputs the
selected gear using the GR1 and GR2 signals to inform CNC of the selected gear.
- 1564 -
11.13.15.4 When M29 is specified before G84/G88
M29 G84/G88
NC command
Motion 1 Motion 2
Motion of servo
axis
RTAP
S code output
SF
M29 C axis clamp

M code output
MF 250ms
or more*
FIN
*SSTP
SOR
GR1/GR2
SFR=0 SFR=1
SRV=0 SRV=0
SFR/SRV
RGTAP
ENB
To be masked to the
motion 2
Spindle output
Spindle rotation
Spindle stop
Position loop
Fig. 11.13.15 (m) When gear change is not performed
NOTE
- 1565 -
M29 G84/G88
NC command
Motion Motion 2
Motion of servo
axis
RTAP
S code output
SF
M29 C axis clamp

M code output
MF 250ms
or more*
FIN
*SSTP
SOR
Gear select
GR1/GR2
SFR=0 SFR=1
SRV=0 SRV=0
SFR/SRV
RGTAP
ENB
Spindle output
Spindle rotation
Spindle stop Gear change
Position
loop
Fig. 11.13.15 (n) When gear change is performed
NOTE
- 1566 -
11.13.15.5 M29 and G84/G88 are specified in the same block
G84/G88 M29
NC command
Motion 1 Motion 2
Motion of servo
axis
RTAP
S code output
SF
M29
M code output
MF
250ms
or more*
FIN
*SSTP
SOR
GR1/GR2
SFR=0 SFR=1
SRV=0 SRV=0
SFR/SRV
RGTAP
ENB
Spindle output
Spindle rotation
Spindle stop
Position loop
Fig. 11.13.15 (o) When gear-change is not performed
NOTE
- 1567 -
G84/G88 M29
NC command
Motion 1 Motion 2
Motion of servo
axis
RTAP
S code output
SF
M29
M code output
MF 250ms
or more*
FIN
*SSTP
SOR
Gear select
GR1/GR2
SFR=0 SFR=1
SRV=0 SRV=0
SFR/SRV
RGTAP
ENB
Spindle output
Spindle rotation
Position loop
Fig. 11.13.15 (p) When gear-change is performed
NOTE
- 1568 -
11.13.15.6 Specifying G84/G88 for rigid tapping by parameters
G84/G88
NC command
Motion 1 Motion 2
Motion of servo
axis
RTAP
S code output
SF
M29 is commanded
internally. C axis clamp
M code output
MF 250ms
or more*
FIN
*SS TP
SOR
GR1/GR2
SFR=0 SFR=1
SRV=0 SRV=0
SFR/SRV
RG TAP
ENB
Spindle output
Spindle rotation
Spindle stop
Position loop
Fig. 11.13.15 (q) When gear-change is not performed
NOTE
- 1569 -
G84/G88
NC command
Motion 1 Motion 2
Motion of servo
axis
RTAP
S code output
SF
M29 is commanded
internally. C axis clamp
M code output
MF
250ms
or more*
FIN
*SSTP
SOR
Gear select
GR1/GR2
SFR=0 SFR=1
SRV=0 SRV=0
SFR/SRV
RGTAP
ENB
Spindle output
Spindle rotation
Position
loop
Fig. 11.13.15 (r) When gear-change is performed
NOTE
- 1570 -
11.13.15.7 Timing of the M code for unclamping

T
After extraction from the hole bottom to the R point level (operation 5), the M code for unclamping is
output. When FIN is returned, dwell or rapid traverse to the initial level (operation 6) starts.
Motion 5 Dwell or motion 6
Motion
C axis unclamp
M code output
MF
FIN
11.13.15.8 Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode

When rigid tapping is completed, the mode is canceled if a G code (such as G80, canned cycle G code, or
Group 01 G code) is issued.
Spindle output has the effect of execution of S0. On the falling edge of the ENB signal (corresponding
ENBs signal in multi-spindle control), cancel the rigid tapping mode of the PMC (for example, by turning
off spindle activation) and set the rigid tapping signal to 0. After confirming that the rigid tapping signal
is set to 0, proceed to the next block.
When gear change is performed using *SSTP and SOR, the ENB signal can be either 1 or 0. Do not
cancel the PMC's rigid tapping mode at the falling edge of the ENB signal under these circumstances. The
position loop is also canceled.
When the CNC is reset, the PMC's rigid tapping mode must be canceled.
When bit 2 (CRG) of parameter No. 5200 is 1, the system goes directly to the next block without
checking that the rigid tapping signal is 0. Set CRG to 1 for systems in which the rigid tapping signal is
always 1.
G80
NC command or G code of group 01
Servo axis Operation specified by cancellation

operation block
RTAP
SFR=0
SFR/SRV SRV=0
RGTAP
ENBs
Spindle output
Position loop
- 1571 -
CAUTION
1 If rigid tapping mode is canceled by a Group 01 G code, such as G00 or G01,
the block containing the G code is executed at the same time the ENB signal is
turned to 0. Therefore, if the block contains an M code for controlling the spindle,
an error may occur during processing in the PMC.
2 When bit 2 (CRG) of parameter No. 5200 is 1, if the next block contains an M
code for controlling the spindle, an error may occur during processing in the
PMC, when:
- Rigid tapping mode is canceled by issuing G80
- Rigid tapping mode is canceled by issuing a Group 01 G code , such as G00
or G01
NOTE
Rigid tapping mode is canceled as described above regardless of the gear
selection method of M-type or T-type.
- 1572 -
11.13.16 FSSB High-speed Rigid Tapping

Outline
By the FSSB communication between a CNC and a spindle amplifier, rotational position information of a
spindle can be transmitted from a spindle amplifier to a servo control on CNC. The FSSB high-speed
rigid tapping is a new function that a servo axis follows a spindle axis by utilizing this FSSB
communication. And it is a characteristic of this function that the synchronization error becomes better
than the ordinary function. And a synchronous error does not become worse even if a spindle error
becomes worse by setting a shorter time constant for acceleration/deceleration than that of the former
rigid tapping function. Therefore the machining cycle time can be shortened with keeping the
synchronous accuracy.
In the following rigid tapping, this function cannot be used.

- The rigid tapping by the analog spindle or the spindle control with servo motor.
- The rigid tapping with one servo motor and multiple spindle motors by spindle command
Explanation
Ex.1) FSSB high-speed rigid tapping with Z axis and S1 spindle axis in the one path system
[Example of connection of FSSB]
Spindle amplifier Spindle motor: S1
CNC FSSB Connector

COP10A Servo amplifier Servo motor: X
Servo motor: Y
Servo amplifier Servo motor: Z
Servo amplifier Servo motor: A
[Example of parameter setting]

When the parameter FHR (Bit 0 of No.24203) is set to 1, FSSB high-speed rigid tapping is
enabled.
And, the index number of the spindle axis that synchronizes with the servo axis used by FSSB
high-speed rigid tapping is set to the parameter (No.24204) as follows.
24204 SP INDEX OF SV FSSB SYNC

X 0
Y 0
Z 1
A 0
In addition, set 1 to the parameters FHRSV (bit 1 of No.2429) and FEED (bit1 of No.2005) of
Z axis and the parameter FHRSP (bit1 of No.4549) of S1 spindle axis.
- 1573 -
Ex.2) Two groups of FSSB high-speed rigid tapping with Z1 - S1 and Z2 - S2 in two paths system
CNC FSSB Connector

Servo amplifier Servo motor: X1
COP10A
Servo motor: Y1
Servo amplifier Servo motor: Z1
Servo amplifier Servo motor: X2
Servo amplifier Servo motor: Y2
Servo motor: Z2

When the parameter FHR (Bit 0 of No.24203) is set to 1, FSSB high-speed rigid tapping is
enabled.
And, the index number of the spindle axis that synchronizes with the servo axis used by FSSB
high-speed rigid tapping is set to the parameter (No.24204) as follows.
Path 1
X1 0
Y1 0
Z1 1
Path 2
X2 0
Y2 0
Z2 2
In addition, set 1 to the parameters FHRSV (bit 1 of No.2429) and FEED (bit1 of No.2005) of
Z1 and Z2 axes and the parameter FHRSP (bit1 of No.4549) of S1 and S2 spindle axes.
Four or less index numbers of the spindle axis can be set in all system. If five or more index
numbers of the spindle axis or illegal index number of the spindle axis is set , the alarm
(PW0037) "SV/SP COMBINATION ERROR" is issued.
- 1574 -
NOTE
1 Adjust precision and machining time by setting of the time constant for
acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping. In the ordinal rigid tapping, if the time
constant for acceleration/deceleration is extremely short, the spindle motor
cannot follow to the move command and the synchronization error of rigid
tapping increases because the torque command of the spindle motor is
saturated in the high speed rotation area. In the FSSB high-speed rigid tapping,
even if the setting of the time constant for acceleration/deceleration is short up
to the extent with which the torque command of the spindle motor is somewhat
saturated, the synchronization precision can be maintained because the servo
motor can follow to the rotation of the spindle motor. However, please set within
the range where the overshoot is occurs in the hole bottom.
Refer to the following manual for the details of the tuning way.
FANUC AC SPINDLE PARAMETER MANUAL (B-65280JA)
"Tuning way for FSSB High-speed Rigid Tapping"
2 When the parameter is changed, the power must be turned off before an
3 FSSB high-speed rigid tapping cannot be used with the rigid tapping by the
analog spindle or the spindle control with servo motor. If the above rigid tapping
is set, the alarm (PW0037) "SV/SP COMBINATION ERROR" is issued.
4 FSSB high-speed rigid tapping cannot be used with the rigid tapping with a
servo motor and multiple spindle motors by spindle command synchronous
control. If the rigid tapping is commanded on the above condition, the alarm
(PS0203) "PROGRAM MISS AT RIGID TAPPING" is issued.
5 When FSSB high-speed rigid tapping is used with 3-dimensional rigid tapping,
three axes of 3-dimensional rigid tapping need to set the same index number of
the spindle to the parameter (No.24204). If there is an axis whose index number
of the spindle axis is different, the alarm (PS0203) "PROGRAM MISS AT RIGID
TAPPING" is issued on the command of rigid tapping. In addition, three axes of
3-dimensional rigid tapping need to set the parameter FHRSV (Bit1 of No.2429)
and FEED (Bit 1 of No.2005).
6 When Peck rigid tapping cycle is used (the parameter PCP (bit 5 of No.5200) is
1), set 1 to the parameter PRA (bit 7 of No.5209). If the illegal program that the
depth of cut is smaller than the cutting start distance is commanded, the alarm
(PS5560) "ILLEGAL DEPTH OF CUT" can be issued.
7 The setting of the optional gear ratio cannot be used.
8 If the exchanged axes by flexible path axis assignment or composite control are
used by FSSB high-speed rigid tapping, the index number of the spindle axis
that synchronizes with each servo axis (the parameter (No.24204)) need to set.
In addition, set 1 to the parameter FHRSV (Bit1 of No.2429) and FEED (Bit 1 of
No.2005).
9 If the tapping axis of FSSB high-speed rigid tapping is the master axis of axis
synchronous control, the same index number of the spindle (the parameter
(No.24204)) need to be set to the slave axes. In FSSB high-speed rigid tapping,
synchronization establishment and synchronization error compensation cannot
be used.
- 1575 -
NOTE
10 If the tapping axis of FSSB high-speed rigid tapping is the master axis of tandem
control, it is not necessary to set the same index number of the spindle (the
parameter (No.24204)) to the slave axes.
11 With FSSB high-speed rigid tapping, Dual position feedback function cannot be
used:
If FSSB high-speed rigid tapping is used with either of the above functions, the
alarm (SV0417) "ILL DGTL SERVO PARAMETER" is issued.
12 With this function, spindle differential speed control cannot be used.
13 All of CNC, servo, and spindle software need to support this function. If even
one of the software doesn't support it, the ordinal rigid tapping is executed or the
excess error alarm is issued.
Limitation
Synchronous control (Synchronous/Composite control)
An axis of synchronous control cannot be used as a tapping axis for FSSB high-speed rigid tapping.
Angular axis control

An angular axis cannot be used as a tapping axis for rigid tapping.
Diagnosis Data
1612 The index number of the spindle axis that synchronizes with each servo axis
[Data Type] Byte axis
The index number of the spindle axis that can use direct communication between a
spindle amplifier and a servo amplifier on FSSB connection is displayed.
11.13.17 Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2005 FEED

#1 FEED Feed forward function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
1 Set 1 to the synchronizing servo axis with spindle axis on FSSB
high-speed rigid tapping.
In FSSB high-speed rigid tapping mode, the feed forward
coefficient becomes 100 percent.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2429 FHRSV

- 1576 -
#1 FHRSV Servo axis control of FSSB high-speed rigid tapping is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
Set 1 to the synchronizing servo axis of a spindle axis on FSSB
2610 Position control loop gain for the tapping axis in FSSB high-speed rigid tapping

The position control loop gain for the tapping axis (servo axis) in FSSB high-speed rigid
tapping can be set.
If the setting value of this parameter is 0, the position control loop gain is the same as the
position gain (parameters Nos.5280-5284) of conventional rigid tapping used by both of
servo axis and spindle axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3702 EMS


0: Used.
1: Not used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3703 SPR MPP MPM 2P2

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#0 2P2 When a multi-path system is used, inter-path spindle control allows:

path 1 and path 2.
two paths.
When the spindle that belongs to an arbitrary path is shared between arbitrary paths, set
bit 2 (MPM) of parameter No. 3703. (The meanings of signals used vary, so that ladder
program modifications need to be made.)
#2 MPM When a multi-path system is used, the configuration allowed by inter-path spindle
control:
0: Follows the setting of bit 0 (2P2) of parameter No. 3703.
1: Allows the sharing of the spindle that belongs to a path between arbitrary paths.
- 1577 -

using the signals (SWS1 to SWS4<G027.0 to 2, G026.3>) is:
0: Not made.
1: Made.
NOTE
time.
#4 SPR Rigid tapping with spindle of another path function is:

0: Not available.
1: Available.
The "rigid tapping with spindle of another path" function can be combined with the
address P-based spindle select function. This combination enables program commands (P
code) to be used to select a spindle in a path other than the command issuing path for
rigid tapping.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
EVS SGT ESF
3705
SFA NSF SGT ESF

3706 is set to 1:
For the M series:
control (G96) mode.
NOTE
series.
For the T series:
is set to 1.
For the M series:
parameter.
#3 SGT Gear switching method during tapping cycle (G84 and G74) is:
0: Method A (Same as the normal gear switching method)
1: Method B (Gears are switched during tapping cycle according to the spindle speed
set in parameters Nos. 3761 and 3762).
- 1578 -
S codes and SF are:
0: SF is output.
NOTE

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3706
GTT


0: Type M.
1: Type T.
NOTE
1 M type
signal is output.
T type
2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected, type T
is selected, regardless of whether this parameter is specified.
No.3705#2(SGB), No.3751, No.3752,
No.3705#1(GST), No.3705#3(SGT), No.3761, No.3762,
No.3705#6(SFA), No.3735, No.3736
- 1579 -
NOTE

3761
3762

When method B is selected as the gear change method in the tapping cycle (when bit 3
(SGT) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1), set the spindle speed at a change point of each
gear.
Spindle motor speed

(Parameter No.3736)

(Parameter No.3735)
Spindle speed
Gear 3 command
Gear 1 Gear 2
Max. speed (S command)
Max. speed Max. speed
Parameter Parameter Parameter
No.3741 No.3742 No.3743
Gear 1-2 Gear 2-3

change point change point
parameter parameter
No.3761 No.3762
- 1580 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4000 RETSV

#4 RETSV Reference position return direction in the servo mode (rigid tapping, etc.)
0: The spindle returns to the reference position counterclockwise (CCW).
1: The spindle returns to the reference position clockwise (CW).
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when a serial spindle is used.
4073 Grid shift amount in the servo mode

[Unit of data] 1 pulse (360°/4096)
Set this data when the reference position is to be shifted in the servo mode (rigid tapping,
etc.).
When plus data is specified, the reference position for the spindle is shifted CCW by the
set number of pulses.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when a serial spindle is used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4549 FHRSP

#1 FHRSP Spindle control of FSSB high-speed rigid tapping is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
Set 1 to the synchronizing spindle axis with the servo axis on FSSB
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5101 FXY

#0 FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle, or cutting axis in the grinding canned cycle
is:
0: Z-axis at all times.
1: Axis selected by the program
- 1581 -
NOTE
In the case of the lathe system, this parameter is valid only for the
drilling canned cycle in the Series 10/11 format.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SRS FHD PCP DOV SIG CRG G84
5200
FHD PCP DOV SIG CRG G84

#0 G84 Method for specifying rigid tapping:

0: An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is specified prior to the issue of the
G84 (or G74) command. (See parameter No. 5210).
1: An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is not used. (G84 cannot be used as a
G code for the tapping cycle; G74 cannot be used for the reverse tapping cycle.)
#2 CRG Rigid mode when a rigid mode cancel command is specified (G80, 01 group G code, reset,
etc.) :
0: Canceled after rigid tapping signal RGTAP is set to 0.
1: Canceled before rigid tapping signal RGTAP is set to 0.
#3 SIG When gears are changed for rigid tapping, the use of SINDs is:
0: Not permitted.
1: Permitted.
#4 DOV Override during extraction in rigid tapping:

0: Invalidated
1: Validated (The override value is set in parameter No. 5211. However, set an
override value for rigid tapping return in parameter No. 5381.)
#5 PCP Address Q is specified in a tapping cycle/Rigid tapping:

0: A high-speed peck tapping cycle is assumed.
1: A peck tapping cycle is assumed.
NOTE
In a tapping cycle, this parameter is valid when bit 6 (PCT) of
parameter No. 5104 is 1. When bit 6 (PCT) of parameter No.
5104 is 0, a (high-speed) peck tapping cycle is not assumed.
#6 FHD Feed hold and single block in rigid tapping:

0: Invalidated
1: Validated
#7 SRS To select a spindle used for rigid tapping in multi-spindle control:

0: The spindle selection signals SWS1, SWS2, SWS3, and SWS4 are used. (These
signals are used also for multi-spindle control.)
1: The rigid tapping spindle selection signals RGTSP1, RGTSP2, RGTSP3, and
RGTSP4 are used. (These signals are provided expressly for rigid tapping.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5201 OV3 OVU TDR

- 1582 -
#2 TDR Cutting time constant in rigid tapping:

0: Uses a same parameter during cutting and extraction (Parameters Nos. 5261 to 5264)
1: Not use a same parameter during cutting and extraction
Parameters Nos. 5261 to 5264: Time constant during cutting
Parameters Nos. 5271 to 5274: Time constant during extraction
#3 OVU The increment unit of the override parameter No. 5211 for tool rigid tapping extraction is:
0: 1%
1: 10%
#4 OV3 A spindle speed for extraction is programmed, so override for extraction operation is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5202 ORI

NOTE
#0 ORI When rigid tapping is started:

0: Spindle orientation is not performed.
1: Spindle orientation is performed.
This parameter can be used only for a serial spindle.
This spindle orientation performs reference position return in the serial spindle/servo
mode. The stop position can be changed using the serial spindle parameter No. 4073.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5203 RBL OVS RFF

#2 RFF In rigid tapping, feed forward is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (Recommended)
As the standard setting, set 1.

At the same time, set the parameter for the advanced preview feed forward coefficient for
the tapping axis and the parameter for the advance preview feed forward coefficient for
the spindle so that these values match.
• Advanced preview feed forward coefficient for the tapping axis: Parameter No. 2092
(or parameter No. 2144 if the cutting/rapid traverse feed forward function is enabled
(bit 4 of parameter No. 2214 is set to 1))
• Advanced preview feed forward coefficient for the spindle: Parameter No. 4344
- 1583 -
NOTE
This parameter is valid when a serial spindle is used.
#4 OVS In rigid tapping, override by the feedrate override select signal and cancellation of
override by the override cancel signal is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
this parameter.
#5 RBL As acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping cutting feed:

0: Linear acceleration/deceleration is used.
1: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is used.
NOTE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRA DWP RIP RTX
5209
PRA RIP

#0 RTX In rigid tapping in a lathe system, the tapping axis is:

0: Selected by selecting a plane.
1: Always assumed to be the Z-axis for G84 or the X-axis for G88.
NOTE
This parameter becomes invalid when bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No.
0001 is set to 1, and rigid tapping is specified using the Series
10/11 format.
#1 RIP When a movement from the initial point to point R is made, the in-position check is:
0: Dependent on the setting of bit 5 (NCI) of parameter No. 1601.
1: Performed.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 5 (NCI) of parameter No. 1601 is
set to 1 and bit 4 (IRR) of parameter No. 5202 is set to 0.
If bit 5 (NCI) of parameter No. 1601 is set to 0, the in-position
check is performed regardless of the setting of this parameter.
#2 DWP When a dwell (address P) command is not included in a block for lathe-system rigid
tapping:
0: Dwelling at the bottom of a hole is not performed.
1: The dwell (address P) command specified in the block for drilling is valid.
- 1584 -
NOTE
This parameter becomes invalid if rigid tapping is specified in the
Series 10/11 format with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No. 0001 set to
1.
#7 PRA On the peck rigid tapping, if the depth of cut (Q) is smaller than the cutting start distance
(d):
0: Alarm is not issued.
1: Alarm (PS5560) "ILLEGAL DEPTH OF CUT" is issued.
NOTE
1. When High-speed peck rigid tapping cycle is not used (the
parameter PCP (bit 5 of No.5200) is 1), this parameter is effective.
2. When FSSB high-speed rigid tapping is used, set 1 to this
parameter.
3. This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter (fixed
type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC recommendation
setting parameter" in this manual.
5210 Rigid tapping mode specification M code

This parameter sets an M code that specifies the rigid tapping mode.
The M code is judged to be 29 (M29) when 0 is set.
5211 Override value during rigid tapping extraction

[Unit of data] 1% or 10%
The parameter sets the override value during rigid tapping extraction.
NOTE
The override value is valid when bit 4 (DOV) of parameter No. 5200
is set to 1. When bit 3 (OVU) of parameter No. 5201 is set to 1, the
unit of set data is 10%. An override of up to 200% can be applied to
extraction.
5213 Return in peck rigid tapping cycle

[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the drilling axis
(B))
This parameter sets the escape value of a high-speed peck tapping cycle or the clearance
value of a peck tapping cycle.
- 1585 -
When the parameter PCP (bit 5 of No.5200) is When the parameter PCP (bit 5 of No.5200)
set to 0. is set to 1.
q : Depth of cut q : Depth of cut

d : Return value d : Clearance value
R point R point
q q
d d
q q
d d
q q
Z point Z point
NOTE
1 In a tapping cycle, this parameter is valid when bit 6 (PCT) of
parameter No. 5104 is 1.
2 For the diameter axis, set this parameter using the diameter value.
5214 Setting of an allowable rigid tapping synchronization error range

This parameter sets an allowable synchronization error range in rigid tapping.
If a synchronous error range exceeding the setting of this parameter is detected, the alarm
SP0741, “RIGID TAP ALARM : EXCESS ERROR” is issued. When 0 is set in this
parameter, no synchronization error check is made.
5221 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (first gear)
5222 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (second gear)
5223 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (third gear)
Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (fourth gear)
5224

Each of these parameters is used to set the number of gear teeth on the spindle side for
each gear in rigid tapping.
NOTE
When a position coder is attached to the spindle, set the same value
for all of parameters Nos. 5221 to 5224.
- 1586 -
5231 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (first gear)
5232 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (second gear)
5233 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (third gear)
Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (fourth gear)
5234

Each of these parameters is used to set the number of gear teeth on the position coder side
for each gear in rigid tapping.
NOTE
When a position coder is attached to the spindle, set the same value
for all of parameters Nos. 5231 to 5234.
5241 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (first gear)
5242 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (second gear)
5243 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (third gear)
Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (fourth gear)

5244

Spindle position coder gear ratio
1 : 1 0 to 7400
1 : 2 0 to 9999
1 : 4 0 to 9999
1 : 8 0 to 9999
Each of these parameters is used to set a maximum spindle speed for each gear in rigid
tapping.
Set the same value for both parameters Nos. 5241 and 5243 for a one-stage gear system.
For a two-stage gear system, set the same value as set in parameter No. 5242 in parameter
No. 5243. Otherwise, alarm PS0200, “ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND” will be issued.
This applies to the M series.
5261 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping for each gear (first gear)
5262 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping for each gear (second gear)
5263 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping for each gear (third gear)
Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping for each gear (fourth gear)
5264

[Unit of data] msec
- 1587 -
Each of these parameters is used to set a linear acceleration/ deceleration time constant
for the spindle of each gear and the tapping axis in rigid tapping.
Set the period required to reach each maximum spindle speed (parameters Nos. 5241 to
5244).
The set time constant, multiplied by the ratio of a specified S value to a maximum spindle
speed, is actually used as a time constant.
For bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration, set a time constant for a linear portion.
5271 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping extraction (first gear)
5272 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping extraction (second gear)
5273 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping extraction (third gear)
Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping extraction (fourth gear)

5274

[Unit of data] msec
Each of these parameters is used to set a linear acceleration/ deceleration time constant
for the spindle of each gear and tapping axis in extraction operation during rigid tapping.
For bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration, set a time constant for a linear portion.
NOTE
These parameters are enabled when the parameter TDR (bit 2 of
parameter No. 5201) is set to 1.
5280 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (common to gears)
5281 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (first gear)
5282 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (second gear)
5283 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (third gear)
Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (fourth gear)
5284

Each of these parameters is used to set a position control loop gain for the spindle and
tapping axis in rigid tapping. These parameters significantly affect the precision of
threading. Optimize these parameters as well as the loop gain multipliers by conducting a
cutting test.
NOTE
To use a varied loop gain on a gear-by-gear basis, set parameter
No. 5280 to 0, and set a loop gain for each gear in parameters
Nos. 5281 to 5284. The specification of a loop gain on a
gear-by-gear basis is disabled if parameter No. 5280 is set to a
value other than 0. In such a case, the value set in parameter No.
5280 is used as a loop gain that is common to all the gears.
- 1588 -
5291 Loop gain multiplier for the spindle in rigid tapping (first gear)
5292 Loop gain multiplier for the spindle in rigid tapping (second gear)
5293 Loop gain multiplier for the spindle in rigid tapping (third gear)
Loop gain multiplier for the spindle in rigid tapping (fourth gear)
5294

Each of these parameters is used to set a loop gain multiplier for the spindle in rigid
tapping each gear.
These parameters significantly affect the precision of threading. Optimize these
parameters as well as the loop gains by conducting a cutting test.
Loop gain multiplier GC is obtained from the following equation:
2048000 × 360 × PC × E
GC =
PLS × SP × L
E Specified voltage (V) for turning the spindle motor at 1000 min-1
L Angular displacement of the spindle (degrees) per spindle motor rotation
[Example] For the spindle motor and gear ratio given below, GC is calculated as follows:
2048000 × 360 × 1× 2.2
GC = = 1100
4096 × 1× 360
PLS = 4096 pulse/rev
SP = 1
PC = 1
E = 2.2 V
L = 360 deg
(Note) On the assumption that the spindle motor used turns at 4500 min-1 at 10 V, 2.2 V
is required to turn the spindle motor at 1000 min-1.
NOTE
These parameters are used for analog spindles.
5300 Tapping axis in-position width in rigid tapping (first spindle)
5302 Tapping axis in-position width in rigid tapping (second spindle)
5304 Tapping axis in-position width in rigid tapping (third spindle)
5306 Tapping axis in-position width in rigid tapping (fourth spindle)

This parameter sets a tapping axis in-position width when rigid tapping is performed
using the each spindle.
- 1589 -
5301 Spindle in-position width in rigid tapping

These parameters are used to set spindle in-position widths in rigid tapping.
NOTE
If an excessively large value is specified, the threading precision
will deteriorate.
5310 Positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis movement in rigid tapping (first spindle)
5350 Positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis movement in rigid tapping (second spindle)
5354 Positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis movement in rigid tapping (third spindle)
5358 Positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis movement in rigid tapping (fourth spindle)

This parameter sets a positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis movement in
rigid tapping using the each spindle.
5311 Limit value of spindle positioning deviation during movement in rigid tapping

This parameter sets the limit value of a spindle positioning deviation during movement in
rigid tapping.
Find a value to be set from the following expression:
S × PLS × 100 × SP × C
Setting value =
60 × GP × C
S Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (min-1)
(Setting value of parameters Nos. 5241 and greater)
G Loop gain in the rigid tapping (0.01sec-1)
(Setting value of parameters Nos. 5281 and greater)
C Coefficient 1.5
- 1590 -
[Calculation example]
S = 3600
PLS = 4096
SPINDLE SP = 10
MOTOR PC = 20
Position
Spindle coder G = 3000
C = 1.5
3600 × 4096 × 100 × 10 × 1.5

Setting value = = 6144
60 × 3000 × 20
10 : 10 : 20
5312 Positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is stopped in rigid tapping (first spindle)
5352 Positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is stopped in rigid tapping (second spindle)
5356 Positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is stopped in rigid tapping (third spindle)
5360 Positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is stopped in rigid tapping (fourth spindle)

This parameter sets a positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is stopped
in rigid tapping using the each spindle.
5313 Positional deviation limit imposed while the spindle is stopped in rigid tapping

This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit imposed while the spindle is
stopped in rigid tapping.
5321 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (first-stage gear)
5322 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (second-stage gear)
5323 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (third-stage gear)
Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (fourth-stage gear)

5324

Each of these parameters is used to set a spindle backlash.
- 1591 -
5365 Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant in rigid tapping (first-stage gear)
5366 Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant in rigid tapping (second-stage gear)
5367 Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant in rigid tapping (third-stage gear)
Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant in rigid tapping (fourth-stage gear)

5368

[Unit of data] msec
Each of these parameters is used to set a time constant for a curved portion when
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is selected in rigid tapping. When 0 is set in this
parameter, linear acceleration/ deceleration is performed.
NOTE
This parameter is enabled when the parameter RBL (bit 5 of
parameter No. 5203) is set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
24203 FHR
NOTE
When the parameter is set, the power must be turned off before

[Data type] Bit
#0 FHR Position data transmission by FSSB is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
1 In addition, it is necessary to set parameter No.24204.
2 When FSSB high-speed rigid tapping is used, set 1 to this
parameter.
24204 The index number of the spindle axis that synchronizes to each servo axis
NOTE

[Valid data range] 0 to the maximum number of spindles
In FSSB high-speed rigid tapping, set the index number of the spindle axis that
synchronizes to servo axis.
- 1592 -
NOTE
1 When the parameter FHR (Bit 0 of No.24203) is 1, this parameter
is enabled.
2 Four or less index numbers of the spindle axis can be set in the
system. If five or more index numbers of the spindle axis are set,
the alarm (PW0037) "SV/SP COMBINATION ERROR" is issued.
Alarm and message

PS0200 ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND (1) In the rigid tap, an S value was out of range or was
not specified. The parameters Nos. 5241 to 5243
setting is an S value which can be specified for the
rigid tapping. Correct the parameters or modify the
program.
(2) Rigid tapping is commanded during constant surface
speed control. Command rigid tapping after canceling
constant surface speed control.
PS0201 FEEDRATE NOT FOUND IN RIGID TAP The command F code for a cutting feedrate is a zero.
If the value of F command is much smaller than that of
the S command, when a rigid tapping command is
specified, this alarm is generated. This is because cutting
is not possible by the lead specified by the program.
PS0202 POSITION LSI OVERFLOW In the rigid tap, spindle distribution value is too large.
(System error)
PS0203 PROGRAM MISS AT RIGID TAPPING (1) In the rigid tap, position for a rigid M code (M29) or an
S command is incorrect. Modify the program.
(2) FSSB high-speed rigid tapping cannot be used on the
rigid tapping with one servo motor and multiple
spindle motors by spindle command synchronous
control.
(3) In FSSB high-speed rigid tapping, parameter setting
is wrong (bits 1 and 2 of parameter No.2429, and bits
1 and 2 of parameter No.4549).
PS0204 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION In the rigid tap, an axis movement is specified between
the rigid M code (M29) block and G84 (or G74) block.
Modify the program.
PS0205 RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL OFF (1) Although a rigid M code (M29) is specified in rigid
tapping, the rigid mode DI signal (G061.0) is not ON
during execution of the G84 (or G74) block. Check
the PMC ladder diagram to find the reason why the DI
signal is not turned on.
(2) In rigid tapping, no spindle has selected commands in
the path of interest. Alternatively, spindles in two or
more paths have selected commands in the same
path. Check the spindle command select signal.
(3) A spindle specified for rigid tapping is already being
used in another path.
(4) In a machine provided with the multi-spindle control,
no spindle has been selected for attempted rigid
tapping.
PS0206 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE (RIGID TAP) Plane changeover was instructed in the rigid mode.
Modify the program.
PS0207 RIGID DATA MISMATCH The specified distance was too short or too long in rigid
tapping.
PS5560 ILLEGAL DEPTH OF CUT On the peck rigid tapping, the depth of cut (Q) is smaller
than the cutting start distance (d).
- 1593 -

SV0410 EXCESS ERROR (STOP) The amount of positional deviation during stopping
exceeded the parameter No. 1829 setting value.
SV0411 EXCESS ERROR (MOVING) The amount of positional deviation during traveling
became excessive than the parameter setting value.
SV0417 ILL DGTL SERVO PARAMETER A digital serve parameter setting is incorrect.
SP0740 RIGID TAP ALARM : EXCESS ERROR The positional deviation of the stopped spindle has
exceeded the set value during rigid tapping.
SP0741 RIGID TAP ALARM : EXCESS ERROR The positional deviation of the moving spindle has
exceeded the set value during rigid tapping.
SP0742 RIGID TAP ALARM : LSI OVERFLOW An LSI overflow has occurred for the spindle during rigid
tapping.
SP0752 SPINDLE MODE CHANGE ERROR The spindle is in a mode (such as Cs contour control or
spindle synchronous control) other than the spindle
control mode. When the "rigid tapping with spindle of
another path" function is used, the spindle to be used for
rigid tapping must be switched to the spindle control mode
before the start of rigid tapping.
PW0037 SV/SP COMBINATION ERROR (1) The servo axis might be a setting of the dummy axis.
Check to see the parameters No.1023, bit 0 of
No.2009, and bit 4 of No.11802.
(2) The index number of spindle axis that synchronizes
servo axis might be illegal.
Check to see the parameters bit 0 of No.3716,
No.3717, and No.24204.
11.13.18 Notes
- Notes on spindles
Caution
CAUTION
For the analog spindle, adjust the drift compensation value precisely.
Otherwise, the tool may stop, waiting to enter the in-position width in the
following cases:
- At the start of tapping
- At the end of tapping
- At the hole bottom
Note
NOTE
1 A spindle pitch error is not compensated for in rigid tapping mode.
2 The limits to the number of pulses assigned to each spindle are as follows
(displayed with diagnosis data No. 0451):
- Serial spindle: 32767 pulses every 8 msec
- Analog spindle: 4095 pulses every 8 msec
These values vary with the position coder gear ratio setting and rigid tapping
specification. If a value greater than the maximum allowable number is specified,
an alarm PS0202 is issued.
3 If rigid tapping is commanded during constant surface speed control, alarm
(PS0200), ”ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND” is issued. Command rigid tapping
after canceling constant surface speed control.
- 1594 -
- Other cautions
CAUTION
1 When the spindle orientation function is to be used at the same time
The spindle orientation function positions the spindle by using sensors and the
PMC, without being directly controlled by the CNC.
The CNC has no direct control over this processing, instead following the
specifications of the spindle orientation function being used.
2 When the spindle positioning function is to be used at the same time
When the spindle positioning function is to be used together with rigid tapping,
rigid tapping mode must not be specified in spindle indexing mode, and spindle
indexing mode must not be specified in rigid tapping mode. (Spindle positioning
and rigid tapping cannot be performed simultaneously for a single spindle.)
This is not applicable when multi-spindle control is used together and a spindle
used for spindle position indexing is different from a spindle used for rigid
tapping.
3 When the spindle positioning function is to be used at the same time
When the Cs contouring control function for the serial spindle is used together
with the rigid tapping function, the same motor is used for spindle rotation
control, Cs contouring control, and rigid tapping modes. The following points
must be noted:
(1) Whether to enter Cs contouring control mode or spindle rotation control mode
is selected by the CON (Cs contouring control switch signal) signal; however,
the system can enter rigid tapping mode regardless of the state of the CON
signal. When the rigid tapping mode is canceled the system enters spindle
rotation control mode or Cs contouring control mode according to the state of
the CON signal.
(2) Since the system can change to rigid tapping mode directly from the Cs
contouring control mode, use of the Cs contouring control function enables
the tapping tool to be positioned before rigid tapping begins. Accurate
positioning is not guaranteed. If the rigid tapping cycle executes gear change
or output range changing, positioning is valid.
(3) Although the system can change to rigid tapping mode directly from Cs
contouring control mode, positions designated in Cs contouring control mode
are not preserved if rigid tapping mode is canceled by G80. When the system
is changed to rigid tapping mode from Cs contouring control mode, then
returns to the Cs contouring control mode, G00 or G28 must be issued to
position the tapping tool.
(4) In systems with the serial spindle Cs contouring control function, the spindle
motor is in a state called servo mode when it is operating in rigid tapping
mode. In servo mode, it can accept jogging and manual handling feed. To
prevent this, inhibit jogging and manual handling feed of the Cs contouring
axis in the PMC logic during rigid tapping.
(5) The servo-off signal for the Cs contour control axis is valid also for the spindle
during rigid tapping. It should be masked on the PMC side as required.
(6) When multi-spindle control is used together and a spindle used for Cs
contour control is different from a spindle used for rigid tapping, rigid tapping
can be specified with one spindle while the other spindle is placed in the Cs
contour control mode.
(7) The Cs contour control axis cannot be a drilling axis. If it is specified as a
drilling axis, alarm PS0203 is issued.
- 1595 -
CAUTION
4 Program restart
The program cannot be restarted in a block placed in the rigid tapping mode.
(The program cannot be restarted in blocks between an M29 command and G80
command.)
5 Specification of multiple M codes in one block
Specify an M code for specifying the rigid tapping mode as an independent M
code. (Multiple M codes must not be specified in one block.)
- Position control loop gain switching and serial spindle parameters

In rigid tapping, the loop gain of the drilling axis is switched so that the loop gains for position control of
the drilling axis and spindle match each other.
This switching processing is specified by parameters Nos. 5281 to 5284.
The spindle loop gain depends on the setting of serial spindle parameters and the input gear signals
(CTH2, CTH1).
So, in order to perform rigid tapping with a serial spindle, the position control loop gain of the spindle
must be set in the parameters for the serial spindle used for rigid tapping.
When multi-spindle control is used, a spindle other than the first spindle can be used for rigid tapping. So,
set the parameters below for the serial spindle used for rigid tapping.
The parameters indicated below are the major serial spindle parameters required for the setting and
adjustment needed to use a serial spindle.
For details of the serial spindle parameters, refer to the "FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
DESCRIPTIONS (B-65272E)" or "FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series PARAMETER MANUAL
(B-65280EN)".
4044 Proportional gain of the velocity loop in servo mode (gear 1, gear 2)
4045 Proportional gain of the velocity loop in servo mode (gear 3, gear 4)
[Unit of data]
Set a proportional gain for the velocity loop in a servo mode (such as rigid tapping
mode).
4052 Integral gain of the velocity loop in the servo mode (gear 1, gear 2)
4053 Integral gain of the velocity loop in the servo mode(gear 3, gear 4)
[Unit of data]
Set an integral gain of the velocity loop in a servo mode (such as rigid tapping mode).
4065 Position gain in the servo mode (HIGH)
4066 Position gain in the servo mode (MEDIUM HIGH)
4067 Position gain in the servo mode (MEDIUM LOW)
4068 Position gain in the servo mode (LOW)
[Unit of data] 0.01sec-1

Set a servo loop gain in a servo mode (such as rigid tapping mode).
- 1596 -
CAUTION
Set a loop gain for spindle position control in rigid tapping using a serial spindle.
In these parameters, basically, set the same values as those set in parameters
Nos. 5281 to 5284 (loop gains for position control of the tapping axis).
Which serial spindle parameter (i.e., loop gain) is actually used to operate the
spindle depends on the serial spindle clutch/gear selection signals CTH1 and
CTH2. Accordingly, which parameter is to be used must be determined by
considering the gear switching and PMC software.
The table below indicates the relationship between the spindle gear selection signals and selected gear
numbers.
CTH1 CTH2 Gear selected Parameter No. to be used

0 0 HIGH 4065
4044 4052
0 1 MIDEUM HIGH 4066
1 0 MIDEUM LOW 4067
4045 4053
1 1 LOW 4068
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) (B-64604EN-1) Rigid tapping
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) Rigid tapping
(B-64604EN-2)
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (This manual) Spindle speed control
Multi spindle control
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series Rigid tapping
DESCRIPTIONS (B-65282EN)
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series Rigid tapping
PARAMETER MANUAL (B-65280EN) Tuning way for FSSB High-speed Rigid Tapping
- 1597 -
11.14 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL

Overview
This function can exercise synchronous control on spindles. This function can also control the rotation
phase of spindles, so that not only a round rod but also a non-standard workpiece can be grasped by either
of two spindles.
This function enables the synchronous control. It also enables the control of the rotation phase of a
spindle, allowing non-standard workpieces as well as rods to be held by either of the two spindles.
A combination of a master spindle and slave spindle in spindle synchronous control can be selected
arbitrarily from spindles.
This function can be used with serial spindles.
NOTE
To use this function, set bit 4 (SYC) of parameter No.8133 to 1.
Explanation
- Synchronous-spindle configuration (when the one path system is used)
In spindle synchronous control, the spindle to which an S command is issued is called the master spindle.
A spindle which ignores any S command that is issued for it, instead rotating synchronously with the
master spindle, is called the slave spindle.
When the bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No.3704 is set to 0

The configuration of synchronized spindles is as follows:
Master spindle Slave spindle
First spindle Second spindle
CNC
Spindle Spindle Spindle

S1 S2 S3
Master spindle with which slave spindle is synchronized
When the bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No. 3704 is se to 1

Which slave spindle is synchronized with which master spindle is set using parameter No. 4831.
Arbitrary spindle Arbitrary spindle
- Multiple slave spindles can be synchronized with one master spindle.

Example)
A combination of first spindle (master spindle)/second and third spindles (slave spindles) is
possible.
- 1598 -
CNC
Spindle Spindle Spindle

S1 S2 S3
NOTE
1 A combination that uses a slave spindle as a master spindle is not allowed.
2 When multiple slave spindles are configured for synchronous control, a
restriction is imposed on phase matching operation. See the description of the
spindle phase synchronization control signal.
- Configuration of synchronized spindles (in a multi-path system)

• When the bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No.3704 is set to 0
The configuration of synchronized spindles is as follows:
First spindle of each path Second spindle of each path
Path 1 Path 2
Spindle S1 Spindle S2 Spindle S3 Spindle S4

(S11) (S12) (S13) (S14)
• When the bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No.3704 is set to 1

Spindle synchronization can be performed by combining arbitrary spindles.
Which slave spindle is synchronized with which master spindle is set using parameter No.
4831/4832.
Arbitrary spindle of each path Arbitrary spindle of each path
Set a master spindle for each slave in parameter No.4831.

As a master spindle, set a spindle number in the same path as for a slave spindle.
By setting a logic spindle number common to the system in parameter No.4832, such spindle
synchronization that an arbitrary spindle belonging to a different path is used as a master spindle can be
exercised.
- 1599 -
The spindle number of a master spindle to be set is a logic spindle number common to the system. In this
case, set 0 in parameter No.4831 for all.
For the path to which a slave spindle belongs and the path to which a master spindle belongs, bit 4 (SSS)
of parameter No.3704 needs to be set to 1 (to enable spindle synchronization using arbitrary axes).
Example of parameter setting)

Spindle configuration of each path
Six spindles (two spindles of path 1 + two spindles of path 2)
Logic spindle number common to system Path number + intra-path spindle number
First spindle (S1) First spindle of path 1 (S11)
Second spindle (S2) Second spindle of path 1 (S12)
Third spindle (S3) First spindle of path 2 (S21)
Fourth spindle (S4) Second spindle of path 2 (S22)
Path 1 Path 2

(S11) (S12) (S21) (S22)
Example 1:
Combining spindles of the same path for spindle synchronization
Parameter setting
Bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No.3704 (PATH1)=1, (PATH2)=1
Parameter No.4831(S1) =0, (S2) =1, (S3) =0, (S4) =1
Parameter No.4832(ALL) =0
or

First spindle of path 1 (S11) Second spindle of path 1 (S12)
First spindle of path 2 (S21) Second spindle of path 2 (S22)
Path 1 Path 2

(S11) (S12) (S21) (S22)
- 1600 -
Example 2:
Combining spindles of different paths for spindle synchronization
Parameter setting

First spindle of path 1 (S11) First spindle of path 2 (S21)
Second spindle of path 1 (S12) Second spindle of path 2 (S22)
Path 1 Path 2

(S11) (S12) (S21) (S22)
• When the bit 5 (SCB) of parameter No.4800 is set to 1

The configuration of synchronized spindles is as follows (regardless of the setting of bit 4 (SSS) of
parameter No.3704):

First spindle of path 1 First spindle of path 2
Path 1 Path 2

(S11) (S12) (S21) (S22)
As control signals, the 0i-TTC system compatible signal interface becomes usable.
- Speed synchronization
• When the spindle synchronous control signal is set to “1”, the spindle synchronous control mode is
set.
When spindle synchronous control is specified, each spindle is accelerated or decelerated to a
specified speed then enters the synchronous control state.
- 1601 -
• The spindle synchronous speed control completion signal is output when the two spindles have
reached the speed matching a specified spindle synchronous speed and the speed difference between
the two spindles is within the value set in parameter No.4033.
- Phase matching
• Spindle phase synchronization is executed by setting the spindle phase synchronization control
signal to 1 in the spindle synchronous control mode (after the output of the spindle synchronous
speed control completion signal).
The synchronous state between the two axes is not maintained during spindle phase synchronization
operation (until the spindle phase synchronization control completion signal is set to 1).
• The spindle phase synchronization completion signal is output when the error difference between the
two spindles lies within the allowable number of pulses set in the NC parameter No. 4810.
If spindle phase synchronization is specified after spindle phase synchronization completion, another
spindle phase synchronization operation is performed.
When the two spindles hold a workpiece, do not specify spindle phase synchronization.
- Speed specification
• In the spindle synchronous control mode, the specification of a speed for the master spindle is valid.
• In the spindle synchronous control mode, a speed for the master spindle can be specified in the same
way as for an ordinary S command.
Moreover, signals such as the PMC-based spindle output control signals (SIND, SSIN, SSGN, and
R01I to R12I), *SSTP, and SOR are valid as usual.
If a speed is specified using a PMC-based spindle output control command, however, the parameters
Nos. 3741, 3742, 3743, and 3744 for specifying the maximum speeds of the individual spindle gears
must be correctly set beforehand.
When 0 is set in the parameter corresponding to a selected gear, the spindle does not make a
synchronous rotation.
• An S command specified for a master spindle and a speed specified for PMC-based spindle output
control before the spindle synchronous control mode is set are valid even in the spindle synchronous
control mode.
A speed command for a master spindle during spindle synchronous control is also valid as a
command for the master spindle after spindle synchronous control is canceled.
- Speed ratio control

• Spindle synchronous control can be exercised to set a speed ratio of master spindle: slave spindle to
1:n.
Speed ratio control is exercised in spindle synchronization by setting the spindle synchronous speed
ratio control signal SBRT <Gn038.1> to “1” in the spindle synchronous control mode. At this time,
the speed ratio of master spindle: slave spindle is 1:n (n: value set in the parameter No.7635).
Path 1 Path 2

(S11) (S12) (S21) (S22)
- 1602 -
Mater spindle : Speed ratio setting for the slave spindle 1:2
When the speed S100 is specified for master spindle S1
Spindle S1 : Spindle speed S100(1/min)
Spindle S2 : Placed in synchronous control state with spindle speed S200 (1/min).
If the speed of each slave spindle specified by multiplying the speed specified for the master spindle by a
speed ratio exceeds the value set in the parameter No.7636, the speed of each slave spindle is clamped to
a set maximum allowable speed. At the same time, the speed of the master spindle is clamped to the speed
that maintains the speed ratio.
When the speeds of multiple slave spindles are clamped, all spindles are clamped to the speeds that can
maintain the speed ratios for synchronization control.
When the speed of a slave spindle is clamped, the spindle synchronous speed ratio control clamp signal
RSMAX <Fn065.2> is set to “1”.
NOTE
To use speed ratio control, set bit 2 (SBR) of parameter No.7603 to 1.
- Supplement
• To monitor an error mutually between two spindles in the spindle synchronous control mode, the
spindle phase error monitor signal SYCAL <Fn044.4> (SYCAL1 to SYCAL4 <Fn043.0> to
<Fn043.3>) is available. A synchronization error between two spindles is monitored at all times.
When a synchronization error exceeding the value (absolute number of error pulses) set in parameter
No.4811 is detected, this signal is set to “1”. When the synchronization error does not exceed the
value set in parameter No.4811, the signal is set to “0”.
• Even when two spindles hold a workpiece in the synchronous control state, constant surface speed
control can be exercised. Even if the speed of a spindle changes, however, the synchronous speed
changes within the parameter-set range (acceleration/deceleration time constant in spindle
synchronous control).
• In spindle synchronous control, the spindle speed offset value (parameter No.3731) is invalid.
For details of synchronous-spindle connection, see the description of serial spindles.
Limitation
• When spindles are placed in a mode other than a spindle rotation mode such as the Cs contouring
control mode, rigid tapping, and spindle command synchronous control, the spindle synchronous
control mode cannot be used. In the spindle rotation mode, switch the mode of the master and slave
spindles to the spindle synchronous control mode.
• For spindles placed in the spindle synchronous control mode, commands for Cs contouring control,
rigid tapping, spindle command synchronous control, and so forth cannot be specified.
• To specify an S command with the second to fourth spindles used as master spindles, the
multi-spindle option is required. (When PMC-based spindle output control signal (SINDx) is used,
the multi-spindle option is not required.)
• The maximum speed in spindle synchronous control depends on the maximum speed (parameter No.
4020) of the spindle motor of the master spindle.
Example)
Maximum speed of the spindle motor of a master spindle: 6000 min-1
Maximum speed of the spindle motor of a slave spindle: 4500 min-1
-1
In the example above, 6000 min is specified as the maximum speed of the master spindle for 12bit
= 4095. However, when 6000 min-1 is specified in spindle synchronous control, the excessive-speed
alarm (spindle unit side alarm AL-07) is issued with the slave spindle.
So, do not specify a speed exceeding 4500 min-1 in the example above.
- 1603 -
Diagnosis data
0418 Position deviation of each spindle
When spindles are involved in a position loop, the position deviation of each spindle is indicated.
The unit of a detector used in each mode is used.
0425 Synchronization error of each spindle
The absolute value of the synchronization error of each spindle in spindle synchronization is indicated.
A synchronization error is indicated with a slave spindle.
Spindle screen (spindle synchronous control)

In the spindle synchronous control mode, the spindle screen displays the information below.
"Position deviation" indicates the position deviation of the spindle currently displayed.
"Synchronization error" indicates the absolute value of a synchronization error in spindle synchronization.
The value of a synchronization error is displayed on the spindle screen for the slave spindle.
When bit 3 (SVP) of parameter No.3799 is set to 1, "synchronous deviation" indicates the peak hold
value of a synchronization error.
Actual spindle speed (1/MIN) motor speed (1/MIN)

Actual loop gain (0.01/S)
Spindle position deviation (PLS)
Synchronization error (PLS)
Signal
Spindle synchronous control signal SPSYC<Gn038.2>
[Function] This signal specifies switching to the spindle synchronous control mode for the
first/second spindles.
[Operation] When this signal is set to “1”, the spindle synchronous control mode for the first/second
spindles is set.
When this signal is set to “0”, the spindle synchronous control mode for the first/second
spindles is canceled.
This signal is valid only when bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No.3704 is set to 0.
When bit 5 (SCB) of parameter No.4800 is set to 1, an address of n = 0 is valid.
Spindle synchronous control signal of each spindle

SPSYC1 to SPSYC4<Gn288.0 - Gn288.3>
[Function] These signals specify the switching of each spindle to the spindle synchronous control
mode.
[Operation] When each of these signals is set to “1”, the spindle synchronous control mode with a
spindle set as a slave spindle is set.
When each of these signals is set to “0”, the spindle synchronous control mode with a
spindle set as a slave spindle is canceled.
When SPSYCs is set to “1”, spindle synchronization with a spindle set as a slave spindle
is performed.
These signals are valid only when bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No.3704 is set to 1 and bit 5
(SCB) of parameter No.4800 is set to 0.
Which spindle is synchronized with which spindle is set using parameter No.4831 or
4832.
- 1604 -
NOTE
For the correspondence between the signal of each spindle and
actual signal address, see the description of "Signal address".
Spindle phase synchronization control signal SPPHS<Gn038.3>

[Function] This signal specifies the spindle phase synchronization control mode (phase matching) for
the first/second spindles.
[Operation] When this signal makes a transition from “0” to “1”, spindle phase synchronization
control for the first/second spindles is exercised.
This signal is valid when the spindle synchronous control signal SPSYC is set to “1”.
Specify this signal after the spindle synchronous speed control completion signal FSPSY
is set to “1”.
A spindle phase synchronization control operation is started on the rising edge of this
signal.
So, phase matching once performed is not lost when this signal is set to “0”.
However, when this signal is set to “1” from “0” again, a phase matching operation is
performed.
Set a phase shift amount in parameter No.4034.
NOTE
Before specifying this signal, ensure that the spindle synchronous
speed control completion signal FSPSY is set to “1”. When the
spindle synchronous speed control completion signal FSPSY is set
to “0”, phase matching operation is not performed.
Spindle phase synchronization control signal of each spindle

SPPHS1 to SPPHS4<Gn289.0 to Gn289.3>
[Function] These signals specify the spindle phase synchronization control mode (phase matching)
for each spindle.
[Operation] When each of these signals is set to “1”, spindle phase matching is performed in the
spindle synchronous control mode with a spindle set as a slave spindle.
These signals are valid when the spindle synchronous control signal SPSYCs for each
spindle is set to “1”.
Specify each of these signals after the spindle synchronous speed control completion
signal FSPSYs for each spindle is set to “1”.
A spindle phase synchronization control operation is started on the rising edge of each of
these signals.
So, phase matching once performed is not lost when each of these signals is set to “0”.
However, when each of these signals is set to “1” from “0” again, a phase matching
Set a phase shift amount in parameter No.4034.
- 1605 -
NOTE
1 Before specifying these signals, ensure that the spindle
synchronous speed control completion signal FSPSYx is set to “1”.
When the spindle synchronous speed control completion signal
FSPSYx is set to “0”, phase matching operation is not performed.
2 Phase matching in the state where spindles are rotating in
synchronism is enabled only for one slave spindle synchronized with
one master spindle. When phase matching is to be performed in the
state where multiple slave spindles are rotating in synchronism with
one master spindle, do not specify spindle phase synchronization
control on multiple spindles.
3 Before performing phase matching of one master spindle with
multiple slave spindles, ensure that all spindles are stopped.
4 For the correspondence between the signal of each spindle and
Spindle synchronous speed control completion signal FSPSY<Fn044.2>

[Function] This signal posts that spindle synchronous control (speed synchronization) for the
first/second spindles is completed.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to “1” in the following case:
- This signal is output when two spindles have reached the speed equivalent to a
specified spindle synchronous speed and the speed difference between the two
spindles is equal to or less than the value set in parameter No.4033 in the spindle
synchronous control mode.
This signal is set to “0” in the following cases:
- In the spindle synchronous control mode, two spindles have not reached the speed
equivalent to a specified spindle synchronous speed.
- In the spindle synchronous control mode, the speed difference between two spindles
is greater than the value set in parameter No.4033.
- The spindle synchronization control mode is not set.
NOTE
Even if this signal is once set to “1”, this signal is set to “0” when
the speed difference exceeds the value set in parameter No.4033
for a cause such as cutting load variation.
Spindle synchronous speed control completion signal for each spindle

FSPSY1 to FSPSY4<Fn288.0 to Fn288.3>
[Function] These signals post that spindle synchronous control (speed synchronization) with each
spindle set as a slave spindle is completed.
- 1606 -
NOTE
1 Even if this signal is once set to “1”, this signal is set to “0” when
Spindle phase synchronization control completion signal FSPPH<Fn044.3>

[Function] This signal posts that spindle phase synchronization control (phase matching) for the
first/second spindles is completed.
- This signal is output when phase matching is completed with the spindle phase
synchronization control signal (when the error pulse difference between the two
spindles is equal to or less than the value set in parameter No.4810) after the two
spindles have reached the speed equivalent to a specified spindle synchronous speed
in the spindle synchronous control mode.
- In the spindle synchronous control mode, the phase matching of two spindles is not
completed.
- In the spindle synchronous control mode, the error pulse difference between two
spindles is greater than the value set in parameter No.4810.
- The spindle synchronous control mode is not set.
- The spindle phase synchronization control mode is not set.
NOTE
Spindle phase synchronization control completion signal of each spindle

FSPPH1 to FSPPH4<Fn289.0 to Fn289.3>
[Function] These signals post that spindle phase synchronization control (phase matching) with each
spindle set as a slave spindle is completed.
completed.
- 1607 -
spindles is greater than the value set in parameter No.4810.
(SCB) of parameter No. 4800 is set to 0.
NOTE
1 Even if this signal is once set to “1”, this signal is set to “0” when
Spindle phase error monitor signal SYCAL<Fn044.4>

[Function] This signal posts that in the spindle synchronous control mode for the first/second
spindles, the error pulse difference between the two spindles is greater than a
parameter-set value.
spindles is greater than the value set in parameter No.4811 after spindle synchronous
control is completed.
spindles is equal to or less than the value set in parameter No.4811.
Spindle phase error monitor signal for each spindle

SYCAL1 to SYCAL4<Fn043.0 to Fn043.3>
[Function] These signals post that in the spindle synchronous control mode with each spindle set as a
slave spindle, the error pulse difference between two spindles is greater than a
- 1608 -
NOTE
For the correspondence between the signal of each spindle and
Spindle synchronous speed ratio control signal SBRT<Gn038.1>

[Function] This signal specifies switching to speed ratio control in spindle synchronous control.
[Operation] When this signal is set to “1”, speed ratio control is set.
When this signal is set to “0”, speed ratio control is canceled.
This signal is common to all slave spindles that belong to the same path.
Spindle synchronous speed ratio control clamp signal RSMAX<Fn065.2>

[Function] This signal posts the rotation state of a slave spindle under speed ratio control in spindle
- The speed of a slave spindle is clamped to the value set in the parameter No.7636
under speed ratio control in spindle synchronous control.
- The speed of any slave spindle is not clamped to the value set in the parameter No.
7636 under speed ratio control in spindle synchronous control.
This signal is common to all slave spindles that belong to the same path.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn038 SPPHS SPSYC SBRT
Gn288 SPSYC4 SPSYC3 SPSYC2 SPSYC1
Gn289 SPPHS4 SPPHS3 SPPHS2 SPPHS1
Fn044 SYCAL FSPPH FSPSY
Fn065 RSMAX
Fn288 FSPSY4 FSPSY3 FSPSY2 FSPSY1
Fn289 FSPPH4 FSPPH3 FSPPH2 FSPPH1
Fn043 SYCAL4 SYCAL3 SYCAL2 SYCAL1
- Signal allocation of spindle-type signals

The signal allocation of spindle-type varies according to the path number to which each spindle belongs
and intra-path spindle number.
Here, the address allocation of the spindle synchronous control signal for each spindle SPSYCs, which is
a spindle-type signal, is described below.
• When the one path system is used :

- 1609 -
When three spindles of path 1 are used

Logic spindle number Path number + intra-path spindle number Signal symbol Signal address
First spindle (S1) First spindle of path 1 (S11) SPSYC1 G0288.0
Second spindle (S2) Second spindle of path 1 (S12) SPSYC2 G0288.1
Third spindle (S3) Third spindle of path 1 (S13) SPSYC3 G0288.2
• When the multi path system is used :

When six spindles consisting of two spindles of path 1 and two spindles of path 2 are used
Logic spindle number Path number + intra-path spindle number Signal symbol Signal address
First spindle (S1) First spindle of path 1 (S11) SPSYC1 G0288.0
Second spindle (S2) Second spindle of path 1 (S12) SPSYC2 G0288.1
Third spindle (S3) First spindle of path 2 (S21) SPSYC1 G1288.0
Fourth spindle (S4) Second spindle of path 2 (S22) SPSYC2 G1288.1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3799 SVPs

#3 SVPs As synchronization errors displayed on the spindle screen:

0: Monitor values are displayed.
1: Peak-hold values are displayed.
Spindle synchronization errors are displayed on the side of the spindle that functions as a
slave axis in spindle synchronization control.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3704 SSS

NOTE
#4 SSS Synchronous spindle control by each spindle is:

0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
The master axis and slave axis of synchronous spindle control can be selected from the
arbitrary spindles.
The target spindle of synchronous spindle control is specified in parameter No.4831.
In addition, the following signals affect the control.
• Synchronous spindle signals of each spindle SPSYCs
• Signals of synchronous control of the spindle phase for each spindle SPPHSs
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3716 A/Ss

- 1610 -
NOTE

0: Analog spindle.
1: Serial spindle.
NOTE
1 When an analog spindle is used, the option for spindle analog
output is required.
2 When a serial spindle is used, the option for spindle serial output is
required.
3 The option for the number of controlled spindles needs to be
specified.
NOTE

to
4032 Acceleration at spindle synchronous control

[Data unit] 1min-1/sec
This parameter sets an acceleration value for linear acceleration/deceleration when the
synchronous speed command for spindle synchronous control is changed.
NOTE
1 Set exactly the same data for a master axis spindle and a slave
axis. When different data is set, synchronization between the two
spindles is not guaranteed.
2 When this parameter is set to 0, acceleration/deceleration of a
spindle is not applied. Set an appropriate value.
4033 Detection level for spindle synchronous speed

- 1611 -
[Data unit] 1min-1/sec

For the synchronous speed command at spindle synchronous control, if the error of the
respective spindle motor speeds are within the setting level, the spindle synchronous
control complete signal (FSPSY) becomes “1”.
4034 Phase shift amount in spindle phase synchronization control

[Data unit] 1 pulse unit (360°/4096)
Sets the shift amount from the reference point at spindle phase synchronous control
(one-rotation signal).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4800 SCB SYM

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#4 SYM In spindle synchronous control, spindle maximum speed uses:

0: The one of a master axis.
1: Low one either a master axis or a slave axis.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only for T type gear selection method.
#5 SCB The combination of a master spindle and slave spindle for spindle synchronization
depends on:
0: Setting of bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No.3704.
When bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No.3704 is set to 0
The first spindle and second spindle of each path can be selected as the master
spindle and slave spindle, respectively, for spindle synchronization.
A combination of arbitrary spindles of each path can be selected for spindle
synchronization.
Set a master spindle for each slave spindle in parameter No.4831. Set a spindle
number of each path.
By setting a spindle number common to the system in parameter No.4832, an
arbitrary spindle that belongs to a different path can be selected as a master spindle
for spindle synchronization. Set a spindle number common to the system. Set
parameter No.4831 to 0. Spindle synchronization based on arbitrary spindles must
be enabled for the path to which a slave spindle belongs and for the path to which a
master spindle belongs.
1: Conventional 16TT system compatible specifications.
The first spindle of path 1 and the first spindle of path 2 can be selected as the
master spindle and slave spindle, respectively, for spindle synchronization.
As control signals, the signal interface of the 16TT system compatible specifications
can be used.
- 1612 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4801 SNDs

NOTE
#0 SNDs During spindle synchronization control, the rotation direction of each spindle motor is:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4809 NSY

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#0 NSY When the spindle speed changes during spindle synchronization control, resolution
improvement is:
0: Disabled. (Speed change in units of about 3.7 [min-1])
1: Enabled. (Speed change in units of about 0.03 [min-1] at minimum but not higher
than maximum spindle speed/4095 [min-1])
This parameter is valid when spindle synchronization control or spindle-spindle polygon

turning is used.
Using high-precision spindle speed control and spindle synchronization control
simultaneously requires setting the parameter to 1.
NOTE
Using this function requires the serial spindle software that
supports it.
Error pulse between two spindles when synchronizing phases in the spindle synchronization control
4810
mode

Set an allowable error pulse value between two spindles at phase synchronization time in
the spindle synchronization control mode.
This parameter is used to check the completion of phase synchronization performed in the
spindle synchronization control mode and to check the phase difference during spindle
synchronization control.
- 1613 -
When the error pulse value between two spindles become equal to or less than the value
set in this parameter, the spindle phase synchronization control completion signals
FSPPH<F044.3> and FSPPH1 to 4<F289.0 to 3> are set to “1”.
Allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in the spindle synchronization control
4811
mode

Set the allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in the spindle
synchronization control mode.
This parameter is used to check a spindle synchronization error phase difference.
When a spindle synchronization error equal to or greater than the value set in this
parameter is detected, the phase error monitor signals SYCAL<F044.4> and SYCAL1 to
4<F043.0 to F043.3> are set to “1”.
4831 Master axis of each slave spindle under spindle synchronous control
NOTE

[Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled spindle axes (within a path)
When a spindle is set as a slave spindle in spindle synchronization control on each
spindle, set which spindle (master spindle) the slave spindle is to be synchronized with.
[Examples of parameter setting]
• When spindle synchronization control is exercised with the first spindle selected as a
master spindle and the second spindle selected as a slave spindle:
No. 4831(1)=0
No. 4831(2)=1
No. 4831(3)=0
No. 4831(4)=0
• When spindle synchronization control is exercised with four spindles under the
following combinations:
(Two combinations, namely, first spindle (master spindle)/second spindle (slave
spindle), and third spindle (master spindle)/fourth spindle (slave spindle))
No. 4831(1)=0
No. 4831(2)=1
No. 4831(3)=0
No. 4831(4)=3
• When spindle synchronization control is exercised with one master spindle and
multiple slave spindles:
(First spindle (master spindle)/second spindle (slave spindle)/third spindle (slave
spindle)/fourth spindle (slave spindle))
No. 4831(1)=0
No. 4831(2)=1
No. 4831(3)=1
No. 4831(4)=1
- 1614 -
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid if bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No.3704 is set to
1.
2 The setting of a slave spindle as a master spindle is invalid.
This parameter must be set to 0 for a spindle to be set as a master
spindle.
3 In this parameter, set a spindle number within the same path.
When a spindle not belonging to the local path is to be selected as
a master spindle for spindle synchronization, set a spindle number
common to the system in parameter No.4832. In such a case, set 0
in this parameter.
Master spindle of each slave spindle under spindle synchronization control (spindle number common
4832
to the system)
NOTE

[Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled spindle axes (common to the system)
NOTE
1.
Bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No.3704 must be set to 1 (to enable
spindle synchronization based on arbitrary spindles) for the path to
which a slave spindle belongs and for the path to which a master
spindle belongs.
2 The setting of a slave spindle as a master spindle is invalid.
This parameter must be set to 0 for a spindle to be set as a master
spindle.
3 In this parameter, set a spindle number common to the system.
4 When this parameter is used, parameter No.4831 is set to 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7603 SBR

#2 SBR For spindle synchronization, speed ratio control is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.
7635 Ratio of slave spindle speed in spindle synchronization control

- 1615 -

This parameter sets the ratio of master spindle speed: slave spindle speed (1:n) in spindle
synchronization control.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when bit 2 (SBR) of parameter No.
7603 is set to 1.
7636 Maximum allowable slave spindle speed in spindle synchronization control

The speed of the slave spindle under speed ratio control in spindle synchronization
control is clamped so that the speed does not exceed the value set in this parameter.
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid only when bit 2 (SBR) of parameter No.
7603 is set to 1.
2 When speed ratio control in spindle synchronization control is used,
be sure to set this parameter.
3 When 0 is set, the speed is clamped to 0, disabling rotation under
spindle synchronization.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8133 SYC
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#4 SYC Spindle synchronization is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
Alarm and message

PS0194 SPINDLE COMMAND IN A Cs contour control mode, spindle positioning command, or rigid
SYNCHRO-MODE tapping mode was specified during the spindle synchronous control
mode or spindle command synchronous control mode.
Caution
CAUTION
1 Output signal SYCAL is used for monitoring a phase shift in synchronous control.
The processing performed when a phase shift is detected depends on the
specifications determined by the machine tool builder.
2 A gear ratio of 1:1 only is allowed between the spindle and position coder.
- 1616 -
CAUTION
3 A CNC system restriction is imposed on the maximum number of spindles.
Reference item
For details of the parameters Nos.4000 to 4539, signals, and alarms for the serial spindle control unit,
refer to the manuals related to serial spindles listed below.
11.14.1 Arbitrary Spindle Position Phase Synchronization Function

Overview
In spindle synchronous control, when workpiece whose cross section is non-circular is gripped between
master spindle and slave spindle, phase of master and slave has to be synchronized. In order to
synchronize the phase of master spindle and slave spindle by spindle phase synchronous control so far,
phase difference between master spindle and slave spindle has to measure by hand, and set to parameter.
This function can detect master and slave spindle position automatically by setting DI signal, and save
spindle positions to parameters. In spindle phase synchronous control, phase can synchronize by loading
saved spindle positions. Therefore, setup time for phase synchronous control can be shortened.
Besides, master and slave spindle position can save up to 4 pairs. DI signal can select which of spindle
position pairs will be loaded. Therefore, plural non-circular workpieces can be applied.
This function can use with serial spindles.
Explanation
Save of spindle position
In order to grip workpiece whose cross section is non-circular between master spindle and slave spindle,
master and slave spindle positions are detected automatically, and saved to parameters Nos.4840 to 4843.
Master and slave spindle position can save up to 4 pairs. Master and slave spindle position are saved to
parameters Nos.4840 to 4843 by the following procedure.
(1) Detect one-rotation signal of both master spindle and slave spindle beforehand. Check whether
one-rotation signal has been detected or not by position coder one-rotation signal detection status
signal PC1DT <Fn047.0, Fn051.0, Fn170.0, Fn268.0>.
(2) Command “S0 ;” to both master spindle and slave spindle so as not to rotate spindles.
(3) Turn off excitation of master spindle and slave spindle.
(4) Set a workpiece whose cross section is non-circular with master spindle and slave spindle.
(5) Turn on excitation of master spindle and slave spindle.
(6) Set spindle position save start signal SPMST1 to SPMST4 <Gn587.0 to Gn587.3> of slave spindle
to “1”. Spindle position can save whether the spindle is stopping or rotating. If spindle position is
saved during rotating spindles by spindle synchronous control, set spindle position save start signal
SPMST1 to SPMST4 <Gn587.0 to Gn587.3> to “1” after having become spindle synchronous speed
control completion signal FSPSY <Fn044.2> (or <Fn288.0 to Fn288.3>) “1”.
(7) When spindle position save start signal is set from “0” to “1”, position coder one-rotation signal
detection status signals PC1DT <Fn047.0, Fn051.0, Fn170.0, Fn268.0> of both master spindle and
slave spindle are checked. If position coder one-rotation signal detection status signal <Fn047.0,
Fn051.0, Fn170.0, Fn268.0> of master spindle or slave spindle is “0”, spindle position save error
signal SPMER1 to SPMER4 <Fn577.4 to Fn577.7> becomes “1” because spindle position cannot be
detected.
(8) When spindle position save start signal SPMST1 to SPMST4 <Gn587.0 to Gn587.3> is set from “0”
to “1”, spindle position saving parameter Nos.4840 to No.4843 is selected by setting spindle position
save selection signal SMSL11 to SMSL14 <Gn588.0 to Gn588.3>, SMSL21 to SMSL24 <Gn588.4
to Gn588.7> of slave spindle.
- 1617 -
(9) Spindle positions of both master spindle and slave spindle are saved to parameter selected by (8),
and spindle position save completion signal SPMFN1 to SPMFN4 <Fn577.0 to Fn577.3> of slave
spindle becomes “1”. Besides, one of bit 0 to 3 (SM1 to SM4) of parameter No.4803 becomes 1.
(10) Set spindle position save start signal SPMST1 to SPMST4 <Gn587.0 to Gn587.3> to “0” after
having become spindle position save completion signal SPMFN1 to SPMFN4 <Fn577.0 to
Fn577.3> “0”.
(11) If spindle position save start signal SPMST1 to SPMFN4 <Fn577.0 to Fn577.3> is set to “0”,
spindle position save completion signal SPMFN1 to SPMFN4 <Fn577.0 to Fn577.3> becomes “0”.
Table11.14 (a) Relationship between spindle position save selection signal and spindle position saving
parameter
parameter notifying Spindle position save selection signal
spindle position
spindle position save SMSL21~SMSL24 SMSL11~SMSL14
saving parameter
is completed or not <Gn588.4~Gn588.7> <Gn588.0~Gn588.3>
No.4840 No.4803#0 0 0
No.4841 No.4803#1 0 1
No.4842 No.4803#2 1 0
No.4843 No.4803#3 1 1
(6)
spindle position save start signal
SPMST1 to SPMST4
<Gn587.0 to Gn587.3>
(10)
spindle position save
selection signal
(8)
SMSL11 to SMSL14
<Gn588.0 to Gn588.3>
SMSL21 to SMSL24 (11)
<Gn588.4 to Gn588.7>
spindle position save

completion signal
SPMFN1 to SPMFN4 (9)
<Fn577.0 to Fn577.3>
spindle position save error signal
SPMER1 to SPMER4
<Fn577.4 to Fn577.7>
(7)
position coder one-rotation signal

detection status signal
PC1DT
<Fn047.0, Fn051.0, Fn170.0, Fn268.0>
parameter saving
Fig.11.14 (a) Spindle position save
NOTE
Set bit 0 to 3 (SM1 to SM4) of parameter No.4803 to 0 if spindle position has to
be saved again, for example, motor or detector is exchanged, parameter file of
other machine is inputted, and so on.
Spindle position save error signal SPMER1 to SPMER4 <Fn577.4 to Fn577.7> of slave spindle becomes
“1” in the following cases, because spindle position cannot be saved.
- Position coder one-rotation signal detection status signal PC1DT<Fn047.0, Fn051.0, Fn170.0,
Fn268.0> of master spindle or slave spindle is ”0”.
- 1618 -
- Spindle position save start signal SPMST1 to SPMST4 <Gn587.0 to Gn587.3> is set to “0” before
having become spindle position save completion signal SPMFN1 to SPMFN4 <Fn577.0 to Fn577.3>
“1”.
- Spindle position save cannot be completed correctly.
- Spindle positions save signal SPMST1 to SPMST4 <Gn587.0 to Gn587.3> of a slave spindle is set to
“1” during saving spindle position of other master-slave pair (in the case of plural slave spindles for
master spindle).
If spindle position save error signal SPMER1 to SPMER4 <Fn577.4 to Fn577.7> becomes “1”, bit 0 to 3
(SM1 to SM4) of parameter No.4803 corresponding to bit position of the signal becomes 1. If spindle
position save error signal SPMER1 to SPMER4 <Fn577.4 to Fn577.7> becomes “1”, spindle position
save start signal SPMST1 to SPMST4 <Gn587.0 to Gn587.3> has to be set to “0”. If spindle position save
start signal SPMST1 to SPMST4 <Gn587.0 to Gn587.3> is set to “1” again, spindle position save error
signal SPMER1 to SPMER4 <Fn577.4 to Fn577.7> becomes “0”.
spindle position save start signal

SPMST1 to SPMST4
<Gn587.0 to Gn587.3>
spindle position save error signal

SPMER1 to SPMER4
<Fn577.4 to Fn577.7>
position coder one-rotation

signal detection status signal
PC1DT
<Fn047.0, Fn051.0,
Fn170.0, Fn268.0>
Fig.11.14 (b) Example of becoming spindle position save error signal “1”
Arbitrary spindle position phase synchronous control

In spindle phase synchronous control, phase between master spindle and slave spindle is synchronized
based on parameter No.4034 (shift amount for spindle phase synchronous control). This function can use
spindle position saved to parameter Nos.4840 to 4843 as phase shift amount (The value of parameter
(No.4034) (shift amount for spindle phase synchronous control) is disabled for this function.). If spindle
phase synchronous control signal SPPHS <Gn038.3> (or <Gn289.0 to Gn289.3>) is set to “1” with
arbitrary spindle position phase synchronization signal SPAPH1 to SPAPH4 <Gn587.4 to Gn587.7> of
slave spindle “1”, phase synchronization whose shift amount is parameter Nos.4840 to 4843 is started.
Spindle position save selection signal SMSL11 to SMSL14 <Gn588.0 to Gn588.3>, SMSL21 to SMSL24
<Gn588.4 to Gn588.7> of slave spindle can select which of parameter Nos.4840 to 4843 will be used.
Relationship between spindle position save selection signal SMSL11 to SMSL14 <Gn588.0 to Gn588.3>,
SMSL21 to SMSL24 <Gn588.4 to Gn588.7> and parameter Nos.4840 to 4843 is shown at Table 11.14
(a). If spindle position is not saved, and selected the pair of spindle position, alarm SP1256 “SPINDLE
PHASE-SYNC IMPOSSIBLE” is issued to master spindle and slave spindle when arbitrary spindle
position phase synchronous control is started. Bit 0 to 3 (SM1 to SM4) of parameter No.4803 of slave
spindle can check whether spindle position save has been completed or not.
- 1619 -
NOTE
1 Set bit 0 to 3 (SM1 to SM4) of parameter No.4803 to 0 if spindle position has to
be saved again, for example, motor or detector is exchanged, parameter file of
other machine is inputted, and so on.
2 Set bit 0 to 3 (SM1 to SM4) of parameter No.4803 to 0 if the saved spindle
position will not be used.
3 If bit 0 to 3 (SM1 to SM4) of parameter No.4803 is set to 1 by MDI unit or G10
command, alarm SP1256 “SPINDLE PHASE-SYNC IMPOSSIBLE” is not issued.
Don’t set bit 0 to 3 (SM1 to SM4) of parameter No.4803 to 1 by MDI unit or G10
command, if spindle position of phase synchronization is not saved to parameter
Nos.4840 to 4843.
spindle synchronous control signal

SPSYC
<Gn038.2>
spindle phase synchronization

control signal
SPPHS
<Gn038.3>
spindle position save selection signal

SMSL11 to SMSL14
<Gn588.0 to Gn588.3>
SMSL21 to SMSL24
<Gn588.4 to Gn588.7>
arbitrary spindle position phase
synchronization signal
SPAPH1 to SPAPH4
<Gn587.4 to Gn587.7>
spindle synchronous speed control

completion signal
FSPSY
<Fn044.2>
spindle phase synchronization control completion signal

FSPPH
<Fn044.3>
Fig.11.14 (c) Arbitrary spindle position phase synchronous control
Limitation
Plural slave spindles
If there are plural slave spindles for master spindle, 3 or more spindles are synchronized as shown in
Fig.11.14 (d), this function cannot be used.
- 1620 -
CNC
spindle spindle spindle

S1 S2 S3
Fig.11.14 (d) Example of plural slave spindles
Spindle synchronous control for spindle control with servo motor

This function cannot be used for spindle synchronous control for spindle control with servo motor.
Signal
Spindle position save start signal SPMST1 to SPMST4 <Gn587.0 to Gn587.3>
[Function] Spindle position save is started.
[Operation] If this signal of slave spindle is set to “1”, spindle position save of both master spindle
and slave spindle is started.
Spindle position save selection signal SMSL11 to SMSL14 <Gn588.0 to Gn588.3>

SMSL21 to SMSL24 <Gn588.4 to Gn588.7>
[Function] Parameter which saves spindle position is selected. Besides, parameter which is used as
shift amount for spindle phase synchronous control is selected.
[Operation] When spindle position save start signal SPMST is from “0” to “1”, parameter which saves
spindle position is selected by setting this signal of slave spindle as shown in Table 11.14
(b).
Table11.14 (b) Relationship between spindle position save selection signal and spindle
position saving parameter
spindle parameter notifying Spindle position save selection signal
position saving spindle position save SMSL21 to SMSL24 SMSL11 to SMSL14
parameter is completed or not <Gn588.4 to Gn588.7> <Gn588.0 to Gn588.3>
No.4840 No.4803#0 0 0
No.4841 No.4803#1 0 1
No.4842 No.4803#2 1 0
No.4843 No.4803#3 1 1
Besides, parameter which is used as shift amount for spindle phase synchronous control is
selected as shown in Table 11.14 (b).
Arbitrary spindle position phase synchronization signal

SPAPH1 to SPAPH4 <Gn587.4 to Gn587.7>
[Function] Spindle phase synchronous control whose shift amount is spindle position saved to
parameter is executed.
- 1621 -
[Operation] If spindle phase synchronous control signal SPPHS is set to “1” with this signal of slave
spindle “1”, spindle phase synchronous control whose shift amount is spindle position
saved to parameter is started.
Spindle position save completion signal SPMFN1 to SPMFN4 <Fn577.0 to Fn577.3>

[Function] These signals notify whether spindle position save is completed or not.
[Output cond.] These signals become “1” under the following condition:
- Spindle position is saved to parameter.
These signals become “0” under the following condition:
- Spindle position save is completed, and spindle position save start signal SPMST is
set to “0”.
- Spindle position save is not executed.
Spindle position save error signal SPMER1 to SPMER4 <Fn577.4 to Fn577.7>

[Function] These signals notify the error of spindle position save to have occurred.
[Output cond.] These signals become “1” under the following condition:
- Spindle position save is started when position coder one-rotation signal detection
status signal PC1DT of master spindle or slave spindle is “0”.
- Spindle position save start signal SPMST is set to “0” before having become spindle
position save completion signal SPMFN “1”
- Spindle position save cannot be completed correctly.
- Spindle positions save signal SPMST1 to SPMST4 of a slave spindle is set to “1”
during saving spindle position of other master-slave pair (in the case of plural slave
spindles for master spindle).
These signals become “0” under the following condition:
- Spindle position save start signal SPMST is set to “0” after having become spindle
position save error signal SPMER “1”, and spindle position save start signal SPMST
is set to “1” again.
- Spindle position save is not executed.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn587 SPAPH4 SPAPH3 SPAPH2 SPAPH1 SPMST4 SPMST3 SPMST2 SPMST1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn588 SMSL24 SMSL23 SMSL22 SMSL21 SMSL14 SMSL13 SMSL12 SMSL11
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn577 SPMER4 SPMER3 SPMER2 SPMER1 SPMFN4 SPMFN3 SPMFN2 SPMFN1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4803 SM4 SM3 SM2 SM1

#0 SM1 Spindle position save to parameter No.4840 is:

0: Not completed.
1: Completed.
- 1622 -
0: Not completed.
1: Completed.

0: Not completed.
1: Completed.

0: Not completed.
1: Completed.
NOTE
Set bit 0 to 3 (SM1 to SM4) of parameter No.4803 to 0 if spindle
position has to be saved again, for example, motor or detector is
exchanged, parameter file of other machine is inputted, and so on.
4840 Spindle position 1 used as phase shift amount

Spindle position is saved by CNC. Spindle phase synchronous control whose shift
amount is spindle position saved to this parameter can be executed.
Alarm and message

SP1256 SPINDLE PHASE-SYNC Arbitrary spindle position phase synchronous control cannot
IMPOSSIBLE be executed. Save the spindle position.
11.15 SPINDLE ORIENTATION

Overview
This function stops the spindle at a specified position. The spindle can be stopped in either of the
following two ways.
-The spindle is stopped by applying a function of the spindle control unit.
-The spindle is stopped using mechanical stop.
NOTE
To use this function, set bit 4 (NOR) of parameter No.8135 to 0.
- 1623 -
Explanation
- Using the spindle control unit
Some spindle control units can position the spindle motor by using sensors and position coders. The CNC
itself does not control positioning by using these units.
- Mechanical stop
To mechanically stop the spindle by using, for example, a shot pin, rotate the spindle at a constant low
speed and drive the pin into the spindle. The spindle can be rotated at a low constant speed by applying
either of the following methods.
- Spindle orientation signal SOR<Gn029.5>
- Spindle output control by the PMC
- Serial spindle orientation by a position coder

Two methods of serial interface spindle orientation are available:
- Spindle orientation by a magnetic sensor
- Spindle orientation by a position coder
Spindle orientation by a position coder is described below.
For the function of spindle orientation by a magnetic sensor, refer to "FANUC SPINDLE MOTOR αi
series PARAMETER MANUAL (B-65280EN)".
Two methods of spindle orientation by a position coder are available:

- Orientation with the fixed stop position
- Orientation with the stop position set externally
(1) Orientation with the fixed stop position: Bit 0 (ORT) of parameter No.3729 = 0
By inputting the spindle orientation command signal, the spindle can always be stopped at an
orientation stop position set beforehand with a parameter.
(2) Orientation with the stop position set externally: Bit 0 (ORT) of parameter No.3729 = 1
By externally setting the 12-bit orientation external stop position command signal and inputting the
spindle orientation command signal, the spindle can always be stopped at an arbitrary orientation
position within one spindle rotation.
- Least input increment

Least input increment of the stop position for spindle orientation can be changed by bit 0 (ORPUNT) of
parameter No.4542.
Moreover, data range are changed at the stop position (parameters Nos.4031 and 4204), stop position shift
amount (parameters Nos.4077 and 4228), in-position width (parameters Nos.4075 and 4226) and spindle
orientation signals with the stop position externally set . Detail is shown in Table11.15 (a) below.
Table11.15 (a)
Bit 0 (ORPUNT) of No.4542
0 1
Least input increment [deg] 360/4096=0.08789 360/32768=0.01098
Stop position for orientation
Data range of parameters Nos.4031,4204 0 to 4095 0 to 32767
Stop position shift amount for orientation

Data range of parameters Nos.4077,4228 -4095 to 4095 -32767 to 32767
Detection level for the spindle orientation

completion signal 0 to 100 0 to 1000
Data range of parameters Nos.4075,4226
- 1624 -

0 1
Spindle orientation signals with the stop position externally set
Data range of signals below
SH00A~SH14A<Gn078,Gn079>,
0 to 4095 0 to 32767
SH00B~SH14B<Gn080,Gn081>,
SH00C~SH14C<Gn208,Gn209>,
SH00D~SH14D<Gn270,Gn271>
- Wait time after changing signals with stop position externally set
When bit 0 (ORPUNT) of parameter No.4542 is set to 1, the wait time from the spindle orientation
signals with the stop position externally set change to the commanded orientation command signal is
reduced. Table11.15 (b) is shown the wait time.
Spindle orientation signals with the stop

position externally set
SH00A to SH14A
Spindle orientation command signals

ORCMA T
Table11.15 (b)
0 1
Wait time T[msec] 50 0
For the function of spindle orientation by a position coder, refer to "FANUC SPINDLE MOTOR αi
series PARAMETER MANUAL (B-65280EN)", too.
Signal
Spindle orientation command signals
ORCMA<Gn070.6> : For first spindle
ORCMB<Gn074.6> : For second spindle
ORCMC<Gn204.6> : For third spindle
ORCMD<Gn266.6> : For fourth spindle
[Function] These signals specify spindle orientation for serial spindle amplifiers.
For details of the sequence, refer to "FANUC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
PARAMETER MANUAL (B-65280EN)".
Spindle orientation signals with the stop position externally set

SH00A to SH14A<Gn078,Gn079> : For first spindle
SH00B to SH14B<Gn080,Gn081> : For second spindle
SH00C to SH14C<Gn208,Gn209> : For third spindle
SH00D to SH14D<Gn270,Gn271> : For fourth spindle
[Function] This command is used for specifying a stop position with an absolute position within one
rotation in the following equation:
- Bit 0(ORPUNT) of parameter No.4542 is set to 0 :
Effective 12bit (SH00A to SH11A, SH00B to SH11B, SH00C to SH11C, SH00D to
SH11D)
- 1625 -
360 11 i
Stop　position（ deg ）= × Σ(2 × Pi)
4096 i =0
- Bit 0(ORPUNT) of parameter No.4542 is set to 1 :
Effective 15bit (SH00A to SH14A, SH00B to SH14B, SH00C to SH14C, SH00D to
SH14D)
360 14
(deg ）=
Stop　position　　 × Σ(2 i × Pi)
32768 i =0
where Pi = 0 when SHiA = 0, or Pi = 1 when SHiA = 1.
For details of the sequence, refer to "FANUC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
PARAMETER MANUAL (B-65280EN)".
NOTE
When bit 0 (ORPUNT) of No.4542 is set to 0, after the spindle orientation signals
with the stop position externally set is set, please change the orientation signals
ORCM after waiting for 50msec or more.
When bit 0 (ORPUNT) of No.4542 is set to 1, the wait time is unnecessary.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn070 ORCMA
Gn078 SH07A SH06A SH05A SH04A SH03A SH02A SH01A SH00A
Gn079 SH14A SH13A SH12A SH11A SH10A SH09A SH08A
Gn074 ORCMB
Gn080 SH07B SH06B SH05B SH04B SH03B SH02B SH01B SH00B
Gn081 SH14B SH13B SH12B SH11B SH10B SH09B SH08B
Gn204 ORCMC
Gn208 SH07C SH06C SH05C SH04C SH03C SH02C SH01C SH00C
Gn209 SH14C SH13C SH12C SH11C SH10C SH09C SH08C
Gn266 ORCMD
Gn270 SH07D SH06D SH05D SH04D SH03D SH02D SH01D SH00D
Gn271 SH14D SH13D SH12D SH11D SH10D SH09D SH08D
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3729 ORTs

#0 ORTs When a serial spindle is used, the spindle orientation function of stop position external
setting type based on the position coder is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
- 1626 -
NOTE
When bit 0 (ORPUNT) of No.4542 is set to 1, if bit 0 (ORTs) of
parameter No.3729 is changed, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.
4031 Stop position in orientation by a position coder (MAIN spindle)
4204 Stop position in orientation by a position coder (SUB spindle)

[Valid data range] Depend on the bit 0 (ORPUNT) of No.4542 setting (Refer to the table below)
Bit 0 (ORPUNT) of No.4542 Least input increment Valid data range
0 360/4096= 0.08789 0 to 4095
1 360/32768= 0.01098 0 to 32767
Each of these parameters specifies a stop position in orientation by a position coder.

These parameters are valid when bit 0 (ORT) of parameter No.3729 is set to 0.
4075 Orientation completion signal detection level (limits of in-position)（MAIN spindle）
4226 Orientation completion signal detection level (limits of in-position)（SUB spindle）

Bit 0 (ORPUNT) of No.4542 Valid data range
0 0 to 100
1 0 to 1000
This data is used to set the detecting level of orientation completion signal (ORARA).
ORARA is assumed to be 1 if the position error is within the setting.
4077 Stop position shift amount in orientation by a position coder(MAIN spindle)
4228 Stop position shift amount in orientation by a position coder(SUB spindle)

Bit 0 (ORPUNT) of No.4542 Least input increment Valid data range
0 360/4096= 0.08789 -4095 to 4095
1 360/32768= 0.01098 -32767 to 32767
Each of these parameters specifies a stop position shift amount in orientation by a

position coder.
This parameter is valid no matter what the setting of bit 0 (ORT) of parameter No.3729
is.
- 1627 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4542 ORPUNT

#0 ORPUNT Least input increment for Stop position of spindle orientation, Stop position shift amount,
In-position width
0: 360/4096 = 0.08789 [deg]
1: 360/32768 = 0.01098 [deg]
CAUTION
In the αi position coder, the effect is not achieved by the fine
resolution application of stop position because the sensor
resolution is 4096p/rev.
NOTE
To use this function, the corresponding spindle software is
required.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8135 NOR
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#4 NOR Spindle orientation is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when spindle serial output can be
used.
Alarm and message

SP1258 ILLEGAL SPINDLE PARAMETER The parameter is an illegal setting. Please check as follows.
SETTING (SOFT)
- Bit 0 of parameter No.4542 is set to 1 the spindle control
software that does not support this function. Please set 0 to
the bit 0 of parameter No.4542.
Diagnosis data
445 Position data of position coder (pulse）

[Unit of data] Pulse
- 1628 -
Bit 0 (ORPUNT) of No.4542 Valid data range

0 0 to 4095
1 0 to 32767
In serial spindle, position coder signal pulse data from one-rotation signal is displayed as
the spindle position data. It’s effective when bit 1 of parameter No.3117 is set to 1.
For displaying spindle position data, spindle orientation must be executed once.
Caution
CAUTION
1 To perform spindle orientation by using the spindle control unit, the signals of the
spindle control unit must be used.
To perform serial spindle orientation by using a position coder (to perform serial
spindle orientation with the stop position set externally), the serial spindle control
unit signals must be used.
2 When the function of spindle orientation with the stop position set externally is
used, the parameters for stop positions in orientation by a position coder
(parameters Nos.4031 and 4204) are invalid.
3 In the αi position coder, the effect is not achieved by the fine resolution
application of stop position because the sensor resolution is 4096p/rev.
4 The precision for stop position is depended by the specification of sensor.
Note
NOTE
1 Stop position external setting type orientation cannot be used in Magnetic sensor
method spindle orientation.
2 Spindle orientation with the spindle positioning function differs from that
described in this section. For details, see "Spindle Positioning."
Reference item
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series PARAMETER MANUAL Position coder method spindle orientation
(B-65280EN)
11.16 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING

Overview
Spindle output switching switches between the two motor windings, one for low speed and the other for
high speed, incorporated into the special spindle motors. This ensures that the spindle motor demonstrates
stable output characteristics over a wide range.
Since spindle output switching is a function of the spindle control unit, also refer to the manual for the
spindle control unit being used.
This section describes the relationship between spindle output switching and the spindle control function
in the CNC.
Explanation
- Operation of spindle output-switchable spindle motor
To switch the spindle output characteristics, the windings are usually switched using a relay. Prior to the
completion of winding switching, the spindle rotates free from drive power.
- 1629 -
Output switching changes the relationship between a speed command, issued from the CNC to the spindle,
and the output characteristics of the spindle motor. However, the relationship between the speed
command and spindle motor speed is not changed.
- Spindle output switching timing

During actual machining, the spindle is usually controlled in the following way.
(1) Constant spindle speed during cutting, such as milling
(2) Continuously changing spindle speed during cutting, such as in constant surface speed control
(3) Controlling the position loop including the spindle motor during rigid tapping, spindle positioning,
Cs contour control, etc.
For applications such as those in (1), we recommend switching the output characteristics for low speed
and high speed by using the spindle motor speed detection signal of the spindle control unit.
For applications such as those described in (2) and (3), the spindle must not rotate with no drive power
applied during cutting or positioning. It is necessary for the output characteristics to be switched
appropriately before machining or for output switching to be masked by using a PMC ladder sequence.
- Output switching and gear switching

Spindle output switching ensures that the spindle motor demonstrates stable characteristics over a wide
range, and eliminates the requirement of a mechanical spindle gear switching mechanism.
In creating a PMC ladder sequence for output switching, however, using the gear switching of the CNC’s
spindle control function may facilitate programming.
Note the following points when using gear switching for CNC spindle control for output switching with a
machine tool having no mechanical gear switching mechanism.
• When gear selection output signals, GR1O and GR2O <Fn034.0, 1>, are used (for machining centers
in which constant surface speed control is not provided and GTT, bit 4 of parameter No. 3706, is set
to 0)
Set two gears, which are almost the same.
(Example: Value of parameter No.3741 = value of parameter No.3742 - 1, value of No.3742 =
Maximum spindle speed)
When parameter No.3741 is equal to parameter No.3742, the CNC judges that one gear is used, and
does not output the GR2O signal.
• The parameters related to gear switching points, SGT, bit 3 of parameter No.3705, and SGB, bit 2 of
parameter No.3705, parameters Nos.3761 and 3751 can be used.
• In usual spindle control, depending on the speed at switching points, the speed specified by the
spindle speed command may differ slightly from the actual speed in the area where the maximum
spindle speed is set to the maximum speed - 1. (This is because the spindle motor speed, specified by
the speed command, is calculated based on the settings of parameters Nos.3741 to 3744.)
This does not apply to rigid tapping. (Because the machine tool is controlled using the feedback
signal from the detector in the position loop.)
• When gear selection input signals, GR1 and GR2 <Gn028.1, 2>, are used (for lathes or machining
centers in which constant surface speed control is provided or GTT, bit 4 of parameter No.3706, is
set to 1)
Parameter settings are read according to the input signal information. Unlike the GR2O and GR1O
signals, these signals do not require special parameter settings.
Example)
When parameters Nos.3741 and 3742 are set to the maximum spindle speed.
Create a PMC sequence that specifies the following.
For gear 1, set GR1 and GR2 to “0”.
For gear 2, set GR2 to “0” and set GR1 to “1”.
The PMC must determine the switching timing on the basis of some information.
- 1630 -
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (This manual) Spindle speed control
Rigid tapping
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series PARAMETER MANUAL Spindle switching control
(B-65280EN)
- 1631 -
11.17 SPINDLE COMMAND SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL

Overview
Spindles can be synchronized with each other for control.
Two spindles can be combined, one as a master spindle and the other as a slave spindle, so that Cs
contouring control, rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and normal spindle rotation control can also be
used with the slave spindle under control by the master spindle.
A master spindle and slave spindle to be placed under spindle command synchronous control can be
freely selected from the first to fourth spindles.
Multiple combinations of a master spindle and slave spindle can be placed under spindle command
This function can be used with serial spindles.
Unlike spindle synchronous control, spindle command synchronous control does not guarantee spindle
operation synchronization between a master spindle and slave spindle. Moreover, applicable spindle
functions differ.
The major differences from spindle synchronous control are indicated below.
For details, see also Section of "SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL".
Spindle command
Function Spindle synchronous control
synchronous control
Δ(Same speed command is O(Synchronization/phase
Combination Spindle rotation control
used.) matching is possible.)
with other
Cs contour control O X
spindle
Rigid tapping O X
functions
Spindle positioning O X
Synchronization of multiple slave spindles O O
Parking function O X
NOTE
1 This function is an optional function.
2 To use this function for M series, any option for "Spindle synchronous control" or
"Spindle command synchronous control" is required.
To use this function for T series, the option for "Spindle synchronous control" is
required.
Explanation
When the spindle command synchronous control signal ESRSYC<Gn064.6> (ESSYC1-ESSYC4
<Gn264.0>-<Gn264.3> when bit 5 (SSY) of parameter No.3704 is set to 1.) is input from the PMC, the
spindle command synchronous control mode is selected.
In spindle command synchronous control, a command for the master spindle also functions as a command
for the slave spindle.
The ordinary specification method for a master spindle can be used without modification in the spindle
rotation control mode, Cs contouring control mode, rigid tapping mode, and spindle positioning mode.
The parking function can stop each spindle under spindle command synchronous control.
- Configuration of synchronized spindles

In spindle command synchronous control, a spindle that accepts an S command/move command is
referred to as a master spindle, and a spindle that ignores a command for itself and performs operation in
synchronism with the master spindle is referred to as a slave spindle.
When bit 5 (SSY) of parameter No.3704 is set to 0

The configuration of spindles placed under spindle command synchronous control is as follows:
- 1632 -

Spindle number First spindle Second spindle
When bit 5 (SSY) of parameter No.3704 is set to 1

Which slave spindle is placed under spindle command synchronous control with which master spindle is
set using parameter No.4821.
Second, third, or fourth spindle First spindle
First, third, or fourth spindle Second spindle
Spindle number
First, second, or fourth spindle Third spindle
First, second, or third spindle Fourth spindle
• Multiple slave spindles can be synchronized with one master spindle.
Example)
A combination of the first spindle (master spindle)/the second, third, and fourth spindles (slave
spindles) is possible.
• A combination that uses a slave spindle as a master spindle is not allowed.
- Operation in each control mode

1 Spindle rotation control mode
The slave spindle rotates upon the issue of the same command as that used for the master spindle.
The command does not specify the speed of the spindle, instead specifies the ratio of the spindle
motor speed to the maximum speed. So, only when the spindle unit configuration of master and
slave spindles (parameter settings for a maximum motor speed, motor-spindle gear ratio, and so
forth) is the same, the two spindles rotate at about the same speed. (However, the synchronous state
is not guaranteed.)
For details of spindle rotation control, see “SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL.”
2 Cs contour control mode
When the Cs contouring control is used together, Cs contouring control on a slave spindle operating
in synchronism with the master spindle is possible. (Control independent of the master spindle is
impossible.)
A move command address and position are displayed only for the master spindle.
In reference position return operation, the two spindles are checked for reference position return
completion before the reference position return completion signal is turned “1”.
In spindle command synchronous control, switching between the spindle rotation control mode and
the Cs contouring control mode is possible.
For details of Cs contouring control, see "Cs CONTOUR CONTROL".
3 Rigid tapping
When the rigid tapping is selected, the slave spindle supports rigid tapping under the control of a
rigid tapping command for the master spindle. (Rigid tapping for the slave spindle cannot be
performed independently of the master spindle.)
For details of rigid tapping, see “RIGID TAPPING.”
4 Spindle positioning
When the spindle positioning is selected, the spindle positioning function for the slave spindle is
enabled under the control of a spindle positioning command for the master spindle. (The spindle
positioning function for the slave spindle cannot be used independently of the master spindle.)
In the same way as with Cs contour axis control, the display of command address and position data
is limited to the master spindle. Operations such as orientation are performed in the same way as
usual. However, both spindles are checked for the completion of orientation, and the spindle
positioning sequence is processed only after the completion of positioning by both spindles has been
confirmed.
For details of spindle positioning, see “SPINDLE POSITIONING.”
- 1633 -
- Parking function
The parking function stops the rotation and movement of each of master and slave spindles placed in the
spindle command synchronous control mode, regardless of the spindle control mode (spindle rotation
control, Cs contouring control, rigid tapping, or spindle positioning).
In the parking state, the spindle is placed in the following state, depending on its mode:
Spindle rotation control mode:

Rotation is stopped in the same way as when S0 is specified.
Other modes:
Movement is stopped in the same way as in the case of no distribution pulse.
With a move command for positioning of a Cs contouring control axis or spindle in the parking state,
only the movement of the spindle in the parking state is stopped by updating the coordinate system.
Reference position return operation for a Cs contouring control axis and spindle orientation operation for
spindle positioning are disabled for a spindle placed in the parking state.
If reference position return operation in the Cs contouring control mode or spindle orientation in the
spindle positioning mode is specified with one spindle placed in the parking state, the reference position
return completion signal is turned “1” when the spindle not placed in the parking state has completed a
reference position return operation.
The parking function stops the movement of only a spindle that is placed in the parking state. So, the
parking function can be used, for example, to continue machining by stopping one spindle no longer
required or to perform Cs contouring control, rigid tapping, and spindle positioning with the slave spindle
by placing the master spindle in the parking state.
NOTE
1 In the spindle command synchronous control mode, the two spindles are
checked for a position error at all times, regardless of the parking state. The
excessive error alarm (SV0410 or others) is issued when a spindle has moved
due to a load from the position where the spindle was stopped by the parking
function.
2 The parking function stops the movement of only a spindle that is placed in the
parking state. So, if parking is applied to a spindle after a reference position
return operation or spindle orientation operation is once performed, the spindle
position is shifted from the machine coordinates. Until another reference position
return operation or spindle orientation operation is performed after parking is
canceled, the relationship between the spindle position and machine coordinates
is not guaranteed.
3 The parking signal becomes immediately valid in the spindle command
synchronous control mode. However, even if the parking signal is input during
reference position return operation in the Cs contouring control mode or during
spindle orientation operation in the spindle positioning mode, the reference
position return operation or spindle orientation operation continues until it is
completed. Parking starts immediately after completion of such an operation.
4 Do not specify a reference position return operation in the Cs contouring control
mode or a spindle orientation operation in the spindle positioning mode while the
two spindles are placed in the parking state. When the two spindles are placed in
the parking state, the reference position return operation cannot be completed.
- 1634 -
NOTE
5 When using parking signal PK7 or PK8 for spindle synchronous control while
both spindle command synchronous control and spindle synchronous control are
being used, set the SPK bit (bit 7 of parameter No.4800) to 1. This sets parking
signals PKESS1 and PKESS2, used for spindle command synchronous control,
to bits 6 and 7 of G031.
- Spindle command synchronization and phase error monitor signal

Spindle command synchronous control does not guarantee synchronous spindle operation. In spindle
control involving a position loop as in the case of Cs contouring control, rigid tapping, and spindle
positioning, however, the synchronous state of the two spindles can be maintained by matching the
position gains of the two spindles.
For monitoring of the synchronous state of two spindles in such a case, the phase error monitor signal
SYCAL is available. The error between two spindles is monitored at all times. When a synchronization
error exceeding the value set in parameter No.4826 is detected, this signal is set to “1”. When a
synchronization error not exceeding the value set in parameter No.4826 is detected, this signal is set to 0.
In the spindle rotation control mode, however, synchronous state monitoring is not performed. So, the
phase error monitor signal has no effect, and is set to 0 at all times.
Note that even if phase error monitor signal SYCAL is output, no CNC alarm is issued. This signal is
designed to be used by the PMC to monitor the machine synchronization state. Its usage varies depending
on the machine tool builder. The use of this signal is not mandatory.
NOTE
During spindle command synchronous control, a reference position return
operation in the Cs contouring control mode, a spindle orientation operation in
the spindle positioning mode, or a function (such as spindle orientation) that is
directly specified for a spindle with a PMC signal is performed for each spindle
independently, so that synchronization is not guaranteed.
- Relationship between spindle command synchronous control and spindle

synchronous control
The spindle synchronous control mode and the spindle command synchronous control mode cannot be
selected for the same spindle at the same time.
In a mode other than spindle synchronous control mode, no restriction is imposed on the selection timing
of spindle command synchronous control. Usually, select spindle command synchronous control when
the master spindle is not executing a move command in the spindle rotation control mode or in the Cs
contouring control mode.
No restriction is imposed on the timing of spindle command synchronous control cancellation. Usually,
cancel spindle command synchronous control when no command is executed in any spindle control mode.
When spindle command synchronous control is canceled, the mode of the slave spindle switches to the
spindle rotation control mode. The master spindle maintains the selected spindle control mode.
The table below indicates the spindle control mode switching of the master and slave spindles based on
the transitions of the spindle command synchronous control signal and spindle synchronous control
signal.
- 1635 -
Spindle control mode Switching when the spindle command synchronous control signal makes a
switching transition from “0” to “1” in each spindle control mode selection state
SV → SV(ESY) SY → SY
Master spindle SP → SP(ESY) CT → CT(ESY)
Note 3 Note 4
SP → SP(ESY) SP → CT(ESY) SP → SV(ESY) SY → SY
Slave spindle
Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4
Switching when the spindle command synchronous control signal makes a

Spindle control mode
transition from “1” to “0” in each spindle command synchronous control mode
switching
selection state
Master spindle SP(ESY) → SP CT(ESY) → CT SV(ESY) → SV
Slave spindle SP(ESY) → SP CT(ESY) → SP SV(ESY) → SP
Spindle control mode Switching when the spindle synchronous control signal makes a transition from
switching “0” to “1” in each spindle command synchronous control mode selection state
SP(ESY) → SP(ESY) CT(ESY) → CT(ESY) SV(ESY) → SV(ESY)
Master spindle
Note 4 Note 4 Note 4
SP(ESY) → SP(ESY) CT(ESY) → CT(ESY) SV(ESY) → SV(ESY)
Slave spindle
Note 4 Note 4 Note 4
The symbols used in the tables above have the following meanings:
SP : Spindle rotation control mode
CT : Cs contour control mode
SV : Rigid tapping mode or spindle positioning mode
SP(ESY) : Spindle rotation control mode during spindle command synchronous control
CT(ESY) : Cs contouring control mode during spindle command synchronous control
SV(ESY) : Rigid tapping or spindle positioning mode during spindle command synchronous
control
SY : Spindle synchronous control mode
NOTE
1 After initialization to the spindle rotation control mode, operation is performed
with a speed command for the master spindle. So, a speed change can occur.
2 Even if the master spindle is already at the reference position, the slave spindle
is not at the reference position yet when the mode of the slave spindle is just
switched to the Cs contouring control mode by spindle command synchronous
control. So, perform a reference position return operation again.
3 When the master spindle is placed in the rigid tapping or spindle positioning
mode, the input of the spindle command synchronous control signal is masked in
the CNC, so that the mode is not switched to the spindle command synchronous
control mode. After the rigid tapping or spindle positioning mode of the master
spindle is canceled, the master spindle and slave spindle are placed in the
spindle command synchronous control mode. After the spindle command
synchronous control mode is once set, the specification or cancellation of the rigid
tapping or spindle positioning mode of the master spindle is applied to both of the
master spindle and slave spindle.
4 The spindle control mode currently selected is maintained. As an alarm
indicating that the spindle control mode is not switched, alarm PS0194
“SPINDLE COMMAND IN SYNCHRO-MODE” is displayed. This alarm can be
cleared by resetting the signal input later to “0”.
5 Switch to the spindle command synchronous control mode when the slave
spindle is placed in the spindle rotation control mode.
- 1636 -
NOTE
6 For the slave spindle placed in the spindle command synchronous control mode,
the switching to a spindle mode such as Cs contouring control, rigid tapping,
spindle positioning, and spindle synchronous control cannot be specified.
- Spindle rotation direction

In the spindle command synchronous control mode, the same speed command and move command are
issued to the master spindle and slave spindle.
The specified rotation direction of a spindle can be changed using a PMC signal (spindle forward/reverse
rotation command signal SFR or SRV) or serial spindle parameter according to the control mode.
- Position deviation check and alarm display

When spindle command synchronous control is used in a mode other than the spindle rotation control
mode, the master spindle and slave spindle are checked for a position deviation.
An in-position check is made to see if the position deviation of each of the two spindles is within a
parameter-set range.
Position deviation excessive error checks at stop time and move time are made to see if the position
deviation of each spindle exceeds a parameter-set value.
The parameters set for the master spindle are used for both spindles.
An alarm for an excessive error is displayed for the master spindle. Which of the master spindle and slave
spindle has entered the excessive error state cannot be identified on the screen.
Limitation
• Both of the master spindle and slave spindle must have hardware such as a spindle-related detector
required for the functions (Cs contouring control, rigid tapping, and spindle positioning) that use
spindle command synchronous control.
• When an S command is specified using the second to fourth spindles as master spindles, the multi
-spindle option is required. (When PMC-based spindle output control is used, the multi-spindle
option is not required.)
Diagnosis data
418 Position deviation of each spindle
When spindles are involved in a position loop, the position deviation of each spindle is indicated.
The unit is pulses. The detection unit per pulse varies from one spindle control mode to another.
The absolute value of the synchronization error of each spindle in spindle command synchronous control
is indicated.
A synchronization error is indicated with a slave spindle.
In the spindle rotation control mode, the synchronization error is 0 at all times.
Spindle screen
In the spindle command synchronous control mode, the display dedicated to the spindle command
synchronous control mode is not provided. Instead, a spindle control mode selected in the spindle
command synchronous control mode is displayed.
When the Cs contouring control is set in spindle command synchronous control, the Cs contouring
control mode is displayed.
- 1637 -
Signal
Spindle command synchronous control signal ESRSYC<Gn064.6>
[Function] This signal specifies switching to the spindle command synchronous control mode for the
first/second spindles.
[Operation] When this signal is set to “1”, the spindle command synchronous control mode for the
first/second spindles is set.
When this signal is set to “0”, the spindle command synchronous control mode for the
first/second spindles is canceled.
This signal is valid only when bit 5 (SSY) of parameter No.3704 is set to 0.
Spindle command synchronous control signal for each spindle

ESSYC1<Gn264.0> : For first spindle
ESSYC2<Gn264.1> : For second spindle
ESSYC3<Gn264.2> : For third spindle
ESSYC4<Gn264.3> : For fourth spindle
[Function] These signals specify switching to the spindle command synchronous control mode for
each spindle.
[Operation] When each of these signals is set to “1”, the spindle command synchronous control mode
with the corresponding spindle set as a slave spindle is set.
When each of these signals is set to “0”, the spindle command synchronous control mode
with the corresponding spindle set as a slave spindle is canceled.
When ESSYC1 is set to “1”: Spindle command synchronous control with the first spindle
set as a slave spindle is exercised.
When ESSYC2 is set to “1”: Spindle command synchronous control with the second
spindle set as a slave spindle is exercised.
When ESSYC3 is set to “1”: Spindle command synchronous control with the third
When ESSYC4 is set to “1”: Spindle command synchronous control with the fourth
These signals are valid only when bit 5 (SSY) of parameter No.3704 is set to 1.
Which spindle is synchronized with which spindle is set using parameter No.4821.
First spindle command synchronous parking signal
PKESS1<Gn122.6> or PKESS1<Gn031.6>
[Function] This signal parks the first spindle in spindle command synchronous control.
[Operation] When this signal is set to “1”, the first spindle is placed in the parking state.
When this signal is set to “0”, the parking state of the first spindle is canceled.
When bit 7 (SPK) of parameter No.4800 is set to 1, <Gn031.6> is used.
Second spindle command synchronous parking signal

PKESS2<Gn122.7> or PKESS2<Gn031.7>
[Function] This signal parks the second spindle in spindle command synchronous control.
[Operation] When this signal is set to “1”, the second spindle is placed in the parking state.
When this signal is set to “0”, the parking state of the second spindle is canceled.
When bit 7 (SPK) of parameter No.4800 is set to 1, <Gn031.7> is used.
- 1638 -
Spindle command synchronous parking signal for each spindle

PKESE1<Gn265.0> : For first spindle
PKESE2<Gn265.1> : For second spindle
PKESE3<Gn265.2> : For third spindle
PKESE4<Gn265.3> : For fourth spindle
[Function] These signals park each spindle in spindle command synchronous control.
[Operation] When each of these signals is set to “1”, the corresponding spindle is placed in the
parking state.
When each of these signals is set to “0”, the parking state of the corresponding spindle is
canceled.
When PKESE1 is set to “1”: The first spindle is placed in the parking state.
When PKESE2 is set to “1”: The second spindle is placed in the parking state.
When PKESE3 is set to “1”: The third spindle is placed in the parking state.
When PKESE4 is set to “1”: The fourth spindle is placed in the parking state.
Phase error monitor signal SYCAL<Fn044.4>

[Function] This signal posts that in the spindle command synchronous control mode for the
first/second spindles, the error pulse difference between the two spindles is greater than a
- In the spindle command synchronous control mode, the error pulse difference
between two spindles is greater than the value set in parameter No.4826 after spindle
command synchronous control is completed.
- The spindle command synchronous control mode is not set.
between two spindles is equal to or less than the value set in parameter No.4826.
Phase error monitor signal for each spindle

SYCAL1<Fn043.0> : For first spindle
SYCAL2<Fn043.1> : For second spindle
SYCAL3<Fn043.2> : For third spindle
SYCAL4<Fn043.3> : For fourth spindle
[Function] These signals post that in the spindle command synchronous control mode with each
spindle set as a slave spindle, the error pulse difference between two spindles is greater
than a parameter-set value.
[Output cond.] Each of these signals is set to “1” in the following case:
between two spindles is greater than the value set in parameter No.4826 after spindle
command synchronous control is completed.
Each of these signals is set to “0” in the following cases:
- The spindle command synchronous control mode is not set.
between two spindles is equal to or less than the value set in parameter No.4826.
These signals are valid only when bit 5 (SSY) of parameter No.3704 is set to 1.
- 1639 -
Even in the spindle command synchronous control mode, the signals that need to be
input/output or are used to control those functions (such as spindle orientation) directly
specified from the PMC for the spindle control unit are provided independently for each
spindle.
For first spindle : (DI:G0070 to G0073, DO:F0045 to F0048)
For second spindle: (DI:G0074 to G0077, DO:F0049 to F0052)
For third spindle : (DI:G0204 to G0207, DO:F0168 to F0171)
For fourth spindle : (DI:G0266 to G0269, DO:F0266 to F0269)
When using the spindle command synchronous control function, exercise control on the
spindle command synchronous control signals and also manipulate the signals for each
spindle as required.
(Such a signal state that the master spindle and slave spindle under spindle command
synchronous control can make the same movement needs to be set.)
NOTE
In the spindle command synchronous control mode, the states of
both the master spindle and slave spindle are checked. So, if
spindle command synchronous control is specified in the Cs
contouring control mode before the slave spindle is not activated
yet, for example, the VREADY OFF alarm may be issued. Pay
attention to control on the PMC signals for the slave spindle as
well.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn031 PKESS2 PKESS1
Gn064 ESRSYC
Gn122 PKESS2 PKESS1
Gn264 ESSYC4 ESSYC3 ESSYC2 ESSYC1
Gn265 PKESE4 PKESE3 PKESE2 PKESE1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn044 SYCAL
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3704 SSY

NOTE
#5 SSY Simple synchronous spindle control by each spindle is:

0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
- 1640 -
The master axis and slave axis of spindle command synchronous control can be selected
from the arbitrary spindles.
The target spindle of spindle command synchronous control is set in parameter No. 4821.
• Signals of spindle command synchronous control of each spindle ESSYCs
• Parking signals of spindle command synchronous control of each spindle PKESEs
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4800 SPK EPZ

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#6 EPZ When the parking signal is switched in the reference position established state during Cs
contour control exercised using spindle command synchronous control:
0: Reference position established state is continued.
1: Reference position established state is canceled.
If this parameter is set, the same reference position return operation as manual reference
position return is performed with the G28 command immediately after the parking signal
is switched.
The G00 command performs a positioning operation including reference position return
(when bit 1 (NRF) of parameter No.3700 is set to 0).
#7 SPK As the parking signals for spindle command synchronous control:

0: PKESS1<Gn122.6> (first spindle) and PKESS2<Gn122.7> (second spindle) are
used.
1: PKESS1<Gn031.6> (first spindle) and PKESS2<Gn031.7> (second spindle) are
used.
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid only when bit 5 (SSY) of parameter No.
3704 is set to 0.
2 If the parking signals PK7 and PK8 for synchronization control are
used when spindle command synchronous control and
synchronization control are used at the same time, set bit 7 (SPK)
of parameter No.4800 to 1 to use the parking signals PKESS1 and
PKESS2 for spindle command synchronous control as
<Gn031.6,Gn031.7>.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3716 A/Ss

NOTE
- 1641 -

0: Analog spindle.
1: Serial spindle.
NOTE
NOTE

to
4821 Master axis of each slave spindle under spindle command synchronous spindle control
NOTE

[Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled spindle axes (within a path)
When a spindle is set as a slave spindle in spindle command synchronous control on each
[Examples of parameter setting]

• When spindle command synchronous control is exercised with the first spindle
selected as a master spindle and the second spindle selected as a slave spindle:
No.4821(1)=0
No.4821(2)=1
No.4821(3)=0
No.4821(4)=0
• When spindle command synchronous control is exercised with four spindles under
the following combinations:
(Two combinations, namely, first spindle (master spindle)/ second spindle (slave
spindle), and third spindle (master spindle)/fourth spindle (slave spindle))
No.4821(1)=0
No.4821(2)=1
No.4821(3)=0
No.4821(4)=3
- 1642 -
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid if bit 5 (SSY) of parameter No.3704 is set to
1.
2 The setting of a slave spindle as a master spindle is invalid. Be
sure to set 0 for a spindle that is to function as a master spindle.
Allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in the spindle command
4826
synchronization control mode

command synchronization control mode.
This parameter is used to check a spindle synchronization error phase difference.
parameter is detected, the spindle phase error monitor signals SYCAL<Fn044.4> and
SYCALs are set to “1”.
NOTE
1 The detection unit per pulse depends on the spindle control mode
(Cs contour control, rigid tapping, or spindle positioning).
2 Set this parameter for a spindle that is to function as a slave
spindle. Set 0 for the master spindle.
3 In the spindle rotation control mode, synchronization error detection
is not performed.
Alarm and message

control mode.
Caution
CAUTION
1 As an output signal for monitoring a phase error during spindle command
synchronous control, the phase error monitor signal SYCAL is available. The
action to be taken when a phase error is detected depends on the specifications
of the machine tool builder.
2 In multi-path control, spindle command synchronous control cannot be exercised
on spindles each belonging to a different path.
Reference item
For details of the parameters Nos.4000 to 4539, signals, and alarms for the serial spindle control unit,
refer to the manuals related to serial spindles listed below.
- 1643 -
11.18 SPINDLE COMMAND SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL

INDEPENDENT PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION
FUNCTION
Overview
When Cs contouring control axes are placed under spindle command synchronous control, pitch error
compensation can be exercised on the master spindle and slave spindle independently of each other.
With the bi-directional pitch error compensation option, bi-directional pitch error compensation can also
be enabled.
Explanation
When the master spindle is exercising Cs contouring control in spindle command synchronous control,
the slave spindle is also placed in the Cs contouring control mode.
An address and position related to a move command are displayed only for the master spindle, and the
slave spindle performs the same operation as specified by the move command for the master spindle. The
same pitch error compensation as applied to the master spindle is applied to the slave spindle.
The same timing and compensation amount of pitch error compensation are used for the master spindle
and slave spindle.
A pitch error compensation amount different from that for the master spindle can be applied to the slave
spindle by setting bit 1 (EPC) of parameter No.3601 to 1 and setting the parameters for the slave spindle
(pitch error compensation reference position compensation number, minus side compensation point
number, and plus side compensation point number) and pitch error compensation data for the slave
spindle.
The same timing of pitch error compensation application is applied to the master spindle and slave
spindle.
The parameter settings of a pitch error compensation interval and compensation magnification for the
master spindle are valid.
Pitch error compensation point numbers specific to the slave spindle are required in addition to those used
for the master spindle.
When bi-directional pitch error compensation is used, a different type of pitch error compensation can be
applied to a movement in each of the positive and negative directions.
• Example of setting spindle command synchronous control pitch error compensation)
• Parameter setting
Parameter number Description Setting value
Enable independent pitch error compensation for Cs contouring
3601#1 1
control axes
3620 Reference position compensation number (master spindle) 60
3621 Minus side compensation point number (master spindle) 61
3622 Plus side compensation point number (master spindle) 68
3623 Compensation magnification (common) 2
3624 Compensation point interval (common) 45000
3661 (slave spindle number) Reference position compensation number (slave spindle) 69
3666 (slave spindle number) Minus side compensation point number (slave spindle) 70
3671 (slave spindle number) Plus side compensation point number (slave spindle) 77
- 1644 -
• Pitch error compensation data (master spindle side)

Compensation number 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
Setting value +1 -2 +1 +3 -1 -1 -3 +2 +1
Compensation value +2 -4 +2 +6 -2 -2 -6 +4 +2
• Pitch error compensation data (slave spindle side)

Compensation number 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77
Setting value +3 +2 +4 -3 -4 -6 +4 0 +3
Compensation value +6 +4 +8 -6 -8 -12 +8 0 +6
Suppose that the settings above are made. When the master spindle under spindle command synchronous
control outputs the compensation pulses (+2) of compensation number 60, for example, the compensation
pulses (+6) of compensation number 69 are output to the slave spindle.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3601 EPC

NOTE
#1 EPC The pitch error compensation on an axis of Cs contour control on the slave spindle side
during spindle command synchronous control is:
0: The same as that on the master spindle.
1: Just for the slave spindle.
Number of a pitch error compensation position for the reference position for each slave axis when
3661
independent pitch error compensation is performed under spindle command synchronous control
NOTE

Set the number of a pitch error compensation position for the reference position.
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid if pitch error compensation on an axis of Cs
contour control on the salve side during spindle command
synchronous control is carried out just for the slave axis (bit 1
(EPC) of parameter No.3601 is set to 1).
2 The usable number of pitch error compensation positions and their
range depend on the option configuration.
- 1645 -
Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position for each slave axis
3666 when independent pitch error compensation is performed under spindle command synchronous
control
NOTE

Set the compensation position number at the farthest end in the negative direction.
NOTE
2 When using the both-direction pitch error compensation function,
set a compensation position number for a movement in the positive
direction.
Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely positive position for each slave axis
3671 when independent pitch error compensation is performed under spindle command synchronous
control
NOTE

Set the compensation position number at the farthest end in the positive direction.
NOTE
2 When using the both-direction pitch error compensation function,
set a compensation position number for a movement in the positive
direction.
- 1646 -
Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position for each slave axis
3676 when independent both-direction pitch error compensation is performed under spindle command
synchronous control
NOTE

When using both-direction pitch error compensation, set the compensation position
number at the farthest end in the negative direction for a movement in the negative
direction.
NOTE
Pitch error compensation value at the reference position when a movement is made to the reference
position in the direction opposite to the reference position return direction for each slave axis in the
3681
case where independent both-direction pitch error compensation is performed under spindle command
synchronous control
NOTE

By using an absolute value, set a pitch error compensation value at the reference position
when a movement is made in the negative direction if the reference position return
direction (bit 5 (ZMI) of parameter No.1006) is positive or when a movement is made in
the positive direction if the reference position return direction (bit 5 (ZMI) of parameter
No.1006) is negative.
NOTE
This parameter is valid if pitch error compensation on an axis of Cs
Caution
Usable numbers and ranges of pitch error compensation points
Number of pitch error Pitch error
Option configuration
compensation points compensation range
Stored type pitch error compensation only 1536 0 to 1535
- 1647 -
Number of pitch error Pitch error

Option configuration
compensation points compensation range
Stored type pitch error compensation + bi-directional pitch 0 to 1535
3072
error compensation 3000 to 4535 (Note)
Stored type pitch error compensation + bi-directional pitch
0 to 2559
error compensation + bi-directional pitch error 5120
3000 to 5559 (Note)
compensation point count extension
NOTE
Such a setting that the data of one axis extends beyond a pitch error
compensation range is prohibited.
Example) A setting that extends from 1023 to 3000 is prohibited.

A setting that extends from 2559 to 3000 is prohibited.
11.19 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION (T SERIES)

T
Overview
With this function, an overheat alarm OH0704, "OVERHEAT:SPINDLE" is raised and the spindle speed
fluctuation detection alarm signal SPAL is issued when the spindle speed deviates from the specified
speed due to machine conditions.
This function is useful, for example, for preventing the seizure of the guide bushing.
G26 enables spindle speed fluctuation detection.
G25 disables spindle speed fluctuation detection.
Explanation
The function for detecting spindle speed fluctuation checks whether the actual speed varies for the
specified speed or not. Si or Sr, whichever is greater, is taken as the allowable fluctuation speed (Sm). An
alarm OH0704 is activated when the actual spindle speed varies for the commanded speed (Sc) under the
condition that the variation width exceeds the allowable variation width (Sm).
|Sc – Sa| > Sm

Sc : Specified spindle speed
Sa : Actual spindle speed
Si : The allowable constant variation width which is independent of the specified spindle speed
(parameter No.4913)
Sr : The allowable variation width which is obtained by multiplying Sc (commanded spindle speed)
by r (constant ratio) (r = parameter No.4912)
Bit 0 (FLR) of parameter No. 4900 = 0 Bit 0 (FLR) of parameter No. 4900 = 1
r r
Sr = Sc × Sr = Sc ×
100 1000
Sm: Si or Sr, whichever is greater
- Conditions to start spindle speed fluctuation detection

If the specified spindle speed Sc changes, spindle speed fluctuation detection starts when one of the
conditions below is met.
If bit 7 (FDTs) of parameter No.7900 is 1, spindle speed fluctuation detection starts when condition (2) is
met.
(1) The actual spindle speed falls in a range of (Sc - Sq) to (Sc + Sq)
- 1648 -
Sc : Specified spindle speed
Sq : Tolerance within which the spindle is assumed to attain the programmed speed
(parameter No.4911)
Parameter FLR= 0 Parameter FLR= 1
q q
Sq = Sc × Sq = Sc ×
100 1000
(2) When time p specified in parameter No.4914 elapses after the specified speed Sc changes.
- Examples of spindle speed fluctuation detection

(Example 1)
When an alarm OH0704 is issued after a specified spindle speed is reached
Spindle
speed
Sr
Sq Si
Specified
Sq Si speed
Sr
P
Actual
CHECK NO CHECK CHECK speed
G26 mode
Time
Specification of Start of check Alarm
another speed
(Example 2)
When an alarm OH0704 is issued before a specified spindle speed is reached
Spindle
speed
Sr
Sq Si
Specified
Sq Si speed
Sr
P
CHECK NO CHECK CHECK Actual
speed
G26 mode
Time
Specification of Start of Alarm
another speed check
Specified speed : (Speed specified by address S and five-digit value) × (spindle override)
Actual speed : Speed detected with a position coder
p : Period after a change occurs in the actual spindle speed until detection starts
Parameter No.4914, address P
Sq : (Specified spindle speed) × (Detection start tolerance (q))
Parameter No.4911, address Q
- 1649 -
Parameter FLR = 0 Parameter FLR = 1

q q
100 1000
Sr : (Specified spindle speed) × (Allowable variation (r))
Parameter No.4912, address R
Parameter FLR = 0 Parameter FLR = 1
r r
100 1000
Si : Allowable variation width
Parameter No.4913, address I
If the difference between the specified speed and actual speed exceeds both Sr and Si, an alarm OH0704
is raised.
- Relationship between spindle speed control and each spindle

Spindle Serial spindle
Function 1st spindle 2nd spindle 3rd spindle 4th spindle
(*1) (*1)
Spindle speed fluctuation detection Possible Possible Possible Possible(*1)
Spindle Analog spindle

Function 1st spindle
Spindle speed fluctuation detection Possible
NOTE
1 An optional function of multi spindle control is necessary.
2 The spindle speed fluctuation detection function is effective for a single spindle.
The function cannot be executed for two or more spindles.
The spindle speed fluctuation detection function is effective for a spindle on
which the currently selected position coder is mounted. Just a single position
coder can be selected. Multiple position coders cannot be selected. For the
selection of a position coder, see the section of "Multi-spindle control."
* Position coder selection signals (PC2SLC<Gn028.7>, PC3SLC<Gn026.0>,
PC4SLC<Gn026.1>)
3 The parameters that become valid are the parameters of the spindle speed
fluctuation detection function (No.4911, No.4912, No.4913, No.4914) for the
spindle on which the currently selected position coder is mounted.
- Spindle that can be subjected to the spindle speed fluctuation detection

function, depending on the relationship between system configuration and
spindle
The table below show some examples explaining the spindle to be subjected to the spindle speed
fluctuation detection function, depending on the system configuration and spindle assignment.
NOTE
1 If path control is performed, the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is
carried out for the axis on which the currently selected position coder is
mounted.
* Position coder selection signals (PC2SLC<Gn028.7>, PC3SLC<Gn026.0>,
PC4SLC<Gn026.1>)
- 1650 -
NOTE
2 Under multi-path control, if the feedback pulse of a position coder mounted on a
spindle belonging to a path is used, the selected path feedback must be
considered in addition to the selection of the position coder. Great attention
should be given to the selection statuses of relative signals.
* Path spindle feedback selection signals (SLPCA<Gn064.2>,
SLPCB<Gn064.3>, SLPCC<Gn403.4>, SLPCD<Gn403.5>)
3 It is assumed that the reader has understood the individual functions described
in this manual. If necessary, see the sections of "spindle control for each path,"
"spindle control," and "multi-spindle control."
Examples of spindles subjected to detection

- Specified spindle : Indicates which path is specifying which spindle.
- Feedback pulse : Indicates the contents of the feedback pulse to be used, depending on a selected
position coder.
- Feedback subjected : Indicates the feedback subjected to the spindle speed fluctuation detection function.
to detection
- G26 : Indicates whether the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is enabled in
which path.
- Detection : Indicates whether spindle speed fluctuation detection is possible in which path.
Feedback
System subjected G26
Path Specified spindle Feedback pulse
configuration to (Multi-path) Detection
detection
Single path control + ― Address S 1st spindle Feedback 1st spindle PC1 ○ ○ ○
Non-multi-spindle
control +1 spindle
Single path control + ― Address S 1st spindle Feedback 1st spindle PC1 × ○ ○
Multi-spindle control 2nd spindle 2nd spindle PC2 ×
+ 3rd spindle 3rd spindle PC3 ×
4 spindles 4th spindle 4th spindle PC4 ○
(selected)
Multi-path control + Signal of spindle control for each path: Type A (*1.)
Non-multi-spindle Path 1 Address S 1st spindle Feedback 1st spindle PC1 ○ ○ ○
control + Path 2 Feedback ― ○ ○
Signal of spindle control for each path: Type A (*1.)
Path 1 Address S 1st spindle Feedback 1st spindle PC1 ○ × ×
Path 2 Feedback ― ○ ○
Multi-path control + Signal of spindle control for each path: Type C (*2.)
Multi-spindle control Path 1 Address S 1st spindle Feedback 1st spindle PC1 ○ ○ ○
+ (selected)
2 spindles per path 2nd spindle 2nd spindle PC2 ×
Path 2 Address S 1st spindle Feedback 1st spindle PC1 × × ×
2nd spindle 2nd spindle PC2 ○
(selected)
Signal of spindle control for each path: Type C (*3.)
Path 1 Address S 1st spindle Feedback 1st spindle PC1 ○ ○ ○
(selected)
2nd spindle 2nd spindle PC2 ×
Path 2 1st spindle Feedback 1st spindle PC1 × ○ ○
2nd spindle 2nd spindle PC2 ×
(selected)
*1 The feedback pulse can be obtained from path 1 in this example.
*2 The signals for selecting spindle feedback of each path (SLPCA<Gn064.2>, SLPCB<Gn064.3>,
SLPCC<Gn0403.4>, SLPCD<Gn0403.5>) are set to select feedback in each path, for both path 1
and path 2.
*3 The signals for selecting spindle feedback of each path (SLPCA<Gn064.2>, SLPCB<Gn064.3>,
SLPCC<Gn0403.4>, SLPCD<Gn0403.5>) are set to select the feedback pulse of path 1 for path 2.
- 1651 -
G26
Spindle Spindle
specified FB
*SSTP#1
0 1
×SOV#1
0% ＜＞0%
SWS1#1 SWS2#1 SWS3#1 SWS4#1

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
*SSTP1#1 *SSTP2#1 *SSTP3#1 *SSTP4#1

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Position coder selection (1 PC selectable)

PC2SLC#1 0 1 0 0
PC3SLC#1 0 0 1 0
PC4SLC#1 0 0 0 1
ＰＣ１ＰＣ２ＰＣ３ＰＣ４
1st spindle 2nd spindle 3rd spindle 4th spindle

command command command command
Spindle PC1 Spindle PC2 Spindle PC3 Spindle PC4
This feedback is
subjected to spindle
speed fluctuation
detection.
System controlling four spindles by one path
- 1652 -
G26 G26

specified FB specified FB
*SSTP#1 *SSTP#2
0 1 0 1
×SOV#1 ×SOV#2
0% ＜＞0% 0% ＜＞0%
0 1
SLSPA #1
1st spindle
command
Spindle PC1
This feedback is
subjected to spindle
speed fluctuation
detection.
System controlling one spindle by two paths
- 1653 -
Sharing a spindle between different paths
G26 G26
Path 1 Path 2
Spindle Spindle FB Spindle Spindle FB
specified specified
SLPCA～D#1 SLPCA～D#2
1 2 ～ n 1 2 ～ n
*SSTP#1
0 1
*SSTP#2
×SOV#1
0 1
0% ＜＞0%
×SOV#2
0% ＜＞0%
1 2 ～ n 1 2 ～ n
SLSPA～D#1 SLSPA～D#2
SWS1#1 SWS2#1 SWS1#2 SWS2#2
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
*SSTP1#1 *SSTP2#1 *SSTP1#2 *SSTP2#2
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

PC2SLC#2 0 1 0 0
PC3SLC#2 0 0 1 0
PC4SLC#2 0 0 0 1
1st spindle 2nd spindle 1st spindle 2nd spindle ＰＣ１ＰＣ２ＰＣ３ＰＣ４
command command command command
Spindle PC1 Spindle PC2 Spindle PC1 Spindle PC2

PC2SLC#1 0 1 0 0
PC3SLC#1 0 0 1 0
PC4SLC#1 0 0 0 1
This feedback is
ＰＣ１ＰＣ２ＰＣ３ＰＣ４ subjected to spindle
speed fluctuation
detection.
Sharing a spindle between different paths
Signal
Spindle fluctuation detection alarm signal SPAL <Fn035.0>
[Function] This signal indicates that the actual spindle speed is not within a tolerance to the specified
speed.
[Output cond.] The signal becomes logical “1” when:
- The actual spindle speed goes out of tolerance to the specified speed.
The signal becomes logical “0” when:
- No alarm OH0704 condition has been detected for spindle speed fluctuation.
- An alarm condition is cleared by resetting the NC when the signal is logical 1.
- 1654 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn035 SPAL
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4900 FDTs FDEs FLRs

#0 FLRs When the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is used, the unit of an allowable
ratio (q) and fluctuation ratio (r) set by parameters Nos.4911 and 4912 is:
0: 1%.
1: 0.1%.
#4 FDEs Spindle speed fluctuation detection function is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
If the position coder selection signal is selected for a spindle for which this parameter is 1,
the target spindle of spindle speed fluctuation detection remains unchanged. Spindle
speed fluctuation detection stays enabled for the spindle for which spindle speed
fluctuation detection was enabled before the selection of the position coder selection
signal.
An example is given below.
[Example]
Bit 4 (FDE) of parameter No.4900 (Workpiece spindle) = 0
Bit 4 (FDE) of parameter No.4900 (Tool spindle) = 1
Even when the position coder selection signal is switched from the workpiece
spindle to the tool spindle, the target spindle of spindle speed fluctuation detection
remains unchanged, that is, the function stays enabled for the workpiece spindle.
Workpiece Workpiece
Selected- spindle Selected- spindle
spindle spindle
PCS PCS
Tool spindle Tool spindle
Spindle speed fluctuation Spindle speed fluctuation

detection is enabled for the detection is enabled for the
workpiece spindle. workpiece spindle.
Note) The selected spindle varies depending on the state of the position coder selection
signal.
NOTE
1 If bit 4 (FDE) of parameter No.4900 is 0 for all spindles, spindle
speed fluctuation detection is enabled for the spindle selected with
the position coder selection signal as is conventionally. If the
parameter FDE is 1 for all spindles, spindle speed fluctuation
detection is enabled for the spindle selected with the position coder
selection signal.
- 1655 -
NOTE
2 When the parameter FDE is 0 for all spindles, setting the parameter
FDE for the spindle selected with the position coder selection signal
to 1 does not cause an immediate change to the target spindle,
which stays as the target until the next position coder selection
signal is issued.
3 If the parameter FDE for the first spindle is 1 and the first spindle is
the tool spindle when the power is turned on, spindle speed
fluctuation detection remains enabled for the first spindle until a
spindle for which the parameter FDE is 0 is selected.
#7 FDTs Spindle speed fluctuation detection is started:

0: When the actual spindle speed reaches a specified range or when the time specified
with parameter No.4914 elapses.
1: After the time specified with parameter No.4914 has elapsed.
4911 Allowable speed ratio (q) used to assume that the spindle has reached a specified speed

[Unit of data] 1%, 0.1%
When the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is used, set an allowable speed
ratio (q) used to assume that the spindle has reached a specified speed.
NOTE
The unit of data is determined by bit 0 (FLR) of parameter No.
4900.
4912 Spindle fluctuation ratio (r) for not issuing a spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm

[Unit of data] 1%, 0.1%
When the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is used, set a spindle fluctuation
ratio (r) for not issuing an alarm.
NOTE
The unit of data is determined by bit 0 (FLR) of parameter No.
4900.
4913 Spindle speed fluctuation width (i) for not issuing a spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm

When the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is used, set an allowable
fluctuation width (i) for not issuing an alarm.
- 1656 -
4914 Time (p) from the change of a specified speed until spindle speed fluctuation detection is started

[Unit of data] msec
When the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is used, set a time (p) from the
change of a specified speed until spindle speed fluctuation detection is started. In other
words, spindle speed fluctuation detection is not performed until a set time has elapsed
after a specified speed is changed. However, when the actual spindle speed is assumed to
have reached a specified value within a set time (p), spindle speed fluctuation detection is
started.
Alarm and message

OH0704 OVERHEAT:SPINDLE Spindle is overheated by the spindle speed fluctuation
detection function.
<1> For heavy cutting, ease the cutting conditions.
<2> Check whether the cutter has been blunted.
<3> Check whether the spindle amplifier is malfunctioning.

PS5305 ILLEGAL SPINDLE NUMBER In a spindle select function by address P for a
multiple-spindle
control,
1) Address P is not specified.
2) Parameter No. 3781 is not specified to the spindle to be
selected.
3) An illegal G code which cannot be commanded with an
S_P_; command is specified.
4) The multi-spindle control cannot be used because the bit
1 (EMS) of parameter No. 3702 is 1.
5) The spindle amplifier number of each spindle is not set in
parameter No. 3717.
6) A prohibited command for a spindle was issued
7) An invalid value is set in parameter No. 11090.
Note
NOTE
1 This function is available as an option.
2 Even if the conditions to start the spindle speed fluctuation detection function are
satisfied, the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is not performed under
the following conditions:
- The specified spindle speed is 0 min-1.
- A search by program restart is in progress.
3 If the spindle stop signal *SSTP<Gn029.6> is set to “0”, detection is not
performed.
4 If any of the spindle stop signals *SSTP1 to *SSTP4<Gn027.3,4,5,Gn026.6> is
set to “0”, detection is not performed on the corresponding spindle.
- 1657 -
NOTE
5 If alarm OH0704 is raised, a single-block stop occurs in automatic operation. The
spindle overheat alarm is displayed on the screen. In addition, the spindle speed
fluctuation detection alarm signal SPAL is output (the signal is set to “1” in the
alarm state).
This signal is cleared to “0” by a reset.
6 If the cause of alarm OH0704 is not eliminated by a reset, the alarm will be
raised again.
7 Alarm OH0704 can be suppressed across an allowable variation width specified
in parameter No.4913. If the actual spindle speed continues to be 0 min-1 for one
second or longer, however, an alarm will be raised.
8 The raising of alarm OH0704 does not automatically cause the spindle to stop.
9 G25 and G26 must be specified in a predetermined format. Avoid specifying the
preparatory function, auxiliary functions, and the like together with G25 or G26.
10 A serial spindle signal that can affect the actual spindle speed should be
manipulated in the G25 mode.
11 If a spindle is under velocity control, spindle speed fluctuation detection is carried
out.
12 Avoid making a spindle orientation operation while the spindle speed fluctuation
detection function is enabled.
13 If address P is used to select a spindle while the multi-spindle control is carried
out, avoid specifying S_P_; together with G26. If this is attempted, alarm
PS5305 will be raised.
14 For a serial spindle, carefully check the gear count selection statuses of
clutch/gear signals (CTH1, CTH2) and gear selection signals (GR30, GR20,
GR10 (type M)/GR1, GR2(type T). The spindle speed fluctuation detection
function does not normally work if the gear count statuses of the two types of
signals are different.
CNC system Serial spindle
Lathe system、 Machining center system side
Machining center system
GR2 GR1 Selected GR30 GR20 GR10 Selected CTH1 CTH2
gear gear
0 0 1st stage 0 0 1 1st stage 0 0
0 1 2nd stage 0 1 0 2nd stage 0 1
1 0 3rd stage 1 0 0 3rd stage 1 0
1 1 4th stage 4th stage 1 1
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Path spindle control
(This manual) Spindle speed control
Spindle output control by the PMC
Multi-spindle control
- 1658 -
11.20 SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO MOTOR

Overview
Servo motors can be controlled by spindle functions like spindle rotation commands or rigid tapping.
(1) Spindle control with servo motor
Rotation commands (S command) can be used to control the speed of spindles by regarding servo
motors as spindles (live tools). No reference position return is necessary to switch between rotation
and positioning commands.
(2) Spindle indexing
There are two types of spindle indexing. The first type allows the next-block command to be
executed before spindle indexing is finished. The second type allows the next block to be executed
only after spindle indexing is completed.
With the first type, it is possible to issue commands to axes other than the axis for which a spindle
indexing command has been issued, before the next command is issued to the axis. The next
command can be issued only after it is confirmed that spindle indexing is completed. Using this
function can reduce the wait time. In addition, an axis can be stopped at a specified point by issuing
a spindle indexing command to the axis when the spindle is rotating.
(3) Rigid tapping with servo motor
Rigid tapping can be carried out by regarding a servo motor as a rotation axis.
(4) Threading, feed per revolution, and constant surface speed control
Threading, feed per revolution, and constant surface speed control can be carried out by regarding a
servo motor as a spindle.
(5) Spindle output control with PMC
Spindle output control with PMC can be carried out by regarding a servo motor as a spindle
controlled axis.
NOTE
2 To use this function, "Multi-spindle control" is required.
If this function is used under the conditions below, the multi-spindle control
option is not required.
- Two or more spindles are not used on any path.
- The spindle gear type is T.
- No G code (G96.1, G96.2, G96.3, or G96.4) commands are used.
- Spindle indexing is not used.
Notes
This function handles a servo motor used as a spindle controlled axis as one of controlled spindles.
Spindle motors and supported functions

Spindle Conventional
Function spindle control
Threading/feed per revolution ○ ○
Polygon machining ○ ×(*1)
Spindle speed fluctuation detection ○ ×
Spindle synchronous control ○ ×
Spindle command synchronous control ○ ×
Polygon machining with two spindles ○ ×
Spindle orientation
Multi-point orientation ○ ×
Spindle output switching
Inter-path spindle control ○ ○
- 1659 -
Spindle Conventional
Function spindle control
Constant surface speed control ○ ○
Multi-spindle control ○ ○
Rigid tapping ○ ○
Spindle output control with PMC ○ ○
Actual spindle speed output ○ ○
Spindle indexing × ○
NOTE
Servo motor can be used as tool rotation axis. (*1)
11.20.1 Spindle Control with Servo Motor

Specification
- Command with a program
This function supports two modes; SV speed control mode (a spindle rotation command (S command) is
enabled for the servo motor-controlled rotation axis) and position control mode (ordinary positioning is
enabled). Controlling servo motor rotation requires issuing an SV speed control mode ON command
(G96.4). Once the command is issued, the S command for the servo motor remains enabled until the mode
is canceled. No positioning command is usable if the SV speed control mode is ON.
Performing positioning requires canceling the SV speed control mode. Canceling the SV speed control
mode (setting the position control mode to ON) requires issuing a spindle indexing command (G96.1 or
G96.2). In the position control mode, the S command is disabled as in the ordinary servo axis state.
However, information about the S command is preserved. So, when the SV speed control mode becomes
ON, the motor starts rotating at the speed already specified.
- Command with a signal

The SV speed control mode signal <Gn521> can also be used to specify whether to turn ON or OFF the
SV speed control mode.
If the SV speed control mode is turned ON using the signal and then OFF using a program command,
turning it ON again requires re-entering the signal or re-issuing the G96.4 command.
The SV speed control mode in-progress signal <Fn521> can be used to check whether the SV speed
control mode is in effect.
Turning the SV speed control mode signal OFF during rotation performs spindle indexing and then turns
the SV speed control mode OFF. Spindle indexing is executed with R0 (absolute position 0).
Specify an M code not involved in buffering as an M code to be used as a command for switching the SV
speed control mode (parameters Nos. 3411 to 3420 and 11290 to 11299).
Format
G96.4 P_ ; SV speed control mode ON
M03 (M04) S_ P_ ; Rotation command
S: Spindle speed [min-1] (numeric value of up to five digits)
P: Spindle selection with multi-spindle control
Using G96.4 and a spindle selection command P can turn the SV speed control mode ON for each axis
separately. Likewise, using a spindle indexing command (G96.1/G96.2) and a spindle selection command
P can cancel the SV speed control mode, that is, turn on the position control mode ON, for each axis
separately.
To specify “G96.4 P_ ;”, use an independent block.
However, it is possible to specify "G96.4 P_ S_ ;".
- 1660 -
Explanation
- Command
(1) Spindle speed command output
Set up the spindle speed command in the same way as for the ordinary speed command (S
command). However, turn the SV speed control mode ON before issuing the rotation command (S
command). When performing positioning, cancel the SV speed control mode, and select the position
control mode.
The sequence by the following input signals is unnecessary.
*ESPA, MRDYA, and SFRA
(2) Condition for stopping spindle speed output
Commands once output to a spindle become 0 if *SSTP becomes 0 or if a command (such as S0)
that makes the spindle speed command output 0 is issued. Also, issuing a spindle indexing command
(G96.1/G96.2) makes the spindle speed command output 0. In addition, an emergency stop
condition and servo alarm bring the spindle to a stop.
With M05, the CNC does not make the command output to the spindle 0.
(3) Stopping rotation by spindle indexing
Issuing a command that specifies a position enables the rotating axis to stop at the specified position.
For details, see Subsection of "Spindle Indexing Function."
(4) Maximum speed
The maximum speed that can be specified is usually 2777 min-1.
However, setting bit 3 (IRC) of parameter No. 1408 to 1 may be able to increase the limit to about
27770 min-1 depending on the performance of the related motor and detector. (when IS-B is used.)
Depending on the increment system, the maximum speed is as below.
Increment system Bit 7 (IESP) of parameter No. 1013 = 0 Bit 7 (IESP) of parameter No. 1013 = 1
IS-B 27750min-1 27750min-1
IS-C 2777min-1 27750min-1
It is assumed that bit 3 (IRC) of parameter No. 1408 is set to 1 in all cases.
Example command for switching between rotation control and position control
Spindle name Spindle select P code (parameter No. 3781) Servo motor axis address
S1 P1 C
Command with a program (SV speed control mode in-progress signal (Fn521))
Program command SV speed control mode ON/OFF Operation
ON (SV speed control mode in-progress
G96.4 P1 ; SV speed control mode ON (C).
signal (C) =1)
The servo motor rotation axis C rotates in the
M03 S100 P1 ; ON
normal direction at 100 [min-1].
: : :
OFF (SV speed control mode in-progress The servo motor rotation axis C stops at C =
G96.1 P1 R0 ;
signal (C) = 0) 0 (spindle indexing).
OFF (SV speed control mode in-progress
G00 C180.0 ; Positioning at C = 180 degrees.
signal (C) = 0)
OFF (SV speed control mode in-progress M03 S200 is stored without causing the servo
M03 S200 P1 ;
signal (C) = 0) motor to rotate.
The servo motor rotation axis C rotates in the
ON (SV speed control mode in-progress
G96.4 P1 ; normal direction at 200[min-1].
signal (C) = 1)
SV speed control mode ON (C).
- 1661 -
Signal-controlled mode switching

Program command SV speed control mode ON/OFF Operation
ON (SV speed control mode in-progress SV speed control mode is turned ON (C) with
M15 ;
signal (C) = 1) M code.
ON (SV speed control mode in-progress Servo motor rotation axis C rotates in normal
M03 S100 P1 ;
signal (C) =1) direction at 100 [min-1].
: : :
OFF (SV speed control mode in-progress Servo motor rotation axis C stops at C = 0
G96.1 P1 R0 ;
signal (C)=0) (spindle indexing).
OFF (SV speed control mode in-progress
G00 C180. ; Positioning at C = 180 degrees.
signal (C)=0)
ON (SV speed control mode in-progress SV speed control mode is turned ON (C) with
M15 ;
signal (C)=1) M code.
Servo motor rotation axis C rotates in normal
M03 S100 P1 ; ON
direction at 100 [min-1].
- Multi-spindle control and commands from another path

Controlling the rotation of a spindle in a path that has another spindle (such as a servo motor used as a
live tool) requires the multi-spindle control. The path spindle control function can handle commands from
another path. The address P-based spindle select function for multi-spindle control can be used to select
spindles in another path.
Example program commands follow.
Example 1: (Spindle selection with address P)
Bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 = 1: A spindle is selected with address P.
Spindle configuration (S1 = first spindle and S2 = second spindle)

Path 1 Path 2
S1 (spindle axis) S3 (spindle axis)
S2 (servo axis) S4 (servo axis)
Setting address P for spindle selection in multi-spindle control

Parameter Path 1 Path 2
11 (S1) 21 (S3)
3781
12 (S2) 22 (S4)
Program example
Command issuing path Program Operation
1 M03 S1000 P12 ; S2 rotates in normal direction at 1000 min-1.
1 M03 S1500 P22 ; S4 rotates in normal direction at 1500 min-1.
2 M04 S1500 P11 ; S1 rotates in reverse direction at 1500 min-1.
- Operation (automatic/manual) of spindle control with servo motor axis

Once a spindle control with servo motor axis has returned to its reference position, it can operate in the
same manner as in the ordinary servo axis or spindle rotation control mode. To operate the a spindle
control with servo motor axis manually, keep the SV speed control mode OFF.
- Acceleration/deceleration (time constant)

It is possible to change the spindle acceleration/deceleration specified in a rotation command according to
the speed of the spindle.
Acceleration/deceleration can be switched at two points of speed, using parameters S0 and S1 (switching
speed). In addition, parameters Aa, Ab, and Ac are available to set up three acceleration/deceleration
spans.
- 1662 -
Rotation
-1
speed (min ) Ac
S
S1
Ab
S0
Aa
Time (s)
S0 Setting of parameter No. 11020 (acceleration/deceleration is switched at rotation speed S0 (min-1)).

S1 Setting of parameter No. 11021 (acceleration/deceleration is switched at rotation speed S1 (min-1)).
S Specified rotation speed (min-1).
Aa Setting of parameter No. 11030 (acceleration/deceleration (min-1/s) used between rotation speeds
0 and S0).
Ab Setting of parameter No. 11031 (acceleration/deceleration (min-1/s) used between rotation speeds
S0 and S1).
Ac Setting of parameter No. 11032 (acceleration/deceleration (min-1/s) used between rotation speeds
S1 and motor’s maximum).
Determine the setting of each parameter according to the torque characteristic of the motor.

Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is available in the SV speed control mode. Bit 1 (TCR) of
parameter No. 11001 can be used to select a time constant type, that is, parameter No. 1622
(Time constant of acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis) or parameter No. 11016 (Time
constant of acceleration/ deceleration in SV speed control mode for each axis).
- Direction of rotation
It is possible to change the polarity of the spindle speed output voltage, using bits 6 (CWM) and 7 (TCM)
of parameter No. 3706.
It is also possible to reverse the direction of spindle rotation, using the SV reverse signal <Gn523>.
These functions are usable in the rotation mode and during rigid tapping. Changing the signal to 1/0
during rotation causes the spindle to decelerate, reverse, and then accelerate.
Rotation
-1 SV reverse signal ON
speed (min )
S Ac
S1 Ab
S0
Aa
0
Aa
-S0
Ab
-S1
-S Ac
Time (sec)
- Reference position return

Before issuing the first command, be sure to make a reference position return.
- 1663 -
- Display
Bit 3 (NDF) of parameter No. 3115 can be used to specify whether to display the actual speed. In addition,
bits 0 (NDP) and 1 (NDA) of parameter No. 3115 can be used to specify whether to display, respectively,
the current position and the remaining amount of movement.
- Setting of a rotation axis with a servo motor

(1) Axis setting
For the servo axis number of the axis to be set as a rotation axis with a servo motor (parameter No.
1023), set a value as a servo motor as usual. Specify which servo motor to use as a spindle
controlled axis, using bit 7 (SRV) of parameter No. 11000. Specify which spindle to use as the
spindle controlled axis with the servo motor, by setting the spindle number in parameter No. 11010.
For the selected spindle, reset the spindle amplifier number (parameter No. 3717) to 0.
In multi-spindle control, set bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 to 1 to specify that program
commands be used to select a spindle.
Also set parameter No. 3781 with the P code for selecting a spindle.
(2) Using a command to specify a spindle speed requires adjusting the following parameters.
Parameter No. 11013: Positioning deviation limit in movement
Parameter No. 11014: Positioning deviation limit in the stop state
Parameter No. 11015: Maximum motor speed
(3) Rotation axis setting
Using bits 0 (ROTx) and 1 (ROSx) of parameter No. 1006, select rotation axis type A.
Using the rollover function, round the absolute coordinate values to be displayed to an amount of
movement per rotation specified in parameter No. 1260 in order to prevent rotation axis coordinate
overflow. Also round the relative coordinate values to be displayed to an amount of movement per
rotation by setting bit 2 (RRLx) of parameter No. 1008 to 1.
The rollover function is enabled by setting bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No. 1008 to 1 (for the rotation
axis).
- Example of parameter setting
The following examples show typical parameter settings. These typical parameter settings should be used
unless otherwise stated.
(1) Spindle controlled axis setting
Let the fourth axis of the CNC be the C axis. Assuming that the fourth axis is connected to the
second spindle, let us use the second spindle as a spindle controlled axis (servo motor).
No.11000#7 (C) = 1
No.11010 (C) = 2 (a spindle number is specified for a controlled axis assigned to the spindle
controlled axis.)
(Set up No. 3717 (S2) = 0.)
Given below are the least command increment, detection unit, and the amount of movement per
rotation for the C axis.
L × CMR
Least command increment =
Ｑ × DMR
Least command increment L
Detection unit = =
CMR Ｑ × DMR
Amount of movement per tool axis rotation =
360
Least command increment
where
L: Amount of tool movement per motor rotation (360 × speed increment ratio) [deg]
For example, if the servo motor is connected directly to the spindle (live tool), L = 360. For
example, if the speed must be increased by twice, L = 720.
Q: Number of pulses per pulse coder rotation
(For the serial pulse coder, Q = 1000000.)
- 1664 -
The least command increment mentioned above is specific to the C axis and is determined
independently of bits 0 (IS-A) and 1 (IS-C) of parameter No 1013.
Reset both bits 0 (IS-A) and (IS-C) of parameter No 1013 to 0 to select IS-B.
If the servo motor is connected directly to the spindle (live tool):
360 × 1
Least command increment= = 0.001 [deg]
1000000 × 36 100
Detection unit = 0.001 [deg]
Amount of movement per tool axis rotation =360.0 [deg]
So, the required parameter setting must be:

Parameter No. 11011 (C) = 360.000 (amount of movement per spindle controlled axis rotation)
In addition, the acceleration/deceleration values for rotation control must be specified in parameters
Nos. 11020 to 11032.
Let us assume that the axis parameters be specified for the fourth axis, as follows:
(2) Servo parameter setting
Let us assume: CMR = 1 and DMR = 36/100
(The capacity of the reference counter will be 360000.)
No.1820 (C) = 2 (CMR)
No.1821 (C) = 360000 (Reference counter capacity)
No.2084 (C) = 36 (DMR numerator)
No.2085 (C) = 100 (DMR denominator)
If the tool axis-to-motor gear ratio is 1:1:
No.11015(C) = 5000 (Maximum motor speed)
No.3741(S2) = 5000 (Maximum speed for gear 1)
For the other servo parameters, use the respective typical settings.
(3) Full closed system setting
When using spindle control in a full closed system, set bit 1 (FSR) of parameter No. 11000 to 1.
Signal
SV speed control mode signals SRVON1 to SRVON8<Gn521>
[Function] These signal switch the respective axes to the SV speed control mode.
[Operation] Setting these signals to 1 cause the respective axes to enter the SV speed control mode.
Resetting these signals to 0 cause the respective axes to exit the SV speed control mode.
Resetting the signals to 0 during axis rotation causes the respective axes to start spindle
indexing, to stop at the origin (R0), and to exit the SV rotation mode.
NOTE
1 Even if these signals are 1, the spindle control function remains
disabled when a program command turns the SV speed control
mode OFF (the SV speed control mode in-progress signal Fn521
becomes 0). To enable it, re-set these signals to 1.
2 Specify an M code not involved in buffering as an M code to be
used as a command for switching the SV speed control mode
(parameters Nos. 3411 to 3420 and 11290 to 11299).
SV reverse signals SVRVS1 to SVRVS8<Gn523>

[Function] These signals cause the respective axes to reverse their rotation direction in the SV speed
control mode.
[Operation] Setting these signals to 1 cause the respective axes to reverse their rotation direction.
- 1665 -
Resetting these signals to 0 cause the respective axes to resume their normal rotation
direction.
NOTE
These signals are effective even in rigid tapping.
SV speed control mode in-progress signals SVREV1 to SVREV8<Fn521>

[Function] These signals inform that the respective axes are in the SV speed control mode.
[Output cond.] These signals are 1 if:
- The respective axes are in the SV speed control mode.
These signals are 0 if:
- The respective axes are in the SV speed control mode, or
- The respective axes are in the position control mode.
SV speed control start sequence SV speed control cancellation sequence

SV speed control start SV speed cancellation
M code command(*) M code command (*)
SV speed control mode SV speed control mode

signals SRVONx signals SRVONx
SV speed control mode SV speed control mode

in-progress signals SVREVx in-progress signals SVREVx
End signal FIN End signal FIN
Strobe signal MF Strobe signal MF
(*) Specify an M code not involved in buffering as an M code to be used as a command for switching the SV speed control mode.
Spindle stop signal *SSTP<Gn029.6>

[Function] This signal stops the command output to the spindle.
[Operation] When this signal becomes 0, the command output to the spindle becomes 0, resulting in
the enable signal becoming 0. So, M05 is not output. When this signal becomes 1, the
command output to the spindle resumes its previous value, resulting in the enable signal
becoming 1.
Sxxx
Input command M03 M05 M04 S0
“1"
Spindle stop signal
“0"
Command output to spindle 0
Enable signal
The timing chart above is illustrative only. To be more precise, follow a timing chart that
meets the specification of the speed control unit for the spindle motor in use.
- Keep this signal set to 1 unless it is used.
- The CNC uses the commands M03, M04, and M05 to send only code and strobe
signals.
- 1666 -
Individual spindle stop signals

*SSTP1<Gn027.3> *SSTP2<Gn027.4> *SSTP3<Gn027.5> *SSTP4<Gn026.6>
[Function] These signals are usable only during multi-spindle control.
They cause the respective spindles to stop.
*SSTP1 1: Does not make the output to the first spindle 0 min-1.
0: Makes the output to the first spindle 0 min-1.
*SSTP2 1: Does not make the output to the second spindle 0 min-1.
0: Makes the output to the second spindle 0 min-1.
*SSTP3 1: Does not make the output to the third spindle 0 min-1.
0: Makes the output to the third spindle 0 min-1.
*SSTP4 1: Does not make the output to the fourth spindle 0 min-1.
0: Makes the output to the fourth spindle 0 min-1.
Spindle speed override signals SOV0 to SOV7<Gn030>

[Function] These signals enable an override of 0% to 254% of the S command value sent to the CNC
to be applied to the spindle in 1% increments.
[Operation] Specify an override value in binary, using the 8 bits SOV0 to SOV7.
The spindle speed override specified with these signals becomes disabled, and an override
of 100% is applied to the spindle speed during:
- Tapping cycle (for the M series, G84 and G74 or, for the T series, G84 and G88)
- Threading mode (for the M series, G33 or, for the T series, G32, G92, and G76)
→ Specify an override of 100% unless this function is used.
(An override of 0% is applied, preventing spindle rotation.)
Spindle enable signals ENB<Fn001.4> ENB2<Fn038.2> ENB3<Fn038.3>

ENB4<Fn039.1>
[Function] These signals inform whether there is an output to the second, third, or fourth spindle if
the multi-spindle control is available.
The signals can be used as a condition for stopping the analog spindle and in PMC ladder
sequences related to rigid tapping.
(See Subsection, "Rigid Tapping.")
[Output cond.]
ENB 1 if the output to the first spindle control unit is not 0.
0 if the output to the first spindle control unit is 0.
ENB2 1 if the output to the second spindle control unit is not 0.
0 if the output to the second spindle control unit is 0.
ENB3 1 if the output to the third spindle control unit is not 0.
0 if the output to the third spindle control unit is 0.
ENB4 1 if the output to the fourth spindle control unit is not 0.
0 if the output to the fourth spindle control unit is 0.
Multi-spindle address P signals MSP00 to MSP15<Fn160.0 to Fn161.7>

[Function] These signals output the P value most recently specified by the S_ P_ ; command.
[Output cond.] If the address P-based multi-spindle control is enabled (bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No.
3703 =1), the P value specified by the S_ P_ ; command is output. If no S_ P_ ; has been
issued since application of the power, the initial P value specified in parameter No. 3775
is output.
- 1667 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn026 *SSTP4
Gn027 *SSTP3 *SSTP2 *SSTP1
Gn029 *SSTP
Gn521 SRVON8 SRVON7 SRVON6 SRVON5 SRVON4 SRVON3 SRVON2 SRVON1
Gn523 SVRVS8 SVRVS7 SVRVS6 SVRVS5 SVRVS4 SVRVS3 SVRVS2 SVRVS1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn001 ENB
Fn038 ENB3 ENB2
Fn039 ENB4
Fn521 SVREV8 SVREV7 SVREV6 SVREV5 SVREV4 SVREV3 SVREV2 SVREV1
Notes
- Unlike spindle motors, servo motors stop if a servo alarm, emergency stop, or machine lock
condition occurs.
- Specify an M code not involved in buffering as an M code to be used as a command for switching
the SV speed control mode (parameters Nos. 3411 to 3420 and 11290 to 11299).
- M code for switching the SV speed control mode must be specified in an independent block.
When using multiple M commands in a single block, the M code must be specified as the first M
command.
- G96.1, G96.2, G96.3, G96.4, and M code for switching the SV speed control mode must be
specified in the path to which the spindle of interest belongs.
- The actual maximum motor speed is determined by applying a feed gear factor to the maximum
motor speed specified in parameter No. 11015.
- If bit 3 (IRC) of parameter No. 1408 is 0, the malfunction prevent function may work at a rotation
speed of about 2778 min-1. To allow the motor to run at 2778min-1 or faster, set bit 3 (IRC) of
parameter No. 1408 to 1. If the bit is set to 1, the command can specify a rotation speed of up to
about 27778 min-1.
- This function must be set for type T gears.
- G96.1, G96.2, G96.3, G96.4 cannot be commanded for settings other than multi-spindle control type
P.
- Feed axis synchronous control or synchronous control cannot be performed on an axis that is in SV
rotation control mode.
- As for the axis used for spindle control with a servo motor, disable the setting of bit 7 (ALGx) of
parameter No. 1814, which adjusts the loop gain in Cs contour control mode to the loop gain of the
Cs contour control axis, and the setting of parameter No. 3900 and after, which sets the loop gain of
the axis to interpolate with the Cs contour control axis. Otherwise, the loop gain of the servo axis
will change suddenly if the system enters Cs contour control mode during rotation control.
- 1668 -
Parameter
The major related parameters are described below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ROSx ROTx

NOTE

#1 ROSx
ROSx ROTx Meaning
0 0 Linear axis
3624)
parameter No. 1008.
No. 3624)
rotation.
3624)
above.

Xp-Yp plane, G18: Zp-Xp plane, G19: Yp-Zp plane), specify which of the basic three
Setting Meaning
- 1669 -
Setting Meaning

NOTE

78.
- With an axis for which Cs contour control/spindle positioning is to be performed, set
Example)
When exercising Cs contour control on the fourth controlled axis by using the
first spindle, set -1.
- For tandem controlled axes or electronic gear box (EGB) controlled axes, two axes
need to be specified as one pair. So, make a setting as described below.
Tandem axis: For a master axis, set an odd (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, ...) servo axis number. For a
slave axis to be paired, set a value obtained by adding 1 to the value
set for the master axis.
EGB axis: For a slave axis, set an odd (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, ...) servo axis number. For a
dummy axis to be paired, set a value obtained by adding 1 to the value
set for the slave axis.
NOTE

(B))
- 1670 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1408 IRCx

#3 IRCx The least input increment of the maximum cutting feedrates set in parameters Nos. 1430
and 1432 is:
0: Not multiplied by ten.
1: Multiplied by ten.
Set this parameter for the following axes, which are operated by the following functions:
- Spindle control axis by servo motor
- Tool rotary axis in the polygon turning function
If a rotation speed of 1000 (1/min) (=360000 (deg/min)) is to be used when this

parameter is set to 1, set 36000.0 in parameter No. 1430/1432.


1825 Servo loop gain for each axis

Set the loop gain for position control for each axis.
When the machine performs linear and circular interpolation (cutting), the same value
must be set for all axes. When the machine requires positioning only, the values set for
the axes may differ from one another. As the loop gain increases, the response by position
control is improved. A too large loop gain, however, makes the servo system unstable.
The relationship between the positioning deviation (the number of pulses counted by the
error counter) and the feedrate is expressed as follows:
- 1671 -
Positioning deviation = Feedrate / (60 × Loop gain)

Unit : Positioning deviation mm, inch or deg
Feedrate mm/min, inch/min, or deg/min
Loop gain 1/sec



stop).
parameter.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3702 EMS

- 1672 -
0: Used.
1: Not used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3703 MPP MPM 2P2

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#0 2P2 When a multi-path system is used, inter-path spindle control allows:

path 1 and path 2.
two paths.
When the spindle that belongs to an arbitrary path is shared between arbitrary paths, set
bit 2 (MPM) of parameter No. 3703. (The meanings of signals used vary, so that ladder
program modifications need to be made.)
#2 MPM When a multi-path system is used, the configuration allowed by inter-path spindle
control:
0: Follows the setting of bit 0 (2P2) of parameter No. 3703.
1: Allows the sharing of the spindle that belongs to a path between arbitrary paths.

using the signals (SWS1 to SWS4<G027.0 to 2, G026.3>) is:
0: Not made.
1: Made.
NOTE
time.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3706 TCW CWM

#6 CWM
#7 TCW Voltage polarity when the spindle speed voltage is output

0 0 Both M03 and M04 positive
0 1 Both M03 and M04 negative
1 0 M03 positive, M04 negative
1 1 M03 negative, M04 positive
- 1673 -
NOTE

to

display screen.
NOTE

display screen.
NOTE

- 1674 -
Spindle motor speed

(Parameter No.3736)

(Parameter No.3735)
(S command)
No.3741) No.3742) No.3743)

specified , or the speed of the spindle exceeds the maximum speed because of the spindle
parameter.
CAUTION
clamped.
3775 Default P command value for spindle selection in multi-spindle control
NOTE

When bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1 and bit 2 (MPA) of parameter No.
3706 is set to 1 in multi-spindle control, set a default P command value applicable if S_P_
is not specified even once after power-up.
- 1675 -

S1000 P3;
NOTE
to 1.
3 Under multi-path control, the P code specified here is valid for each
path.
different.)
6 To use this parameter, the multi-spindle control is needed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11000 SRV FSR

NOTE
#1 FSR The axis to be subjected to servo motor-based spindle control is of a:

0: Semi-closed system.
1: Full-closed system.
#7 SRV Spindle control with servo motor are:

0: Not performed.
1: Performed
NOTE
When spindle control with servo motor are used for an axis,
parameter No. 11010 must also be set for the axis.
- 1676 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11001 TCR

#1 TCR In SV speed control mode, time constant of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation

for spindle control with servo motor is:
0: The parameter No. 1622.
(Time constant of acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis)
1: The parameter No. 11016.
(Time constant of acceleration/deceleration in SV speed control mode for each axis)
Set this parameter for the axis to be placed under spindle control with servo motor.
11010 Spindle number used by spindle control with servo motor
NOTE

[Valid data range] 0 to maximum number of controlled spindles
This parameter sets a spindle number for a servo axis for which spindle control with servo
motor or spindle control with Cs contour control are performed.
NOTE
Set a spindle number for the axes set in bits 6 and 7 of parameter
No. 11000. For axes for which spindle control with servo motor are
not performed, set 0.
11011 Movement of spindle control with servo motor axis per revolution
NOTE

[Unit of data] degree
(B))
This parameter sets a movement of axis per revolution for which spindle control with
servo motor are performed.
11012 Spindle indexing speed for each axis

- 1677 -
In spindle control with servo motor, set the spindle indexing speed for each axis.
If 0 is set, the spindle indexing speed is assumed to be the setting of parameter No. 11020
(speed (S0) for switching acceleration/ deceleration for each axis).

This parameter sets the limit of positional deviation for each axis during movement in
spindle control with servo motor.

This parameter sets the limit of positional deviation at stop for each axis in spindle
control with servo motor.
11015 Maximum motor speed

This parameter sets the maximum motor speed applicable when spindle control with
servo motor are performed.
11016 Time constant of acceleration/deceleration in SV speed control mode for each axis

[Unit of data] msec
In spindle control with servo motor, set the time constant of acceleration/deceleration
after interpolation in cutting feed for SV speed control mode. Set the time constant used
for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed, bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation in cutting feed for each axis. Type of acceleration/deceleration is applied by
bits 0 (CTLx) and 1 (CTBx) of parameter No. 1610.
11017 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in SV speed control mode for each axis

In spindle control with servo motor, this parameter sets the lowest feedrate (FL rate) in
exponential acceleration/deceleration for velocity control.
Set this parameter for the target axis for spindle control with servo motor.
- 1678 -
11020 Acceleration/deceleration switching speed (S0) for each axis

In spindle control with servo motor, this parameter sets the speed at which acceleration/
deceleration is changed to perform rotation control. (First step)
11021 Acceleration/deceleration switching speed (S1) for each axis

In spindle control with servo motor, this parameter sets the speed at which acceleration/
deceleration is changed to perform rotation control. (Second step)
11030 Individual acceleration / deceleration 1 (Leg 1)

[Unit of data] min-1/s
In spindle control with servo motor, this parameter sets acceleration/deceleration to be
applied to perform rotation control. When the speed ranges from 0 to acceleration
switching speed 1, acceleration/deceleration 1 is applied. Acceleration switching speed 1
is the speed set in parameter No. 11020.

applied to perform rotation control. When the speed ranges from acceleration switching
speed 1 to acceleration switching speed 2, acceleration/ deceleration 2 is applied.
Acceleration switching speed 1 and acceleration switching speed 2 are the speeds set in
parameters Nos. 11020 and 11021, respectively.

applied to perform rotation control. When the speed ranges from acceleration switching
speed 2 to the maximum speed, acceleration/deceleration 3 is applied. Acceleration
switching speed 2 is the speed set in parameter No. 11021.
- 1679 -
11.20.2 Spindle Indexing Function

Format
G96.1 P_ R_ ; After spindle indexing is completed, the operation of the next block is
started.
G96.2 P_ R_ ; Before spindle indexing is completed, the operation of the next block
is started.
G96.3 P_ ; After it is confirmed that spindle indexing is completed, the operation
P: Spindle selection with multi-spindle control
R: Stoppage angle [deg] (0 to (parameter No. 1260))
To specify address P, use parameter No. 3781 (P code for selecting a spindle in multi-spindle control).
To turn the position control mode ON without performing spindle indexing, do so after canceling the SV
speed control mode by issuing G96.1 command with no R specified when the motor is at a halt.
When the motor is rotating, issuing a G96.1 (or G96.2) command with no R specified results in the motor
coming to a halt by behaving in the same manner as for R0.
NOTE
1 When using G96.2, issue G96.3 before another spindle move command, to
make sure that the spindle is at a complete halt.
2 To issue G96.1, G96.2, or G96.3, use an independent block.
Spindle indexing command

- Move command
(1) Command waiting for spindle indexing to be completed
If G96.1 is issued, the next block is executed after spindle indexing is completed.
(2) Command not waiting for spindle indexing to be completed
If G96.2 is issued, the next block can be executed before spindle indexing is completed.
- Movement completion check command

G96.3 is used to check to see if spindle indexing is completed. If it has not been completed, the next
block waits for spindle indexing to be completed. If it is completed, the next block is executed.
- SV speed control mode cancellation

If G96.1 is used to perform spindle indexing, the SV speed control mode is canceled when spindle
indexing is completed.
If G96.2 is used to perform spindle indexing, G96.3 can be used to check to see if spindle indexing is
completed and, if completed, cancel the SV speed control mode. Issuing G96.2 not followed by G96.3
cannot cancel the SV speed control mode even if spindle indexing is completed.
If SV speed control mode cancel, it is necessary to be commanded in the path to which the live tool axis
belongs.
- Spindle indexing command during spindle rotation

Issuing G96.1 or G96.2 with a position specified during spindle rotation causes the spindle to stop at the
specified position.
Example)
M03 S1000 ;...........................Rotation at S1000
G96.1 P1 R180. ;....................Stoppage of rotation at the 180° position
- 1680 -
- Spindle indexing speed

Issuing G96.1 or G96.2 causes a move speed to be dedicated to spindle indexing. Specify the move speed
for spindle indexing, using parameter No. 11012.
- Spindle indexing acceleration/deceleration

Fig. 11.20.2 (a) is the acceleration/deceleration specified by G96.1/G96.2.
Rotation
-1
speed (min )
S Ac
S1
Ab
S0
Aa
Si
Aa
Time (s)
Fig. 11.20.2 (a)
S0 Parameter No. 11020 setting (acceleration/deceleration is switched at a rotation speed of S0 (min-1).)

S1 Parameter No. 11021 setting (acceleration/deceleration is switched at a rotation speed of S1 (min-1).)
S Command-specified rotation speed (min-1)
Si Spindle indexing speed (min-1) parameter No. 11012
Aa Parameter No. 11030 setting (acceleration/deceleration (min-1/s) used between rotation speeds 0 and S0
(span 1))
Ab Parameter No. 11031 setting (acceleration/deceleration (min-1/s) used between rotation speeds S0 and S1
(span 2))
Ac Parameter No. 11032 setting (acceleration/deceleration (min-1/s) used between rotation speeds S1 and the
maximum motor speed S (span 3))
Spindle indexing speed during a stop

If spindle indexing is executed (G96.1) while the rotation tool axis is stopped (with SV rotation control
mode being ON), indexing is performed within one rotation, so that the spindle indexing speed (No.
11012) may not be attained.
-1
Spindle speed(min )
Si
Aa Aa
Time (sec)
Spindle indexing command (absolute coordinate/machine coordinate)

Using bit 0 (SIC) of parameter No. 11005 can select which coordinate system, absolute or machine, is to
be used in spindle indexing.
Example:
If the difference between the machine and absolute coordinates (machine coordinate – absolute
coordinate) is 100.000:
- 1681 -
- Spindle indexing performed by turning the SV speed control mode signal SRVON<Gn521>
OFF (“1” to “0”) or issuing a spindle indexing
G code (with no R specified)
1. If bit 0 (SIC) of parameter No. 11005 = 0:
Spindle indexing is performed with a machine coordinate of 100.000 and an absolute
coordinate of 0.000.
- G code-based spindle indexing (with R specified)
Assuming that spindle indexing is specified with R100.000:
- Example program commands

1. A move command is issued to the spindle, using G96.2. The spindle starts moving, and the
execution of the next block begins.
The spindle keeps moving even when any other block is being executed.
(The spindle indexing signal SPP<Fn522> is “1” during spindle indexing.)
2. When another command is issued to the spindle, G96.3 is used to heck in advance whether the
spindle has finished moving.
If the spindle is still moving (the spindle indexing signal is on), the CNC enters a wait state. If the
spindle has finished moving, the command is issued to cause the spindle to start moving.
Example: Command not waiting for spindle indexing to finish and command checking whether spindle
indexing has finished (parameter No. 3781 (S1) = 1)
Program command Operation
Command not waiting for spindle indexing to finish.
G96.2 P1 R270.0 ;
The first spindle S1 moves to 270.0.
G01 X10.0 Y20.0 F1000. ; Starts cutting feed. No wait for spindle indexing to finish.
G02 X50.0 Y100.0 R50.0 ; Starts circular interpolation. No wait for spindle indexing to finish.
G96.3 P1 ; Checks whether spindle indexing has finished.
M29 S100 P1 ; Starts rigid tapping if the spindle indexing signal is 0.
G84 X10.0 Y 20.0 R-5.0 Z-20.0 Waits for rigid tapping command if the spindle indexing signal is 1.
Notes
1. Spindle speed override signals and spindle stop signal are invalid from the cancellation of SV speed
control mode to the completion of spindle indexing.
- 1st spindle speed override signal SOV0 to SOV7<Gn030>
- 2nd spindle speed override signal SOV20 to SOV27<Gn376>
- 3rd spindle speed override signal SOV30 to SOV37<Gn377>
- 4th spindle speed override signal SOV40 to SOV47<Gn378>
- Spindle stop signal *SSTP<Gn029.6>
- Individual spindle stop signals *SSTP1, *SSTP2, *SSTP3, *SSTP4<Gn027.3, Gn027.4,
Gn027.5>, <Gn026.6>
2. When the SV speed control mode is canceled, the spindle speed clamp is valid to the spindle speed
command clamp (Function to spindle speed clamp by value set to internal relay address (R) of PMC
specified by parameter No. 3773). Even if internal relay address (R) of PMC is changed from the
cancellation of SV speed control mode to the completion of spindle indexing, the spindle speed
clamp is not changed.
- 1682 -
3. Specify an M code not involved in buffering as an M code to be used as a command for switching
the SV speed control mode (parameters Nos. 3411 to 3420 and 11290 to 11299).
4. M code for switching the SV speed control mode must be specified in an independent block. When
using multiple M commands in a single block, the M code must be specified as the first M
command.
5. G96.1, G96.2, G96.3, G96.4, and M code for switching the SV speed control mode must be
specified in the path to which the spindle of interest belongs.
6. After G96.2 command, command G96.3 before commanding move command such as rapid traverse
(G00) or cutting feed (G01) to rotation axis. Move command is specified without commanding
G96.3, alarm PS0445 “ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION” is issued.
7. If G96.3 is not commanded after G96.2 command, SV speed control mode is not canceled. For
example, reset before G96.2 command. Cancel the mode before issuing the axis move command.
8. If the spindle stops rotating because of G96.1, G96.2, the spindle speed command output becomes 0.
To cause the spindle to restart rotating, place the spindle in the SV speed control mode, and then,
issue an S command.
9. Spindle indexing is enabled only in the SV speed control mode. In any mode other than the SV
speed control mode, use ordinary positioning.
10. If the specified spindle indexing speed is 0, the acceleration/deceleration switching rotation speed
(stage 1) (parameter No. 11020) is used as the actual spindle indexing speed.
11. G96.1, G96.2, G96.3, G96.4 cannot be commanded for settings other than multi-spindle control type
P.
Signal
Spindle indexing signal for each axis SPP1 to SPP8<Fn522>
[Function] These signals inform that spindle indexing for the respective axes is in progress.
[Output cond.] The signals are “1” if:
- Spindle indexing for the respective axes has not finished.
The signals are “0” if:
- Spindle indexing for the respective axes has finished.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn522 SPP8 SPP7 SPP6 SPP5 SPP4 SPP3 SPP2 SPP1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11005 SIC

[Data type] Bit
#0 SIC Spindle indexing is:

0: Performed based on absolute coordinates.
1: Performed based on machine coordinates.
11012 Spindle indexing speed for each axis

In spindle control with servo motor, set the spindle indexing speed for each axis.
- 1683 -
If 0 is set, the spindle indexing speed is assumed to be the setting of parameter No. 11020
(speed (S0) for switching acceleration/ deceleration for each axis).
11.20.3 Speed-up of Spindle Indexing Function

Overview
In conventional spindle indexing, spindle indexing to the specified position after the speed was
accelerated or was decelerated up to the spindle indexing speed was executed.
In this function, the spindle indexing is executed directly to the specified position. The spindle indexing
time can be reduced.
Explanation
When bit 1 (HSP) of parameter No. 11002 is set to 1, spindle indexing when the spindle rotates is sped up.
When the spindle has stopped, the spindle indexing is the same as the conventional the spindle indexing.
Format
The command format for this type of the spindle indexing is the same as for the conventional type of the
spindle indexing.
For details, see “Spindle Indexing” of the conventional type.
Speed-up of Spindle Indexing Function

In the following cases, the spindle indexing sped up is executed.
- G96.1(G96.2) is specified during spindle rotation
- SV speed control mode signals SRVON<Gn521> is set to ”0” during spindle rotation
In the following, the above-mentioned operation is described, "SV speed control mode off".
- Allowable spindle speed of spindle indexing (Parameter(No.11019))

Set the allowable spindle speed of the spindle indexing in parameter No. 11019.
(1) When the SV speed control mode is canceled, the spindle speed is higher than the allowable spindle
speed. Decelerates from the spindle speed when the SV speed control mode is canceled, and the
spindle indexing is executed to the specified position.
Rotation speed (min-1)

SV speed control mode OFF
S
Ac
S1 Allowable
Ab
spindle speed
ST
S0
Aa
Time(s)
Spindle indexing signal 1

SPP<Fn522> 0
- 1684 -
Fig.11.20.3 (a) Spindle speed is higher than the allowable spindle speed
(2) When the SV speed control mode is canceled, the spindle speed is lower than the allowable spindle
speed. The spindle accelerates once, and the spindle indexing is executed to the specified position.
S1 Allowable
spindle speed
ST
Ab Ab
S0
Aa
S
Aa
Time(s)

SPP<Fn522> 0
Fig.11.20.3 (b) Spindle speed is lower than the allowable spindle speed
When accelerating during spindle indexing, the spindle speed is clamped at the lowest spindle speed
among the following spindle speed.
- Parameter(No.11019) ：Allowable spindle speed of spindle indexing
- Parameter(No.3772) ：Maximum spindle speed
- Parameter(No.3741 to 3744) ：Maximum spindle speed (Gear 1 to Gear 4)
- Spindle speed set to internal relay address (R signal) of PMC specified by parameter(No. 3773)
S1 Allowable
spindle speed
ST
Ab Ab
S0
Aa
S
Aa
Time(s)

SPP<Fn522> 0
Fig.11.20.3 (c) Clamped by allowable spindle speed
The spindle doesn't accelerate when the parameter (No.11019) is 0. The spindle decelerates from the
spindle speed when the SV speed control mode is canceled, and the spindle indexing is executed to the
specified position.
- 1685 -
- Spindle indexing acceleration/deceleration

As for the spindle speed of the acceleration/deceleration switching and the acceleration after the SV speed
control mode is canceled, the parameter in Table11.20.3 (a) is applied as shown in Fig.11.20.3 (a)
to Fig.11.20.3 (c) .
Table11.20.3 (a) Parameters for acceleration during spindle indexing

S0 Acceleration switching speed (S0) [min-1] (parameter No.11020)
S Specified rotation speed[min-1]
ST Allowable spindle speed of spindle indexing[min-1] (parameter No.11019)
Aa Acceleration 1 [min-1/s] (parameter No.11030)
Ab Acceleration 2 [min-1/s] (parameter No.11031)
Ac Acceleration 3 [min-1/s] (parameter No.11032)
- Spindle indexing signal for each axis

The spindle indexing signal SPP<Fn522> is “1” form Fig.11.20.3 (a) to Fig.11.20.3 (c) during
spindle indexing until the spindle decelerates and stops after the SV speed control mode is canceled
Notes
1. Spindle speed override signals and spindle stop signal are invalid from the cancellation of SV speed
control mode to the completion of spindle indexing.
- 1st spindle speed override signal SOV0 to SOV7<Gn030>
- 2nd spindle speed override signal SOV20 to SOV27<Gn376>
- 3rd spindle speed override signal SOV30 to SOV37<Gn377>
- 4th spindle speed override signal SOV40 to SOV47<Gn378>
- Spindle stop signal *SSTP<Gn029.6>
- Individual spindle stop signals *SSTP1, *SSTP2, *SSTP3, *SSTP4<Gn027.3, Gn027.4,
Gn027.5>, <Gn026.6>
2. When the SV speed control mode is canceled, the spindle speed clamp is valid to the spindle speed
command clamp (Function to spindle speed clamp by value set to internal relay address (R) of PMC
specified by parameter No. 3773). Even if internal relay address (R) of PMC is changed from the
cancellation of SV speed control mode to the completion of spindle indexing, the spindle speed
clamp is not changed.
3. Specify an M code not involved in buffering as an M code to be used as a command for switching the
SV speed control mode (parameters Nos. 3411 to 3420 and 11290 to 11299).
4. M code for switching the SV speed control mode must be specified in an independent block. When
using multiple M commands in a single block, the M code must be specified as the first M
command.
5. G96.1, G96.2, G96.3, G96.4, and M code for switching the SV speed control mode must be specified
in the path to which the spindle of interest belongs.
6. After G96.2 command, command G96.3 before commanding move command such as rapid traverse
(G00) or cutting feed (G01) to rotation axis. Move command is specified without commanding
G96.3, alarm PS0445 “ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION” is issued.
7. If G96.3 is not commanded after G96.2 command, SV speed control mode is not canceled. For
example, reset before G96.2 command. Cancel the mode before issuing the axis move command.
8. If the spindle stops rotating because of G96.1, G96.2, the spindle speed command output becomes 0.
To cause the spindle to restart rotating, place the spindle in the SV speed control mode, and then,
issue an S command.
9. Spindle indexing is enabled only in the SV speed control mode. In any mode other than the SV speed
control mode, use ordinary positioning.
10. G96.1, G96.2, G96.3, G96.4 cannot be commanded for settings other than multi-spindle control type
P.
- 1686 -
Signal
Spindle indexing signal for each axis SPP1 to SPP8<Fn522>
[Function] These signals inform that spindle indexing for the respective axes is in progress.
[Output cond.] The signals are “1” if:
- Spindle indexing for the respective axes has not finished.
The signals are “0” if:
- Spindle indexing for the respective axes has finished.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn522 SPP8 SPP7 SPP6 SPP5 SPP4 SPP3 SPP2 SPP1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11002 HSP

#1 HSP Speed-up of Spindle indexing is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
11019 Allowable spindle speed of spindle indexing

When bit 1 (HSP) of parameter No. 11002 is 1, allowable spindle speed of speed-up
spindle indexing is set.
When the SV speed control mode is canceled, the spindle speed is lower than the this
parameter setting value, the spindle accelerates to this parameter setting value
The spindle doesn't accelerate when this parameter is 0. The spindle decelerates from the
spindle speed when the SV speed control mode is canceled, and the spindle indexing is
executed to the specified position.
11.20.4 Rigid Tapping with Servo Motor

Format
The command format for this type of rigid tapping is the same as for the conventional type of rigid
tapping.
For details, see “Rigid Tapping” of the conventional type.
NOTE
Using rigid tapping commands requires putting the rotation axis servo motor in
the position control mode in advance. If the servo motor is rotating, cause it to
exit the SV speed control mode by issuing G96.1/G96.2. The SV speed control
mode in-progress signal SVREV<Fn521> can be used to check what mode the
servo motor rotation axis is in.
- 1687 -
Rigid tapping specification

- Feedrate
For rigid tapping, the feedrate of a drilling axis is one specified in an F command, and that of the spindle
is S × the amount of movement per live tool axis rotation (parameter No. 11011) [deg/min].
Feed per minute and feed per revolution are detailed later.
During rigid tapping, the spindle speed is limited by a parameter for specifying the maximum cutting
feedrate for the axis used as a live tool axis, that is, parameter No. 1430 (or No. 1432 if acceleration/
deceleration before interpolation is enabled).
Usually, the upper end of the maximum cutting feed range that can be specified by parameter No. 1430 or
No. 1432 is 999999.999[deg/min] (equivalent to S2778 [min-1]). For live tool axes specified for use in
rigid tapping (bit 3 (IRC) of parameter No. 1408 = 1), the actual spindle speed is limited to within 10
times the setting of the maximum cutting feedrate parameter.
Example:
Maximum cutting feedrate parameter No. 1430 = 360000
Limit to the maximum spindle speed 360000×10 = 3600000 [deg/min] (S10000 [min-1])
CAUTION
Make the tapper thread pitch equal to one specified by the program (F, S).
Otherwise, the tool or workpiece may be damaged.
Acceleration/deceleration control
In rigid tapping with servo motor, unlike the conventional type of
rigid tapping, it is possible to apply linear acceleration/deceleration of constant acceleration/deceleration
time type and bell-shape acceleration/deceleration.
Resetting bit 0 (SRBx) of parameter No. 11001 to 0 makes it possible to apply linear
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation of constant acceleration time type. Setting the bit to 1 makes
it possible to apply bell-shape acceleration/deceleration after interpolation of constant acceleration time
type.
The time constant for each gear is specified in parameters Nos. 11060 to 11063. If bit 2 (TDR) of
parameter No. 5201 = 1, the tool extraction time constant for each gear is specified in parameter
Nos. 11065 to 11068. Specify each of these parameters for the live tool axis used in rigid tapping.
The acceleration/deceleration types and time constants used for drilling axes are set to the same values as
for live tool axes.
NOTE
Time constants specified for rigid tapping with servo motor are different from
those for the conventional type of rigid tapping.
Example: Parameter settings are: Time constant (TC) = 800 msec and speed (S) = 4000 min-1
- 1688 -
min-1
4000
800 800 msec
- Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

If AI advanced preview control (M Series) or AI contour control I or II can be used in rigid tapping with
servo motor, issuing a rigid tapping command in the "acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead
interpolation" mode makes it possible to apply acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation
to this type of rigid tapping. Acceleration/deceleration before look-head interpolation is effective when
the AI advanced preview control (M Series) / AI contour control mode is ON. For details, see the
Subsection of "AI advanced preview control (M Series) / AI Contour Control I / AI Contour Control II."
Parameter No. 11050 is used to specify the maximum allowable acceleration value for
acceleration/deceleration interpolation used in rigid tapping. Parameter No. 11051 is used to specify the
acceleration change time for bell-shape acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. As for
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation used in rigid tapping, the maximum allowable acceleration
value is 100000 (deg/s2).
It is possible to change a speed of up to S1000 (min-1) (equivalent to 360000 (deg/min) in 60 (ms).
The time constant (parameter No. 11052) for cutting feed acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
usable in the "look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation" mode is a constant-time type.
NOTE
Specify the same time constant for both drilling and live tool axes. Otherwise, it
is likely that the machine may malfunction.
- Feedrate clamp by parameter No.8465

In AI advanced preview control (M Series) / AI contour control, the maximum allowable feedrate is set
by parameter No.8465. The maximum allowable feedrate of rigid tapping with servo motor during AI
contour control is also set by parameter No.8465. If bit 0 (NCL) of parameter No.11003 is set to 1, the
maximum allowable feedrate of rigid tapping with servo motor during AI advanced preview control (M
Series) / AI contour control is not clamped by parameter No.8465. However, maximum allowable
feedrate set by parameter No.1432 is available regardless of bit 0 (NCL) of parameter No.11003.
- Ignoring feedrate commands

When AI contour control II is enabled and bit 7 (NOF) of parameter No.8451 is set to 1, all feedrate
commands are ignored and feedrate is specified by parameter No.8465. If bit 1 (FEN) of parameter
No.11003 is set to 1, feedrate of rigid tapping with servo motor can be specified by machining program.
But feedrate is limited by maximum allowable feedrate of parameter No.1432.
- 1689 -
Reference position return

With this function, it is impossible to perform spindle orientation at the start of rigid tapping. Before
issuing a rigid tapping command, perform spindle indexing or positioning at a point where drilling should
begin. For details, see Subsection of "Spindle Indexing Function."
Diagnosis data
Also in rigid tapping with servo motor, information about rigid tapping is displayed on the diagnosis
display screen. See Subsection of “Diagnosis Display” for what information is displayed.
Notes
If the pitch is very small or the amount of travel along the drilling axis is large, the amount of travel along
the rotation axis becomes large, possibly resulting in alarm PS0003, “TOO MANY DIGITS”.
Parameter


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8451 NOF

#7 NOF In AI contour control II, an F command is:

0: Not ignored.
1: Ignored.
When this parameter is set to 1, the specification of the maximum allowable feedrate set
in parameter No. 8465 is assumed.
8465 Maximum allowable feedrate for AI advanced preview control (M Series) / AI contour control

- 1690 -
This parameter sets the maximum allowable feedrate forAI advanced preview control (M
Series) / AI contour control.
If a feedrate higher than the setting of this parameter is specified in the AI advanced
preview control (M Series) / AI contour control mode, the feedrate is clamped to that set
in this parameter.
If this parameter is set to 0, no clamping is performed.
When bit 7 (NOF) of parameter No. 8451 is set to 1, the tool moves, assuming that the
feedrate set in this parameter is specified. If 0 is set in this parameter at this time, a
movement is made at the specified feedrate.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11001 SRBx

#0 SRBx Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed during rigid tapping with
servo motor is:
0: Linear acceleration/deceleration.
1: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11003 FEN NCL

#0 NCL In AI advanced preview control (M Series) / AI contour control, feedrate of rigid tapping
with servo motor is:
0: limited by maximum allowable feedrate of parameter No.8465.
1: not limited by maximum allowable feedrate of parameter No.8465.
Maximum allowable feedrate of parameter No.1432 is enabled regardless of this
parameter.
#1 FEN When ignoring feedrate commands is enabled (bit 7 (NOF) of parameter No.8451 is 1),
feedrate of rigid tapping with servo motor is specified by:
0: parameter No.8465.
1: machining program.
Maximum allowable feedrate of parameter No.1432 is enabled regardless of this
parameter.
Maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for each axis in
11050
rigid tapping

is inch system, 0.0 to +10000.0)
- 1691 -
Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/ deceleration before

interpolation for each axis.
If a value greater than 100000.0 is set, the value is clamped to 100000.0. If 0 is set, the
specification of 100000.0 is assumed. If 0 is set for all axes, however,
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is not performed.
11051 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in rigid tapping

[Unit of data] msec
Set an acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration before
interpolation (time for changing from the state of constant federate (A) to the state of
constant acceleration/deceleration (C) at the acceleration rate calculated from the
acceleration rate set in parameter No. 11050: time of (B) in the Fig. 11.20.4 (a)).
Speed in tangent direction
Based on the setting of parameter

No. 11050, an optimum inclination
is calculated automatically.
(A) (B) (C) (B) (A) (B) (C) (B) (A)
Set time in parameter No. 11051.
Fig. 11.20.4 (a)
Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in the

11052
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode in rigid tapping

[Unit of data] msec
In the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode as in AI contour control, not
the ordinary time constant (parameter No. 1622) but the value of this parameter is used.
application.
If different values are set, correct linear and circular figures cannot be obtained.
11060 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in rigid tapping (first gear)
Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in rigid tapping (second
11061
gear)
11062 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in rigid tapping (third gear)
Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in rigid tapping (fourth gear)
11063

- 1692 -
[Unit of data] msec
For the time constants in rigid tapping with servo motors, parameters Nos. 11060 to
11063 are used, not parameters Nos. 5261 to 5264.
Set these parameters with a live tool axis in rigid tapping.
Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in rigid tapping extraction
11065
(first gear)
11066
(second gear)
11067
(third gear)
11068 (fourth gear)

[Unit of data] msec
If bit 2 (TDR) of parameter No. 5201 is set to 1, for the time constants in rigid tapping
extraction with servo motors, parameters Nos. 11065 to 11068 are used, not parameters
Nos. 5271 to 5274.
Set these parameters with a live tool axis in rigid tapping.
11.20.5 Threading, Feed per Revolution, and Constant Surface Speed

Control
Overview
The following are supported in spindle control with servo motor:
- Threading

The feedrate for feed per revolution is obtained from the separate detector linked to the spindle. If the
detector incorporated in the servo motor is used, the feedrate is calculated from the servo motor rotation
speed and gear ratio.
Which detector to use is specified by bit 1 (OPTx) of parameter No. 1815.
See Subsection of "Feed Per Revolution/Manual Feed Per Revolution," for explanations about feed per
revolution.
- Threading
Threading can be performed by reading the one-rotation signal from a separate detector linked to the
spindle.
In a configuration in which the spindle and motor are linked at a specific gear ratio, a detector linked to
the spindle at a gear ratio of 1:1 is necessary.
See Section of “THREADING,” for explanations about threading.

Using the S code (value following the letter S) to specify a surface speed (m/min or feet/min) enables the
speed of the spindle to be controlled so that the surface speed is kept constant with regard to any change
in the tool position.
- 1693 -
As for gear change, use T type gear change.

See Section of “CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL,” for explanations about constant surface
speed control.
If the machine is equipped with a spindle controlled axis and spindle with servo motor, using rotation
commands requires the multi-spindle control.
As for gear change, use T type gear change.
See Section of “MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL,” for explanations about multi-spindle control.
Format
- Feed per revolution, threading, and constant surface speed control
The command format for feed per revolution, threading, and constant surface speed control explained
above is the same as for the ordinary types of feed per revolution, threading, and constant surface speed
control.
Examples
The following are examples in which the second spindle (C axis) is used for servo motor rotation control
and position control.
(The G code system A in lathe system is selected.)

M*** ; The C axis rotation control mode is turned ON.
M03 S100 P2 ; The C axis rotates at 100 min-1.
G99 G01 Z-100. F10. ; The Z axis moves at a feed-per-revolution speed of 1000 mm/min.
: :
The C axis position control mode is set to ON (rotation control mode OFF).
M*** ;
The spindle stops with C = 0.000.
- Threading
M*** ; The C axis rotation control mode is set to ON.
G32 Z-100. F1. ; The Z-axis moves at a threading speed of 100 mm/min with a pitch of 1.000 mm.
: :
M*** ;
The axis stops with C = 0.000.

M*** ; The C axis rotation control mode is set to ON.
G96 S12 P2. ; The constant surface speed control mode is set to ON. The C axis rotates at 12 m/min.
G01 X100. Z20. ; The tool moves in the constant surface speed control mode.
: :
G97 S100 P2. ; The constant surface speed control mode is set to OFF. The C axis rotates at 100 min-1.
M*** ;
The axis stops with C = 0.000.
- 1694 -
Parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 OPTx

NOTE
#1 OPTx The separate position detector is:

0: Not to be used (semi-closed system)
1: To be used (full-closed system)
NOTE
In case of using the absolute position detector (bit 5 (APCx) of
parameter No.1815 is set to 1), please set the following parameters
that correspond to the absolute position detector which is actually
used.
- parameter No.1815#6, No.1815#0, No.1817#3, No.1868,
No.2275#1, No.2394
If these parameters are not set correctly, the machine coordinates
are not correctly established at power-on.
2455 Integral part (α) of the number of pulses for one rotation

If 0 is specified, no threading counter is output.
If the specified range is exceeded, an invalid parameter alarm SV0417 is issued.
(Detail number of diagnosis data No. 0352: 4553)
2456 Exponential part (β) of the number of pulses for one rotation

If the specified range is exceeded, an invalid parameter alarm SV0417 is issued.
(Detail number of diagnosis data No. 0352: 4563)
Number of pulses per detector rotation (Np) = α×2β

Determine α and β so that the above expression is satisfied.
For a closed system is in use, specify a value that corresponds to separate detector pulses.
Setting examples
System Np(pulse/rev) No.2455 No.2456 Remarks
αi Pulsecoder Np=1,000,000 16384 7
AB phase (12000p/rev) Np=12,000 12000 0
Serial output type rotary
Np=1,000,000 16384 7
encoder (million pulses/rev)
No.2275#0
Serial output type rotary
Np=8,000,000 16384 10 No.2394 must be
encoder (RCN223,723,220)
set.
- 1695 -
System Np(pulse/rev) No.2455 No.2456 Remarks

5000λ/rev detector No.2274#0=1 must
Np=5000×512
+High-resolution serial output 5000 9 be set.
=5000×29
circuit C or H
Np=18000×512
=18000×29
circuit C or H
Np=36000×512
=18000×210
circuit C or H
5000λ/rev detector + analog Np=5000×512
5000 9
SDU =5000×29
18000 10
SDU =18000×210
18000 10
SDU =18000×210
2048λ/rev detector +
Synchronous built-in servo Np= 2,000,000 16384 8
motor position detection circuit
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11001 DDMx

#2 DDMx The motor used for spindle control with servo motor is:
0: Not a DD motor.
1: A DD motor.
Notes
Using the functions explained above requires the constant surface speed control, spindle serial output, and
multi-spindle control options.
To use a DD motor, set bit 2 (DDMx) of parameter No. 11001 to 1.
Also needed are the CNC software and servo software supporting the functions.
11.20.6 Spindle Output Control with PMC

Overview
The “spindle control with servo motor” function enables the PMC to be sued for spindle output control.
How to specify
Once the SV speed control mode has been turned ON, spindle output control with PMC can be specified
using the same commands as for ordinary spindle control.
Refer to Section of “SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC,” of the connection manual for
detailed descriptions.
NOTE
1 For the “spindle control with servo motor” function, the maximum motor speed is
one specified in parameter No. 11015.
2 Even if using spindle output control by the PMC, specify parameters Nos. 3741
to 3744.
- 1696 -
11.20.7 Speed Arrival Signals and Speed Zero Signals

Overview
In the function of spindle control with a servo motor, output signals equivalent to the speed arrival signals
SARx and the speed zero signals SSTx for serial spindles are added. In the past, to determine whether the
rotation axis with a servo motor reached at the specified speed, it was necessary to read the speed by
using the real spindle speed output or PMC window function. By adding the speed arrival signals and the
speed zero signals equivalent to those for serial spindles, the need is eliminated to create a new PMC
ladder program for reading the servo motor speed and determining whether it has reached the specified
speed. This makes it easy to replace the spindle (rotary tool) using a spindle motor with a servo motor.
NOTE
To use this function, the option "Spindle control with Servo motor" is required.
Signal
speed arrival signals SVSAR1 to SVSAR8<Fn377>
[Function] In connection with the speed command in spindle control with a servo motor, these
signals notify that the actual rotation speed of the servo motor has reached the previously
set range.
[Output cond.] These signals are set to “1” in the following cases:
- In SV rotation control mode, the difference between the motor speed and the
specified speed goes below the speed arrival detection level.
- The system enters position control mode.
- Spindle indexing is executed.
- Rigid tapping with a servo motor is executed.
These signals are set to “0” in the following cases:
- In SV rotation control mode, the difference between the motor speed and the
specified speed goes above the speed arrival detection level.
- An emergency occurs. (Note)
- The system enters the servo off state.
NOTE
At the point when the servo software recognizes an emergency
stop, SVSARx is set to “0”. Even if a condition for speed arrival is
met, SVSARx is not set to “1”.
Speed zero signals SVSST1 to SVSST8<Fn376>

[Function] These signals notify that the rotation speed of the servo motor used for spindle control
with a servo motor has become equal to or less than the speed detection level.
[Output cond.] These signals are set to 1 in the following case:
- The motor speed goes below the speed zero detection level.
These signals are set to 0 in the following case:
- The motor speed goes above the speed zero detection level.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn376 SVSST8 SVSST7 SVSST6 SVSST5 SVSST4 SVSST3 SVSST2 SVSST1
Fn377 SVSAR8 SVSAR7 SVSAR6 SVSAR5 SVSAR4 SVSAR3 SVSAR2 SVSAR1
- 1697 -
Parameter
2482 Speed arrival detection level

[Unit of data] 0.1%
[Recommended value] 0 (15%)
This parameter sets the detection range for the speed arrival signal SVSARx as a
percentage of the specified speed. The actual detection level used is the setting of this
parameter plus an offset of 50/min.
If the difference between the motor speed and the specified speed reaches the speed
arrival detection level, the speed arrival signal SVSARx is set to 1.
2483 Speed zero detection level

[Recommended value] 0 (45/min)
This parameter sets the detection range for the speed zero signal SVSSTx.
If the motor speed becomes equal to or less than the speed zero detection level, the speed
zero signal SVSSTx is set to 1.
Note
- This function does not support composite control.
- Servo software supporting this function is required.
11.20.8 Spindle Control with Servo Motor (Speed Control)

Overview
Conventionally, spindle control with servo motor has used position control for the SV rotation control
mode. This function enables speed control to be used.
NOTE
Specification
Setting bit 0 (SPCx) of parameter No. 11000 to 1 enables speed control to be used for the SV rotation
control mode. (If bit 0 (SPCx) of parameter No. 11000 is 0, position control is used for the SV rotation
control mode.)
To turn the SV rotation control mode ON, use a G code (G96.4) or the signal SRVON (Gn521) = 1 in the
same manner as conventional.
To turn the SV rotation control mode OFF, use a G code (G96.1) or the signal SRVON (Gn521) = 0.
If speed control is used for the SV rotation control mode, issuing G96.1 during rotation outputs S0,
causing the SV rotation control mode to be turned OFF after rotation stops. In this case, however, spindle
indexing does not operate.
- 1698 -
When using SRVON (Gn521) = 0 to turn the SV rotation control mode OFF, previously stop rotation by
issuing S0 or resetting the spindle stop signal (SSTP (Gn029.6) or SSTPx (Gn027.3, 4, 5, Gn026.6)) to 0.
Resetting the signal SRVON (Gn521) to 0 during rotation cannot turn the SV rotation control mode OFF.
If speed control is used for the SV rotation control mode, it is impossible to use spindle indexing
(G96.1/G96.2/G96.3). When positioning the spindle at a specified location, previously turn the SV
rotation control mode OFF.
Even when this function is used, positional information is updated during rotation. The current position
managed by the CNC is updated by follow-up. The value of position error displayed at diagnosis data
No.300 etc. is the difference between actual machine position and current position updated by follow-up.
NOTE
Status output signals in servo rotation control mode (SV rotation control mode)
are as follows.
Status output signals in servo rotation control mode
Position control Speed control
Status output signals (Bit 0 (SPC) of parameter (Bit 0 (SPC) of parameter No.11000 is
No.11000 is 0) 1)
Axis moving signals Spindle rotation : “1” “0” at all times
MV1 to MV8<Fn102> Spindle stop : “0”
Axis moving direction signals Spindle forward rotation : “0” The status when servo rotation control
MVD1 to MVD8<Fn106> Spindle reverse rotation : “1” mode is changed is maintained.
In-position signals In-position : “1” “1” at all times
INP1 to INP8<Fn104> Not in-position : “0”
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11000 SRVx SPCx

NOTE
#0 SPCx In spindle control with servo motor, the SV rotation control mode uses:
0: Position control.
1: Speed control.
#7 SRVx Spindle control with servo motor are:

0: Not performed.
1: Performed
- 1699 -
11.20.9 Spindle Synchronous Control for Spindle Control with Servo

Motor
Overview
This function enables control spindles synchronously in spindle control using servo motor. It also enables
the control of the rotation phase of a spindle, a polygon-bar as well as a round-bar can be exchanged
between two spindles. A combination of a master spindle and slave spindle in spindle synchronous
control can be selected arbitrarily.
This function can be used with servo motors in the state of SV speed control mode.
NOTE
Additionally, enable the spindle synchronous control (bit 4 (SYC) of parameter
No.8133 is 1).
Explanation
- Synchronous-spindle configuration
In spindle synchronous control, the spindle which is issued S command is issued is called the master
spindle. A spindle which ignores any S command that is issued for it, and instead rotates synchronously
with the master spindle, is called the slave spindle.
Example :
Combining spindles of different paths for spindle synchronization
Parameter setting
Parameter No.4832(S1) =0, (S2) =0,(S3) =0,(S4) =0,(S5) =1,(S6) =0

First spindle of path 1(S11) First spindle of path 2(S21)
Path 1 Path 2

(S11) (S12) (S21) (S22)
Master spindle which is synchronized with slave spindle
Acceleration/deceleration
As for the acceleration/deceleration when the slave axis synchronizes with the master axis, the parameters
Nos.11020 to 11021 and Nos.11030 to 11032 at the acceleration/deceleration of spindle control function
with servo motor or the parameters Nos.11070 to 11071 and Nos.11080 to 11082 at the acceleration of
spindle synchronous control for spindle control with servo motor becomes effective. In case of bit 6
(DCSx) of parameter No.11001 for the acceleration/deceleration is set to 1, the parameter(Nos.25720 to
25721 and Nos.25730 to 25732) at the deceleration of spindle synchronous control for spindle control
becomes effective.
- 1700 -
Ex.) In case of bit 6 (CSA) of parameter No.11005 =1:
For SV speed mode For spindle synchronization For SV speed mode

Speed
Master spindle
Slave spindle
Time
Spindle synchronization start Spindle synchronization cancel
- Speed synchronization
1. When the spindle synchronous control signal is set to 1, the spindle synchronous control mode is set.
When spindle synchronous control is specified, slave spindle is accelerated or decelerated to a
specified speed of master spindle then enters the synchronous control state.
2. The spindle synchronous speed control completion signal is output when the two spindles have
reached the speed matching a specified spindle synchronous speed and the speed difference between
the two spindles is
within the value set in parameter No.11042.
3. The S command to the master spindle is clamped by the maximum speed of the slave spindle if S
command is more than the maximum speed of the slave spindle(No.3741-No.3744).
- Phase matching
1. Spindle phase synchronization is executed by setting the spindle phase synchronization control signal
to set to 1 in the spindle synchronous control mode (after the output of the spindle synchronous speed
control completion signal). The synchronous state between the two axes is not maintained during
spindle phase synchronization operation (until the spindle phase synchronization control completion
signal is set to 1).
2. The spindle phase synchronization completion signal is output when the error difference between the
two spindles lies within the allowable number of pulses set in the CNC parameter No.4810. When the
two
spindles hold a workpiece, do not specify spindle phase synchronization.
3. When spindle phase synchronization control is executed, the speed fluctuation of slave spindle can be
reduced. When parameter No.11040 is 0, the speed fluctuation of the slave spindle increases because
the amount of the movement of the slave spindle is output at a time and the position deflection
increases rapidly. The phase match can be executed smoothly because the amount of the movement
of the slave spindle is divided by the number of pulses of parameters No.11040 of each 4msec.
4. When spindle phase synchronization control is specified, phase matching is executed by movement of
slave spindle. The operation of the master spindle is not influenced. Therefore, you can command
spindle phase
synchronization control at the same time by each slave spindle.
- Speed command
1. In the spindle synchronous control mode, the speed command for the master spindle is valid.
2. In the spindle synchronous control mode, a speed for the master spindle can be command in the same
way as for an ordinary S command.
- 1701 -
3. When 0 is set in the parameter corresponding to a selected gear, the spindle does not make a
synchronous rotation.
4. A S command for a master spindle before the spindle synchronous control mode is set are valid even
in the spindle synchronous control mode. A speed command for a master spindle during spindle
synchronous control is also valid as a command for the master spindle after spindle synchronous
control is canceled.
Command by PMC DI signals

Spindle synchronous control can be commanded by the DI signal of PMC.
- Spindle synchronous control mode ON

Spindle synchronous control is executed when spindle synchronous control signal of each spindle is set to
1. Phase match is executed when spindle phase synchronization control signal of each spindle is set to 1.
- Spindle synchronous control mode OFF

Spindle synchronous control is released when spindle synchronous control signal of each spindle is set to
0.
Supplement
1. To monitor an error mutually between two spindles in the spindle synchronous control mode, the
phase error monitor signal SYCAL<Fn044.4>(SYCAL1 to SYCAL4<Fn043.0> to <Fn043.3>) is
available. A synchronization error between two spindles is always monitored. When a
synchronization error exceeding the value (absolute number of error pulses) set in parameter No.4811
is detected, this signal is set to “1”. When the synchronization error does not exceed the value set in
parameter No.4811, the signal is set to “0”.
2. Even when two spindles hold a workpiece in the synchronous control state, constant surface speed
control can be performed. Even if the speed of a spindle changes, however, the synchronous speed
changes within the parameter-set range (acceleration/deceleration time constant in spindle
synchronous control).
3. In spindle synchronous control, the spindle speed offset value (parameter No.3731) is invalid.
4. The slave axis moves whenever instructing in the spindle phase synchronization.
Limitation
1. When both a master spindle and a slave spindle are SV speed control mode, you can command to
change spindle synchronous mode.
2. For spindles during the spindle synchronous control mode, commands for rigid tapping, spindle
command synchronous control, and so on cannot be specified.
3. The ratio of the gear of the master axis and the slave axis should be the same.
4. If SV speed control mode of spindle control with servo motor is velocity control type (bit 0 (SPCx) of
parameter No.11000 =1), this function cannot be used.
The example that can be used is shown as follows. The pair that can be used is shown in the example. if
each pair is like a pair of “synchronization with spindle control with servo motor or a pair of the usual
synchronization with spindle control”, two or more pairs of the synchronization can be specified.
- 1702 -
Same system
Spindle with servo motor Spindle with servo motor Spindle with servo motor Spindle with servo motor
Same system
Spindle with servo motor Spindle with servo motor Spindle motor Spindle motor
Diagnosis data
300 Position deviation of each servo motor
The position deviation of each servo motor is indicated.
The absolute value of the synchronization error of each spindle in spindle synchronization is indicated. A
synchronization error is indicated with a slave spindle.
Signal
Spindle synchronous control signal of each spindle
SPSYCs1 to SPSYCs4<Gn288.0 to Gn288.3>
[Function] These signals turn on the spindle synchronous control mode.
[Operation] When each of these signals is set to “1”, the spindle synchronous control mode with a
spindle set as a slave spindle is set.
When each of these signals is set to “0”, the spindle synchronous control mode with a
spindle set as a slave spindle is canceled. When SPSYCs is set to “1”, spindle
synchronization with a spindle set as a slave spindle is performed. These signals are valid
only when bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No.3704 is set to 1 and bit 5 (SCB) of parameter
Which spindle is synchronized with which spindle is set using parameter No.4831 or
No.4832.
- 1703 -
Spindle phase synchronization control signal of each spindle

SPPHSs1 to SPPHSs4 <Gn289.0 to Gn289.3>
[Function] These signals turn on the spindle phase synchronization control mode (phase matching)
for each spindle.
[Operation] When each of these signals is set to “1”, spindle phase matching is performed in the
spindle synchronous control mode with a spindle set as a slave spindle. These signals are
valid when the spindle synchronous control signal SPSYCs for each spindle is set to “1”.
Specify each of these signals after the spindle synchronous speed control completion
signal FSPSYs for each spindle is set to “1”.
A spindle phase synchronization control operation is started on the rising edge of each of
these signals. So, phase matching once performed is not lost when each of these signals is
set to “0”. These signals are valid only when bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No.3704 is set to 1
and bit 5 (SCB) of parameter No.4800 is set to 0. Set a phase shift amount in parameter
No.11041.
NOTE
Before specifying these signals, ensure that the spindle
synchronous speed control completion signal FSPSYx is set to “1”.
When the spindle synchronous speed control completion signal
FSPSYx is set to “0”, phase matching operation is not performed.
Spindle synchronous speed control completion signal for each spindle

FSPSY1 to FSPSY4<Fn288.0 to Fn288.3>
[Function] These signals show that spindle synchronous control (speed synchronization)
with each spindle set as a slave spindle is completed.
These signals are valid only when bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No.3704 is set to 1 and
bit 5 (SCB) of parameter No.4800 is set to 0.
NOTE
for a cause such as cutting load fluctuation.
Spindle phase synchronization control completion signal of each spindle

FSPPH1 to FSPPH4<Fn289.0 to Fn289.3>
[Function] These signals show that spindle phase synchronization control (phase matching) with
each spindle set as a slave spindle is completed.
- 1704 -
completed.
spindles is greater than the value set in parameter No. 4810.
These signals are valid only when bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No.3704 is set to1 and
NOTE
for a cause such as cutting load fluctuation.
Spindle phase error monitor signal for each spindle

SYCALs1 to SYCALs4<Fn043.0 to Fn043.3>
[Function] These signals show that in the spindle synchronous control mode with each spindle set as
a slave spindle, the error pulse difference between two spindles is greater than a
These signals are valid only when bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No.3704 is set to 1 and
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn288 SPSYC4 SPSYC3 SPSYC2 SPSYC1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn289 SPPHS4 SPPHS3 SPPHS2 SPPHS1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn288 FSPSY4 FSPSY3 FSPSY2 FSPSY1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn289 FSPPH4 FSPPH3 FSPPH2 FSPPH1
- 1705 -
Parameter
Parameters which are used for this function are as follows.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11000 SPCx

NOTE
#0 SPCx SV speed control mode of spindle control with servo motor is:
0: Position control type.
1: Velocity control type.
NOTE
Spindle synchronous control for spindle control with servo motor
(bit 3 (SSY) of parameter No.11005=1) is only available with this
parameter setting 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11001 DCSx

#6 DCSx Acceleration/deceleration for deceleration is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11005 CSA SSY CSC

[Data type] Bit
#1 CSC The coordinate of spindle phase synchronization control servo motor is:
0: Absolute coordinate.
1: Machine coordinate.
#3 SSY Spindle synchronous control with servo motor is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
This function is only available with the parameter setting of bit 0
(SPCx) of parameter No.11000=0.
#6 CSA Acceleration/deceleration for spindle synchronous control with servo motor is:
0: Acceleration/deceleration for speed control.
1: Acceleration/deceleration for spindle synchronous control.
- 1706 -
11040 Spindle phase synchronization with servo motor compensation data

[Unit of data] pulse
This parameter reduces speed fluctuations in case of aligning phase of spindle in spindle
phase synchronization control.
When this parameter is 0, since the phase alignment amount is output at a time, the
position deviation quickly becomes large, and there are large speed fluctuation on phase
alignment.
It is possible to perform smooth phase alignments as phase alignment amounts is
separated by the number of 4 msec pulses set in this parameter.
11041 Shift amount for spindle phase synchronization control with servo motor

[Data type] Real spindle
[Unit of data] degree
[Valid data range] 0 to 359.999
Sets the shift amount of slave spindle from master spindle at spindle phase
synchronization control with servo motor.
11042 Detection level for spindle synchronization with servo motor completion signal

For the synchronization speed command at synchronization control with servo motor, if
the deviations of the respective spindle motor speeds are within the setting level, the
spindle synchronization control complete signal(FSPSY) becomes 1.
11070 Acceleration/deceleration switching speed (S0) of spindle synchronous
11071 Acceleration/deceleration switching speed (S1) of spindle synchronous

Set the acceleration/deceleration switching points S0 and S1 for spindle synchronous
control with servo motor.
11080 Individual acceleration / deceleration 1 of spindle synchronous (Leg 1)

- 1707 -
Set the acceleration/deceleration of Leg 1 (0 to S0), Leg 2 (S0 to S1), and Leg 3 (S1 to
Maximum speed) of spindle synchronous control with servo motor.
25720 Acceleration/deceleration switching speed (S10) of spindle synchronous for deceleration
25721 Acceleration/deceleration switching speed (S11) of spindle synchronous for deceleration

Set the acceleration/deceleration switching points of spindle synchronous control with
servo motor for deceleration S10 and S11.
NOTE
When bit 6 (DCSx) of parameter No.11001 and bit 6 (CSA) of
parameter No.11005 are set to 1, this parameter becomes
effective.
25730 Individual acceleration / deceleration of spindle synchronous for deceleration (0 to S10)
25731 Individual acceleration / deceleration of spindle synchronous for deceleration (S10 to S11)
25732 Individual acceleration / deceleration of spindle synchronous for deceleration (S11 to Maximum speed)

Set the acceleration/deceleration of spindle synchronous control with servo motor for
deceleration of Leg 1 (0 to S10), Leg 2 (S10 to S11), and Leg 3 (S11 to Maximum speed).
NOTE
When bit 6 (DCSx) of parameter No.11001 and bit 6 (CSA) of
parameter No.11005 are set to 1, this parameter becomes
effective.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3704 SSS

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off Before
#4 SSS Synchronous spindle control by each spindle is:

0: Not performed.
1: performed.
This master axis and slave axis of synchronous spindle control can be selected from the
arbitrary spindles.
The target spindle of synchronous spindle control is specified in parameter No.4831.
- 1708 -
Synchronous spindle signals of each spindle SPSYCs
Signals of synchronous control of the spindle phase for each spindle SPPHSs
For this function, set 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4800 SCB

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#5 SCB The combination of a master spindle and slave spindle for spindle synchronization
depends on:
0: Setting of bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No.3704.
The first spindle and second spindle of each path can be selected as the master
spindle and slave spindle, respectively, for spindle synchronization.
When bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No.3704 is set to 1 a combination of arbitrary
spindles of each path can be selected for spindle synchronization.
Set a master spindle for each slave spindle in parameter No. 831.
Set a spindle number of each path. By setting a spindle number common to the
system in parameter No.4832, an arbitrary spindle that belongs to a different path
can be selected as a master spindle for spindle synchronization.
Set a spindle number common to the system. Set parameter No.4831 to 0.
Spindle synchronization based on arbitrary spindles must be enabled for the path to
which a slave spindle belongs and for the path to which a master spindle belongs.
1: Conventional 16TT system compatible specifications.
The first spindle of path 1 and the first spindle of path 2 can be selected as the
master spindle and slave spindle, respectively, for spindle synchronization.
As control signals, the signal interface of the 16TT system compatible specifications
can be used.
For this function, set 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4801 SNDs

NOTE
#0 SNDs During spindle synchronization control, the rotation direction of each spindle motor is:
- 1709 -
Error pulse between two spindles when synchronizing phases in the spindle
4810

Set an allowable error pulse value between two spindles at phase synchronization time in
the spindle synchronization control mode.
This parameter is used to check the completion of phase synchronization performed in the
spindle synchronization control mode and to check the phase difference during spindle
synchronization control. When the error pulse value between two spindles become equal
to or less than the value set in this parameter, the spindle phase synchronization control
completion signals FSPPH<Fn044.3> and FSPPH1 to 4 <Fn289.0 to 3> are set to “1”.
Error pulse between two spindles when synchronizing phases in the spindle
4811

synchronization control mode. This parameter is used to check a spindle synchronization
error phase difference.
parameter is detected, the phase error monitor signals SYCAL<F044#4> and SYCAL1 to
4<F043#0 to 3> are set to 1.
NOTE
1.
When a spindle not belonging to the local path is to be selected as
a master spindle for spindle synchronization, set a spindle number
common to the system in parameter No. 4832. In such a case, set
0 in this parameter.
Master spindle of each slave spindle under spindle synchronization control

4832
(spindle number common to the system)

[Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled axes (common to the system)
NOTE

- 1710 -
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid if bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No. 3704 is set
to Bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No. 3704 must be set to 1 (to enable
spindle synchronization based on arbitrary spindles) for the path to
which a slave spindle belongs and for the path to which a master
spindle belongs.
3 In this parameter, set a spindle number common to the system.
When this parameter is used, parameter No.4831 is set to 0.
Note
CAUTION
1 Output signal SYCAL is used for monitoring a phase shift in synchronous control.
Whether the processing is performed when a phase shift is detected depends on
the specifications determined by the machine tool builder.
2 A gear ratio of 1 : 1 only is allowed between the spindle and position coder.
3 A CNC system restriction is imposed on the maximum number of spindles.
4 If the speed at the spindle synchronous mode exceeds maximum speed of slave
spindle, an alarm PS0447 “ILLEGAL SETTING DATA” occurs.
5 Master spindle and slave spindle stop rotating due to a servo alarm, emergency
stop, machine lock, etc.
11.20.10 Speed-up of Spindle Stop Motion for Spindle Control with

Servo Motor
Overview
If SV speed control mode is canceled during spindle rotation, spindle indexing is executed and spindle is
stopped at specified position so far. When bit 0 (NSP) of parameter No.11002 is set to 1, If SV speed
control mode is canceled during spindle rotation, spindle indexing is not executed and spindle is
decelerated and stopped. When spindle indexing is unnecessary, machining cycle time can be reduced.
NOTE
- 1711 -
Format
When bit 0 (NSP) of parameter No.11002 is set to 1:
G96.1 P_ ; The operation of the next block is started after deceleration
stop of spindle.
G96.2 P_ ; The operation of the next block is started before deceleration
stop of spindle.
G96.1 P_ R_ ; The operation of the next block is started after completing
spindle indexing.
G96.2 P_ R_ ; The operation of the next block is started before completing
spindle indexing.
G96.3 P_ ; The operation of the next block is started after confirming
completion of spindle indexing.
P : Spindle selection with multi-spindle control
R : Stoppage angle [deg] (0 to (parameter No.1260))
NOTE
1 When using G96.2, issue G96.3 before another spindle move command, to
make sure that the spindle is at a complete halt.
2 To issue G96.1, G96.2, or G96.3, use an independent block.
Explanation
When bit 0 (NSP) of parameter No.11002 is set to 1, if SV speed is canceled during spindle rotation,
spindle indexing is not executed and spindle is decelerated and stopped.
Command with a program

When R address is not commanded at G96.1 block, spindle indexing is not executed and spindle is
decelerated and stopped. SV speed control mode in-progress signal SVREV<Fn521> becomes “0” after
deceleration stop of spindle, and SV speed control mode is canceled. Then, the next block is started.
When also R address is not commanded at G96.2 block as well, spindle indexing is not executed and
spindle is decelerated and stopped. If G96.2 is commanded, the next block is started without waiting
deceleration stop of spindle. If G96.3 is commanded, SV speed control mode in-progress signal
SVREV<Fn521> becomes “0”, and SV speed control mode is canceled. When R address is commanded
at G96.1 or G96.2 block, spindle indexing is executed and spindle is stopped at specified position.
Command with a signal

When SV speed control mode signal SRVON<Gn521> is set to “0”, spindle indexing is not executed and
spindle is decelerated and stopped. SV speed control mode in-progress signal SVREV<Fn521> becomes
“0” after deceleration stop of spindle, and SV speed control mode is canceled.
Acceleration up to deceleration stop of spindle

When SV speed control mode is canceled, parameter (No.11020, No.11021, No.11030, No.11031,
No.11032) is applied to deceleration stop of spindle as well as acceleration of spindle.
- 1712 -
Rotation speed
-1
[min ] S Ac
S1
Ab
S0
Aa
Time[sec]
Fig. 11.20.10 (a) Acceleration up to deceleration stop
Table 11.20.10 (a) Parameters for acceleration up to deceleration stop

-1
S Specified rotation speed[min ]
Aa Acceleration 1 [min-1/s] (parameter No.11030)
Ab Acceleration 2 [min-1/s] (parameter No.11031)
Ac Acceleration 3 [min-1/s] (parameter No.11032)
Notes
- Specify an M code not involved in buffering as an M code to be used as a command for switching the
SV speed control mode (parameters Nos.3411 to 3420 and 11290 to 11299).
- M code for switching the SV speed control mode must be specified in an independent block. When
using multiple M commands in a single block, the M code must be specified as the first M command.
- G96.1, G96.2, G96.3, G96.4, and M code for switching the SV speed control mode must be specified
in the path to which the spindle of interest belongs.
- After G96.2 command, command G96.3 before commanding move command such as rapid traverse
(G00) or cutting feed (G01) to rotation axis. Move command is specified without commanding G96.3,
alarm PS0445 “ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION” is issued.
- If G96.3 is not commanded after G96.2 command, SV speed control mode is not canceled. For
example, reset before G96.2 command.
- G96.1, G96.2 G96.3, G96.4 cannot be commanded for settings other than multi-spindle control type
P.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11002 NSP

#0 NSP When SV speed control mode is canceled, spindle indexing is:

0: executed.
1: not executed.
- 1713 -
11.20.11 Alarm and Message

instruction word.
PS0445 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION The positioning command was issued in the speed control
mode. Check the SV speed control mode signal.
PS0446 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G96.1, G96.2, G96.3, and G96.4 are specified in the block
G96.1/G96.2/G96.3/G96.4 that includes other commands. Modify the program.
PS0447 ILLEGAL SETTING DATA The spindle controlled axis is incorrectly set. Check the
parameter for the live tool control function by a servo motor.
PS0601 ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND FOR The move command was executed to the servo axes for
SERVO MOTOR SPINDLE spindle use of the spindle control with servo motor. Modify
the program.
PS0602 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION FOR The spindle controlled with the serve motor is not selected
SERVO MOTOR SPINDLE correctly.
- When multi-spindle control is enabled, check whether
the selected spindle is servo motor spindle.
- When multi-spindle control is disabled, check whether
1st spindle in commanded path is a servo motor spindle.
SV0410 EXCESS ERROR (STOP) The amount of positional deviation during stopping
exceeded the parameter No. 1829 setting value.
SV0411 EXCESS ERROR (MOVING) The amount of positional deviation during traveling
became excessive than the parameter setting value.
SV0417 ILL DGTL SERVO PARAMETER A digital serve parameter setting is incorrect.
- 1714 -
11.21 SPINDLE REVOLUTION NUMBER HISTORY FUNCTION

Overview
This function counts the spindle revolution number and displays the total revolution number as diagnosis
data.
Total revolution number data as diagnosis data can be read with the PMC window function, and can be
used for spindle unit life management on the PMC ladder.
NOTE
To use this function, enable the spindle serial output (bit 5 (SSN) of parameter
No.8133 is 0).
Explanation
This function is enabled by setting bit 5 (SSH) of parameter No. 3799, to 1.
Two total revolution number displays are provided, which are shown as diagnosis data Nos. 1520 and
1521, respectively.
Total revolution number data as diagnosis data can be read with the PMC window function.
For details, refer to "Reading diagnosis data (function code 33) in Chapter 5, "Window Functions", in the
PMC Programming Manual (B-64513EN).
As for total revolution number display data, the total revolution number data for a specified diagnosis
data number can be cleared for a specific spindle, using the signals below.
- Using the total spindle revolution number reset selection signal SSRS <Gn533.4>, select the
diagnosis data number of the total revolution number data to be cleared.
- Using an appropriate total spindle revolution number reset signal SSR1, SSR2, SSR3, SSR4
<Gn533.0, 1, 2, 3>, clear the total revolution number data for a specific spindle.
NOTE
1 Storage of spindle revolution number data in data-retention memory is
performed at intervals of about one second. If the power is turned off while a
spindle is revolving, revolution number data is not stored for one second before
the power is turned off.
2 This function is effective to a built-in spindle motor and to a spindle configuration
in which a spindle and a spindle motor is connected together at a gear ratio of
1:1.
3 If the spindle switching function (a configuration in which one set of
main/sub-spindle motors are connected to a single spindle amplifier) is used,
total revolution number data is counted as an integrated value of two spindles.
Signal
Total spindle revolution number reset signals
SSR1, SSR2, SSR3, SSR4 <Gn533.0, 1, 2, 3>
[Function] Each of these signals resets the total revolution number for its corresponding spindle,
returning diagnosis data No. 1520, total revolution number display, to zero.
If SSRS is “1”, each of these signals resets diagnosis data No. 1521, total revolution
number display, returning it to zero.
- 1715 -
[Operation] When set to “1”, each signal performs the operation below.
- Reset the total revolution number for its corresponding spindle. SSR1 corresponds to
the first spindle, SSR2 the second spindle, SSR3 the third, and SSR4 the fourth.
Total spindle revolution number reset selection signal SSRS <Gn533.4>

[Function] Used to select between diagnosis data Nos. 1520 and 1521; the total spindle revolution
number for the selected item No. will be reset.
[Operation] When set to “1”, it performs the operation below.
- The total spindle revolution number for diagnosis data No. 1521 can be reset.
When set to “0”, it performs the operation below.
- The total spindle revolution number for diagnosis data No. 1520 can be reset.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn533 SSRS SSR4 SSR3 SSR2 SSR1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3799 SSH

#5 SSH On the diagnosis screen, total spindle speed data is:

0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
Diagnosis data
1520 Total spindle revolution number 1

[Unit of data] 1000 min-1
The spindle revolution number is counted, and the total revolution number is displayed.
1521 Total spindle revolution number 2

[Unit of data] 1000 min-1
The spindle revolution number is counted, and the total revolution number is displayed.
- 1716 -
11.22 SERVO/SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL
11.22.1 Servo/Spindle Synchronous Control

Overview
This function provides the following functions to use a servo motor as a spindle:
(a) Servo motor spindle control
Can rotate the servo motor at the rotation speed specified with an input signal.
(b) Servo motor spindle synchronization
Can rotate the servo motor in synchronization with the feedback pulses from the position coder of
the spindle.
(c) Differential speed synchronization
(i) Can superimpose a command from the CNC on the servo motor in servo motor spindle
synchronization.
(ii) Can superimpose the rotation speed specified with an input signal on the servo motor in servo
motor spindle synchronization.
NOTE
2 To use this function, enable the spindle synchronous control (bit 4 (SYC) of
parameter No.8133 is 1).
Explanation
- Connection
Input feedback pulses from the position coder to the pulse module.
To make effective the feedback pulses input to the pulse module, set parameters Nos. 24096 to 24103.
This causes the spindle (position coder) and the servo motor to synchronize with each other.
Example) Connection example

Parameter No. 24096 = 1: Uses connector number 1 (JF101).
CNC COP10A
Pulse module
JA41
JA7B SPM COP10B SVM COP10A
COP10B
JX4
JF101
Spindle
Servo motor
motor
Position coder
Fig. 11.22 (a) Connection example for servo/spindle synchronous control
NOTE
During operation, the combination of spindle and servo motor to synchronize
cannot be changed.
- 1717 -
- Configuration
To use this function, the detection unit must be specified by setting the flexible feed gear (M/N) in such a
way that the number of pulses per rotation of the spindle will be 4096. Thus, it is necessary to select a
servo motor-to-spindle gear ratio a:b so that the M and N values of the flexible feed gear as determined
from the expression below will be equal to or less than 32767.
M a 4,096
= ×
N b 1,000,000
To perform servo motor and spindle synchronous control, set a magnification (integral multiple or R) so
that the number of feedback pulses from the position coder will be 4096 per rotation of the spindle. That
is, the gear ratio of the position coder to the spindle must be one to an integer.
Servo motor spindle Servo motor spindle control signal (SVSP)
control command Position coder
(SVR01I-SVR12I)
(β) ×R
Differential speed command Magnification (parameter No. 2038)
enable signal (DFSYC) (α)
Servo motor spindle synchronous
during servo motor spindle
control signal (SYSS)
synchronous control
(γ) Sub- Main
Spindle-side gear: a spindle spindle
NC command + +
+ 4096 pulses/rotation
Position F.B. Spindle

M/N Servo motor Servo motor-side gear: b motor
Flexible feed gear
(parameters Nos. 2084 and 2085)
Fig. 11.22 (b) System configuration example
- Setting example
If using the A-axis (rotation axis) of the servo motor as the spindle
Conditions
Detector : 1,000,000 (pulses/rotation)
Spindle-side gear : 8,000
Servo motor-side gear : 3,600
CMR : 1 (setting: 2)
Gear ratio of the position coder to the spindle : 1 to 2
The flexible feed gear can be determined from the formula below.
M a 4 ,0 9 6 8 ,0 0 0 4 ,0 9 6 256
= × = × =
N b 1, 0 0 0 , 0 0 0 3, 6 0 0 1, 0 0 0 , 0 0 0 2 8 ,1 2 5
If these settings are made, a normal move command for the A-axis will be A4.096 per rotation of the
spindle, and the speed command will be a feed per minute command per rpm, F4.096.
The magnification (R) for servo motor and spindle synchronous control will be set to 2 because the gear
ratio of the position coder to the spindle is 1:2.
- Servo motor spindle control

- Servo motor spindle control mode

By setting the servo motor spindle switching signal SVSP <Gn022.7> to “1”, the system enters servo
motor spindle control mode, so that the servo motor can be rotated at the rotation speed specified with a
signal.
In servo motor spindle control mode, the servo motor spindle control mode signal SVSPM <Fn090.7> is
set to “1”.
- 1718 -
By setting SVSP to “0”, servo motor spindle control mode is canceled. If this occurs, SVSPM is set to
“0”.
NOTE
1 In servo motor spindle control mode, coordinates will not be updated. Thus, the
relationships between coordinates and actual machine position will be lost.
2 If a move command is commanded from the CNC on the servo motor in servo
motor spindle control mode, alarm PS5211 “ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION” is
issued.
- Specifying a motor rotation speed

The rotation speed of the servo motor in servo motor spindle control mode can be specified with the servo
motor rotation speed specification signals SVR01I to SVR12I <Gn021.0 to Gn022.3>. Set the setting
determined from the formula below, in binary notation.
Speed of spindle motor
Setting = × 4095
Maximum speed of spindle motor
The rotation direction of the motor can be specified with the servo motor rotation polarity specification
signal SVGN <Gn022.5>.
- Acceleration/deceleration
If servo motor spindle control mode is turned on or off or if the rotation speed specified with SVR01I to
SVR12I changes, acceleration/deceleration is performed with the time constant set in parameter No. 3843.
When a steady state is attained after the completion of acceleration/deceleration, the servo motor spindle
control mode acceleration/deceleration completion signal SVAR <Fn090.6> is set to “1”.
S V R 0 1 I to S V R 1 2 I, S V G N (in p u t)
S V S P (in p u t)
S V S P M (o u tp u t)
S V A R (o u tp u t)
S e rv o m o to r ro ta tio n
Fig. 11.22 (c) Timing chart of signals during servo motor spindle control
- Servo motor spindle synchronization

Can rotate the servo motor in synchronization with the feedback pulses from the position coder of the
spindle.
- Servo motor spindle synchronization mode

By setting the servo motor spindle synchronization start signal SYSS <Gn061.2> to “1”, the system
enters servo motor spindle synchronization mode. When the system enters servo motor spindle
synchronization mode, the servo motor accelerates or decelerates to the rotation speed of the spindle that
is specified with parameter No. 3844. If a move command is commanded from the CNC in
acceleration/deceleration, alarm PS5211 “ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION” is issued. Upon completion of
acceleration/deceleration, the servo motor spindle synchronization mode acceleration/deceleration
completion signal SYAR <Fn090.4> is set to “1”. Then the servo motor rotates in synchronization with
the feedback pulses from the position coder.
- 1719 -
When the system enters servo motor spindle synchronization mode, the servo motor spindle
synchronization mode signal SYSSM <Fn090.5> is set to “1”.
By setting SYSS to “0”, servo motor spindle synchronization mode is canceled. If a rotation command is
being executed with servo motor spindle control, the sub-spindle accelerates or decelerates to the speed
specified at that point. Upon completion of the cancellation of servo motor spindle synchronization,
SYSSM is set to “0”.
S Y S S (in p u t)
S Y S S M (o u tp u t)
S Y A R (o u tp u t)
S p in d le s p e e d
S e rv o m o to r ro ta tio n
Fig. 11.22 (d) Timing chart of signals during servo motor spindle synchronization
NOTE
1 In servo motor spindle synchronization mode, coordinates will not be updated.
Thus, the relationships between coordinates and actual machine position will be
lost. That is, the updating of coordinates with NC commands in servo motor
spindle synchronization mode does not represent the actual movements of the
machine.
2 At the start or end of servo motor spindle synchronization mode, all servo axes
except slave axes must be stopped.
3 To start or cancel servo motor spindle synchronization mode during automatic
operation, be sure to specify an M code that does not perform buffering before
and after switching modes.
4 In servo motor spindle synchronization mode, nano interpolation is disabled.
5 In servo motor spindle synchronization mode, do not use the torque control or
speed control of PMC axis control on slave axes.
- Relationships with servo motor spindle control mode

In servo motor spindle synchronization mode, rotation commands due to servo motor spindle control
commands are disabled. By setting SYSS to 0, servo motor spindle control commands are enabled.
- Differential speed synchronization

Can superimpose a move command from the CNC or the rotation speed specified with an input signal on
the servo motor in servo motor spindle synchronization mode. It cannot superimpose both of them at the
same time.
- Superimposition of a move command

If a move command is executed on the servo axis in servo motor spindle synchronization mode, the move
command is superimposed on the synchronization speed.
- 1720 -
- Superimposition of the rotation speed from an input signal

By setting the differential speed synchronization command signal DFSYC <Gn022.4> and the servo
motor spindle switching signal SVSP to “1” in servo motor spindle synchronization mode, SVR01I to
SVR12I and SVGN become effective, so that the servo motor rotates at the speed resulting from
synthesizing the speed specified with SVR01I to SVR12I and the speed at which to synchronize with the
feedback from the position coder.
If a move command is commanded from the CNC on the servo motor in servo motor spindle
synchronization mode when DFSYC and SVSP signals set to “1”, alarm PS5211 “ILLEGAL AXIS
OPERATION” is issued.
Signal
Servo motor spindle control switching signal SVSP <Gn022.7>
[Function] By setting SVSP to “1”, the system enters servo motor spindle control mode, so that a
command is executed on the servo motor at the rotation speed previously set in the 12 bits
of SVR1I to SVR12I. If this occurs, SVSPM is set to “1”.
By setting SVSP to “0”, servo motor spindle control mode is canceled. If this occurs,
SVSPM is set to “0”.
NOTE
In servo motor spindle control mode, coordinates will not be
updated. Thus, the relationships between coordinates and actual
machine position will be lost.
Servo motor spindle control mode signal SVSPM <Fn090.7>

[Function] This signal notifies that the system is in servo motor spindle control mode.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to “1” when the system enters servo motor spindle control mode.
Servo motor rotation speed specification signals SVR01I to SVR12I <Gn021.0 to

Gn022.3>
[Function] These signals enable specification of the rotation speed of the servo motor during servo
motor spindle control by setting the setting determined from the formula below, in binary
notation.
Speed of spindle motor
Setting = × 4095
Maximum speed of spindle motor
Servo motor rotation polarity specification signal SVGN <Gn022.5>

[Function] This signal specifies the rotation direction of the servo motor.
0: The polarity is plus.
1: The polarity is minus.
Servo motor spindle control mode acceleration/deceleration completion signal

SVAR <Fn090.6>
[Function] This signal notifies that servo motor acceleration/deceleration has ended in servo motor
spindle control.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to “1” at the end of acceleration/deceleration in servo motor spindle
control mode.
- 1721 -
Servo motor spindle synchronization start signal SYSS <Gn061.2>

[Function] By setting SYSS to “1”, the system enters servo motor spindle synchronization mode. If
this occurs, SYSSM is set to “1”.
When the system enters servo motor spindle synchronization mode, the sub-spindle
accelerates or decelerates to the rotation speed of the main spindle. Then, the sub-spindle
rotates in synchronization with the feedback pulses from the position coder of the main
spindle.
By setting SYSS to “0”, servo motor spindle synchronization mode is canceled. If a
rotation command is being executed with servo motor spindle control, the sub-spindle
accelerates or decelerates to the speed specified at that point. Upon completion of the
cancellation of servo motor spindle synchronization, SYSSM is set to “0”.
In servo motor spindle synchronization mode, rotation commands due to servo motor
spindle control commands are disabled. By setting SYSS to “0”, servo motor spindle
control commands are enabled.
NOTE
In servo motor spindle synchronization mode, coordinates will not
be updated. Thus, the relationships between coordinates and
actual machine position will be lost. That is, the updating of
coordinates with NC commands in servo motor spindle
synchronization mode does not represent the actual movements of
the machine.
Servo motor spindle synchronization mode signal SYSSM <Fn090.5>

[Function] This signal notifies that the system is in servo motor spindle synchronization mode.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to “1” when the system enters servo motor spindle synchronization
mode.
Servo motor spindle synchronization mode acceleration/deceleration completion

signal SYAR <Fn090.4>
[Function] This signal notifies that servo motor acceleration/deceleration has ended in servo motor
spindle synchronization.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to “1” at the end of acceleration/deceleration in servo motor spindle
synchronization mode.
Differential speed synchronization command signal DFSYC <Gn022.4>

[Function] This signal enables rotation commands due to servo motor spindle control in servo motor
spindle synchronization mode.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#p #p #p #p #p #p #p #p
Gn021 SVR08I SVR07I SVR06I SVR05I SVR04I SVR03I SVR02I SVR01I
#P #p #P #p #p #p #p
Gn022 SVSP SVGN DFSYC SVR12I SVR11I SVR10I SVR09I
#P
Gn061 SYSS
- 1722 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#P #P #P #P
Fn090 SVSPM SVAR SYSSM SYAR
Parameter
3841 Servo motor spindle control axis number
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the axis number of an axis to be subject to servo motor spindle
control or servo motor spindle synchronization.
Setting the parameter to 0 disables servo motor spindle control and servo motor spindle
synchronization.
For servo motor spindle synchronization, you have to set bit 4 (SPSx) of parameter No.
2016.
3842 Maximum speed for servo motor spindle control
[Data type] 2-word

This parameter sets the maximum speed of the spindle to be subject to servo motor
spindle control.
3843 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration under servo motor spindle control
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] msec
This parameter sets the time constant for acceleration/deceleration under servo motor
spindle control and servo motor spindle synchronization.
The type of acceleration/deceleration is linear acceleration/deceleration.
Set the parameter to the time to be taken for the spindle speed to reach 1000 (min-1).
3844 Master spindle number
[Data type] Word

Set the number of the spindle (position coder) to be subject to servo motor spindle
synchronization.
The hundreds and tens digits represent a path; the units digit represents the number of the
position coder in the path.
To synchronize the servo axis in the second path and the second position coder in the first
path under dual-path control, for example, set this parameter for the second path to 12.
When the hundreds and tens digits are both 0, the local path is assumed.
When a value of 0 is specified, the first position coder in the local path is assumed.
WARNING
1 The combination of the position coder and servo motor to be
synchronized with each other is determined by wire connection.
Even though you change the setting of this parameter, therefore,
you cannot change the combination of the position coder and servo
motor to be synchronized with each other.
2 This parameter is used for acceleration or deceleration to be
performed when the synchronization mode is turned on/off.
- 1723 -
WARNING
3 It is dangerous to set a value not matching the actually
wire-connected combination as it prevents correct
acceleration/deceleration. Be sure to set a value matching the
actual wire connection.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2003 PIENx
#3 PIENx PI control is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
This bit must be set to use the feed forward function.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2005 FEEDx
#1 FEEDx Feed forward function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
1 This bit must be set to use the feed forward function.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2016 SPSx
#4 SPSx Servo motor spindle synchronization is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
Be sure to set this bit to perform servo spindle synchronization.
2038 Spindle feedback magnification (R)
[Data type] Word

[Valid data range] ±32737
Set a magnification so that the number of feedback pulses from the position coder of the
main spindle during servo motor spindle synchronization will be 4096 per rotation of the
spindle.
Setting= Gear of spindle
- 1724 -
Gear of position coder
If the setting is 0, synchronous control is not performed.

The rotation direction of the servo motor changes with the sign of the setting.
2068 Feed forward coefficient
[Data type] Word

Setting = α x 100
NOTE
To use the feed forward function, this parameter must be set.
2069 Velocity feed forward coefficient
[Data type] Word

This parameter adjusts follow-up capability if it is poor.
NOTE
1 To use the feed forward function, this parameter must be set.
2084 Flexible feed gear (numerator) (M)
2085 Flexible feed gear (denominator) (N)

Set the flexible feed gear so that the command per rotation of the spindle will be 4096.
24096 Connector number for the first or ninth separate detector interface unit
24097 Connector number for the second or tenth separate detector interface unit
24098 Connector number for the third or eleventh separate detector interface unit
24099 Connector number for the fourth or twelfth separate detector interface unit
24100 Connector number for the fifth separate detector interface unit
24101 Connector number for the sixth separate detector interface unit
24102 Connector number for the seventh separate detector interface unit
24103 Connector number for the eighth separate detector interface unit
NOTE
When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before

- 1725 -

Set a connector number for the connector to which a separate detector interface unit is
attached if the separate detector interface unit is to be used. The following table lists the
necessary settings. Be sure to specify 0 for connectors not in use.
Correspondence between connectors and connector numbers

Connector Connector number
JF101 1
JF102 2
JF103 3
JF104 4
JF105 5
JF106 6
JF107 7
JF108 8
(Setting example)
Connector to which each separate detector
Parameter setting
Controlled interface unit is attached
axis 1st 2nd 5th 6th No. No. No. No.
connector connector connector connector 24096 24097 24100 24101
X1 JF101 －－－ 1 0 0 0
Y1 － JF102 －－ 0 2 0 0
Z1 －－ JF102 － 0 0 2 0
X2 － JF101 －－ 0 1 0 0
Y2 －－－ JF101 0 0 0 1
Z2 －－－－ 0 0 0 0
A1 －－ JF101 － 0 0 1 0
B1 －－－ JF102 0 0 0 2
C1 － JF104 －－ 0 4 0 0
A2 JF102 －－－ 2 0 0 0
B2 － JF103 －－ 0 3 0 0
C2 －－－ JF103 0 0 0 3
NOTE
1 Specify these parameters when separate detector interface units
are used.
2 Parameters Nos. 24096 to 24103 are specified automatically when
data is entered on the FSSB setting screen if the FSSB setting mode
in use is the automatic setting mode (bit 0 (FMD) of parameter No.
1902 = 0). If the manual setting 2 mode (bit 0 (FMD) of parameter
No. 1902) = 1), specify the parameters directly.
Alarm and message

PS5211 ILLEGAL AXIS - A move command is commanded from the CNC on the servo motor in
OPERATION servo motor spindle control mode.
- A move command is commanded from the CNC on the servo motor in
acceleration/deceleration of servo motor spindle synchronization mode.
- A move command is commanded from the CNC on the servo motor in
servo motor spindle synchronization mode when differential speed
synchronization command signal DFSYC and the servo motor spindle
switching signal SVSP set to “1”.
- 1726 -
Note
Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB type)
The separate detector interface unit becomes unnecessary by the FSSB communication between a CNC
and a spindle amplifier.
However, if the separate detector interface unit is used, do not set the setting (the parameters FHRSV (bit
2 of No.2429) and FHESP (bit 2 of No.4549) of Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB type).
Refer to the section, "Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB type)" in this manual for details.
Servo alarm
If a servo alarm occurs, servo spindle control and servo spindle synchronization mode are canceled. If this
occurs, SVSPM, SYSSM, SVAR, and SYAR (<Fn090> signals) are all cleared.
After the servo alarm is canceled, servo spindle control and servo spindle synchronization will be enabled
again.
Servo off
If follow-up is performed (bit 0 (FUPx) of parameter No. 1819 = 0), servo spindle control and servo
spindle synchronization mode are canceled. If this occurs, SVSPM, SYSSM, SVAR, and SYAR
(<Fn090> signals) are all cleared.
If follow-up is not performed (bit 0 (FUPx) of parameter No. 1819 = 1), servo spindle control and servo
spindle synchronization mode are not canceled. Commands are accumulated as servo errors.
Emergency stop
In the event of an emergency stop, servo spindle control and servo spindle synchronization mode are
canceled. If this occurs, SVSPM, SYSSM, SVAR, and SYAR (<Fn090> signals) are all cleared.
After the emergency stop is canceled, servo spindle control and servo spindle synchronization will be
enabled again.
Feed forward
During servo spindle control and servo spindle synchronization, the function of feed forward with a servo
motor can be enabled. Enabling the feed forward function has the effect of preventing delays due to servo
errors when differential speed commands are issued.
Multi-path
- Number of axes
Only a single servo axis per path can be used with this function.
- Signal address
If the servo motor on the second path is used, the addresses of all control signals are the original ones plus
1000.
Similarly, for the third path, the addresses are the original ones plus 2000.
- Synchronization between paths

It is possible to synchronize between paths. To do this, input the signal for the path to which the servo
axis belongs.
For example, to synchronize the spindle on path 1 with the servo axis on path 2, input the signal on path 2
(G1000 to G1999).
- Synchronization of multiple axes

It is possible to synchronize multiple servo axes to a single spindle. To do this, input the signals on the
multiple paths to which the servo axes belong.
It is necessary to connect multiple position coders to the same master spindle and input them to the
connectors of the respective pulse modules.
- 1727 -
Servo motor spindle control and servo motor synchronous control

If servo motor synchronous control is performed during servo motor spindle control, servo motor spindle
control is canceled. If, however, a differential speed synchronization command signal is input, servo
motor spindle control is enabled.
S V S P (in p u t)
S V S P M ( o u tp u t)
S V A R (o u tp u t)
S Y S S (in p u t)
S Y S S M ( o u tp u t)
S Y A R (o u tp u t)
D F S Y C (in p u t)
S p e e d o f m a in s p in d le
M o to r s p e e d
Fig. 11.22 (e) Timing chart of signals related to servo motor spindle control
11.22.2 Servo/Spindle Synchronous Control (FSSB Type)

Outline
By the FSSB communication between a CNC and a spindle amplifier, rotational position information of a
spindle can be transmitted from a spindle amplifier to a servo control on CNC. Servo/Spindle
synchronous control (FSSB type) is a function that a servo axis follows a spindle axis by utilizing this
FSSB communication. And it is a feature of this function that the separate detector interface unit becomes
unnecessary compared with the ordinary function.
NOTE
To use this function, the option "Servo/Spindle synchronous control" is required.
Additionally, to use this function, enable the spindle synchronous control (bit 4
(SYC) of parameter No.8133 is 1).
- 1728 -
Explanation
Ex.1) Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB type) with A axis and S1 spindle axis in the one path
system.
First FSSB line
CNC
FSSB connector Servo amplifier Servo motor: X
Servo motor: Z
Servo amplifier Servo motor: A
Servo amplifier Servo motor: Y

The following setting are necessary in addition to setting of existing parameters related to
Servo/Spindle synchronous control.
When the parameter FHR (Bit 0 of No.24203) is set to 1, position data transmission by FSSB is
enabled.
And, the index number of the spindle axis (S1) that synchronizes with the servo axis (A) used by
Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB type) is set to the parameter (No.24204) as follows.

X 0
Z 0
A 1
Y 0
In addition, set the parameter FSBSYN (bit2 of No.2429) of A axis and the parameter FHESP (bit2 of
No.4549) of S1 spindle axis to 1.
Ex.2) Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB type) with A1 - S1 and A2 - S2 in two path system.
- 1729 -
First FSSB line
CNC Servo motor: X1

FSSB connector Servo amplifier
Servo motor: Z1
Servo amplifier Servo motor: A1
Servo motor: Y1
Servo motor: X2
Servo amplifier
Servo motor: Z2
Servo amplifier Servo motor: A2
Servo motor: Y2

The following setting are necessary in addition to setting of existing parameters related to
When the parameter FHR (Bit 0 of No.24203) is set to 1, position data transmission by FSSB is
enabled.
And, the index number of the spindle axes (S1, S2) that synchronizes with the servo axes (A1, A2)
used by Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB type) is set to the parameter (No.24204) as follows.
Path 1
X1 0
Z1 0
A1 1
Y1 0
Path 2
X2 0
Z2 0
A2 2
Y2 0
In addition, set the parameter FSBSYN (bit2 of No.2429) of A1 and A2 axes and the parameter FHESP
(bit2 of No.4549) of S1 and S2 spindle axes to 1.
Four or less index numbers of the spindle axis can be set in all system. If five or more index numbers of
the spindle axis or illegal index number of spindle axis is set, the alarm (PW0037) "SV/SP
COMBINATION ERROR" is issued.
- 1730 -
NOTE
1 When the parameter is changed, the power must be turned off before an
2 Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB type) cannot be used with analog
spindle or the spindle control with servo motor. If the above setting is set the
parameter No.24204, the alarm (PW0037) “SV/SP COMBINATION ERROR” is
issued.
3 The setting of the arbitrary gear ratio (DMR function) for main-spindle (spindle
motor) cannot be used.
4 With sub-spindle (servo motor) used by Servo/Spindle synchronous control
(FSSB type), the following servo software functions cannot be used.
- FSSB high-speed rigid tapping
- Electronic Gear Box
- Full-closed control
5 Others follow notes of Servo/Spindle synchronous control.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
24203 FHR
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#0 FHR Position data transmission by FSSB is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
1 In addition, it is necessary to set parameter No.24204.
2 When Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB type) is used, set
this parameter to 1.
24204 The index number of the spindle axis that synchronizes to each servo axis
NOTE

[Valid data range] 0 to the maximum number of spindles
Set the index number of the spindle motor (main-spindle) that synchronizes with the
servo axis (sub-spindle) by Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB type).
- 1731 -
NOTE
1 When the parameter FHR (Bit 0 of No.24203) is 1, this parameter
is enabled.
2 Four or less index numbers of the spindle axis can be set in the
system. If five or more index numbers of the spindle axis are set,
alarm (PW0037) “SV/SP COMBINATION ERROR” is issued.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2429 FSBSYN

#2 FSBSYN Servo control by Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB type) is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
1 When using Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB type), set
2 In the servo axis, in which this parameter is 1, the following function
cannot be used. If using with either of the following functions, the
alarm (SV0417) “ILL DGTL SERVO PARAMETER” is issued.
(Detail number of diagnosis data No.352 becomes 4292 or 4291)
- FSSB high-speed rigid tapping (Bit 1 of No.2429)
- Electronic gear box (Bit 0 of No.2011)
- Full-closed control (Bit 1 of No.1815)
3 When the parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4549 FHESP

#2 FHESP Spindle control by Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB type) is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
1 When using Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB type), set
2 In the spindle axis, in which this parameter is 1, FSSB high-speed
rigid tapping cannot be used. If using with FSSB high-speed rigid
tapping, the alarm (SP9068) “ILLEGAL SPINDLE PARAMETER” is
issued.
- 1732 -
Alarm and message

PW0037 SV/SP COMBINATION ERROR - The servo axis has dummy axis setting. Please check
parameters (No.1023, bit 0 of No.2009, and bit 4 of
No.11802).
- The setting for the function for spindle axis number to
synchronize with servo axis is illegal. Please check
parameters (bit 0 of No.3716, No.3717, and No.24204).
SV0417 ILLEGAL SERVO PARAMETER - The setting for the function, which is not available with
Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB type)
together, is done. Please turn it off.
SP9068 ILLEGAL SPINDLE PARAMETER - Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB type) and
FSSB high-speed rigid tapping cannot be used
together. Please check the parameter (bit 1 and bit2 of
No.4549).
- In the case of Servo/Spindle synchronous control
(FSSB type) using, please turn off FSSB high-speed
rigid tapping.
Diagnose
1612 The index number of the spindle axis that synchronizes with each servo axis
[Data Type] Byte axis
The index number of the spindle axis that can use direct communication between a
spindle amplifier and a servo amplifier on FSSB connection is displayed.
11.22.3 PHASE SYNCHRONIZATION FOR SERVO/SPINDLE

SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL
Outline
There are three functions on Servo/Spindle synchronous control.
(a) Servo motor spindle control
(b) Servo motor spindle synchronization
Can rotate the servo motor in synchronization with the feedback pulses from the spindle sensor.
(c) Differential speed synchronization
(i) Can superimpose a command from the CNC on the servo motor in servo motor spindle
synchronization.
(ii) Can superimpose the rotation speed specified with an input signal on the servo motor in servo
motor spindle synchronization.
By this function, the phase of sub-spindle (the servo motor machine coordinate zero point in the status of
reference position establishment) can match the phase of main-spindle (the spindle sensor position
determined by the one-rotation signal) on (b) Servo motor spindle synchronization.
Addition, the phase can be shifted by the parameter.
Refer to the section, "Servo/Spindle synchronous control" in this manual for the basic specification of
It is necessary to set Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB type). Refer to the section, "Servo/Spindle
synchronous control (FSSB type)" in this manual for details.
- 1733 -
NOTE
To use this function, the option "Servo/Spindle synchronous control" is required.
Additionally, to use this function, enable the spindle synchronous control (bit 4
(SYC) of parameter No.8133 is 1).
Explanation
The phase of sub-spindle (the servo motor machine coordinate zero point in the status of reference
position establishment) can match the phase of main-spindle (the spindle sensor position determined by
the one-rotation signal). Addition, the phase can be shifted by the parameter No.3845.
The method of phase synchronization is shown as follows.
(1) Establish the reference position of sub-spindle (servo motor) by Reference position establishment.
(Reference position establishment signals ZRFx <Fn120.x> is "1")
(2) Execute spindle orientation of main-spindle (spindle motor).
(3) When Servo motor spindle synchronization start signal SYSS <Gn061.2> is set "1", it becomes
servo motor spindle synchronization mode.
(4) When it becomes servo motor spindle synchronization mode, Servo motor spindle synchronization
mode signal SYSSM <Fn090.5> becomes "1".
(5) When it becomes servo motor spindle synchronization mode, sub-spindle accelerates or decelerates
to the rotation speed of main-spindle.
(6) When the acceleration/deceleration of sub-spindle is completed, Servo motor spindle
synchronization mode acceleration/deceleration completion signal SYAR <Fn090.4> becomes "1".
(7) When Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous start signal SYPST <Gn517.7> is set
"1" after the acceleration/deceleration of sub-spindle is completed, phase synchronization starts.
(8) The shift value between main-spindle and sub-spindle can be set by parameter No.3845.
(9) It accelerates or decelerates from the current spindle motor speed to the setting speed of parameter
No.3846 by Linear acceleration/deceleration with the acceleration rate based on parameter No.3843.
(10) When the synchronization error pulse value become small value more than allowable error pulse
value set by parameter No.3847, Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous finished
signal SYPFN <Fn527.6> becomes "1".
(11) After Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous finished signal SYPFN <Fn527.6>
becomes "1", set "0" to Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous start signal SYPST
<Gn517.7>.
(12) When Servo motor spindle synchronization start signal SYSS <Gn061.2> is set "0", servo motor
spindle synchronization mode is canceled.
(13) Servo motor spindle synchronization mode acceleration/deceleration completion signal SYAR
<Fn090.4> and Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous finished signal SYPFN
<Fn527.6> become "0".
(14) Sub-spindle decelerates and stops.
(15) When the acceleration/deceleration of sub-spindle is completed, Servo motor spindle
synchronization mode signal SYSSM <Fn090.5> becomes "0".
- 1734 -
Servo motor spindle (3)

(1) (12)
(10)
synchronization
サーボモータ主軸同期起動信号 start signal
SYSS<Gn061.2>
SYSS<Gn061.2>
<Gn061.2>
Servo motor spindle (4)

(2) (15)
(13)
synchronization
サーボモータ主軸同期モード信号 mode signal
<Fn090.5>
SYSSM<Fn090.5>
SYSSM<Fn090.5>
Servo motor spindle synchronization
サーボモータ主軸同期モード (6)
(4) (13)
(11)
mode acceleration/deceleration
加減速完了信号
completion signal
SYAR<Fn090.4>
SYAR<Fn090.4>
SYAR<Fn090.4>
サーボモータ主軸同期 (7)
(5) (11)
(9)
Phase synchronization start signal
位相合わせ開始信号
<Gn517.7>
SYPST<Gnxxx.x>
SYPST<Gn517.7>
サーボモータ主軸同期
Phase synchronization finished signal (10)
(8)
位相合わせ完了信号
<Fn527.6>
SYPFN<Fnyyy.y>
SYPFN<Fn527.6>
(8)
(6)
(7)
(9) Acceleration or Deceleration
(5)
(3) (14)
(12)
Rotation
サブ主軸の回転数 speed of Sub-spindle
Fig. Signal sequence of phase synchronization on Servo/Spindle synchronous control
NOTE
1 Phase synchronization cannot be executed in superimposition by differential
speed synchronization or motion command. Addition, if differential speed
synchronization or motion command is specified in phase synchronization,
phase synchronization is canceled and differential speed synchronization or
motion command is executed. In this case, Phase synchronization for
Servo/Spindle synchronous error signal SYPER <Fn527.7> becomes "1".
2 Phase synchronization cannot be executed while canceling Servo/Spindle
Addition, If Servo/Spindle synchronous control is canceled during execution
phase synchronization, phase synchronization is canceled.
3 If the servo software or the spindle software doesn’t correspond to this function,
Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous error signal SYPER
<Fn527.7> becomes "1" when Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle
synchronous start signal SYPST <Gn517.7> is set "1".
4 Depending on the mechanical rigidity or the servo response, the synchronization
error might occur in high-speed rotation or acceleration/deceleration. Therefore,
set big value more than the synchronization error to allowable error pulse value
on phase synchronization (parameter No.3847).
Addition, using together with "Soft start/stop function" of spindle motor is
effective for a decrease in synchronization error at acceleration/deceleration.
Refer to Spindle motor parameter manual (B-65280EN) for details.
- 1735 -
NOTE
5 On phase synchronization, the setting of gear rate is as following.
- Main-spindle (spindle motor)
The gear ratio between main-spindle and spindle sensor can be used only
1:1.
On the system that the arbitrary gear ratio between motor sensor and spindle
(parameter Nos.4171-4174) or the arbitrary gear ratio between spindle
sensor and spindle (parameter Nos.4500-4503) is used, phase
synchronization cannot be used.
- Sub-spindle (servo motor)
The gear rate between sub-spindle and servo motor can be set n:m.
6 Always use Feed-forward function of sub-spindle (servo motor). It is
recommended to set 100% to feed-forward coefficient. Refer to "Feed-forward
Function" of Servo motor parameter manual (B-65270EN).
7 It is necessary to set Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB type) for this
function. Refer to the section, "Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB type)"
in this manual for details.
8 It is necessary to establish the reference position (Reference position
establishment signals ZRFx <Fn120.x> is "1") of sub-spindle (servo motor)
before phase synchronization start from power supply turning on.
However, if the combination between main-spindle (spindle motor) and
sub-spindle (servo motor) is not changed, the reference position establishment
since the second times is unnecessary.
9 Set rotary axis A type (bit 0 (ROT) of parameter No.1006 is set 1 and bit 1 (ROS)
of parameter No.1006 is set 0) to sub-spindle (servo motor).
10 When Servo/Spindle synchronous control is executed, the relationships between
coordinates and actual machine position of sub-spindle (servo motor). Thus, the
base phase of sub-spindle (servo motor) is the machine coordinate zero point in
the status of reference position establishment.
11 Other notes follow notes of Servo/Spindle synchronous control written in the
following manual.
- "Servo/Spindle synchronous control" in this manual
CAUTION
1 Set "0" to Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous start signal
SYPST <Gn517.7>, after Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous
finished signal SYPFN <Fn527.6> becomes "1".
2 Phase synchronization cannot execute when Phase synchronization for
Servo/Spindle synchronous error signal SYPER <Fn527.7> is "1". Phase
synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous error signal SYPER <Fn527.7>
becomes "0", when Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous start
signal SYPST <Gn517.7> is set "0".
3 When a motor excitation is cut (Emergency stop, Servo/Spindle alarm is issued,
or etc...), set "0" to Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous start
signal SYPST <Gn517.7>.
4 Set a multiple of 4.096 to the shift amount per one rotation (parameter No.1260)
of sub-spindle (servo motor).
5 If the gear ratio for sub-spindle and servo motor is not integer and these connect
is semi-closed system, the phase of sub-spindle when the power supply is
turned on again will not be guaranteed.
- 1736 -
Signal
Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous start signal
SYPST <Gn517.7>
[Function] This signal starts phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous.
[Operation] On Servo/Spindle synchronous, when this signal set “1” from “0”, phase synchronization
starts.
Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous finished signal

SYPFN <Fn527.6>
[Function] This signal notifies that Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous completed.
[Operation] This signal becomes “1” in the following case:
- When the synchronization error pulse value become small value more than allowable
error pulse value after phase synchronization was executed.
This signal becomes “0” in the following cases:
- When Servo/Spindle synchronous is mode off.
- When the synchronization error pulse value become big value more than allowable
error pulse value in Servo/Spindle synchronous mode.
- When Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous error signal SYPER
becomes “1”.
Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous error signal

SYPER <Fn527.7>
[Function] This signal notifies that Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous cannot
complete.
[Operation] This signal becomes “1” in the following cases:
- When the setting of phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous is incorrect.
- When phase synchronization cannot start though Phase synchronization for
Servo/Spindle synchronous start signal SYPST is set “1”. (When the feedrate during
phase synchronization (parameter No.3846) is 0, when the base position of phase
synchronization is not detected, or etc…)
- When phase synchronization is interrupted in execution of phase synchronization.
(When differential speed synchronization is specified in execution of phase
synchronization, or etc…)
- When Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous start signal SYPST is set
“1” in execution of differential speed synchronization.
- When the servo software or the spindle software doesn’t correspond to this function.
This signal becomes “0” in the following cases:
- When Servo/Spindle synchronous is mode off.
- When Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous start signal SYPST is set
“0”.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn517 SYPST
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn527 SYPER SYPFN
- 1737 -
Parameter
3845 Shift value of phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous control

Set a shift value of phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous control to this
parameter. One rotation of spindle is 4096 pulses.
Example) If the sub-spindle should be at a quarter rotation position from main-spindle,

set 1024 to this parameter.
3846 Feedrate during phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous control

[Unit of data] deg/min
[Valid data range] Refer to standard parameter setting table (C)
Set a feedrate during phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous control to this
parameter.
It accelerates or decelerates from the current spindle motor speed for this parameter by
Linear acceleration/deceleration with the acceleration rate based on parameter No.3843.
Example) When the increment system is IS-B and CMR (parameter No.1820) is 1, the
amount of movement will be 4.096[deg] per rotation of the spindle. Therefore, if speed
during phase synchronization will be 10[min-1], set 40.96[deg/min] to this parameter.
NOTE
Set this parameter when Phase synchronization start signal SYPST
is "0".
This parameter setting is reflected when Phase synchronization
start signal SYPST become "1" from "0".
Allowable error pulse value on phase synchronization

3847
for Servo/Spindle synchronous control

On phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle synchronous control, when the
synchronization error pulse value between main-spindle and sub-spindle become small
value more than this parameter, Phase synchronization finished signal SYPFN become
"1".
- 1738 -
NOTE
Depending on the mechanical rigidity or the servo response, the
synchronization error might occur in high-speed rotation or
acceleration/deceleration. Therefore, set big value more than the
synchronization error to this parameter.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-64603EN-1) Servo/Spindle synchronous control
Servo/Spindle synchronous control (FSSB

type)
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series / βi series Soft start/stop function
FANUC BUILT-IN SPINDLE MOTOR Bi series
PARAMETER MANUAL (B-65280EN)
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series / βi series Feed-forward function
FANUC LINEAR MOTOR LiS series
FANUC SYNCHRONOUS BUILT-IN SERVO MOTOR DiS series
11.23 HIGH-PRECISION SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL

Overview
A large-scale machine cuts a large-diameter workpiece by turning it. Conventional spindle commands (S
code commands) cannot specify a surface speed (cutting speed) for large-diameter workpieces in detail
because they specify the spindle speed using an integer value. This function uses numbers having decimal
points, thus enabling the cutting speed to be specified in detail.
Cutting a large-diameter workpiece by turning it
Explanation
Setting bit 3 (SDP) of parameter No. 3798 to 1 enables high-precision spindle speed control. (Resetting
bit 3 (SDP) of parameter No. 3798 to 0 enables conventional spindle commands using integers.) When
high-precision spindle control is in use, spindle speed commands (S code commands, a command for
maximum spindle speed clamping (G50), and a constant-surface speed control command (G96)) can be
issued in units of 0.1 min-1 (for constant-surface speed control, 0.1 m/min).
<Command format >

S code command:
M03 S3.5 (Making the spindle rotate at 3.5 [min-1])
Example)
Using high-precision spindle speed control enables the following surface speeds to be selected for a
workpiece 4 meters in diameter.
Spindle command Spindle speed[min-1] Surface speed [m/min]
S3 M03 ; 3 37.7
- 1739 -
Spindle command Spindle speed[min-1] Surface speed [m/min]

S3.2 M03 ; 3.2 40.2
S3.5 M03 ; 3.5 44.0
S3.8 M03 ; 3.8 47.8
S4 M03 ; 4 50.3
Command for maximum spindle speed clamping (G50):

G50 S3.5 (Clamping the spindle speed at 3.5 [min-1])
Constant surface speed control (G96)：

G96 S44.5 (Making the spindle rotate at a surface speed of 44.5 [m/min])
Example)
Using high-precision spindle speed control makes the spindle rotate at the speeds listed below when
the specified surface speed is 44.5 [m/min] or 45 [m/min].
Surface speed 44.5[m/min] Surface speed 45[m/min]
Reference-axis position
Spindle speed [min-1]
X=0.1[m]; 70.8 71.6
X=0.5[m]; 14.2 14.3
X=1.0[m]; 7.1 7.2
X=1.5[m]; 4.7 4.8
X=2.0[m]; 3.5 3.6
The range of speeds specified with axis rotation commands (S code commands) is as follows:
- For serial spindle

0.0 to 1000.0[min-1]
- For analog spindle
0.0 to 400.0[min-1]
- For servo motor (using spindle control with servo motor)
0.0 to 1000.0[min-1]
NOTE
Using spindle rotation of a speed control type (bit 0 (SPCx) of parameter No.
11000 = 1) requires a servo motor/spindle configuration having a servo
motor-to-spindle speed reduction ratio of not higher than 1/40.
An integer command is assumed if the command specifies a value having no decimal point. For example,
if S55 is issued, S55.0 is assumed.
Enabling high-precision spindle speed control makes changes to the following parameter settings and the
increment system of data as follows:
- The settings of parameter No. 3771 (minimum spindle speed in the constant-surface speed control
mode (G96)) and parameter No. 3772 (upper limit to the rotation speed of individual spindles) are
integer data in units of 0.1 min-1.
- The setting of parameter No. 3732 (spindle speed in spindle orientation or spindle motor speed in
spindle gear shifting) is integer data in units of 0.1 min-1.
- Data related to spindle speeds in spindle speed signals and values in spindle function code signals
are in units of 0.1 min-1.
- Actual spindle speeds read by applications (such as macros, C Language Executor, and FOCAS2)
are integer data in units of 0.1 min-1.
- 1740 -
Actual spindle speed and S code command displays

If high-precision spindle speed control is enabled, the actual spindle speed and S code commands are
displayed using a decimal point.
NOTE
1 When high-precision spindle speed control is enabled, ******.* is displayed if the
actual spindle speed or an S command exceeds a maximum allowable display
digits.
2 The following screens do not support a display with a decimal point for the actual
spindle speed and the S code commands. If high-precision spindle speed control
is enabled, the fractional part is rounded off.
- Operating monitor screen
- Manual numeric command screen
- Dynamic graphic (tool path screen)
- Dynamic graphic (animation drawing screen)
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3798 SSI SDP

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
- 1741 -
#3 SDP High-precision spindle speed control is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.
#4 SSI The resolution enabled for the spindle speed command is:
0: Maximum spindle speed/4095 [min-1].
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4809 NSY

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#0 NSY When the spindle speed changes during spindle synchronization control, resolution
improvement is:
0: Disabled. (Speed change in units of about 3.7 [min-1])
1: Enabled. (Speed change in units of about 0.03 [min-1] at minimum but not higher
than maximum spindle speed/4095 [min-1])
This parameter is valid when spindle synchronization control or spindle-spindle polygon

turning is used.
Using high-precision spindle speed control and spindle synchronization control
simultaneously requires setting the parameter to 1.
NOTE
Using this function requires the serial spindle software that
supports it.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11000 SPCx

NOTE
#0 SPCx SV speed control mode of spindle control with servo motor is:
0: Position control type.
1: Velocity control type.
Caution
- The speed of the feed axis may vary during feed per revolution at a rotation speed of 1 min-1 or lower
depending on the detection unit used for the feedback data (4096 (pulse/rev)) from the position
coder.
- Changing bit 3 (SDP) of parameter No. 3798 enables this function only after the power is turned off
and on again.
- 1742 -
- If a decimal point is omitted, the desktop calculator decimal point setting is assumed regardless of
the setting of bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401.
Example: If S123 is issued, S123.0 is assumed.
- If a command with two or more digits after the decimal point specified is issued, the specified value
is rounded off to one digit after the decimal point.
Example: If S123.45 is issued, S123.5 is assumed.
- In S commands that call a subprogram using an S code, the number of digits after the decimal point
is not a target with respect to the number of permissible S code digits (parameter No. 3031).
Limitation
- If an analog spindle motor is used, the spindle may fail to rotate at a specified speed depending on
the type of the spindle motor and the resolution of the spindle motor drive amplifier with respect to
the speed command voltage, and the spindle motor-to-spindle speed reduction ratio.
- High-precision spindle speed control is invalid for rigid tapping S commands. If a command with a
decimal point is issued, the command is assumed to specify an integer (with the fraction rounded
off).
- The M type gear selection method is unusable.
- The Manual Guide i is unusable.
11.24 SIMPLE SPINDLE ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX

Overview
This function executes spindle synchronous control between two serial spindles based on input signals so
that one spindle (slave spindle) follows the other spindle (master spindle). It uses a method of referencing
directly feedback pulses to enable the slave spindle to follow fluctuations in the master spindle speed with
a small error, thereby achieving high-precision spindle synchronous control.
An example of using the function might be rotary guide bush control where two spindles are used.
An electronic gear box (hereafter called EGB) for the spindle is used to make the two spindles
synchronize with each other.
NOTE
To use this function, the function "Spindle serial output" and "" are required.
To enable these functions, set the following parameters.
- "Spindle serial output" :
Parameter SSN (No.8133#5) = 0
- "Cs contour control" :
Parameter SCS (No.8133#2) = 1, and parameter AXC (No.8133#1) = 0.
Guide bush
Workpiece
Master spindle
Slave spindle
EGB
synchronization
Fig. 11.24 (a) Application example

- 1743 -
Specification
With the spindle EGB, the synchronous pulse is produced from the feedback pulse output by the position
detector attached to the master axis, and the slave axis rotates according to the synchronous pulse. The
feedback pulse sent from master spindle to the slave spindle is forwarded by communication between
spindle amplifiers.
This function uses the PMC input signal to turn the simple spindle EGB mode ON/OFF.
Turning on the simple spindle EGB mode ON does not impose any limitation to the spindle control mode
for the master spindle. However, the slave spindle must be in the Cs contour control mode.
During the simple spindle EGB mode, the coordinates of the slave spindle are not updated even if the
slave spindle moves in synchronization with the master spindle.
The simple spindle EGB needs the same spindle system configuration (motor, amplifier, and sensor) as
the spindle EGB. For details, see the Item, “Spindle EGB (spindle electronic gear box)” in the FANUC
AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series, FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi series, FANUC BUILT-IN
SPINDLE MOTOR bi series PARAMETER MANUAL (B-65280EN).
Differences between the simple spindle EGB and the spindle EGB
The following table lists the differences between the simple spindle EGB and the spindle EGB.
Table 11.24 (a) Differences between the simple spindle EGB and the spindle EGB
Simple spindle electronic gear box Spindle electronic gear box
Feature - PMC input signal is used to turn - G code command is used to turn
synchronization ON/OFF. synchronization ON/OFF.
- No positional control is performed during the - Positional control is performed during the
synchronization mode. synchronization mode.
- Gear processing functions such as helical
gear compensation and retract are usable.
Major use For rotary guide bush, which requires only For gear processing, which requires positional
spindle command synchronization rather than control as well as retract operations
positional control
NOTE
"Spindle electronic gear box" cannot be used with Series 0i-F.
Signal
Simple spindle EGB signals SSEGB1<Gn351.0>: First spindle
SSEGB2<Gn351.1>: Second spindle
SSEGB3<Gn351.2>: Third spindle
SSEGB4<Gn351.3>: Fourth spindle
[Function] Select the simple spindle EGB.
[Operation] When each signal becomes “1”, the simple spindle EGB mode is turned ON with the
respective serial spindles selected as a slave.
When each signal becomes “0”, the simple spindle EGB mode is turned OFF for the
respective serial spindles being used as a slave.
- 1744 -
NOTE
1 These signals are valid when the bit 0 (SEGs) of parameter No.
7705 is 1.
2 If the simple spindle EGB mode is turned ON or OFF when both
the master and slave spindles are not at halt, the slave spindle
accelerates or decelerates abruptly. When turning the simple
spindle EGB mode ON or OFF, be sure to previously put both the
master and the slave spindles at halt.
3 During the simple spindle EGB mode, keep the slave spindle in the
Cs contour control mode.
Simple spindle EGB mode signals SSEGBM1<Fn351.0>: First spindle

SSEGBM2<Fn351.1>: Second spindle
SSEGBM3<Fn351.2>: Third spindle
SSEGBM4<Fn351.3>: Fourth spindle
[Function] These signals indicate whether the simple spindle EGB mode is ON for the respective
spindles selected as a slave spindle.
[Output cond.] Each signal becomes “1” when:
- The simple spindle EGB mode is ON for the respective spindles selected as a slave
spindle.
Each signal becomes “0” when:
- The simple spindle EGB mode is OFF for the respective spindles selected as a slave
spindle.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn351 SSEGB4 SSEGB3 SSEGB2 SSEGB1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn351 SSEGBM4 SSEGBM3 SSEGBM2 SSEGBM1
Sequence
- Simple spindle EGB mode ON
Spindle speed (for both
master and slave spindles) Confirm that both master and slave are at halt
Cs contour control change signal

CON<Gn027.7> or Turn Cs mode ON for slave
CONS1-CONS4<Gn0274.0-.3>
Simple spindle EGB signals

SSEGB1-SSEGB4<Gn351.0-3>
Simple spindle EGB mode signals

SSEGBM1-SSEGBM4<Fn351.0-3>
Fig. 11.24 (b) Simple spindle EGB mode ON
- 1745 -
- Simple spindle EGB mode OFF

Spindle speed (for both Confirm that both master and slave
master and slave spindles)
are at halt
Simple spindle EGB signals

SSEGB1-SSEGB4<Gn351.0-3>
Simple spindle EGB mode signals

SSEGBM1-SSEGBM4<Fn351.0-3>
Cs contour control change signal

CON<Gn027.7> or
CONS1-CONS4<Gn0274.0-3>
Turn Cs mode OFF for slave
Fig. 11.24 (c) Simple spindle EGB mode OFF
NOTE
1 When turning the simple spindle EGB mode ON or OFF, keep both the master
and slave spindles at halt.
2 During the simple spindle EGB mode, the positional deviation of the Cs axis for
the slave spindle from the master spindle is returned to the slave spindle. For the
slave spindle in the simple spindle EGB mode, checks are constantly made for
any excess error value during movement.
3 During the simple spindle EGB mode, the coordinates of the Cs axis for the
slave spindle are not updated even if the slave spindle is synchronized with the
master spindle.
4 During the simple spindle EGB mode, it is impossible to make a reference point
return for the Cs axis for the slave spindle.
5 During the simple spindle EGB mode, it is impossible to perform composite
control for the Cs axis for the slave spindle.
6 The simple spindle EGB needs the same spindle system configuration (motor,
amplifier, and sensor) as the spindle EGB.
7 The synchronization mode is canceled if a servo alarm or spindle alarm condition
is detected.
8 Making a request for an emergency stop during synchronization causes both the
master and slave spindles decelerate to stop while they are kept in
synchronization. However, they may not stay in synchronization once they stop.
Release the slave spindle from the simple EGB mode and Cs mode after an
emergency stop.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7705 SEGs

#0 SEGs Simple spindle EGB function is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.
Set 1 for a serial spindle used as the slave axis for the simple spindle EGB function,.
- 1746 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4395 SSE

#2 SSE The simple spindle EGB function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Set this parameter to 1 for the master and slave spindles together.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4352 SEM SES FFALWS

#4 FFALWS Feed-forward setting is enabled:

0: Only during cutting feed.
1: Always.
Set this parameter 1 for the slave spindle.
#6 SES The spindle EGB function for the slave spindle is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Set this parameter 1 for the slave spindle.
#6 SEM The spindle EGB function for the master spindle is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Set this parameter 1 for the master spindle.
4036 Feed forward coefficient

[Unit of data] 1%
The feed forward coefficient for Cs axis contour control is set as follows:
Setting ≤ 100: In units of 1%
Setting > 100: In units of 0.01%
Set this parameter to 100 for the slave spindle.
4386 Number of sinusoidal waves from the master spindle position detector

[Unit of data] 1λ/rev
[Valid data range] 0, 64 to 4096
Specify the number of sinusoidal waves per spindle revolution received from the master
spindle position detector.
Use this parameter for the slave spindle amplifier.
If the parameter is 0, the synchronous ratio assumed to be 0.
- 1747 -
4387 Numerator of synchronization coefficient

Set a synchronous coefficient numerator for the slave spindle.
4388 Denominator of synchronization coefficient

Set a synchronous coefficient denominator for the slave spindle.
Reference item
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series Spindle EGB
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi series (Spindle electronic gear box)
FANUC BUILT-IN SPINDLE MOTOR βi series
11.25 SPINDLE SPEED COMMAND CLAMP

Overview
By using this function, spindle speed can be clamped to the maximum speed by setting on internal relay
(R signal) data.
Explanation
The internal relay addresses (R signal) is specified with parameter No.3773 for each spindle. Four bytes
starting at the setting are used for each spindle. Spindle speed is clamped to the maximum speed by
setting on internal relay (R signal) data.
For example, this function can be used to change maximum speed depending on selected tool as
following procedure.
1. On the PMC side, the maximum speed depending on the selected tool is set on the internal relay
addresses (R signal) specified with the parameter. (The PMC program is created by machine tool
builders)
2. The CNC reads maximum speed from PMC internal relay (R signal). The CNC clamp spindle speed
to maximum speed immediately if the spindle speed exceeds the maximum speed.
Figure 11.26(a) show the processing of the spindle speed clamp when a command is specified after the
tool change.
- 1748 -
(1) The tool change is commanded

Processing on the PMC side
(2)The tool change is executed

The maximum speed depending on selected tool is set (In this example, maximum speed is 2000)
(3)The maximum speed is set on internal relay
The internal relay addresses

(R signal) is specified with
parameter No.3773
Example of data on internal relay

Read the signal state
Processing on the CNC side
(4)The signal state of the internal relay (R signal) is interpreted as the maximum speed
(5)Spindle speed is clamped to max speed immediately if the spindle speed exceeds the maximum speed.
Spindle speed[min-1]
Maximum speed
(In this example, maximum speed is 2000[min-1])

(S command)
Fig.11.25 (a) processing of this function
NOTE
1 This function only effects for a spindle speed command (including spindle
override, constant surface speed control), it doesn’t effect except spindle speed
command (spindle orientation, rigid tapping and so on).
2 When spindle speed command control is applied using the PMC, this function
has no effect, and the spindle speed is not clamped.
3 When the spindle synchronous control is executed, spindle speed of the master
and the slave are clamped to the lower value of master’s maximum speed and
slave’s maximum speed.
4 When the M type gear selection method is used, this function has effect even if
minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor (parameter No.3735) is larger than
the max speed specified on PMC internal relay (R signal).
5 The maximum speed can be set within the range of 0 to 99999999 [min-1]
6 This function has effect for unselected spindle by address P or spindle selection
signals SWS1 to SWS4 <Gn027.0 to Gn027.2 and Gn026.3>
7 Depending on parameter No.3798#3, which is related to High-precision spindle
speed control, the maximum speed is changed as following table.
SDP = 0 The signal state of the internal relay (R signal) is interpreted as the maximum speed.
The maximum speed can be set within the range of 0 to 99999999 [min-1]
SDP = 1 1/10 of the signal state of the internal relay (R signal) is interpreted as the maximum speed.
The maximum speed can be set within the range of 0 to 9999999.9 [min-1]
- 1749 -
Parameter
3773 Start address of the R signal specifying maximum speed
NOTE

[Valid data range] 0 to maximum address (multiple of 4. 0, 4, 8, ...)
This parameter sets the start address of the R signal specifying maximum speed.
Four bytes starting at the setting are used for each spindle.
NOTE
1 As for the setting of parameter
<1> Set a value that is a multiple of 4 (0, 4, 8, etc.).
<2> The range of the R address differs depending on the PMC kind
and the memory size. Check the specifications of the PMC,
and set a value within the valid range. (Example: R addresses
in the range from R0 to R7999 if memory B of the first PMC is
used. Thus, values which can be set are 4, 8, 12, 16, …7992,
7996 in this case)
If any setting other than the above items (<1>, <2>) is made, alarm
PW5390"R-ADDRESS SETTING IS ILLEGAL" is issued.
2 When value of parameter No. 3773 is zero, this function has no
effect.
WARNING
If an internal relay of the set address in this parameter is used by
another usage, it may cause an unexpected machine behavior. Be
careful enough that you must prevent the competition of the used
internal relay.
Alarm and message

Number Massage Description
PW5390 R-ADDRESS SETTING IS One of the R address range of the PMC set by parameters No. 3773,
ILLEGAL No. 13541 and No. 13542 or the first address of the range is invalid.
- 1750 -
11.26 SETTING OF FEEDBACK PULSES FOR SPINDLE

FEEDBACK PULSES
Overview
Feedback pulses of the spindle which is used at the feed per revolution, threading and spindle speed
display becomes able to be changed by setting of parameter.
By this function, the fluctuation of axis speed at the feed per revolution and threading is reduced, and a
smoother axis moving becomes possible.
Specification
It is usually, feedback pulses of the spindle is 4096 pulses per one rotation of the spindle. However, the
setting of feedback pulses of the spindle can be changed by the bit 7 (FBP) of parameter No.3716 and
No.3720.
- Feedback pulses per one rotation of the spindle can be chosen from 4096 pulses or 4096×2^14 pulses
in serial spindle.
- Feedback pulses per one rotation of the spindle can be chosen from 4096 pulses or 4096×2^14 pulses
in spindle control with servo motor.
- Feedback pulses per one rotation of the spindle can be chosen from 4096 to 400000 pulses in analog
spindle.
The changing of feedback pulses of the spindle becomes effective by the setting of parameter FBP. And
number of feedback pulses is set by parameter No.3720. However, when parameter FBP is set to 1, it is
not necessary to set parameter No.3720 because parameter No.3720 is set automatically in serial spindle
and spindle control with servo motor.
NOTE
1 When feedback pulses in analog spindle are not 4096pulse/rev, alarm SP1255
“CAN NOT CHANGE SPINDLE MODE” occurs if rigid tapping or spindle
positioning is specified. (This alarm not occurs when serial spindle.)
2 The effect of this function depends on the resolution of detector.
(In serial spindle, the resolution of each detector is as follows. This function is
not effective in αi position coder.
αiBZ sensor 360000pulse/rev
αiCZ sensor 3600000pulse/rev
αi position coder 4096pulse/rev
In spindle control with servo motor, this function is not effective as long as the
resolution of detector is not small larger than 4096 pulses per one rotation.)
Moreover, the accuracy is not assured by the above values because they are
indicated as the resolution of detector. Select the detector with enough accuracy
for machining accuracy.
- 1751 -
NOTE
3 Maximum spindle speed becomes as follows when this function is effective.
In serial spindle or spindle control with servo motor, maximum spindle speed is
99999 min-1.
However, maximum spindle speed depends on the specification of spindle
motor, spindle amplifier and detector too.
In analog spindle, maximum spindle speed depends on the time rules of
interface of position coder.
Refer “Analog spindle connection material” (A-65618EN) about the time rules of
interface of position coder.
About the applicable pulse number of position coder and upper limit of spindle
speed, the influence such as the machine vibrations is considered, calculate the
number in which the margin is given for "time rules" satisfy without fail in any
case.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3716 FBP
NOTE

#7 FBP Changing the number of spindle position coder pulses is

0: Not executed.
1: Executed.
NOTE

[Unit of data] Number of pulses
[Valid data range] Serial spindle
Analog spindle
: 0, 4096 When bit 7 (FBP) of parameter No.3716 is set to 1: from 0 to 400000

In analog spindle, 4096 is set to parameter automatically if parameter No.3720 is set to 0
or less.
In serial spindle or spindle control with servo motor, the setting method is changed by
setting of the bit 7 (FBP) of parameter No.3716.
- 1752 -
4096 is set to parameter automatically if parameter No.3720 is set to 0 or less.
4096×2^14 is set to parameter automatically.
Alarm and message

SP1255 CAN NOT CHANGE In the analog spindle control, rigid tapping and spindle positioning can
SPINDLE MODE not be used except when the number of pulses output from the
position coder of the spindle is 4096pulse/rev.
11.27 RESOLUTION OF SPINDLE SPEED COMMAND

Overview
By this function, the resolution of spindle speed commands and related signals is improved, and high
accuracy spindle speed command is achieved.
This function is effective on serial spindle.
NOTE
This function is effective on serial spindle.
To use this function, enable the spindle serial output (bit 5 (SSN) of parameter
No.8133 is 0).
Explanation
When bit 0(SSE) of parameter No.3791 is set to 1, spindle speed command resolution of serial spindle is
improved.
The resolution is decided on parameters of Table 11.27 (b).
Table 11.27 (b)

Resolution Bit 0(SSE) of parameter No.3791 Bit 4(SSI) of parameter No.3798
4096 0 0
16383 0 1
1048575 1 0
1048575 1 1
And then, the following signals become high resolution.
- Spindle speed command output

The commanded spindled speed by machining program is calculated through the gear change processing.
Refer to chapter of “SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL” in Connection manual (function) (B-64603EN-1) for
detail.
When bit 0(SSE) of parameter No.3791 is set to 1, the calculated speed command is outputted by the
S32-bit code signals RE01O to RE32O<Fn708 to Fn711> from 0 to 1048575. Then, S12-bit code signals
R01O to R12O <Fn036.0 to Fn037.3> are not effective.
Spindle motor speed[min-1]
32-bit code signals output value = ×1048575
-1
Maximum spindle motor speed[min ]
(parameter No.4020)
- 1753 -
Code signal
1048575
(Sp eed output to the sp indle motor)

0
-1
0 [min-1] Maximum spindle motor speed [min ]
- Multi spindle control

When Multi spindle control is effective, the speed commands output signals of each spindle are depended
the parameter setting in Table 11.27 (c).
Table 11.27 (c)
Bit 0(SSE) of parameter No.3791 is set to 1
1st spindle RE01O to RE32O<Fn708 to Fn711>
Effective 2nd spindle RE01O2 to RE32O2<Fn712 to Fn715>
output signals 3rd spindle RE01O3 to RE32O3<Fn716 to Fn719>
4th spindle RE01O4 to RE32O4<Fn720 to Fn723>
Bit 0(SSE) of parameter No.3791 is set to 0

BIT 3(MRS) of parameter BIT 3(MRS) of parameter No.3709 is set
No.3709 is set to 0 to 1
1st spindle R01O to R12O<Fn036.0 to Fn037.3>
Effective 2nd spindle R01O to R12O R01O2 to R12O2<Fn200.0 to Fn201.3>
output signals 3rd spindle <Fn036.0 to Fn037.3> R01O3 to R12O3<Fn204.0 to Fn205.3>
4th spindle R01O4 to R12O4<Fn270.0 to Fn271.3>
Refer to Chapter of “Multi spindle” in “Connection manual (function)” (B-64603EN-1) for detail of
spindle select.
NOTE
1 RE01Ox to RE32Ox are 32-bit, but effective signals are 20-bit.
2 When SSE is set to 1 for a spindle in system, even if common signals setting are
set ( SSE is 0 and MRS is 0), each spindle signals (R01Ox to R12Ox) are
effective.
- SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC

When bit 0 (SSE) of parameter No.3791 is set to 1, if spindle motor speed is specified from PMC, set
signals as follow.
- Switching the controller from the CNC to the PMC, by issuing a signal used to select the spindle
motor speed command SINDx
- Setting the spindle motor speed data, calculated by the PMC, in spindle control signals RE01Ix
toRE12Ix. Then, the spindle motor speed command signals R01Ix to R12Ix is not effective.
- 1754 -
Table 11.27 (d)
Bit 0(SSE) of parameter No.3791 is Bit 0(SSE) of parameter No.3791 is
set to 0 set to 1
1st spindle R01I to R12I<Gn032.0 to Gn033.3> RE01I to RE32I<Gn708 to Gn711>
2nd spindle R01I2 to R12I2<Gn034.0 to RE01I2 to RE32I2<Gn712 to
Effective spindle Gn035.3> Gn715>
motor Speed 3rd spindle R01I3 to R12I3<Gn036.0 to RE01I3 to RE32I3<Gn716 to
command signals Gn037.3> Gn719>
4th spindle R01I4 to R12I4<Gn272.0 to RE01I4 to RE32I4<Gn720 to
Gn273.3> Gn723>
When bit 0(SSE) of parameter No.3791 is set to 1, a spindle motor speed is set to the data by a following
calculating method.
Spindle motor speed[min-1]
Setting value of the extended spindle
= ×1048575
motor speed command signals Maximum spindle motor speed[min-1]
(parameter No.4020)
Maximum spindle
-1
motor speed[min ]
the extended
spindle motor
speed
command
signals
-1
0 [min ]
0 1048575
Following signal that doesn’t depend on bit 0(SSE) of parameter No.3791 setting is used on same signals.
Table 11.27 (e)

1st spindle SIND,SSIN,SGN, <Gn033.7,.6,.5>
2nd spindle SIND2,SSIN2,SGN2,<Gn035.7,.6,.5>
3rd spindle SIND3,SSIN3,SGN3,<Gn037.7,.6,.5>
4th spindle SIND4,SSIN4,SGN4,<Gn273.7,.6,.5>
Refer to Chapter of “Spindle output control by the PMC” in “Connection manual (function)”
(B-64603EN-1) for detail of the SINDx, SSINx and SGNx.
- For multi spindle control

When multi spindle control is effective and TYPE-A is selected (bit 2(MSI) of parameter No.3709 is set
to 0), the signals for the second to forth spindles RE01I2,3,4 to RE32I2,3,4 are not effective.
Even when multi-spindle control is not effective, the signals for the second to forth spindles RE01I2,3,4
to RE32I2,3,4 can used.
NOTE
RE01Ix to RE32Ix are 32-bit, but effective signals are 20-bit.
- 1755 -
- Command output to the spindle control unit

The speed command output decided into CNC is commanded to the spindle control unit of serial spindle
at digital data following the resolution of Table 11.27 (b).
When bit 0 (SSE) of No.3791 is set to 1, the resolution of digital data is 0 to ±1048575
- Actual spindle speed output

When bit 0 (SSE) of No.3791 is set to 1, extended actual spindle speed signals ARE00 to ARE15 <Fn580
to Fn583> can read actual spindle speed.
However, then signals AR00 to AR15<Fn040, Fn041>,AR002 to AR152< Fn202, Fn203>,AR003 to
AR153< Fn206, Fn207>,AR004 to AR154< Fn272, Fn273> are not effective.
- For multi spindle control

When the multi spindle control is effective, a actual speed of each spindle is depended on parameter of
Table 11.27 (f).
Table 11.27 (f)

Bit 0(SSE) of parameter No.3791 Bit 0(SSE) of parameter No.3791 is
is set to 0 set to 1
st
Effective 1 spindle AR00 to AR15<Fn040, Fn041> ARE00～ARE31<Fn580 to Fn583>
Actual spindle 2nd spindle AR002 to AR152< Fn202, Fn203> ARE002～ARE312<Fn584 to Fn587>
speed 3rd spindle AR003 to AR153< Fn206, Fn207> ARE003～ARE313<Fn588 to Fn591>
Output signals 4th spindle AR004 to AR154< Fn272, Fn273> ARE004～ARE314<Fn592 to Fn595>
Refer to Chapter of “Multi spindle” in “Connection manual (function)” (B-64603EN-1) for detail of
spindle select.
NOTE
When an extended actual spindle speed signal is used, the option for actual
spindle speed output is required.
High-precision spindle speed control

If high-precision spindle speed control is enable (bit 3 (SDP) of parameter No.3798 is set to 1), spindle
speed commands (S code commands, a command for maximum spindle speed clamping (G50), and a
constant-surface speed control command (G96)) can be issued in units of 0.1 min-1 (for constant-surface
speed control, 0.1 m/min).Actual spindle speed signals are in units of 0.1 min-1.
Refer to Chapter of “High-precision spindle speed control” in “Connection manual (function)”
(B-64603EN-1).
Notes
- To use this function, validate a serial spindle output (bit 5 (SSN) of parameter No. 8133 is 0).
- The supported serial spindle software is required to this function.
- When signals of multi spindle relation are used, validate a multi spindle control.
Limitations
- Analog spindle control
This function is not effective in “Analog spindle control”.
- Spindle control with servo motor

This function is not effective in “Spindle control with servo motor”.
- 1756 -
- Spindle synchronous control / Spindle command synchronous control /

Polygon turning with two spindles
Set the same setting at the bit 0 (SSE) of parameter No.3791 when “Spindle synchronous control”,
“Spindle command synchronous control” or “Polygon turning with two spindles” is used on each spindle.
If the setting is different, the alarm SP1257,” ILLEGAL PARAMETER (No.3791#0)” occurs.
Signal
S 32-bit code signals RE01O to RE32O<Fn708 to Fn711>: for 1st spindle
RE01O2 to RE32O2<Fn712 to Fn715>: for 2nd spindle
RE01O3 to RE32O3<Fn716 to Fn719>: for 3rd spindle
RE01O4 to RE32O4<Fn720 to Fn723>: for 4th spindle
[Function] When bit 0(SSE) of parameter No.3791 is set to 1, CNC is outputted the speed command
output of calculated spindle motor to PMC as the S32-bit code signals RE01O to RE32O.
Then, S12-bit code signals <Fn036.0 to Fn037.3> are not effective.
When Multi spindle control is effective and bit 3 (MRS) of parameter No.3709 is set to 1,
spindle motor of each spindle speed command are outputted to S32-bit code signals
RE01Ox to RE32Ox. Then, R01Ox to R12Ox <Fn200.0 to Fn201.3>, <Fn204.0 to
Fn205.3>, <Fn270.0 to Fn271.3> are not effective.
The relationship between the spindle speed command value (calculated by the CNC) and
the value output by this signal is as shown below.
Code signal
1048575
(Sp eed output to the sp indle motor)

0
-1
0 [min-1] Maximum spindle motor speed [min ]
NOTE
RE01Ox to RE32Ox are 32-bit, but effective signals are 20-bit.
Extended spindle motor speed command signals

RE01I to RE32I<Gn708 to Gn711>: for 1st spindle
RE01I2 to RE32I2<Gn712 to Gn715>: for 2nd spindle
RE01I3 to RE32I3<Gn716 to Gn719>: for 3rd spindle
RE01I4 to RE32I4<Gn720 to Gn723>: for 4th spindle
[Function] When bit 0(SSE) of parameter No.3791 is set to 1, the speed command is possible to the
each spindle motor by RE01I to RE32Ix. Then, R01Ix to R12Ix<Gn032.0 to
Gn033.3>,<Gn034.0 to Gn035.3>,<Gn036.0 to Gn037.3> , <Gn272.0 to Gn273.3> is not
effective.
- 1757 -
However, when multi spindle control is effective and TYPE-A is selected (bit 2(MSI) of
parameter No.3709 is set to 0), the signals for the second to forth spindles RE01I2,3,4 to
RE32I2,3,4 are not effective.
If the PMC is being used to control the spindle motor speed command, specify, in binary
format, the value obtained using the following expression.
Value to be specified Spindle motor speed[min-1]

by extended spindle motor = ×1048575
speed command signals Maximum spindle motor speed[min-1]
(parameter No.4020)

Maximum spindle
motor speed[min-1]
the extended
spindle motor
speed
command
signals
-1
0 [min ]
0 1048575
NOTE
RE01Ix to RE32Ix are 32-bit, but effective signals are 20-bit.
Extended actual spindle speed signals

ARE00 to ARE31<Fn580 to Fn583>: for 1st spindle
ARE002 to ARE312<Fn584 to Fn587>: for 2nd spindle
ARE003 to ARE313<Fn588 to Fn591>: for 3rd spindle
ARE004 to ARE314<Fn592 to Fn595>: for 4th spindle
[Function] When bit 0(SSE) of parameter No.3791 is set to 1, ARE00x to ARE31x can read the
actual spindle speed obtained by feedback pulses from the position coder mounted on the
spindle. Then, AR00Ox to AR15Ox <Fn202,Fn203>,<Fn206,Fn272>, <Fn202,Fn273> is
not effective.
When bit 3 (SDP) of parameter No.3798 is set to 1, Extended actual spindle speed signals
are in units of 0.1 min-1. (When parameter SDP is 0, there are in units of 1 min-1)
When bit 0(SSE) of parameter No.3791 is set to 1, these 32-bit binary code signals are
always output. The actual spindle speed and the signals have the following relationship:
{ }
31
Spindle speed = ∑ 2 i × Vi × D min −1
i =0
Where Vi=0 when AREi is 0

and Vi=1 when AREi is 1
and D=1 when parameter SDP is 0
and D=0.1 when parameter SDP is 1
- 1758 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn708 RE08I RE07I RE06I RE05I RE04I RE03I RE02I RE01I
Gn712 RE08I2 RE07I2 RE06I2 RE05I2 RE04I2 RE03I2 RE02I2 RE01I2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn580 ARE07 ARE06 ARE05 ARE04 ARE03 ARE02 ARE01 ARE00
- 1759 -
Fn708 RE08O RE07O RE06O RE05O RE04O RE03O RE02O RE01O
Fn712 RE08O2 RE07O2 RE06O2 RE05O2 RE04O2 RE03O2 RE02O2 RE01O2
Note
NOTE
When bit 0(SSE) of parameter No.3791 is set to 1, following signals are not
effective.
- Spindle motor speed command signals R01I to R12I, R01I2 to R12I2,
R01I3 to R12I3, R01I4 to R12I4
- S12-bit code signals R01O to R12O, R01O2 to R12O2,
R01O3 to R12O3, R01O4 to R12O4
- Actual spindle speed signals AR00 to AR15, AR002 to AR152,
AR003 to AR153, AR004 to AR154
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3791 SSE

#0 SSE The resolution enabled for the spindle speed command:

0: depend to the bit 4(SSI) of parameter No.3798.
1: is a maximum spindle speed/1048575 [min-1].
- 1760 -
NOTE
1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
2 When bit 0 (SSE) of parameter No.3791 is set to 1, bit 4 (SSI) of
No.3798 is not effective.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3798 SSI SDP

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#3 SDP High-precision spindle speed control is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.
#4 SSI The resolution enabled for the spindle speed command is:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3709 MRS MSI

#2 MSI In multi-spindle control, the SIND signal is valid

#3 MRS When the actual spindle speed signals and S 12-bit code signals are output in
multi-spindle control:
0: The signals common to the first spindle and second spindle are used, and the signals
for the spindle selected by the spindle selection signal are output.
1: The signals for the first spindle and the signals for the second spindle are output
separately.
- 1761 -
Alarm and message

SP1257 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (No.3791#0) Bit 0(SSE) of parameter No.3791 is illegal setting.
Causes of the alarm are as follows.
- The setting of parameter SSE is different because of the
master and slave. Please change the following function
to the same setting.
- Spindle synchronous control
- Polygon turning with two spindles
- The parameter SSE is set to 1 the spindle control

software that does not support this function. Please set
0 to parameter SSE.
Diagnosis data
- When bit 0 (SSE) of No.3791 is set to 1, the spindle motor speed is displayed to the diagnosis
No.1547. And then, the diagnosis No.411 is displayed 0.
1547 Spindle motor speed data（2 word）
[Data type] 2 word spindle

[Unit] min-1
- When this function is effective, bit 0 of diagnosis data No.1570 is set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1570 S2W
S2W A spindle speed command is the resolution of spindle speed/1048575 [min-1].
- 1762 -
B-64603EN-1/01 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS
12 TOOL FUNCTIONS
Chapter 12, "TOOL FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections:
12.1 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF LATHE SYSTEM..................................................................................1763

12.2 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM .......................................................1784
12.3 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION ...........................................................................................1789
12.4 TOOL COMPENSATION..............................................................................................................1835
12.5 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT.......................................................................................................1856
12.1 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF LATHE SYSTEM

T
Overview
When address T followed by a numeric value is specified, the code signal and strobe signal are sent to the
machine and are used to select a tool on the machine side. Just one T code can be specified in a block.
When a move command and T code are specified within the same block, these commands are executed in
one of the following two ways:
(1) The move command and tool function command are started at the same time.
(2) After the move command ends, the tool function command is started.
Explanation
A numeric value following the T code specifies selection of a tool. Part of the numeric value is also used
as a tool offset number for specifying an offset value such as a tool offset value. Tools are selected
according to the specification method and parameter setting as Table 12.1 (a):
Table 12.1 (a)

Meaning of T code (Note 1)
Parameter setting and offset No.
Bit 1 (LGN) of parameter No. Bit 1 (LGN) of parameter No.
specification method (Note 2)
5002 =0 5002 =1
TXXXXXXXX TXXXXXXXX Tool wear offset No. is specified by
↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ lowest 1 digit of T code.
Tool selection Tool geometry/ Tool selection Tool wear offset
When parameter No. 5028 is set to 1
tool wear offset Tool geometry offset
↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ lowest 2 digits of T code.
↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ lowest 3 digits of T code
NOTE
1 The maximum number of digits of the T code can be specified in parameter No.
3032. (1 to 8 digits)
- 1763 -
12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
2 If 0 is set in parameter No. 5028, the length of the offset number specified in the T
code depends on the number of tool offsets.
Example:When the number of tool offsets ranges from 1 to 9: Lowest 1 digit
When the number of tool offsets ranges from 10 to 99: Lowest 2 digits
When the number of tool offsets ranges from 100 to 200: Lowest 3 digits
12.1.1 Tool Offset

T
Overview
Tool offset is used to compensate for the difference when the tool actually used differs from the imagined
tool used in programming (usually, standard tool).Tool nose moves on the programmed path by this
compensation.
Standard tool
Actual tool
Offset amount
on X axis
Offset amount on Z axis
Fig. 12.1.1 (a) Tool offset
12.1.2 Tool Geometry Offset and Tool Wear Offset

T
Overview
Tool geometry offset and tool wear offset are possible to divide the tool offset to the tool geometry offset
for compensating the tool shape or tool mounting position and the tool wear offset for compensating the
tool nose wear. When these values are not distinguished from each other, the total of the values is set as
the tool offset value.value of tool geometry offset value and tool wear offset value is set as the tool offset
value.
By setting the bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No.3290, the modification of tool wear offset values or tool
position offset values by MDI key input can be disabled.
By setting the bit 1 (GOF) of parameter No.3290, the modification of tool geometry offset values by MDI
key input can be disabled. In order to permit an operator only to modify tool wear offset values, set the bit
1 (GOF) of parameter No.3290 to 1.
- 1764 -
Point on the program Point on the program

X
X axis geometry
offset value
Offset amount
Actual tool on X axis
X axis wear offset value
Imaginary tool
Z axis wear offset value Offset amount on Z axis

Z axis geometry offset value
If
tool geometry compensation and tool wear compensation are
distinguished from each other (left) and if they are not (right)
Fig. 12.1.2 (a)
Set the distance from tool nose to the point on the program ( tool nose of standard tool, or tool mounting
position ) to a tool geometry offset value.
Generally, a sign of tool wear offset value is the opposite to a sign of tool geometry offset value. In the
example of the above figure, the geometry offset value is a positive and the wear offset value is a
negative.
12.1.3 Offset
T
Explanation
- Compensation methods
Two methods are available to geometry compensation and wear compensation, compensation with tool
movement and compensation with coordinate shift. Which compensation method to select can be
specified with bits 2 (LWT) and 4 (LGT) of parameter No. 5002. When the tool geometry/wear
compensation is not enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is set to 1), however, compensation
with tool movement is selected unconditionally.
Table 12.1.3 (a)

Parameter
Parameter
Compensation element LWT=0 LWT=1 LWT=0 LWT=1
NGW(No.8136#6)
LGT=0 LGT=0 LGT=1 LGT=1
Wear and geometry not
Not provided Tool movement
distinguished
Wear compensation Tool movement Coordinate shift Tool movement Coordinate shift
Provided
Geometry compensation Coordinate shift Coordinate shift Tool movement Tool movement
- Compensation with tool movement

The tool path is offset by the X, Y, and Z tool offset values for the programmed path. The tool offset
distance corresponding to the number specified by the T code is added to or subtracted from the end
position of each programmed block.
The vector with tool offset X, Y, and Z is called the offset vector. Compensation is the same as the offset
vector.
- 1765 -
Tool path after offset
This move command block

contains the offset command
with T code
Programmed path
Compensation by tool offset X, Z (offset vector)
Fig. 12.1.3 (a) Offset operation with tool movement
NOTE
1 When G50 X_Z_T_ ; is specified, the tool is not moved.
The coordinate system in which the coordinate value of the tool position is (X,Z) is
set. The tool position is obtained by subtracting the offset value corresponding to
the tool offset number specified in the T code.
2 The G codes in the 00 group other than G50 must not be specified in the same
block as that containing a T code. If any one of G28, G29, G30, and G53 is
specified in the same block together with a T code, alarm PS0245, "T-CODE NOT
ALLOWED IN THIS BLOCK", is issued.
- Compensation with coordinate shift

The work coordinate system is shifted by the X, Y, and Z tool offset amounts. Namely, the offset amount
corresponding to the number designated with the T code is added to or subtracted from the absolute
coordinates.
The movement to this point is
by an absolute command.
Programmed path after workpiece

coordinate system shift
Tool path after offset

Offset amount by offset in
X, Z axis (offset vector)
Programmed path before
work coordinate system shift
Fig. 12.1.3 (b) Offset operation with coordinate shift
- Starting and canceling offset by specifying a T code

Specifying an tool offset number with a T code means to select the tool offset value corresponding to it
and to start offset. Specifying 0 as a tool offset number means to cancel offset.
For offset with tool movement, whether to start or cancel the offset can be specified with bit 6 (LWN) of
parameter No. 5002.
For compensation with coordinate shift, the offset is started and canceled when a T code is specified. For
the cancellation of geometry compensation, its operation can be selected with bit 5 (LGC) of parameter
No. 5002.
Table 12.1.3 (b)

Compensation method Bit 6 (LWN) of parameter No. 5002=0 Bit 6 (LWN) of parameter No. 5002=1
Tool movement When a T code is specified When an axial movement is specified
When a T code is specified
Coordinate shift (Note that geometry compensation can be canceled only if bit 5 (LGC) of parameter
No. 5002 = 1.)
- 1766 -
- Canceling offset with reset

Tool offset is canceled under one of the following conditions:
<1> The power to the CNC is turned off and turned back on
<2> The reset button on the MDI unit is pressed
<3> A reset signal is input from the machine to the CNC
In cases <2> and <3> above, it is possible to select a cancel operation using bits 3 (LVC) and 7 (TGC) of
parameter No. 5006.
Table 12.1.3 (c)

Parameter
Compensation method LVC=0 LVC=1 LVC=0 LVC=1
TGC=0 TGC=0 TGC=1 TGC=1
Wear compensation Canceled. Canceled.
Tool Not Not
(When axial movement (When axial movement
movement Geometry compensation canceled. canceled.
is specified) is specified)
Not Not
Wear compensation Canceled. Canceled.
Coordinate canceled. canceled.
shift Not
Geometry compensation Not canceled. Canceled. Canceled.
canceled.
Notes and restrictions

- Helical interpolation (G02, G03)
Tool position offset cannot be specified in a block in which helical interpolation is used.
- Coordinate system rotation (G68.1)
Coordinate system rotation is executed on the command program first, followed by tool position
offset.
- 3-dimensional coordinate conversion (G68.1)
If tool position offset is used, tool position offset with coordinate shift cannot be used. Offset with
tool movement must be specified inside a nest of 3-dimensional coordinate conversion. At the
beginning block of the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion, tool does not move for a converted tool
offset value.
Example)
G68.1 ... ;
T0101;
:
T0100;
G69.1 ... ;
- Workpiece coordinate system preset (G50.3)

When the bit 7(WTC) of parameter No.1205 is 0, performing workpiece coordinate system preset
causes tool position offset with tool movement to be canceled; this does not cause tool position
offset with coordinate shift to be canceled.
When the bit 7(WTC) of parameter No.1205 is 1, performing workpiece coordinate system preset
does not cause neither tool position offset with tool movement nor tool position offset with
coordinate shift to be canceled.
- Machine coordinate system setting (G53), reference position return (G28), second, third, and fourth
reference position return (G30), and manual reference position return
Basically, before performing these commands or operations, cancel tool position offset. These operations
do not cause tool position offset to be canceled. The actions in the Table 12.1.3 (d) take place:
- 1767 -
Table 12.1.3 (d)

When the command or operation is When the next axial movement command
specified is specified
Tool movement The tool offset value is temporarily canceled. The tool offset value is reflected.
Coordinate shift Coordinates with the tool offset value Coordinates with the tool offset value
reflected are assumed. reflected are assumed.
- Arbitrary speed threading

The alarm PS0528, “THREADING FORMAT ERROR” is issued when a T-code and the M-code for
starting arbitrary speed threading are specified in the same block.
- Auxiliary function output in moving axis (G50.9)

The alarm PS5330, “G50.9 FORMAT ERROR” is issued when a T-code and auxiliary function
output in moving axis (G50.9) are specified in the same block.
- Programmable parameter input (G10)

The alarm PS1144, “G10 FORMAT ERROR” is issued when a T-code is specified during
programmable parameter input.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1205 WTC

#7 WTC When workpiece coordinate system preset is done, actual tool position offset by tool
movement is :
0: Not considered.
1: Considered.

Set the allowable numbers of digits for the M, S, and T codes.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DAP DRP
3129

#0 DRP For relative coordinate display:

0: The actual position considering a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed.

0: The actual position considering a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed.
- 1768 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3290 GOF WOF

#0 WOF Setting the tool offset value (tool wear offset) by MDI key input is:
0: Not disabled.
1: Disabled. (With parameters Nos. 3294 and 3295, set the offset number range in
which updating the setting is to be disabled.)
NOTE
When tool offset memory A is selected with the M series, the tool
offset set in the parameter WOF is followed even if geometric
compensation and wear compensation are not specified with the T
series.
#1 GOF Setting the tool geometry offset value by MDI key input is:
0: Not disabled.
3294 Start number of tool offset values whose input by MDI is disabled
3295 Number of tool offset values (from the start number) whose input by MDI is disabled

[Valid data range] 0 to number of tool compensation values
When the modification of tool offset values by MDI key input is to be disabled using bits
0 (WOF) and 1 (GOF) of parameter No. 3290, parameters Nos. 3294 and 3295 are used to
set the range where such modification is disabled. In parameter No. 3294, set the offset
number of the start of tool offset values whose modification is disabled. In parameter No.
3295, set the number of such values. In the following cases, however, none of the tool
offset values may be modified:
- When 0 or a negative value is set in parameter No. 3294
- When a value greater than the maximum tool offset number is set in parameter No.
3294
In the following case, a modification to the values ranging from the value set in parameter
No. 3294 to the maximum tool offset number is disabled:
- When the value of parameter No. 3294 added to the value of parameter No. 3295
exceeds the maximum tool offset number
When the offset value of a prohibited number is input through the MDI panel, the
warning "WRITE PROTECT" is issued.
[Example] When the following parameter settings are made, modifications to both of the tool
geometry offset values and tool wear offset values corresponding to offset numbers 51 to
60 are disabled:
- Bit 1 (GOF) of parameter No. 3290 = 1 (to disable tool geometry offset value
modification)
- Bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No. 3290 = 1 (to disable tool wear offset value
modification)
- Parameter No. 3294 = 51
- 1769 -

If the setting of bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No. 3290 is set to 0 without modifying the
other parameter settings above, tool geometry offset value modification only is disabled,
and tool wear offset value modification is enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
WNP LWM LGC LGT ETC LWT LGN
5002

#1 LGN Geometry offset number of tool offset

0: Is the same as wear offset number
1: Specifies the geometry offset number by the tool selection number
NOTE
This parameter is valid when tool geometry/wear compensation is
enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is set to 0).
#2 LWT Tool wear compensation is performed by:

0: Moving the tool.
1: Shifting the coordinate system.
NOTE
#3 ETC When a T-code command is two digits or shorter, the T code is:
0: Not extended.
1: Extended.
When this parameter is 1, two-digit or shorter T-code commands are extended.
(Three-digit or longer T-code commands are not extended.) The value after extension is
determined by the setting of the number of digits in the offset number in T-code
commands (parameter No. 5028).
Parameter No. Number of digits after

Sample extension
5028 extension
1 Extended to two digits Before extension: T1 → After extension: T11
2 Extended to four digits Before extension: T1 → After extension: T0101
3 or greater Not extended
[Example]
• Parameter No. 5028 : 2
• Parameter No. 3032 : 4 (Allowable number of digits in T code)
Before extension → After extension
T1 → T0101 (1-digit command is extended to 4 digits.)
T12 → T1212 (2-digit command is extended to 4 digits.)
T112 → T112 (Not extended)
T1122 → T1122 (Not extended)
- 1770 -
NOTE
1 The setting of the allowable number of digits in T code (parameter
No. 3032) indicates the number of digits in a specified command
(before being extended). If the number of digits in the command
exceeds the allowable number of digits in T code, the alarm
PS0003, “TOO MANY DIGIT” is issued.
2 This parameter is dedicated to the lathe system. Tool change is
available with the turret type setting (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No.
5040 = 0).
3 If the number of digits in the offset number in a T-code command
(parameter No. 5028) is set to 0, the value after extension is
determined by the number of digits in the number of tool
compensation values (parameter No. 5024).
4 Common variable #149 for calling a T-code macro is set to the
pre-extension value.
#4 LGT Tool geometry compensation

0: Compensated by the shift of the coordinate system
1: Compensated by the tool movement
NOTE
#5 LGC When tool geometry compensation is based on coordinate shifting, the tool geometry
offset is:
0: Not canceled by a command with offset number 0.
1: Canceled by a command with offset number 0.
NOTE
#6 LWM Tool offset operation based on tool movement is performed:

0: In a block where a T code is specified.
1: Together with a command for movement along an axis.
#7 WNP Imaginary tool tip number used for tool nose radius compensation, when the tool
geometry/wear compensation function is equipped, is the number specified by:
0: Geometry offset number
1: Wear offset number
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
TGC
5003

#7 TGC A tool geometry offset based on a coordinate shift is:

0: Not canceled by reset.
1: Canceled by reset.
- 1771 -
NOTE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ORC
5004

#1 ORC The setting of a tool offset value is corrected as:

0: Diameter value
1: Radius value
NOTE
This parameter is valid only for an axis based on diameter
specification. For an axis based on radius specification, specify a
radius value, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
LVC TGC
5006

[Data type] Bit
#1 TGC If a T code is specified in a block where G50, G04, or G10 is specified:

0: No alarm is issued.
1: The alarm PS0245, “T-CODE NOT ALLOWED IN THIS BLOCK” is issued.
#3 LVC A tool offset (geometry/wear) based on a tool movement and wear offset based on a
coordinate shift are:
0: Not canceled by reset.
1: Canceled by reset.
5013 Maximum value of tool wear compensation

[Unit of data] mm, inch (offset unit)
[Min. unit of data] The increment system of a tool offset value is followed.
[Valid data range] The settings of bits 3 to 0 (OFE, OFD, OFC, and OFA) of parameter No. 5042 are
followed.
For metric input
OFE OFD OFC OFA Valid data range
0 0 0 1 0 to 9999.99mm
0 0 0 0 0 to 9999.999mm
0 0 1 0 0 to 9999.9999mm
0 1 0 0 0 to 9999.99999mm
1 0 0 0 0 to 999.999999mm
- 1772 -
For inch input
0 0 0 1 0 to 999.999inch
0 0 0 0 0 to 999.9999inch
0 0 1 0 0 to 999.99999inch
0 1 0 0 0 to 999.999999inch
1 0 0 0 0 to 99.9999999inch
This parameter sets the maximum allowable tool wear compensation value. If an attempt
is made to set a tool wear compensation value, the absolute value of which exceeds the
value set in this parameter, the following alarm or warning is output:
Input from MDI Warning: DATA IS OUT OF RANGE
Input by G10 Alarm PS0032: ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10.
When 0 or a negative value is set, no maximum allowable value is applied.
[Example] When 30.000 is set

As a tool offset value, a value from -30.000 to +30.000 can be input.
5014 Maximum value of incremental input for tool wear compensation

followed.
For metric input
0 0 0 1 0to9999.99mm
0 0 0 0 0to9999.999mm
0 0 1 0 0to9999.9999mm
0 1 0 0 0to9999.99999mm
1 0 0 0 0to999.999999mm
For inch input
0 0 0 1 0to999.999inch
0 0 0 0 0to999.9999inch
0 0 1 0 0to999.99999inch
0 1 0 0 0to999.999999inch
1 0 0 0 0to99.9999999inch
Set the maximum allowable value for the tool wear compensation value, input as an
incremental value. If the incremental input value (absolute value) exceeds the set value,
the following alarm or warning message is output:
NOTE

- 1773 -
[Valid data range] 0 to number of tool compensation values

For example, 200 tool compensation sets are used, 120 sets may be allocated to path 1
and 80 sets to path 2. All of 200 sets need not be used.
Number of digits of an offset number used with a T code command

5028

Specify the number of digits of a T code portion that is used for a tool offset number
(wear offset number when the tool geometry/wear compensation function is used).
When 0 is set, the number of digits is determined by the number of tool compensation
values.
When the number of tool compensation values is 1 to 9: Lower 1 digit
When the number of tool compensation values is 10 to 99: Lower 2 digits
[Example] When an offset number is specified using the lower 2 digits of a T code, set 2 in
parameter No. 5028.
Txxxxxx yy
xxxxxx : Tool selection
yy : Tool offset number
In tool management function, set 4 in this parameter to set 4-digit number in parameter
No.13265.
NOTE
A value longer than the setting of parameter No. 3032 (allowable
number of digits of a T code) cannot be set.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
OWD
5040

- 1774 -
#0 OWD In radius programming (bit 1 (ORC) of parameter No. 5004 is set to 1),
0: Tool offset values of both geometry compensation and wear compensation are
specified by radius.
1: Tool offset value of geometry compensation is specified by radius and tool offset
value of wear compensation is specified by diameter, for an axis of diameter
programming.
NOTE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8136 NGW NDO
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#5 NDO Tool offset pairs 64-pairs (T series 1-path system) / 128-pairs (T series 2-path system) is:
0: Used.
1: Not Used.
NOTE
When the option of tool compensation count 99 (T series 1-path
system) / 200 (T series 2-path system) is added, this parameter
becomes invalid in T series. (Tool compensation count is fixed to 99
(T series 1-path system) / 200 (T series 2-path system).)
#6 NGW Tool geometry/wear compensation (T series) is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
Alarm and message

PS0245 T-CODE NOT ALLOWED IN One of the G codes, G50, G10, G04, G28, G29, G30, and G53,
THIS BLOCK which cannot be specified in the same block as a T code, was
specified with a T code.
12.1.4 Extended Tool Selection Function

T
Overview
In lathe system machines, tools are changed mainly with the following two methods:
(1) With a turret holding multiple tools, tools are changed by turning the turret (T command).
(2) With an automatic tool changer (ATC), tools are changed by using both cartridge indexing (T
command) and tool change (such as M06) commands.
- 1775 -
To support the tool change method explained in (2) above, the following tool selection specifications
apply to this function:
<1> Tool compensation by a T command is disabled. This means that the T command performs auxiliary
functions only.
<2> Tool compensation is enabled by using a G code instead of the T command. In this case, the
following types of tool compensation are enabled:
- Tool length compensation
- Tool offset (compensation equivalent to that of a T command in the case of turret rotation type)
Explanation
- Selecting a tool change method
Bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 selects a tool change method.
This changes the way for specifying tool compensation.
This parameter setting has influence on the range in the Table 12.1.4 (a):
Table 12.1.4 (a)

Bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. Bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No.
5040 = 0 (Turret type) 5040 = 1 (ATC type)
Auxiliary function (tool change) Auxiliary function (tool indexing)
Operation of T command
and tool compensation only
Tool compensation Specified with T code Specified with G43.7 D_
Compensation No. of tool
Specified with T code Specified with D code
compensation
Compensation No. of tool-nose radius
Specified with T code Specified with D code
compensation
Command such as G43, etc. (group 23) Disabled (alarm) Enabled
Compensation number of G43, etc.
- Specified with D code
(group 23)
- T command operation
(1) When bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 is 0
The T command performs an auxiliary function and tool compensation.
The code signal issued to the machine is the T command value except the last 1 to 3 digits.
For example, suppose that the following command is issued when 2 is set in parameter No. 5028 (the
number of digits comprising the offset number in the T code command):
T0313 ;
The T code signal sent to the machine indicates 03.
The tool compensation number, indicated by the lowest 2 digits, is 13.
The T command performs an auxiliary function only.
In this case, the code signal issued to the machine is the T command value.
For example, suppose that the following is specified:
T0313 ;
The T code signal issued to the machine is 0313. The T code signal is not affected by the setting of
parameter No. 5028 (the number of digits comprising the offset number in the T code command).
The tool compensation number is not affected by this command.
- Tool compensation
The T command performs tool compensation.
The T command does not perform tool compensation.
To provide tool compensation, specify G43.7 D_.
- 1776 -
Tool compensation is performed in the same way as with the T command when bit 3 (TCT) of
parameter No. 5040 is 0.
- Compensation number of tool compensation

The lowest 1 to 3 digits of the T command are used. The number of digits is set in parameter No.
5028.
When the tool geometry/wear compensation option is provided, tool geometry compensation and
wear compensation may also be assigned different compensation values by setting bit 1 (LGN) of
parameter No. 5002.
For details, see Section "TOOL FUNCTIONS OF LATHE SYSTEM".
Except that a compensation number is specified with a D command, the same operation as (1) above
is performed.
- Compensation number of tool-nose radius compensation

Same as for tool compensation described above.
- Specification of G43, etc.

G codes of group 23 such as G43 cannot be specified.
Specifying such a G code results in an alarm PS0366, “IMPROPER G-CODE IN TURRET
METHOD”.
G codes of group 23 such as G43 can be specified. The following G codes can be specified:
G43/G44: Tool length compensation
G43.7: Tool compensation
Specify a compensation number with D_. The D code is specified in the same way as for tool
compensation and tool-nose radius compensation.
The reverse meanings can be set for G43/G44 and G43.7 by setting bit 4 (TLG) of parameter No.
5040.

As the compensation amount used by the functions listed below, only the value set in Z on the tool
compensation memory screen is used, Values such as values set for the X, R, and Y-axis offsets (optional
function) are ignored.
G43/G44: Tool length compensation
As the compensation amount used in the following function, the values set for the X, Z, and Y-axis
offsets (optional function) on the tool compensation memory screen are used:
G43.7: Tool compensation
Limitation
- Switching between tool compensation mode and another compensation mode
In the tool compensation (G43.7) mode, a command such as a tool length compensation command
(G43/G44) cannot be specified. Similarly, in a mode such as the tool length compensation mode
(G43/G44), tool compensation (G43.7) cannot be specified.
Specifying such a command results in the alarm PS0368, “OFFSET REMAIN AT OFFSET
COMMAND”.
To switch between compensation types, specify G49 to cancel the current compensation mode before
setting another compensation mode.
- 1777 -
- Multiple repetitive canned cycle

When a multiple repetitive canned cycle is executed with bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 set to 1, note
the following:
CAUTION
1 When a G71 to G76 command is specified in the 10/11 tape format, a value
such as the depth of cut is specified with a D code. In this case, a D command
specified after G71 to G76 is assumed to be the depth of cut. For example,
suppose that the command shown below is specified. In this case, the D
command <1> is assumed to be the tool compensation number, and the D
command <2> is assumed to be the depth of cut.
Example:
D10 G71 P_Q_ U_ W_ D7000 F_ S_;
<1> <2>
2 In the operation of G71 to G73, a G code such as G43 and a D command
specified in the finish figure blocks (the portion enclosed by the sequence
numbers specified with P_ and Q_) are ignored, and the compensation amount
set when the G71 to G73 block is specified becomes valid.
- Changing bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040

WARNING
Before changing the setting of bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040, cancel the
offset. If the setting is changed while the offset is applied, the subsequent offset
operation may not be performed correctly or an alarm PS0368 occurs.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
TLG TCT
5040

#3 TCT The tool change method is based on:

0: Turret rotation. (Tool change operation is performed with a T command only.)
With a T command, an auxiliary function and tool offset operation are performed.
1: Automatic tool changer (ATC).
(Tool change operation is performed with an M command (such as M06)).
With a T command, an auxiliary function only is performed.
This parameter is valid with a lathe system only.
WARNING
Before changing the setting of this parameter, cancel the offset. If
the setting is changed while the offset is applied, the subsequent
offset operation may not be performed correctly or an alarm
PS0368 occurs.
- 1778 -
#4 TLG When tool change operation is performed with the automatic tool changer (when bit 3
(TCT) of parameter No. 5040 is set to 1), tool offset operation is specified by:
0: G43.7.
At this time, G43 and G44 function as G codes for tool length compensation.
1: G43.
At this time, G43.7 and G44.7 function as G codes for tool length compensation.
Alarm and message

PS0366 IMPROPER G-CODE IN TURRET When the turret change tools method was selected (bit 3
METHOD (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 0), G43, or G43.7 was
commanded.
PS0368 OFFSET REMAIN AT OFFSET - When the ATC change tools method was selected (bit 3
COMMAND (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1) during G43 mode,
G43.7 was commanded. Or, G43 or G43.5 was
commanded during G43.7 mode.
- After bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 was changed in
the state in which a tool offset remained, another tool
offset was specified.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe Extended tool selection function
System) (B-64604EN-1)
- 1779 -
12.1.5 Automatic Alteration of Tool Position Compensation (T

Function)
Overview
After cutting tools are changed manually, entering the tool number of a new tool enables the previous tool
position compensation values (tool geometry and wear compensation) to be changed to those for the new
tool.
Details
After changing cutting tools manually, place the CNC in the JOG or HNDL (INC), or REF mode, enter
the tool number of a new tool as a manual tool compensation tool number signal (MTLN <Gn068,
Gn069> or MT8N <Gn525-Gn528>) from the PMC, and set the compensation command signal MTLC
<Gn067.0> to “1”. The CNC will read the tool number and change the previous tool position
compensation values to those for the specified tool. Upon completion of the compensation value change,
the compensation completion signal MTLA <Fn061.5> is output.
Manual tool
change
Manual tool
compensation tool Tool number (4 or 8 BCD digits)
number signal
MTLN(PMC→CNC)
<Gn068,Gn069>
<Gn525-Gn528>
Compensation command
signal
MTLC(PMC→CNC)
<Gn067.0>
Compensation
completion signal
MTLA(CNC→PMC)
<Fn061.5>
Changing compensation values (CNC)
Fig. 12.1.5 (a)
Four BCD digits are used to specify the manual tool compensation tool number MTLN <Gn068, Gn069>.
If it is necessary to specify the manual tool compensation tool number with a number exceeding 4 digits,
use MT8N <Gn525-Gn528> to specify it with 8 BCD digits. Which size to use can be selected using bit 7
(MTL8D) of parameter No. 11400. The same rules as for the T code command in automatic operation are
applied in specifying how many digits, 4 or 8, to use as the geometry or wear compensation numbers
This function is available only if the CNC is in the JOG, HNDL, or REF mode.
In any other operation mode, during automatic operation (running, pause, or stop), in the tool-nose radius
compensation mode, (G41/G42 mode), or 3-dimensional cutter compensation mode, setting the
compensation command signal MTLC to “1” does not enable compensation.
If compensation is unavailable, the compensation completion signal MTLA does not become “1”. Instead
the compensation uncompleted signal MTLANG <Fn061.4> becomes “1”. The reason for MTLANG = 1
can be known from diagnosis data No. 560.
- 1780 -
Manual tool
change
Manual tool
compensation tool
number signal Tool number (4 or 8 BCD digits)
MTLN(PMC→CNC)
<Gn068,Gn069>
<Gn525-Gn528>
Compensation command
signal
MTLC(PMC→CNC)
<Gn067.0>
Compensation uncompleted
signal
MTLANG(CNC→PMC)
<Fn061.5>
Compensation
completion signal
MTLA(CNC→PMC)
<Fn061.4>
Compensation change is impossible (CNC)
Fig. 12.1.5 (b)
Signal
Manual tool compensation tool number signal (4 digits)
MTLN00 to MTLN15<Gn068, Gn069>
[Function] Specifies a tool number for manual tool compensation, using 4 BCD digits.
Manual tool compensation tool number signal (8 digits)

MT8N00 to MT8N31<Gn525-Gn528>
[Function] Specifies a tool number for manual tool compensation, using 8 BCD digits.
Manual tool compensation command number MTLC<Gn067.0>

[Function] Requests to perform manual tool compensation. Setting this signal from “0” to “1”
causes manual tool compensation to be performed. Re-set it to “0” when the compensation
completion signal becomes = “1”.
Manual tool compensation completion signal MTLA<Fn061.5>

[Function] Informs that manual tool compensation is completed. This signal becomes “1” when a
compensation value is changed in manual tool compensation. It becomes “0” when the
compensation command signal MTLC becomes “0”.
Manual tool compensation uncompleted signal MTLANG<Fn061.4>

[Function] Informs that manual tool compensation is uncompleted. This signal becomes “1” if an
attempt to perform manual tool compensation fails in changing a compensation value for
any reason. It becomes “0” when the compensation command signal MTLC becomes “0”.
The reason for the failure of the attempt can be known from diagnosis data No. 560.
- 1781 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn068 MTLN07 MTLN06 MTLN05 MTLN04 MTLN03 MTLN02 MTLN01 MTLN00
Gn069 MTLN15 MTLN14 MTLN13 MTLN12 MTLN11 MTLN10 MTLN09 MTLN08
Gn525 MT8N07 MT8N06 MT8N05 MT8N04 MT8N03 MT8N02 MT8N01 MT8N00
Gn067 MTLC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn061 MTLA MTLANG
Diagnosis data
0560 Manual tool compensation status number
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] None
The following numbers are used to indicate whether compensation is completed or the
reason for uncompleted compensation (if occur).
0: Manual tool compensation is completed normally.
1: The T code-specified data has exceeded the permissible range.
2: The offset value is out of range.
3: The offset number is out of range.
4: The CNC is undergoing automatic operation or axis movement.
5: The CNC is in the tool-nose radius compensation mode.
6: The CNC is in a mode other than the JOG, HNDL (INC), or REF mode.
7: A CNC parameter has specified an invalid number.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MTL8D
11400

#0 MTL8D The number of digits in the T code used for automatic change of tool position
compensation is specified as follows:
0: 4 digits (Existing DI signals <Gn068 and Gn069> are used.)
1: 8 digits (The DI signals <Gn525 to Gn528> are used.)
Notes
If the CNC is in the following conditions, setting the compensation command signal MTLC to “1” cannot
change compensation values, and therefore, the compensation uncompleted signal MTLANG becomes
“1”.
- 1782 -
1) The CNC is in a mode other than the JOG, HNDL (INC), or REF mode.
2) The CNC is at an emergency stop.
3) The reset button on the MDI unit is held pressed.
4) A reset signal is input on the machine side.
5) The CNC is in an alarm condition.
6) The CNC is undergoing automatic operation (start, pause, or stop).
7) The CNC is in the tool-noose radius compensation mode (G41/G42 mode).
With this function, shifted coordinate systems are returned to the previous state by the first T code in the
next session of automatic operation, and axis movement occurs by the amount of canceled shifting, thus
resuming the position and coordinate systems of the inherent movement type.
Example:
If the amounts of wear compensation are: T1 = 0.1, T2 = 0.2, and T3 = 0.4
1) The state that T1 compensation is applied during automatic operation (compensation of 0.1 axis
movement type):
2) The coordinate system is shifted by -0.1 (= T2 - T1) from the state mentioned in step 1 when
tool T2 is selected in manual tool compensation.
3) When compensation T3 is applied again during automatic operation, the coordinate system is
shifted by 0.2 (= T3 - T2), that is, totally by 0.3. The coordinate system, which has been shifted
by -0.1 in step 2, is shifted back to the previous state.
Once the T3 compensation command has been executed, the same position and coordinate system as
would be when the T3 compensation command is issued in the T1 compensation state are resumed.
When manual tool compensation ends properly, the T code modal changes to one where manual tool
compensation was carried out (the tool function code signals <Fn026 to Fn029> also change).
- 1783 -
12.2 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM

M
Overview
Selection of tools can be done by commanding tool numbers with up to an 8-digit numeral after address
T.
Signal
Refer to “AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION”
Parameter

Set the allowable numbers of digits for the T code.
Note
NOTE
When a move command and a tool function are specified in the same block, the
commands are executed in one of the following two ways:
(i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and tool function commands.
(ii) Executing tool function commands upon completion of move command
execution.
The selection of either (i) or (ii) depends on the sequence program of PMC.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Tool selection command
Tool selection function
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Auxiliary function
(This manual)
- 1784 -
12.2.1 Tool Compensation Memory

M
Overview
Tool compensation values include geometry compensation values and wear compensation values. (Fig.
12.2.1 (a), “Geometric compensation and wear compensation”)
Reference Reference
position position
Geometry Tool
compensation compensation
value value
Wear Compensation value
(a) Geometry and wear (b) Geometry and were compensation

compensation are discriminated are not discriminated
Fig. 12.2.1 (a) Geometric compensation and wear compensation
Tool compensation values can be entered into CNC memory from the MDI or from a program.
A tool compensation value is selected from the CNC memory when the corresponding code is specified
after address H or D in a program.
The value is used for tool length compensation, cutter compensation, or the tool offset.
- Unit of range of tool compensation value

A tool offset unit and valid data range can be chosen from the following by setting the parameters:
Table 12.2.1 (a)

Unit of range of tool compensation value (metric input)
OFE OFD OFC OFA Unit Range
0 0 0 1 0.01mm ±9999.99mm
0 0 0 0 0.001mm ±9999.999mm
0 0 1 0 0.0001mm ±9999.9999mm
0 1 0 0 0.00001mm ±9999.99999mm
1 0 0 0 0.000001mm ±999.999999mm
Unit of range of tool compensation value (inch input)

OFE OFD OFC OFA Unit Range
0 0 0 1 0.001inch ±999.999inch
0 0 0 0 0.0001inch ±999.9999inch
0 0 1 0 0.00001inch ±999.99999inch
0 1 0 0 0.000001inch ±999.999999inch
1 0 0 0 0.0000001inch ±99.9999999inch

Memory for geometry compensation and wear compensation is separate. Geometry compensation and
wear compensation can thus be set separately. Separate memories are prepared for cutter compensation
(for D code) and for tool length compensation (for H code).
- 1785 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3109 DWT

#1 DWT Characters G and W in the display of tool wear/geometry compensation amount

0: The characters are displayed at the left of each number.
1: The characters are not displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3205 OSC

[Data type] Bit
#4 OSC On the offset screen, offset value erasure by a soft key is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3290 GOF WOF

#0 WOF Setting the tool offset value (tool wear offset) by MDI key input is:
0: Not disabled.
#1 GOF Setting the tool geometry offset value by MDI key input is:
0: Not disabled.
3294 Start number of tool offset values whose input by MDI is disabled
3295 Number of tool offset values (from the start number) whose input by MDI is disabled

When the modification of tool offset values by MDI key input is to be disabled using bits
0 (WOF) and 1 (GOF) of parameter No. 3290, parameters Nos. 3294 and 3295 are used to
set the range where such modification is disabled. In parameter No. 3294, set the offset
number of the start of tool offset values whose modification is disabled. In parameter No.
3295, set the number of such values. In the following cases, however, none of the tool
offset values may be modified:
- When a value greater than the maximum tool offset number is set in parameter No.
3294
- 1786 -
In the following case, a modification to the values ranging from the value set in parameter
No. 3294 to the maximum tool offset number is disabled:
- When the value of parameter No. 3294 added to the value of parameter No. 3295
exceeds the maximum tool offset number
When the offset value of a prohibited number is input through the MDI panel, the
warning "WRITE PROTECT" is issued.
[Example] When the following parameter settings are made, modifications to both of the tool
geometry offset values and tool wear offset values corresponding to offset numbers 51 to
60 are disabled:
- Bit 1 (GOF) of parameter No. 3290 = 1 (to disable tool geometry offset value
modification)
- Bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No. 3290 = 1 (to disable tool wear offset value
modification)
If the setting of bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No. 3290 is set to 0 without modifying the
other parameter settings above, tool geometry offset value modification only is disabled,
and tool wear offset value modification is enabled.
5013 Maximum value of tool wear compensation

followed.
For metric input
0 0 0 1 0 to 9999.99mm
0 0 0 0 0 to 9999.999mm
0 0 1 0 0 to 9999.9999mm
0 1 0 0 0 to 9999.99999mm
1 0 0 0 0 to 999.999999mm
For inch input
0 0 0 1 0 to 999.999inch
0 0 0 0 0 to 999.9999inch
0 0 1 0 0 to 999.99999inch
0 1 0 0 0 to 999.999999inch
1 0 0 0 0 to 99.9999999inch
This parameter sets the maximum allowable tool wear compensation value. If an attempt
is made to set a tool wear compensation value, the absolute value of which exceeds the
value set in this parameter, the following alarm or warning is output:
[Example] When 30.000 is set

As a tool offset value, a value from -30.000 to +30.000 can be input.
5014 Maximum value of incremental input for tool wear compensation

- 1787 -

followed.
For metric input
0 0 0 1 0to9999.99mm
0 0 0 0 0to9999.999mm
0 0 1 0 0to9999.9999mm
0 1 0 0 0to9999.99999mm
1 0 0 0 0to999.999999mm
For inch input
0 0 0 1 0to999.999inch
0 0 0 0 0to999.9999inch
0 0 1 0 0to999.99999inch
0 1 0 0 0to999.999999inch
1 0 0 0 0to99.9999999inch
Set the maximum allowable value for the tool wear compensation value, input as an
incremental value. If the incremental input value (absolute value) exceeds the set value,
the following alarm or warning message is output:
Alarm and message

PS0032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writing an offset
amount by system variables, the offset amount was
excessive.
Warning message Description

DATA IS OUT OF RANGE The value searched exceeds the permitted range.
- 1788 -
12.3 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
12.3.1 Tool Management Function

Overview
The tool management function totally manages tool information including information about tool offset
and tool life.
NOTE
Explanation
A tool type number is specified with a T code. The tool type number is any number the user can define
freely. With tool type numbers, tools can be grouped by various conditions such as life, compensation
value, and cutting conditions. When each type is assumed to have a single tool, tool type numbers are
equivalent to unique tool numbers.
For each tool, an information storage area is prepared in the CNC (SRAM). This area contains
information such as a tool type number, tool life, tool status (such as a breakage condition), tool
compensation number (H, D, G, or W), spindle speed (S), cutting feedrate (F), and freely-definable
customize data. Such data is called tool management data.
A cartridge management table that links cartridge information and tool management data is provided so
that the CNC can manage the cartridges of the machine and tool change operations. In addition, areas for
managing the tools in the spindle and tool standby positions are prepared.
When a tool type number is specified using a T code command, a tool that has the tool type number and
the shortest life is searched for, and the cartridge number and pot number of the location where the tool is
stored are output to the PMC. Then, a tool change operation using the cartridge number and pot number is
enabled by the PMC ladder sequence.
Tool information in the CNC is managed by the tool management data and cartridge management table
(including the spindle management table and standby position table).
- Tool management data

As tool management data, information about a tool is registered for each data number.
Tool management function 64 sets 64 sets in total

Details of data
The following details the data registered for each data number:
- Tool type number (T code)

Item Description
Data length 4byte
Valid data range 0,1 to 99,999,999
- Tool life counter

Item Description
Data length 4byte
Unit of data When the number of use times is specified: Times
When time is specified: Seconds
Valid data range When the number of use times is specified: 0 to 99,999,999 times
When time is specified: 0 to 3,599,999 s (999 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds)
- 1789 -
The value of an increment counter, that is, the number of use times (time) is indicated. The
remaining life value is [the maximum tool life value minus tool life counter value].
- Maximum tool life value

Item Description
Data length 4byte
- Notice life value

Item Description
Data length 4byte
If a value other than 0 is set, the tool life expiration notice signal TLCHB <Fn064.3> or TLCHBx
<Fn329.4 to 7> is output when the remaining life value of the tool (= maximum tool life value minus
tool life counter value) has reached the set value.
- Tool life status

Item Description
Data length 1byte
Detail data 0: Life management is not performed
1: Tool not yet used
2: Life remains
3: Life expired
4: Tool breakage (skip)
The machine (PMC) determines tool breakage and stores corresponding information through the
window. In tool management of the CNC, a broken tool is regarded as being equivalent to tools
whose lives have expired.
- Tool information
Item Description
Data length 1 byte (flag data)
#0 RGS 0: Tool management data is invalid (-)
1: Tool management data is valid (R)
#1 TIM 0: Type for counting the number of use times (C)
1: Type for counting time (T)
#2 BDT 0: Normal tool (N)
1: Oversize tool (B)
#3 LOC 0: Data accessible (U)
1: Data not accessible (L)
#4 SEN When the tool life status indicates that tool management is not performed:
0: This tool is not searched (-)
1: This tool is searched (S)
#5 to #7 Reserved
When RGS is set to 0 in tool management data, the tool management data is regarded as not being
registered even when values are set for other items.
- 1790 -
NOTE
Make sure you specify the same life count type for all tools of the same type.
You can check tools of the same type for any difference in life count type, using
the "check function."
M
- Tool length compensation number (H)
Item Description
Data length 2byte
Valid data range 0 to 999
- Cutter compensation number (D)

Item Description
Data length 2byte
T
- Tool geometry compensation number (G)
Item Description
Data length 2byte
- Tool wear compensation number (W)

Item Description
Data length 2byte
- Spindle speed (S)

Item Description
Data length 4byte
Unit of data min-1
Valid data range 1 to 99,999
- Feedrate (F)
Item Description
Data length 4byte
Unit of data mm/min, inch/min, deg/min, mm/rev, inch/rev
Valid data range 0 to 99,999,999
As additional tool management data, areas for setting customize data (5 data items including customize
data 0 and customize data 1 to 4) are provided without defining specific usage. The user can use these
customize data areas freely to set a warning life value, cutting resistance, override value, spindle current
value, maximum and minimum S/F, and other items according to the targeted application.
- Customize data 0
Item Description
Data length 1 byte (bit type)
Valid data range 0 or 1 on a bit-by-bit basis
- 1791 -
- Customize data 1 to 4 (to 20) (to 40)

Item Description
Data length 4byte
Valid data range -99,999,999 to 99,999,999
- Cartridge management table

The storage status of tools in cartridges is managed with the cartridge management table.
- Multiple cartridge numbers can be defined. (Numbers from 1 to 8, up to eight cartridges)
- The maximum number of pots for all cartridges is 64, 240, or 1000, which depends on whether a
tool management data option is selected.
- Cartridge numbers and pot numbers can be assigned freely within cartridge management data by
parameter setting (described later).
- The tool management data number adjacent to a pot number is linked with tool data defined in the
tool management table. Therefore, the tool attached to the pot is indicated.
- Zero set as a data number indicates that no tool is attached.
- The cartridge management table can be read from and written to through the PMC window and
FOCAS2.
The spindle management table and standby position table are provided to indicate special cartridge
positions.
- Spindle positions and standby positions, regarded as special cartridge positions, have fixed cartridge
numbers 11 to 14 (the positions of the first to fourth spindles) and 21 to 24 (the first to fourth
standby positions).
- With the PMC window, the spindle position table and standby position table can be read from and
written to.
- Tool life counting is performed only for the tools at the spindle positions.
- Multi-path system
The tool management data and cartridge management table are common data among the paths. The
spindle management table and standby position table, however, are treated as independent data for each
path.
When the spindle table or standby position table is specified as a cartridge from the PMC window,
specify the Table 12.3.1 (a), in which the path number is set in the hundred’s place:
Table 12.3.1 (a)

Spindle position
First Second Third Fourth
First path 111(11) 112(12) 113(13) 114(14)
Second path 211 212 213 214
Standby position
First Second Third Fourth
First path 121(21) 122(22) 123(23) 124(24)
Second path 221 222 223 224
NOTE
When specifying 111, 121, and so on to specify the first path, you may specify
just 11, 21, and so on.
- 1792 -
Tool management data

- Data of each tool such as type number, life status, and compensation number
- The number of sets of data is 64, 240, or 1000.
Cartridge management table

- This table indicates the cartridge and pot to which each set of tool management
data is assigned.
- Up to eight cartridges are used.
Path 1 Path 2
Standby position table Standby position table

121 to 124 (21 to 24) 221 to 224
Spindle position table Spindle position table

111 to 114 (11 to 14) 211 to 214
NOTE
The tool management data and cartridge management table are data common
to the M and T series.
- Tool life management and tool change

The CNC performs tool life management, regarding tools having the same tool type number as a group.
When a tool type number (T code) is specified by an NC program, the tool management data registered in
the CNC is searched to find a tool having the shortest life among the tools with the same tool type
number.
The cartridge number and pot number corresponding to the searched tool are output as a T code signal to
the PMC. Based on the output cartridge number and pot number, the PMC performs preparation for a tool
change (to the next tool). A different tool can also be selected on the PMC side.
The CNC performs tool life counting for each tool that is at a spindle position in the spindle management
table.
When the lives of all tools having the tool type number specified by the T code have expired, alarm
PS5317, “ALL TOOL LIFE IS OVER” is issued. If there is a tool in the spindle position or standby
position, that tool is selected to continue machining.
As the T code signal, a specified tool type number instead of the cartridge number and pot number can
also be output directly by parameter setting.
There are two types of tool life management counting methods: counting the number of use times and
counting cutting time. One of the counting methods is set in tool information of tool management data.
Other major specifications related to tool life management are as follows:

Tool type number (T code) : Up to 8 digits (1 to 99,999,999)
Maximum tool life value : 99,999,999 times when the number of use times is specified
: 999 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds when time is specified
Life count interval when time is specified : 1 second
Tool life management count restart M code : Enabled
Tool life count override : Enabled
- 1793 -
- Examples of performing tool life management

Operation examples of tool life management are given below, in which the tool management data and
cartridge management table are set as Table 12.3.1 (b):
Table 12.3.1 (b)

Maximum Tool length Cutter
Data Tool type Tool life Tool life Tool
tool life compensation compensation
No. No. (T) counter status information
value No. (H) No. (D)
1 11111111 985 1000 Not expired UNCR 1 1
2 11111111 0 1000 Not expired UNCR 2 2
3 11111111 0 1000 Not expired UNCR 3 3
4 22222222 0 2000 Not expired UBCR 31 41

No. Cartridge No. Pot No. Tool management data No.
1 1 1 3
2 1 2 12
: : : :
29 1 29 2
30 1 30 1
31 2 1 11
: : :
63 2 29 21
64 2 30 0
Spindle management table Standby position table

Spindle Cartridge No. Standby Cartridge No.
Data No. Data No.
name (Spindle No.) position name (Standby position No.)
Spindle
11 0 Standby position 21 0
position
Tool life management is explained below by using the following sample program:
Program example
:
N10 T11111111 ;
:
N80 M06 ;
:
N200 G01 X100. F100. ;
:
N999 M30 ;
- Selecting a tool having a tool type number and shortest life

The following example explains how a tool having a tool type number specified by a T code is selected:
N10 T11111111 ;
(1) Among tools whose tool type number is 11111111, a tool having the shortest life is searched for(*1).
Since the tool with the shortest life is assigned tool management data number 1, the numbers of the
cartridge and pot holding this tool are obtained.
The following tools are not searched:
- Tools not assigned to any cartridge
- Tools whose tool life status is 0 (Life management is not performed.)(*2)
- Tools whose tool life status is 3 (Life has expired.)
- 1794 -
- Tools whose tool life status is 4 (tool breakage)
- Tools whose tool information bit 0 invalidates the tool management data
- Tool being edited on the tool management screen
- Tools whose tool life counter indicates the maximum tool life value.
If multiple tools have the same life value, a search is made according to the following priority:
High Spindle position
Standby position
Low Cartridge
If a cartridge contains tools having the same life value, the tool with the smaller tool management
number takes priority.
NOTE
1 If bit 6 (SWC) of parameter No. 13203 is 1, a tool whose customize data with a
customize data number specified in parameter No. 13260 is smallest is searched
for instead of a tool with the shortest life.
2 Even when the tool life status of a tool shows that life management is not
performed (= 0), the tool is targeted for a search operation if bit 4 (SEN) of its
tool information is set to 1. In this case, the remaining life is not checked. The
cartridge number and pot number of the tool found first are output as the search
result.
(2) Since the tool with tool management data number 1 is stored at cartridge number 1 and pot number
30, binary value 0001 is output at PMC addresses <Fn026 to Fn027>, and binary value 0030 is
output at <Fn028 to Fn029>.
(3) On the machine side, the tool searched for is moved to the standby position.
(4) By using the PMC window (function code 329), the tool whose cartridge number 1 and pot number
30 in the cartridge management table is moved to the standby position (cartridge number 21).
T code output
<Fn026-Fn029>
Tool function strobe

signal TF<Fn007.3>
PMC window function

code 329
Completion signal
FIN<Gn004.3>
N80 M06;
(1) In response to the M06 command, M code binary value 0006 is output to PMC F addresses <Fn010
to Fn013> and the MF signal is output to <Fn007.0>.
(2) The machine performs a tool change operation, and moves the tool from the standby position to
spindle position.
(3) With the PMC window (function code 329), the tools at the standby position and spindle position in
the cartridge management table are changed.
(4) The CNC regards the tool moved to the spindle position (cartridge number 11) by the PMC window
(function code 329) as a new tool targeted for tool life management.
(5) The miscellaneous function completion signal is sent from the PMC to CNC.
- 1795 -
M code output
<Fn010-Fn013>
Miscellaneous
function strobe signal
MF<Fn007.0>
Tool
change
PMC window function

code 329
Completion signal
FIN<Gn004.3>
- When a tool with shortest life is attached at spindle position

An operation example in which a T code command is issued when a tool with the shortest life is already
attached at the spindle position is explained below.

Data No. Data No.
name (Spindle No.) position name (Spindle No.)
Spindle
position
N10 T11111111 ;
(1) From the tools with tool type number 11111111, a tool with the shortest life is searched for.
(2) Since the tool with the shortest life is the tool at the spindle position (tool management data number
1), binary value 0011 is output to PMC addresses <Fn026 to Fn027>. At the addresses indicating the
pot number <Fn028 to Fn029>, binary value 0000 is output.
(3) Tool function strobe signal TF is output to the PMC.
(4) Since a tool change operation is not needed, the PMC sends completion signal FIN to the CNC.
T code output
<Fn026-Fn029>
Tool function strobe

signal TF<Fn007.3>
Completion signal
FIN<Gn004.3>
N80 M06;
(1) M code binary value 6 is output to the PMC addresses <Fn010 to Fn013>.
(2) Miscellaneous function strobe signal MF <Fn007.0> is output to the PMC.
(3) Since a tool change operation is not needed, the PMC sends completion signal FIN to the CNC.
(4) The CNC starts counting the tool life of the tool held at the spindle position. For the type for
counting the number of use times, the life count is incremented by one.
- 1796 -
M code output
<Fn010-Fn013>
Auxiliary function strobe

signal MF<Fn007.0>
Completion signal
FIN<Gn004.3>
- When the life of the tool being used has expired

An operation example when the tool life of the tool being used (the tool at the spindle position) has
expired is explained below.
Tool length Cutter
Data Tool type Tool life Maximum Tool life Tool
compensation compensation
No. No. (T) counter tool life value status information
No. (H) No. (D)
1 11111111 999 1000 Not expired UNCR 1 1
2 11111111 0 1000 Not expired UNCR 2 2
3 11111111 0 1000 Not expired UNCR 3 3

No. Cartridge No. Pot No. Tool management data No.
1 1 1 3
2 1 2 12
: : : :
29 1 29 2
30 1 30 0
Spindle management table Standby position table

Data No. Data No.
name (Spindle No.) position name (Standby position No.)
Spindle
position
- Type for counting the number of use times

When a life is counted by counting the number of use times, the life count is incremented by one each
time M06 (or an M code for restarting tool life counting or T code) is specified.
N80 M06;
(1) M code binary value 6 is output to PMC addresses <Fn010 to Fn013>.
(2) Miscellaneous function strobe signal MF <Fn007.0> is output to the PMC.
(3) Since a tool change operation has already completed, no tool change operation is performed.
(4) The PMC sends miscellaneous function completion signal FIN to the CNC.
(5) The CNC increments the life count for the tool held at the spindle position (tool management data
No. 1) by one.
(6) The life count reaches 1000 (the maximum tool life), so the tool life expires.
(7) The CNC changes the tool life status for tool management data number 1 to 3 (life has expired).
(8) The CNC searches for a tool that has the same tool type number and has remaining life.
- 1797 -
M code output
<Fn010-Fn013>
Auxiliary function
strobe signal
MF<F007.0>
Completion signal
FIN<Gn004.3>
N999 M30;
(1) When the lives of all tools having the same tool type number have expired, tool change signal TLCH
<Fn064.0> is set to “1“ immediately even during operation.
(2) After a change to a new tool, tool reset signal TLRST <Gn048.7> is set to “1“.
(3) Tool change signal TLCH <Fn064.0> is set to “0“.
Tool change signal

TLCH<Fn064.0>
Tool change
Tool reset signal

TLRST<Gn048.7>
- Type for counting time

Operations performed when a life is counted by counting time are explained below.
Suppose that the tool management data is set as listed below.
Also suppose that the cartridge management table is the same as for the type for counting the number of
use times.
Maximum Tool length Cutter

Tool type Tool life Tool life Tool
Data No. tool life compensation compensation
No. (T) counter status information
value No. (H) No. (D)
Not
1 11111111 3300 3600 UNTR 1 1
expired
- N200 G01 X100. F100. ;

For the type for counting time, the time (in seconds) taken to execute such a cutting block is added to the
counter value.
(1) The life count reaches 3600 seconds (the maximum tool life), and the tool life expires.
(2) The CNC changes the tool life status for tool management data number 1 to 3 (life has expired).
(3) The CNC searches for a tool that has the same tool type number and has a remaining life.
(4) Individual tool change signal TLCHI <Fn064.2> is set to “1“.
(5) When the lives of all tools having the same tool type number have expired, tool change signal TLCH
<Fn064.0> is set to “1“.
(6) Even when the tool life has expired, machining is continued until the machining program ends.
- 1798 -
Individual tool change

signal
TLCHI<Fn064.2>
Tool change
Individual tool reset

signal
TLRSTI<Gn048.6>
Tool change signal

TLCH<Fn064.0>
Tool change
Tool reset signal

TLRST<Gn048.7>
NOTE
Time is counted up while a cutting feed operation after the execution of M06 or a
restart M code or T code is in progress. When the spindle is stopped or is
rotating, the count-up operation is not performed. The target tools are the tools
attached at the first to fourth spindle positions. When one of the following
conditions is met, the count-up operation is not performed:
1 The tool life status indicates the invalid state (0) or breakage (4).
2 Even when a cutting feed is performed, the cutting feed is not regarded as
being in progress.
- When the system is in the FIN wait state
- During in-position check
- When the cutting feed override is 0%
- When an interlock is provided
- When the system is in the spindle speed arrival wait state
(The above states can be confirmed from diagnosis screen Nos. 000 to 013.)
- When a machine lock is provided
- When the tool being used is broken

A tool breakage is detected by the machine and is posted to the CNC via the PMC. The PMC posts the
tool breakage to the CNC in one of the following three methods:
- The tool life status is changed to 4 (tool breakage) by using the PMC window (function code 332)
- The tool life status is changed to 4 (tool breakage) by using the PMC window (function code 335).
- Tool skip signal TLSKP <Gn048.5> is set to “1“.
The tool placed in the tool breakage state is excluded from the target tools for tool life management when
the next and subsequent T codes are specified.
Tool broken
Tool skip signal

TLSKP<Gn048.5>
Tool skip completion signal

TLSKF<Fn315.0>
- 1799 -
- T code command for specifying a particular tool

To specify a particular tool directly without allowing the CNC to select a tool, use the following format:
M_ T_ ;
NOTE
A block for specifying the above command must not contain any other
command.
M_ M code set in parameter No. 13252

T_
If bit 0 of parameter No. 13200 is 0:
Upper 4 digits: Cartridge number (output to <Fn026 to Fn027>)
Lower 4 digits: Pot number (output to <Fn028 to Fn029>)
If the T code command is not longer than 4 digits, it is output to <Fn026 to Fn027> of the PMC on
the assumption that the cartridge number is 1.
To specify a spindle position or standby position, set the pot number to 0.
Upper 4 digits: Cartridge number (11, 21)

Lower 4 digits: 0001
If bit 0 of parameter No. 13200 is 1:

Any number from 0 to 99,999,999
If bit 0 of parameter No. 13200 is 1 (outputting a T code directly to the output signal), the binary value of
the specified T code is output to <Fn026 to Fn029> without modification.
NOTE
Pot numbers must not exceed 9999.
- Search by customize data

If bit 6 (SWC) of parameter No. 13203 is 0, a tool with the shortest life is searched for. If SWC is 1, a
tool whose customize data with an arbitrary number holds the smallest is searched for. When SWC is set
to 1, the number of the customize data by which a search operation is to be made is set in parameter No.
13260. When 3 is set in parameter No. 13260, the registered tools are searched to find a tool whose
customize data 3 holds the smallest. If 0 is set in parameter No. 13260, a tool with the shortest life is
searched for.
The customize data by which a search operation is to be made ranges from 1 to 99,999,999. If a negative
value is set, its absolute value is assumed. If 0 is set, the tool is regarded as an invalid tool and is excluded
from the tools to be searched.
- Tool search order

Tools having a tool type number (T) specified by a program are searched sequentially from tool
management data number 1 while registered data contents are checked. The following shows how a
search operation is made within the NC:
- 1800 -
No
Is tool management data valid (is bit 0 (RGS) of tool information set to 1)?
Yes
Yes
Is tool being edited?
No
No
Does tool type number (T) match with specified number?
Yes
No
Is tool registered in cartridge (is cartridge number non-zero value)?
Yes
No
Is cartridge targeted for search (are bits 0 to 3 of parameter No. 13203 set to 0)?
Yes
Yes
Is tool registered at spindle position or standby position of another path?
No
Does tool life status indicate that tool management is not performed (0)?
No Yes
No
Is tool excluded from management target a search target (is bit 4 (SEN) of tool information 1)?
Yes
Search end
Yes
Does tool life status indicate that life expired (3)?
No
Yes
Does tool life status indicate tool breakage (4)?
No
Regard tool with smallest remaining life or customize data value as candidate.
Bit 6 (SWC) of parameter No. 13203 (0: Check remaining life, 1: Check customize data)
Check of next tool?
Search end
- System variables
The following tool management data (Table 12.3.1 (c)) of the tool being used as a spindle after a tool
change by M06 and the tool to be used next which is specified by a T code can be read through custom
macro variables:
Table 12.3.1 (c)
Being used Item
#8401 Data number
#8402 Tool type number (T)
#8403 Tool life counter
#8404 Maximum tool life value
#8405 Tool notice life value
#8406 Tool life status
- 1801 -
Being used Item

#8407 Customize data 0 (bit)
#8408 Tool information
For machining
#8409 Tool length compensation number (H)
center systems
#8410 Cutter compensation number (D)
#8411 Spindle speed (S)
#8412 Cutting feedrate (F)
#8413 Tool geometry compensation number (G) For lathe
#8414 Tool wear compensation number (W) systems
8431 Customize data 1
#8432 Customize data 2
When a cartridge number of a spindle position (11 to 14) or standby position (21 to 24) is specified in
#8400, information about the corresponding position can be read.
If the spindle position table or standby position table has an empty pot, <empty> is read from #8402 to
#8470.
Value 0 is read from #8401 (data number).
- 1802 -
Therefore, machining conditions registered in tool management data can be specified directly by coding,
for example, D#8410, H#8409, S#8411, and F#8412 with a tool change macro (such as M06). Similarly,
customize data can be referenced by a custom macro, and machining programs can be customized
according to the tool used.
- Specifying a tool compensation number

M
When parameter No. 13265 is 0, a compensation number registered as tool management data of a tool
attached at a spindle position can be selected by specifying H99 or D99.
(99 is treated as a special number, so 99 cannot be specified directly as a compensation number.)
When other than 0 is set in parameter No. 13265, the number set in the parameter can be specified instead
of 99. For example, if parameter No. 13265 is 3, specifying H3 specifies the tool length compensation
number registered for the tool at the spindle position.
T
When the tool management function is not used, a tool compensation number is specified also with a T
code; when the tool management function is used, the T code is used only to specify a tool type number,
so a tool compensation number must be specified with address D.
Except the specifications for addresses, the specifications for the number of permissible digits (parameter
No. 3032) and the number of digits consisting of a compensation number (parameter No. 5028),
separation of geometry compensation numbers and wear compensation numbers (bit 1 (LGN) of
parameter No. 5002), and so on are the same as for T.
If parameter No. 13265 is set to 0, when a compensation number registered for a tool attached at a spindle
position is specified, the specification format varies according to the number of digits as follows, which is
the same as for conventional T:
When the compensation number is 1 digit long: D9
When the compensation number is 2 digits long: D99
When the compensation number is 3 digits long: D999
Because 9, 99, or 999 is treated as a special number, it cannot be specified directly as a compensation
number.
Unless parameter No. 13265 is set to 0, the number set in the parameter can be specified instead of 9, 99,
or 999. When parameter No. 13265 is set to 3, specifying D3 specifies the tool geometry compensation
number and tool wear compensation number registered for a tool attached at the spindle position.
Spindle selection
When specifying compensation numbers of a tool attached to a spindle other than the first spindle, specify
the spindle number with address P within the same block that contains H/D. When specifying the first
spindle, you can omit P.
D99 P3; Specifying compensation numbers registered for the tool attached at the third spindle
D99 ; Specifying compensation numbers registered for the tool attached at the first spindle
- Read/write operations for tool management data and cartridge management

table
The tool management data and cartridge management table can be read from and written to by using the
CNC/PMC data window library (FOCAS2). Therefore, a specific tool management system including all
available tool data not registered in the CNC can be built easily by using the OPEN CNC.
Similarly, the tool management data and cartridge management table can also be read from and written to
using the PMC window.
- 1803 -
Tool management data of the tool being used as a spindle after a tool change operation performed by M06
and the tool being selected by specifying a T code can be read using a custom macro.
The user can modify tool management data by MDI from the tool management function screen of the
CNC. Addition, modification, and deletion of the above tool management data can be made from a part
program (G10). Such data can also be input to and output from external I/O equipment by using the ALL
I/O screen and tool management function screen.
- G10 format
Addition, modification, and deletion are performed for the tool management data and cartridge
management table from programs.
If a format error is found in the commands from G10 L75/L76/L77 to G11, or if a value beyond the valid
data range is specified, alarm PS5312 is issued. In such a case, correct the program. Within the range
from G10 to G11, no decimal point can be specified with any address. If a decimal point is specified,
alarm PS0007 results.
- Input to and output from external equipment

Input to and output from external equipment are enabled only on the ALL IO screen or tool management
screen if the I/O unit number is 4, 6, or 7.
Caution
- The total number of pots of all cartridges is normally 64. It can be expanded to 240 and 1000
optionally.
- When pots are assigned to cartridges, the first cartridge has a top priority.
Example 1
When the maximum number of pots is 64
Parameter setting Number of available pots
First cartridge 30 30
Second cartridge 20 20
Third cartridge 20 14
Fourth cartridge 20 0
- If the content of one of parameter Nos. 13220, and 13222 to 13251 is rewritten, tool management
data numbers of all cartridges are initialized to 0. This prevents conflict between tool management
data and the cartridge management table.
Example 2
If parameter No. 13220 is set to 30 when tool management data number 60 is set for pot number 1 of
cartridge 1, nonexistent tool data is regarded as being held in the pot.
- When data is edited, its tool management data number blinks, and it is excluded from the data to be
searched for the next tool. In this case, you cannot modify the data by using the PMC or FOCAS2.
This condition is maintained until the edit mode ends.
- When a name is set for customize data or the tool life status by using G10, a change to the set name
is not made until the display screen is changed to another NC screen.
Signal
Tool change signal TLCH<Fn064.0>,TLCH1 to 4<Fn328.0 to Fn328.3>
[Function] These signals post that the life of the last one of the tools having the same tool type
number has expired.
[Output cond.] These signals turn to “1“ in the following cases:
- 1804 -
- When the life of the last one of the tools having the same tool type number has
expired
- When the last one of the tools having the same tool type number is treated as a
broken tool by tool skip signal TLSKP
These signals turn to “0“ in the following cases:
- When the tool change reset signal is set to “1“.
NOTE
1 This signal is provided for each spindle position.
2 Fn064.0 is output signals for the first spindle.
Tool change reset signal TLRST<Gn048.7>,TLRST1 to 4<Gn328.0 to Gn328.3>

[Function] These signals set the tool change signal to “0“.
[Output cond.] When the signals are set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:
- Setting the tool change signal to “0“
NOTE
1 Tool change signal TLCH is not cleared by reset.
3 Gn048.7 is input signals for the first spindle.
Individual tool change signals TLCHI<Fn064.2>,TLCHI1 to 4<Fn328.4 to Fn328.7>

[Function] Reports the end of the life of the current tool.
- The end of the life of the current tool is detected.
- Individual tool-change reset is executed.
NOTE
Individual tool change reset signals

TLRSTI<Gn048.6>,TLRSI1 to 4<Gn328.4 to Gn328.7>
[Function] Sets the individual tool change signal TLCHI to “0“.
[Operation] When the signals are set to “1“, the control unit operates as follows:
- Sets the individual tool change signal to “0“.
NOTE
1 Tool change signal TLCH is not cleared by reset.
Tool skip signals TLSKP<Gn048.5>,TLSKP1 to 4<Gn329.0 to Gn329.3>

[Function] These signals can forcibly change a tool whose life has not yet expired. These signals are
used when a tool is broken.
- The tool life status of the tool currently used is set to 4 (tool breakage), and the tool
is excluded from the tool life management targets.
- 1805 -
- When there is no tool that has the same tool type number as the tool currently used
and has a remaining life, tool change signal TLCH <Fn064.0> is set to “1“.
- Upon completion of a tool skip operation, tool skip completion signal TLSKF
<Fn315.0> is set to “1“.
- The next T code command selects the next tool.
NOTE
Tool skip completion signals TLSKF<Fn315.0>,TLSKF1 to 4<Fn329.0 to Fn329.3>

[Function] These signals post that the tool skip signal has been accepted.
- When tool skip signal TLSKP is set to “1“, and tool skip processing is completed
When a tool not targeted for tool life management is being used, the tool skip
processing is not performed, but the tool skip completion signal is set to “1“.
- When the tool skip signal is set to “0“
Tool skip signal

TLSKP<Gn048.5>
Tool skip completion

signal TLSKF<Fn315.0>
NOTE
Tool life count override signals *TLV0 to *TLV9<Gn049.0 to Gn050.1>

[Function] Overrides the life count (time) if bit 2 (LFV) of parameter No. 6801 is specified.
Each of the ten binary code signals has a unique override value that becomes valid when
the signal is set to “0“. The life count is overridden by the sum of the valid override values.
The override value can be specified in steps of 0.1, within the range of 0 to 102.3.
∑ {2 ×Vi}
9
i
Override value = times
i =0
*TLV0 0.1 *TLV2 0.4 *TLV4 1.6 *TLV6 6.4 *TLV8 25.6
*TLV1 0.2 *TLV3 0.8 *TLV5 3.2 *TLV7 12.8 *TLV9 51.2
Example)
When *TLV7, *TLV6, and *TLV3 are set to “0“, the override value is calculated as
follows:
12.8+6.4+0.8=20.0
The life count is multiplied by 20.0.
[Operation] The actual cutting time is counted and multiplied by the override value obtained by the
signals. The calculated time is used as the basis for tool-life management.
- 1806 -
Tool search in-progress signal TLMSRH<Fn315.1>

[Function] This signal posts that the CNC is searching for a tool.
[Output cond.] This signal turns to “1“ in the following cases:
- When the CNC is searching for a tool having the tool type number specified by a T
code
- When the CNC is searching for a tool having the same tool type number as for the
tool currently used whose life has expired during life management
- When tool skip signal TLSKP <Gn048.5> is input while the CNC is searching for a
tool having the same tool type number
This signal turns to “0“ in the following cases:
- When a search operation is completed
NOTE
When tool search in-progress signal TLMSRH is 1, be careful not
to rewrite tool management data by using the PMC window and
FOCAS2.
Tool management data modification in-progress signal TLMG10<Fn315.2>

[Function] This signal posts that a modification to the tool management data, cartridge management
table, or string data is being made by the G10 L75/L76/L77 command.
- When a modification to the tool management data or cartridge management table is
being made by the G10 L75/L76/L77 command
- When the modification mode of the tool management data and cartridge
management table is ended by a G11 command, a reset, and so on
NOTE
When tool management data modification in-progress signal
TLMG10 is 1, be careful not to rewrite tool management data by
using the PMC window and FOCAS2.
Tool management data output in-progress signal TLMOT<Fn315.4>

[Function] This signal posts that the tool management data, cartridge management table, or string
data is being output.
- When outputting of the tool management data or cartridge management table has
started
This signal turns to 0 in the following cases:
- When outputting processing is completed
NOTE
When tool management data output in-progress signal TLMOT is 1,
be careful not to rewrite tool management data by using the PMC
window and FOCAS2.
Tool management data edit in-progress signal TLMEM<Fn315.7>

[Function] This signal posts that the tool management data edit mode is set.
- 1807 -

- When the tool management data edit mode starts on the tool management data
screen
- When the tool management data edit mode ends on the tool management data screen
Tool life expiration notice signals

TLCHB<Fn064.3>, TLCHB1 to 4<Fn329.4 to Fn329.7>
[Function] These signals post that the life of the tool being used has almost expired.
- When the life value of the currently used tool becomes the notice life value in the
tool management data or less
If bit 3 (ETE) of parameter No. 13200 is 0, these signals are output when the lives of
all the tools having the same tool type number as the currently used tool have
expired, and the currently used tool is the last tool. In this case, the same notice life
value must be set for all tools having the same type number. (Previous notice of
expiration for each type number)
If bit 3 (ETE) of parameter No. 13200 is 1, these signals are output by checking only
the life value of the currently used tool even when the life of a tool having the same
tool type number as the currently used tool is still left. (Previous notice of expiration
for each tool)
Actually, these signals are set to “1“ when completion signal FIN is posted in
response to an M06 command if the number of use times is specified; if time is
specified, these signals are set to 1 during machining.

- When the life value of the currently used tool becomes greater than the notice life
value in the tool management data.
Actually, these signals are set to “0“ when a change to a tool having a life value
greater than the notice life value has been made.
- If the notice life value is set to 0, these signals are not output.
NOTE
Fn064.3 is input signals for the first spindle.
Tool life counting disable signals TLNCT1 to 4<Gn329.4 to Gn329.7>

[Function] These signals specify not to perform tool life counting for each spindle.
- The CNC does not perform tool life management for the tool attached at the
corresponding spindle position (the first to fourth spindle).
Life expiration signal TMFNFD<Fn315.6>

[Function] This signal indicates whether a valid tool whose life still remains is left among the tools
having the type number specified by a T code.
When a T code is specified, the tools having the type number specified by the T
code include no valid tool whose life still remains.
- 1808 -
NOTE
In this case, it is necessary for the PMC to stop the operation by
issuing an external alarm and request a tool change. If the selected
tool is used continuously with no alarm issued, the life of the tool is
counted up. The tool (cartridge and pot) selected by the CNC at
this time is a tool having the largest tool management data number
among the tools having a specified tool type number.

- When a T code is specified, the tools having the type number specified by the T
code include a valid tool whose life still remains.
NOTE
This signal is valid when bit 6 (NAM) of parameter No. 13200 is set
to 1.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn048 TLRST TLRSTI TLSKP
Gn049 *TLV7 *TLV6 *TLV5 *TLV4 *TLV3 *TLV2 *TLV1 *TLV0
Gn050 *TLV9 *TLV8
Gn328 TLRSI4 TLRSI3 TLRSI2 TLRSI1 TLRST4 TLRST3 TLRST2 TLRST1
Gn329 TLNCT4 TLNCT3 TLNCT2 TLNCT1 TLSKP4 TLSKP3 TLSKP2 TLSKP1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00
Fn027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08
Fn028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16
Fn029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24
Fn064 TLCHB TLCHI TLNW TLCH
Fn315 TLMEM TMFNFD TLMOT TLMG10 TLMSRH TLSKF
Fn328 TLCHI4 TLCHI3 TLCHI2 TLCHI1 TLCH4 TLCH3 TLCH2 TLCH1
Fn329 TLCHB4 TLCHB3 TLCHB2 TLCHB1 TLSKF4 TLSKF3 TLSKF2 TLSKF1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3108 PCT

#2 PCT For modal T display on the program check screen:

0: A specified T value is displayed.
1: HD.T and NX.T are displayed.
Values displayed follow bit 1 of parameter No. 13200.
- 1809 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6801 LVF
NOTE
The use of this parameter varies depending on whether the tool
management function or tool life management function is used.

#2 LVF When the life of a tool is counted in terms of time with the tool management function, the
tool life count override signals *TLV0 to *TLV9 <Gn049.0 to Gn050.1> are:
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
6811 Tool life count restart M code

[Valid data range] 0 to 127 (not including 01, 02, 30, 98, and 99)
When 0 is set, this parameter is ignored.
When an M code for tool life count restart is specified, the counting of the life of the tool
attached at the spindle position is started.
When the type for counting the number of use times is selected, the target of life counting
is switched to the tool attached at the spindle position, and the life count is incremented
by 1.
When the type for counting time is selected, the target of life counting is switched to the
tool attached at the spindle position, with no other operations performed.
If the tool attached at the spindle position is not a tool under tool life management, no
NOTE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13200 NFD NAM T0O TP2 ETE TRT THN TCF

#0 TCF When a T code is specified with the tool management function:

0: A cartridge number and pot number found by the NC are output.
1: The specified T code is output without modification.
#1 THN When NX.T and HD.T are displayed with the tool management function:
0: The tool type numbers at the first spindle position and the first standby position are
displayed.
1: The values specified from the PMC window are displayed.
#2 TRT As the remaining lifetime value for outputting the tool life arrival notice signal:
0: The remaining lifetime of the last tool is used.
1: The sum of the remaining lifetimes of the tools with the same type number is used.
- 1810 -
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (ETE) of parameter No. 13200 is
set to 0 (arrival notice for each type number).
#3 ETE The tool life arrival notice signal is output:

0: For each tool type.
1: For each tool.
#4 TP2 The output format of cartridge management data is:

0: New registration format (G10L76P1 format).
1: Modification format (G10L76P2 format).
#5 T0O When T0 is specified:

0: A tool search is made assuming that the tool type number is 0.
1: The cartridge number and pot number are assumed to be 0.
#6 NAM When a T code is specified, but a valid tool with a remaining lifetime cannot be found:
0: The alarm PS5317, "LIVES OF ALL TOOLS EXPIRED" is issued.
1: The alarm is not issued. Instead, the tool with the maximum tool management
number is selected from the tools of the specified tool type, and TMFNFD<F315.6>
is set to “1“.
#7 NFD When a T code is specified, but a valid tool with a remaining lifetime cannot be found in
the cartridge:
0: The spindle position and standby position are also searched.
1: The spindle position and standby position are not searched.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13201 TDN

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#1 TDN On the tool management function screen, the character string for indicating the tool life
status can contain:
0: Up to 6 characters.
1: Up to 12 characters.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13202 DOM DOT DO2 DOY DCR

[Data type] Bit
#1 DCR On the tool management function screen, tool nose radius compensation data is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
- 1811 -
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the machine control type is the lathe
system.
#2 DOY On the tool management function screen, Y-axis offset data is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
NOTE
system.
#4 DO2 On the tool management function screen, the second geometry tool offset data is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
NOTE
system.
#6 DOT On the tool management function screen, the tool offset data (X, Z) of the T series is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
NOTE
system.
#7 DOM On the tool management function screen, the tool offset data of the M series is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the machine control type is the
machining center system.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13203 TCN SWC NM4 NM3 NM2 NM1

#0 NM1 The first cartridge is:

0: Searched.
1: Not searched.
#1 NM2 The second cartridge is:

0: Searched.
1: Not searched.
- 1812 -
#2 NM3 The third cartridge is:
0: Searched.
1: Not searched.
#3 NM4 The fourth cartridge is:

0: Searched.
1: Not searched.
#6 SWC The tools with the same tool type number are searched for:
0: Tool with the shortest lifetime.
1: Tool with the small customization data number.
In this case, a customization data number is to be set in parameter No. 13260.
#7 TCN Tool life count operation is triggered by:

0: M06/restart M code. (A T code alone does not start counting.)
1: T code. (Count operation is not started by M06.)
13220 Number of valid tools in tool management data
NOTE

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 64 (Extended to 240 or 1000 by the addition of an option)
This parameter sets the number of valid tools in tool management data.
13221 M code for tool life count restart

When 0 is set in this parameter, this parameter is ignored.
When an M code for tool life count restart is specified, the counting of the life of the tool
attached at the spindle position is started. When the type for counting the number of use
times is selected, the target of life counting is switched to the tool attached at the spindle
position, and the life count is incremented by 1.
When the type for counting time is selected, the target of life counting is switched to the
tool attached at the spindle position but no other operations are performed. If the tool
attached at the spindle position is not a tool under tool life management, no operation is
performed.
The M code set in parameter No. 6811 waits for FIN. However, the M code set in this
parameter does not wait for FIN.
The M code set in parameter No. 13221 must not be specified in a block where another
auxiliary function is specified.
The M code set in parameter No. 13221 does not wait for FIN. So, do not use the M code
for other purposes.
NOTE
The use of this parameter varies depending on whether it is used
by the tool management function or tool life management function.
- 1813 -
13222 Number of data items in the first cartridge
NOTE

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 64 (Extended to 240 or 1000 by the addition of an option)
This parameter sets the number of data items used with the first cartridge.
13223 Start pot number of the first cartridge
NOTE

[Data type] Word
This parameter sets the start pot number to be used with the first cartridge. Pot numbers
starting with the value set in this parameter and sequentially incremented by 1 are
assigned to all data items.
13227 Number of data items in the second cartridge
NOTE

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 64(Extended to 240 or 1000 by the addition of an option)
This parameter sets the number of data items used with the second cartridge.
13228 Start pot number of the second cartridge
NOTE

[Data type] Word
This parameter sets the start pot number to be used with the second cartridge. Pot
numbers starting with the value set in this parameter and sequentially incremented by 1
are assigned to all data items.
- 1814 -
13232 Number of data items in the third cartridge
NOTE

[Data type] Word
This parameter sets the number of data items used with the third cartridge.
13233 Start pot number of the third cartridge
NOTE

[Data type] Word
This parameter sets the start pot number to be used with the third cartridge. Pot numbers
13237 Number of data items in the fourth cartridge
NOTE

[Data type] Word
This parameter sets the number of data items used with the fourth cartridge.
13238 Start pot number of the fourth cartridge
NOTE

[Data type] Word
This parameter sets the start pot number to be used with the fourth cartridge. Pot numbers
- 1815 -
13250 Number of valid spindles
NOTE

This parameter sets the number of spindle positions usable with the tool management
function.
13251 Number of valid standby positions
NOTE

This parameter sets the number of standby positions usable with the tool management
function.
13252 M code for specifying a particular tool

This parameter sets not a tool type number but an M code for directly specifying the T
code of a particular tool.
13260 Customization data number to be searched for

When bit 6 (SWC) of parameter No. 13203 is set to 1, this parameter sets a customization
data number to be searched for.
The valid data range is 1 to 4 when the option for customization data extension is not
selected. When the option for customization data extension (5 to 20) is selected, the valid
data range is 1 to 20. When the option for customization data extension (5 to 40) is
selected, the valid data range is 1 to 40.
When bit 6 (SWC) of parameter No. 13203 is set to 0, or a value not within the valid data
range is set, the search function based on customization data is disabled, and the tool with
the shortest lifetime is searched for.
13265 Number for selecting a spindle position offset number

This parameters sets an H/D code for selecting an offset number registered in the data of
the tool attached at the spindle position.
- 1816 -
When 0 is set, an ordinary used code such as H99/D99 is used. When a value other than 0
is set, H99/D99 no longer has a particular meaning. So, when H99/D99 is specified in this
case, the specification of offset number 99 is assumed.
With the T series, address D only is used to specify a tool number and offset number, so
that a restriction is imposed on the number of digits. So, the valid data range of this
parameter varies according the number of digits of an offset number.
When the number of digits of an offset number is 1: to 9
When parameter No.5028 is set, the data range is as follows regardless of the number of
digits of an offset number.
When No.5028 is set to 1: to 9
NOTE
Alarm and message

PS0154 NOT USING TOOL IN LIFE H99 or D99 is specified when no tool management data number is
GROUP assigned to the spindle position. Correct the program.
PS0374 ILLEGAL REGISTRATION G10L75 or G10L76 data was registered during the following data
OF TOOL MANAGER(G10) registration:
- From the PMC window.
- From the FOCAS2.
- By G10L75 or G10L76 in another system.
Command G10L75 or G10L76 again after the above operation is
completed.
PS5312 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN One of formats in G10L75, G10L76, or G10L77 to G11 commands is in
G10 L75/76/77 error, or the command value is out of data range. Modify the program.
PS5316 TOOL TYPE NUMBER NOT A tool with the specified tool-type number could not be found.
FOUND Modify the program or register the tool.
PS5317 ALL TOOL LIFE IS OVER The lives of all tools with the specified tool-type number have expired.
Replace the tool.
Limitation
When this function is enabled, in lathe systems an offset number is specified with address D, so D cannot
be used for other purposes. As arguments of macro calls in custom macros, D can be specified as done
before.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Tool management function
- 1817 -
12.3.2 Tool Management Extension Function

The following functions have been added to the tool management function:
1. Customization of tool management data display
2. Setting of spindle position/standby position display
3. Input of customize data with the decimal point
4. Protection of various tool information items with the KEY signal
5. Selection of a tool life count period
6. Each tool data screen
7. Total life time display for tools of the same type
They will be explained in detail below.
NOTE
To use this function, the both options for "Tool management function" and this
function are required.
12.3.2.1 Customization of tool management data display

With the tool management data screen display customization function, the display positions of screen
elements (type number, tool information, life counter, and so forth) on the tool management screen can be
changed and whether to display or hide such screen elements can be chosen using the G10 format. This
function enables a customized tool management screen to be configured.
12.3.2.2 Setting of spindle position/standby position display

In MG on the tool management data screen, a spindle position or standby position is displayed as a
number such as 11, 12, and 13. With the spindle position/standby position display setting function, three
arbitrary characters can be displayed using the G10 format.
12.3.2.3 Input of customize data with the decimal point

With the function for input of customize data with the decimal point, the number of decimal places can be
set using the G10 format for each customize data item (customize data 1, ..., 40) to enable data input with
the decimal point.
12.3.2.4 Protection of various tool information items with the KEY

signal
When tool management data is in the edit state, various information items can be modified. By setting bit
0 of parameter No. 13204 to 1, tool management data can be protected with the KEY signal so that
various information items are not registered, modified, and deleted.
12.3.2.5 Selection of a tool life count period

A tool life count period can be chosen between 1 sec and 8 msec on a tool-by-tool basis.
Bit 5 of tool information is used to make a life count period selection.
Item Description
Data length 1 byte (flag data)
#5 REV 0 : A life count period of 1 sec is used. (S)
1 : A life count period of 8 msec is used. (M)
Range of count is as follows.
1sec : 0 to 3,599,999 seconds (999 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds)
- 1818 -
8msec: 0 to 3,599,992 ms (59 minutes 59 seconds 992 milliseconds)
NOTE
This function is valid when the tool information TIM (#1) is set to 1.
12.3.2.6 Each tool data screen

All data for a specified tool can be extracted and displayed.
12.3.2.7 Total life time display for tools of the same type
The remaining lives of tools with the same type numbers are totaled, and totals are displayed in order by
tool type number or by remaining life. Also, tools with the same tool type numbers are displayed in a list.
- Total life data display

Total life data screen display changes in screen configuration depending on whether the tool life arrival
notice signal is to be output for each tool type or for each tool.
The tool life arrival notice signal changes in output method depending on the settings of bit 3 (ETE) of
parameter No. 13200 and bit 2 (TRT) of parameter No. 13200.
Under the following conditions, the tool life arrival notice signal is output for the same tool type number,
and the total notice life and the state are added to the display items on the total life data screen.
- Details of data
Bit 3 (ETE) of parameter No. 13200 Bit 2 (TRT) of parameter No. 13200 Description of display
Total notice life and state
0 1
items are displayed.
The details of the data displayed on the total life data screen are as follows:
- Sort No.
Item Description
Data length 2byte
Valid data range 1 to maximum number of tools (64, 240, or 1,000)
The number representing a tool of a different type is displayed. The maximum number of tools
differs with the options used.

Item Description
Data length 4byte
The tool type number (T code) set on the tool management data screen is displayed.
- Total remaining life

Item Description
Data length 4byte
Time specifications: Seconds/milliseconds
Valid data range When the number of use times is specified:
0 to2,147,483,647 times
When time is specified:
0 to 359,999,999 s (99999 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds)
0 to 359,999,999 milliseconds (99 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds 999 milliseconds)
- 1819 -
The remaining lives of tools with the same tool type number, as determined by subtracting the life
counter value from the maximum life, are totaled for each number of times or for each time and
displayed.
- Total life counter

Item Description
Data length 4byte
Unit of data When the number of use times is specified: Time
When time is specified: Seconds/milliseconds
0 to 2,147,483,647 times
The life counter values of the same-type tools set on the tool management data screen (for each tool
type number) are totaled for each number of times or for each time and displayed.
- Total maximum life

Item Description
Data length 4byte
Unit of data When the number of use times is specified: Time
0 to 2,147,483,647 time
The maximum lives of the same-type tools set on the tool management data screen (for each tool
type number) are totaled for each number of times or for each time and displayed.
- Number (number of tools)

Item Description
Data length 2byte
The numbers of tools of the same types are totaled and displayed. The maximum number of tools
change depending on the options used.
- Total notice life

Item Description
Data length 4byte
0 to 2,147,483,647 times
The notice lives of same-type tools set on the tool management data screen (for each tool type
number) are totaled for each number of times or for each time and displayed.
- Status
Item Description
Data length 1byte
Data details 0: --
1: Notice
- 1820 -
The status indicating whether the tool life arrival signal has been output is displayed.
- Sort function
On the total life data screen, sorting in either ascending or descending order is possible with the
following data:
- Tool type number
- Total remaining life
- Data to be totaled
The data to be totaled on the total life data screen is that for those tools that satisfy the
following conditions.
Tool management data with same tool type number
No (disabled)
Is tool management data enabled?
(Is RGS, bit 0 of tool information, set?)
Yes (enabled)
Yes (not performed)

Is the tool life status "Life management is not
performed (0)"?
No (performed)
Yes (breakage)
Is the tool life status "tool breakage (4)"?
No (not breakage)
Data to be totaled (addition)
Check the next data
End
NOTE
1 If data is with the same tool type number and both time and number of times are
specified as life count types, and the data is to be totaled, the data is totaled for
both each time and each number of times and displayed in the time and number
of times fields.
2 In the number column, the number of all tools with the same tool type number is
displayed regardless of the tool life status.
- 1821 -
NOTE
3 The total life counter, total remaining live, total maximum life, and total notice life
are displayed in time display in sec units if data in sec and in ms exist in the
same tool. Any fractional part of ms data is truncated.
4 If the total remaining life is negative, zero is displayed.
5 If the total life counter, total remaining live, total maximum life, or total notice life
is larger than the display maximum, an asterisk "*" is displayed.
Number of times:**********
Time:*****H**M**S (in sec. units)/ **H**M**S*** (in msec. units)
6 If one of the following operation is performed, total life data is updated:
(a) Pressing of the soft key [UPDATE] or [SWITCH]
(b) Pressing of the soft key [T-ASCE-SORT], [T-DESC-SORT], [R-ASCE-SORT],
or [R-DESC-SORT]
(c) Switching to another screen and return to the total life data screen
- Detailed life data display

The detailed life data screen displays the tool information specific to the same-type tools displayed on the
total life data screen.
- Data details
The details of the data displayed on the detailed life data screen are as follows:

Item Description
Data length 4byte
The tool type number (T code) set on the tool management data screen is displayed.
- Order
Item Description
Data length 2byte
Those tools whose tool life status is "enabled" are displayed in either of the following orders:
- If bit 6 (SWC) of parameter No. 13203 is 0, the order starting with the one with the shortest
remaining life.
- If bit 6 (SWC) of parameter No. 13203 is 1, the order starting with the smallest customize data
number set in parameter No. 13260.
For those tools whose tool life status is not "Tool not yet used (1)" or "Life remains (2)", the order
item is displayed as an "-" (hyphen), and those tools are displayed in order by tool management data
number, after ordered tools.
The maximum for the valid data range differs depending on the option used.
- 1822 -
- Remaining tool life value
Item Description
Data length 4byte
0 to 99,999,999 times
0 to 3,599,999 milliseconds (59 minutes 59 seconds 999 milliseconds)
- The remaining life value is equal to [Maximum tool life value - Tool life counter value]. If the
maximum tool life value is less than the tool life counter (resulting in a negative value), 0 is
displayed.
- Tool life counter

Item Description
Data length 4byte
0 to 99,999,999 times
- Maximum tool life value

Item Description
Data length 4byte
0 to 99,999,999 times
- Notice life value

Item Description
Data length 4byte
0 to 99,999,999 times
- Tool life status

Item Description
Data length 1byte
Data details 0: Life management is not performed.
1: Tool not yet used
2: Life remains.
3: Life expired.
4: Tool breakage (skip)
- 1823 -
NOTE
1 If, in a multi-path system, customize data number is specified for the order
specification (bit 6 (SWC) of parameter No. 13203 =1), the order indicated is
based on the customize data number specified in parameter No. 13260 of the
path currently displayed.
2 Detailed life data is updated if either of the following operation is performed:
(a) Pressing of the soft key [UPDATE]
(b) Switching to another screen and return to the total life data details screen
Signal
Tool management data protection signals TKEY0toTKEY5<G330.0 to 5>
[Function] These signals permit those operations from the MDI panel that will change the memory
description. Six signals are available, as described below, which protect different tool
information.
If TDL, bit 0 of parameter No. 13204, is 0
- The tool management information protection signals are invalid.
If TDL is 1
- TKEY0 : Permits the input of tool type numbers.
- TKEY1 : Permits the input of tool information. (If tool management function
oversize tool support is used, permits the input of tool shape numbers.)
- TKEY2 : Permits the input of the tool life counter value, maximum tool life value,
notice life value, tool life status.
- TKEY3 : Permits the input of tool compensation-related information (such as tool
length compensation number and cutter compensation number).
- TKEY4 : Permits the input of the spindle speed (S)/feedrate (F).
- TKEY5 : Permits the input of customize data-related data (customize data items
0, ..., 40).
[Operation] If a signal is 0, the corresponding operation is prohibited.
If a signal is 1, the corresponding operation is permitted.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G330 TKEY5 TKEY4 TKEY3 TKEY2 TKEY1 TKEY0
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13200 ETE TRT

#2 TRT As the remaining lifetime value for outputting the tool life arrival notice signal:
0: The remaining lifetime of the last tool is used.
1: The sum of the remaining lifetimes of the tools with the same type number is used.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (ETE) of parameter No. 13200 is
set to 0 (arrival notice for each type number).
- 1824 -
#3 ETE The tool life arrival notice signal is output:
0: For each tool type.
1: For each tool.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13201 TDB TDC

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#0 TDC The function of customizing the tool management data screen of the tool management
function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#2 TDB The tool management function displays tool information in the:

0: Conventional mode.
1: 1/0 mode.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13204 TDL

[Data type] Bit
#0 TDL The protection function for tool management data using a key is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Alarm and message

PS5312 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In commands from G10 L75/L76/L77 to G11, there is a format error, or
G10 L75/76/77 a value beyond the specifiable range is specified. Correct the program.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Tool Management Extension Function
- 1825 -
12.3.3 Tool Management Function Oversize Tools Support

Overview
Tool management function oversize tools support is added to the tool management function.
The figure of an oversize tool can be defined freely, and the figure of each oversize tool is registered.
When an oversize tool is stored in a cartridge, interference with tools stored in other pots is considered.
This function is usable with cartridges of chain type and matrix type.
NOTE
This function is included in the option "Tool management extension function B".
To use this function, the both options for "Tool management function" and "Tool
management extension function B" are required.
Explanation
Usually, a tool, when stored in a cartridge, occupies one pot only. An oversize tool occupies pots other
than the position where the tool is stored. This point is taken into consideration for tool management.
When the tool information #2 of the tool management data is set to 1, the tool is set as an oversize tool.
- Tool information
Item Description
Data length 1byte (Flag data)
#2 BDT 0: Normal tool (N)
1: Oversize tool (B)
Oversize tools each having a different figure can be freely defined to form oversize tool patterns through
MDI input on the tool figure setting screen, G10 data input, or inputting a file. Up to 20 patterns can be
registered. An identification number (hereinafter referred to as a tool figure number) is assigned to each
patterned figure, and a tool figure number suitable for each tool figure is set in the tool management data.
- Tool geometry number (GNO)
Item Description
Data length 2byte
When a tool is registered in the cartridge management table, the figure of the tool is determined from the
tool figure number of the tool so that the tool can be registered only if the tool does not interfere with
other tools.
When using this function, set the type of cartridge with parameters. For the chain type, set a pot start
number and the number of pots with the conventional parameters. When using the matrix type, use the
same parameter as for the chain type to specify a pot start number, and use the parameters for specifying
the number of pots in the vertical direction (hereinafter referred to as the number of rows) and the
parameter for specifying the number of pots in the horizontal direction (hereinafter referred to as the
number of columns) to specify the number of pots. As shown in the figure below, processing is performed,
assuming that pot numbers are assigned from the upper-left corner to the lower-right corner of the
cartridge as viewed when you face the front of the cartridge.
No tool can be stored in a way that causes interference with the outer frame of the cartridge.
- 1826 -
When pattern start number is 21
Pot start number 21 2２ 2３ 2４ 2５
26 2７ 28 2９ 30
31 32 33 34 35
36 37 38 39 40
41 42 43 44 45 Pot end number
Cartridge Tool management table

１ 2 3 4 5
Tool Tool Tool
１ Normal tool manage- information figure No.
ment No.
1 0000UBCR 1
2 2 0000UNCR 0
3 0000UBCR 4
Oversize tool
3 4 0000UNCR 0
5 0000UNCR 0
6 0000UNCR 0
4
Free pot
7 0000UNCR 0
8 0000UNCR 0
5
Pot No. Tool management Pot No. Tool management Pot No. Tool management
(Row-Column) No. (Row-Column) No. (Row-Column) No.
1(01-01) * 11(03-01) * 21(05-01) 8
2(01-02) * 12(03-02) * 22(05-02) 0
3(01-03) * 13(03-03) * 23(05-03) 0
4(01-04) 0 14(03-04) 0 24(05-04) 4
5(01-05) 5 15(03-05) 6 25(05-05) 0
6(02-01) * 16(04-01) 2
7(02-02) 1 17(04-02) 0
8(02-03) * 18(04-03) 7
9(02-04) 0 19(04-04) *
10(02-05) 0 20(04-05) 3
Oversize tool Pots occupied by oversize tool
- 1827 -
Tool figure setting screen
Tool figure No. Left direction Right direction Upper direction Lower direction Figure
1 2 2 2 2 A
2 1 1 1 1 A
3 2 3 3 1 A
4 2 0 0 0 A
5 2 2 2 2 A
Omitted
19 1 3 2 2 A
20 2 2 4 4 A
NOTE
1 Even if a tool figure number is set in the tool management data, the tool is
regarded as a normal tool when the tool information #2 is set to 0.
2 If all data items corresponding to a tool figure number are set to 0 (0 for the
upper, lower, left, and right directions), the tool is regarded as a normal tool even
when the tool information #2 is set to 1.
- Tool figure setting screen

The area occupied by a tool depends on whether the tool is stored in a cartridge of matrix type or a
cartridge of chain type. A tool stored in a cartridge of matrix type occupies pots in the upper, lower, left,
and right directions. A tool stored in a cartridge of chain type occupies pots only in the left and right
directions.
- Cartridge of matrix type

The area occupied by a tool stored in a cartridge of matrix type is described below.
Set left, right, upper, and lower pots occupied relative to a reference pot in steps of 0.5 pot. The maximum
specifiable value is 4 (for 2 pots). (See Fig. 12.3.3 (a).)
As shown in Fig. 12.3.3 (b), the pots located in the slant directions relative to a reference pot are
automatically assumed to be occupied areas so that the occupied areas form a rectangle. However, if the
same value, 3 or a greater value, is set for the left, right, upper, and lower directions, and figure B is
selected, the four corners of the square can be excluded from the occupied areas as shown in Fig. 12.3.3
(c). When a tool has a circular figure, the tool can be stored efficiently in pots if figure B is selected.
Table 12.3.3 (a) Tool figure data

Tool pattern No. Left direction Right direction Upper direction Lower direction Figure
1 0 3 2 1 A
2 2 2 1 3 A
Omitted
19 1 1 1 1 A
20 2 3 2 2 A
- 1828 -
Reference pot (where tool whose

figure to be defined is stored)
Upper direction
Left direction Right direction
Set left, right, upper, and lower pots

to be occupied in steps of 0.5 pot
relative to reference pot. (Pots
(colored) in slant directions cannot be
Lower direction set.)
Fig. 12.3.3 (a) Tool figure data setting
3
Pots in slant directions are
automatically set as occupied
pots to form rectangular
occupied area.
Fig. 12.3.3 (b) For tool figure pattern number 1 in Table 12.3.3 (a)
- 1829 -
When 3 is set for left/right/upper/lower directions When 4 is set for left/right/upper/lower directions
Occupied area Nonoccupied area
Fig. 12.3.3 (c) Occupied area for figure B
- Cartridge of chain type

The area occupied by a tool stored in a cartridge of chain type is described below.
As with the matrix type, input data on the tool figure setting screen. In this case, set pots to be occupied
only in the left and right directions. The specification of pots in the upper and lower directions and a
figure are ignored.
Left direction Right direction
Reference pot
N-2 N-1 N: Pot No. N+1 N+2
Occupied area
Fig. 12.3.3 (d) For tool figure data 19
NOTE
1 Tool figure data cannot be modified if the tool for which the tool figure number is
set is registered in the cartridge.
2 When changing the tool figure number of a tool registered in the cartridge,
ensure that the figure after the change does not interfere with other tools. If
interference with other tools occurs, a warning is issued to disable an attempt to
change the tool figure number.
- 1830 -
- System variables
The following tool management data of the tool being used as a spindle after a tool change by M06 and
the tool to be used next which is specified by a T code can be read through custom macro variables. The
custom macro variable is a read-only variable.
Number Item
#8415 Tool figure number (A)
- Tool management extension function

- Customization of tool management data display
In customization of tool management data display with the tool management extension function, tool
figure number display can be customized.
R Item Display width
12 Tool figure number (A) 3
- Protection of diverse tool information with KEY signals

With the tool management data protection signal, TKEY1 <G330.1>, the input of tool shape
numbers using MDI keys is prohibited.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13240 MT4 MT3 MT2 MT1

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#0 MT1 The first cartridge is of the:

0: Chain type.
1: Matrix type.
When this parameter is set to 1, parameter No. 13222 is invalid.
#1 MT2 The second cartridge is of the:

0: Chain type.
1: Matrix type.
#2 MT3 The third cartridge is of the:

0: Chain type.
1: Matrix type.
#3 MT4 The fourth cartridge is of the:

0: Chain type.
1: Matrix type.
- 1831 -
13241 Number of rows of the first cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)
NOTE

[Data type] Word
When the first cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 0 (MT1) of parameter No. 13240 is set
to 1), set the number of rows in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy the
following condition, however: The sum total of the value obtained by (setting of
parameter No. 13241) × (setting of parameter No. 13242) and the number of pots of other
cartridges should not exceed 64 (1000 at maximum). If this condition is not satisfied or
this parameter is set to 0, the first cartridge is invalid.
13242 Number of columns of the first cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)
NOTE

[Data type] Word
When the first cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 0 (MT1) of parameter No. 13240 is set
to 1), set the number of columns in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy the
this parameter is set to 0, the first cartridge is invalid.
13243 Number of rows of the second cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)
NOTE

[Data type] Word
When the second cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 1 (MT2) of parameter No. 13240 is
set to 1), set the number of rows in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy the
this parameter is set to 0, the second cartridge is invalid.
- 1832 -
13244 Number of columns of the second cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)
NOTE

[Data type] Word
When the second cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 1 (MT2) of parameter No. 13240 is
set to 1), set the number of columns in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy
the following condition, however: The sum total of the value obtained by (setting of
this parameter is set to 0, the second cartridge is invalid.
13245 Number of rows of the third cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)
NOTE

[Data type] Word
When the third cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 2 (MT3) of parameter No. 13240 is set
this parameter is set to 0, the third cartridge is invalid.
13246 Number of columns of the third cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)
NOTE

[Data type] Word
When the third cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 2 (MT3) of parameter No. 13240 is set
this parameter is set to 0, the third cartridge is invalid.
- 1833 -
13247 Number of rows of the fourth cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)
NOTE

[Data type] Word
When the fourth cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 3 (MT4) of parameter No. 13240 is set
this parameter is set to 0, the fourth cartridge is invalid.
13248 Number of columns of the fourth cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)
NOTE

[Data type] Word
When the fourth cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 3 (MT4) of parameter No. 13240 is set
this parameter is set to 0, the fourth cartridge is invalid.
Alarm and message

PS5312 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In commands from G10 L75/L76/L77 to G11, there is a format error, or a
G10 L75/76/77 value beyond the specifiable range is specified. Correct the program.
PS5360 TOOL INTERFERENCE This alarm is issued when interference with another tool is caused by a data
CHECK ERROR modification based on G10 data input or file inputting or when an attempt is
made to modify the tool figure data of a tool registered in the cartridge.
PS5361 ILLEGAL MAGAZINE Tools stored in the cartridge are interfering with each other. Reregister the
DATA tools in the cartridge, or modify the tool management data or tool figure
data. If this alarm is issued, no tool interference check is made when tools
are registered in the cartridge management table. Moreover, empty pot
search operation does not operate normally. If this alarm is issued, the
power must be turned off before operation is continued.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Tool management function oversize tools support
- 1834 -
12.4 TOOL COMPENSATION
12.4.1 Cutter Compensation (M Series) and Tool Nose Radius

Compensation (T Series)
Overview
M
- Cutter compensation (M Series)
Use of cutter compensation can offset a programmed tool path by the tool radius set in the CNC when
machining is performed.
When the radius of the tool to be used for machining is measured and set as the offset value in the CNC,
the tool moves along the offset path to cut a programmed profile. Therefore, even when the tool diameter
changes, you must only change the offset value and need not modify the program.
Programmed
path Tool center path
Fig.12.4.1 (a)
To obtain the actual offset tool path, the CNC internally calculates intersections of a straight line and a
straight line, an arc and an arc, and a straight line and an arc automatically. The programmer only has to
program a machining profile, therefore, programming can be done very easily.
T
- Tool nose radius compensation (T series)
Use of tool-nose radius compensation can offset a programmed tool path by the tool nose radius set in the
CNC when machining is performed. When a machining profile is programmed using this function, and
the radius of the tool nose to be used for actual machining is measured and set as the offset value in the
CNC, the tool moves along the offset path to cut the programmed profile. Therefore, even when the tool
nose radius changes, you must only change the offset value and need not modify the program.
- 1835 -
Workpiece
Tool center path

Tool nose
Machining profile
Fig.12.4.1 (b)
To obtain the actual offset tool path, the CNC internally calculates intersections of a straight line and a
straight line, an arc and an arc, and a straight line and an arc automatically. The programmer only has to
program a machining profile, therefore the programming can be done very easily.
NOTE
To enable tool-nose radius compensation (T series), set bit 7 (NCR) of
parameter No. 8136 to 0.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5000 SBK

#0 SBK With a block created internally for tool radius - tool nose radius compensation:
0: A single block stop is not performed.
1: A single block stop is performed.
This parameter is used to check a program including cutter compensation/tool nose radius
compensation.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5001
EVR

#4 EVR When a tool compensation value is changed in tool radius - tool nose radius
compensation mode:
0: Enables the change, starting from that block where the next D or H code is specified.
1: Enables the change, starting from that block where buffering is next performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
WNP LGN
5002
- 1836 -

#7 WNP Imaginary tool tip number used for tool nose radius compensation is the number specified
by:
0: Geometry offset number
1: Wear offset number
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5003 SUV SUP

#0 SUP
#1 SUV These bits are used to specify the type of startup/cancellation of tool radius - tool nose
radius compensation.
SUV SUP Type Operation
0 0 Type A compensation vector perpendicular to the block next to the startup block or
A the block preceding the cancellation block is output.
Tool nose radius center path /
G41 Tool center path
N2 Programmed path
N1
0 1 Type A compensation vector perpendicular to the startup block or cancellation block

B and an intersection vector are output.
Intersection point
Tool nose radius center path /
Tool center path
G41 N2 Programmed path
N1
1 0 Type When the startup block or cancellation block specifies no movement operation,
1 C the tool is shifted by the cutter compensation amount in a direction
perpendicular to the block next to the startup or the block before cancellation
block.
Intersection point Tool nose radius center path /
Tool center path
Programmed path
N3
Shift
G41 N2
When the block specifies movement operation, the type is set according to the
SUP setting; if SUP is 0, type A is set, and if SUP is 1, type B is set.
- 1837 -
NOTE
When SUV,SUP = 0,1 (type B), an operation equivalent to that of
FS16i-T is performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5004
ODI

#2 ODI The setting of a tool radius - tool nose radius compensation value is corrected as:
0: Radius value
1: Diameter value
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5008 MCR CNV CNC

#1 CNC
#3 CNV These bits are used to select an interference check method in the tool radius - tool nose
radius compensation mode.
CNV CNC Operation
0 0 Interference check is enabled. The direction and the angle of an arc are checked.
0 1 Interference check is enabled. Only the angle of an arc is checked.
1 - Interference check is disabled.
For the operation taken when the interference check shows the occurrence of an reference
(overcutting) , see the description of bit 5 (CAV) of parameter No. 19607.
NOTE
Checking of only the direction cannot be set.
#4 MCR If G41/G42 (tool radius - tool nose radius compensation) is specified in the MDI mode,
an alarm is:
0: Not raised.
1: Raised. (Alarm (PS5257) “G41/G42 NOT ALLOWED IN MDI MODE”)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5009
TIP

NOTE
#5 TIP In tool radius - tool nose radius compensation, the virtual tool tip direction is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
- 1838 -
5010 Limit for ignoring the small movement resulting from tool radius - tool nose radius compensation

When the tool moves around a corner in cutter compensation or tool nose radius
compensation mode, the limit for ignoring the small travel amount resulting from
compensation is set. This limit eliminates the interruption of buffering caused by the
small travel amount generated at the corner and any change in feedrate due to the
interruption.
ΔVx
If ΔVx ≤ ΔVlimit and ΔVY≤ ΔVlimit,
this vector is ignored.
ΔV Y
S
r
Even if ΔVx ≤ ΔVlimit and
ΔVY ≤ ΔVlimit, vector to
r single-block stop point
Tool center path remains.
N1
Programmed path
N2
ΔVlimit is determined depending on the setting in parameter No. 5010.
NOTE

compensation values usable for each path are specified, an alarm PS0115 “VARIABLE
NO. OUT OF RANGE” is issued.
- 1839 -
For example, 64 tool compensation sets are used, 20 sets may be allocated to path 1 and
44 sets to path 2. All of 64 sets need not be used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5042 OFE OFD OFC OFA

NOTE
#0 OFA
#1 OFC
#2 OFD
#3 OFE These bits are used to specify the increment system and valid data range of a tool offset
value.
For metric input
OFE OFD OFC OFA Unit Valid data range
0 0 0 1 0.01mm ±9999.99mm
0 0 0 0 0.001mm ±9999.999mm
0 0 1 0 0.0001mm ±9999.9999mm
0 1 0 0 0.00001mm ±9999.99999mm
1 0 0 0 0.000001mm ±999.999999mm
For inch input

OFE OFD OFC OFA Unit Valid data range
0 0 0 1 0.001inch ±999.999inch
0 0 0 0 0.0001inch ±999.9999inch
0 0 1 0 0.00001inch ±999.99999inch
0 1 0 0 0.000001inch ±999.999999inch
1 0 0 0 0.0000001inch ±99.9999999inch
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NCR
8136
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#7 NCR Tool nose radius compensation is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19607 NAG NAA CAV CCC

- 1840 -
#2 CCC In the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode, the outer corner
connection method is based on:
0: Linear connection type.
1: Circular connection type.
#5 CAV When an interference check finds that interference (overcutting) occurred:

0: Machining stops with the alarm PS0041.
(Interference check alarm function)
1: Machining is continued by changing the tool path to prevent interference
(overcutting) from occurring. (Interference check avoidance function)
For the interference check method, see the descriptions of bit 1 (CNC) of parameter No.
5008 and bit 3 (CNV) of parameter No. 5008.
#6 NAA When the interference check avoidance function considers that an avoidance operation is
dangerous or that a further interference to the interference avoidance vector occurs:
0: An alarm is issued.
When an avoidance operation is considered to be dangerous, the alarm PS5447 is
issued.
When a further interference to the interference avoidance vector is considered to
occur, the alarm PS5448 is issued.
1: No alarm is issued, and the avoidance operation is continued.
CAUTION
When this parameter is set to 1, the path may be shifted largely.
Therefore, set this parameter to 0 unless special reasons are
present.
#7 NAG If the gap vector length is 0 when the interference check avoidance function for cutter
compensation/tool nose radius compensation is used:
0: Avoidance operation is performed.
1: Avoidance operation is not performed.
19625 Number of blocks to be read in the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode

This parameter sets the number of blocks to be read in the cutter compensation/tool nose
radius compensation mode. When a value less than 3 is set, the specification of 3 is
assumed. When a value greater than 8 is set, the specification of 8 is assumed. As a
greater number of blocks are read, an overcutting (interference) forecast can be made with
a command farther ahead. However, the number of blocks read and analyzed increases, so
that a longer block processing time becomes necessary.
Even if the setting of this parameter is modified in the MDI mode by stopping in the
cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode, the setting does not become
valid immediately. Before the new setting of this parameter can become valid, the cutter
compensation/tool noise radius compensation mode must be canceled, then the mode
must be entered again.
- 1841 -
Alarm and message

PS0033 NO INTERSECTION AT CUTTER The intersection cannot be obtained by the intersection
COMPENSATION calculation in cutter or tool-nose radius compensation. Modify
the program.
PS0034 NO CIRC ALLOWED IN STUP/EXT In cutter or tool-nose radius compensation, a startup or
BLK cancellation is performed in the G02 or G03 mode. Modify the
program.
PS0035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a G
code (such as for cutter or tool-nose radius compensation)
of group 07 is not canceled.
- A torque limit skip was not specified in a torque limit skip
command (G31P98 or P99). Specify the torque limit skip in
the PMC window or the like. Or, specify the torque limit
override by address Q.
PS0037 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN The compensation plane G17/G18/G19 was changed during
G41/G42 cutter or tool-nose radius compensation. Modify the program.
PS0041 INTERFERENCE IN CUTTER In cutter or tool-nose radius compensation, excessive cutting
COMPENSATION may occur. Modify the program.
PS0042 G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED IN CRC Tool offset (G45 to G48) is commanded in tool compensation.
Modify the program.
PS5445 CAN NOT COMMAND MOTION IN Corner circular interpolation (G39) of cutter compensation or
G39 tool nose radius compensation is not specified alone but is
specified with a move command.
PS5446 NO AVOIDANCE AT G41/G42 Because there is no interference evade vector, the
interference check evade function of cutter compensation or
tool nose radius compensation cannot evade interference.
PS5447 DANGEROUS AVOIDANCE AT The interference check evade function of cutter compensation
G41/G42 or tool nose radius compensation determines that an evade
operation will lead to danger.
PS5448 INTERFERENCE TO AVD. AT In the interference check evade function of cutter
G41/G42 compensation or tool nose radius compensation, a further
interference occurs for an already created interference evade
vector.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For lathe system) Overview of Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G40-G42)
(B-64604EN-1) Overview of Cutter Compensation (G40-G42)
Details of Cutter or Tool Nose Radius Compensation
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For machining center system) Overview of Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G40-G42)
(B-64604EN-2) Overview of Cutter Compensation (G40-G42)
Details of Cutter or Tool Nose Radius Compensation
12.4.2 Tool Length Compensation (M Series)

M
Overview
When the difference between the tool length assumed at the time of programming and the tool length of
the tool actually used for machining is set in offset memory, the difference in tool length can be corrected
without modifying the program.
G43 and G44 specify the offset direction, and a number following the tool length compensation
specification address (H code) specifies the tool length compensation amount set in the offset memory.
- 1842 -
Tool assumed at Actual tool

programming
Set this difference as

tool length
compensation amount
Fig.12.4.2 (a)
One of the following three methods is available, depending on the type of axis that can be subject to tool
length compensation:
- Tool length compensation A
Compensates the value of the tool length on the Z axis.
- Tool length compensation B
Compensates the value of the tool length on one of the X, Y, and Z axis.
- Tool length compensation C
Compensates the value of the tool length on a specified axis.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3104
DAL DRL

#4 DRL Relative position

0: The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset.
1: The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool length offset.
#6 DAL Absolute position

0: The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset.
1: The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool length offset.
NOTE
In lathe systems, whether to exclude a tool offset when displaying
the absolute position is determined by the setting of bit 1 (DAP) of
parameter No. 3129.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
EVO
5001
EVO TAL TLB TLC

- 1843 -
#0 TLC
#1 TLB These bits are used to select a tool length compensation type.
Type TLB TLC
Tool length compensation A 0 0
Tool length compensation B 1 0
Tool length compensation C - 1
The axis to which cutter compensation is applied varies from type to type as described
below.
Tool length compensation A : Z-axis at all times
Tool length compensation B : Axis perpendicular to a specified plane (G17/G18/G19)
Tool length compensation C : Axis specified in a block that specifies G43/G44
#3 TAL Tool length compensation C

0: Generates an alarm when two or more axes are offset
1: Not generate an alarm even if two or more axes are offset
#6 EVO If a tool compensation value modification is made for tool length compensation A or tool
length compensation B in the offset mode (G43 or G44):
0: The new value becomes valid in a block where G43, G44, or an H code is specified
next.
1: The new value becomes valid in a block where buffering is performed next.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5003 LVK

#6 LVK Tool length compensation vector

0: Cleared by reset
1: Not cleared, but held by reset
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5007 3OF 3OC

#6 3OC If tool length compensation is not cancelled before 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
is specified, an alarm is:
0: Not raised.
1: Raised. (alarm PS0049)
#7 3OF If 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is not nested with a command for tool length
compensation, or if 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is specified during tool length
compensation and another command for tool length compensation is specified:
1: The alarm PS0049 is issued.
- 1844 -
Example 1) An alarm is raised in the following cases:

1) G68 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ ;
:
G43 H1 ;
:
G69 ; ← PS0049 raised
:
G49 ;
2) G43 H1 ;
:
G68 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ ;
:
G49(G43H2,H2 etc.) ; ← PS0049 raised
:
G69 ;
Example 2) No alarm is raised in the following cases:
3) G68 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ ;
:
G43 H1 ;
:
G49 ;
:
G69 ;
4) G43 H1 ;
:
G68 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ ;
:
G69 ;
:
G49 ;
NOTE
A command to cancel tool length compensation (G28, etc.) will not
cause an alarm to be raised. If a command like this is specified in
the G68 mode, program as indicated in 3) above.
G43 H1 ;
:
G68 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ ;
:
G28 X_ Y_ Z_ ; ← Offset is cancelled.
: No alarm is raised.
G69 ;
Alarm and message

PS0027 NO AXES No axis is specified in G43 and G44 blocks for the tool length offset type
COMMANDED IN C.
G43/G44 Offset is not canceled but another axis is offset for the tool length offset
type C.
Multiple axes were specified for the same block when the tool length
compensation type is C.
- 1845 -

PS0049 ILLEGAL When 3-dimensional coordinate conversion (G68 or G69) was specified,
COMMAND(G68,G69) the tool compensation was not canceled. Or, programs of 3-dimensional
coordinate conversion (G68, G69) and tool compensation (G43, G44 or
G49) were not nested. Or, the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion was
specified during the tool length compensation and another tool length
compensation was specified.
PS0336 TOOL COMPENSATION For a tool length compensation C, an attempt was made to command the
COMMANDED MORE offset to other axes without canceling the offset. Or, for a tool length
TWO AXES compensation C, multiple axes are specified in G43 or G44 block.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Tool length compensation
12.4.3 Tool Length Compensation Shift Types (M Series)

M
Overview
A tool length offset operation can be performed by shifting the program coordinate system: The
coordinate system containing the axis subject to tool length compensation is shifted by the tool length
compensation value. A tool length compensation shift type can be selected with bit 6 (TOS) of parameter
No. 5006 or bit 2 (TOP) of parameter No. 11400. If no move command is specified together with the G43,
G44, or G49 command, the tool will not move along the axis. If a move command is specified together
with the G43, G44, or G49 command, the coordinate system will be shifted first, then the tool will move
along the axis.
One of the following three methods is available, depending on the type of axis that can be subject to tool
length compensation:
- Tool length compensation A
Compensates the value of the tool length on the Z axis.
- Tool length compensation B
Compensates the value of the tool length on one of the X, Y, and Z axis.
- Tool length compensation C
Compensates the value of the tool length on a specified axis.
Explanation
- Offset direction
If the tool length compensation value specified with an H code (and stored in offset memory) is G43, the
coordinate system is shifted to the + side; if G44, to the - side. If the sign of the tool length compensation
value is -, the coordinate system is shifted to the - side if G43 and to the + side if G44. G43 and G44 are
modal G codes; they remain valid until another G code in the same group is used.
- Specifying a tool length compensation value

The tool length compensation value corresponding to the number (offset number) specified with an H
code (and stored in offset memory) is used. The tool length compensation corresponding to the offset
number 0 always means 0. It is not possible to set a tool length compensation value corresponding to H0.
- Compensation axis
Specify one of tool length compensation types A, B, and C, using bits 0 (TLC) and 1 (TLB) of parameter
No. 5001.
- 1846 -
- Specifying offset on two or more axes

Tool length compensation B enables offset on two or more axes by specifying offset axes in multiple
blocks.
To perform offset on X and Y axes

G19 G43 H_; Performs offset on the X axis.
G18 G43 H_; Performs offset on the Y axis.
Tool length compensation C suppresses the generation of an alarm even if offset is performed on two or
more axes at the same time, by setting bit 3 (TAL) of parameter No. 5001 to 1.
- Tool length compensation cancel

To cancel offset, specify either G49 or H0. Canceling offset causes the shifting of the coordinate system
to be undone. If no move command is specified at this time, the tool will not move along the axis.
- Staring and canceling tool length compensation

Once a command for starting or canceling tool length compensation (*2) is issued in a mode such as
cutter compensation (*1), no look-ahead block interpretation is carried out until the tool length
compensation start or cancel request block is finished. So, the following operations occur.
- The spindle decelerates to a stop in the start or cancel block.
- The compensation vector for tool compensation becomes perpendicular to the block just before the
start or cancel block, resulting in an overcut or insufficient cut, because no look-ahead interpretation
is carried out.
- No command specified after the start or cancel block is executed until the block is finished.
*1 No look-ahead block interpretation is carried out for the following commands:

- G codes, except G40, in group 07
(Cutter compensation (G41/G42) mode)
*2 The following commands are included.
- Tool length compensation (G43/G44)
- Operation when a tool compensation value is changed in the tool length

compensation mode
Bit 1 (MOF) of parameter No. 5000 can be used to specify what operation to perform when a tool length
compensation value is changed (*3) in the cutter compensation mode (*1) and tool length compensation
mode (*2).
- If bit 1 (MOF) of parameter No. 5000 = 0:
The axis is shifted by the amount of change in the tool length compensation value.
- If bit 1 (MOF) of parameter No. 5000 = 1:
Until an absolute command is issued to the compensated axis since the change of the tool length
compensation value, the axis is shifted by the amount of change in the tool length compensation
value.

- G codes, except G40, in group 07
Cutter compensation (G41/G42) mode

- Tool length compensation (G43/G44)
*3 “Changing a tool length compensation value” pertains to:

- Issuing the H code (or, with the extended tool select function in the lathe system, D code) in a
program
- 1847 -
- Changing a compensation value on the offset screen, by the G10 command, system variables,
or the window function if bit 6 (EVO) of parameter No. 5001 = 1.
Caution
CAUTION
1 Specifying tool length compensation (a shift type) first and then executing an
incremental command causes the tool length compensation value to be reflected
in the coordinates only, not in the travel distance of the machine; executing an
absolute command causes the tool length compensation value to be reflected in
both the movement of the machine and the coordinates.
2 If a programmable mirror image is effective, the tool length offset is applied in
the specified direction.
3 No scaling magnification is applied to the tool length offset value.
4 No coordinate system rotation is applied to the tool length offset value. Tool
length offset is effective in the direction in which the offset is applied.
5 The tool length offset operation is independent of the cutter compensation offset
operation.
6 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is applied to tool length offset. If tool length
offset is made effective to multiple axes, the tool length offset must be canceled for
one axis at a time.
7 With the WINDOW command, changing bit 6 (TOS) of parameter No. 5006 or bit 2
(TOP) of parameter No. 11400 during automatic operation does not cause the tool
length offset type to be changed.
8 If offset has been performed on two or more axes with tool length compensation B,
a G49 command causes the offset to be canceled on all axes; H0 causes the
offset to be canceled only on the axis vertical to the specified plane.
9 If the tool length compensation value is changed by changing the offset number,
this simply means that the value is replaced by a new tool length compensation
value; it does not mean that a new tool length compensation value is added to the
old tool length compensation.
10 If using cutter compensation, set bit 2 (OFH) of parameter No. 5001 to 0, specify
tool length compensation with an H code, and specify cutter compensation with a
D code.
11 If reference position return (G28, G30, or G30.1) has been specified, tool length
offset is canceled for the axis specified at the time of positioning on the reference
point; however, tool length offset is not canceled for an un-specified axis. If
reference position return has been specified in the same block as that containing
tool length offset cancel (G49), tool length offset is canceled for both the specified
and un-specified axes at the time of positioning on the mid-point.
12 With a machine coordinate system command (G53), tool length offset is canceled
for the axis specified at the time of positioning on the specified point.
13 The tool length compensation vector canceled by specifying G53, G28, G30, or
G30.1 during tool length compensation is restored as described below:
For tool length compensation types A and B, if bit 6 (EVO) of parameter No. 5001
is 1, the vector is restored in the block buffered next; for all of tool length
compensation types A, B, and C, it is restored in a block containing an H, G43, or
G44 command if parameter is 0.
- 1848 -
CAUTION
14 When a tool compensation shift type is used, no look-ahead interpretation is made
if a command for starting or canceling compensation such as tool length
compensation is issued in the tool radius/ tool-nose radius compensation mode.
As a result, it is likely that an overcut or insufficient cut may occur. To avoid this
problem, issue the command before the tool radius/ tool-nose radius
compensation mode is entered or in a place where machining is not affected.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5000 MOF

#1 MOF When the tool length compensation shift type (bit 6 (TOS) is set to 1 of parameter No.
5006 or bit 2 (TOP) of parameter No. 11400 is set to 1) is used, if the tool length
compensation amount is changed(NOTE 3) in the tool length compensation mode (NOTE 1)
when look-ahead blocks are present(NOTE 2):
0: Compensation is performed for the change in compensation amount as the
movement type.
1: Compensation is not performed for the change until a tool length compensation
command (offset number) and an absolute programming for the compensation axis
are specified.
NOTE
1 The tool length compensation mode refers to the following state:
- Tool length offset (G43/G44)
2 "When look-ahead blocks are present" means as follows:
- The modal G code of the G codes (such as tool radius - tool
nose radius compensation) of group 07 is other than G40.
One look-ahead block during automatic operation and multiple
look-ahead blocks in the AI advanced preview control (M Series) /
AI contour control mode are not included in the state "when
look-ahead blocks are present".
3 Changes in tool length compensation amount are as follows:
- When the tool length compensation number is changed by H
code (or D code for the extended tool selection function for lathe
systems)
- When G43 or G44 is specified to change the direction of tool
length compensation
- When the tool length compensation amount is changed using
the offset screen, G10 command, system variable, PMC window,
and so forth during automatic operation if bit 1 (EVO) of
parameter No. 5001 is set to 1.
- When the tool length compensation vector is restored after being
temporarily canceled by G53, G28, G30, or G30.1 during tool
length compensation.
- 1849 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5001
TAL TLB TLC

#0 TLC
#1 TLB These bits are used to select a tool length compensation type.
Type TLB TLC
Tool length compensation A 0 0
Tool length compensation B 1 0
Tool length compensation C - 1
The axis to which cutter compensation is applied varies from type to type as described
below.
Tool length compensation A : Z-axis at all times
Tool length compensation B : Axis perpendicular to a specified plane (G17/G18/G19)
Tool length compensation C : Axis specified in a block that specifies G43/G44
#3 TAL Tool length compensation C

0: Generates an alarm when two or more axes are offset
1: Not generate an alarm even if two or more axes are offset
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5006 TOS

[Data type] Bit
#6 TOS Set a tool length compensation or tool offset operation.

0: Tool length compensation or tool offset operation is performed by an axis
movement.
1: Tool length compensation or tool offset operation is performed by shifting the
coordinate system.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11400 TOP

#2 TOP Set a tool length compensation or tool offset operation.

0: Tool length compensation or tool offset operation is performed by an axis
movement.
1: Tool length compensation or tool offset operation is performed by shifting the
coordinate system.
- 1850 -
NOTE
This parameter is an-individual path parameter having the same
function as bit 6 (TOS) of parameter No. 5006.
To use different compensation types for individual paths, set the
parameter TOS with 0 and specify a compensation type for each
path separately, using the parameter TOP. If the parameter TOS is
1, the parameter TOP is assumed to be 1 even if it is 0.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Tool length compensation shift types
12.4.4 Second Geometry Tool Offset (T Series)

T
Overview
To compensate for the difference in tool mounting position and in selected position, this function adds 32
sets of second geometry tool offset for each of the X, Z, and Y axes for all paths (up to 2000 sets for all
paths and up to 999 sets for a single path).
In contrast to this offset, the ordinary tool geometry offset is called the first geometry tool offset.
It is possible to apply a tool offset value (tool wear offset + tool geometry offset) in the reverse direction,
using an appropriate signal.
This function may be used if the compensation value differs even with a single tool for a mechanical
reason depending on the mounting position (inside/outside) or the selected position (right/left).
NOTE
2 To use the second geometry tool offset, enable the geometry and wear
compensation (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No.8136 is 0).
3 To use the second geometry tool offset for the Y axis, enable the Y axis offset
(bit 1 (YOF) of parameter No.8132 is 1).
- 1851 -
Example
X
X First path (standard turret)

T01/X (first) : 20
Z
O (workpiece origin)
T01
T11 to T16/X
(second) : 120
T01/Z (first) : 5
Z
O
T13
T11
T12
- T16
Second path
(linear turret)
- - -
T11/Z (second) : 10
T12/Z (second) : - 30
T13/Z (second) : - 70
T16/Z (second) : - 190
Fig. 12.4.4 (a)
In the machine configuration shown in the Fig. 12.4.4 (a), for the offset data for the tool mounted to the
first path (standard turret), set the offset data of the tool itself as the first geometry tool offset data. (The
second geometry tool offset data is 0.) For the offset data for the tool mounted to the second path (linear
turret), set the offset data of the tool itself as the first geometry tool offset data and the offset data from
the workpiece origin at the mounting position as the second geometry tool offset data. Usually, the offset
data of the tool itself is measured separately from the offset data at the mounting position, these data can
be set separately by using the second geometry tool offset.
First geometry tool offset Second geometry tool offset

No. X axis Z axis No. X axis Z axis
01 20.000 5.000 01 0.000 0.000
: : : : : :
10 25.000 8.000 10 0.000 0.000
11 -20.000 5.000 11 120.000 10.000
12 -10.000 3.000 12 120.000 -30.000
13 -15.000 0.000 13 120.000 -70.000
: : : : : :
16 -18.000 7.000 16 120.000 -190.000
- Offset data
The data for the second geometry tool offset can be set for each path. The number of items of the data can
be set with parameter No. 5024. The data remains stored even after the power is turned off.
If the data is to be made common to paths, use the memory common to paths.
Signal
Second geometry tool offset signal G2SLC<Gn090.7>
[Function] This signal selects whether to use the second geometry tool offset.
- 1852 -
[Operation] When a tool number is specified with a T code, only the first geometry tool offset is used
as the tool geometry offset value if this signal is 0; if this signal is 1, the value obtained
by adding the second geometry tool offset to the first geometry tool offset is used as the
tool geometry offset value.
NOTE
To switch this signal, use an M code for suppressing buffering. If
the signal is switched without suppressing buffering during
automatic operation, it is likely that no offset may work properly.
Second geometry tool offset axis selection signals

G2X,G2Z,G2Y<Gn090.4, Gn090.5, Gn090.6>
[Function] These signals select the axis for which the second geometry tool offset is added to the
first geometry tool offset.
[Operation] If these signals are set to 0, the second geometry tool offset is not added to the controlled
axis corresponding to the axis bit.
If these signals are set to 1, the second geometry tool offset is added to the controlled axis
corresponding to the axis bit.
These signals are valid when the second geometry tool offset signal G2SLC is set to 1.
NOTE
G2Y requires the Y-axis offset option.
Tool offset direction signals G2RVX,G2RVZ,G2RVY<Gn090.0, Gn090.1, Gn090.2>

[Function] When a tool offset is used, these signals change the direction of the compensation
amount.
The direction of the tool offset for compensation is determined by tool movement as
follows:
0: The same direction as the direction indicated by the sign
1: The opposite direction to the direction indicated by the sign
NOTE
1 G2Y requires the Y-axis offset option.
2 This signal cannot shift a coordinate.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn090 G2SLC G2Y G2Z G2X G2RVY G2RVZ G2RVX
Parameter

Set the allowable numbers of digits for the T code.
- 1853 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
GO2
3290

#5 GO2 Setting the second geometric tool offset value by MDI key input is:
0: Disabled.
1: Not disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
LWM LGT LGN
5002


NOTE
enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No.8136 is 0).
#4 LGT Tool geometry compensation

0: Compensated by the shift of the coordinate system
1: Compensated by the tool movement
NOTE
enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No.8136 is 0).
#6 LWM Tool offset operation based on tool movement is performed:

0: In a block where a T code is specified.
1: Together with a command for movement along an axis.
NOTE

- 1854 -
For example, 64 tool compensation sets are used, 20 sets may be allocated to path 1, 30
sets to path 2, and 14 sets to path 3. All of 64 sets need not be used.
Number of digits of an offset number used with a T code command

5028

Specify the number of digits of a T code portion that is used for a tool offset number
(wear offset number when the tool geometry/wear compensation function is used).
When 0 is set, the number of digits is determined by the number of tool compensation
values.
When the number of tool compensation values is 1 to 9: Lower 1 digit
[Example] When an offset number is specified using the lower 2 digits of a T code, set 2 in
parameter No. 5028.
Txxxxxx yy
xxxxxx : Tool selection
yy : Tool offset number
In tool management function, set 4 in this parameter to set 4-digit number in parameter
No.13265.
NOTE
A value longer than the setting of parameter No. 3032 (allowable
number of digits of a T code) cannot be set.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) Second Geometry Tool Offset
(B-64604EN-1)
- 1855 -
12.5 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT

Tools are classified into several groups, and a tool life (use count or use duration) is specified for each
group in advance. Each time a tool is used, its life is counted, and when the tool life expires, a new tool
that is sequenced next within the same group is selected automatically. With this function, the tool life
can be managed while machining is being performed continuously. Data for tool life management
consists of tool group numbers, tool life values, tool numbers, and codes for specifying a tool offset value.
These data items are registered in the CNC.
NOTE
To use this function, enable the tool life management (bit 0 (TLF) of parameter
No.8132 is 1).
Tool group number m

Tool life value l
1 Tool number (T) Code for specifying tool offset 1st-tool management data
value (H/D)
2 : : 2nd-tool management data
: : : :
: : : :
n : : nth-tool management data
Machine and CNC operations
Tool life Machining program
management data : Machine CNC
:
Tool group number 1 : Places a Automatically
selected tool selects, from tool
: Select Command for selecting in the wait group m, a tool
: tool.
tool group m state. whose life has not
: expired.
Tool group number m : Attaches the Starts counting the
: Tool change command tool in the life of the tool
(M06) wait state to attached to the
: the spindle spindle.
: (tool
Tool group number p : change).
Fig. 12.5 (a) Tool selection from machining program
M
A group is selected by a T code, and tool life counting is started by the M06 command.
T
The T series has two tool change types (the turret type and the ATC type). The turret type uses only a T
code to select a group, specify a tool offset value, and start tool life counting, whereas the ATC type, like
the M series, uses a T code to select a group and the M06 command to start tool life counting. With the
ATC type, only a D code is used for specifying a tool offset value. The tool change type is selected by bit
3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040.
CAUTION
This function cannot be used if bit 1 (LGN) of parameter No. 5002 is set to 1 to
use the same number as the tool selection number to specify a geometric offset
number.
- 1856 -
- Life management B function

If the tool life management B function is enabled, the maximum tool life value can be extended, and the
tool life expiration prior notice signal can be output to post tool life expiration in advance when the
remaining life (the life value minus the life counter value) has reached the remaining life setting. The
remaining life setting is registered as tool life management data in the CNC in advance.
The tool life management B function is enabled by setting bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 to 1.
M
If the tool life management B function is enabled, the function for selecting a tool group by an arbitrary
group number can be used.
T
The tool life management B function can be used. However, the function for selecting a tool group by an
arbitrary group number can be used only if the tool change type is the ATC type (bit 3 (TCT) of
parameter No. 5040 = 1).
- Maximum number of tool life management groups and multi-path system

Up to 256 tool life management groups can be used in the entire CNC system.
For each path, set a maximum number of groups to be used in parameter No. 6813.
The maximum number of groups must be a multiple of the minimum number of groups (eight groups). If
the maximum number of groups is 0, the tool life management function is disabled.
Multipath system (when tool life management is performed for three paths)
Suppose that, of the total groups in the system (256 gr ou ps), 128 groups are
allocated to path 1, 128 groups to path 2. Then, set par ameter No. 6813 as
follows:
Tool life mana gement data file
Parameter No. 6813 (256 groups in total in system)
Path 1 Path 1
Set 128 in parameter Up to 128 groups
Path 2 Path 2
Set 128 in parameter Up to 128 groups
Fig. 12.5 (b) Group allocation in entire system
Signal
Tool change signal TLCH <Fn064.0>
[Function] Informs that the life of the last tool in a group has expired.
[Output cond.] The signal becomes 1 when:
- The life of the last tool in a group has expired, after tool change was performed each
time the life of each tool in the group expired.
The signal becomes 0 when:
- There is no group whose life has expired.
When the signal is 1, it is reset to 0 by informing the CNC that tool change has been
finished for all groups in which the life of all tools had expired, by inputting the tool
change reset signal TLRST from the PMC or operating on the MDI.
- 1857 -
CAUTION
If the tool life is specified by use count, the tool change signal
TLCH becomes 1 when the CNC is reset by a command such as
M02 or M30 after the tool life has expired or when the tool life count
restart M code is issued.
If the tool life is specified by duration, the TLCH becomes 1 when
the tool life expires, even if machining is in progress. Machining,
however, continues until the end of the program.
Tool change reset signal TLRST <Gn048.7>

[Function] Clears all execution data, such as tool life count values and marks "*" and "@", for a
group.
After replacing all tools in the groups in which the life of all the tools has expired (as
shown on the screen) with new ones, input this signal by specifying a group number,
using the tool group number select signals (TL01 to TL512). Setting bit 4 (GRS) of
parameter No. 6800 to 1 can clear execution data for all registered groups without
inputting the tool group number select signal.
Execution data can be cleared also by operating on the MDI.
[Operation] When the signal changes from 0 to 1, the control unit behaves as explained below.
- If the lives of all tools in the group specified by the tool group number selection
signals (TL01 to TL512) have expired, the related information is cleared. Therefore,
when a subsequent program command specifies the group number, tools are selected
from the beginning. If the group specified by the tool group number selection signals
(TL01 to TL512) contains at least one tool whose life has not expired, no special
operation takes place.
NOTE
Set the tool change reset signal TLRST from 0 to 1 only when the
control unit is not in the reset state (the RST signal is 1) and the
following conditions are satisfied:
1) If bit 5 (TRS) of parameter No. 6805 = 0
Reset state (the OP signal is 0)
2) If bit 5 (TRS) of parameter No. 6805 = 1
<1> Reset state (the OP signal is 0)
<2> Automatic operation stop state (the STL signal and the SPL
signal are 0 and the OP signal is 1)
<3> Automatic operation stop state (the STL signal and the SPL
signal are 0)
(In the automatic operation stop state, automatic operation
pause state, and automatic operation start state (the STL
signal is 1) during execution of a data setting command
(G10 L3), however, the tool change reset signal TLRST is
invalid.)
Individual tool change signal TLCHI <Fn064.2>

[Function] When the tool life count is specified by duration, this signal informs that the life of the
currently used tool has expired. The signal can be used to cause an interrupt to program
execution, to run a tool change program, and, after tool exchange, to resume the
interrupted program execution.
- 1858 -
[Operation] The signal becomes 1 when:
- The life of the currently used tool has expired.
- An individual tool change reset is executed.
Individual tool change reset signal TLRSTI <Gn048.6>

[Function] Resets the individual tool change signal TLCHI to 0.
[Operation] When this signal becomes 1, the control unit behaves as explained below.
- The individual tool change signal is reset to 0.
NOTE
1 These signals are valid only for tool life management in which the
tool life count type is specification by duration.
2 The individual tool change signal TLCHI is not cleared by a reset.
Tool skip signal TLSKP <Gn048.5>

[Function] Skips a tool whose life has not expired and selects the next tool forcibly. One of the
following two methods can be selected according to the setting of bit 3 (SIG) of
parameter No. 6800:
(i) Specifying a group number by using the tool group number select signals (SIG = 1)
Specify the group number of the tool to be skipped by using the tool group number
selection signals (TL01 to TL512), then set the tool skip signal to 1. The next T code
command will then select the next tool in the group which is specified to be skipped.
(ii) Not specifying a group number by using the tool group number select signals (SIG =
0)
Set the tool skip signal TLSKP to 1 without specifying any group number. The
group to which the currently selected tool belongs is then assumed to be specified.
The next T code command will select the next tool in the group for which the skip is
specified.
When the tool skip signal TLSKP is set to 1 for the last tool, the tool change signal TLCH
is set to 1.
[Operation] When this signal is set from 0 to 1, the control unit behaves as explained below:
- Among the tools whose lives have not expired in the group for which a skip
operation is specified, the smallest tool number in the tool life management table is
marked with "#". When the group is specified again by a T code command, the
marked tool is skipped, and the next new tool is selected.
When the tool skip signal TLSKP is set to 1 for the last tool, the tool change signal
TLCH is set to 1.
CAUTION
The tool skip signal TLSKP can be used even in the automatic
operation start state (the STL signal is 1), but a tool selection from
a group by a T command is made when the command is buffered.
This means that after the command is buffered, inputting the tool
skip signal TLSKP does not select the next tool. Therefore, when
supplying the tool skip signal TLSKP in the automatic operation
start state (the STL signal is 1), disable tool selection, for example,
by suppressing buffering before setting the signal from 0 to 1.
- 1859 -
New tool select signal TLNW <Fn064.1>

[Function] Notifies the PMC that a new tool has been selected from a group. This signal can be used,
for example, if the tool length offset value of a newly selected tool is to be measured
automatically when the tool is selected.
[Output cond.] The signal becomes 1 if:
A new tool in a tool group specified with a tool group number by a T code command is
selected because the life of the tool used so far in the group has expired.
After the code signal for the new tool is sent out, the TLNW becomes 1 at the same time
when the tool function strobe signal TF is sent out.
The signal becomes 0 if:
The completion signal FIN for the strobe signal TF becomes to 1 when the TLNW is 1.
T command
Code signals T0 to T31
Strobe signal TF
New tool select signal

TLNW
Tool group number selection signals TL01 to TL512 <Gn047.0 to Gn048.1>

[Function] These signals specify a tool group number. Before the tool change reset signal TLRST or
the tool skip signal TLSKP is input, the target group for the tool change reset operation or
tool skip operation is specified with these signals.
[Operation] The table given below shows the correspondence between tool group numbers and the
tool group signals by providing several examples. A binary number plus 1 indicates a tool
group number. A group with a specified number is then selected.
Tool group
TL512 TL256 TL128 TL64 TL32 TL16 TL08 TL04 TL02 TL01
number
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 4
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 5
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 10
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 15
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 20
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 30
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 40
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 50
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 100
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 127
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 128
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 200
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 256
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 257
0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 300
0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 400
- 1860 -
Tool group
TL512 TL256 TL128 TL64 TL32 TL16 TL08 TL04 TL02 TL01
number
0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 500
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 512
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 513
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 600
1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 700
1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 800
1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 900
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1000
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1024
Tool life count override signals *TLV0 to *TLV9 <Gn049.0 to Gn050.1>

[Function] If the life count is specified by duration, the life count can be overridden by setting bit 2
(LFV) of parameter No. 6800 = 1. Ten binary code signals are available, and they
correspond to override values as follows:
9
Override value = Σ {2i × Vi} times

i=0
Keep the override values within the range stated above.

Where, if *TLVi is 1, Vi = 0
if *TLVi is 0, Vi = 1
Therefore, each signal has the following weight:
Signal Magnification Signal Magnification Signal Magnification
*TLV0 0.1 *TLV4 1.6 *TLV8 25.6
*TLV1 0.2 *TLV5 3.2 *TLV9 51.2
*TLV2 0.4 *TLV6 6.4 - -
*TLV3 0.8 *TLV7 12.8 - -
Example:
If *TLV7, *TLV6, and *TLV3 are 0, the override value is calculated as follows:
12.8 + 6.4 + 0.8 = 20.0
So, the life count is multiplied by 20.
If all signals are 1, the override value is 0. So, set an override value within the range
from 0 to 99.9 in steps of 0.1.
If 99.9 times is exceeded, the actual override value is clamped by 99.9 times.
[Operation] The actual cutting time obtained by life counting specified by duration is multiplied by
the override value specified by these signals, and the multiplication result is assumed to
be the count time for tool life management. For example, let the override value be 0.1,
and the actual cutting time be 1000 seconds. Then, the tool life count time is assumed to
be 100 seconds.
Tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB <Fn064.3>

[Function] If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1),
specifying a remaining life value to be used till selection of a new tool enables the tool
life arrival notice signal to be issued when life counting shows that the remaining life
value of a group (life value minus life counter value) becomes lower than or equal to the
remaining life setting, in order to inform in advance that the tool life will expire soon.
Bit 4 (ARL) of parameter No. 6802 can be used to specify when (that is, when the life of
a specific tool has expired or when the life of the last tool in a specific tool group has
expired) to output the tool life arrival notice signal.
- 1861 -
Bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 6802 can be used to specify which remaining life setting
(that is, one specified in parameter Nos. 6844 and 6855 or one registered as tool life
management data) to use.
[Output cond.] The signal is set to 1 if:
- Remaining life (life value - life counter value) ≤ remaining life setting
provided that bit 7 (RMT) of parameter No. 6802 = 0
- Remaining life (life value - life counter value) = remaining life setting
The signal is reset to 0 if:
- Remaining life (life value - life counter value) > remaining life setting
- Remaining life (life value - life counter value) ≠ remaining life setting
NOTE
1 The signal changes when life counting is performed.
2 When using a life count override, reset bit 7 (RMT) of parameter
No. 6802 to 0.
3 When the life count is specified by duration, the unit of the
remaining life and remaining life setting to be compared varies
depending on the life count interval (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No.
6805). If the tool life is counted every second, the unit of the values
to be compared is one minute; if the tool life is counted every 0.1
seconds, the unit of the values to be compared is 0.1 minutes.
If bit 7 (CTB) of parameter No. 6803 is 1, this signal can be set to 0 if an operation such
as the following is performed.
- Clearing of execution data from the list screen of tool life management
- Batch deletion of tool group data from the edit screen of tool life management,
addition of tool numbers to the screen, and deletion of tool data from the screen
- Clearing of execution data, using the tool change reset signal TLRST <Gn048.7>
- Registration, change, and deletion of all life management group data, using a G10
command
- Execution of a FOCAS2 cnc_clrcntinfo function (clearing of the life counter and
tool information)
- Change to a tool not subject to life management, using an M06 command
Tool life counting disable signal LFCIV<Gn048.2>

[Function] Disables tool life counting for selected tools.
[Operation] If the signal 1, the control unit behaves as explained below.
- No life counting is performed for selected tools.
NOTE
The tool life counting disable signal LFCIV<Gn048.2> is valid if bit
6 (LFI) of parameter No. 6804 is 1.
Tool life counting disabled signal LFCIF<Fn093.2>

[Function] Informs that tool life counting is disabled for selected tools.
- 1862 -
- Tool life counting is disabled because the tool life counting disable signal LFCIV is
1.
- Tool life counting is enabled because the tool life counting disable signal LFCIV is
0.
Number of remaining tools notification signal TLAL <Fn154.0>

[Function] Informs that the number of remaining tools in the group selected with a T code command
is equal to or less than the setting of parameter No. 6846.
- The number of remaining tools in the group selected with a T code command is
equal to or less than the setting of parameter No. 6846.

- A value is input to parameter No. 6846.
- Using a G10 command, registration is performed that involves the erasure of all life
management data groups.
- Using a T code command, a group is selected in which the number of remaining
tools is greater than the setting of parameter No. 6846.
The signal also becomes 0 when any of the following is executed in the group that has
caused the number of remaining tool notification signal TLAL to be generated.
- Clearing of execution data, using the tool change reset signal TLRST <Gn048.7>.
- Change and deletion of life management data, using a G10 command.
- Batch deletion of tool groups from the group edit screen of tool life management,
addition of tool data to the screen, and deletion from the screen.
- Clearing of tool execution data from the group edit screen of tool life management.
- Clearing of execution data from the list screen of tool life management.
- Execution of any of the FOCAS2 functions below.
(cnc_clrcntinfo,cnc_deltlifegrp,cnc_deltlifedt,cnc_instlifedt,cnc_wrt1info,
cnc_wrt2info,cnc_wr1tlifedata,cnc_wr1tlifedat2,cnc_wr2tlifedata)
NOTE
1 This signal is used in the M series only.
2 If the setting of parameter No. 6846 is 0, the number of remaining
tools notification signal TLAL is not output.
Example)
If three tools are registered in a group, and the number of remaining tools is set to 1
(parameter No. 6846 = 1), the timing chart of the number of remaining tools
notification signal TLAL is as shown in Fig. 12.5 (c).
The number of remaining tools notification signal TLAL is output at the same time
as the T code for the third tool.
- 1863 -
1st tool 2nd tool 3rd tool
T-code
TF
TLAL
Fig. 12.5 (c) Timing chart of the number of remaining tools notification signal TLAL
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0046 KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1
Gn047 TL128 TL64 TL32 TL16 TL08 TL04 TL02 TL01
Gn048 TLRST TLRSTI TLSKP LFCIV TL512 TL256
Gn049 *TLV7 *TLV6 *TLV5 *TLV4 *TLV3 *TLV2 *TLV1 *TLV0
Gn050 *TLV9 *TLV8
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn064 TLCHB TLCHI TLNW TLCH
Fn093 LFCIF
Fn154
TLAL
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6800 M6T IGI SNG GRS SIG LTM GS2 GS1

#0 GS1
#1 GS2 For the maximum number of groups set in parameter No. 6813, up to four tools can be
registered per group. The combination of the number of registrable groups and the
number of tools per group can be changed by setting GS1 and GS2.
GS2 GS1 Number of groups Number of tools

0 0 1/8 of maximum number of groups (No. 6813) 32
1 1 Maximum number of groups (No. 6813) 4
- 1864 -
NOTE
After changing these parameters, set data again by using G10
L3 ;(registration after deletion of data of all groups).
#2 LTM The tool life count is specified by:

0: Count.
1: Duration.
NOTE
After changing this parameter, set data again by using G10
L3 ;(registration after deletion of data of all groups).
#3 SIG When a tool is skipped by a signals TL01 to TL512 <Gn047.0 to Gn048.1>, the group
number is:
0: Not input by the tool group number selection signals.
1: Input by the tool group number selection signals.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, a tool of the currently used group is
skipped.
#4 GRS When the tool change reset signal TLRST <Gn048.7> is input:
0: If the life of the group specified by the tool group number selection signals TL01 to
TL512 <Gn047.0 to Gn048.1> has expired, the execution data of the group is
cleared.
1: The execution data of all registered groups is cleared.
If this parameter is set to 1, the execution data of all registered groups is cleared also
when the clear operation to clear execution data is performed on the tool life management
list screen.
#5 SNG When the tool skip signal TLSKP <Gn048.5> is input while a tool not controlled by the
tool life management function is being used:
0: A tool of the most recently used group or a specified group (bit 3 (SIG) of parameter
No. 6800) is skipped.
1: The tool skip signal is ignored.
#6 IGI Tool back numbers are:

0: Not ignored.
1: Ignored.
#7 M6T A T code specified in the same block as M06 is:

0: Assumed to be a back number.
1: Assumed to be a command specifying the next tool group.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
M6E EMD LVF TSM
6801
M6E EMD LVF
NOTE

- 1865 -
#1 TSM In the tool life management function, life counting is performed as follows when more
than one offset is specified:
0: Counting is performed for each tool number.
1: Counting is performed for each tool.
#2 LVF When the life value is counted by duration in the tool management function or tool life
management function, tool life count override signals *TLV0 to *TLV9 <Gn049.0 to
Gn050.1> are:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
#3 EMD In the tool life management function, the mark "*" indicating that the life has expired is
displayed when:
0: The next tool is used.
1: The life has just expired.
NOTE
If this parameter is set to 0, the "@" mark (indicating that the tool is
in use) is kept displayed unless the next tool whose life has not
expired is used. If this parameter is set to 1, marks are displayed in
different ways depending on the life count type.
If the life count type is the duration specification type, the "*" mark
(indicating that the life has expired) appears when the life has
expired. If the life count type is the count specification type, one
count is not assumed until the end of the program (M02, M30, and so
on). Therefore, even when the life value and the tool life counter
value match, the "*" mark (life has expired) does not appear. The "*"
mark (life has expired) appears when the tool is used again by a tool
group command (T code) or tool change command (M06) issued
after the CNC is reset.
#7 M6E When a T code is specified in the same block as M06:

0: The T code is treated as a back number or the group number to be selected next.
Which number is assumed depends on the setting of bit 7 (M6T) of parameter No.
6800.
1: Life counting for the tool group starts immediately.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6802 RMT TSK TGN ARL GRP E17 TCO T99

#0 T99 When M99 of the main program is executed, and there is a the life was expired tool
group:
0: The tool change signal TLCH <Fn064.0> is not output.
1: TLCH is output, and the automatic operation becomes a stopped state..
If the life count is specified by use count and this parameter 1, TLCH is output and the
automatic operation becomes a stopped state if the life of at least one tool group has
expired when the M99 command is specified.
- 1866 -
If the life count type is the duration specification type, the automatic operation becomes a
stopped state if the life of at least one tool group has expired when the M99 command is
specified.
M
If the life count is specified by use count, after the M99 command is specified, a tool
group command (T code) selects, from a specified group, a tool whose life has not
expired, and the next tool change command (M06) increments the tool life counter by
one.
T
If the life count is specified by use count, ｗhen a tool group command (T code) is
specified after the M99 command is specified, a tool whose life has not expired is
selected from a specified group, and the tool life counter is incremented by one.
When the tool change type is the ATC type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1), the
same specifications as for the M series apply.
#1 TCO
#2 E17 Specifies whether to allow the FOCAS2 or PMC window function to write tool
information of a group being used or a group to be used next during automatic operation
(the automatic operation signal OP <Fn000.7> is set to 1).
Bit 1 (TCO) of parameter

No. 6802
1
Condition
Bit 2 (E17) of
0
parameter No. 6802
1 0
During Group being used or to be Tool being used × △ ○
automatic used next Tool not being used × ○ ○
operation Group neither being used nor to be used next ○ ○ ○
Not during automatic operation ○ ○ ○
○: Tool information can be written from FOCAS2 and PMC window.
×: Tool information cannot be written from FOCAS2 and PMC window.
When an attempt is made to write tool information from PMC window, completion
code 13 (REJECT ALARM) is returned.
△: Tool information cannot be cleared.
NOTE
When tool information of a tool being used (marked with "@") in the
group being used or to be used next or tool information of the most
recently used tool (marked with "@") in a group that is neither the
group being used nor the group to be used next is cleared, the life
counter is reset to 0.
It is possible to modify tool information of a tool in the group to be
used next. However, because tool selection is already completed,
the selected tool does not change even when the tool information is
modified.
This parameter has no influence on modifications to tool information
by edit operations from the tool life management screen.
- 1867 -
#3 GRP Management data of tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB <Fn064.3> is:
0: Managed using the remaining life value set in parameter No. 6844 and 6845.
1: Managed using the remaining life value set in tool life management data.
NOTE
When the tool life arrival notice signal function is used, bit 4 (LFB) of
parameter No. 6805 must be set to 1 to enable the tool life
management B function.
#4 ARL Tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB <Fn064.3> of tool life management is:
0: Output for each tool.
1: Output for the last tool of a group.
This parameter is valid only when bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 6802 is set to 1.
#5 TGN In the tool life management function, the optional group number function is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
NOTE
When the optional group number function is used, bit 4 (LFB) of
parameter No. 6805 must be set to 1 to enable the tool life
management B function.
In lathe systems, the optional group number function can be used if
the tool change type is the ATC type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No.
5040 = 1).
#6 TSK If the count type in tool life management is the duration type, then when the last tool of a
group is skipped by a signal:
0: The count value for the last tool equals the life value.
1: The count value for the last tool remains unchanged.
#7 RMT Tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB <Fn064.3> is turned 1 and 0 as follows:
0: The signal is turned 1 if the remaining life value (the life value minus the life
counter value) is smaller than or equal to the remaining life setting. The signal is
turned 0 if the remaining life value (the life value minus the life counter value) is
greater than the remaining life setting.
1: The signal is turned 1 if the remaining life value (the life value minus the life
counter value) is equal to the remaining life setting. The signal is turned 0 if the
remaining life value (the life value minus the life counter value) is not equal to the
remaining life setting.
NOTE
When using the life count override feature, set bit 7 (RMT) of
parameter No. 6802 to 0. When the life count is specified by duration,
the unit used for determining the result of comparison between the
remaining life and the remaining life setting varies depending on the
life count interval (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 6805). If the life is
counted every second, the comparison is made in units of 1 minute; if
the life is counted every 0.1 second, the comparison is made in units
of 0.1 minute.
- 1868 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6803 CTB

NOTE
#7 CTB Whether to turn the tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB <Fn064.3> of tool life
management off is determined when life counting starts. An additional turn-off condition
is:
0: Not added.
1: Added.
The tool life arrival notice signal is turned off when one of the following operations is
performed for the currently used group:
- Clears the execution data on the tool life management list screen.
- Deletes all tool group data at a time, adds a tool number, or deletes tool data on the
tool life management edit screen.
- Clears the execution data by the tool change reset signal TLRST <Gn048.7>.
- Registers, changes, or deletes all tool life management group data by the G10
command.
- Executes the FOCAS2 cnc_clrcntinfo function (which clears the tool life counter or
tool information).
- Replaces a tool with a tool of which life is not managed by the M06 command.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6804 LFI ETE TCI

#1 TCI During automatic operation (the automatic operation signal OP<Fn000.7> is 1), editing of
tool life data is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, tool life data can be edited even
during automatic operation (the OP is 1). If the target group for
editing is the group being used or the group to be used next,
however, only presetting of the life counter is permitted, and other
data cannot be modified.
#2 ETE In the tool life management screen, the mark of the tool at the life was expired of the final
tool in the group :
0: depends on setting bit 3 (EMD) of parameter No. 6801.
1: is "*" mark.
If bit 2 (ETE) of parameter No. 6804 is set to 1, when the life counter of the final tool in
the group becomes equal to the life value, display mark "*" in the final tool of the tool life
management screen.
- 1869 -
When tool change signal TLCH <Fn064.0> is 1, the state of the life was expired of the
tool can be read by reading tool information on the final tool in FOCAS2 or the PMC
window.
#6 LFI In tool life management, counting of the life of a selected tool is:
0: Enabled.
1: Enabled or disabled according to the status of tool life counting disable signal
LFCIV <Gn048.2>.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6805 TAD TRU TRS LFB FGL FCO

#0 FCO If the life count type is the duration specification type, the life is counted as follows:
0: Every second.
1: Every 0.1 second.
According to the setting of this parameter, the increment system of life values and tool
life counter values displayed on the tool life management screen is set as follows:
Parameter FCO 0 1
Increment system for display and setting of
1-minute increments 0.1-minute increments
life values and life counter values
NOTE
After changing the setting of this parameter, set data again by using
G10L3;(registration after deletion of data of all groups).
#1 FGL If the life count type is the duration specification type, life data registered by G10 is:
0: In minute increments.
1: In 0.1-second increments.
#4 LFB The tool life management B function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When the tool life management B function is enabled, the following functions can be
used:
<1> Tool life value extension (count specification: 99999999 times, duration
specification: 100000 minutes)
<2> Optional group number function
<3> Tool life arrival notice function
In lathe systems, if the tool change type is the ATC type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No.
5040 = 1), the optional group number function can be used.
#5 TRS Tool change reset signal TLRST <Gn048.7> is valid when reset signal RST <Fn001.1> is
not 1 and:
0: The reset state (automatic operation signal OP is 0) is observed.
1: The reset state (automatic operation signal OP <Fn000.7> is 0), automatic operation
stop state (cycle start lamp signal STL <Fn000.5> and feed hold lamp signal SPL
<Fn000.4> are 0 and OP is 1), or the automatic operation pause state (STL is 0 and
SPL is 1) is observed. The TLRST signal, however, is invalid when the automatic
operation stop state, automatic operation pause state, and automatic operation start
state (STL is 1) is observed during execution of a data setting command (G10L3).
- 1870 -
#6 TRU When the life count type is the duration specification type, and the life is counted every
second (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 6805 is set to 0):
0: Cutting time less than one second is discarded and is not counted.
1: Cutting time less than one second is rounded up and is counted as one second.
NOTE
If the life is counted every 0.1 second (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No.
6805 is set to 1), cutting time less than 0.1 second is always rounded
up and is counted as 0.1 second.
#7 TAD With tool change type D (bit 7 (M6E) of parameter No. 6801 is set to 1), when a block
specifying M06 contains no T command:
0: An alarm PS0153, “T-CODE NOT FOUND” is issued.
6810 Tool life management ignore number

This parameter sets the tool life management ignore number.
When the value specified in a T code exceeds the value set in this parameter, the value
obtained by subtracting the parameter-set value from the T code value is assumed to be
the tool group number for tool life management.
6811 Tool life count restart M code

[Valid data range] 0 to 127 (except 01, 02, 30, 98, and 99)
When 0 is specified, it is ignored.
When the life is specified by count, the tool change signal TLCH <Fn064.0> is output if
the life of at least one tool group has expired when the tool life count restart M code is
issued.
The T code (tool life management group command) specified after the tool life count
restart M code selects a tool whose life has not expired from a specified group, and the
next M06 command increments the tool life counter by one.
When the life is specified by duration, specifying the tool life count restart M code causes
nothing. When 0 is set in this parameter, the tool life count restart M code is invalid.
When the data of M code exceeds 127 values, set 0 in parameter No. 6811, and set the
value of M code in parameter No. 13221. The data range of parameter No. 13221 is from
0 to 255.
NOTE
- 1871 -
6813 Maximum number of groups in tool life management
NOTE
After this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off
then back on for the setting to become effective.

[Unit of data] Group
[Valid data range] 0, 8, 16 to 256
This parameter sets the maximum number of groups to be used for each path. As the
maximum number of groups, set a multiple of eight. When the tool life management
function is not used, 0 must be set. Set this parameter so that the total number of groups
in all paths does not exceed the total number of groups in the entire system (256 groups).
NOTE
When the power is turned on, all tool life management file data is
initialized. So, tool life management data must be set for all paths
that use tool life management.
6844 Remaining tool life (use count)

This parameter sets a remaining tool life (use count) used to output the tool life notice
signal TLCHB <Fn064.3> when the tool life is specified by use count. If a value greater
than the tool life value or 0 is set in this parameter, the tool life notice signal is not output.
6845 Remaining tool life (use duration)

[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] Not greater than the tool life value
This parameter sets the remaining tool life (use duration) used to output the tool life
notice signal TLCHB <Fn064.3> when the tool life is specified by use duration. If a value
greater than the tool life value or 0 is specified in this parameter, the tool life notice signal
is not output.
NOTE
When the life is counted every 0.1 second (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter
No. 6805 = 1), the parameter value is in 0.1-minute increments.
6846
Remaining tool number in a group

This parameter sets the remaining tool number in a group.
- 1872 -
When the remaining tool number in the group selected by the T code is smaller than or
equal to the value set in this parameter, the remaining tool number notice signal TLAL
<Fn154.0> is output. When this parameter is set to 0, the remaining tool number notice
signal is not output.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8132 TLF
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#0 TLF Tool life management is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
13221 M code for tool life count restart

[Valid data range] 0 to 255 (not including 01, 02, 30, 98, and 99)
When 0 is set, this parameter is ignored.
For the operation of an M code for tool life count restart, see the description of parameter
No. 6811.
This parameter is used when an M code for tool life count restart exceeds 127.
Set parameter No. 6811 to 0, and set the value of an M code in this parameter.
NOTE
13265 H code for using the tool length offset in tool life management

Usually, when H99 is specified, tool length offset is enabled by the H code of the tool
being used. By setting any H code in this parameter, the H code instead of H99 can be
used. If 0 is specified, H99 is assumed.
A value ranging from 0 to 9999 can be set.
NOTE
13266 D code for enabling cutter compensation in tool life management

- 1873 -
Usually in tool life management, specifying D99 allows the D code of the tool being used
to enable cutter compensation. By setting any D code in this parameter, the D code
instead of D99 can be used. If 0 is set, D99 is assumed.
The valid data range is 0 to 9999.
Alarm and message

PS0149 FORMAT ERROR IN G10L3 In registration (G10L3 to G11) of tool life management data,
an address other than Q1, Q2, P1, and P2 or an unusable
address was specified.
PS0150 ILLEGAL LIFE GROUP NUMBER The tool group number exceeded the maximum allowable
value. The tool group number (P after specification of G10
L3;) or the group number given by the tool life management
T code in a machining program.
PS0151 GROUP NOT FOUND AT LIFE DATA The tool group specified in a machining program is not set in
tool life management data.
PS0152 OVER MAXIMUM TOOL NUMBER The number of tools registered in one group exceeded the
maximum allowable registration tool number.
PS0153 T-CODE NOT FOUND In registration of tool life data, a block in which the T code
needs to be specified does not include the T code.
Alternatively, in tool exchange method D, M06 is specified
solely. Modify the program.
PS0154 NOT USING TOOL IN LIFE GROUP The H99 command, D99 command, or the H/D code set by
parameters Nos. 13265 and 13266 was specified when no
tool belonging to a group is used.
PS0155 ILLEGAL T-CODE COMMAND In the machining program, the T code that is present in the
block containing M06 does not correspond to the group
currently being used. Modify the program.
PS0156 P/L COMMAND NOT FOUND The P and L commands are not specified in the beginning of
a program for setting a tool group. Modify the program.
PS0157 TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS In registration of tool life management data, the group setting
command block counts of P (group number) and L (tool life)
exceeded the maximum group count.
PS0158 TOOL LIFE VALUE OUT OF RANGE The life value that is being set is too large. Change the
setting.
PS0159 ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE DATA Tool life management data is corrupted for some reason.
Register the tool data in the tool group or the tool data in the
group again by G10L3; or MDI input.
PS0430 TOOL LIFE PAIRS ZERO Tool life management group number parameter No. 6813 is
0.
PS0431 ILLEGAL T/R DATA OF TOOL LIFE The arbitrary group number (T) or remaining amount setting
(R) is invalid.
IO1104 OVER MAXIMUM TOOL LIFE PAIRS The maximum number of tool life management pairs is
exceeded. Modify the setting of the maximum number of tool
life management pairs in parameter No. 6813.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Tool life management
- 1874 -
B-64603EN-1/01 INDEX
NOTE
Volume 1 : Page 1 to 1022 / Volume 2 : P. 1023 to 1874 / Volume 3 : P. 1875 to 2803
INDEX
AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M
<Number> SERIES) / AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T
2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN / 3RD, 4TH SERIES) .................................................................2255
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN ......................677 AUXILIARY FUNCTION ........................................1318
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION 1998 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK.............................1331
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED (M SERIES) ....596 Auxiliary Function Output Block Reverse Movement
3-dimensional Rigid Tapping.....................................1529 for Manual Handle Retrace .....................................796
8-Level Data Protection Function ..............................2112 AUXILIARY FUNCTION OUTPUT IN MOVING
AXIS ......................................................................1345
<A> Auxiliary Function Output in Program Restart Function
About Differences among Pitch Error Compensation, ..................................................................................819
Straightness Compensation, and Inclinaiton AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY
Compensation (for Reference Purposes) ....................71 FUNCTION............................................................1318
Absolute multiple command ......................................2026 Axis Assignment Reset ................................................384
Absolute Position Detection...........................................88 AXIS CONTROL ............................................................1
Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation ............1524 AXIS IMMEDIATE STOP FUNCTION .....................354
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL ..1104 Axis Name Display of Pitch Error Compensation .........72
ACTIVE BLOCK CANCEL FUNCTION...................872 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL ..........................171
Actual Speed Display Axis Selection Signals ............2159 Axis Synchronous Control Torque Difference Alarm..186
ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT (T SERIES) 1422
Adding workpiece coordinate systems (G54.1 or G54)153 <B>
Additional alarm and operator message .....................2581 Backlash Compensation .................................................39
AI Advanced Preview Control (M Series) / AI Contour Balance adjustment ......................................................180
Control I / AI Contour Control II ...........................1072 BALANCE CUTTING (T SERIES) ..........................1207
Alarm and Message............................. 214,895,1714,2213 Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting
ALARM SIGNALS......................................................488 Feed Interpolation ..................................................1118
ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL ....................................229 Bi-directional Pitch Error Compensation .......................61
Approach for Each Arbitrary Axis in Program Restart 822
Arbitrary Gear Ratio for Master Axis in Electronic Gear <C>
Box Automatic Phase Synchronization ...................268 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) / MULTIPLE
Arbitrary Reference Position Setting Function ..........1480 REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES).....1954
Arbitrary Speed Threading...........................................921 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING.........................1937
Arbitrary speed threading.............................................921 Canned Cycle for Drilling..........................................1937
Arbitrary Spindle Position Phase Synchronization CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING
Function..................................................................1617 MACHINE)............................................................1971
Automatic acceleration/deceleration ..........................1104 Caution................................................................ 215,2626
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration ........................1104 Cautions on Multi-path Control .................................1176
Automatic Alteration of Tool Position Compensation (T CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING.........2068
Function) ................................................................1780 Change of password ...................................................2205
Automatic coordinate system setting ...........................154 Change Tolerance in Smart Tolerance Control Mode 1013
Automatic Corner Override........................................1052 Changing the Display Language by PMC Signals .....2141
AUTOMATIC OPERATION ......................................746 Chattering Prevention of "Direct Input of Offset Value
Automatic Phase Synchronization for flexible Measured B" (T Series) .........................................2313
synchronization Control ...........................................316 Checking input data ...................................................2589
AUTOMATIC REFERENCE POSITION RETURN Checking the Stored Stroke during the Time from
AND RETURN FROM THE REFERENCE Power–on to the Reference Position Establishment .465
POSITION................................................................670 Chuck and Tail Stock Barrier (T Series) ......................476
Automatic Slave Axis Parameter Setting .....................196 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION .................................902
AUTOMATIC STEEING OF FANUC Circular Threading .......................................................920
RECOMMENDATION SETTING PARAMETER CNC Data Display, Setup, and Input/Output .............1173
................................................................................2778 CNC READY SIGNALS .............................................445
CNC Screen Dual Display .........................................2144
CNC STATUS NOTIFICATION FUNCTION..........2514
i-1
INDEX B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
COMBINATION OF SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL Delay time for operation history saving.....................2602

AND AI CONTOUR CONTROL ..........................1275 Detect Trouble ...........................................................2629
Combination with other functions................................190 Diagnosis Data .................................................... 214,1536
Command Format.......................................................1539 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION .........................................2544
Commands for Feed per Minute and Feed per Diagnosis Number......................................................2581
Revolution ..............................................................1523 Direct Assignment Mode of Flexible Path Axis
Communication Retry Monitoring Function ..............2549 Assignment...............................................................377
Compact-Type MDI Key Input Function ...................2220 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS
COMPENSATION VALUE INPUT..........................2294 PROGRAMMING (T SERIES) .............................2070
Composite Control .....................................................1216 Direct input of coordinate system shift (T series) ........159
Concurrent Use of Polygon Turning and Polygon Direct Input of Offset Value Measured B (T Series)..2295
Turning with Two Spindles ......................................993 Direct Input of Tool Offset Value Measured (T Series)
Connection Among Spindle, Spindle Motor, and ................................................................................2294
Position Coder ........................................................1518 DIRECT OPERATION BY C LANGUAGE
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL ...........1410 EXECUTOR.............................................................890
Contents of E-mail .....................................................2514 DIRECT OPERATION BY PERSONAL COMPUTER
Continuous High-Speed Skip Function ......................2276 FUNCTION..............................................................889
Continuous Threading ..................................................919 Display the CNC Information ....................................2606
Controlled Axes Detach .................................................13 DISPLAY/SET...........................................................2091
CONTROLLED AXIS.....................................................1 DISPLAY/SET/EDIT ................................................2091
Controlling Machine Remote Diagnosis function from DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
PMC .......................................................................2481 ..................................................................................692
Cooperation with CNC screen Web server function ..2516 Distance coded linear scale interface and linear scale
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION ....................1997 with distance-coded reference marks (serial) ...........182
Corner Control ...........................................................1135 DNC OPERATION......................................................886
CORRESPONDENCE OF ROTARY SCALE Dry Run........................................................................758
WITHOUT ROTARY DATA ..................................721 DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK TURNING MODE /
Cs Contour Control ....................................................1456 COMPENSATION CLAMP ...................................302
Cs CONTOUR CONTROL........................................1456 Dwell/Auxiliary Function Time Override Function...1056
Cs Contour Control Axis Coordinate Establishment..1482
Cs Contour Control Manual High-Speed Reference <E>
Position Return .......................................................1489 Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signals 161
Cs Contour Control Torque Limit Skip......................1477 Each tool data screen .................................................1819
CUSTOM MACRO....................................................1894 EDIT ..........................................................................2217
Custom Macro............................................................1894 Electronic Gear Box (FSSB type) ................................294
Custom Macro Variable Name Expansion 31 Characters Electronic Gear Box (M Series) ...................................242
................................................................................2160 ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX (M SERIES) ..................242
Customization of tool management data display........1818 Electronic Gear Box Automatic Phase Synchronization
Cutter Compensation (M Series) and Tool Nose Radius ..................................................................................261
Compensation (T Series) .......................................1835 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION ...................2461
Cutting Feedrate Clamp .............................................1026 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA
CYCLE START/FEED HOLD ....................................746 ETHERNET CARD ...............................................2461
Cylindrical Interpolation ..............................................962 Embedded Macro .......................................................1924
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ..........................962 EMERGENCY STOP ..................................................443
Cylindrical Interpolation by Plane Distance Command962 Energy Saving Level Selecting Function ...................2183
Cylindrical Interpolation Cutting Point Compensation 962 Environment for Making Trouble Diagnosis Message2582
ERROR COMPENSATION ..........................................31
<D> EXACT STOP / EXACT STOP MODE / TAPPING
Data Output ................................................................2631 MODE / CUTTING MODE ....................................878
DATA TRANSFER BETWEEN PMC AND DCSPMC Example of setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet function ...2465
................................................................................2458 Example of setting the FTP file transfer function ......2469
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING / POCKET Example of Usage ........................................................171
CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT Execution methods.....................................................2499
PROGRAMMING..................................................1875 Extended Bi-directional Pitch Error Compensation .......67
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND EXTENDED EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT
NOTE ........................................................................s-1 SHIFT.....................................................................2428
i-2
NOTE
EXTENDED FUNCTION OF THE DISTANCE Guidance Table for Machine Alarm Diagnosis..........2582
CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE ................713
EXTENDED SPINDLE NAME.................................1410 <H>
Extended Tool Selection Function .............................1775 HANDLE-SYNCHRONOUS FEED ...........................586
EXTENSION OF MAXIMUM SHIFT VALUE FOR HELICAL INTERPOLATION ....................................958
EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT...2431 HIGH PRECISION OSCILLATION FUNCTION ......386
Extension of the Manual Handle Retrace Function......801 HIGH-PRECISION SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL..1739
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT ......................................2415 HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE ......................1335
External Deceleration.................................................1061 High-Speed Position Switch ..........................................26
EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL .....................2245 High-speed Program Check Function ..........................763
EXTERNAL KEY INPUT.........................................2437 HIGH-SPEED PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ..........2229
External Touch Panel Interface ..................................2123 High-speed Skip Signal..............................................2272
EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH ....2433 Hob Command by Flexible Synchronization Control ..341
Hypothetical Cs Axis Control ....................................1250
<F>
Fan Motor Abnormality Monitoring Function ...........2548 <I>
FAN MOTOR ABNORMALITY MONITORING I/O Link βi MANUAL HANDLE INTERFACE .........634
FUNCTION AND COMMUNICATION RETRY Improvement of Quick program restart for
MONITORING FUNCTION .................................2548 non-machining program ...........................................846
FANUC RECOMMENDATION SETTING In Case of a Linear Axis ..............................................737
PARAMETER........................................................2778 In the Case of a Rotary Axis A Type ...........................731
FANUC RECOMMENDATION SETTING In the Case of a Rotary Axis B Type whose Movable
PARAMETER (FIXED TYPE)..............................2780 Range is over One Rotation.....................................729
FANUC RECOMMENDATION SETTING In the Case of a Rotary Axis B Type whose Movable
PARAMETER (INITIALIZED TYPE).................2785 Range is under One Rotation...................................723
Feed Forward in Rapid Traverse ................................1141 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION ...............................1888
Feed per Minute .........................................................1026 Inclinaiton Compensation ..............................................58
Feed per Revolution/Manual Feed per Revolution.....1031 Increment System.............................................................7
FEEDRATE CONTROL............................................1023 Incremental multiple command..................................2028
FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M SERIES)................1978
DECELERATION CONTROL ..............................1023 Indirect Axis Address Command ...............................1919
Feedrate override........................................................1042 IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)
FLEXIBLE PATH AXIS ASSIGNMENT...................357 (M SERIES) ...........................................................1970
FLEXIBLE SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL ........305 Inner corner automatic override (G62).......................1052
Flexible Synchronization Control ................................305 In-position check........................................................1136
Follow-up .......................................................................20 IN-POSITION CHECK DISABLE REFERENCE
FS10/11 Format Command ........................................1527 POSITION RETURN...............................................680
FSSB automatic setting procedure ...............................117 In-position check disable signal .................................1137
FSSB High-speed Rigid Tapping ...............................1573 In-position check independently of feed/rapid traverse
FSSB Setting ................................................................102 ................................................................................1139
FSSB setting screen......................................................109 In-position check signal .............................................1135
FUNCTION FOR LOADER CONTROL ..................1306 Input Guidance Data ..................................................2586
FUNCTION OF DECELERATION STOP IN CASE Input of customize data with the decimal point .........1818
OF POWER FAILURE ...........................................303 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA .....................................2235
Inputting data in the sheet for multi-languages ..........2593
<G> Install .........................................................................2582
G Code List in the Lathe System ...............................1877 INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC..............2643
G Code List in the Machining Center System............1880 INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH PATH (T
G CODE PREVENTING BUFFERING ....................2087 SERIES) .................................................................1197
G CODE SYSTEM ....................................................1877 Internal circular cutting feedrate change....................1054
GENERAL PURPOSE RETRACT............................1017 Inter-path Flexible Synchronization Control................327
General specifications of the tilted working plane Interpolated Straightness Compensation ........................52
indexing..................................................................2008 Interpolated Straightness Compensation 3072 Points ....56
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...............s-2 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION .................................896
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION Interpolation Type Pitch Error Compensation ...............69
DEVELOPMENT......................................................s-8 Interruption Type Custom Macro...............................1921
i-3
NOTE
Inverse Time Feed (M Series) ....................................1037 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION

Investigation procedure of cause of alarm occurrence2558 FUNCTION..............................................................515
MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT (M
<J> SERIES) ...................................................................521
JERK CONTROL (M SERIES) .................................1161 MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER...........2066
Jog and Handle Simultaneous Mode ............................556 Maintenance.................................................................182
JOG FEED/INCREMENTAL FEED ...........................538 MAINTENANCE ......................................................2530
Jump from CNC guidance table to MTB’s guidance MAINTENANCE FUNCTION .................................2596
table ........................................................................2591 MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED
ETHERNET FUNCTION ......................................2534
<L> Making a file to input trouble diagnosis messages.....2583
Linear Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Making a memory card format file ............................2590
Interpolation ...........................................................1116 Making Messages for Multi-languages ......................2592
LINEAR INTERPOLATION.......................................901 Making sheets for multi-languages ............................2592
LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G28, G30, G53)...........999 Making Trouble Diagnosis Messages ........................2586
LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED MALFUNCTION PREVENT FUNCTIONS...............524
REFERENCE MARKS (SERIAL)..........................705 MANUAL 2ND/3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION
LIST OF ADDRESSES .............................................2643 RETURN FUNCTION............................................741
LIST OF FUNCTIONS INCLUDE ADDRESS P IN MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF ...............................806
THE ARGUMENT OF G CODE ..........................2773 MANUAL HANDLE FEED........................................546
LIST OF FUNCTIONS INCLUDE ADDRESS P IN MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPT ............................561
THE ARGUMENT OF M AND S CODE.............2776 Manual Handle Retrace................................................775
LIST OF FUNCTIONS INCLUDE ADDRESS P IN Manual Handle Retrace Function for Multi-path .........798
THE PROGRAM COMMAND..............................2773 Manual Interruption of 3-dimensional Coordinate
LIST OF FUNCTIONS USING PMC SIGNALS System Conversion...................................................567
OTHER THAN G/F ADDRESS............................2772 MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN............858
LIST OF FUNCTIONS USING PMC SIGNALS MANUAL LINEAR/CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
OTHER THAN G/F ADDRESS.............................2772 ..................................................................................569
LIST OF SIGNALS ...................................................2685 MANUAL NUMERIC COMMAND...........................628
List of Signals (In Order of Addresses)......................2745 MANUAL OPERATION.............................................538
List of Signals (In Order of Functions) ......................2685 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN.........640
List of Signals (In Order of Symbols) ........................2717 M-CODE PROTECT FUNCTION ............................1341
LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS.....................................2789 MDI Key Setting........................................................2219
Local Coordinate System .............................................166 MEASUREMENT .....................................................2254
LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET MEMORY COMMON TO PATHS...........................1290
FUNCTION............................................................2538 Memory Protection Keys ...........................................2217
Look-Ahead Smooth Bell-Shaped Memory Protection Signal for CNC Parameter..........2218
Acceleration/Deceleration before Interpolation (M Method of Using Heidenhain Rotary Scale RCN223,
Series).....................................................................1164 723 and 220 ..............................................................733
Methods of alarm recovery by synchronization error
<M> check ........................................................................185
M CODE GROUPING FUNCTION..........................1338 Mirror Image..................................................................17
M29 and G84/G74 are specified in the same block....1557 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET (T
M29 and G84/G88 are specified in the same block....1567 SERIES) .................................................................1976
MACHINE ALARM DIAGNOSIS............................2580 MODE SELECTION ...................................................495
Machine Coordinate System ........................................145 Mode selection ...........................................................2493
Machine Lock ..............................................................754 MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING screen......2201
Machine State History CNC Data Screen ..................2620 Monitoring by CNC Software ....................................2597
Machine State History List Screen.............................2614 Monitoring by Ladder Program .................................2598
Machine State History Operation History Screen ......2621 Monitoring of PMC signals........................................2608
Machine state history saving response signal Multi Path Display .....................................................2221
(MSUSAS) .............................................................2603 MULTI PATH DISPLAY AND EDIT ......................2221
Machine state history screen ......................................2613 MULTI-PATH CONTROL........................................1167
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION ....2596 Multi-path Functions..................................................1174
Machine state monitoring screen................................2607 Multiple Axis Command Skip Function ....................2272
i-4
NOTE
Multiple Command of Tilted Working Plane Indexing Parameters..................................................................2212

................................................................................2026 Parameters Related to Servo ..........................................83
MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF
................................................................................1332 REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS............................1887
Multi-Sensor Unit.......................................................2602 PATH SELECTION/DISPLAY OF OPTIONAL PATH
MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL..................................1491 NAMES..................................................................1294
Multi-Spindle Control ................................................1529 PATH SINGLE BLOCK CHECK FUNCTION ........1293
Multi-step Skip...........................................................2279 PATH SPINDLE CONTROL ....................................1281
PATTERN DATA INPUT .........................................2072
<N> Periodic Maintenance Screen.....................................2164
Name of Axes...................................................................3 PERIPHERAL AXIS CONTROL................................403
NANO SMOOTHING ...............................................1000 PHASE SYNCHRONIZATION FOR
NC DATA OUTPUT FUNCTION.............................2251 SERVO/SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL1733
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (M SERIES) .....995 PMC Axis Control .....................................................2316
Notes ..........................................................................1594 PMC AXIS CONTROL .............................................2316
Notes on interface with the PMC ...............................1549 PMC Axis Status Display Function ...........................2410
Notice.........................................................................2594 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION ..................................2316
Notification of the modification of setting .................2206 PMC signal.................................................................2601
PMC WINDOW PARAMETER WRITE ..................2450
<O> POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION .............959
Offset..........................................................................1765 Polygon Turning ..........................................................967
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL ..................................2443 POLYGON TURNING................................................967
One-digit F Code Feed (M Series) .............................1034 Polygon Turning with Two Spindles ...........................975
Operating Machine Remote Diagnosis screen............2485 Position Control Loop Gain Parameter Switching .....1542
Operation of the CNC screen Web server function ....2509 Position Switch ..............................................................24
Operation on the FOCAS2/Ethernet setting screen ....2463 POSITIONING ............................................................896
Operation on the FTP file transfer setting screen .......2466 Positioning by Optimum Accelerations .....................1067
Operation on the Setting screen ........................2475,2478 Power Consumption Monitor .....................................2168
OPERATOR ERROR PREVENT FUNCTIONS.........526 PREFACE .................................................................... p-1
Optimum Acceleration/Deceleration for Rigid Tapping PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION ........................443
................................................................................1142 Procedure of reference position establishment.............177
Optimum Torque Acceleration/Deceleration .............1121 Procedure to Start-Up...................................................174
OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER PROGRAM COMMAND..........................................1875
ROUNDING (M SERIES) ....................................2067 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION ..............................1885
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP/ADDITION OF PROGRAM RESTART ...............................................810
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP ......................................807 Programmable rapid traverse overlap.........................1109
Outline...................................................... 2554,2580,2627 Protection of various tool information items with the
Output CNC Information ...........................................2622 KEY signal .............................................................1818
Output File Format.....................................................2634
Outputting States of Individual Axes ...........................375 <Q>
Outputting the Movement State of an Axis ....................16 QUICK PROGRAM RESTART..................................824
Override ............................................................1038,1525 Quick program restart for multi path system................841
Override cancel ..........................................................1050
OVERTRAVEL CHECK.............................................446 <R>
Overtravel Signals........................................................446 Rapid Traverse Acceleration/deceleration before
Overview......................................... 2200,2488,2506,2514 Interpolation ...........................................................1156
OVERVIEW ..............................................................2521 Rapid Traverse Bell-shaped Acceleration/Deceleration
Overview....................................................................2596 ................................................................................1114
Rapid traverse block overlap......................................1108
<P> Rapid Traverse Overlap in Threading Cycle................954
Parameter .............................................. 74,200,1576,2578 Rapid traverse override ..............................................1038
Parameter (No. 1620) Write .......................................2456 Rapid Traverse Rate...................................................1024
Parameter (No. 1825, No. 1826) Write ......................2457 Reference point setting with mechanical stopper.........182
Parameter (No. 2092, Bit 0 of No. 8162) Write .........2455 REFERENCE POINT SETTING WITH
Parameter Check Sum Function .................................2128 MECHANICAL STOPPER .....................................681
Parameter Write .........................................................2450
i-5
NOTE
REFERENCE POINT SETTING WITH Selection of the tool length offset value.......................604
MECHANICAL STOPPER BY GRID METHOD..687 Sequence when Trouble Occurs.................................2629
Reference Position Established by the G00 Command 713 SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL...............1372
Reference Position Establishment ................................177 Servo off/Mechanical Handle Feed................................22
Reference position establishment.................................180 SERVO WARNING INTERFACE............................2544
REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT ..........640 SERVO/SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL...1717
Reference Position Establishment by Jog Feed............717 Servo/Spindle Synchronous Control ..........................1717
Reference Position Return..........................................1527 Servo/Spindle Synchronous Control (FSSB Type) ....1728
REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITHOUT DOG SERVO/SPINDLE WAVEFORM DATA OUTPUT
..................................................................................662 FUNCTION............................................................2627
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT SETTING...................................................................2527
FUNCTION..............................................................720 Setting ........................................................................2601
Registration and protection parameters, C Language SETTING EACH AXIS...................................................3
Executor programs, or ladder programs. ...............2204 Setting Method by Rotary Axis Type and Movable
Related NC parameter ................................................2520 Range .......................................................................722
RELATED NC PARAMETER ..................................2531 Setting of axis name display ..........................................73
Related NC parameters ..............................................2476 Setting of CNC Status Notification function..............2517
Related parameters .......................... 2468,2474,2505,2513 SETTING OF FEEDBACK PULSES FOR SPINDLE
Related signals ...........................................................2512 FEEDBACK PULSES...........................................1751
Re-machining thread ....................................................933 Setting of grid position.................................................178
RESET AND REWIND ...............................................750 Setting of spindle position/standby position display ..1818
RESOLUTION OF SPINDLE SPEED COMMAND 1753 Setting of Synchronous Axes .......................................175
RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET.......2532 Setting of the CNC Screen Display Function.............2474
Restriction ..................................................................2634 Setting of the CNC Screen Web Server Function ......2506
Restriction of saving ..................................................2599 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function.................2462
Restrictions.................................................................2579 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function..................2490
Restrictions of Tilted Working Plane Indexing..........2061 Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function..................2465
RETRACE (M SERIES) ..............................................862 Setting of the Machine Remote Diagnosis package ...2476
RETRACTION FOR 3-DIMENSIONAL RIGID Setting of the Modbus/TCP Server Function .............2521
TAPPING .................................................................891 Setting of the Unsolicited Messaging Function..........2488
RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING ......................879 Setting of the WEB SERVER function......................2508
RIGID TAPPING.......................................................1517 Setting on the CNC screen .........................................2495
RIGID TAPPING BY MANUAL HANDLE...............593 Setting on the personal computer ...............................2499
Rigid Tapping Specification.......................................1522 Setting up DHCP........................................................2472
Rigid Tapping with Servo Motor ...............................1687 Setting up DNS ..........................................................2471
Rigid Tapping with Spindle of Another Path .............1530 Setting Up the DNS/DHCP Function.........................2471
Rotary Axis Roll-Over .................................................168 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET
RS232C INTERFACE ...............................................2235 FUNCTION............................................................2462
Run Hour and Parts Count Display ............................2091 SETTINGS RELATED TO SERVO-CONTROLLED
AXES .........................................................................83
<S> SETTINGS RELATED WITH COORDINATE
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...........................................s-1 SYSTEMS................................................................145
Sampling ....................................................................2628 Signal ......................................................... 197,1543,2579
Saving the Machine State...........................................2598 Signal-based Servo EGB Synchronous Control ...........286
SCALING ..................................................................1988 Signals........................................................................2212
Screen Erasure Function and Automatic Screen Erasure Signals for the rigid tapping function.........................1543
Function..................................................................2153 Signals related to gear switching................................1545
Screen Hard Copy Function .......................................2155 Signals related to S code output .................................1544
Screen Switching at Path Switching...........................2153 Signals related to the addition of multi-spindle control1546
Screen Switching by Mode ........................................2150 SIMPLE SPINDLE ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX .....1743
Second feedrate override............................................1045 Simple Straightness Compensation ................................48
Second Geometry Tool Offset (T Series)...................1851 Simultaneous Displaying Axis Number Expansion
Selection of a tool life count period ...........................1818 Function..................................................................2192
Selection of display axis on the Current Position Screen Simultaneous Multi Path Program Editing.................2226
................................................................................2166 Single Block.................................................................760
Selection of parameters ..............................................2207 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING .......................898
i-6
NOTE
Skip Function .............................................................2264 Stored stroke limit range switching function by signal 469
SKIP FUNCTION ......................................................2264 Straightness Compensation ............................................44
Skip Function for EGB Axis (M Series) ......................273 Straightness Compensation at 128 Points ......................50
Skip Function for Flexible Synchronization Control ...336 Stroke Limit Area Changing Function .........................468
SMART TOLERANCE CONTROL..........................1007 Stroke Limit External Setting.......................................467
Smooth Backlash............................................................41 Structure of the file to input trouble diagnosis messages
Software Operator's Panel ..........................................2096 ................................................................................2584
Specifying G84/G74 for rigid tapping by parameters 1561 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL ..................................1255
Specifying G84/G88 for rigid tapping by parameters 1569 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL A (WITH SPEED
Specifying the Rotation Axis .........................................10 CONTROL)............................................................1271
Speed Arrival Signals and Speed Zero Signals ..........1697 Suppress Motion of Quick Program Restart.................838
Speed Command Extension in Least Input Increments C SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED
................................................................................1101 ETHERNET DEVICES .........................................2532
Speed Control with Change of Acceleration on Each Switching the Axis Name of an Axis Type Alarm.....2164
Axis (M Series) ......................................................1161 Synchronization Error Check.......................................185
Speed Display Function of a Milling Tool with Servo Synchronization error check ........................................185
Motor......................................................................2148 Synchronization Error Compensation ..........................188
Speed-up of Spindle Indexing Function .....................1684 Synchronization Establishment ....................................183
Speed-up of Spindle Stop Motion for Spindle Control Synchronization Positional Difference Detection
with Servo Motor....................................................1711 Diagnosis Display and Signal Output in Flexible
SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUT .................................1368 Synchronization........................................................325
SPINDLE COMMAND SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL Synchronous Control..................................................1211
................................................................................1632 SYNCHRONOUS, COMPOSITE, AND
SPINDLE COMMAND SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL BY PROGRAM
INDEPENDENT PITCH ERROR COMMAND...........................................................1272
COMPENSATION FUNCTION............................1644 SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE CONTROL...........1210
SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO MOTOR .......1659
Spindle Control with Servo Motor .............................1660 <T>
Spindle Control with Servo Motor (Speed Control)...1698 Table horizontal direction handle feed.........................608
Spindle Indexing Function .........................................1680 Table Horizontal Direction Handle Feed/Table
SPINDLE ORIENTATION .......................................1623 Horizontal Direction JOG Feed/Table Horizontal
SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC.......1404 Direction Incremental Feed ......................................606
Spindle Output Control with PMC .............................1696 Table horizontal direction JOG feed/table horizontal
SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING............................1629 direction incremental feed ........................................609
SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES) .....................1424 Table vertical direction handle feed.............................605
SPINDLE REVOLUTION NUMBER HISTORY Table Vertical Direction Handle Feed/Table Vertical
FUNCTION............................................................1715 Direction JOG Feed/ Table Vertical Direction
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT....................................1357 Incremental Feed ......................................................605
SPINDLE SPEED COMMAND CLAMP..................1748 Table vertical direction JOG feed/table vertical
SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL...................................1377 direction incremental feed ........................................606
SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION (T TANDEM CONTROL.................................................217
SERIES) .................................................................1648 Temporary Absolute Coordinate Setting......................141
SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION .................................1356 TESTING A PROGRAM.............................................754
SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT)1356 Threading .....................................................................906
SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL .................1598 THREADING ..............................................................906
Spindle Synchronous Control for Spindle Control with Threading Cycle Retract ..............................................911
Servo Motor............................................................1700 Threading cycle retract (canned cycle) ........................912
SPINDLE WARNING INTERFACE ........................2547 Threading cycle retract (multiple repetitive canned
START LOCK / INTERLOCK....................................488 cycle)........................................................................915
STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL.......................................502 Threading, Feed per Revolution, and Constant Surface
Stored Pitch Error Compensation...................................31 Speed Control.........................................................1693
Stored Pitch Error Compensation Total Value Input Tilted Working Plane Indexing ..................................2005
function.......................................................................75 TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING (M SERIES)
Stored Stroke Check 1..................................................448 ................................................................................2005
Stored Stroke Check 1 Area Expansion .......................455 Tilted working plane indexing based on Eulerian angle
Stored Stroke Check 2, 3..............................................458 ................................................................................2007
i-7
NOTE
Tilted working plane indexing based on projection Translating Data Used with the Former Series (Series 0i
angles......................................................................2015 /0i Mate-B/C, Series 16i /18i /21i-B) ....................2594
Tilted working plane indexing based on roll-pitch-yaw TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS...........................................2554
................................................................................2011 Trouble diagnosis graphic screen...............................2571
Tilted working plane indexing based on three points.2012 Trouble diagnosis guidance screen ............................2558
Tilted working plane indexing based on two vectors .2014 Trouble diagnosis monitor screen ..............................2560
Tilted working plane indexing by tool axis direction.2017 Trouble forecast level setting screen..........................2575
Tilted Working Plane Indexing in Tool Length
Compensation.........................................................2042 <U>
Timing Charts for Rigid Tapping Specification .........1552 U-axis Control (M Series)............................................277
Timing of the M code for unclamping .......................1571 UNEXPECTED DISTURBANCE TORQUE
Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode .........................1571 DETECTION FUNCTION ......................................505
Title Display Function in Initial Screen .....................2214 Uninstall.....................................................................2583
Tool Axis Direction Control ......................................2030 Unregistration and canceling protection of parameters,
Tool axis direction control .........................................2030 C Language Executor programs, or ladder programs
Tool axis direction handle feed ....................................598 ................................................................................2206
Tool Axis Direction Handle Feed/Tool Axis Direction Update of Tool Compensation value for Tool Retract
JOG Feed/Tool Axis Direction Incremental Feed ....598 and Recover..............................................................854
Tool axis direction JOG feed/tool axis direction
incremental feed .......................................................599 <V>
Tool axis right-angle direction handle feed..................601 Variable Lead Threading .............................................919
Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction Handle Feed/Tool VRDY OFF ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL ...................504
Axis Right-Angle Direction JOG Feed/Tool Axis
Right-Angle Direction Incremental Feed .................599 <W>
Tool axis right-angle direction JOG feed/tool axis WAITING FUNCTION BY SPECIFYING START
right-angle direction incremental feed......................602 POINT ....................................................................1296
Tool center point retention type tool axis direction WAITING M CODES................................................1185
control ....................................................................2038 WAITING M CODES OF HIGH-SPEED TYPE ......1190
TOOL COMPENSATION .........................................1835 Warning Function Against Modification of Setting...2200
Tool Compensation Memory .....................................1785 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO
TOOL FUNCTIONS..................................................1763 HANDLING.............................................................. s-5
TOOL FUNCTIONS OF LATHE SYSTEM .............1763 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO
TOOL FUNCTIONS OF MACHINING CENTER PROGRAMMING..................................................... s-3
SYSTEM ................................................................1784 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY
Tool Geometry Offset and Tool Wear Offset.............1764 MAINTENANCE...................................................... s-9
Tool Length Compensation (M Series) ......................1842 WARNINGS RELATED TO EDIT SCREENS FOR
Tool Length Compensation Shift Types (M Series)...1846 TOUCH PANEL ....................................................... s-7
TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)....2254 WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS............. s-7
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT ..................................1856 Waveform Data ..........................................................2627
Tool Management Extension Function ......................1818 When M29 is specified before G84/G74....................1553
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION ......................1789 When M29 is specified before G84/G88....................1565
Tool Management Function .......................................1789 With Multi-Sensor Unit..............................................2609
Tool Management Function Oversize Tools Support.1826 Workpiece coordinate system ......................................148
Tool Offset .................................................................1764 Workpiece coordinate system preset............................151
TOOL RETRACT AND RECOVER ...........................848 Workpiece coordinate system shift (T series) ..............154
Tool tip center rotation handle feed .............................603 Workpiece Coordinate System/Addition of Workpiece
Tool Tip Center Rotation Handle Feed/Tool Tip Center Coordinate System Pair ............................................148
Rotation JOG Feed/ Tool Tip Center Rotation
Incremental Feed ......................................................602
Tool tip center rotation JOG feed/tool tip center rotation
incremental feed .......................................................604
Torque Limit Skip Function.......................................2287
Total life time display for tools of the same type.......1819
Touch Panel Check Signal .........................................2139
Touch Panel Control ..................................................2118
i-8
B-64603EN-1/01 REVISION RECORD
REVISION RECORD
Edition Date Contents
01 Sep., 2014
r-1
B-64603EN-1/01
* B- 6 4 6 0 3 EN- 1 / 0 1 V2 *

B-64603en-1 - 01 (v3) - Vol2 - 0if Connection Manual (Function)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B-64603en-1 - 01 (v3) - Vol2 - 0if Connection Manual (Function)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B-64603en-1 - 01 (v3) - Vol2 - 0if Connection Manual (Function)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FANUC Series 0+-MODEL F

CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE.........................................................................s-1

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING

WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS

WARNINGS RELATED TO EDIT SCREENS FOR TOUCH PANEL

On the virtual machine operator panel screen, never support safety-related

GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT

1 Be careful enough if you write an identical NC data, an identical PMC data or a

Data List Table

List Table of Applications and Network Functions

WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

Model name Abbreviation

CNC PMC Machine tool

[Example of controlling three path using one PMC]

CNC G0000~ X000~

Path 1 F0000~ Y000~

[Example of controlling multipath CNC using PMC system]

CNC Signal PMC

- Standard parameter setting tables

(A) Length and angle parameters (type 1)

(B) Length and angle parameters (type 2)

(C) Velocity and angular velocity parameters

(D) Acceleration and angular acceleration parameters

- Parameters other than the bit-type parameters above

1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis

Related manuals of Series 0i- MODEL F

Table 1 Related manuals

Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR αi/βi series

Table 2 Related manuals

Notes on various kinds of data

1.4.3 FSSB Setting ........................................................................................................102

1.11 FUNCTION OF DECELERATION STOP IN CASE OF POWER

3.5 HANDLE-SYNCHRONOUS FEED ............................................................ 586

4 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT ..................................... 640

6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION ............................................................ 896

6.5.1 Threading .............................................................................................................906

7 FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION

7.2 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL...................................... 1104

8 MULTI-PATH CONTROL .................................................................. 1167

10.2 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK................................................................ 1331

13 PROGRAM COMMAND .................................................................... 1875

14.2 EDIT ........................................................................................................ 2217

17 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION............................................................. 2316

18.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD....... 2461

19.3.1 Fan Motor Abnormality Monitoring Function ...................................................2548

20 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION............................................................. 2596

B LIST OF FUNCTIONS USING PMC SIGNALS OTHER THAN G/F

7.1 FEEDRATE CONTROL ................................................................................................................1023

7.1 FEEDRATE CONTROL

7.1.1 Rapid Traverse Rate

[Input type] Parameter input

#1 LRP Positioning (G00)

#4 RF0 When cutting feedrate override is 0% during rapid traverse,

#6 RDR Dry run for rapid traverse command

1% step rapid traverse override signals HROV0 to HROV6<Gn096.0 to 6>

Gn096 HROV HROV6 HROV5 HROV4 HROV3 HROV2 HROV1 *HROV0

Gn352 FHRO7 FHRO6 FHRO5 FHRO4 FHRO3 FHRO2 FHRO1 FHRO0

Gn353 FHROV FHRO9 FHRO8